ECS4510-Series CLI-R03 0904

ECS4510-28T/P/F
ECS4510-28F-DC CLI Reference Guide

ECS4510-52T/P
28/52-Port Layer 2+
Stackable GE Switch
Software Release v1.5.2.36
www.edge-core.com
CLI Reference Guide
ECS4510-28T Stackable GE Switch

Layer 2+ Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch
with 24 10/100/1000BASE-T (RJ-45) Ports,
2 10-Gigabit SFP+ Ports,
and Optional Module with 2 10-Gigabit SFP+ Ports
ECS4510-28F-DC Stackable GE Switch

Layer 2+ Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Fiber Switch
with 22 SFP Ports,
2 10/100/1000BASE-T (RJ-45/SFP) Ports,
ECS4510-28P Stackable GE PoE Switch

Layer 2+ Stackable Gigabit Ethernet PoE Switch
ECS4510-28F Stackable GE Fiber Switch

Layer 2+ Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Fiber Switch
with 22 SFP Ports,
2 10/100/1000BASE-T (RJ-45/SFP) Ports,
ECS4510-52T Stackable GE Switch

Layer 2+ Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch
ECS4510-52P Stackable GE PoE Switch

Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet PoE Switch
E092020-CS-R03
150200000989A
How to Use This Guide
This guide includes detailed information on the switch software, including how to
operate and use the management functions of the switch. To deploy this switch
effectively and ensure trouble-free operation, you should first read the relevant
sections in this guide so that you are familiar with all of its software features.
Who Should Read This This guide is for network administrators who are responsible for operating and
Guide? maintaining network equipment. The guide assumes a basic working knowledge of
LANs (Local Area Networks), the Internet Protocol (IP), and Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
How This Guide is This guide describes the switch’s command line interface (CLI). For more detailed
Organized information on the switch’s key features or information about the web browser
management interface refer to the Web Management Guide.
The guide includes these sections:
◆ Section I “Getting Started” — Includes information on initial configuration.
◆ Section II “Command Line Interface” — Includes all management options

available through the CLI.
◆ Section III “Appendices” — Includes information on troubleshooting switch

management access.
Related This guide focuses on switch software configuration through the CLI.
Documentation
For information on how to manage the switch through the Web management
interface, see the following guide:
Web Management Guide
For information on how to install the switch, see the following guide:
Installation Guide
For all safety information and regulatory statements, see the following documents:
Quick Start Guide

Safety and Regulatory Information
– 3 –
How to Use This Guide
Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this guide to show information:
Note: Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features

or instructions.
Caution: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data, or damage
the system or equipment.
Warning: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury.
Documentation This documentation is provided for general information purposes only. If any
Notice product feature details in this documentation conflict with the product datasheet,
refer to the datasheet for the latest information.
Revision History This section summarizes the changes in each revision of this guide.
September 2020 Revision

This is the third version of this guide. This guide is valid for software release
v1.5.2.36. It contains the following changes:
◆ Corrected software release version.
February 2019 Revision

This is the second version of this guide. This guide is valid for software release
v1.6.1.1. It contains the following changes:
◆ Added documentation notice.
October 2014 Revision

This is the first version of this guide. This guide is valid for software release v1.6.1.1.
– 4 –
Contents
How to Use This Guide 3
Contents 5
Figures 39
Tables 41
Section I Getting Started 47
1 Initial Switch Configuration 49

Connecting to the Switch 49
Configuration Options 49
Connecting to the Console Port 50
Logging Onto the Command Line Interface 51
Setting Passwords 51
Remote Connections 52
Stack Operations 53
Selecting the Stack Master 53
Selecting the Backup Unit 54
Recovering from Stack Failure or Topology Change 54
Renumbering the Stack 55
Ensuring Consistent Code is Used Across the Stack 55
Configuring the Switch for Remote Management 56
Using the Network Interface 56
Setting an IP Address 56
Enabling SNMP Management Access 62
Managing System Files 65
Upgrading the Operation Code 66
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 66
Automatic Installation of Operation Code and Configuration Settings 67
– 5 –
Contents
Downloading Operation Code from a File Server 67

Specifying a DHCP Client Identifier 70
Downloading a Configuration File and Other Parameters Provided by a DHCP
Server 71
Setting the System Clock 73
Setting the Time Manually 73
Configuring SNTP 74
Configuring NTP 74
Section II Command Line Interface 77
2 Using the Command Line Interface 79

Accessing the CLI 79
Console Connection 79
Telnet Connection 80
Entering Commands 81
Keywords and Arguments 81
Minimum Abbreviation 81
Command Completion 81
Getting Help on Commands 82
Partial Keyword Lookup 84
Negating the Effect of Commands 84
Using Command History 84
Understanding Command Modes 84
Exec Commands 85
Configuration Commands 86
Command Line Processing 88
Showing Status Information 88
CLI Command Groups 89
3 General Commands 93
prompt 93
reload (Global Configuration) 94
enable 95
quit 96
– 6 –
Contents
show history 96
configure 97
disable 98
reload (Privileged Exec) 98
show reload 99
end 99
exit 99
4 System Management Commands 101

Device Designation 101
hostname 102
Banner Information 102
banner configure 103
banner configure company 104
banner configure dc-power-info 105
banner configure department 105
banner configure equipment-info 106
banner configure equipment-location 107
banner configure ip-lan 107
banner configure lp-number 108
banner configure manager-info 109
banner configure mux 109
banner configure note 110
show banner 111
System Status 111
show access-list tcam-utilization 112
show memory 112
show process cpu 113
show process cpu task 114
show running-config 115
show startup-config 117
show system 117
show tech-support 119
show users 119
show version 120
– 7 –
Contents
show watchdog 121

watchdog software 121
Fan Control 122
fan-speed force-full 122
Frame Size 122
jumbo frame 122
File Management 123
General Commands 125
boot system 125
copy 126
delete 129
dir 130
whichboot 131
Automatic Code Upgrade Commands 132
upgrade opcode auto 132
upgrade opcode path 133
upgrade opcode reload 134
show upgrade 135
TFTP Configuration Commands 135
ip tftp retry 135
ip tftp timeout 136
show ip tftp 136
Line 137
line 138
databits 138
exec-timeout 139
login 140
parity 141
password 141
password-thresh 142
silent-time 143
speed 144
stopbits 144
timeout login response 145
disconnect 145
– 8 –
Contents
terminal 146
show line 147
Event Logging 148
logging facility 148
logging history 149
logging host 150
logging on 150
logging trap 151
clear log 152
show log 152
show logging 153
SMTP Alerts 155
logging sendmail 155
logging sendmail host 155
logging sendmail level 156
logging sendmail destination-email 157
logging sendmail source-email 157
show logging sendmail 158
Time 158
SNTP Commands 159
sntp client 159
sntp poll 160
sntp server 161
show sntp 161
NTP Commands 162
ntp authenticate 162
ntp authentication-key 163
ntp client 164
ntp server 164
show ntp 165
Manual Configuration Commands 166
clock summer-time (date) 166
clock summer-time (predefined) 167
clock summer-time (recurring) 168
clock timezone 170
– 9 –
Contents
calendar set 171

show calendar 171
Time Range 172
time-range 172
absolute 173
periodic 174
show time-range 175
Switch Clustering 175
cluster 176
cluster commander 177
cluster ip-pool 178
cluster member 178
rcommand 179
show cluster 180
show cluster members 180
show cluster candidates 180
Stacking 181
switch all renumber 181
switch master button 182
switch stacking button 183
show switch master button 183
show switch stacking button 184
5 SNMP Commands 185

General SNMP Commands 187
snmp-server 187
snmp-server community 187
snmp-server contact 188
snmp-server location 189
show snmp 189
SNMP Target Host Commands 190
snmp-server enable traps 190
snmp-server host 192
snmp-server enable port-traps mac-notification 194
show snmp-server enable port-traps 194
– 10 –
Contents
SNMPv3 Commands 195

snmp-server engine-id 195
snmp-server group 196
snmp-server user 197
snmp-server view 199
show snmp engine-id 200
show snmp group 200
show snmp user 201
show snmp view 202
Notification Log Commands 203
nlm 203
snmp-server notify-filter 204
show nlm oper-status 205
show snmp notify-filter 205
Additional Trap Commands 206
memory 206
process cpu 206
6 Remote Monitoring Commands 209

rmon alarm 210
rmon event 211
rmon collection history 212
rmon collection rmon1 213
show rmon alarms 214
show rmon events 214
show rmon history 214
show rmon statistics 215
7 Flow Sampling Commands 217

sflow owner 217
sflow polling instance 219
sflow sampling instance 220
show sflow 221
8 Authentication Commands 223

User Accounts and Privilege Levels 224
– 11 –
Contents
enable password 224

username 225
privilege 227
show privilege 227
Authentication Sequence 228
authentication enable 228
authentication login 229
RADIUS Client 230
radius-server acct-port 230
radius-server auth-port 231
radius-server host 231
radius-server key 232
radius-server retransmit 233
radius-server timeout 233
show radius-server 234
TACACS+ Client 234
tacacs-server host 235
tacacs-server key 235
tacacs-server port 236
tacacs-server retransmit 236
tacacs-server timeout 237
show tacacs-server 237
AAA 238
aaa accounting commands 238
aaa accounting dot1x 239
aaa accounting exec 240
aaa accounting update 241
aaa authorization exec 242
aaa group server 243
server 243
accounting dot1x 244
accounting commands 244
accounting exec 245
authorization exec 245
show accounting 246
– 12 –
Contents
Web Server 247

ip http port 247
ip http server 248
ip http secure-port 248
ip http secure-server 249
Telnet Server 250
ip telnet max-sessions 251
ip telnet port 251
ip telnet server 252
show ip telnet 252
Secure Shell 253
ip ssh authentication-retries 256
ip ssh server 256
ip ssh server-key size 257
ip ssh timeout 257
delete public-key 258
ip ssh crypto host-key generate 259
ip ssh crypto zeroize 259
ip ssh save host-key 260
show ip ssh 260
show public-key 261
show ssh 262
802.1X Port Authentication 262
General Commands 263
dot1x default 263
dot1x eapol-pass-through 264
dot1x system-auth-control 264
Authenticator Commands 265
dot1x intrusion-action 265
dot1x max-reauth-req 265
dot1x max-req 266
dot1x operation-mode 266
dot1x port-control 267
dot1x re-authentication 268
dot1x timeout quiet-period 268
– 13 –
Contents
dot1x timeout re-authperiod 269

dot1x timeout supp-timeout 269
dot1x timeout tx-period 270
dot1x re-authenticate 270
Supplicant Commands 271
dot1x identity profile 271
dot1x max-start 272
dot1x pae supplicant 272
dot1x timeout auth-period 273
dot1x timeout held-period 273
dot1x timeout start-period 274
Information Display Commands 274
show dot1x 274
Management IP Filter 277
management 277
show management 278
PPPoE Intermediate Agent 279
pppoe intermediate-agent 280
pppoe intermediate-agent format-type 281
pppoe intermediate-agent port-enable 281
pppoe intermediate-agent port-format-type 282
pppoe intermediate-agent port-format-type remote-id-delimiter 283
pppoe intermediate-agent trust 284
pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip 284
clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics 285
show pppoe intermediate-agent info 285
show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics 286
9 General Security Measures 289

Port Security 290
mac-learning 290
port security 291
port security mac-address-as-permanent 293
show port security 293
Network Access (MAC Address Authentication) 295
– 14 –
Contents
network-access aging 296

network-access mac-filter 297
mac-authentication reauth-time 298
network-access dynamic-qos 298
network-access dynamic-vlan 299
network-access guest-vlan 300
network-access link-detection 301
network-access link-detection link-down 301
network-access link-detection link-up 302
network-access link-detection link-up-down 303
network-access max-mac-count 303
network-access mode mac-authentication 304
network-access port-mac-filter 305
mac-authentication intrusion-action 306
mac-authentication max-mac-count 306
clear network-access 307
show network-access 307
show network-access mac-address-table 308
show network-access mac-filter 309
Web Authentication 310
web-auth login-attempts 311
web-auth quiet-period 311
web-auth session-timeout 312
web-auth system-auth-control 312
web-auth 313
web-auth re-authenticate (Port) 313
web-auth re-authenticate (IP) 314
show web-auth 314
show web-auth interface 315
show web-auth summary 315
DHCPv4 Snooping 316
ip dhcp snooping 317
ip dhcp snooping information option 319
ip dhcp snooping information option encode no-subtype 320
ip dhcp snooping information option remote-id 321
– 15 –
Contents
ip dhcp snooping information option tr101 board-id 322

ip dhcp snooping information policy 322
ip dhcp snooping limit rate 323
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address 323
ip dhcp snooping vlan 324
ip dhcp snooping information option circuit-id 325
ip dhcp snooping trust 326
clear ip dhcp snooping binding 327
clear ip dhcp snooping database flash 327
ip dhcp snooping database flash 328
show ip dhcp snooping 328
show ip dhcp snooping binding 329
DHCPv6 Snooping 329
ipv6 dhcp snooping 330
ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id 332
ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id policy 333
ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan 334
ipv6 dhcp snooping max-binding 335
ipv6 dhcp snooping trust 335
clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding 336
clear ipv6 dhcp snooping statistics 337
show ipv6 dhcp snooping 337
show ipv6 dhcp snooping binding 338
show ipv6 dhcp snooping statistics 338
IPv4 Source Guard 339
ip source-guard binding 339
ip source-guard 341
ip source-guard max-binding 343
ip source-guard mode 343
clear ip source-guard binding blocked 344
show ip source-guard 345
show ip source-guard binding 345
IPv6 Source Guard 346
ipv6 source-guard binding 346
ipv6 source-guard 348
– 16 –
Contents
ipv6 source-guard max-binding 349

show ipv6 source-guard 350
show ipv6 source-guard binding 351
ARP Inspection 351
ip arp inspection 352
ip arp inspection filter 353
ip arp inspection log-buffer logs 354
ip arp inspection validate 355
ip arp inspection vlan 356
ip arp inspection limit 357
ip arp inspection trust 357
show ip arp inspection configuration 358
show ip arp inspection interface 358
show ip arp inspection log 359
show ip arp inspection statistics 359
show ip arp inspection vlan 360
Denial of Service Protection 360
dos-protection echo-chargen 361
dos-protection smurf 361
dos-protection tcp-flooding 362
dos-protection tcp-null-scan 362
dos-protection tcp-syn-fin-scan 363
dos-protection tcp-udp-port-zero 363
dos-protection tcp-xmas-scan 364
dos-protection udp-flooding 364
dos-protection win-nuke 365
show dos-protection 365
Port-based Traffic Segmentation 366
traffic-segmentation 366
traffic-segmentation session 367
traffic-segmentation uplink/downlink 368
traffic-segmentation uplink-to-uplink 369
show traffic-segmentation 370
10 Access Control Lists 371
– 17 –
Contents
IPv4 ACLs 371

access-list ip 372
ip access-group (Global Configuration) 373
permit, deny (Standard IP ACL) 374
permit, deny (Extended IPv4 ACL) 375
ip access-group (Interface Configuration) 377
show ip access-group 378
show ip access-list 378
IPv6 ACLs 379
access-list ipv6 379
ipv6 access-group (Global Configuration) 380
permit, deny (Standard Pv6 ACL) 381
permit, deny (Extended IPv6 ACL) 382
ipv6 access-group (Interface Configuration) 384
show ipv6 access-group 384
show ipv6 access-list 385
MAC ACLs 385
access-list mac 386
mac access-group (Global Configuration) 387
permit, deny (MAC ACL) 387
mac access-group (Interface Configuration) 391
show mac access-group 392
show mac access-list 392
ARP ACLs 393
access-list arp 393
permit, deny (ARP ACL) 394
show access-list arp 395
ACL Information 395
clear access-list hardware counters 395
show access-group 396
show access-list 396
11 Interface Commands 399

Interface Configuration 400
interface 400
– 18 –
Contents
alias 401
capabilities 402
description 403
discard 403
flowcontrol 404
history 405
media-type 406
negotiation 407
shutdown 407
speed-duplex 408
clear counters 409
show discard 410
show interfaces brief 410
show interfaces counters 411
show interfaces status 415
show interfaces switchport 416
Transceiver Threshold Configuration 418
transceiver-monitor 418
transceiver-threshold-auto 418
transceiver-threshold current 419
transceiver-threshold rx-power 420
transceiver-threshold temperature 421
transceiver-threshold tx-power 422
transceiver-threshold voltage 423
show interfaces transceiver 424
show interfaces transceiver-threshold 425
Cable Diagnostics 426
test cable-diagnostics 426
show cable-diagnostics 427
Power Savings 428
power-save 428
show power-save 429
12 Link Aggregation Commands 431
– 19 –
Contents
Manual Configuration Commands 432

port channel load-balance 432
channel-group 434
Dynamic Configuration Commands 435
lacp 435
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface) 436
lacp port-priority 437
lacp system-priority 438
lacp admin-key (Port Channel) 438
lacp timeout 439
Trunk Status Display Commands 440
show lacp 440
show port-channel load-balance 443
13 Power over Ethernet Commands 445

power inline 445
power inline maximum allocation 446
power inline priority 447
show power inline status 448
show power mainpower 449
14 Port Mirroring Commands 451

Local Port Mirroring Commands 451
port monitor 451
show port monitor 453
RSPAN Mirroring Commands 454
rspan source 456
rspan destination 457
rspan remote vlan 458
no rspan session 459
show rspan 460
15 Congestion Control Commands 461

Rate Limit Commands 461
rate-limit 462
Storm Control Commands 463
– 20 –
Contents
switchport packet-rate 463

Automatic Traffic Control Commands 464
Threshold Commands 467
auto-traffic-control apply-timer 467
auto-traffic-control release-timer 468
auto-traffic-control 469
auto-traffic-control action 469
auto-traffic-control alarm-clear-threshold 470
auto-traffic-control alarm-fire-threshold 471
auto-traffic-control auto-control-release 472
auto-traffic-control control-release 473
SNMP Trap Commands 473
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-clear 473
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-fire 474
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control-apply 474
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control-release 475
snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-clear 475
snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-fire 476
snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-apply 476
snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-release 477
ATC Display Commands 477
show auto-traffic-control 477
show auto-traffic-control interface 478
16 Loopback Detection Commands 479

loopback-detection 480
loopback-detection action 480
loopback-detection recover-time 481
loopback-detection transmit-interval 482
loopback detection trap 482
loopback-detection release 483
show loopback-detection 483
17 UniDirectional Link Detection Commands 485

udld detection-interval 485
udld message-interval 486
– 21 –
Contents
udld recovery 487

udld recovery-interval 487
udld aggressive 488
udld port 489
show udld 490
18 Address Table Commands 493

mac-address-table aging-time 493
mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth 494
mac-address-table static 495
clear collision-mac-address-table 496
clear mac-address-table dynamic 496
show collision-mac-address-table 496
show mac-address-table 497
show mac-address-table aging-time 498
show mac-address-table count 498
show mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth 499
19 Spanning Tree Commands 501

spanning-tree 502
spanning-tree cisco-prestandard 503
spanning-tree forward-time 503
spanning-tree hello-time 504
spanning-tree max-age 505
spanning-tree mode 505
spanning-tree pathcost method 507
spanning-tree priority 507
spanning-tree mst configuration 508
spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding 508
spanning-tree tc-prop 509
spanning-tree transmission-limit 510
max-hops 510
mst priority 511
mst vlan 512
name 512
revision 513
– 22 –
Contents
spanning-tree bpdu-filter 514

spanning-tree bpdu-guard 514
spanning-tree cost 515
spanning-tree edge-port 517
spanning-tree link-type 517
spanning-tree loopback-detection 518
spanning-tree loopback-detection action 519
spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode 519
spanning-tree loopback-detection trap 520
spanning-tree mst cost 521
spanning-tree mst port-priority 522
spanning-tree port-bpdu-flooding 522
spanning-tree port-priority 523
spanning-tree root-guard 524
spanning-tree spanning-disabled 525
spanning-tree tc-prop-stop 525
spanning-tree loopback-detection release 526
spanning-tree protocol-migration 526
show spanning-tree 527
show spanning-tree mst configuration 529
show spanning-tree tc-prop 529
20 ERPS Commands 531

erps 533
erps domain 534
control-vlan 534
enable 535
guard-timer 536
holdoff-timer 537
major-domain 537
meg-level 538
mep-monitor 539
node-id 540
non-erps-dev-protect 540
non-revertive 542
– 23 –
Contents
propagate-tc 545
raps-def-mac 546
raps-without-vc 547
ring-port 549
rpl neighbor 550
rpl owner 550
version 551
wtr-timer 552
clear erps statistics 553
erps clear 553
erps forced-switch 554
erps manual-switch 556
show erps 557
21 VLAN Commands 563

GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 564
bridge-ext gvrp 564
garp timer 565
switchport forbidden vlan 566
switchport gvrp 566
show bridge-ext 567
show garp timer 568
show gvrp configuration 569
Editing VLAN Groups 569
vlan database 569
vlan 570
Configuring VLAN Interfaces 571
interface vlan 572
switchport acceptable-frame-types 572
switchport allowed vlan 573
switchport ingress-filtering 574
switchport mode 575
switchport native vlan 576
vlan-trunking 576
Displaying VLAN Information 578
– 24 –
Contents
show vlan 578

Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling 579
dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control 580
switchport dot1q-tunnel mode 581
switchport dot1q-tunnel service match cvid 582
switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid 584
show dot1q-tunnel 585
Configuring L2CP Tunneling 586
l2protocol-tunnel tunnel-dmac 586
switchport l2protocol-tunnel 589
show l2protocol-tunnel 590
Configuring VLAN Translation 590
switchport vlan-translation 590
show vlan-translation 592
Configuring Protocol-based VLANs 592
protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Groups) 593
protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Interfaces) 594
show protocol-vlan protocol-group 595
show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group 595
Configuring IP Subnet VLANs 596
subnet-vlan 597
show subnet-vlan 598
Configuring MAC Based VLANs 598
mac-vlan 599
show mac-vlan 600
Configuring Voice VLANs 600
voice vlan 601
voice vlan aging 602
voice vlan mac-address 602
switchport voice vlan 603
switchport voice vlan priority 604
switchport voice vlan rule 605
switchport voice vlan security 605
show voice vlan 606
– 25 –
Contents
22 Class of Service Commands 609

Priority Commands (Layer 2) 609
queue mode 610
queue weight 611
switchport priority default 612
show queue mode 613
show queue weight 613
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) 614
qos map cos-dscp 614
qos map dscp-mutation 616
qos map phb-queue 617
qos map trust-mode 618
show qos map cos-dscp 619
show qos map dscp-mutation 619
show qos map phb-queue 620
show qos map trust-mode 621
23 Quality of Service Commands 623

class-map 624
description 625
match 626
rename 627
policy-map 628
class 628
police flow 630
police srtcm-color 631
police trtcm-color 634
set cos 636
set ip dscp 637
set phb 638
service-policy 639
show class-map 639
show policy-map 640
show policy-map interface 641
24 Multicast Filtering Commands 643
– 26 –
Contents
IGMP Snooping 643

ip igmp snooping 645
ip igmp snooping priority 645
ip igmp snooping proxy-reporting 646
ip igmp snooping querier 647
ip igmp snooping router-alert-option-check 647
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 648
ip igmp snooping tcn-flood 648
ip igmp snooping tcn-query-solicit 650
ip igmp snooping unregistered-data-flood 650
ip igmp snooping unsolicited-report-interval 651
ip igmp snooping version 652
ip igmp snooping version-exclusive 652
ip igmp snooping vlan general-query-suppression 653
ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave 654
ip igmp snooping vlan last-memb-query-count 655
ip igmp snooping vlan last-memb-query-intvl 655
ip igmp snooping vlan mrd 656
ip igmp snooping vlan proxy-address 657
ip igmp snooping vlan query-interval 658
ip igmp snooping vlan query-resp-intvl 659
ip igmp snooping vlan static 660
clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic 660
clear ip igmp snooping statistics 661
show ip igmp snooping 661
show ip igmp snooping group 662
show ip igmp snooping mrouter 663
show ip igmp snooping statistics 664
Static Multicast Routing 666
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 666
IGMP Filtering and Throttling 667
ip igmp filter (Global Configuration) 668
ip igmp profile 669
permit, deny 669
range 670
– 27 –
Contents
ip igmp authentication 670

ip igmp filter (Interface Configuration) 672
ip igmp max-groups 673
ip igmp max-groups action 673
ip igmp query-drop 674
ip multicast-data-drop 674
show ip igmp authentication 675
show ip igmp filter 676
show ip igmp profile 676
show ip igmp query-drop 677
show ip igmp throttle interface 677
show ip multicast-data-drop 678
MLD Snooping 679
ipv6 mld snooping 680
ipv6 mld snooping querier 680
ipv6 mld snooping query-interval 681
ipv6 mld snooping query-max-response-time 681
ipv6 mld snooping robustness 682
ipv6 mld snooping router-port-expire-time 683
ipv6 mld snooping unknown-multicast mode 683
ipv6 mld snooping version 684
ipv6 mld snooping vlan immediate-leave 684
ipv6 mld snooping vlan mrouter 685
ipv6 mld snooping vlan static 686
clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic 686
clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics 687
show ipv6 mld snooping 687
show ipv6 mld snooping group 688
show ipv6 mld snooping group source-list 688
show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter 689
MLD Filtering and Throttling 689
ipv6 mld filter (Global Configuration) 690
ipv6 mld profile 691
permit, deny 691
range 692
– 28 –
Contents
ipv6 mld filter (Interface Configuration) 693

ipv6 mld max-groups 693
ipv6 mld max-groups action 694
ipv6 mld query-drop 695
ipv6 multicast-data-drop 695
show ipv6 mld filter 696
show ipv6 mld profile 696
show ipv6 mld query-drop 697
show ipv6 mld throttle interface 697
MVR for IPv4 698
mvr 699
mvr associated-profile 700
mvr domain 700
mvr priority 701
mvr profile 702
mvr proxy-query-interval 703
mvr proxy-switching 703
mvr robustness-value 704
mvr source-port-mode dynamic 705
mvr upstream-source-ip 706
mvr vlan 706
mvr immediate-leave 707
mvr type 708
mvr vlan group 709
clear mrv groups dynamic 710
clear mrv statistics 710
show mvr 711
show mvr associated-profile 712
show mvr interface 713
show mvr members 714
show mvr profile 716
show mvr statistics 716
MVR for IPv6 721
mvr6 associated-profile 722
mvr6 domain 723
– 29 –
Contents
mvr6 priority 723

mvr6 profile 724
mvr6 proxy-query-interval 725
mvr6 proxy-switching 725
mvr6 robustness-value 727
mvr6 source-port-mode dynamic 727
mvr6 upstream-source-ip 728
mvr6 vlan 729
mvr6 immediate-leave 729
mvr6 type 730
mvr6 vlan group 731
clear mvr6 groups dynamic 732
clear mvr6 statistics 733
show mvr6 733
show mvr6 associated-profile 734
show mvr6 interface 735
show mvr6 members 736
show mvr6 profile 737
show mvr6 statistics 738
25 LLDP Commands 741

lldp 743
lldp holdtime-multiplier 743
lldp med-fast-start-count 744
lldp notification-interval 744
lldp refresh-interval 745
lldp reinit-delay 745
lldp tx-delay 746
lldp admin-status 747
lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address 747
lldp basic-tlv port-description 748
lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities 748
lldp basic-tlv system-description 749
lldp basic-tlv system-name 749
lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident 750
– 30 –
Contents
lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid 750

lldp dot1-tlv pvid 751
lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name 751
lldp dot3-tlv link-agg 752
lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy 752
lldp dot3-tlv max-frame 753
lldp dot3-tlv poe 753
lldp med-location civic-addr 754
lldp med-notification 756
lldp med-tlv ext-poe 756
lldp med-tlv inventory 757
lldp med-tlv location 757
lldp med-tlv med-cap 758
lldp med-tlv network-policy 758
lldp notification 759
show lldp config 760
show lldp info local-device 761
show lldp info remote-device 762
show lldp info statistics 764
26 CFM Commands 767

Defining CFM Structures 770
ethernet cfm ais level 770
ethernet cfm ais ma 771
ethernet cfm ais period 772
ethernet cfm ais suppress alarm 772
ethernet cfm domain 773
ethernet cfm enable 775
ma index name 776
ma index name-format 777
ethernet cfm mep 778
ethernet cfm port-enable 779
clear ethernet cfm ais mpid 779
show ethernet cfm configuration 780
show ethernet cfm md 782
– 31 –
Contents
show ethernet cfm ma 782

show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local 783
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep 784
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail 785
Continuity Check Operations 787
ethernet cfm cc ma interval 787
ethernet cfm cc enable 788
snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm cc 789
mep archive-hold-time 790
clear ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote 790
clear ethernet cfm errors 791
show ethernet cfm errors 792
Cross Check Operations 793
ethernet cfm mep crosscheck start-delay 793
snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm crosscheck 793
mep crosscheck mpid 794
ethernet cfm mep crosscheck 795
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote crosscheck 796
Link Trace Operations 796
ethernet cfm linktrace cache 796
ethernet cfm linktrace cache hold-time 797
ethernet cfm linktrace cache size 798
ethernet cfm linktrace 798
clear ethernet cfm linktrace-cache 800
show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache 800
Loopback Operations 801
ethernet cfm loopback 801
Fault Generator Operations 802
mep fault-notify alarm-time 802
mep fault-notify lowest-priority 803
mep fault-notify reset-time 804
show ethernet cfm fault-notify-generator 805
Delay Measure Operations 806
ethernet cfm delay-measure two-way 806
– 32 –
Contents
27 OAM Commands 809

efm oam 810
efm oam critical-link-event 810
efm oam link-monitor frame 811
efm oam link-monitor frame threshold 812
efm oam link-monitor frame window 812
efm oam mode 813
clear efm oam counters 814
clear efm oam event-log 814
efm oam remote-loopback 815
efm oam remote-loopback test 816
show efm oam counters interface 817
show efm oam event-log interface 817
show efm oam remote-loopback interface 819
show efm oam status interface 819
show efm oam status remote interface 820
28 Domain Name Service Commands 821

ip domain-list 821
ip domain-lookup 822
ip domain-name 823
ip host 824
ip name-server 824
ipv6 host 825
clear dns cache 826
clear host 826
show dns 827
show dns cache 827
show hosts 828
29 DHCP Commands 829

DHCP Client 829
DHCP for IPv4 830
ip dhcp dynamic-provision 830
ip dhcp client class-id 831
ip dhcp restart client 833
– 33 –
Contents
show ip dhcp dynamic-provision 833

DHCP for IPv6 834
ipv6 dhcp client rapid-commit vlan 834
ipv6 dhcp restart client vlan 834
show ipv6 dhcp duid 836
show ipv6 dhcp vlan 836
DHCP Relay 837
ip dhcp relay server 837
ip dhcp restart relay 838
DHCP Relay for IPv6 839
ipv6 dhcp relay destination 839
show ipv6 dhcp relay destination 840
show ip dhcp 840
30 IP Interface Commands 843

IPv4 Interface 843
Basic IPv4 Configuration 844
ip address 844
ip default-gateway 846
show ip interface 847
show ip traffic 848
traceroute 849
ping 850
ARP Configuration 851
arp 851
arp timeout 852
ip proxy-arp 853
clear arp-cache 854
show arp 854
IPv6 Interface 855
Interface Address Configuration and Utilities 856
ipv6 default-gateway 856
ipv6 address 857
ipv6 address autoconfig 858
ipv6 address eui-64 860
– 34 –
Contents
ipv6 address link-local 862

ipv6 enable 863
ipv6 mtu 864
show ipv6 default-gateway 865
show ipv6 interface 866
show ipv6 mtu 868
show ipv6 traffic 868
clear ipv6 traffic 873
ping6 873
traceroute6 874
Neighbor Discovery 876
ipv6 hop-limit 876
ipv6 nd dad attempts 876
ipv6 nd ns-interval 878
ipv6 nd raguard 879
ipv6 nd reachable-time 880
clear ipv6 neighbors 880
show ipv6 nd raguard 881
show ipv6 neighbors 881
ND Snooping 882
ipv6 nd snooping 884
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect 885
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count 886
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit interval 886
ipv6 nd snooping prefix timeout 887
ipv6 nd snooping max-binding 888
ipv6 nd snooping trust 888
clear ipv6 nd snooping binding 889
clear ipv6 nd snooping prefix 889
show ipv6 nd snooping 889
show ipv6 nd snooping binding 890
show ipv6 nd snooping prefix 890
50 IP Routing Commands 893

Global Routing Configuration 893
– 35 –
Contents
IPv4 Commands 894

ip route 894
show ip route 895
show ip route database 896
show ip route summary 896
show ip traffic 897
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 898
router rip 899
default-information originate 899
default-metric 900
distance 901
maximum-prefix 902
neighbor 902
network 903
passive-interface 904
redistribute 904
timers basic 906
version 907
ip rip authentication mode 908
ip rip authentication string 909
ip rip receive version 909
ip rip receive-packet 910
ip rip send version 911
ip rip send-packet 912
ip rip split-horizon 912
clear ip rip route 913
show ip protocols rip 914
show ip rip 914
Section III Appendices 917
A Troubleshooting 919
Problems Accessing the Management Interface 919
Using System Logs 920
– 36 –
Contents
B License Information 921

The GNU General Public License 921
Glossary 925
Index of CLI Commands 933
Index 943
– 37 –
Contents
– 38 –
Figures
Figure 1: Storm Control by Limiting the Traffic Rate 466

Figure 2: Storm Control by Shutting Down a Port 467
Figure 3: Non-ERPS Device Protection 541
Figure 4: Sub-ring with Virtual Channel 548
Figure 5: Sub-ring without Virtual Channel 548
Figure 6: Configuring VLAN Trunking 577
Figure 7: Mapping QinQ Service VLAN to Customer VLAN 583
Figure 8: Configuring VLAN Translation 591
– 39 –
Figures
– 40 –
Tables
Table 1: Options 60, 66 and 67 Statements 72

Table 2: Options 55 and 124 Statements 72
Table 3: General Command Modes 85
Table 4: Configuration Command Modes 87
Table 5: Keystroke Commands 88
Table 6: Command Group Index 89
Table 7: General Commands 93
Table 8: System Management Commands 101
Table 9: Device Designation Commands 101
Table 10: Banner Commands 102
Table 11: System Status Commands 111
Table 12: show system – display description 118
Table 13: show version – display description 120
Table 14: Fan Control Commands 122
Table 15: Frame Size Commands 122
Table 16: Flash/File Commands 124
Table 17: File Directory Information 131
Table 18: Line Commands 137
Table 19: Event Logging Commands 148
Table 20: Logging Levels 149
Table 21: show logging flash/ram - display description 154
Table 22: show logging trap - display description 154
Table 23: Event Logging Commands 155
Table 24: Time Commands 158
Table 25: Predefined Summer-Time Parameters 168
Table 26: Time Range Commands 172
Table 27: Switch Cluster Commands 175
Table 28: Stacking Commands 181
Table 29: SNMP Commands 185
– 41 –
Tables
Table 30: show snmp engine-id - display description 200

Table 31: show snmp group - display description 201
Table 32: show snmp user - display description 202
Table 33: show snmp view - display description 203
Table 34: RMON Commands 209
Table 35: sFlow Commands 217
Table 36: Authentication Commands 223
Table 37: User Access Commands 224
Table 38: Default Login Settings 226
Table 39: Authentication Sequence Commands 228
Table 40: RADIUS Client Commands 230
Table 41: TACACS+ Client Commands 234
Table 42: AAA Commands 238
Table 43: Web Server Commands 247
Table 44: HTTPS System Support 250
Table 45: Telnet Server Commands 250
Table 46: Secure Shell Commands 253
Table 47: show ssh - display description 262
Table 48: 802.1X Port Authentication Commands 262
Table 49: Management IP Filter Commands 277
Table 50: PPPoE Intermediate Agent Commands 279
Table 51: show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics - display description 286
Table 52: General Security Commands 289
Table 53: Management IP Filter Commands 290
Table 54: show port security - display description 294
Table 55: Network Access Commands 295
Table 56: Dynamic QoS Profiles 299
Table 57: Web Authentication 310
Table 58: DHCP Snooping Commands 316
Table 59: Option 82 information 325
Table 60: DHCP Snooping Commands 329
Table 61: IPv4 Source Guard Commands 339
Table 62: IPv6 Source Guard Commands 346
Table 63: ARP Inspection Commands 352
Table 64: DoS Protection Commands 360
– 42 –
Tables
Table 65: Commands for Configuring Traffic Segmentation 366

Table 66: Traffic Segmentation Forwarding 367
Table 67: Access Control List Commands 371
Table 68: IPv4 ACL Commands 371
Table 69: IPv6 ACL Commands 379
Table 70: MAC ACL Commands 385
Table 71: ARP ACL Commands 393
Table 72: ACL Information Commands 395
Table 73: Interface Commands 399
Table 74: show interfaces counters - display description 412
Table 75: show interfaces switchport - display description 417
Table 76: Link Aggregation Commands 431
Table 77: show lacp counters - display description 441
Table 78: show lacp internal - display description 441
Table 79: show lacp neighbors - display description 442
Table 80: show lacp sysid - display description 443
Table 81: PoE Commands 445
Table 82: show power inline status - display description 448
Table 83: show power mainpower - display description 449
Table 84: Port Mirroring Commands 451
Table 85: Mirror Port Commands 451
Table 86: RSPAN Commands 454
Table 87: Congestion Control Commands 461
Table 88: Rate Limit Commands 461
Table 89: Rate Limit Commands 463
Table 90: ATC Commands 464
Table 91: Loopback Detection Commands 479
Table 92: UniDirectional Link Detection Commands 485
Table 93: show udld - display description 490
Table 94: Address Table Commands 493
Table 95: Spanning Tree Commands 501
Table 96: Recommended STA Path Cost Range 515
Table 97: Default STA Path Costs 516
Table 98: ERPS Commands 531
Table 99: ERPS Request/State Priority 555
– 43 –
Tables
Table 100: show erps - summary display description 558

Table 101: show erps domain - detailed display description 559
Table 102: show erps statistics - detailed display description 561
Table 103: VLAN Commands 563
Table 104: GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 564
Table 105: show bridge-ext - display description 567
Table 106: Commands for Editing VLAN Groups 569
Table 107: Commands for Configuring VLAN Interfaces 571
Table 108: Commands for Displaying VLAN Information 578
Table 109: 802.1Q Tunneling Commands 579
Table 110: L2 Protocol Tunnel Commands 586
Table 111: VLAN Translation Commands 590
Table 112: Protocol-based VLAN Commands 592
Table 113: IP Subnet VLAN Commands 596
Table 114: MAC Based VLAN Commands 598
Table 115: Voice VLAN Commands 600
Table 116: Priority Commands 609
Table 117: Priority Commands (Layer 2) 609
Table 118: Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) 614
Table 119: Default Mapping of CoS/CFI to Internal PHB/Drop Precedence 615
Table 120: Default Mapping of DSCP Values to Internal PHB/Drop Values 616
Table 121: Mapping Internal Per-hop Behavior to Hardware Queues 617
Table 122: Quality of Service Commands 623
Table 123: Multicast Filtering Commands 643
Table 124: IGMP Snooping Commands 643
Table 125: show ip igmp snooping statistics input - display description 664
Table 126: show ip igmp snooping statistics output - display description 665
Table 127: show ip igmp snooping statistics vlan query - display description 666
Table 128: Static Multicast Interface Commands 666
Table 129: IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands 667
Table 130: IGMP Authentication RADIUS Attribute Value Pairs 671
Table 131: MLD Snooping Commands 679
Table 132: MLD Filtering and Throttling Commands 689
Table 133: Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 Commands 698
Table 134: show mvr - display description 712
– 44 –
Tables
Table 135: show mvr interface - display description 713

Table 136: show mvr members - display description 715
Table 137: show mvr statistics input - display description 717
Table 138: show mvr statistics output - display description 717
Table 139: show mvr statistics query - display description 718
Table 140: show mvr statistics summary interface - display description 719
Table 141: show mvr statistics summary interface mvr vlan - description 720
Table 142: Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 Commands 721
Table 143: show mvr6 - display description 734
Table 144: show mvr6 interface - display description 735
Table 145: show mvr6 members - display description 737
Table 146: show mvr6 statistics input - display description 738
Table 147: show mvr6 statistics output - display description 739
Table 148: show mvr6 statistics query - display description 740
Table 149: LLDP Commands 741
Table 150: LLDP MED Location CA Types 755
Table 151: CFM Commands 767
Table 152: show ethernet cfm configuration traps - display description 781
Table 153: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep - display 785
Table 154: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail - display 786
Table 155: show ethernet cfm errors - display description 792
Table 156: show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache - display description 800
Table 157: Remote MEP Priority Levels 804
Table 158: MEP Defect Descriptions 804
Table 159: show fault-notify-generator - display description 805
Table 160: OAM Commands 809
Table 161: Address Table Commands 821
Table 162: show dns cache - display description 827
Table 163: show hosts - display description 828
Table 164: DHCP Commands 829
Table 165: DHCP Client Commands 829
Table 166: Options 60, 66 and 67 Statements 832
Table 167: Options 55 and 124 Statements 832
Table 168: DHCP Relay Option 82 Commands 837
Table 169: IP Interface Commands 843
– 45 –
Tables
Table 170: IPv4 Interface Commands 843

Table 171: Basic IP Configuration Commands 844
Table 172: Address Resolution Protocol Commands 851
Table 173: IPv6 Configuration Commands 855
Table 174: show ipv6 interface - display description 867
Table 175: show ipv6 mtu - display description 868
Table 176: show ipv6 traffic - display description 870
Table 177: show ipv6 neighbors - display description 882
Table 178: ND Snooping Commands 883
Table 179: IP Routing Commands 893
Table 180: Global Routing Configuration Commands 893
Table 181: Routing Information Protocol Commands 898
Table 182: Troubleshooting Chart 919
– 46 –
Section I
Getting Started
This section describes how to configure the switch for management access through
the web interface or SNMP.
This section includes these chapters:
◆ "Initial Switch Configuration" on page 49
– 47 –
Section I | Getting Started
– 48 –
1 Initial Switch Configuration
This chapter includes information on connecting to the switch and basic

configuration procedures.
Connecting to the Switch

The switch includes a built-in network management agent. The agent offers a
variety of management options, including SNMP, RMON and a web-based interface.
A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring
via a command line interface (CLI).
Note: An IPv4 address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To change
this address, see “Setting an IP Address” on page 56.
Configuration Options The switch’s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters, monitor
port connections, and display statistics using a standard web browser such as
Internet Explorer 6, Mozilla Firefox 4, or Google Chrome 29, or more recent versions.
The switch’s web management interface can be accessed from any computer
attached to the network.
The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS-232 serial
console port on the switch, or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network.
The switch’s management agent also supports SNMP (Simple Network

Management Protocol). This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from
any system in the network using network management software.
The switch’s web interface, console interface, and SNMP agent allow you to
perform the following management functions:
◆ Set user names and passwords
◆ Set an IP interface for any VLAN
◆ Configure SNMP parameters
◆ Enable/disable any port
◆ Set the speed/duplex mode for any port
◆ Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates
◆ Control port access through IEEE 802.1X security or static address filtering
– 49 –
Chapter 1 | Initial Switch Configuration
◆ Filter packets using Access Control Lists (ACLs)

◆ Configure up to 4093 IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
◆ Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration
◆ Configure IP routing for unicast traffic
◆ Configure IGMP multicast filtering
◆ Upload and download system firmware or configuration files via HTTP (using
the web interface) or FTP/TFTP (using the command line or web interface)
◆ Configure Spanning Tree parameters
◆ Configure Class of Service (CoS) priority queuing
◆ Configure static or LACP trunks (up to 16)
◆ Enable port mirroring
◆ Set storm control on any port for excessive broadcast, multicast, or unknown
unicast traffic
◆ Display system information and statistics
◆ Configure any stack unit through the same IP address
Connecting to the The switch provides an RS-232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or
Console Port terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch. A null-modem console cable is
provided with the switch.
Note: When configuring a stack, connect to the console port on the Master unit.
Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation program

to the switch. You can use the console cable provided with this package, or use a
null-modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the
Installation Guide.
To connect a terminal to the console port, complete the following steps:
1. Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC running

terminal emulation software, and tighten the captive retaining screws on the
DB-9 connector.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RS-45 serial port on the switch.
3. Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:

■ Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or COM port 2).
■ Set the baud rate to 115200 bps.
■ Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
■ Set flow control to none.
– 50 –
■ Set the emulation mode to VT100.

■ When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys.
4. Power on the switch.

After the system completes the boot cycle, the logon screen appears.
Logging Onto the The CLI program provides two different command levels — normal access level
Command Line (Normal Exec) and privileged access level (Privileged Exec). The commands
Interface available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the
Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic
utilities. To fully configure the switch parameters, you must access the CLI at the
Privileged Exec level.
Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords. The switch
has a default user name and password for each level. To log into the CLI at the
Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password, perform these
steps:
1. To initiate your console connection, press <Enter>. The “User Access

Verification” procedure starts.
2. At the User Name prompt, enter “admin.”
3. At the Password prompt, also enter “admin.” (The password characters are not
displayed on the console screen.)
4. The session is opened and the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt indicating
you have access at the Privileged Exec level.
Setting Passwords If this is your first time to log into the CLI program, you should define new
passwords for both default user names using the “username” command, record
them and put them in a safe place.
Passwords can consist of up to 32 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive.

To prevent unauthorized access to the switch, set the passwords as follows:
1. Open the console interface with the default user name and password “admin”
to access the Privileged Exec level.
2. Type “configure” and press <Enter>.
3. Type “username guest password 0 password,” for the Normal Exec level, where
password is your new password. Press <Enter>.
4. Type “username admin password 0 password,” for the Privileged Exec level,
where password is your new password. Press <Enter>.
– 51 –
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the ECS4510-28T* is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console#configure
Console(config)#username guest password 0 [password]
Console(config)#username admin password 0 [password]
Console(config)#
* This manual covers the ECS4510-28T/52T Gigabit Ethernet switches, the

ECS4510-28F/28F-DC Gigabit Ethernet fiber switches, and the ECS4510-28P/52P
Gigabit Ethernet PoE switches. Other than the difference in port types, and
support for PoE (ECS4510-28P/52P), there are no other significant differences.
Therefore most of the screen display examples are based on the ECS4510-28T.
Remote Connections Prior to accessing the switch’s onboard agent via a network connection, you must
first configure it with a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address, subnet mask, and default gateway
using a console connection, or DHCP protocol.
An IPv4 address for the switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To manually
configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP, see
“Setting an IP Address” on page 56.
After configuring the switch’s IP parameters, you can access the onboard
configuration program from anywhere within the attached network. The onboard
configuration program can be accessed using Telnet or SSH from any computer
attached to the network. The switch can also be managed by any computer using a
web browser (Internet Explorer 6, Mozilla Firefox 4, or Google Chrome 29, or more
recent versions), or from a network computer using SNMP network management
software.
Note: This switch supports eight Telnet sessions or SSH sessions.

Note: Any VLAN group can be assigned an IP interface address (page 56) for
managing the switch. Also, note that the Master unit does not have to include an
active port member in the VLAN interface used for management access.
The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions. To

access the full range of SNMP management functions, you must use SNMP-based
network management software.
– 52 –
Stack Operations
Stack Operations
Up to eight switches can be stacked together as described in the Installation Guide.
One unit in the stack acts as the Master for configuration tasks and firmware
upgrade. All of the other units function in Slave mode, but can automatically take
over management of the stack if the Master unit fails.
To configure any unit in the stack, first verify the unit number from the front panel
indicator on the switch, and then select the appropriate unit number from the web
or console management interface.
Selecting the Note the following points about unit numbering:

Stack Master
◆ When the stack is initially powered on, the Master unit is selected based on the
following rules:
■ If the stack master button has been enabled with the switch master button
command on only one unit in the stack, that unit will serve as the stack
Master.
■ If the stack master button has been enabled on more than one unit, the
system will select the unit with the lowest MAC address as the stack Master
from those with the stack master button enabled.
■ If the stack master button is not enabled on any unit, the system will select
the unit with the lowest MAC address as the stack Master.
◆ When the stack is initially powered on, the Master unit is designated as unit 1
for a ring topology. For a line topology, the stack is simply numbered from top
to bottom, with the first unit in the stack designated at unit 1. This unit
identification number appears on the Stack Unit ID LED on the front panel of
the switch. Any unit in the stack can be selected on the front panel graphic of
the web interface (from the Unit scroll-down list), or from the CLI (as specified
by the “unit” parameter for applicable commands).
◆ If the Master unit fails and another unit takes over control of the stack, the unit
numbering will not change.
◆ If a unit in the stack fails or is removed from the stack, the unit numbers will not
change. This means that when you replace a unit in the stack, the original
configuration for the failed unit will be restored to the replacement unit.
◆ If a unit is removed from the stack and later reattached to the stack, it will retain
the original unit number obtained during stacking.
◆ If a unit is removed from the stack, and powered up as a stand-alone unit, it will
also retain the original unit number obtained during stacking.
– 53 –
Stack Operations
Selecting the Once the Master unit finishes booting up, it continues to synchronize configuration
Backup Unit information to all of the Slave units in the stack. If the Master unit fails or is powered
off, a new master unit will be selected based on the election rules described in the
preceding section. The backup unit elected to serve as the new stack Master will
take control of the stack without any loss of configuration settings. To ensure a
logical fail over to the next unit down in the stack, place the Slave unit with the
lowest MAC address directly beneath the Master unit in the stack.
Recovering from When a link or unit in the stack fails, a trap message is sent and a failure event is
Stack Failure or logged. The stack will be rebooted after any system failure or topology change. It
Topology Change takes two to three minutes to for the stack to reboot. If the Master unit fails, the
backup unit will take over operations as the new Master unit, reboot the stack, and
then select another backup unit after the stack finishes rebooting. Also note that
powering down a unit or inserting a new unit in the stack will cause the stack to
reboot. If a unit is removed from the stack (due to a power down or failure) or a new
unit added to the stack, the original unit IDs are not affected after rebooting, and a
new unit is assigned the lowest available unit ID.
Broken Link for Line and Wrap-around Topologies

All units in the stack must be connected via stacking cable. You can connect the
units in a simple cascade configuration from the top to the bottom unit. Using this
kind of line topology, if any link or unit in the stack fails, the stack will be broken in
two.
When the stack fails, a Master unit is selected from the two stack segments, either
the unit with the Master button enabled, or the unit with the lowest MAC address if
the Master button is not enabled on any unit. The stack reboots and resumes
operations. However, note that the IP address will be the same for any common
VLANs (with active port connections) that appear in both of the new stack
segments. To resolve the conflicting IP addresses, you should manually replace the
failed link or unit as soon as possible. If you are using a wrap-around stack topology,
a single point of failure in the stack will not cause the stack to fail. It would take two
or more points of failure to break the stack apart.
Note: If a stack breaks apart, the IP address will be the same for any common
VLANs (with active port connections) that appear in both stack segments.
Resilient IP Interface for Management Access

The stack functions as one integral system for management and configuration
purposes. You can therefore manage the stack through any IP interface configured
on the stack. The Master unit does not even have to include an active port member
in the VLAN interface used for management access. However, if the unit to which
you normally connect for management access fails, and there are no active port
members on the other units within this VLAN interface, then this IP address will no
longer be available. To retain a constant IP address for management access across
– 54 –
Stack Operations
failover events, you should include port members on several units within the
primary VLAN used for stack management.
Resilient Configuration
If a unit in the stack fails, the unit numbers will not change. This means that when
you replace a unit in the stack, the original configuration for the failed unit will be
restored to the replacement unit. This applies to both the Master and Slave units.
Renumbering The startup configuration file maps configuration settings to each switch in the
the Stack stack based on the unit identification number. If the units are no longer numbered
sequentially after several topology changes or failures, you can reset the unit
numbers using the System > Stacking (Renumber) menu in the web interface or the
switch all renumber command in the CLI. Just remember to save the new
configuration settings to a startup configuration file prior to powering off the stack
Master.
Ensuring Consistent Consistent Runtime Code in Each Switch – The main board runtime firmware
Code is Used Across version for each unit in the stack must be the same as the Master unit’s runtime
the Stack firmware. After Auto-ID assignment is completed, the Master unit checks the image
versions for consistency. If the firmware versions (i.e., runtime code) configured for
bootup on any slave units are not the same as those on the Master unit, the stack
will operate in Special Stacking Mode in which all backup units are disabled as
described below:
◆ The master unit starts normal operation mode in standalone mode.
◆ The master unit can see all units in the stack and maintain stack topology.
◆ None of the other units can function (all ports will be disabled).
◆ All user-initiated commands to configure the non-functioning units are

dropped. The master unit, however, will be able to communicate the following
information to the non-functioning units:
■ Image downloads
■ Stack topology information
■ System configuration information already stored on the master.
In Special Stacking mode, the master unit displays warning messages whenever
you log into the system through the CLI that inform you that an image download is
required.
You can use the CLI, web or SNMP to download the runtime image from an FTP or
TFTP server to the master unit. The master unit stores the image as its “Next boot
image” and downloads the image to those backup units that are running a different
image version.
– 55 –
Configuring the Switch for Remote Management
Using the Network The switch can be managed through the operational network, known as in-band
Interface management. Because in-band management traffic is mixed in with operational
network traffic, it is subject to all of the filtering rules usually applied to a standard
network ports such as ACLs and VLAN tagging. In-band network management can
be accessed via a connection to any network port (1-28/52).
Setting an IP Address You must establish IP address information for a stand-alone switch or a stack to
obtain management access through the network. This can be done in either of the
following ways:
◆ Manual — You have to input the information, including IP address and subnet
mask. If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch,
you will also need to specify the default gateway router.
◆ Dynamic — The switch can send IPv4 configuration requests to BOOTP or

DHCP address allocation servers on the network, or can automatically generate
a unique IPv6 host address based on the local subnet address prefix received in
router advertisement messages. An IPv6 link local address for use in a local
network can also be dynamically generated as described in “Obtaining an IPv6
Address” on page 60.
Manual Configuration
You can manually assign an IP address to the switch. You may also need to specify a
default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that
exist on another network segment. Valid IPv4 addresses consist of four decimal
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be
accepted by the CLI program.
Note: The IPv4 address for VLAN 1 is obtained via DHCP by default.
Assigning an IPv4 Address

Before you can assign an IP address to the switch, you must obtain the following
information from your network administrator:
◆ IP address for the switch
◆ Network mask for this network
◆ Default gateway for the network
– 56 –
To assign an IPv4 address to the switch, complete the following steps
1. From the Global Configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access
the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.
2. Type “ip address ip-address netmask,” where “ip-address” is the switch IP

address and “netmask” is the network mask for the network. Press <Enter>.
3. Type “exit” to return to the global configuration mode prompt. Press <Enter>.
4. To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch
belongs, type “ip default-gateway gateway,” where “gateway” is the IP address
of the default gateway. Press <Enter>.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254
Assigning an IPv6 Address

This section describes how to configure a “link local” address for connectivity
within the local subnet only, and also how to configure a “global unicast” address,
including a network prefix for use on a multi-segment network and the host
portion of the address.
An IPv6 prefix or address must be formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6

Addressing Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One
double colon may be used to indicate the appropriate number of zeros required to
fill the undefined fields. For detailed information on the other ways to assign IPv6
addresses, see “IPv6 Interface” on page 855.
Link Local Address — All link-local addresses must be configured with a prefix in
the range of FE80~FEBF. Remember that this address type makes the switch
accessible over IPv6 for all devices attached to the same local subnet only. Also, if
the switch detects that the address you configured conflicts with that in use by
another device on the subnet, it will stop using the address in question, and
automatically generate a link local address that does not conflict with any other
devices on the local subnet.
To configure an IPv6 link local address for the switch, complete the following steps:
2. Type “ipv6 address” followed by up to 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal

values for the ipv6-address similar to that shown in the example, followed by
the “link-local” command parameter. Then press <Enter>.
– 57 –
Console(config-if)#ipv6 address FE80::260:3EFF:FE11:6700 link-local
Console(config-if)#ipv6 enable
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show ipv6 interface
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled.
Link-local address:
fe80::260:3eff:fe11:6700%1/64
Global unicast address(es):
(None)
Joined group address(es):
ff02::1:ff11:6700
ff02::1
IPv6 link MTU is 1500 bytes
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3.
ND retransmit interval is 1000 milliseconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds
ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds
ND advertised router lifetime is 1800 seconds
Console#
Address for Multi-segment Network — Before you can assign an IPv6 address to the
switch that will be used to connect to a multi-segment network, you must obtain
the following information from your network administrator:
◆ Prefix for this network
◆ IP address for the switch
◆ Default gateway for the network
For networks that encompass several different subnets, you must define the full
address, including a network prefix and the host address for the switch. You can
specify either the full IPv6 address, or the IPv6 address and prefix length. The prefix
length for an IPv6 network is the number of bits (from the left) of the prefix that
form the network address, and is expressed as a decimal number. For example, all
IPv6 addresses that start with the first byte of 73 (hexadecimal) could be expressed
as 73:0:0:0:0:0:0:0/8 or 73::/8.
To generate an IPv6 global unicast address for the switch, complete the following
steps:
1. From the global configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access
2. From the interface prompt, type “ipv6 address ipv6-address” or “ipv6 address
ipv6-address/prefix-length,” where “prefix-length” indicates the address bits
used to form the network portion of the address. (The network address starts
from the left of the prefix and should encompass some of the ipv6-address
bits.) The remaining bits are assigned to the host interface. Press <Enter>.
3. Type “exit” to return to the global configuration mode prompt. Press <Enter>.
– 58 –
4. To set the IP address of the IPv6 default gateway for the network to which the
switch belongs, type “ipv6 default-gateway gateway,” where “gateway” is the
IPv6 address of the default gateway. Press <Enter>.
Console(config-if)#ipv6 address 2001:DB8:2222:7272::/64
Console(config)#ipv6 default-gateway 2001:DB8:2222:7272::254
Console(config)end
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled.
Link-local address:
fe80::260:3eff:fe11:6700%1/64
2001:db8:2222:7272::/64, subnet is 2001:db8:2222:7272::/64
ff02::1:ff00:0
ff02::1:ff11:6700
ff02::1
Console#
Dynamic Configuration
Obtaining an IPv4 Address
If you select the “bootp” or “dhcp” option, the system will immediately start
broadcasting service requests. IP will be enabled but will not function until a
BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests are broadcast every few minutes
using exponential backoff until IP configuration information is obtained from a
BOOTP or DHCP server. BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway. If the DHCP/BOOTP server is slow to respond, you may
need to use the “ip dhcp restart client” command to re-start broadcasting service
requests.
Note that the “ip dhcp restart client” command can also be used to start
broadcasting service requests for all VLANs configured to obtain address
assignments through BOOTP or DHCP. It may be necessary to use this command
when DHCP is configured on a VLAN, and the member ports which were previously
shut down are now enabled.
If the “bootp” or “dhcp” option is saved to the startup-config file (step 6), then the
switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on.
– 59 –
To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP

address allocation servers on the network, complete the following steps:
2. At the interface-configuration mode prompt, use one of the following

commands:
■ To obtain IP settings via DHCP, type “ip address dhcp” and press <Enter>.
■ To obtain IP settings via BOOTP, type “ip address bootp” and press <Enter>.
3. Type “end” to return to the Privileged Exec mode. Press <Enter>.
4. Wait a few minutes, and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the
“show ip interface” command. Press <Enter>.
5. Then save your configuration changes by typing “copy running-config startup-

config.” Enter the startup file name and press <Enter>.
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
Console#show ip interface
VLAN 1 is Administrative Up - Link Up
Address is 00-E0-0C-00-00-FD
Index: 1001, MTU: 1500
Address Mode is DHCP
Proxy ARP is disabled
DHCP Client Vendor Class ID (text): ECS4510-28T
DHCP relay server: 0.0.0.0
Console#copy running-config startup-config
Startup configuration file name []: startup
\Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Obtaining an IPv6 Address

Link Local Address — There are several ways to configure IPv6 addresses. The
simplest method is to automatically generate a “link local” address (identified by an
address prefix in the range of FE80~FEBF). This address type makes the switch
accessible over IPv6 for all devices attached to the same local subnet.
To generate an IPv6 link local address for the switch, complete the following steps:
2. Type “ipv6 enable” and press <Enter>.
– 60 –
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled.
Link-local address:
fe80::2e0:cff:fe00:fd%1/64

(None)
ff02::1:ff00:fd
ff02::1


Console#
Address for Multi-segment Network — To generate an IPv6 address that can be

used in a network containing more than one subnet, the switch can be configured
to automatically generate a unique host address based on the local subnet address
prefix received in router advertisement messages, and subsequently from a
DHCPv6 server. (For more information, see the description for the “Restart DHCPv6”
parameter under “IPv6 Interface” on page 855.)
To dynamically generate an IPv6 host address for the switch, complete the
following steps:
2. From the interface prompt, type “ipv6 address autoconfig” and press <Enter>.
3. Type “ipv6 enable” and press <Enter> to enable IPv6 on an interface that has
not been configured with an explicit IPv6 address.
Console(config-if)#ipv6 address autoconfig
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled
Link-local address:
fe80::260:3eff:fe11:6700%1/64
– 61 –
Enabling SNMP Management Access

2001:db8:2222:7272::/64, subnet is 2001:db8:2222:7272::/64[AUTOCONFIG]
valid lifetime 2591978 preferred lifetime 604778
ff02::1:ff11:6700
ff02::1:ff00:0
ff02::1
Console#
If the DHCP is configured to assign a stateful address, the following type of address
settings will be assigned to the specified interface.
Console#ipv6 restart client vlan 1

VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled.
Link-local address:
fe80::2e0:cff:fe00:fd%1/64
(None)
ff02::1:ff00:fd
ff02::1
Console#

The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) applications such as Edge-Core ECView Pro.
You can configure the switch to respond to SNMP requests or generate SNMP traps.
When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch (either to return
information or to set a parameter), the switch provides the requested data or sets
the specified parameter. The switch can also be configured to send information to
SNMP managers (without being requested by the managers) through trap
messages, which inform the manager that certain events have occurred.
– 62 –
The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1, 2c, and 3 clients.
To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients, you must specify a
community string. The switch provides a default MIB View (i.e., an SNMPv3
construct) for the default “public” community string that provides read access to
the entire MIB tree, and a default view for the “private” community string that
provides read/write access to the entire MIB tree. However, you may assign new
views to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security
requirements (see snmp-server view command).
Community Strings (for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients)

Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and
2c stations, as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the
switch. You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users, and set
the access level.
The default strings are:
◆ public - with read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able
to retrieve MIB objects.
◆ private - with read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to

both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients, it is

recommended that you change the default community strings.
To configure a community string, complete the following steps:
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type “snmp-
server community string mode,” where “string” is the community access string
and “mode” is rw (read/write) or ro (read only). Press <Enter>. (Note that the
default mode is read only.)
2. To remove an existing string, simply type “no snmp-server community string,”

where “string” is the community access string to remove. Press <Enter>.
Console(config)#snmp-server community admin rw

Console(config)#snmp-server community private
Console(config)#
Note: If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients, we
recommend that you delete both of the default community strings. If there are no
community strings, then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients
is disabled.
– 63 –
Trap Receivers
You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch. To
configure a trap receiver, use the “snmp-server host” command. From the
Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type:
“snmp-server host host-address community-string [version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth |
noauth | priv}}]”
where “host-address” is the IP address for the trap receiver, “community-string”
specifies access rights for a version 1/2c host, or is the user name of a version 3 host,
“version” indicates the SNMP client version, and “auth | noauth | priv” means that
authentication, no authentication, or authentication and privacy is used for v3
clients. Then press <Enter>. For a more detailed description of these parameters,
see the snmp-server host command. The following example creates a trap host for
each type of SNMP client.
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman

Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.98 robin version 2c
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.34 barbie version 3 auth
Console(config)#
Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients

To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients, you need to first create a
view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write, assign the
view to a group, and then assign the user to a group. The following example creates
one view called “mib-2” that includes the entire MIB-2 tree branch, and then
another view that includes the IEEE 802.1d bridge MIB. It assigns these respective
read and read/write views to a group call “r&d” and specifies group authentication
via MD5 or SHA. In the last step, it assigns a v3 user to this group, indicating that
MD5 will be used for authentication, provides the password “greenpeace” for
authentication, and the password “einstien” for encryption.
Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included

Console(config)#snmp-server view 802.1d 1.3.6.1.2.1.17 included
Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth read mib-2 write 802.1d
Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv
des56 einstien
Console(config)#
For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from
SNMP v3 clients, refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 185.
– 64 –
Managing System Files

The switch’s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be
managed by the CLI program, the web interface, or SNMP. The switch’s file system
allows files to be uploaded and downloaded, copied, deleted, and set as a start-up
file.
The types of files are:
◆ Configuration — This file type stores system configuration information and is

created when configuration settings are saved. Saved configuration files can be
selected as a system start-up file or can be uploaded via FTP/TFTP to a server
for backup. The file named “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” contains all the system
default settings and cannot be deleted from the system. If the system is booted
with the factory default settings, the switch will also create a file named
“startup1.cfg” that contains system settings for switch initialization, including
information about the unit identifier, and MAC address for the switch. The
configuration settings from the factory defaults configuration file are copied to
this file, which is then used to boot the switch. See “Saving or Restoring
Configuration Settings” on page 66 for more information.
◆ Operation Code — System software that is executed after boot-up, also known
as run-time code. This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI
and web management interfaces. See “File Management” on page 123 for
more information.
◆ Diagnostic Code — Software that is run during system boot-up, also known as
POST (Power On Self-Test).
Note: The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the
FTP/TFTP server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new
firmware, or contact your distributor for help.
Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation
code files. However, you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration
files as available flash memory space allows. The switch has a total of 128 Mbytes of
flash memory for system files.
In the system flash memory, one file of each type must be set as the start-up file.
During a system boot, the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start-up file
are run, and then the start-up configuration file is loaded.
Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects
the contents or usage of the file settings. If you download directly to the running-
config, the system will reboot, and the settings will have to be copied from the
running-config to a permanent file.
– 65 –
Upgrading the The following example shows how to download new firmware to the switch and
Operation Code activate it. The TFTP server could be any standards-compliant server running on
Windows or Linux. When downloading from an FTP server, the logon interface will
prompt for a user name and password configured on the remote server. Note that
“anonymous” is set as the default user name.
File names on the switch are case-sensitive. The destination file name should not
contain slashes (\ or /), and the maximum length for file names is 32 characters for
files on the switch or 128 characters for files on the server. (Valid characters: A-Z,
a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”)
Console#copy tftp file

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19
Choose file type:
1. config: 2. opcode: 2
Source file name: m360.bix
Destination file name: m360.bix
-Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#config
Console(config)#boot system opcode: m360.bix
Console(config)#exit
Console#dir
File Name Type Startup Modify Time Size(bytes)
-------------------------- -------------- ------- ------------------- ----------
Unit 1:
m360.bix OpCode Y 2013-02-25 15:41:04 25812529
m355.bix OpCode N 2012-12-04 13:23:59 25783857
Factory_Default_Config.cfg Config N 2012-12-04 13:18:37 455
startup1.cfg Config Y 2013-03-21 05:39:15 3463
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Free space for compressed user config files:1593241600
Console#
Saving or Restoring Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not
Configuration saved when the switch is rebooted. To save all your configuration changes in
Settings nonvolatile storage, you must copy the running configuration file to the start-up
configuration file using the “copy” command.
New startup configuration files must have a name specified. File names on the
switch are case-sensitive, can be from 1 to 31 characters, must not contain slashes
(\ or /), and the leading letter of the file name must not be a period (.). (Valid
characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
There can be more than one user-defined configuration file saved in the switch’s
flash memory, but only one is designated as the “startup” file that is loaded when
the switch boots. The copy running-config startup-config command always sets
the new file as the startup file. To select a previously saved configuration file, use
the boot system config:<filename> command.
– 66 –
Automatic Installation of Operation Code and Configuration Settings
The maximum number of saved configuration files depends on available flash

memory. The amount of available flash memory can be checked by using the dir
command.
To save the current configuration settings, enter the following command:
1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy running-config startup-
config” and press <Enter>.
2. Enter the name of the start-up file. Press <Enter>.
Console#copy running-config startup-config

Startup configuration file name []: startup

Success.
Console#
To restore configuration settings from a backup server, enter the following

command:
1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy tftp startup-config” and
press <Enter>.
2. Enter the address of the TFTP server. Press <Enter>.
3. Enter the name of the startup file stored on the server. Press <Enter>.
4. Enter the name for the startup file on the switch. Press <Enter>.
Console#copy tftp startup-config

TFTP server IP address: 192.168.0.4
Source configuration file name: startup-rd.cfg
Startup configuration file name [startup1.cfg]:
Success.
Console#
Downloading Automatic Operation Code Upgrade can automatically download an operation

Operation Code from code file when a file newer than the currently installed one is discovered on the file
a File Server server. After the file is transferred from the server and successfully written to the file
system, it is automatically set as the startup file, and the switch is rebooted.
– 67 –
Usage Guidelines
◆ If this feature is enabled, the switch searches the defined URL once during the
bootup sequence.
◆ FTP (port 21) and TFTP (port 69) are both supported. Note that the TCP/UDP
port bindings cannot be modified to support servers listening on non-standard
ports.
◆ The host portion of the upgrade file location URL must be a valid IPv4 IP
address. DNS host names are not recognized. Valid IP addresses consist of four
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.
◆ The path to the directory must also be defined. If the file is stored in the root
directory for the FTP/TFTP service, then use the “/” to indicate this (e.g., ftp://
192.168.0.1/).
◆ The file name must not be included in the upgrade file location URL. The file
name of the code stored on the remote server must be ECS4510-28T.bix (using
lower case letters as indicated).
◆ The FTP connection is made with PASV mode enabled. PASV mode is needed to
traverse some fire walls, even if FTP traffic is not blocked. PASV mode cannot be
disabled.
◆ The switch-based search function is case-insensitive in that it will accept a file

name in upper or lower case (i.e., the switch will accept ECS4510-28T.BIX from
the server even though ECS4510-28T.bix was requested). However, keep in mind
that the file systems of many operating systems such as Unix and most Unix-
like systems (FreeBSD, NetBSD, OpenBSD, and most Linux distributions, etc.) are
case-sensitive, meaning that two files in the same directory, ecs4510-28t.bix and
ECS4510-28T.BIX are considered to be unique files. Thus, if the upgrade file is
stored as ECS4510-28T.BIX (or even Ecs4510-28t.bix) on a case-sensitive server,
then the switch (requesting ECS4510-28T.bix) will not be upgraded because the
server does not recognize the requested file name and the stored file name as
being equal. A notable exception in the list of case-sensitive Unix-like operating
systems is Mac OS X, which by default is case-insensitive. Please check the
documentation for your server’s operating system if you are unsure of its file
system’s behavior.
◆ Note that the switch itself does not distinguish between upper and lower-case
file names, and only checks to see if the file stored on the server is more recent
than the current runtime image.
◆ If two operation code image files are already stored on the switch’s file system,
then the non-startup image is deleted before the upgrade image is transferred.
◆ The automatic upgrade process will take place in the background without
impeding normal operations (data switching, etc.) of the switch.
– 68 –
◆ During the automatic search and transfer process, the administrator cannot
transfer or update another operation code image, configuration file, public key,
or HTTPS certificate (i.e., no other concurrent file management operations are
possible).
◆ The upgrade operation code image is set as the startup image after it has been
successfully written to the file system.
◆ The switch will send an SNMP trap and make a log entry upon all upgrade
successes and failures.
◆ The switch will immediately restart after the upgrade file is successfully written
to the file system and set as the startup image.
To enable automatic upgrade, enter the following commands:
1. Specify the TFTP or FTP server to check for new operation code.
■ When specifying a TFTP server, the following syntax must be used, where
filedir indicates the path to the directory containing the new image:
tftp://192.168.0.1[/filedir]/
■ When specifying an FTP server, the following syntax must be used, where
filedir indicates the path to the directory containing the new image:
ftp://[username[:password@]]192.168.0.1[/filedir]/
If the user name is omitted, “anonymous” will be used for the connection. If
the password is omitted a null string (“”) will be used for the connection.
This shows how to specify a TFTP server where new code is stored.
Console(config)#upgrade opcode path tftp://192.168.0.1/sm24/

Console(config)#
This shows how to specify an FTP server where new code is stored.
Console(config)#upgrade opcode path ftp://admin:billy@192.168.0.1/sm24/

Console(config)#
2. Set the switch to automatically reboot and load the new code after the opcode
upgrade is completed.
Console(config)#upgrade opcode reload

Console(config)#
3. Set the switch to automatically upgrade the current operational code when a
new version is detected on the server. When the switch starts up and automatic
– 69 –
image upgrade is enabled by this command, the switch will follow these steps
when it boots up:
a. It will search for a new version of the image at the location specified by
upgrade opcode path command. The name for the new image stored on
the TFTP server must be ECS4510-28T.bix. If the switch detects a code
version newer than the one currently in use, it will download the new
image. If two code images are already stored in the switch, the image not
set to start up the system will be overwritten by the new version.
b. After the image has been downloaded, the switch will send a trap message
to log whether or not the upgrade operation was successful.
c. It sets the new version as the startup image.
d. It then restarts the system to start using the new image.
Console(config)#upgrade opcode auto

Console(config)#
4. Display the automatic upgrade settings.
Console#show upgrade
Auto Image Upgrade Global Settings:
Status : Enabled
Reload Status : Enabled
Path :
File Name : ECS4510-Series.bix
Console#
Specifying a DHCP DHCP servers index their database of address bindings using the client’s Media
Client Identifier Access Control (MAC) Address or a unique client identifier. The client identifier is
used to identify the vendor class and configuration of the switch to the DHCP
server, which then uses this information to decide on how to service the client or
the type of information to return.
DHCP client Identifier (Option 60) is used by DHCP clients to specify their unique
identifier. The client identifier is optional and can be specified while configuring
DHCP on the primary network interface. DHCP Option 60 is disabled by default.
The general framework for this DHCP option is set out in RFC 2132 (Option 60). This
information is used to convey configuration settings or other identification
information about a client, but the specific string to use should be supplied by your
service provider or network administrator. Options 60 (vendor-class-identifier), 66
(tftp-server-name) and 67 (bootfile-name) statements can be added to the server
daemon’s configuration file as described in the following section.
If the DHCP server has an index entry for a switch requesting service, it should reply
with the TFTP server name and boot file name. Note that the vendor class identifier
– 70 –
can be formatted in either text or hexadecimal, but the format used by both the
client and server must be the same.
Console(config-if)#ip dhcp client class-id hex 0000e8666572
Console(config-if)#
Downloading a Information passed on to the switch from a DHCP server may also include a
Configuration File and configuration file to be downloaded and the TFTP servers where that file can be
Other Parameters accessed, as well as other parameters. If the Factory Default Configuration file is
Provided by a DHCP used to provision the switch at startup, in addition to requesting IP configuration
Server settings from the DHCP server, it will also ask for the name of a bootup
configuration file and TFTP servers where that file is stored.
If the switch receives information that allows it to download the remote bootup file,
it will save this file to a local buffer, and then restart the provision process.
Note the following DHCP client behavior:
◆ To enable dynamic provisioning via a DHCP server, this feature must be enabed
using the ip dhcp dynamic-provision command.
◆ The bootup configuration file received from a TFTP server is stored on the
switch with the original file name. If this file name already exists in the switch,
the file is overwritten.
◆ If the name of the bootup configuration file is the same as the Factory Default
Configuration file, the download procedure will be terminated, and the switch
will not send any further DHCP client requests.
◆ If the switch fails to download the bootup configuration file based on

information passed by the DHCP server, it will not send any further DHCP client
requests.
◆ If the switch does not receive a DHCP response prior to completing the bootup
process, it will continue to send a DHCP client request once a minute. These
requests will only be terminated if the switch’s address is manually configured,
but will resume if the address mode is set back to DHCP.
– 71 –
To successfully transmit a bootup configuration file to the switch, the DHCP

daemon (using a Linux based system for this example) must be configured with the
following information:
◆ Options 60, 66 and 67 statements can be added to the daemon’s configuration

file.
Table 1: Options 60, 66 and 67 Statements

Statement
Option
Keyword Parameter
60 vendor-class-identifier a string indicating the vendor class identifier
66 tftp-server-name a string indicating the tftp server name
67 bootfile-name a string indicating the bootfile name
◆ By default, DHCP option 66/67 parameters are not carried in a DHCP server
reply. To ask for a DHCP reply with option 66/67 information, the DHCP client
request sent by this switch includes a “parameter request list” asking for this
information. Besides these items, the client request also includes a “vendor
class identifier” that allows the DHCP server to identify the device, and select
the appropriate configuration file for download. This information is included in
Option 55 and 124.
Table 2: Options 55 and 124 Statements

Statement
Option
Keyword Parameter
55 dhcp-parameter-request-list a list of parameters, separated by a comma ', '
The following configuration example is provided for a Linux-based DHCP daemon

(dhcpd.conf file). In the “Vendor class” section, the server will always send Option
66 and 67 to tell the switch to download the “test” configuration file from server
192.168.255.101.
ddns-update-style ad-hoc;
default-lease-time 600;
max-lease-time 7200;
log-facility local7;
server-name "Server1";
Server-identifier 192.168.255.250;
#option 66, 67
option space dynamicProvision code width 1 length 1 hash size 2;
option dynamicProvision.tftp-server-name code 66 = text;
option dynamicProvision.bootfile-name code 67 = text;
– 72 –
Setting the System Clock
subnet 192.168.255.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {

range 192.168.255.160 192.168.255.200;
option routers 192.168.255.101;
option tftp-server-name "192.168.255.100"; #Default Option 66
option bootfile-name "bootfile"; #Default Option 67
}
class "Option66,67_1" { #DHCP Option 60 Vendor class

two
match if option vendor-class-identifier = "ecs4510-28t.cfg";
option tftp-server-name "192.168.255.101";
option bootfile-name "test";
}
Note: Use “ecs4510-28t.cfg” for the vendor-class-identifier in the dhcpd.conf file.

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) or Network Time Protocol (NTP) can be used
to set the switch’s internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server.
Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record
meaningful dates and times for event entries. You can also manually set the clock. If
the clock is not set manually or via SNTP or NTP, the switch will only record the time
from the factory default set at the last bootup.
When the SNTP client is enabled, the switch periodically sends a request for a time
update to a configured time server. You can configure up to three time server IP
addresses. The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.
The switch also supports the following time settings:
◆ Time Zone – You can specify the offset from Coordinated Universal Time (UTC),
also known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
◆ Summer Time/Daylight Saving Time (DST) – In some regions, the time shifts by
one hour in the fall and spring. The switch supports manual entry for one-time
or recurring clock shifts.
Setting the Time To manually set the clock to 14:11:36, April 1st, 2013, enter this command.
Manually
Console#calendar set 14 11 36 1 April 2013
Console#
To set the time zone, enter a command similar to the following.
Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 after-UTC

Console(config)#
– 73 –
To set the time shift for summer time, enter a command similar to the following.
Console(config)#clock summer-time SUMMER date 2 april 2013 0 0 30 june 2013 0

0
Console(config)#
To display the clock configuration settings, enter the following command.
Console#show calendar
Current Time : Apr 2 15:56:12 2013
Time Zone : UTC, 08:00
Summer Time : SUMMER, offset 60 minutes
Apr 2 2013 00:00 to Jun 30 2013 00:00
Summer Time in Effect : Yes
Console#
Configuring SNTP Setting the clock based on an SNTP server can provide more accurate clock
synchronization across network switches than manually-configured time. To
configure SNTP, set the switch as an SNTP client, and then set the polling interval,
and specify a time server as shown in the following example.
Console(config)#sntp client
Console(config)#sntp poll 60
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19
Console#show sntp
Poll Interval : 60 seconds
Current Mode : Unicast
SNTP Status : Enabled
SNTP Server : 10.1.0.19
Current Server : 10.1.0.19
Console#
Configuring NTP Requesting the time from a an NTP server is the most secure method. You can
enable NTP authentication to ensure that reliable updates are received from only
authorized NTP servers. The authentication keys and their associated key number
must be centrally managed and manually distributed to NTP servers and clients.
The key numbers and key values must match on both the server and client.
When more than one time server is configured, the client will poll all of the time
servers, and compare the responses to determine the most reliable and accurate
time update for the switch.
To configure NTP time synchronization, enter commands similar to the following.
Console(config)#ntp client
Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 45 md5 thisiskey45
Console(config)#ntp authenticate
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.20
– 74 –

Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.5.23 key 19
Console#show ntp
Polling : 1024 seconds
Current Mode : unicast
NTP Status : Enabled
NTP Authenticate Status : Enabled
Last Update NTP Server : 192.168.0.88 Port: 123
Last Update Time : Mar 12 02:41:01 2013 UTC
NTP Server 192.168.0.88 version 3
NTP Server 192.168.4.22 version 3 key 19
NTP Authentication Key 19 md5 42V68751663T6K11P2J307210R885

NTP Status : Enabled
Last Update Time : Apr 2 16:00:00 2013 UTC
NTP Authentication Key 45 md5 2662T75S5658RU5424180034777
Console#
– 75 –
– 76 –
Section II
Command Line Interface
This section provides a detailed description of the Command Line Interface, along
with examples for all of the commands.
This section includes these chapters:
◆ “Using the Command Line Interface” on page 79
◆ “General Commands” on page 93
◆ “System Management Commands” on page 101
◆ “SNMP Commands” on page 185
◆ “Remote Monitoring Commands” on page 209
◆ “Flow Sampling Commands” on page 217
◆ “Authentication Commands” on page 223
◆ “General Security Measures” on page 289
◆ “Access Control Lists” on page 371
◆ “Interface Commands” on page 399
◆ “Link Aggregation Commands” on page 431
◆ “Power over Ethernet Commands” on page 445
◆ “Port Mirroring Commands” on page 451
◆ “Congestion Control Commands” on page 461
◆ “Loopback Detection Commands” on page 479
◆ “UniDirectional Link Detection Commands” on page 485
– 77 –
Section II | Command Line Interface
◆ “Address Table Commands” on page 493
◆ “Spanning Tree Commands” on page 501
◆ “ERPS Commands” on page 531
◆ “VLAN Commands” on page 563
◆ “Class of Service Commands” on page 609
◆ “Quality of Service Commands” on page 623
◆ “Multicast Filtering Commands” on page 643
◆ “LLDP Commands” on page 741
◆ “CFM Commands” on page 767
◆ “OAM Commands” on page 809
◆ “Domain Name Service Commands” on page 821
◆ “DHCP Commands” on page 829
◆ “IP Interface Commands” on page 843
◆ “IP Routing Commands” on page 893
– 78 –
2 Using the Command Line
Interface
This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).
Note: You can only access the console interface through the Master unit in the
stack.
Accessing the CLI

When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection
to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet or Secure Shell connection (SSH), the
switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the
prompt. Using the switch's command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering
commands on a UNIX system.
Console Connection To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:
1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user
names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of “admin” and
“guest.”) When the administrator user name and password is entered, the CLI
displays the “Console#” prompt and enters privileged access mode
(i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the guest user name and password is entered,
the CLI displays the “Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode
(i.e., Normal Exec).
2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:
User Access Verification
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the ECS4510-28T is opened.
Console#
– 79 –
Chapter 2 | Using the Command Line Interface
Accessing the CLI
Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your
management station and any network device you want to manage over the
network must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0
to 255, separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host
portion. For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, consists of a
network portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for
the Master unit, and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a
different IP subnet. For example,
Console(config)#
If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to

the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are
attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches the
network segment to which you are attached.
After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by
performing these steps:
1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the
device you want to access.
2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display
the “Vty-n#” prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged
access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vty-n>” for the guest to show that you
are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal Exec), where n indicates the number
of the current Telnet session.
3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:
Username: admin
Password:

Vty-0#
– 80 –
Entering Commands
Note: You can open up to eight sessions to the device via Telnet or SSH.
Entering Commands
This section describes how to enter CLI commands.
Keywords and A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a
Arguments command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the
command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show interfaces and status are
keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and 1/5
specifies the unit/port.
You can enter commands as follows:
◆ To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.
◆ To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required order. For
example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and display the startup
configuration, enter:
Console>enable
Console#show startup-config
◆ To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters

after the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the
administrator, enter:
Console(config)#username admin password 0 smith
Minimum The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a
Abbreviation command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an
entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.
Command If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a
Completion partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “logging history” example,
typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “logging.”
– 81 –
Entering Commands
Getting Help You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help
on Commands command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list
keywords or parameters.
Showing Commands
If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of
keywords or command groups. You can also display a list of valid keywords for a
specific command. For example, the command “show system ?” displays a list of
possible show commands:
Console#show ?
access-group Access groups
access-list Access lists
accounting Uses the specified accounting list
arp Information of ARP cache
authorization Enables EXEC accounting
auto-traffic-control Auto traffic control information
banner Banner info
bridge-ext Bridge extension information
cable-diagnostics Shows the information of cable diagnostics
calendar Date and time information
class-map Displays class maps
cluster Display cluster
collision-mac-address-table Show collision mac address
debug State of each debugging option
discard Discard packet
dns DNS information
dos-protection Shows the system dos-protection summary
information
dot1q-tunnel dot1q-tunnel
dot1x 802.1X content
efm Ethernet First Mile feature
erps Displays ERPS configuration
ethernet Shows Metro Ethernet information
garp GARP properties
gvrp GVRP interface information
history Shows history information
hosts Host information
interfaces Shows interface information
ip IP information
ipv6 IPv6 information
l2protocol-tunnel Layer 2 protocol tunneling configuration
lacp LACP statistics
line TTY line information
lldp LLDP
log Log records
logging Logging setting
loop Shows the information of loopback
loopback-detection Shows loopback detection information
mac MAC access list
mac-address-table Configuration of the address table
mac-vlan MAC-based VLAN information
management Shows management information
memory Memory utilization
mvr multicast vlan registration
mvr6 IPv6 Multicast VLAN registration
network-access Shows the entries of the secure port.
nlm Show notification log
ntp Network Time Protocol configuration
policy-map Displays policy maps
– 82 –
Entering Commands
port Port characteristics

port-channel Port channel information
power Shows power
power-save Shows the power saving information
pppoe Displays PPPoE configuration
privilege Shows current privilege level
process Device process
protocol-vlan Protocol-VLAN information
public-key Public key information
qos Quality of Service
queue Priority queue information
radius-server RADIUS server information
reload Shows the reload settings
rmon Remote monitoring information
rspan Display status of the current RSPAN
configuration
running-config Information on the running configuration
sflow Shows the sflow information
snmp Simple Network Management Protocol
configuration and statistics
snmp-server Displays SNMP server configuration
sntp Simple Network Time Protocol configuration
spanning-tree Spanning-tree configuration
ssh Secure shell server connections
startup-config Startup system configuration
subnet-vlan IP subnet-based VLAN information
switch stacking switch
system System information
tacacs-server TACACS server information
tech-support Technical information
time-range Time range
traffic-segmentation Traffic segmentation information
udld Displays UDLD information
upgrade Shows upgrade information
users Information about users logged in
version System hardware and software versions
vlan Shows virtual LAN settings
vlan-translation VLAN translation information
voice Shows the voice VLAN information
watchdog Displays watchdog status
web-auth Shows web authentication configuration
Console#show
The command “show interfaces ?” will display the following information:
Console#show interfaces ?
brief Shows brief interface description
counters Interface counters information
history Historical sample of interface counters information
protocol-vlan Protocol-VLAN information
status Shows interface status
switchport Shows interface switchport information
transceiver Interface of transceiver information
transceiver-threshold Interface of transceiver-threshold information
Console#
Show commands which display more than one page of information (e.g., show
running-config) pause and require you to press the [Space] bar to continue
displaying one more page, the [Enter] key to display one more line, or the [a] key to
– 83 –
Entering Commands
display the rest of the information without stopping. You can press any other key to
terminate the display.
Partial Keyword If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the
Lookup initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command
and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”
Console#show s?
sflow snmp snmp-server sntp spanning-tree
ssh startup-config subnet-vlan switch system
Console#show s
Negating the Effect of For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to cancel
Commands the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For
example, the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To
disable logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the
negation effect for all applicable commands.
Using Command The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll
History back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any
command displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and
then executed.
Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed
commands.
Understanding The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands
Command Modes generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters.
Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or
enable certain switching functions. These classes are further divided into different
modes. Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a
question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the
current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the
following table:
– 84 –
Entering Commands
Table 3: General Command Modes

Class Mode
Exec Normal
Privileged
Configuration Global* Access Control List

CFM
Class Map
DHCP
ERPS
IGMP Profile
Interface
Line
Multiple Spanning Tree
Policy Map
Router
Time Range
VLAN Database
* You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode.
You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.
Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and
password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command mode (or guest
mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt. Only a limited number of the
commands are available in this mode. You can access all commands only from the
Privileged Exec command mode (or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec
mode, open a new console session with the user name and password “admin.” The
system will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter
Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the enable
command, followed by the privileged level password “super.”
To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and passwords:
Username: admin
Password: [admin login password]

Console#
Username: guest
Password: [guest login password]

Console>enable
Password: [privileged level password]
Console#
– 85 –
Entering Commands
Configuration Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch
Commands settings. These commands modify the running configuration only and are not
saved when the switch is rebooted. To store the running configuration in non-
volatile storage, use the copy running-config startup-config command.
The configuration commands are organized into different modes:
◆ Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration,

and include commands such as hostname and snmp-server community.
◆ Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for packet
filtering.
◆ CFM Configuration - Configures connectivity monitoring using continuity

check messages, fault verification through loopback messages, and fault
isolation by examining end-to-end connections between Provider Edge
devices or between Customer Edge devices.
◆ Class Map Configuration - Creates a DiffServ class map for a specified traffic
type.
◆ DHCP Configuration - These commands are used to configure the DHCP server.
◆ ERPS Configuration – These commands configure Ethernet Ring Protection

Switching for increased availability of Ethernet rings commonly used in service
provider networks.
◆ IGMP Profile - Sets a profile group and enters IGMP filter profile configuration
mode.
◆ Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port configuration such

as speed-duplex and negotiation.
◆ Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and Telnet
configuration, and include command such as parity and databits.
◆ Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration - These commands configure settings for

the selected multiple spanning tree instance.
◆ Policy Map Configuration - Creates a DiffServ policy map for multiple interfaces.
◆ Router Configuration - These commands configure global settings for unicast

routing protocols.
◆ Time Range - Sets a time range for use by other functions, such as Access
Control Lists.
◆ VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN groups.
– 86 –
Entering Commands
To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in

Privileged Exec mode. The system prompt will change to “Console(config)#” which
gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands.
Console#configure
Console(config)#
To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following
commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode.
Table 4: Configuration Command Modes

Mode Command Prompt Page
Access Control access-list arp Console(config-arp-acl) 393

List access-list ip standard Console(config-std-acl) 372
access-list ip extended Console(config-ext-acl) 372
access-list ipv6 standard Console(config-std-ipv6-acl) 379
access-list ipv6 extended Console(config-ext-ipv6-acl) 379
access-list mac Console(config-mac-acl) 386
CFM ethernet cfm domain Console(config-ether-cfm) 773
Class Map class-map Console(config-cmap) 624
ERPS erps domain Console(config-erps) 534

Interface interface {ethernet port | port-channel id | Console(config-if ) 400
vlan id}
Line line {console | vty} Console(config-line) 138
MSTP spanning-tree mst-configuration Console(config-mstp) 508
Policy Map policy-map Console(config-pmap) 628
Router router rip Console(config-router) 899
Time Range time-range Console(config-time-range) 172
VLAN vlan database Console(config-vlan) 569
For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration
mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

.
.
.
Console(config)#
– 87 –
Entering Commands
Command Line Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters
Processing as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other
currently available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete
partial commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to
display a list of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes
for command-line processing:
Table 5: Keystroke Commands

Keystroke Function
Ctrl-A Shifts cursor to start of command line.
Ctrl-B Shifts cursor to the left one character.
Ctrl-C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt.
Ctrl-E Shifts cursor to end of command line.
Ctrl-F Shifts cursor to the right one character.
Ctrl-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.
Ctrl-L Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-N Enters the next command line in the history buffer.
Ctrl-P Enters the last command.
Ctrl-R Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Ctrl-W Deletes the last word typed.
Esc-B Moves the cursor back one word.
Esc-D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.
Esc-F Moves the cursor forward one word.
Delete key or Erases a mistake when entering a command.

backspace key
Showing Status There are various “show” commands which display configuration settings or the
Information status of specified processes. Many of these commands will not display any
information unless the switch is properly configured, and in some cases the
interface to which a command applies is up.
For example, if a static router port is configured, the corresponding show command
will not display any information unless IGMP snooping is enabled, and the link for
the static router port is up.
Console#configure
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11
Console(config)#end
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter
VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type
---- ------------------- -------
Console#configure
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping
– 88 –
CLI Command Groups
Console(config)#end
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter
VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type
---- ------------------- -------
1 Eth 1/11 Static
Console#
CLI Command Groups

The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown
below.
Table 6: Command Group Index

Command Group Description Page
General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode, 93

restarting the system, or quitting the CLI
System Management Display and setting of system information, basic modes of 101
operation, maximum frame size, file management, console
port and telnet settings, system logs, SMTP alerts, the system
clock, and switch clustering
Simple Network Activates authentication failure traps; configures community 185

Management Protocol access strings, and trap receivers
Remote Monitoring Supports statistics, history, alarm and event groups 209
Flow Sampling Used with a remote sFlow Collector to provide an accurate, 217
detailed and real-time overview of the types and levels of
traffic present on the network
User Authentication Configures user names and passwords, command privilege 223
levels, logon access using local or remote authentication,
management access through the web server, Telnet server
and Secure Shell; as well as port security, IEEE 802.1X port
access control, and restricted access based on specified IP
addresses, and PPPoE Intermediate Agent
General Security Measures Segregates traffic for clients attached to common data ports; 289
and prevents unauthorized access by configuring valid static
or dynamic addresses, web authentication, MAC address
authentication, filtering DHCP requests and replies, and
discarding invalid ARP responses
Access Control List Provides filtering for IPv4 frames (based on address, protocol, 371
TCP/UDP port number or TCP control code), IPv6 frames
(based on address, DSCP traffic class, or next header), or non-
IP frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type)
Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports, 399
aggregated links, and VLANs
Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; 431
configures Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks
Power over Ethernet* Configures power output for connected devices 445
Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the 451
data passing through or the performance of the monitored
port
– 89 –
CLI Command Groups
Table 6: Command Group Index (Continued)

Command Group Description Page
Congestion C ontrol Sets the input/output rate limits, traffic storm thresholds, and 461
thresholds for broadcast and multicast storms which can be
used to trigger configured rate limits or to shut down a port.
Loopback Detection Detects general loopback conditions caused by hardware 479

problems or faulty protocol settings
UniDirectional Link Detect and disables unidirectional links 485

Detection
Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses, 493
displays current entries, clears the table, or sets the aging time
Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 501
ERPS Configures Ethernet Ring Protection Switching for increased 531

availability of Ethernet rings commonly used in service
provider networks
VLANs Configures VLAN settings, and defines port membership for 563
VLAN groups; also enables or configures private VLANs,
protocol VLANs, voice VLANs, and QinQ tunneling
Class of Service Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict priority or 609
weighted round robin, relative weight for each priority queue,
also sets priority for DSCP
Quality of Service Configures Differentiated Services 623
Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query, profile, and proxy 643
parameters; specifies ports attached to a multicast router; also
configures multicast VLAN registration, and IPv6 MLD
snooping
Link Layer Discovery Configures LLDP settings to enable information discovery 741
Protocol about neighbor devices
Connectivity Fault Configures connectivity monitoring using continuity check 767

Management messages, fault verification through loopback messages, and
fault isolation by examining end-to-end connections
between Provider Edge devices or between Customer Edge
devices
OAM Configures Operations, Administration and Maintenance 809

remote management tools required to monitor and maintain
the links to subscriber CPEs
Domain Name Service Configures DNS services. 821
Dynamic Host Configures DHCP client, relay and server functions 829
Configuration Protocol
IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch interfaces; also 843

configures ARP parameters
IP Routing Configures static and dynamic unicast routing 893
Debug Displays debugging information for all key functions
These commands are not described in this manual.

Please refer to the prompt messages included in the CLI interface.
* ECS4510-28P/52P
– 90 –
CLI Command Groups
The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:
ACL (Access Control List Configuration)

CFM (Connectivity Fault Management Configuration)
CM (Class Map Configuration)
ERPS (Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Configuration)
GC (Global Configuration)
IC (Interface Configuration)
IPC (IGMP Profile Configuration)
LC (Line Configuration)
MST (Multiple Spanning Tree)
NE (Normal Exec)
PE (Privileged Exec)
PM (Policy Map Configuration)
RC (Router Configuration)
VC (VLAN Database Configuration)
– 91 –
CLI Command Groups
– 92 –
3 General Commands
The general commands are used to control the command access mode,
configuration mode, and other basic functions.
Table 7: General Commands

Command Function Mode
prompt Customizes the CLI prompt GC
reload Restarts the system at a specified time, after a specified delay, or at a GC

periodic interval
enable Activates privileged mode NE
quit Exits a CLI session NE, PE
show history Shows the command history buffer NE, PE
configure Activates global configuration mode PE
disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE
reload Restarts the system immediately PE
show reload Displays the current reload settings, and the time at which next PE
scheduled reload will take place
end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any config.

mode
exit Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI any mode
help Shows how to use help any mode
? Shows options for command completion (context sensitive) any mode
prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default
prompt.
Syntax
prompt string
no prompt
string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt.
(Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
Console
– 93 –
Chapter 3 | General Commands
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#prompt RD2
RD2(config)#
reload This command restarts the system at a specified time, after a specified delay, or at a
(Global Configuration) periodic interval. You can reboot the system immediately, or you can configure the
switch to reset after a specified amount of time. Use the cancel option to remove a
configured setting.
Syntax
reload {at hour minute [{month day | day month} [year]] |
in {hour hours | minute minutes | hour hours minute minutes} |
regularity hour minute [period {daily | weekly day-of-week | monthly day}] |
cancel [at | in | regularity]}
reload at - A specified time at which to reload the switch.
hour - The hour at which to reload. (Range: 0-23)
minute - The minute at which to reload. (Range: 0-59)
month - The month at which to reload. (january ... december)
day - The day of the month at which to reload. (Range: 1-31)
year - The year at which to reload. (Range: 1970-2037)
reload in - An interval after which to reload the switch.
hours - The number of hours, combined with the minutes, before the
switch resets. (Range: 0-576)
minutes - The number of minutes, combined with the hours, before the
switch resets. (Range: 0-59)
reload regularity - A periodic interval at which to reload the switch.
hour - The hour at which to reload. (Range: 0-23)
minute - The minute at which to reload. (Range: 0-59)
day-of-week - Day of the week at which to reload.
(Range: monday ... saturday)
day - Day of the month at which to reload. (Range: 1-31)
reload cancel - Cancels the specified reload option.
Default Setting
None
– 94 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command resets the entire system.
◆ Any combination of reload options may be specified. If the same option is re-
specified, the previous setting will be overwritten.
◆ When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will
also retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the
copy running-config startup-config command (See “copy” on page 126).
Example
This example shows how to reset the switch after 30 minutes:
Console(config)#reload in minute 30
***
*** --- Rebooting at January 1 02:10:43 2007 ---
***
Are you sure to reboot the system at the specified time? <y/n>
enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode, additional
commands are available, and certain commands display additional information.
See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 84.
Syntax
enable [level]
level - Privilege level to log into the device.
The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,
15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.
Default Setting
Level 15
Command Mode
Normal Exec
Command Usage
◆ “super” is the default password required to change the command mode from
Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password, see the enable password
command.)
◆ The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the
system is in privileged access mode.
– 95 –
Example
Console>enable
Password: [privileged level password]
Console#
Related Commands
disable (98)
enable password (224)
quit This command exits the configuration program.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.
Example
This example shows how to quit a CLI session:
Console#quit
Press ENTER to start session
Username:
show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration
commands.
– 96 –
Example
In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command
history buffer:
Console#show history
Execution command history:
2 config
1 show history
Configuration command history:

4 interface vlan 1
3 exit
2 interface vlan 1
1 end
Console#
The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer
when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the
Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration
modes. In this example, the !2 command repeats the second command in the
Execution history buffer (config).
Console#!2
Console#config
Console(config)#
configure This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to
modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global Configuration mode
prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes, such as Interface
Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN Database Configuration. See
“Understanding Command Modes” on page 84.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#configure
Console(config)#
Related Commands
end (99)
– 97 –
disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal
access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration
or Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all commands, you must use the privileged
mode. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 84.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system
is in normal access mode.
Example
Console#disable
Console>
Related Commands
enable (95)
reload (Privileged Exec) This command restarts the system.
Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will
also retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy
running-config startup-config command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command resets the entire system.
Example
This example shows how to reset the switch:
Console#reload
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y
– 98 –
show reload This command displays the current reload settings, and the time at which next
scheduled reload will take place.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show reload
Reloading switch in time: 0 hours 29 minutes.
The switch will be rebooted at January 1 02:11:50 2001.

Remaining Time: 0 days, 0 hours, 29 minutes, 52 seconds.
Console#
end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, VLAN Database
Configuration, and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration.
Example
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface
Configuration mode:
Console#
exit This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the
configuration program.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Any
– 99 –
Example
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global
Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:
Console#exit
Press ENTER to start session
Username:
– 100 –
4 System Management
Commands
The system management commands are used to control system logs, passwords,
user names, management options, and display or configure a variety of other
system information.
Table 8: System Management Commands

Command Group Function
Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch
Banner Information Configures administrative contact, device identification and location
System Status Displays system configuration, active managers, and version

information
Fan Control Forces fans to full speed
Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames
File Management Manages code image or switch configuration files
Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port, including baud rate
and console time-out
Event Logging Controls logging of error messages
SMTP Alerts Configures SMTP email alerts
Time (System Clock) Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP server or manually
Time Range Sets a time range for use by other functions, such as Access Control Lists
Switch Clustering Configures management of multiple devices via a single IP address
Stacking Includes commands which configure a unit as the stack master, set the
10G ports to stacking mode, or renumber all units in the stack
Device Designation
This section describes commands used to configure information that uniquely
identifies the switch.
Table 9: Device Designation Commands

hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC
snmp-server contact Sets the system contact string GC
snmp-server location Sets the system location string GC
– 101 –
Chapter 4 | System Management Commands
Banner Information
hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the no form
to restore the default host name.
Syntax
hostname name
no hostname
name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#hostname RD#1
Console(config)#
Banner Information
These commands are used to configure and manage administrative information
about the switch, its exact data center location, details of the electrical and network
circuits that supply the switch, as well as contact information for the network
administrator and system manager. This information is only available via the CLI
and is automatically displayed before login as soon as a console or telnet
connection has been established.
Table 10: Banner Commands

banner configure Configures the banner information that is displayed before GC

login
banner configure company Configures the Company information that is displayed by GC

banner
banner configure Configures the DC Power information that is displayed by GC

dc-power-info banner
banner configure Configures the Department information that is displayed GC

department by banner
banner configure Configures the Equipment information that is displayed by GC

equipment-info banner
banner configure Configures the Equipment Location information that is GC

equipment-location displayed by banner
banner configure ip-lan Configures the IP and LAN information that is displayed by GC
banner
– 102 –
Banner Information
Table 10: Banner Commands (Continued)

banner configure Configures the LP Number information that is displayed by GC

lp-number banner
banner configure manager- Configures the Manager contact information that is GC

info displayed by banner
banner configure mux Configures the MUX information that is displayed by GC

banner
banner configure note Configures miscellaneous information that is displayed by GC

banner under the Notes heading
show banner Displays all banner information NE, PE
banner configure This command is used to interactively specify administrative information for this
device.
Syntax
banner configure
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The administrator can batch-input all details for the switch with one command.
When the administrator finishes typing the company name and presses the enter
key, the script prompts for the next piece of information, and so on, until all
information has been entered. Pressing enter without inputting information at any
prompt during the script’s operation will leave the field empty. Spaces can be used
during script mode because pressing the enter key signifies the end of data input.
The delete and left-arrow keys terminate the script. The use of the backspace key
during script mode is not supported. If, for example, a mistake is made in the
company name, it can be corrected with the banner configure company
command.
Example
Console(config)#banner configure
Company: Edge-Core Networks

Responsible department: R&D Dept
Name and telephone to Contact the management people
Manager1 name: Sr. Network Admin
phone number: 123-555-1212
Manager2 name: Jr. Network Admin
Manager3 name: Night-shift Net Admin / Janitor
– 103 –
Banner Information
The physical location of the equipment.

City and street address: 12 Straight St. Motown, Zimbabwe
Information about this equipment:
Manufacturer: Edge-Core Networks
ID: 123_unique_id_number
Floor: 2
Row: 7
Rack: 29
Shelf in this rack: 8
Information about DC power supply.
Floor: 2
Row: 7
Rack: 25
Electrical circuit: : ec-177743209-xb
Number of LP:12
Position of the equipment in the MUX:1/23
IP LAN:192.168.1.1
Note: This is a random note about this managed switch and can contain
miscellaneous information.
Console(config)#
banner configure This command is used to configure company information displayed in the banner.
company Use the no form to remove the company name from the banner display.
Syntax
banner configure company name
no banner configure company
name - The name of the company. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure company command
interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of underscores ( _ ) or other
unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for situations where white space is
necessary for clarity.
Example
Console(config)#banner configure company Big-Ben
Console(config)#
– 104 –
Banner Information
banner configure This command is use to configure DC power information displayed in the banner.
dc-power-info Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure dc-power-info floor floor-id row row-id rack rack-id
electrical-circuit ec-id
no banner configure dc-power-info [floor | row | rack | electrical-circuit]
floor-id - The floor number.
row-id - The row number.
rack-id - The rack number.
ec-id - The electrical circuit ID.
Maximum length of each parameter: 32 characters
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure dc-power-info
command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of underscores ( _ )
or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for situations where white
space is necessary for clarity.
Example
Console(config)#banner configure dc-power-info floor 3 row 15 rack 24
electrical-circuit 48v-id_3.15.24.2
Console(config)#
banner configure This command is used to configure the department information displayed in the
department banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure department dept-name
no banner configure department
dept-name - The name of the department.
Default Setting
None
– 105 –
Banner Information
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure department
Example
Console(config)#banner configure department R&D
Console(config)#
banner configure This command is used to configure the equipment information displayed in the
equipment-info banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure equipment-info manufacturer-id mfr-id floor floor-id
row row-id rack rack-id shelf-rack sr-id manufacturer mfr-name
no banner configure equipment-info [floor | manufacturer | manufacturer-
id | rack | row | shelf-rack]
mfr-id - The name of the device model number.
floor-id - The floor number.
row-id - The row number.
rack-id - The rack number.
sr-id - The shelf number in the rack.
mfr-name - The name of the device manufacturer.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure equipment-info
– 106 –
Banner Information
Example
Console(config)#banner configure equipment-info manufacturer-id ECS4510-28T
floor 3 row 10 rack 15 shelf-rack 12 manufacturer Edge-Core
Console(config)#
banner configure This command is used to configure the equipment location information displayed
equipment-location in the banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure equipment-location location
no banner configure equipment-location
location - The address location of the device.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure equipment-location
Example
Console(config)#banner configure equipment-location
710_Network_Path,_Indianapolis
Console(config)#
banner configure This command is used to configure the device IP address and subnet mask
ip-lan information displayed in the banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure ip-lan ip-mask
no banner configure ip-lan
ip-mask - The IP address and subnet mask of the device.
Default Setting
None
– 107 –
Banner Information
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure ip-lan command
Example
Console(config)#banner configure ip-lan 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0
Console(config)#
banner configure This command is used to configure the LP number information displayed in the
lp-number banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure lp-number lp-num
no banner configure lp-number
lp-num - The LP number. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure lp-number command
Example
Console(config)#banner configure lp-number 12
Console(config)#
– 108 –
Banner Information
banner configure This command is used to configure the manager contact information displayed in
manager-info the banner. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure manager-info
name mgr1-name phone-number mgr1-number
[name2 mgr2-name phone-number mgr2-number |
name3 mgr3-name phone-number mgr3-number]
no banner configure manager-info [name1 | name2 | name3]
mgr1-name - The name of the first manager.
mgr1-number - The phone number of the first manager.
mgr2-name - The name of the second manager.
mgr2-number - The phone number of the second manager.
mgr3-name - The name of the third manager.
mgr3-number - The phone number of the third manager.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure manager-info
Example
Console(config)#banner configure manager-info name Albert_Einstein phone-
number 123-555-1212 name2 Lamar phone-number 123-555-1219
Console(config)#
banner configure mux This command is used to configure the mux information displayed in the banner.
Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure mux muxinfo
no banner configure mux
muxinfo - The circuit and PVC to which the switch is connected. (Maximum
length: 32 characters)
– 109 –
Banner Information
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure mux command
Example
Console(config)#banner configure mux telco-8734212kx_PVC-1/23
Console(config)#
banner configure note This command is used to configure the note displayed in the banner. Use the no
form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
banner configure note note-info
no banner configure note
note-info - Miscellaneous information that does not fit the other banner
categories, or any other information of importance to users of the switch
CLI. (Maximum length: 150 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Input strings cannot contain spaces. The banner configure note command
Example
Console(config)#banner configure note !!!!!ROUTINE_MAINTENANCE_firmware-
upgrade_0100-0500_GMT-0500_20071022!!!!!_20min_network_impact_expected
Console(config)#
– 110 –
System Status
show banner This command displays all banner information.
Command Mode
Example
Console#show banner
Edge-Core
WARNING - MONITORED ACTIONS AND ACCESSES
R&D
Albert_Einstein - 123-555-1212
Lamar - 123-555-1219
Station's information:
710_Network_Path,_Indianapolis
ECS4510-28T
Floor / Row / Rack / Sub-Rack
3/ 10 / 15 / 12
DC power supply:
Power Source A: Floor / Row / Rack / Electrical circuit
3/ 15 / 24 / 48v-id_3.15.24.2
Number of LP: 12
Position MUX: telco-8734212kx_PVC-1/23
IP LAN: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0
Note: !!!!!ROUTINE_MAINTENANCE_firmware-upgrade_0100-0500_GMT-
0500_20071022!!!!!_20min_network_
Console#
System Status
This section describes commands used to display system information.
Table 11: System Status Commands

show access-list Shows utilization parameters for TCAM PE

tcam-utilization
show memory Shows memory utilization parameters PE
show process cpu Shows CPU utilization parameters PE
show process cpu task Shows CPU utilization per process PE
show running-config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE
show startup-config Displays the contents of the configuration file (stored in PE

flash memory) that is used to start up the system
show system Displays system information NE, PE
show tech-support Displays a detailed list of system settings designed to help PE

technical support resolve configuration or functional
problems
– 111 –
System Status
Table 11: System Status Commands (Continued)

show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user NE, PE
name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet clients
show version Displays version information for the system NE, PE
show watchdog Shows if watchdog debugging is enabled PE
watchdog software Monitors key processes, and automatically reboots the PE

system if any of these processes are not responding
correctly
show access-list This command shows utilization parameters for TCAM (Ternary Content
tcam-utilization Addressable Memory), including the number policy control entries in use, the
number of free entries, and the overall percentage of TCAM in use.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Policy control entries (PCEs) are used by various system functions which rely on
rule-based searches, including Access Control Lists (ACLs), IP Source Guard filter
rules, Quality of Service (QoS) processes, or traps.
For example, when binding an ACL to a port, each rule in an ACL will use two PCEs;
and when setting an IP Source Guard filter rule for a port, the system will also use
two PCEs.
Example
Console#show access-list tcam-utilization
Total Policy Control Entries : 6144
Free Policy Control Entries : 6128
Entries Used by System : 16
Entries Used by User : 0
TCAM Utilization : 0.26%
Console#
show memory This command shows memory utilization parameters, and alarm thresholds.
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command shows the amount of memory currently free for use, the amount of
memory allocated to active processes, and the total amount of system memory.
– 112 –
System Status
Example
Console#show memory
Status Bytes %
------ ---------- ---
Free 111706112 41
Used 156729344 59
Total 268435456
Alarm Configuration
Rising Threshold : 90%
Falling Threshold : 70%
Console#
Related Commands
memory (206)
show process cpu This command shows the CPU utilization parameters, alarm status, and alarm
configuration.
Command Mode
Example
Console#show process cpu
CPU Utilization in the past 5 seconds : 24%
CPU Utilization in the past 60 seconds

Average Utilization : 24%
Maximum Utilization : 25%
Alarm Status
Current Alarm Status : Off
Last Alarm Start Time : Dec 31 00:00:19 2000
Last Alarm Duration Time : 15 seconds
Alarm Configuration
Rising Threshold : 90%
Falling Threshold : 70%
Console#
Related Commands
process cpu (206)
– 113 –
System Status
show process cpu task This command shows the CPU utilization per process.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show process cpu task
Task Util (%) Avg (%) Max (%)
--------------- -------- -------- --------
AMTR_ADDRESS 0.00 0.00 0.00
AMTRL3 0.00 0.00 0.00
AMTRL3_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
APP_PROTOCOL_PR 0.00 0.00 0.00
AUTH_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
AUTH_PROC 0.00 0.00 0.00
BGP_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
CFGDB_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
CFM_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
CLITASK0 0.00 0.00 0.00
CORE_UTIL_PROC 0.00 0.00 0.00
DHCPSNP_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
DOT1X_SUP_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
DRIVER_GROUP 1.00 0.75 2.00
DRIVER_GROUP_FR 0.00 0.00 0.00
DRIVER_GROUP_TX 0.00 0.00 0.00
FS 0.00 0.00 0.00
GVRP_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
HTTP_TD 0.00 0.00 5.00
HW_WTDOG_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
IML_TX 0.00 0.00 0.00
IP_SERVICE_GROU 0.00 0.00 0.00
KEYGEN_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
L2_L4_PROCESS 0.00 0.00 4.00
L2MCAST_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
L2MUX_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
L4_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
LACP_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
MSL_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
NETACCESS_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
NETACCESS_NMTR 0.00 0.25 2.00
NETCFG_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
NETCFG_PROC 0.00 0.08 1.00
NIC 0.00 0.00 0.00
NMTRDRV 1.00 1.66 4.00
NSM_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
NSM_PROC 0.00 0.00 0.00
NSM_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
OSPF6_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
OSPF_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
PIM_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
PIM_PROC 0.00 0.00 0.00
PIM_SM_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
POE_PROC 0.00 0.00 0.00
RIP_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
SNMP_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
SNMP_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
SSH_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
SSH_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
STA_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
STKCTRL_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
STKTPLG_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
SWCTRL_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
– 114 –
System Status
SWCTRL_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00

SWDRV_MONITOR 21.00 19.25 21.00
SYS_MGMT_PROC 0.00 0.00 0.00
SYSDRV 0.00 0.00 0.00
SYSLOG_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
SYSMGMT_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
SYSTEM 0.00 0.00 0.00
UDLD_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
WTDOG_PROC 0.00 0.00 0.00
XFER_GROUP 0.00 0.00 0.00
XFER_TD 0.00 0.00 0.00
Console#
show running-config This command displays the configuration information currently in use.
Syntax
show running-config [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1-8)
port - Port number. (Range: 1-28/52)
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-16)
vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4093)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use the interface keyword to display configuration data for the specified
interface.
◆ Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to

compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non-
volatile memory.
◆ This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group is
separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command, and
corresponding commands. This command displays the following information:
■ MAC address for each switch in the stack
■ SNMP community strings
■ Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)
■ VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)
■ VLAN configuration settings for each interface
■ Multiple spanning tree instances (name and interfaces)
■ IP address configured for VLANs
■ Interface settings
– 115 –
System Status
■ Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet
Example
Console#show running-config
Building running configuration. Please wait...
!<stackingDB>0000000000000000</stackingDB>
!<stackingMac>01_70-72-cf-83-34-66_03</stackingMac>
!<stackingMac>00_00-00-00-00-00-00_00</stackingMac>
!
!---<InitPhaseConfig>
!---</InitPhaseConfig>
!
snmp-server community public ro
snmp-server community private rw
!
snmp-server enable traps authentication
!
username admin access-level 15
username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3
username guest access-level 0
username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4
enable password 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca
!
vlan database
VLAN 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active
!
spanning-tree mst configuration
!
interface ethernet 1/1
...
no negotiation
!
interface vlan 1
ip address dhcp
!
interface vlan 1
!
line console
!
line vty
!
end
!
Console#
Related Commands
show startup-config (117)
– 116 –
System Status
show startup-config This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is
used to start up the system.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non-
volatile memory.
◆ This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group is
separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command, and
corresponding commands. This command displays the following information:
■ MAC address for each switch in the stack
■ SNMP community strings
■ SNMP trap authentication
■ Users (names and access levels)
■ VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)
■ Multiple spanning tree instances (name and interfaces)
■ Interface settings and VLAN configuration settings for each interface
■ IP address for VLANs
■ Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet
Example
Refer to the example for the running configuration file.
Related Commands
show running-config (115)
show system This command displays system information.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
No information will be displayed under POST Result, unless there is a problem with
the unit. If any POST test indicates “FAIL,” contact your distributor for assistance.
Example
Console#show system
System Description : ECS4510-52P
System OID String : 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.10.1.24.105
– 117 –
System Status
System Information
System Up Time : 0 days, 0 hours, 15 minutes, and 38.27 seconds
System Name :
System Location :
System Contact :
MAC Address (Unit 1) : 70-72-CF-83-34-66
Web Server : Enabled
Web Server Port : 80
Web Secure Server : Enabled
Web Secure Server Port : 443
Telnet Server : Enabled
Telnet Server Port : 23
Jumbo Frame : Disabled
System Fan:
Force Fan Speed Full : Disabled
Unit 1
Fan 1: Ok Fan 2: Ok Fan 3: Ok
Fan 4: Ok
System Temperature:
Unit 1
Temperature 1: 42 degrees
Main Power Status : Up

Redundant Power Status : Not present
Console#
Table 12: show system – display description

Parameter Description
System Description Brief description of device type.
System OID String MIB II object ID for switch’s network management subsystem.
System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up.
System Name Name assigned to the switch system.
System Location Specifies the system location.
System Contact Administrator responsible for the system.
MAC Address MAC address assigned to this switch.
Web Server/Port Shows administrative status of web server and UDP port number.
Web Secure Server/Port Shows administrative status of secure web server and UDP port
number.
Telnet Server/Port Shows administrative status of Telnet server and TCP port number.
Jumbo Frame Shows if jumbo frames are enabled or disabled.
System Fan Shows if forced full-speed mode is enabled.
System Temperature Temperature at specified thermal detection point.
Main Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply.
Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply.
– 118 –
System Status
show tech-support This command displays a detailed list of system settings designed to help technical
support resolve configuration or functional problems.
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command generates a long list of information including detailed system and
interface settings. It is therefore advisable to direct the output to a file using any
suitable output capture function provided with your terminal emulation program.
Example
Console#show tech-support
dir:
-------------------------- -------------- ------- ------------------- ----------
Unit 1:
ECS4510-28T_V1.2.1.6.bix OpCode Y 2013-07-02 08:18:42 17601308
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Free space for compressed user config files: 65220608
show apr:
ARP Cache Timeout: 1200 (seconds)
IP Address MAC Address Type Interface

--------------- ----------------- --------- -----------
192.168.0.2 70-72-CF-83-34-66 other VLAN1
192.168.0.99 00-60-6E-00-5F-A1 dynamic VLAN1
Total entry : 2
show interfaces brief:

Interface Name Status PVID Pri Speed/Duplex Type Trunk
--------- ---------------- -------- ---- --- ------------- ------------ ---
Eth 1/ 1 Up 1 0 Auto-100full 1000BASE-T None
Eth 1/ 2 Down 1 0 Auto 1000BASE-T None
.
.
.
show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP
address of Telnet client.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
– 119 –
System Status
Command Usage
The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next to the
Line (i.e., session) index number.
Example
Console#show users
User Name Accounts:
User Name Privilege Public-Key
-------------------------------- --------- ----------
admin 15 None
guest 0 None
steve 15 None
Online Users:
Line User Name Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr
------- -------------------------------- ----------------- ---------------
*console admin 0:00:00
VTY 0 admin 0:00:10 192.168.0.99
SSH 1 steve 0:00:06 192.168.1.19
Web Online Users:

Line User Name Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP Addr
----- -------------------------------- ----------------- ---------------
HTTP admin 0:00:01 192.168.0.99
Console#
show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system.
Command Mode
Example
Console#show version
Unit 1
Serial Number : EC0000000000
Hardware Version : R01
EPLD Version : R00 V0.09
Number of Ports : 28
Main Power Status : Up
Redundant Power Status : Not present
Role : Master
Loader Version : 0.0.1.3
Linux Kernel Version : 2.6.22.18
Boot ROM Version : 0.0.0.1
Operation Code Version : 1.6.1.1
Console#
Table 13: show version – display description

Serial Number The serial number of the switch.
Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board.
– 120 –
System Status
Table 13: show version – display description (Continued)

EPLD Version Version number of Erasable Programmable Logic Device.
Number of Ports Number of built-in ports.
Main Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply.
Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply.
Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave.
Loader Version Version number of loader code.
Linux Kernel Version Version number of Linux kernel.
Boot ROM Version Version of Power-On Self-Test (POST) and boot code.
Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code.
show watchdog This command shows if watchdog debugging is enabled.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show watchdog
Software Watchdog Information

Status : Enabled
Console#
watchdog software This command monitors key processes, and automatically reboots the system if any
of these processes are not responding correctly.
Syntax
watchdog software {disable | enable}
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#watchdog
Console#
– 121 –
Fan Control
Fan Control
This section describes the command used to force fan speed.
Table 14: Fan Control Commands

fan-speed force-full Forces fans to full speed GC
show system Shows if full fan speed is enabled NE, PE
fan-speed force-full This command sets all fans to full speed. Use the no form to reset the fans to normal
operating speed.
Syntax
[no] fan-speed force-full
Default Setting
Normal speed
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#fan-speed force-full
Console(config)#
Frame Size
This section describes commands used to configure the Ethernet frame size on the
switch.
Table 15: Frame Size Commands

jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC
jumbo frame This command enables support for layer 2 jumbo frames for Gigabit and 10 Gigabit
Ethernet ports. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] jumbo frame
– 122 –
File Management
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data
transfers by supporting layer 2 jumbo frames on Gigabit and 10 Gigabit
Ethernet ports or trunks up to 10240 bytes. Compared to standard Ethernet
frames that run only up to 1.5 KB, using jumbo frames significantly reduces the
per-packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields.
◆ To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes (such as a
computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is
operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end
nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex
connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo
frames.
◆ The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system
command.
Example
Console(config)#jumbo frame
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show system (117)
show ipv6 mtu (868)
File Management
Managing Firmware
Firmware can be uploaded and downloaded to or from an FTP/TFTP server. By

saving runtime code to a file on an FTP/TFTP server, that file can later be
downloaded to the switch to restore operation. The switch can also be set to use
new firmware without overwriting the previous version.
When downloading runtime code, the destination file name can be specified to
replace the current image, or the file can be first downloaded using a different
name from the current runtime code file, and then the new file set as the startup
file.
– 123 –
File Management
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings
Configuration settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from an FTP/TFTP

server. The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore switch settings.
The configuration file can be downloaded under a new file name and then set as
the startup file, or the current startup configuration file can be specified as the
destination file to directly replace it. Note that the file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg”
can be copied to the FTP/TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the
switch.
Table 16: Flash/File Commands

General Commands
boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC
copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from PE

flash memory or an FTP/TFTP server
delete Deletes a file or code image PE
dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE
whichboot Displays the files booted PE
Automatic Code Upgrade Commands
upgrade opcode auto Automatically upgrades the current image when a new GC
version is detected on the indicated server
upgrade opcode path Specifies an FTP/TFTP server and directory in which the GC
new opcode is stored
upgrade opcode reload Reloads the switch automatically after the opcode upgrade GC
is completed
show upgrade Shows the opcode upgrade configuration settings. PE
TFTP Configuration Commands
ip tftp retry Specifies the number of times the switch can retry GC
transmitting a request to a TFTP server
ip tftp timeout Specifies the time the switch can wait for a response from a GC
TFTP server before retransmitting a request or timing out
for the last retry
show ip tftp Displays information about TFTP settings PE
– 124 –
File Management
General Commands
boot system This command specifies the file or image used to start up the system.
Syntax
boot system [unit:] {boot-rom | config | opcode}: filename
unit* - Unit identifier. (Range: 1-8)
boot-rom* - Boot ROM.
config* - Configuration file.
opcode* - Run-time operation code.
filename - Name of configuration file or code image.
* The colon (:) is required.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number and file type.
◆ If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.
Example
Console(config)#boot system config: startup
Console(config)#
Related Commands
dir (130)
whichboot (131)
– 125 –
File Management
copy This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file

between the switch’s flash memory and an FTP/TFTP server. When you save the
system code or configuration settings to a file on an FTP/TFTP server, that file can
later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the
file transfer depends on the accessibility of the FTP/TFTP server and the quality of
the network connection.
Syntax
copy file {file | ftp | running-config | startup-config | tftp | unit}
copy ftp {add-to-running-config | file | https-certificate | public-key |
running-config | startup-config}
copy file unit
copy running-config {file | ftp | startup-config | tftp}
copy startup-config {file | ftp | running-config | tftp}
copy tftp {add-to-running-config | file | https-certificate | public-key |
running-config | startup-config}
copy unit file
copy usbdisk file
add-to-running-config - Keyword that adds the settings listed in the
specified file to the running configuration.
file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.
ftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from an FTP server.
https-certificate - Keyword that allows you to copy the HTTPS secure site
certificate.
public-key - Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server.
(See “Secure Shell” on page 253.)
running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the current
running configuration.
startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.
tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.
unit - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a specific unit in the stack.
usbdisk - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a USB memory stick.
(USB slot only supports simple data storage devices using a FAT16/32 file
system with or without a partition table.)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 126 –
File Management
Command Usage
◆ The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.
◆ The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), and the maximum
length for file names is 32 characters for files on the switch or 127 characters for
files on the server. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”)
◆ The switch supports only two operation code files, but the maximum number
of user-defined configuration files is 16.
◆ You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy from the

factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the destination.
◆ To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the

destination.
◆ Use the copy file unit command to copy a local file to another switch in the
stack. Use the copy unit file command to copy a file from another switch in the
stack.
◆ The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the FTP/
TFTP server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new
firmware, or contact your distributor for help.
◆ For information on specifying an https-certificate, see “Replacing the Default

Secure-site Certificate” in the Web Management Guide. For information on
configuring the switch to use HTTPS for a secure connection, see the ip http
secure-server command.
◆ When logging into an FTP server, the interface prompts for a user name and
password configured on the remote server. Note that “anonymous” is set as the
default user name.
Example
The following example shows how to download new firmware from a TFTP server:
Console#copy tftp file

Choose file type:
Source file name: m360.bix
Destination file name: m360.bix
-Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#
– 127 –
File Management
The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on
the TFTP server:
Console#copy file tftp

Choose file type:
Source file name: startup
Destination file name: startup.01
TFTP completed.
Success.
Console#
The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup
file.
Console#copy running-config file

destination file name: startup
Write to FLASH Programming.
Success.
Console#
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:
Console#copy tftp startup-config

Source configuration file name: startup.01
Startup configuration file name [startup]:

Success.
Console#
This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP server. It
then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:
Console#copy tftp https-certificate

Source certificate file name: SS-certificate
Source private file name: SS-private
Private password: ********
Success.
Console#reload
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y
– 128 –
File Management
This example shows how to copy a public-key used by SSH from an TFTP server.
Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured
locally on the switch.
Console#copy tftp public-key

TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.19
Choose public key type:
1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 1
Source file name: steve.pub
Username: steve
TFTP Download
Success.
Success.
Console#
This example shows how to copy a file to an FTP server.
Console#copy ftp file

FTP server IP address: 169.254.1.11
User[anonymous]: admin
Password[]: *****
Choose file type:
Source file name: BLANC.BIX
Destination file name: BLANC.BIX
Console#
delete This command deletes a file or image.
Syntax
delete {file name [unit:] filename | public-key username [dsa | rsa]}
file - Keyword that allows you to delete a file.
name - Keyword indicating a file.
filename - Name of configuration file or code image.
public-key - Keyword that allows you to delete a SSH key on the switch.
(See “Secure Shell” on page 253.)
username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)
dsa – DSA public key type.
rsa – RSA public key type.
Default Setting
None
– 129 –
File Management
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be deleted.
◆ “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.
◆ A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.
◆ If the public key type is not specified, then both DSA and RSA keys will be
deleted.
Example
This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from flash
memory.
Console#delete test2.cfg
Console#
Related Commands
dir (130)
delete public-key (258)
dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory.
Syntax
dir [unit:] {boot-rom | config | opcode}: [filename]}
boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.
config - Switch configuration file.
opcode - Run-time operation code image file.
filename - Name of configuration file or code image. If this file exists but
contains errors, information on this file cannot be shown.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all
files.
– 130 –
File Management
◆ A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.
File information is shown below:
Table 17: File Directory Information

Column Heading Description
File Name The name of the file.
File Type File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.
Startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started.
Modify Time The date and time the file was last modified.
Size The length of the file in bytes.
Example
The following example shows how to display all file information:
Console#dir
File Name Type Startup Modified Time Size (bytes)
------------------------------ ------- ------- ------------------- ------------
Unit 1:
ECS4510-28T_V1.5.2.2.bix OpCode N 2000-12-31 08:37:18 15218420
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Free space for compressed user config files: 52314112
Console#
whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up.
Syntax
whichboot [unit]
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 131 –
File Management
Example
This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See
the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed
by this command.
Console#whichboot
-------------------------------- ------- ------- ------------------- -----------
Unit 1:
Console#
Automatic Code Upgrade Commands
upgrade opcode auto This command automatically upgrades the current operational code when a new
version is detected on the server indicated by the upgrade opcode path command.
Use the no form of this command to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] upgrade opcode auto
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command is used to enable or disable automatic upgrade of the
operational code. When the switch starts up and automatic image upgrade is
enabled by this command, the switch will follow these steps when it boots up:
1. It will search for a new version of the image at the location specified by
upgrade opcode path command. The name for the new image stored on
the TFTP server must be ECS4510-28T.bix. If the switch detects a code
version newer than the one currently in use, it will download the new
image. If two code images are already stored in the switch, the image not
set to start up the system will be overwritten by the new version.
2. After the image has been downloaded, the switch will send a trap message
to log whether or not the upgrade operation was successful.
3. It sets the new version as the startup image.
4. It then restarts the system to start using the new image.
– 132 –
File Management
◆ Any changes made to the default setting can be displayed with the show
running-config or show startup-config commands.
Example
Console(config)#upgrade opcode auto
Console(config)#
If a new image is found at the specified location, the following type of messages
will be displayed during bootup.
.
.
.
Automatic Upgrade is looking for a new image
New image detected: current version 1.1.1.0; new version 1.1.1.2
Image upgrade in progress
The switch will restart after upgrade succeeds
Downloading new image
Flash programming started
Flash programming completed
The switch will now restart
.
.
.
upgrade opcode path This command specifies an TFTP server and directory in which the new opcode is
stored. Use the no form of this command to clear the current setting.
Syntax
upgrade opcode path opcode-dir-url
no upgrade opcode path
opcode-dir-url - The location of the new code.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command is used in conjunction with the upgrade opcode auto command
to facilitate automatic upgrade of new operational code stored at the location
indicated by this command.
◆ The name for the new image stored on the TFTP server must be ECS4510-
28T.bix. However, note that file name is not to be included in this command.
– 133 –
File Management
◆ When specifying a TFTP server, the following syntax must be used, where filedir
indicates the path to the directory containing the new image:
tftp://192.168.0.1[/filedir]/
◆ When specifying an FTP server, the following syntax must be used, where filedir
indicates the path to the directory containing the new image:
ftp://[username[:password@]]192.168.0.1[/filedir]/
If the user name is omitted, “anonymous” will be used for the connection. If the
password is omitted a null string (“”) will be used for the connection.
Example

Console(config)#
This shows how to specify an FTP server where new code is stored.
Console(config)#upgrade opcode path ftp://admin:billy@192.168.0.1/sm24/

Console(config)#
upgrade opcode This command reloads the switch automatically after the opcode upgrade is
reload completed. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] upgrade opcode reload
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#upgrade opcode reload

Console(config)#
– 134 –
File Management
show upgrade This command shows the opcode upgrade configuration settings.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show upgrade
Auto Image Upgrade Global Settings:
Status : Disabled
Reload Status : Disabled
Path :
File Name : ECS4510-28T.bix
Console#
TFTP Configuration Commands
ip tftp retry This command specifies the number of times the switch can retry transmitting a
request to a TFTP server after waiting for the configured timeout period and
receiving no response. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip tftp retry retries
no ip tftp retry
retries - The number of times the switch can resend a request to a TFTP
server before it aborts the connection. (Range: 1-16)
Default Setting
15
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ip tftp retry 10
Console(config)#
– 135 –
File Management
ip tftp timeout This command specifies the time the switch can wait for a response from a TFTP
server before retransmitting a request or timing out for the last retry. Use the no
Syntax
ip tftp timeout seconds
no ip tftp timeout
seconds - The the time the switch can wait for a response from a TFTP server
before retransmitting a request or timing out. (Range: 1-65535 seconds)
Default Setting
5 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ip tftp timeout 10
Console(config)#
show ip tftp This command displays information about the TFTP settings configured on this
switch.
Syntax
show ip tftp
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip tftp
TFTP Settings:
Retries : 15
Timeout : 5 seconds
Console#
– 136 –
Line
Line
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100
compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set
communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).
Table 18: Line Commands

line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line GC
configuration mode
accounting commands Applies an accounting method to commands entered at LC

specific CLI privilege levels
accounting exec Applies an accounting method to local console, Telnet or LC

SSH connections
authorization exec Applies an authorization method to local console, Telnet or LC

SSH connections
databits* Sets the number of data bits per character that are LC
interpreted and generated by hardware
exec-timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until LC
user input is detected
login Enables password checking at login LC
parity* Defines the generation of a parity bit LC
password Specifies a password on a line LC
password-thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the LC

number of failed logon attempts
silent-time* Sets the amount of time the management console is LC

inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon
attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password-
thresh command
speed* Sets the terminal baud rate LC
stopbits* Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC
timeout login response Sets the interval that the system waits for a login attempt LC
disconnect Terminates a line connection PE
terminal Configures terminal settings, including escape-character, PE

line length, terminal type, and width
show line Displays a terminal line's parameters NE, PE
* These commands only apply to the serial port.
– 137 –
Line
line This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process
subsequent line configuration commands.
Syntax
line {console | vty}
console - Console terminal line.
vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
Default Setting
There is no default line.
Command Mode
Command Usage
Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as “VTY” in
screen displays such as show users. However, the serial communication parameters
(e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.
Example
To enter console line mode, enter the following command:
Console(config)#line console
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
show line (147)
show users (119)
databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and
generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore the default value.
Syntax
databits {7 | 8}
no databits
7 - Seven data bits per character.
8 - Eight data bits per character.
Default Setting
8 data bits per character
Command Mode
Line Configuration
– 138 –
Line
Command Usage
The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices
that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits
per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character.
Example
To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#databits 7
Related Commands
parity (141)
exec-timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
exec-timeout [seconds]
no exec-timeout
seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.
(Range: 60 - 65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)
Default Setting
10 minutes
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
◆ If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept open;
otherwise the session is terminated.
◆ This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.
◆ The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.
◆ Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.
Example
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120
– 139 –
Line
login This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable
password checking and allow connections without a password.
Syntax
login [local]
no login
local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the user
name specified with the username command.
Default Setting
login local
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
◆ There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login:
■ login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the

password line configuration command. When using this method, the
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.
■ login local selects authentication via the user name and password
specified by the username command (i.e., default setting). When using this
method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) or Privileged
Exec (PE) mode, depending on the user’s privilege level (0 or 15
respectively).
■ no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the

management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.
◆ This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To configure
user names and passwords for remote authentication servers, you must use the
RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers.
Example
Console(config-line)#login local
Related Commands
username (225)
password (141)
– 140 –
Line
parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
parity {none | even | odd}
no parity
none - No parity
even - Even parity
odd - Odd parity
Default Setting
No parity
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems
often require a specific parity bit setting.
Example
To specify no parity, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#parity none
password This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to remove the
password.
Syntax
password {0 | 7} password
no password
{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password
password - Character string that specifies the line password.
(Maximum length: 32 characters plain text or encrypted, case sensitive)
Default Setting
No password is specified.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
– 141 –
Line
Command Usage
◆ When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system
prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system shows
a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the number of
times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the
line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.
◆ The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password

settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from an FTP
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret
Related Commands
login (140)
password-thresh (142)
password-thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of
failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold value.
Syntax
password-thresh [threshold]
no password-thresh
threshold - The number of allowed password attempts. (Range: 1-120; 0: no
threshold)
Default Setting
The default value is three attempts.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes silent
for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt. (Use the
silent-time command to set this interval.) When this threshold is reached for Telnet,
the Telnet logon interface shuts down.
– 142 –
Line
Example
To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5
Related Commands
silent-time (143)
silent-time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the
password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.
Syntax
silent-time [seconds]
no silent-time
seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.
(Range: 0-65535; where 0 means disabled)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60
Related Commands
password-thresh (142)
– 143 –
Line
speed This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both the
transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no form to
restore the default setting.
Syntax
speed bps
no speed
bps - Baud rate in bits per second.
(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps)
Default Setting
115200 bps
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port.
Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be
supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported.
Example
To specify 57600 bps, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#speed 57600
stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use the no
Syntax
stopbits {1 | 2}
no stopbits
1 - One stop bit
2 - Two stop bits
Default Setting
1 stop bit
Command Mode
Line Configuration
– 144 –
Line
Example
To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#stopbits 2
timeout login This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI.
response Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
timeout login response [seconds]
no timeout login response
seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.
(Range: 10 - 300 seconds)
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
◆ If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is
terminated for the session.
◆ This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.
◆ The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.
◆ Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.
Example
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 120

disconnect This command terminates an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.
Syntax
disconnect session-id
session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console connection.
(Range: 0-8)
– 145 –
Line
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console connection. Specifying
any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet
connection.
Example
Console#disconnect 1
Console#
Related Commands
show ssh (262)
show users (119)
terminal This command configures terminal settings, including escape-character, lines

displayed, terminal type, width, and command history. Use the no form with the
appropriate keyword to restore the default setting.
Syntax
terminal {escape-character {ASCII-number | character} | history [size size] |
length length | terminal-type {ansi-bbs | vt-100 | vt-102} | width width}
escape-character - The keyboard character used to escape from current
line input.
ASCII-number - ASCII decimal equivalent. (Range: 0-255)
character - Any valid keyboard character.
history - The number of lines stored in the command buffer, and recalled
using the arrow keys. (Range: 0-256)
length - The number of lines displayed on the screen. (Range: 0-512, where
0 means not to pause)
terminal-type - The type of terminal emulation used.
ansi-bbs - ANSI-BBS
vt-100 - VT-100
vt-102 - VT-102
width - The number of character columns displayed on the terminal.
(Range: 0-80)
Default Setting
Escape Character: 27 (ASCII-number)
History: 10
Length: 24
– 146 –
Line
Terminal Type: VT100

Width: 80
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example sets the number of lines displayed by commands with lengthy output
such as show running-config to 48 lines.
Console#terminal length 48
Console#
show line This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.
Syntax
show line [console | vty]
console - Console terminal line.
vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
Default Setting
Shows all lines
Command Mode
Example
To show all lines, enter this command:
Console#show line
Terminal Configuration for this session:
Length : 24
Width : 80
History Size : 10
Escape Character(ASCII-number) : 27
Terminal Type : VT100
Console Configuration:
Password Threshold : 3 times
EXEC Timeout : 600 seconds
Login Timeout : 300 seconds
Silent Time : Disabled
Baud Rate : 115200
Data Bits : 8
Parity : None
Stop Bits : 1
VTY Configuration:
Password Threshold : 3 times
EXEC Timeout : 600 seconds
– 147 –
Event Logging
Login Timeout : 300 sec.

Silent Time : Disabled
Console#
Event Logging
This section describes commands used to configure event logging on the switch.
Table 19: Event Logging Commands

logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC
logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on GC

severity
logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive GC
logging messages
logging on Controls logging of error messages GC
logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on GC

severity
clear log Clears messages from the logging buffer PE
show log Displays log messages PE
show logging Displays the state of logging PE
logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. Use the
no form to return the type to the default.
Syntax
logging facility type
no logging facility
type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to
dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)
Default Setting
23
Command Mode
Command Usage
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC
3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch.
However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages
in the corresponding database.
– 148 –
Event Logging
Example
Console(config)#logging facility 19
Console(config)#
logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity.
The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level.
Syntax
logging history {flash | ram} level
no logging history {flash | ram}
flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).
ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on
power reset).
level - One of the levels listed below. Messages sent include the selected
level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)
Table 20: Logging Levels
Level Severity Name Description
7 debugging Debugging messages
6 informational Informational messages only
5 notifications Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
4 warnings Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
3 errors Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
2 critical Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory

error - resource exhausted)
1 alerts Immediate action needed

0 emergencies System unusable
Default Setting
Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)
RAM: debugging (level 7 - 0)
Command Mode
Command Usage
The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority (i.e.,
numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.
– 149 –
Event Logging
Example
Console(config)#logging history ram 0
Console(config)#
logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging
messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.
Syntax
logging host host-ip-address [port udp-port]
no logging host host-ip-address
host-ip-address - The IPv4 or IPv6 address of a syslog server.
udp-port - UDP port number used by the remote server. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
UPD Port: 514
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use this command more than once to build up a list of host IP addresses.
◆ The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.
Example
Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3
Console(config)#
logging on This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error
messages to a logging process. The no form disables the logging process.
Syntax
[no] logging on
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
– 150 –
Event Logging
Command Usage
The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory or sent to
remote syslog servers. You can use the logging history command to control the
type of error messages that are stored in memory. You can use the logging trap
command to control the type of error messages that are sent to specified syslog
servers.
Example
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#
Related Commands
logging history (149)
logging trap (151)
clear log (152)
logging trap This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server, or
limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity. Use this
command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use the no form to
disable remote logging.
Syntax
logging trap [level level]
no logging trap [level]
level - One of the syslog severity levels listed in the table on page 149.
Messages sent include the selected level through level 0.
Default Setting
Disabled
Level 7
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the
minimum severity level to be saved.
◆ Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging, but
restores the minimum severity level to the default.
Example
Console(config)#logging trap 4
Console(config)#
– 151 –
Event Logging
clear log This command clears messages from the log buffer.
Syntax
clear log [flash | ram]
power reset).
Default Setting
Flash and RAM
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear log
Console#
Related Commands
show log (152)
show log This command displays the log messages stored in local memory.
Syntax
show log {flash | ram}
power reset).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ All log messages are retained in RAM and Flash after a warm restart (i.e., power
is reset through the command interface).
◆ All log messages are retained in Flash and purged from RAM after a cold restart
(i.e., power is turned off and then on through the power source).
– 152 –
Event Logging
Example
The following example shows the event message stored in RAM.
Console#show log ram

[1] 00:01:30 2001-01-01
"VLAN 1 link-up notification."
level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1
[0] 00:01:30 2001-01-01
"Unit 1, Port 1 link-up notification."
level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1
Console#
show logging This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local
switch memory, to an SMTP event handler, or to a remote syslog server.
Syntax
show logging {flash | ram | sendmail | trap}
flash - Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory
(i.e., permanent memory).
ram - Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM
(i.e., memory flushed on power reset).
sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler (page 158).
trap - Displays settings for the trap function.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for
flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), and the message level for RAM is
“debugging” (i.e., default level 7 - 0).
Console#show logging flash

Syslog logging: Enabled
History logging in FLASH: level errors
Console#show logging ram
Syslog logging: Enabled
History logging in RAM: level debugging
Console#
– 153 –
Event Logging
Table 21: show logging flash/ram - display description

Field Description
Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on
command.
History logging in FLASH The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.
History logging in RAM The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.
The following example displays settings for the trap function.
Console#show logging trap

Remote Log Status : Disabled
Remote Log Facility Type : Local use 7
Remote Log Level Type : Debugging messages
Remote Log Server IP Address : 0.0.0.0
Console#
Table 22: show logging trap - display description

Field Description
Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on
command.
REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap
command.
REMOTELOG facility type The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in
the logging facility command.
REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as
specified in the logging trap command.
REMOTELOG The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host

server IP address command.
Related Commands
show logging sendmail (158)
– 154 –
SMTP Alerts
SMTP Alerts
These commands configure SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert
messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients.
Table 23: Event Logging Commands

logging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling GC
logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC
logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC
logging sendmail Email recipients of alert messages GC

destination-email
logging sendmail source- Email address used for “From” field of alert messages GC
email
show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE, PE
logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable this
function.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail
Console(config)#
logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages. Use the no
form to remove an SMTP server.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail host ip-address
ip-address - IPv4 or IPv6 address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert
messages for event handling.
– 155 –
SMTP Alerts
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing. However, you must
enter a separate command to specify each server.
◆ To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email
alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection.
◆ To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent
mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command.
If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to
send mail again. If it still fails, the system will repeat the process at a periodic
interval. (A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a
connection.)
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.19
Console(config)#
logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages. Use the
no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
logging sendmail level level
no logging sendmail level
level - One of the system message levels (page 149). Messages sent include
the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)
Default Setting
Level 7
Command Mode
Command Usage
The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level or higher will
be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example, using Level 7 will report all
events from level 7 to level 0.)
– 156 –
SMTP Alerts
Example
This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0.
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 3

Console(config)#
logging sendmail This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no form to
destination-email remove a recipient.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.
(Range: 1-41 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you must enter a
separate command to specify each recipient.
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email ted@this-company.com
Console(config)#
logging sendmail This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages.
source-email Use the no form to restore the default value.
Syntax
logging sendmail source-email email-address
no logging sendmail source-email
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
– 157 –
Time
Command Usage
You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the address of
an administrator responsible for the switch.
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email bill@this-company.com
Console(config)#
show logging This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.
sendmail
Command Mode
Example
Console#show logging sendmail
SMTP servers
-----------------------------------------------
192.168.1.19
SMTP Minimum Severity Level: 7
SMTP destination email addresses

-----------------------------------------------
ted@this-company.com
SMTP Source E-mail Address: bill@this-company.com

SMTP Status: Enabled
Console#
Time
The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers
(NTP or SNTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log
to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the
switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.
Table 24: Time Commands

SNTP Commands
sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC
sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC
sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC
show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE, PE
– 158 –
Time
Table 24: Time Commands (Continued)

NTP Commands
ntp authenticate Enables authentication for NTP traffic GC
ntp authentication-key Configures authentication keys GC
ntp client Enables the NTP client for time updates from specified GC
servers
ntp server Specifies NTP servers to poll for time updates GC
show ntp Shows current NTP configuration settings NE, PE
Manual Configuration Commands
clock summer-time (date) Configures summer time* for the switch’s internal clock GC
clock summer-time Configures summer time* for the switch’s internal clock GC
(predefined)
clock summer-time Configures summer time* for the switch’s internal clock GC
(recurring)
clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock GC
calendar set Sets the system date and time PE
show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE, PE
* Daylight savings time.
SNTP Commands
sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or
SNTP time servers specified with the sntp server command. Use the no form to
disable SNTP client requests.
Syntax
[no] sntp client
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times
for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the time starting from the
factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).
◆ This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the
sntp server command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the
interval set via the sntp poll command.
– 159 –
Time
Example
Console(config)#sntp client
Console(config)#end
Console#show sntp
Current Time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002
Poll Interval: 60
Current Mode: unicast
SNTP Server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Current Server: 137.92.140.80
Console#
Related Commands
sntp server (161)
sntp poll (160)
show sntp (161)
sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is
set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.
Syntax
sntp poll seconds
no sntp poll
seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)
Default Setting
16 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console#
Related Commands
sntp client (159)
– 160 –
Time
sntp server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are
issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the
current list. Use the no form to clear all time servers from the current list, or to clear
a specific server.
Syntax
sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]
no sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]
ip - IPv4 or IPv6 address of a time server (NTP or SNTP).
(Range: 1 - 3 addresses)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time
updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in the
order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization requests
based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.
Example
Console#
Related Commands
sntp client (159)
sntp poll (160)
show sntp (161)
show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP
client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending time
synchronization requests, and the current SNTP mode (i.e., unicast).
– 161 –
Time
Example
Console#show sntp
Current Time : Nov 5 18:51:22 2006
Poll Interval : 16 seconds
Current Mode : Unicast
SNTP Server : 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Current Server : 137.92.140.80
Console#
NTP Commands
ntp authenticate This command enables authentication for NTP client-server communications. Use
the no form to disable authentication.
Syntax
[no] ntp authenticate
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
You can enable NTP authentication to ensure that reliable updates are received
from only authorized NTP servers. The authentication keys and their associated key
number must be centrally managed and manually distributed to NTP servers and
clients. The key numbers and key values must match on both the server and client.
Example
Console(config)#ntp authenticate
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ntp authentication-key (163)
– 162 –
Time
ntp This command configures authentication keys and key numbers to use when NTP
authentication-key authentication is enabled. Use the no form of the command to clear a specific
authentication key or all keys from the current list.
Syntax
ntp authentication-key number md5 key
no ntp authentication-key [number]
number - The NTP authentication key ID number. (Range: 1-65535)
md5 - Specifies that authentication is provided by using the message
digest algorithm 5.
key - An MD5 authentication key string. The key string can be up to 32 case-
sensitive printable ASCII characters (no spaces).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The key number specifies a key value in the NTP authentication key list. Up to
255 keys can be configured on the switch. Re-enter this command for each
server you want to configure.
◆ Note that NTP authentication key numbers and values must match on both the
server and client.
◆ NTP authentication is optional. When enabled with the ntp authenticate

command, you must also configure at least one key number using this
command.
◆ Use the no form of this command without an argument to clear all

authentication keys in the list.
Example
Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 45 md5 thisiskey45
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ntp authenticate (162)
– 163 –
Time
ntp client This command enables NTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP time
servers specified with the ntp servers command. Use the no form to disable NTP
client requests.
Syntax
[no] ntp client
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The SNTP and NTP clients cannot be enabled at the same time. First disable the
SNTP client before using this command.
◆ The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times
for log events. Without NTP, the switch only records the time starting from the
factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).
◆ This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the
ntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the
interval set via the ntp poll command.
Example
Console(config)#ntp client
Console(config)#
Related Commands
sntp client (159)
ntp server (164)
ntp server This command sets the IP addresses of the servers to which NTP time requests are
issued. Use the no form of the command to clear a specific time server or all servers
from the current list.
Syntax
ntp server ip-address [key key-number]
no ntp server [ip-address]
ip-address - IP address of an NTP time server.
key-number - The number of an authentication key to use in
communications with the server. (Range: 1-65535)
– 164 –
Time
Default Setting
Version number: 3
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command specifies time servers that the switch will poll for time updates
when set to NTP client mode. It issues time synchronization requests based on
the interval set with the ntp poll command. The client will poll all the time
servers configured, the responses received are filtered and compared to
determine the most reliable and accurate time update for the switch.
◆ You can configure up to 50 NTP servers on the switch. Re-enter this command
for each server you want to configure.
◆ NTP authentication is optional. If enabled with the ntp authenticate

command, you must also configure at least one key number using the ntp
authentication-key command.
◆ Use the no form of this command without an argument to clear all configured
servers in the list.
Example
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.5.23 key 19
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ntp client (164)
show ntp (165)
show ntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the NTP
client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending time
synchronization requests, and the current NTP mode (i.e., unicast).
Example
Console#show ntp
– 165 –
Time
NTP Status : Disabled

Last Update Time : Jan 1 00:00:00 1970 UTC
NTP Authentication Key 19 md5 42V68751663T6K11P2J307210R885
Console#
clock summer-time This command sets the start, end, and offset times of summer time (daylight
(date) savings time) for the switch on a one-time basis. Use the no form to disable
summer time.
Syntax
clock summer-time name date b-date b-month b-year b-hour b-minute e-date
e-month e-year e-hour e-minute [offset]
no clock summer-time
name - Name of the time zone while summer time is in effect, usually an
acronym. (Range: 1-30 characters)
b-date - Day of the month when summer time will begin. (Range: 1-31)
b-month - The month when summer time will begin. (Options: january |
february | march | april | may | june | july | august | september | october
| november | december)
b-year- The year summer time will begin.
b-hour - The hour summer time will begin. (Range: 0-23 hours)
b-minute - The minute summer time will begin. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
e-date - Day of the month when summer time will end. (Range: 1-31)
e-month - The month when summer time will end. (Options: january |
e-year - The year summer time will end.
e-hour - The hour summer time will end. (Range: 0-23 hours)
e-minute - The minute summer time will end. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
offset - Summer time offset from the regular time zone, in minutes.
(Range: 0-99 minutes)
Default Setting
Disabled
– 166 –
Time
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ In some countries or regions, clocks are adjusted through the summer months
so that afternoons have more daylight and mornings have less. This is known as
Summer Time, or Daylight Savings Time (DST). Typically, clocks are adjusted
forward one hour at the start of spring and then adjusted backward in autumn.
◆ This command sets the summer-time time zone relative to the currently
configured time zone. To specify a time corresponding to your local time when
summer time is in effect, you must indicate the number of minutes your
summer-time time zone deviates from your regular time zone (that is, the
offset).
Example
The following example sets the 2014 Summer Time ahead by 60 minutes on March
9th and returns to normal time on November 2nd.
Console(config)#clock summer-time DEST date march 9 2014 01 59 november 2

2014 01 59 60
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show sntp (161)
clock summer-time This command configures the summer time (daylight savings time) status and
(predefined) settings for the switch using predefined configurations for several major regions in
the world. Use the no form to disable summer time.
Syntax
clock summer-time name predefined [australia | europe | new-zealand |
usa]
name - Name of the timezone while summer time is in effect, usually an
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
– 167 –
Time
◆ This command sets the summer-time time relative to the configured time zone.
To specify the time corresponding to your local time when summer time is in
effect, select the predefined summer-time time zone appropriate for your
location, or manually configure summer time if these predefined
configurations do not apply to your location (see clock summer-time (date) or
clock summer-time (recurring).
Table 25: Predefined Summer-Time Parameters

Region Start Time, Day, End Time, Day, Rel. Offset
Week, & Month Week, & Month
Australia 00:00:00, Sunday, 23:59:59, Sunday, 60 min

Week 5 of October Week 5 of March
Europe 00:00:00, Sunday, 23:59:59, Sunday, 60 min

Week 5 of March Week 5 of October
New Zealand 00:00:00, Sunday, 23:59:59, Sunday, 60 min

Week 1 of October Week 3 of March
USA 00:00:00, Sunday, 23:59:59, Sunday, 60 min

Week 2 of March Week 1 of November
Example
The following example sets the Summer Time setting to use the predefined
settings for the European region.
Console(config)#clock summer-time MESZ predefined europe

Console(config)#
Related Commands
show sntp (161)
clock summer-time This command allows the user to manually configure the start, end, and offset
(recurring) times of summer time (daylight savings time) for the switch on a recurring basis.
Use the no form to disable summer-time.
Syntax
clock summer-time name recurring b-week b-day b-month b-hour b-minute e-
week e-day e-month e-hour e-minute [offset]
name - Name of the timezone while summer time is in effect, usually an
b-week - The week of the month when summer time will begin. (Range: 1-5)
– 168 –
Time
b-day - The day of the week when summer time will begin. (Options:
sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday)
b-month - The month when summer time will begin. (Options: january |
b-hour - The hour when summer time will begin. (Range: 0-23 hours)
b-minute - The minute when summer time will begin. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
e-week - The week of the month when summer time will end. (Range: 1-5)
e-day - The day of the week summer time will end. (Options: sunday |
monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday)
e-month - The month when summer time will end. (Options: january |
e-hour - The hour when summer time will end. (Range: 0-23 hours)
e-minute - The minute when summer time will end. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
offset - Summer-time offset from the regular time zone, in minutes.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command sets the summer-time time zone relative to the currently
configured time zone. To display a time corresponding to your local time when
summer time is in effect, you must indicate the number of minutes your
summer-time time zone deviates from your regular time zone (that is, the
offset).
Example
The following example sets a recurring 60 minute offset summer-time to begin on
the Friday of the 1st week of March at 01:59 hours and summer time to end on the
Saturday of the 2nd week of November at 01:59 hours.
Console(config)#clock summer-time MESZ recurring 1 friday march 01 59 3

saturday november 1 59 60
Console(config)#
– 169 –
Time
Related Commands
show sntp (161)
clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.
Syntax
clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes
{before-utc | after-utc}
name - Name of timezone, usually an acronym. (Range: 1-30 characters)
hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 0-12 hours before UTC,
0-13 hours after UTC)
minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.
after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s prime meridian,
zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you
must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or
west (after) of UTC.
Example
Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show sntp (161)
– 170 –
Time
calendar set This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time server on
your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a
time server.
Syntax
calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year}
hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0 - 23)
min - Minute. (Range: 0 - 59)
sec - Second. (Range: 0 - 59)
day - Day of month. (Range: 1 - 31)
month - january | february | march | april | may | june | july | august |
september | october | november | december
year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 1970 - 2037)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Note that when SNTP is enabled, the system clock cannot be manually configured.
Example
This example shows how to set the system clock to 15:12:34, February 1st, 2011.
Console#calendar set 15:12:34 1 February 2011

Console#
show calendar This command displays the system clock.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Console#show calendar
Current Time : May 13 14:08:18 2014
Time Zone : UTC, 08:00
Summer Time : Not configured
– 171 –
Time Range
Summer Time in Effect : No

Console#
Time Range
This section describes the commands used to sets a time range for use by other
functions, such as Access Control Lists.
Table 26: Time Range Commands

time-range Specifies the name of a time range, and enters time range GC
configuration mode
absolute Sets the time range for the execution of a command TR
periodic Sets the time range for the periodic execution of a TR

command
show time-range Shows configured time ranges. PE
time-range This command specifies the name of a time range, and enters time range
configuration mode. Use the no form to remove a previously specified time range.
Syntax
[no] time-range name
name - Name of the time range. (Range: 1-16 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets a time range for use by other functions, such as Access Control
Lists.
Example
Console(config)#time-range r&d
Console(config-time-range)#
Related Commands
Access Control Lists (371)
– 172 –
Time Range
absolute This command sets the time range for the execution of a command. Use the no
form to remove a previously specified time.
Syntax
absolute start hour minute day month year
[end hour minutes day month year]
absolute end hour minutes day month year
no absolute
hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0-23)
minute - Minute. (Range: 0-59)
day - Day of month. (Range: 1-31)
month - january | february | march | april | may | june | july | august |
september | october | november | december
year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2009-2037)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Time Range Configuration
Command Usage
◆ If a time range is already configured, you must use the no form of this
command to remove the current entry prior to configuring a new time range.
◆ If both an absolute rule and one or more periodic rules are configured for the
same time range (i.e., named entry), that entry will only take effect if the current
time is within the absolute time range and one of the periodic time ranges.
Example
This example configures the time for the single occurrence of an event.
Console(config)#time-range r&d
Console(config-time-range)#absolute start 1 1 1 april 2009 end 2 1 1 april
2009
– 173 –
Time Range
periodic This command sets the time range for the periodic execution of a command. Use
the no form to remove a previously specified time range.
Syntax
[no] periodic {daily | friday | monday | saturday | sunday | thursday |
tuesday | wednesday | weekdays | weekend} hour minute to {daily | friday |
monday | saturday | sunday | thursday | tuesday | wednesday | weekdays
| weekend | hour minute}
daily - Daily
friday - Friday
monday - Monday
saturday - Saturday
sunday - Sunday
thursday - Thursday
tuesday - Tuesday
wednesday - Wednesday
weekdays - Weekdays
weekend - Weekends
hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0-23)
minute - Minute. (Range: 0-59)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Time Range Configuration
Command Usage
◆ If a time range is already configured, you must use the no form of this
command to remove the current entry prior to configuring a new time range.
◆ If both an absolute rule and one or more periodic rules are configured for the
same time range (i.e., named entry), that entry will only take effect if the current
time is within the absolute time range and one of the periodic time ranges.
Example
This example configures a time range for the periodic occurrence of an event.
Console(config)#time-range sales
Console(config-time-range)#periodic daily 1 1 to 2 1
– 174 –
Switch Clustering
show time-range This command shows configured time ranges.
Syntax
show time-range [name]
name - Name of the time range. (Range: 1-30 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show time-range r&d
Time-range r&d:
absolute start 01:01 01 April 2009
periodic Daily 01:01 to Daily 02:01
periodic Daily 02:01 to Daily 03:01
Console#
Switch Clustering
Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized
management through a single unit. Switches that support clustering can be
grouped together regardless of physical location or switch type, as long as they are
connected to the same local network.
Table 27: Switch Cluster Commands

cluster Configures clustering on the switch GC
cluster commander Configures the switch as a cluster Commander GC
cluster ip-pool Sets the cluster IP address pool for Members GC
cluster member Sets Candidate switches as cluster members GC
rcommand Provides configuration access to Member switches GC
show cluster Displays the switch clustering status PE
show cluster members Displays current cluster Members PE
show cluster candidates Displays current cluster Candidates in the network PE
Using Switch Clustering
◆ A switch cluster has a primary unit called the “Commander” which is used to
manage all other “Member” switches in the cluster. The management station
– 175 –
Switch Clustering
can use either Telnet or the web interface to communicate directly with the
Commander through its IP address, and then use the Commander to manage
the Member switches through the cluster’s “internal” IP addresses.
◆ Clustered switches must be in the same Ethernet broadcast domain. In other

words, clustering only functions for switches which can pass information
between the Commander and potential Candidates or active Members
through VLAN 4093.
◆ Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander, it automatically

discovers other cluster-enabled switches in the network. These “Candidate”
switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the
administrator through the management station.
◆ The cluster VLAN 4093 is not configured by default. Before using clustering,
take the following actions to set up this VLAN:
1. Create VLAN 4093 (see “Editing VLAN Groups” on page 569).
2. Add the participating ports to this VLAN (see “Configuring VLAN Interfaces”
on page 571), and set them to hybrid mode, tagged members, PVID = 1,
and acceptable frame type = all.
Note: Cluster Member switches can be managed either through a Telnet

connection to the Commander, or through a web management connection to the
Commander. When using a console connection, from the Commander CLI prompt,
use the rcommand to connect to the Member switch.
cluster This command enables clustering on the switch. Use the no form to disable
clustering.
Syntax
[no] cluster
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ To create a switch cluster, first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch
(the default is enabled), then set the switch as a Cluster Commander. Set a
Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with any other IP subnets in the network.
Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members and
are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander.
– 176 –
Switch Clustering
◆ Switch clusters are limited to the same Ethernet broadcast domain.
◆ There can be up to 100 candidates and 36 member switches in one cluster.
◆ A switch can only be a Member of one cluster.
◆ Configured switch clusters are maintained across power resets and network
changes.
Example
Console(config)#cluster
Console(config)#
cluster commander This command enables the switch as a cluster Commander. Use the no form to
disable the switch as cluster Commander.
Syntax
[no] cluster commander
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander, it automatically
discovers other cluster-enabled switches in the network. These “Candidate”
switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the
administrator through the management station.
◆ Cluster Member switches can be managed through a Telnet connection to the

Commander. From the Commander CLI prompt, use the rcommand id
command to connect to the Member switch.
Example
Console(config)#cluster commander
Console(config)#
– 177 –
Switch Clustering
cluster ip-pool This command sets the cluster IP address pool. Use the no form to reset to the
default address.
Syntax
cluster ip-pool ip-address
no cluster ip-pool
ip-address - The base IP address for IP addresses assigned to cluster
Members. The IP address must start 10.x.x.x.
Default Setting
10.254.254.1
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ An “internal” IP address pool is used to assign IP addresses to Member switches
in the cluster. Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form 10.x.x.member-ID.
Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since Member IDs can only
be between 1 and 36.
◆ Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with addresses in the network IP
subnet. Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become
Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the
Commander.
◆ You cannot change the cluster IP pool when the switch is currently in
Commander mode. Commander mode must first be disabled.
Example
Console(config)#cluster ip-pool 10.2.3.4
Console(config)#
cluster member This command configures a Candidate switch as a cluster Member. Use the no form
to remove a Member switch from the cluster.
Syntax
cluster member mac-address mac-address id member-id
no cluster member id member-id
mac-address - The MAC address of the Candidate switch.
member-id - The ID number to assign to the Member switch. (Range: 1-36)
Default Setting
No Members
– 178 –
Switch Clustering
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The maximum number of cluster Members is 36.
◆ The maximum number of cluster Candidates is 100.
Example
Console(config)#cluster member mac-address 00-12-34-56-78-9a id 5
Console(config)#
rcommand This command provides access to a cluster Member CLI for configuration.
Syntax
rcommand id member-id
member-id - The ID number of the Member switch. (Range: 1-36)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ This command only operates through a Telnet connection to the Commander
switch. Managing cluster Members using the local console CLI on the
Commander is not supported.
◆ There is no need to enter the username and password for access to the Member
switch CLI.
Example
Console#rcommand id 1

Vty-0#
– 179 –
Switch Clustering
show cluster This command shows the switch clustering configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show cluster
Role : commander
Interval Heartbeat : 30
Heartbeat Loss Count : 3 seconds
Number of Members : 1
Number of Candidates : 2
Console#
show cluster members This command shows the current switch cluster members.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show cluster members
Cluster Members:
ID : 1
Role : Active member
IP Address : 10.254.254.2
MAC Address : 00-E0-0C-00-00-FE
Description : ECS4510-28T
Console#
show cluster This command shows the discovered Candidate switches in the network.
candidates
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show cluster candidates
Cluster Candidates:
Role MAC Address Description
--------------- ----------------- ----------------------------------------
Candidate join 00-E0-0C-00-00-FE ECS4510-52T
Candidate 00-12-CF-0B-47-A0 ECS4510-52P
Console#
– 180 –
Stacking
Stacking
This section includes commands which configure a unit as the stack master, set the
10G ports to stacking mode, or renumber all units in the stack. For information on
how to physically connect units into a stack, see the Hardware Installation
Guide. For detailed information on how stacking is implemented for this
type of switch, refer to “Stack Operations” on page 53.
Table 28: Stacking Commands

switch all renumber Renumbers stack units PE
switch master button Configures a unit as the stack master PE
switch stacking button Sets the front panel 10G ports to stacking mode PE
show switch master button Shows the status of the master button PE
show switch stacking Shows the status of the stacking button PE

button
switch all renumber This command resets the switch unit identification numbers in the stack. All stack
members are numbered sequentially starting from the top unit for a non-loop
stack, or starting from the Master unit for a looped stack.
Syntax
switch all renumber
Default Setting
◆ For non-loop stacking, the top unit is unit 1.
◆ For loop stacking, the master unit is unit 1.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The system will restart after renumbering is completed.
Example
This example shows how to renumber all units.
Console#switch all renumber

Console#
– 181 –
Stacking
switch master button This command configures a unit as the stack master. Use the no form to disable the
master button.
Syntax
[no] switch master button unit
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ The switch must be rebooted to activate this command. Note that the
configured setting is not affected by changes to the start-up configuration file.
◆ Set the front panel 10G ports to stacking mode with the switch stacking button
command prior to rebooting the switch.
◆ If the stack has not been initialized, the master button must be disabled on all
other units in the stack, and those units rebooted.
◆ If the stack has been initialized, and this command used to configure a new
stack master, then the master button on the old master must be disabled
before rebooting the stack.
◆ After the newly configured stack master has been rebooted, the front panel
unit identifier will the updated on each unit in the stack.
◆ The bootup messages on all slave units will be halted when the master unit is
rebooted, and configuration through the CLI will be restricted to the master
unit.
Example
This example shows the current switch set to stack master, the switch rebooted,
and the messages displayed after the reboot process completes.
Console#switch master button 1

Console#reload
.
.
.
***************************************************************
Finished provision complete ...
Processing hot swap insertion: 57-108, and use default [TRUE]
****** Master sending maintenance packet
---- Master state preemption
Hot swap insertion done.

Pre-provision complete ...
Finished pre-provision complete ...
– 182 –
Stacking
Provision complete ...

Finished module 2 provision complete ...
Module provision complete.
switch stacking This command sets the front panel 10G ports to stacking mode. Use the no form to
button disable this function.
Syntax
[no] switch stacking button
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use this command on all stack members.
◆ Use the switch master button command to specify one unit as the stack master.
◆ Every switch in the stack must be rebooted to activate this command. Note that
the configured setting is not affected by changes to the start-up configuration
file.
Example
Console#switch stacking button
Console#
show switch master This command shows the status of the master button.
button
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ If the stack has not been initialized, “N” will be displayed in the switch ID field.
◆ Use the switch master button command to specify one unit as the stack master.
Example
Console#show switch master button
Switch ID Master-button-pressed
--------- ---------------------
1 Y
2 N
Console#
– 183 –
Stacking
show switch stacking This command shows the status of the stacking button.
button
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Use the switch stacking button command to set the 10G ports to stacking mode.
Example
Console#show switch stacking button
Config Status Active Status
------------- -------------
Y Y
Console#
– 184 –
5 SNMP Commands
SNMP commands control access to this switch from management stations using
the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent
to trap managers.
SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity,
authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling user access to specific areas
of the MIB tree. To use SNMPv3, first set an SNMP engine ID (or accept the default),
specify read and write access views for the MIB tree, configure SNMP user groups
with the required security model (i.e., SNMP v1, v2c or v3) and security level (i.e.,
authentication and privacy), and then assign SNMP users to these groups, along
with their specific authentication and privacy passwords.
Table 29: SNMP Commands

General SNMP Commands
snmp-server Enables the SNMP agent GC
snmp-server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to GC

SNMP commands
snmp-server contact Sets the system contact string GC
snmp-server location Sets the system location string GC
show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE, PE
SNMP Target Host Commands
snmp-server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps (i.e., SNMP GC
notifications)
snmp-server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation GC
snmp-server Enables the device to send SNMP traps (i.e., SNMP IC

enable port-traps notifications) when a dynamic MAC address is added or
mac-notification removed
show snmp-server enable Shows if SNMP traps are enabled or disabled for the PE
port-traps specified interfaces
SNMPv3 Engine Commands
snmp-server engine-id Sets the SNMP engine ID GC
snmp-server group Adds an SNMP group, mapping users to views GC
snmp-server user Adds a user to an SNMP group GC
snmp-server view Adds an SNMP view GC
show snmp engine-id Shows the SNMP engine ID PE
show snmp group Shows the SNMP groups PE
– 185 –
Chapter 5 | SNMP Commands
Table 29: SNMP Commands (Continued)

show snmp user Shows the SNMP users PE
show snmp view Shows the SNMP views PE
Notification Log Commands
nlm Enables the specified notification log GC
snmp-server notify-filter Creates a notification log and specifies the target host GC
show nlm oper-status Shows operation status of configured notification logs PE
show snmp notify-filter Displays the configured notification logs PE
ATC Trap Commands
snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when broadcast traffic falls beneath the lower IC (Port)
traps atc broadcast-alarm- threshold after a storm control response has been
clear triggered
snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when broadcast traffic exceeds the upper IC (Port)
traps atc broadcast-alarm- threshold for automatic storm control
fire
snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when broadcast traffic exceeds the upper IC (Port)
traps atc broadcast-control- threshold for automatic storm control and the apply timer
apply expires
snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when broadcast traffic falls beneath the lower IC (Port)
traps atc broadcast-control- threshold after a storm control response has been
release triggered and the release timer expires
snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when multicast traffic falls beneath the lower IC (Port)
traps atc multicast-alarm- threshold after a storm control response has been
clear triggered
snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when multicast traffic exceeds the upper IC (Port)
traps atc multicast-alarm- threshold for automatic storm control
fire
snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when multicast traffic exceeds the upper IC (Port)
traps atc multicast-control- threshold for automatic storm control and the apply timer
apply expires
snmp-server enable port- Sends a trap when multicast traffic falls beneath the lower IC (Port)
traps atc multicast-control- threshold after a storm control response has been
release triggered and the release timer expires
Connectivity Fault Management Trap Commands
snmp-server enable traps Enables SNMP traps for CFM continuity check events GC
ethernet cfm cc
snmp-server enable traps Enables SNMP traps for CFM continuity check events, in GC
ethernet cfm crosscheck relation to the cross-check operations between statically
configured MEPs and those learned via continuity check
messages
Transceiver Power Threshold Trap Commands
transceiver-threshold Sends a trap when the transceiver current falls outside the IC (Port)
current specified thresholds
transceiver-threshold Sends a trap when the power level of the received signal IC (Port)
rx-power falls outside the specified thresholds
transceiver-threshold Sends a trap when the transceiver temperature falls IC (Port)

temperature outside the specified thresholds
– 186 –
Table 29: SNMP Commands (Continued)

transceiver-threshold Sends a trap when the power level of the transmitted signal IC (Port)
tx-power power outside the specified thresholds
transceiver-threshold Sends a trap when the transceiver voltage falls outside the IC (Port)
voltage specified thresholds
Additional Trap Commands
memory Sets the rising and falling threshold for the memory GC
utilization alarm
process cpu Sets the rising and falling threshold for the CPU utilization GC
alarm
show memory Shows memory utilization parameters PE
show process cpu Shows CPU utilization parameters PE
snmp-server This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients
(i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3). Use the no form to disable the server.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server
Console(config)#
snmp-server This command defines community access strings used to authorize management
community access by clients using SNMP v1 or v2c. Use the no form to remove the specified
community string.
Syntax
snmp-server community string [ro | rw]
no snmp-server community string
string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to
the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters, case sensitive;
Maximum number of strings: 5)
– 187 –
ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only

able to retrieve MIB objects.
rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able
to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Default Setting
◆ public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to
retrieve MIB objects.
◆ private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both
retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw
Console(config)#
snmp-server contact This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the
system contact information.
Syntax
snmp-server contact string
no snmp-server contact
string - String that describes the system contact information.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Paul
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server location (189)
– 188 –
snmp-server location This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the
location string.
Syntax
snmp-server location text
no snmp-server location
text - String that describes the system location.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC-19
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server contact (188)
show snmp This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command provides information on the community access strings, counters for
SNMP input and output protocol data units, and whether or not SNMP logging has
been enabled with the snmp-server enable traps command.
Example
Console#show snmp
SNMP Agent : Enabled
SNMP Traps :
Authentication : Enabled
Link-up-down : Enabled
MAC-notification : Disabled
MAC-notification interval : 1 second(s)
– 189 –
SNMP Communities :
1. public, and the access level is read-only
2. private, and the access level is read/write
0 SNMP packets input

0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
0 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
0 Get-request PDUs
0 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
0 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors
0 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
0 Response PDUs
0 Trap PDUs
SNMP Logging: Disabled

Console#
snmp-server This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol
enable traps traps or informs (i.e., SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP
notifications.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable traps [authentication | link-up-down |
ethernet cfm | mac-notification [interval seconds]]
authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications.
link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down notifications.
ethernet cfm - Connectivity Fault Management traps. For more
information on these traps, see “CFM Commands” on page 767.
mac-notification - Keyword to issue trap when a dynamic MAC address is
added or removed.
interval - Specifies the interval between issuing two consecutive traps.
(Range: 1-3600 seconds; Default: 1 second)
Default Setting
Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.
Other traps are disabled.
Command Mode
– 190 –
Command Usage
◆ If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications
controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure this device to send
SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps
command. If you enter the command with no keywords, both authentication
and link-up-down notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a
keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.
◆ The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the

snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to specify
which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications. In order to send notifications,
you must configure at least one snmp-server host command.
◆ The authentication, link-up, and link-down traps are legacy notifications, and
therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts, they must be enabled in
conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the
snmp-server group command.
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server host (192)
– 191 –
snmp-server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol
notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified host.
Syntax
snmp-server host host-addr [inform [retry retries | timeout seconds]]
community-string [version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv} [udp-port port]}
no snmp-server host host-addr
host-addr - IPv4 or IPv6 address of the host (the targeted recipient).
(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)
inform - Notifications are sent as inform messages. Note that this option is
only available for version 2c and 3 hosts. (Default: traps are used)
retries - The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if
the recipient does not acknowledge receipt. (Range: 0-255; Default: 3)
seconds - The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment
before resending an inform message. (Range: 0-2147483647
centiseconds; Default: 1500 centiseconds)
community-string - Password-like community string sent with the
notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts. Although you can set this
string using the snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend
defining it with the snmp-server community command prior to using the
snmp-server host command. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1, 2c or 3
traps. (Range: 1, 2c, 3; Default: 1)
auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no
authentication, or with authentication and privacy. See “Simple
Network Management Protocol” in the Web Management Guide for
further information about these authentication and encryption
options.
port - Host UDP port to use. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 162)
Default Setting
Host Address: None
Notification Type: Traps
SNMP Version: 1
UDP Port: 162
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent. In
order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at
least one snmp-server host command. In order to enable multiple hosts, you
must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.
– 192 –
◆ The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server

enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable traps command to enable
the sending of traps or informs and to specify which SNMP notifications are
sent globally. For a host to receive notifications, at least one snmp-server
enable traps command and the snmp-server host command for that host
must be enabled.
◆ Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server

enable traps command. For example, some notification types are always
enabled.
◆ Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default. The recipient
of a trap message does not send a response to the switch. Traps are therefore
not as reliable as inform messages, which include a request for
acknowledgement of receipt. Informs can be used to ensure that critical
information is received by the host. However, note that informs consume more
system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is
received. Informs also add to network traffic. You should consider these effects
when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs.
To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host, complete these steps:

1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 187).
2. Create a view with the required notification messages (page 199).
3. Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 196).
4. Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications (page 190).
5. Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the
snmp-server host command as described in this section.
To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host, complete these steps:

1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 187).
2. Create a remote SNMPv3 user to use in the message exchange process
(page 197).
3. Create a view with the required notification messages (page 199).
4. Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 196).
5. Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications (page 190).
6. Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the
snmp-server host command as described in this section.
◆ The switch can send SNMP Version 1, 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP address,

depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports. If the
snmp-server host command does not specify the SNMP version, the default is
to send SNMP version 1 notifications.
◆ If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host, then the community string is interpreted
as an SNMP user name. The user name must first be defined with the snmp-
server user command. Otherwise, an SNMPv3 group will be automatically
created by the snmp-server host command using the name of the specified
community string, and default settings for the read, write, and notify view.
– 193 –
Example
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server enable traps (190)
snmp-server This command enables the device to send SNMP traps (i.e., SNMP notifications)
enable port-traps when a dynamic MAC address is added or removed. Use the no form to restore the
mac-notification default setting.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps mac-notification
mac-notification - Keyword to issue trap when a dynamic MAC address is
added or removed.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This command can enable MAC authentication traps on the current interface only if
they are also enabled at the global level with the snmp-server enable traps mac-
authentication command.
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps mac-notification
Console(config)#
show snmp-server This command shows if SNMP traps are enabled or disabled for the specified
enable port-traps interfaces.
Syntax
show snmp-server enable port-traps interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
– 194 –
SNMPv3 Commands
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show snmp-server enable port-traps interface
Interface MAC Notification Trap
--------- ---------------------
Eth 1/1 No
Eth 1/2 No
Eth
. 1/3 No
.
.
SNMPv3 Commands
snmp-server This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine. Use the
engine-id no form to restore the default.
Syntax
snmp-server engine-id {local | remote {ip-address}} engineid-string
no snmp-server engine-id {local | remote {ip-address}}
local - Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch.
remote - Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device.
ip-address - IPv4 or IPv6 address of the remote device.
engineid-string - String identifying the engine ID. (Range: 1-26 hexadecimal
characters)
Default Setting
A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC
address.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this
switch or on a remote device. This engine protects against message replay,
delay, and redirection. The engine ID is also used in combination with user
passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting
SNMPv3 packets.
◆ A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs. (See the snmp-
server host command.) The remote engine ID is used to compute the security
digest for authentication and encryption of packets passed between the switch
and a user on the remote host. SNMP passwords are localized using the engine
ID of the authoritative agent. For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the
– 195 –
SNMPv3 Commands
remote agent. You therefore need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP
engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it.
◆ Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID. In other
words, the value “0123456789” is equivalent to “0123456789” followed by 16
zeroes for a local engine ID.
◆ A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch. This is

referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engine ID is deleted or changed,
all SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all existing users
(page 197).
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id local 1234567890
Console(config)#snmp-server engineID remote 9876543210 192.168.1.19
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server host (192)
snmp-server group This command adds an SNMP group, mapping SNMP users to SNMP views. Use the
no form to remove an SNMP group.
Syntax
snmp-server group groupname
{v1 | v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}}
[read readview] [write writeview] [notify notifyview]
no snmp-server group groupname
groupname - Name of an SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters)
v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.
auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no
authentication, or with authentication and privacy. See “Simple Network
Management Protocol” in the Web Management Guide for further
information about these authentication and encryption options.
readview - Defines the view for read access. (1-32 characters)
writeview - Defines the view for write access. (1-32 characters)
notifyview - Defines the view for notifications. (1-32 characters)
Default Setting
Default groups: public1 (read only), private2 (read/write)
readview - Every object belonging to the Internet OID space (1).
writeview - Nothing is defined.
notifyview - Nothing is defined.
1. No view is defined.
– 196 –
SNMPv3 Commands
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A group sets the access policy for the assigned users.
◆ When authentication is selected, the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as specified

in the snmp-server user command.
◆ When privacy is selected, the DES 56-bit algorithm is used for data encryption.
◆ For additional information on the notification messages supported by this

switch, see the Web Management Guide. Also, note that the authentication, link-
up and link-down messages are legacy traps and must therefore be enabled in
conjunction with the snmp-server enable traps command.
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth write daily
Console(config)#
snmp-server user This command adds a user to an SNMP group, restricting the user to a specific
SNMP Read, Write, or Notify View. Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP
group.
Syntax
snmp-server user username groupname
{v1 | v2c | v3 [encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password
[priv des56 priv-password]]
snmp-server user username groupname remote ip-address
{v3 [encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password
[priv des56 priv-password]]
no snmp-server user username {v1 | v2c | v3 | remote}
username - Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.
groupname - Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned.
remote - Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device.
ip-address - IPv4 address of the remote device.
v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.
encrypted - Accepts the password as encrypted input.
auth - Uses SNMPv3 with authentication.
2. Maps to the defaultview.
– 197 –
SNMPv3 Commands
md5 | sha - Uses MD5 or SHA authentication.

auth-password - Authentication password. Enter as plain text if the
encrypted option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.
(A minimum of eight characters is required.)
priv des56 - Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption.
priv-password - Privacy password. Enter as plain text if the encrypted
option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Local users (i.e., the command does not specify a remote engine identifier)
must be configured to authorize management access for SNMPv3 clients, or to
identify the source of SNMPv3 trap messages sent from the local switch.
◆ Remote users (i.e., the command specifies a remote engine identifier) must be
configured to identify the source of SNMPv3 inform messages sent from the
local switch.
◆ The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests

from the password. You should therefore configure the engine ID with the
snmp-server engine-id command before using this configuration command.
◆ Before you configure a remote user, use the snmp-server engine-id command
to specify the engine ID for the remote device where the user resides. Then use
the snmp-server user command to specify the user and the IP address for the
remote device where the user resides. The remote agent’s SNMP engine ID is
used to compute authentication/privacy digests from the user’s password. If the
remote engine ID is not first configured, the snmp-server user command
specifying a remote user will fail.
◆ SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent.
For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent. You therefore
need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID before you can send
proxy requests or informs to it.
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv
des56 einstien
Console(config)#snmp-server user mark group r&d remote 192.168.1.19 v3 auth
md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien
Console(config)#
– 198 –
SNMPv3 Commands
snmp-server view This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB. Use the
no form to remove an SNMP view.
Syntax
snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded}
no snmp-server view view-name
view-name - Name of an SNMP view. (Range: 1-32 characters)
oid-tree - Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree. Wild cards can be
used to mask a specific portion of the OID string. (Refer to the examples.)
included - Defines an included view.
excluded - Defines an excluded view.
Default Setting
defaultview (includes access to the entire MIB tree)
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Views are used in the snmp-server group command to restrict user access to
specified portions of the MIB tree.
◆ The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree.
Examples
This view includes MIB-2.
Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included

Console(config)#
This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, ifDescr. The wild card is used to select
all the index values in this table.
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.*.2 included

Console(config)#
This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, and the mask selects all index entries.
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.a 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.* included

Console(config)#
– 199 –
SNMPv3 Commands
show snmp engine-id This command shows the SNMP engine ID.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows the default engine ID.
Console#show snmp engine-id

Local SNMP EngineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672
Local SNMP EngineBoots: 1
Remote SNMP EngineID IP address

80000000030004e2b316c54321 192.168.1.19
Console#
Table 30: show snmp engine-id - display description

Field Description
Local SNMP engineID String identifying the engine ID.
Local SNMP engineBoots The number of times that the engine has (re-)initialized since the snmp
EngineID was last configured.
Remote SNMP engineID String identifying an engine ID on a remote device.
IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP

engine.
show snmp group Four default groups are provided – SNMPv1 read-only access and read/write access,
and SNMPv2c read-only access and read/write access.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show snmp group
Group Name: r&d
Security Model: v3
Read View: defaultview
Write View: daily
Notify View: none
Storage Type: permanent
Row Status: active
Group Name: public

Security Model: v1
Write View: none
Notify View: none
Storage Type: volatile
Row Status: active
– 200 –
SNMPv3 Commands
Group Name: public

Security Model: v2c
Write View: none
Notify View: none
Row Status: active
Group Name: private

Security Model: v1
Write View: defaultview
Notify View: none
Row Status: active
Group Name: private

Security Model: v2c
Write View: defaultview
Notify View: none
Row Status: active
Console#
Table 31: show snmp group - display description

Field Description
Group Name Name of an SNMP group.
Security Model The SNMP version.
Read View The associated read view.
Write View The associated write view.
Notify View The associated notify view.
Storage Type The storage type for this entry.
Row Status The row status of this entry.
show snmp user This command shows information on SNMP users.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show snmp user
Engine ID : 800001030300e00c0000fd0000
User Name : steve
Group Name : rd
Security Model : v1
Authentication Protocol : None
Privacy Protocol : None
Storage Type : Nonvolatile
Row Status : Active
– 201 –
SNMPv3 Commands
SNMP remote user

Engine ID : 0000937564846450000
User Name : mark
Group Name : public
Security Model : v3
Security Level : Anthentication and privacy
Authentication Protocol : MD5
Privacy Protocol : DES56
Storage Type : Nonvolatile
Row Status : Active
Console#
Table 32: show snmp user - display description

Field Description
Engine ID String identifying the engine ID.
User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.
Group Name Name of an SNMP group.
Security Model The user security model: SNMP v1, v2c or v3.
Security Level Indicates if authentication or encryption are used.
Authentication Protocol The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3.
Privacy Protocol The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3.
SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device.
show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show snmp view
View Name: mib-2
Subtree OID: 1.2.2.3.6.2.1
View Type: included
Storage Type: permanent
Row Status: active
View Name: defaultview

Subtree OID: 1
View Type: included
Row Status: active
Console#
– 202 –
Table 33: show snmp view - display description

Field Description
View Name Name of an SNMP view.
Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree.
View Type Indicates if the view is included or excluded.
nlm This command enables or disables the specified notification log.
Syntax
[no] nlm filter-name
filter-name - Notification log name. (Range: 1-32 characters)
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Notification logging is enabled by default, but will not start recording
information until a logging profile specified by the snmp-server notify-filter
command is enabled by the nlm command.
◆ Disabling logging with this command does not delete the entries stored in the
notification log.
Example
This example enables the notification log A1.
Console(config)#nlm A1
Console(config)#
– 203 –
snmp-server This command creates an SNMP notification log. Use the no form to remove this
notify-filter log.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server notify-filter profile-name remote ip-address
profile-name - Notification log profile name. (Range: 1-32 characters)
ip-address - IPv4 or IPv6 address of a remote device. The specified target
host must already have been configured using the snmp-server host
command.
Note: The notification log is stored locally. It is not sent to a remote device. This
remote host parameter is only required to complete mandatory fields in the SNMP
Notification MIB.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Systems that support SNMP often need a mechanism for recording Notification
information as a hedge against lost notifications, whether there are Traps or
Informs that may be exceeding retransmission limits. The Notification Log MIB
(NLM, RFC 3014) provides an infrastructure in which information from other
MIBs may be logged.
◆ Given the service provided by the NLM, individual MIBs can now bear less
responsibility to record transient information associated with an event against
the possibility that the Notification message is lost, and applications can poll
the log to verify that they have not missed any important Notifications.
◆ If notification logging is not configured and enabled, when the switch reboots,
some SNMP traps (such as warm start) cannot be logged.
◆ To avoid this problem, notification logging should be configured and enabled

using the snmp-server notify-filter command and nlm command, and these
commands stored in the startup configuration file. Then when the switch
reboots, SNMP traps (such as warm start) can now be logged.
◆ When this command is executed, a notification log is created (with the default
parameters defined in RFC 3014). Notification logging is enabled by default
(see the nlm command), but will not start recording information until a logging
profile specified with this command is enabled with the nlm command.
◆ Based on the default settings used in RFC 3014, a notification log can contain
up to 256 entries, and the entry aging time is 1440 minutes. Information
– 204 –
recorded in a notification log, and the entry aging time can only be configured
using SNMP from a network management station.
◆ When a trap host is created with the snmp-server host command, a default
notify filter will be created as shown in the example under the show snmp
notify-filter command.
Example
This example first creates an entry for a remote host, and then instructs the switch
to record this device as the remote host for the specified notification log.

Console(config)#snmp-server notify-filter A1 remote 10.1.19.23
Console#
show nlm oper-status This command shows the operational status of configured notification logs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show nlm oper-status
Filter Name: A1
Oper-Status: Operational
Console#
show snmp This command displays the configured notification logs.

notify-filter
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example displays the configured notification logs and associated target hosts.
Console#show snmp notify-filter

Filter profile name IP address
---------------------------- ----------------
A1 10.1.19.23
Console#
– 205 –
memory This command sets an SNMP trap based on configured thresholds for memory
utilization. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
memory {rising rising-threshold | falling falling-threshold}
no memory {rising | falling}
rising-threshold - Rising threshold for memory utilization alarm expressed in
percentage. (Range: 1-100)
falling-threshold - Falling threshold for memory utilization alarm expressed
in percentage. (Range: 1-100)
Default Setting
Rising Threshold: 90%
Falling Threshold: 70%
Command Mode
Command Usage
Once the rising alarm threshold is exceeded, utilization must drop beneath the
falling threshold before the alarm is terminated, and then exceed the rising
threshold again before another alarm is triggered.
Example
Console(config)#memory rising 80
Console(config)#memory falling 60
Console#
Related Commands
show memory (112)
process cpu This command sets an SNMP trap based on configured thresholds for CPU
utilization. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
process cpu {rising rising-threshold | falling falling-threshold}
no process cpu {rising | falling}
rising-threshold - Rising threshold for CPU utilization alarm expressed in
falling-threshold - Falling threshold for CPU utilization alarm expressed in
– 206 –
Default Setting
Rising Threshold: 90%
Falling Threshold: 70%
Command Mode
Command Usage
Once the rising alarm threshold is exceeded, utilization must drop beneath the
falling threshold before the alarm is terminated, and then exceed the rising
threshold again before another alarm is triggered.
Example
Console(config)#process cpu rising 80
Console(config)#process cpu falling 60
Console#
Related Commands
show process cpu (113)
– 207 –
– 208 –
6 Remote Monitoring Commands
Remote Monitoring allows a remote device to collect information or respond to

specified events on an independent basis. This switch is an RMON-capable device
which can independently perform a wide range of tasks, significantly reducing
network management traffic. It can continuously run diagnostics and log
information on network performance. If an event is triggered, it can automatically
notify the network administrator of a failure and provide historical information
about the event. If it cannot connect to the management agent, it will continue to
perform any specified tasks and pass data back to the management station the
next time it is contacted.
This switch supports mini-RMON, which consists of the Statistics, History, Event and
Alarm groups. When RMON is enabled, the system gradually builds up information
about its physical interfaces, storing this information in the relevant RMON
database group. A management agent then periodically communicates with the
switch using the SNMP protocol. However, if the switch encounters a critical event,
it can automatically send a trap message to the management agent which can then
respond to the event if so configured.
Table 34: RMON Commands

rmon alarm Sets threshold bounds for a monitored variable GC
rmon event Creates a response event for an alarm GC
rmon collection history Periodically samples statistics IC
rmon collection rmon1 Enables statistics collection IC
show rmon alarms Shows the settings for all configured alarms PE
show rmon events Shows the settings for all configured events PE
show rmon history Shows the sampling parameters for each entry PE
show rmon statistics Shows the collected statistics PE
– 209 –
Chapter 6 | Remote Monitoring Commands
rmon alarm This command sets threshold bounds for a monitored variable. Use the no form to
remove an alarm.
Syntax
rmon alarm index variable interval {absolute | delta}
rising-threshold threshold [event-index] falling-threshold threshold
[event-index] [owner name]
no rmon alarm index
index – Index to this entry. (Range: 1-65535)
variable – The object identifier of the MIB variable to be sampled. Only
variables of the type etherStatsEntry.n.n may be sampled. Note that
etherStatsEntry.n uniquely defines the MIB variable, and
etherStatsEntry.n.n defines the MIB variable, plus the etherStatsIndex. For
example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.1 denotes etherStatsBroadcastPkts, plus the
etherStatsIndex of 1.
interval – The polling interval. (Range: 1-31622400 seconds)
absolute – The variable is compared directly to the thresholds at the end of
the sampling period.
delta – The last sample is subtracted from the current value and the
difference is then compared to the thresholds.
threshold – An alarm threshold for the sampled variable.
(Range: 0-2147483647)
event-index – The index of the event to use if an alarm is triggered. If there is
no corresponding entry in the event control table, then no event will be
generated. (Range: 1-65535)
name – Name of the person who created this entry. (Range: 1-127
characters)
Default Setting
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.1 - 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.28/52
Taking delta samples every 30 seconds,
Rising threshold is 892800, assigned to event 0
Falling threshold is 446400, assigned to event 0
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If an event is already defined for an index, the entry must be deleted before any
changes can be made with this command.
◆ If the current value is greater than or equal to the rising threshold, and the last
sample value was less than this threshold, then an alarm will be generated.
After a rising event has been generated, another such event will not be
– 210 –
generated until the sampled value has fallen below the rising threshold,
reaches the falling threshold, and again moves back up to the rising threshold.
◆ If the current value is less than or equal to the falling threshold, and the last
sample value was greater than this threshold, then an alarm will be generated.
After a falling event has been generated, another such event will not be
generated until the sampled value has risen above the falling threshold,
reaches the rising threshold, and again moves back down to the failing
threshold.
Example
Console(config)#rmon alarm 1 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.1 15 delta
rising-threshold 100 1 falling-threshold 30 1 owner mike
Console(config)#
rmon event This command creates a response event for an alarm. Use the no form to remove an
event.
Syntax
rmon event index [log] | [trap community] | [description string] | [owner name]
no rmon event index
log – Generates an RMON log entry when the event is triggered. Log
messages are processed based on the current configuration settings for
event logging (see “Event Logging” on page 148).
trap – Sends a trap message to all configured trap managers (see the
snmp-server host command).
community – A password-like community string sent with the trap
operation to SNMP v1 and v2c hosts. Although this string can be set using
the rmon event command by itself, it is recommended that the string be
defined using the snmp-server community command prior to using the
rmon event command. (Range: 1-32 characters)
string – A comment that describes this event. (Range: 1-127 characters)
name – Name of the person who created this entry.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
– 211 –
Command Usage
◆ If an event is already defined for an index, the entry must be deleted before any
changes can be made with this command.
◆ The specified events determine the action to take when an alarm triggers this
event. The response to an alarm can include logging the alarm or sending a
message to a trap manager.
Example
Console(config)#rmon event 2 log description urgent owner mike
Console(config)#
rmon collection This command periodically samples statistics on a physical interface. Use the no
history form to disable periodic sampling.
Syntax
rmon collection history controlEntry index
[[owner name] [buckets number] [interval seconds]] |
[buckets number] [interval seconds] | interval seconds
no rmon collection history controlEntry index
number – The number of buckets requested for this entry. (Range: 1-65536)
seconds – The polling interval. (Range: 1-3600 seconds)
Default Setting
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.1 - 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.28/52
Buckets: 50
Interval: 30 seconds for even numbered entries,
1800 seconds for odd numbered entries
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
◆ By default, each index number equates to a port on the switch, but can be
changed to any number not currently in use.
◆ If periodic sampling is already enabled on an interface, the entry must be

deleted before any changes can be made with this command.
◆ The information collected for each sample includes:
– 212 –
input octets, packets, broadcast packets, multicast packets, undersize packets,

oversize packets, fragments, jabbers, CRC alignment errors, collisions, drop
events, and network utilization.
◆ The switch reserves two controlEntry index entries for each port. If a default
index entry is re-assigned to another port by this command, the show
running-config command will display a message indicating that this index is
not available for the port to which is normally assigned.
For example, if control entry 15 is assigned to port 5 as shown below, the show
running-config command will indicate that this entry is not available for port
8.
Console(config-if)#rmon collection history controlEntry 15
Console#show running-config
!
rmon collection history controlEntry 15 buckets 50 interval 1800
...
no rmon collection history controlEntry 15
Example
Console(config-if)#rmon collection history controlentry 21 owner mike buckets
24 interval 60
Console(config-if)#
rmon collection This command enables the collection of statistics on a physical interface. Use the
rmon1 no form to disable statistics collection.
Syntax
rmon collection rmon1 controlEntry index [owner name]
no rmon collection rmon1 controlEntry index
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ By default, each index number equates to a port on the switch, but can be
changed to any number not currently in use.
– 213 –
◆ If statistics collection is already enabled on an interface, the entry must be

deleted before any changes can be made with this command.
◆ The information collected for each entry includes:

input octets, packets, broadcast packets, multicast packets, undersize packets,
oversize packets, fragments, jabbers, CRC alignment errors, collisions, drop
events, and packets of specified lengths
Example
Console(config-if)#rmon collection rmon1 controlentry 1 owner mike
Console(config-if)#
show rmon alarms This command shows the settings for all configured alarms.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show rmon alarms
Alarm 1 is valid, owned by
Monitors 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.6.1 every 30 seconds
Taking delta samples, last value was 0
Rising threshold is 892800, assigned to event 0
Falling threshold is 446400, assigned to event 0
.
.
.
show rmon events This command shows the settings for all configured events.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show rmon events
Event 2 is valid, owned by mike
Description is urgent
Event firing causes log and trap to community , last fired 00:00:00
Console#
show rmon history This command shows the sampling parameters configured for each entry in the
history group.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 214 –
Example
Console#show rmon history
Entry 1 is valid, and owned by
Monitors 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.1 every 1800 seconds
Requested # of time intervals, ie buckets, is 8
Granted # of time intervals, ie buckets, is 8
Sample # 1 began measuring at 00:00:01
Received 77671 octets, 1077 packets,
61 broadcast and 978 multicast packets,
0 undersized and 0 oversized packets,
0 fragments and 0 jabbers packets,
0 CRC alignment errors and 0 collisions.
# of dropped packet events is 0
Network utilization is estimated at 0
.
.
.
show rmon statistics This command shows the information collected for all configured entries in the
statistics group.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show rmon statistics
Interface 1 is valid, and owned by
Monitors 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.1 which has
Received 164289 octets, 2372 packets,
120 broadcast and 2211 multicast packets,
0 undersized and 0 oversized packets,
0 fragments and 0 jabbers,
0 CRC alignment errors and 0 collisions.
# of dropped packet events (due to lack of resources): 0
# of packets received of length (in octets):
64: 2245, 65-127: 87, 128-255: 31,
256-511: 5, 512-1023: 2, 1024-1518: 2
.
.
.
– 215 –
– 216 –
7 Flow Sampling Commands
Flow sampling (sFlow) can be used with a remote sFlow Collector to provide an
accurate, detailed and real-time overview of the types and levels of traffic present
on the network. The sFlow Agent samples 1 out of n packets from all data
traversing the switch, re-encapsulates the samples as sFlow datagrams and
transmits them to the sFlow Collector. This sampling occurs at the internal
hardware level where all traffic is seen, whereas traditional probes only have a
partial view of traffic as it is sampled at the monitored interface. Moreover, the
processor and memory load imposed by the sFlow agent is minimal since local
analysis does not take place.
Note: The terms “collector”, “receiver” and “owner”, in the context of this chapter, all
refer to a remote server capable of receiving the sFlow datagrams generated by the
sFlow agent of the switch.
Table 35: sFlow Commands

sflow owner Creates an sFlow collector which the switch uses to send PE
samples to.
sflow polling instance Configures an sFlow polling data source that takes samples PE
periodically based on time.
sflow sampling instance Configures an sFlow sampling data source that samples PE
periodically based on a packet count.
show sflow Shows the global and interface settings for the sFlow PE
process
sflow owner This command creates an sFlow collector on the switch. Use the no form to remove
the sFlow receiver.
Syntax
sflow owner owner-name timeout timeout-value
[destination {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}] [port destination-udp-port]
[max-datagram-size max-datagram-size] [version {v4 | v5}]
no sflow owner owner-name
owner-name - Name of the collector. (Range: 1-30 alphanumeric characters)
timeout-value - The length of time the sFlow interface is available to send
samples to a receiver, after which the owner and associated polling and
– 217 –
Chapter 7 | Flow Sampling Commands
sampling data source instances are removed from the configuration.

(Range: 30-10000000 seconds)
ipv4-address - IPv4 address of the sFlow collector. Valid IPv4 addresses
consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.
ipv6-address - IPv6 address of the sFlow collector. A full IPv6 address
including the network prefix and host address bits. An IPv6 address consists
of 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One double colon may be
used to indicate the appropriate number of zeros required to fill the
undefined fields.
destination-udp-port - The UDP port on which the collector is listening for
sFlow streams. (Range: 1-65535)
max-datagram-size - The maximum size of the sFlow datagram payload.
(Range: 200-1500 bytes)
version {v4 | v5} - Sends either v4 or v5 sFlow datagrams to the receiver.
Default Setting
No owner is configured
UDP Port: 6343
Version: v4
Maximum Datagram Size: 1400 bytes
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use the sflow owner command to create an owner instance of an sFlow
collector. If the socket port, maximum datagram size, and datagram version are
not specified, then the default values are used.
◆ Once an owner is created, the sflow owner command can again be used to
modify the owner’s port number. All other parameter values for the owner will
be retained if the port is modified.
◆ Use the no sflow owner command to remove the collector.
◆ When the sflow owner command is issued, it’s associated timeout value will
immediately begin to count down. Once the timeout value has reached zero
seconds, the sFlow owner and it’s associated sampling sources will be deleted
from the configuration.
Example
This example shows an sflow collector being created on the switch.
Console(config)#sflow owner stat_server1 timeout 100 destination

192.168.220.225 port 22500 max-datagram-size 512 version v5
Console(config)#
– 218 –
This example shows how to modify the sFlow port number for an already
configured collector.
Console(config)#sflow owner stat_server1 timeout 100 port 35100

Console(config)#
sflow polling instance This command enables an sFlow polling data source, for a specified interface, that
polls periodically based on a specified time interval. Use the no form to remove the
polling data source instance from the switch’s sFlow configuration.
Syntax
sflow polling {interface interface} instance instance-id receiver owner-name
polling-interval seconds
no sflow polling {interface interface} instance instance-id
interface - The source from which the samples will be taken at specified
intervals and sent to a collector.
ethernet unit/port
instance-id - An instance ID used to identify the sampling source. (Range: 1)
owner-name - The associated receiver, to which the samples will be sent.
(Range: 1-30 alphanumeric characters)
polling-interval - The time interval at which the sFlow process adds
counter values to the sample datagram. (Range: 0-10000000 seconds, 0
disables this feature)
Default Setting
No sFlow polling instance is configured.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command enables a polling data source and configures the interval at which
counter values are added to the sample datagram.
Example
This example sets the polling interval to 10 seconds.

Console(config-if)#sflow polling-interval 10
Console(config-if)#
– 219 –
sflow sampling This command enables an sFlow data source instance for a specific interface that
instance takes samples periodically based on the number of packets processed. Use the no
form to remove the sampling data source instance from the switch’s sFlow
configuration.
Syntax
sflow sampling {interface interface} instance instance-id receiver owner-name
sampling-rate sample-rate
[max-header-size max-header-size]
no sflow sample {interface interface} instance instance-id
interface - The source from which the samples will be taken and sent to a
collector.
ethernet unit/port
instance-id - An instance ID used to identify the sampling source. (Range: 1)
owner-name - The associated receiver, to which the samples will be sent.
sample-rate - The packet sampling rate, or the number of packets out of
which one sample will be taken. (Range: 256-16777215 packets)
max-header-size - The maximum size of the sFlow datagram header.
(Range: 64-256 bytes)
Default Setting
No sFlow sampling instance id configured.
Maximum Header Size: 128 bytes
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example enables a sampling data source on Ethernet interface 1/1, an
associated receiver named “owner1”, and a sampling rate of one out of 100. The
maximum header size is also set to 200 bytes.
Console# sflow sampling interface ethernet 1/1 instance 1 receiver owner1

sampling-rate 100 max-header-size 200
Console#
– 220 –
The following command removes a sampling data source from Ethernet interface
1/1.
Console# no sflow sampling interface ethernet 1/1 instance 1

Console#
show sflow This command shows the global and interface settings for the sFlow process.
Syntax
show sflow [owner owner-name | interface interface]
owner-name - The associated receiver, to which the samples are sent.
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show sflow interface ethernet 1/2
Receiver Owner Name : stat1

Receiver Timeout : 99633 sec
Receiver Destination : 192.168.32.32
Receiver Socket Port : 6343
Maximum Datagram Size : 1400 bytes
Datagram Version : 4
Data Source : Eth 1/2

Sampling Instance ID : 1
Sampling Rate : 512
Maximum Header Size : 128 bytes
Console#
– 221 –
– 222 –
8 Authentication Commands
You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for
management access using local or remote authentication methods. Port-based
authentication using IEEE 802.1X can also be configured to control either
management access to the uplink ports or client access3 to the data ports.
Table 36: Authentication Commands

User Accounts and Configures the basic user names and passwords for management
Privilege Levels access, and assigns a privilege level to specified command groups or
individual commands
Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence
RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server
TACACS+ Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS+ server
AAA Configures authentication, authorization, and accounting for network

access
Web Server Enables management access via a web browser
Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet
Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet
802.1X Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1X
Management IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Configures relay parameters required for sending authentication
messages between a client and broadband remote access servers
3. For other methods of controlling client access, see “General Security Measures” on
page 289.
– 223 –
Chapter 8 | Authentication Commands
User Accounts and Privilege Levels

The basic commands required for management access and assigning command
privilege levels are listed in this section. This switch also includes other options for
password checking via the console or a Telnet connection (page 137), user
authentication via a remote authentication server (page 223), and host access
authentication for specific ports (page 262).
Table 37: User Access Commands

enable password Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec GC

level
username Establishes a user name-based authentication system at GC

login
privilege Assigns a privilege level to specified command groups or GC

individual commands
show privilege Shows the privilege level for the current user, or the PE
privilege level for commands modified by the privilege
command
enable password After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec password.
Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls access to the
Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no form to reset the
default password.
Syntax
enable password [level level] {0 | 7} password
no enable password [level level]
level level - Sets the command access privileges. (Range: 0-15)
Level 0, 8 and 15 are designed for users (guest), managers (network
maintenance), and administrators (top-level access). The other levels can
be used to configured specialized access profiles.
Level 0-7 provide the same default access privileges, all within Normal
Exec mode under the “Console>” command prompt.
Level 8-14 provide the same default access privileges, including
additional commands in Normal Exec mode, and a subset of commands
in Privileged Exec mode under the “Console#” command prompt.
Level 15 provides full access to all commands.
The privilege level associated with any command can be changed using
the privilege command.
{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.
password - Password for this privilege level.
(Maximum length: 32 characters plain text or encrypted, case sensitive)
– 224 –
Default Setting
The default is level 15.
The default password is “super”
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change the
command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable
command.
◆ The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password

settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from an FTP
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin
Console(config)#
Related Commands
enable (95)
authentication enable (228)
username This command adds named users, requires authentication at login, specifies or
changes a user's password (or specify that no password is required), or specifies or
changes a user's access level. Use the no form to remove a user name.
Syntax
username name {access-level level | nopassword | password {0 | 7} password}
no username name
name - The name of the user. (Maximum length: 32 characters,
case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)
The device has two predefined users, guest which is assigned privilege
level 0 (Normal Exec) and has access to a limited number of commands,
and admin which is assigned privilege level 15 and has full access to all
commands.
access-level level - Specifies command access privileges. (Range: 0-15)
Level 0, 8 and 15 are designed for users (guest), managers (network
maintenance), and administrators (top-level access). The other levels can
be used to configured specialized access profiles.
Level 0-7 provide the same default access privileges, all within Normal
Exec mode under the “Console>” command prompt.
– 225 –
Level 8-14 provide the same default access privileges, including

additional commands in Normal Exec mode, and a subset of commands
in Privileged Exec mode under the “Console#” command prompt.
Level 15 provides full access to all commands.
The privilege level associated with any command can be changed using
the privilege command.
Any privilege level can access all of the commands assigned to lower
privilege levels. For example, privilege level 8 can access all commands
assigned to privilege levels 7-0 according to default settings, and to any
other commands assigned to levels 7-0 using the privilege command.
nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.
{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.
password password - The authentication password for the user. (Maximum
length: 32 characters plain text or encrypted, case sensitive)
Default Setting
The default access level is 0 (Normal Exec).
The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are:
Table 38: Default Login Settings

username access-level password
guest 0 guest
admin 15 admin
Command Mode
Command Usage
The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during
system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from an FTP server.
There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user.
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15

Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith
Console(config)#
– 226 –
privilege This command assigns a privilege level to specified command groups or individual
commands. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
privilege mode [all] level level command
no privilege mode [all] command
mode - The configuration mode containing the specified command.
(See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 84 and “Configuration
Commands” on page 86.)
all - Modifies the privilege level for all subcommands under the specified
command.
level level - Specifies the privilege level for the specified command. Refer to
the default settings described for the access level parameter under the
username command. (Range: 0-15)
command - Specifies any command contained within the specified mode.
Default Setting
Privilege level 0 provides access to a limited number of the commands which
display the current status of the switch, as well as several database clear and reset
functions. Level 8 provides access to all display status and configuration
commands, except for those controlling various authentication and security
features. Level 15 provides full access to all commands.
Command Mode
Example
This example sets the privilege level for the ping command to Privileged Exec.
Console(config)#privilege exec level 15 ping

Console(config)#
show privilege This command shows the privilege level for the current user, or the privilege level
for commands modified by the privilege command.
Syntax
show privilege [command]
command - Displays the privilege level for all commands modified by the
privilege command.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 227 –
Authentication Sequence
Example
This example shows the privilege level for any command modified by the privilege
command.
Console#show privilege command

privilege line all level 0 accounting
privilege exec level 15 ping
Console(config)#
Three authentication methods can be specified to authenticate users logging into
the system for management access. The commands in this section can be used to
define the authentication method and sequence.
Table 39: Authentication Sequence Commands

authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence for GC

command mode change
authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC
authentication enable This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when
changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the
enable command. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
authentication enable {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}
no authentication enable
local - Use local password only.
radius - Use RADIUS server password only.
tacacs - Use TACACS server password.
Default Setting
Local
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery,
while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS
encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the
server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.
– 228 –
◆ RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for
each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and privilege
level must be configured on the authentication server.
◆ You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate

the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication
enable radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS
server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication
is attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the
local user name and password is checked.
Example
Console(config)#authentication enable radius
Console(config)#
Related Commands
enable password - sets the password for changing command modes (224)
authentication login This command defines the login authentication method and precedence. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
authentication login {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}
no authentication login
local - Use local password.
radius - Use RADIUS server password.
tacacs - Use TACACS server password.
Default Setting
Local
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery,
while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS
encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the
server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.
◆ RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for
each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and privilege
level must be configured on the authentication server.
– 229 –
RADIUS Client
◆ You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate

the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication login
radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is
verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is
attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the
local user name and password is checked.
Example
Console(config)#authentication login radius
Console(config)#
Related Commands
username - for setting the local user names and passwords (225)
RADIUS Client
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-
aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of
multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or
group that require management access to a switch.
Table 40: RADIUS Client Commands

radius-server acct-port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC
radius-server auth-port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC
radius-server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC
radius-server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC
radius-server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC
radius-server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC
show radius-server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE
radius-server This command sets the RADIUS server network port for accounting messages. Use
acct-port the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server acct-port port-number
no radius-server acct-port
port-number - RADIUS server UDP port used for accounting messages.
(Range: 1-65535)
– 230 –
RADIUS Client
Default Setting
1813
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#radius-server acct-port 181
Console(config)#
radius-server This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to restore the
auth-port default.
Syntax
radius-server auth-port port-number
no radius-server auth-port
port-number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
1812
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#radius-server auth-port 181
Console(config)#
radius-server host This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers, and authentication
and accounting parameters that apply to each server. Use the no form to remove a
specified server, or to restore the default values.
Syntax
[no] radius-server index host host-ip-address [acct-port acct-port] [auth-
port auth-port] [key key] [retransmit retransmit] [timeout timeout]
index - Allows you to specify up to five servers. These servers are queried in
sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires.
host-ip-address - IP address of server.
acct-port - RADIUS server UDP port used for accounting messages.
(Range: 1-65535)
– 231 –
RADIUS Client
auth-port - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.

(Range: 1-65535)
key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not
use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters)
retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon
access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)
timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending
a request. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
auth-port - 1812
acct-port - 1813
timeout - 5 seconds
retransmit - 2
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.20 port 181 timeout 10
retransmit 5 key green
Console(config)#
radius-server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
radius-server key key-string
no radius-server key
key-string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do
not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#radius-server key green
Console(config)#
– 232 –
RADIUS Client
radius-server This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.
retransmit
Syntax
radius-server retransmit number-of-retries
no radius-server retransmit
number-of-retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate
logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1 - 30)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5
Console(config)#
radius-server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to
the RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server timeout number-of-seconds
no radius-server timeout
number-of-seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before
resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10
Console(config)#
– 233 –
TACACS+ Client
show radius-server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show radius-server
Remote RADIUS Server Configuration:
Global Settings:
Authentication Port Number : 1812
Accounting Port Number : 1813
Retransmit Times : 2
Request Timeout : 5
Server 1:
Server IP Address : 192.168.1.1
Authentication Port Number : 1812
Accounting Port Number : 1813
Request Timeout : 5
RADIUS Server Group:

Group Name Member Index
------------------------- -------------
radius 1
Console#
TACACS+ Client
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon
authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control
access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains
a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels
for each user or group that require management access to a switch.
Table 41: TACACS+ Client Commands

tacacs-server host Specifies the TACACS+ server and optional parameters GC
tacacs-server key Sets the TACACS+ encryption key GC
tacacs-server port Specifies the TACACS+ server network port GC
tacacs-server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC
tacacs-server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC
show tacacs-server Shows the current TACACS+ settings GC
– 234 –
TACACS+ Client
tacacs-server host This command specifies the TACACS+ server and other optional parameters. Use
the no form to remove the server, or to restore the default values.
Syntax
tacacs-server index host host-ip-address [key key] [port port-number]
[retransmit retransmit] [timeout timeout]
no tacacs-server index
index - The index for this server. (Range: 1)
host-ip-address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.
key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client. Do not
use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters)
port-number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1-65535)
retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon
access via the TACACS+ server. (Range: 1-30)
timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending
a request. (Range: 1-540)
Default Setting
authentication port - 49
timeout - 5 seconds
retransmit - 2
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server 1 host 192.168.1.25 port 181 timeout 10
retransmit 5 key green
Console(config)#
tacacs-server key This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
tacacs-server key key-string
no tacacs-server key
key-string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client.
Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters)
Default Setting
None
– 235 –
TACACS+ Client
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green
Console(config)#
tacacs-server port This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server port port-number
no tacacs-server port
port-number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
49
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181
Console(config)#
tacacs-server This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.
retransmit
Syntax
tacacs-server retransmit number-of-retries
no tacacs-server retransmit
number-of-retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate
logon access via the TACACS+ server. (Range: 1 - 30)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
– 236 –
TACACS+ Client
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server retransmit 5
Console(config)#
tacacs-server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to
the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server timeout number-of-seconds
no tacacs-server timeout
number-of-seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before
resending a request. (Range: 1-540)
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server timeout 10
Console(config)#
show tacacs-server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show tacacs-server
Remote TACACS+ Server Configuration:
Global Settings:
Server Port Number : 49
Timeout : 5
Server 1:
Server IP Address : 10.11.12.13
Server Port Number : 49
Timeout : 4
– 237 –
AAA
TACACS+ Server Group:

Group Name Member Index
------------------------- -------------
tacacs+ 1
Console#
AAA
The Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) feature provides the
main framework for configuring access control on the switch. The AAA functions
require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS+ servers in the network.
Table 42: AAA Commands

aaa accounting commands Enables accounting of Exec mode commands GC
aaa accounting dot1x Enables accounting of 802.1X services GC
aaa accounting exec Enables accounting of Exec services GC
aaa accounting update Enables periodoc updates to be sent to the accounting GC

server
aaa authorization exec Enables authorization of Exec sessions GC
aaa group server Groups security servers in to defined lists GC
server Configures the IP address of a server in a group list SG
accounting dot1x Applies an accounting method to an interface for 802.1X IC

service requests
accounting commands Applies an accounting method to CLI commands entered Line

by a user
accounting exec Applies an accounting method to local console, Telnet or Line

SSH connections
authorization exec Applies an authorization method to local console, Telnet or Line

SSH connections
show accounting Displays all accounting information PE
aaa accounting This command enables the accounting of Exec mode commands. Use the no form
commands to disable the accounting service.
Syntax
aaa accounting commands level {default | method-name} start-stop group
{tacacs+ | server-group}
no aaa accounting commands level {default | method-name}
level - The privilege level for executing commands. (Range: 0-15)
default - Specifies the default accounting method for service requests.
– 238 –
AAA
method-name - Specifies an accounting method for service requests.

start-stop - Records accounting from starting point and stopping point.
group - Specifies the server group to use.
tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configured with the tacacs-server
host command.
server-group - Specifies the name of a server group configured with the
aaa group server command. (Range: 1-64 characters)
Default Setting
Accounting is not enabled
No servers are specified
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The accounting of Exec mode commands is only supported by TACACS+
servers.
◆ Note that the default and method-name fields are only used to describe the
accounting method(s) configured on the specified TACACS+ server, and do not
actually send any information to the server about the methods to use.
Example
Console(config)#aaa accounting commands 15 default start-stop group tacacs+
Console(config)#
aaa accounting dot1x This command enables the accounting of requested 802.1X services for network
access. Use the no form to disable the accounting service.
Syntax
aaa accounting dot1x {default | method-name}
start-stop group {radius | tacacs+ |server-group}
no aaa accounting dot1x {default | method-name}
radius - Specifies all RADIUS hosts configure with the radius-server
host command.
– 239 –
AAA
tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server

host command.
Default Setting
Command Mode
Command Usage
Note that the default and method-name fields are only used to describe the
accounting method(s) configured on the specified RADIUS or TACACS+ servers, and
do not actually send any information to the servers about the methods to use.
Example
Console(config)#aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius
Console(config)#
aaa accounting exec This command enables the accounting of requested Exec services for network
access. Use the no form to disable the accounting service.
Syntax
aaa accounting exec {default | method-name}
start-stop group {radius | tacacs+ |server-group}
no aaa accounting exec {default | method-name}
radius - Specifies all RADIUS hosts configure with the radius-server
host command.
tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server
host command.
– 240 –
AAA
Default Setting
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command runs accounting for Exec service requests for the local console
and Telnet connections.
◆ Note that the default and method-name fields are only used to describe the
accounting method(s) configured on the specified RADIUS or TACACS+ servers,
and do not actually send any information to the servers about the methods to
use.
Example
Console(config)#aaa accounting exec default start-stop group tacacs+
Console(config)#
aaa accounting This command enables the sending of periodic updates to the accounting server.
update Use the no form to disable accounting updates.
Syntax
aaa accounting update [periodic interval]
no aaa accounting update
interval - Sends an interim accounting record to the server at this interval.
Default Setting
1 minute
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When accounting updates are enabled, the switch issues periodic interim
accounting records for all users on the system.
◆ Using the command without specifying an interim interval enables updates,

but does not change the current interval setting.
– 241 –
AAA
Example
Console(config)#aaa accounting update periodic 30
Console(config)#
aaa authorization exec This command enables the authorization for Exec access. Use the no form to
disable the authorization service.
Syntax
aaa authorization exec {default | method-name}
group {tacacs+ | server-group}
no aaa authorization exec {default | method-name}
default - Specifies the default authorization method for Exec access.
method-name - Specifies an authorization method for Exec access.
tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configured with the tacacs-server
host command.
Default Setting
Authorization is not enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command performs authorization to determine if a user is allowed to run
an Exec shell for local console, Telnet, or SSH connections.
◆ AAA authentication must be enabled before authorization is enabled.
◆ If this command is issued without a specified named method, the default

method list is applied to all interfaces or lines (where this authorization type
applies), except those that have a named method explicitly defined.
Example
Console(config)#aaa authorization exec default group tacacs+
Console(config)#
– 242 –
AAA
aaa group server Use this command to name a group of security server hosts. To remove a server
group from the configuration list, enter the no form of this command.
Syntax
[no] aaa group server {radius | tacacs+} group-name
radius - Defines a RADIUS server group.
tacacs+ - Defines a TACACS+ server group.
group-name - A text string that names a security server group.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#aaa group server radius tps
Console(config-sg-radius)#
server This command adds a security server to an AAA server group. Use the no form to
remove the associated server from the group.
Syntax
[no] server {index | ip-address}
index - Specifies the server index. (Range: RADIUS 1-5, TACACS+ 1)
ip-address - Specifies the host IP address of a server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Server Group Configuration
Command Usage
◆ When specifying the index for a RADIUS server, that server index must already
be defined by the radius-server host command.
◆ When specifying the index for a TACACS+ server, that server index must already
be defined by the tacacs-server host command.
– 243 –
AAA
Example
Console(config)#aaa group server radius tps
Console(config-sg-radius)#server 10.2.68.120
Console(config-sg-radius)#
accounting dot1x This command applies an accounting method for 802.1X service requests on an
interface. Use the no form to disable accounting on the interface.
Syntax
accounting dot1x {default | list-name}
no accounting dot1x
default - Specifies the default method list created with the aaa accounting
dot1x command.
list-name - Specifies a method list created with the aaa accounting dot1x
command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console(config-if)#accounting dot1x tps
Console(config-if)#
accounting This command applies an accounting method to entered CLI commands. Use the
commands no form to disable accounting for entered CLI commands.
Syntax
accounting commands level {default | list-name}
no accounting commands level
level - The privilege level for executing commands. (Range: 0-15)
commands command.
list-name - Specifies a method list created with the aaa accounting
commands command.
Default Setting
None
– 244 –
AAA
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
Console(config-line)#accounting commands 15 default
accounting exec This command applies an accounting method to local console, Telnet or SSH
connections. Use the no form to disable accounting on the line.
Syntax
accounting exec {default | list-name}
no accounting exec
exec command.
list-name - Specifies a method list created with the aaa accounting exec
command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
Console(config-line)#accounting exec tps
Console(config-line)#exit
Console(config)#line vty
Console(config-line)#accounting exec default
authorization exec This command applies an authorization method to local console, Telnet or SSH
connections. Use the no form to disable authorization on the line.
Syntax
authorization exec {default | list-name}
no authorization exec
default - Specifies the default method list created with the aaa
authorization exec command.
list-name - Specifies a method list created with the aaa authorization exec
command.
– 245 –
AAA
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
Console(config-line)#authorization exec tps
Console(config-line)#exit
Console(config)#line vty
Console(config-line)#authorization exec default
show accounting This command displays the current accounting settings per function and per port.
Syntax
show accounting [commands [level]] |
[[dot1x [statistics [username user-name | interface interface]] |
exec [statistics] | statistics]
commands - Displays command accounting information.
level - Displays command accounting information for a specifiable
command level.
dot1x - Displays dot1x accounting information.
exec - Displays Exec accounting records.
statistics - Displays accounting records.
user-name - Displays accounting records for a specifiable username.
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show accounting
Accounting Type : dot1x
Method List : default
Group List : radius
– 246 –
Web Server
Interface : Eth 1/1
Method List : tps

Group List : radius
Interface : Eth 1/2
Accounting Type : EXEC

Group List : tacacs+
Interface : vty
Accounting Type : Commands 0

. Interface :
.
.
Accounting Type : Commands 15
Interface :
Console#
Web Server
This section describes commands used to configure web browser management
access to the switch.
Table 43: Web Server Commands

ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC
ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a GC

browser
ip http secure-port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC
ip http secure-server Enables HTTPS (HTTP/SSL) for encrypted communications GC
ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface.
Use the no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip http port port-number
no ip http port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
80
– 247 –
Web Server
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ip http port 769
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip http server (248)
show system (117)
ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser.
Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ip http server
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip http port (247)
show system (117)
ip http secure-port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the
switch’s web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.
Syntax
ip http secure-port port_number
no ip http secure-port
port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
443
– 248 –
Web Server
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.
◆ If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the
HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format: https://
device:port_number
Example
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip http secure-server (249)
show system (117)
ip http secure-server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the
Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection)
to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http secure-server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.
However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same
UDP port.
◆ If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your
browser: https://device[:port_number]
◆ When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:

■ The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.
■ The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the
connection.
■ The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting
data.
– 249 –
Telnet Server
◆ The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.

A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 6, Mozilla
Firefox 4, or Google Chrome 29, or more recent versions.
The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:
Table 44: HTTPS System Support
Web Browser Operating System
Internet Explorer 6.x or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows
2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8
Mozilla Firefox 4 or later Windows 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, Linux
Google Chrome 29 or later Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8
◆ To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site

Certificate” in the Web Management Guide. Also refer to the copy tftp https-
certificate command.
◆ Connection to the web interface is not supported for HTTPS using an IPv6 link
local address.
Example
Console(config)#ip http secure-server
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip http secure-port (248)
copy tftp https-certificate (126)
show system (117)
Telnet Server
This section describes commands used to configure Telnet management access to
the switch.
Table 45: Telnet Server Commands

ip telnet max-sessions Specifies the maximum number of Telnet sessions that can GC
simultaneously connect to this system
ip telnet port Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface GC
ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from GC

Telnet
show ip telnet Displays configuration settings for the Telnet server PE
– 250 –
Telnet Server
Note: This switch also supports a Telnet client function. A Telnet connection can be
made from this switch to another device by entering the telnet command at the
Privileged Exec configuration level.
ip telnet max-sessions This command specifies the maximum number of Telnet sessions that can
simultaneously connect to this system. Use the no from to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
ip telnet max-sessions session-count
no ip telnet max-sessions
session-count - The maximum number of allowed Telnet session.
(Range: 0-8)
Default Setting
8 sessions
Command Mode
Command Usage
A maximum of eight sessions can be concurrently opened for Telnet and Secure
Shell (i.e., both Telnet and SSH share a maximum number of eight sessions).
Example
Console(config)#ip telnet max-sessions 1
Console(config)#
ip telnet port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface. Use the
no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip telnet port port-number
no telnet port
port-number - The TCP port number to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
23
– 251 –
Telnet Server
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ip telnet port 123
Console(config)#
ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet. Use
the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip telnet server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ip telnet server
Console(config)#
show ip telnet This command displays the configuration settings for the Telnet server.
Command Mode
Example
Console#show ip telnet
IP Telnet Configuration:
Telnet Status: Enabled

Telnet Service Port: 23
Telnet Max Session: 8
Console#
– 252 –
Secure Shell
Secure Shell
This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server. Note that
you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this
protocol to configure the switch.
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0 clients.
Table 46: Secure Shell Commands

ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC

authentication-retries
ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC
ip ssh server-key size Sets the SSH server key size GC
ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC
copy tftp public-key Copies the user’s public key from a TFTP server to the PE
switch
delete public-key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE
disconnect Terminates a line connection PE
ip ssh crypto Generates the host key PE

host-key generate
ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE
ip ssh save host-key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE
show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured PE
values for authentication timeout and retries
show public-key Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host PE
show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE
show users Shows SSH users, including privilege level and public key PE
type
Configuration Guidelines
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote
authentication server, as specified by the authentication login command. If public
key authentication is specified by the client, then you must configure
authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following
section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and
enable the SSH server.
– 253 –
Secure Shell
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the ip ssh crypto host-key generate command to
create a host public/private key pair.
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the
known hosts file would appear similar to the following example:
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254

15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956
108259132128902337654680172627257141342876294130119619556678259566410486957427
888146206519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877945
4524083971752646358058176716709574804776117
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key
command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client’s
granted management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be
configured locally on the switch with the username command.) The clients are
subsequently authenticated using these keys. The current firmware only
accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the
following example for an RSA key:
1024 35
134108168560989392104094492015542534763164192187295892114317388005553616163105
177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199696317813662774141689
851320491172048303392543241016379975923714490119380060902539484084827178194372
288402533115952134861022902978982721353267131629432532818915045306393916643
steve@192.168.1.19
4. Set the Optional Parameters – Set other optional parameters, including the
authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.
5. Enable SSH Service – Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server
on the switch.
6. Authentication – One of the following authentication methods is employed:
Password Authentication (for SSH v1.5 or V2 Clients)

a. The client sends its password to the server.
b. The switch compares the client's password to those stored in memory.
c. If a match is found, the connection is allowed.
Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still
be given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the
known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client's keys.
– 254 –
Secure Shell
Public Key Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch,
the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption
method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys
stored on the switch can access it. The following exchanges take place during
this process:
Authenticating SSH v1.5 Clients
a. The client sends its RSA public key to the switch.

b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in
memory.
c. If a match is found, the switch uses its secret key to generate a
random 256-bit string as a challenge, encrypts this string with the
user’s public key, and sends it to the client.
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string,
computes the MD5 checksum, and sends the checksum back to the
switch.
e. The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that
computed for the original string it sent. If the two checksums match,
this means that the client's private key corresponds to an authorized
public key, and the client is authenticated.
Authenticating SSH v2 Clients
a. The client first queries the switch to determine if DSA public key
authentication using a preferred algorithm is acceptable.
b. If the specified algorithm is supported by the switch, it notifies the
client to proceed with the authentication process. Otherwise, it
rejects the request.
c. The client sends a signature generated using the private key to the
switch.
d. When the server receives this message, it checks whether the
supplied key is acceptable for authentication, and if so, it then checks
whether the signature is correct. If both checks succeed, the client is
authenticated.
Note: The SSH server supports up to eight client sessions. The maximum number
of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.
Note: The SSH server can be accessed using any configured IPv4 or IPv6 interface
address on the switch.
– 255 –
Secure Shell
ip ssh This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to
authentication-retries reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip ssh authentication-retries count
no ip ssh authentication-retries
count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the
interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show ip ssh (260)
ip ssh server This command enables the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use the no
form to disable this service.
Syntax
[no] ip ssh server
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The SSH server supports up to eight client sessions. The maximum number of
client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.
◆ The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to
select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.
◆ You must generate DSA and RSA host keys before enabling the SSH server.
– 256 –
Secure Shell
Example
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa
Console#configure
Console(config)#ip ssh server
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto host-key generate (259)
show ssh (262)
ip ssh server-key size This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
ip ssh server-key size key-size
no ip ssh server-key size
key-size – The size of server key. (Range: 512-896 bits)
Default Setting
768 bits
Command Mode
Command Usage
The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.
The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.
Example
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512
Console(config)#
ip ssh timeout This command configures the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no form to
Syntax
ip ssh timeout seconds
no ip ssh timeout
seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.
(Range: 1-120)
– 257 –
Secure Shell
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client
during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been established, the
timeout for user input is controlled by the exec-timeout command for vty sessions.
Example
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60
Console(config)#
Related Commands
exec-timeout (139)
show ip ssh (260)
delete public-key This command deletes the specified user’s public key.
Syntax
delete public-key username [dsa | rsa]
dsa – DSA public key type.
rsa – RSA public key type.
Default Setting
Deletes both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#delete public-key admin dsa
Console#
– 258 –
Secure Shell
ip ssh crypto This command generates the host key pair (i.e., public and private).
host-key generate
Syntax
ip ssh crypto host-key generate [dsa | rsa]
dsa – DSA (Version 2) key type.
rsa – RSA (Version 1) key type.
Default Setting
Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ The switch uses only RSA Version 1 for SSHv1.5 clients and DSA Version 2 for
SSHv2 clients.
◆ This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the ip ssh
save host-key command to save the host key pair to flash memory.
◆ Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts
file as part of the configuration process. Otherwise, you must manually create a
known hosts file and place the host public key in it.
◆ The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption
method with the client trying to connect to it.
Example
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa
Console#
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto zeroize (259)
ip ssh save host-key (260)
ip ssh crypto zeroize This command clears the host key from memory (i.e. RAM).
Syntax
ip ssh crypto zeroize [dsa | rsa]
dsa – DSA key type.
rsa – RSA key type.
Default Setting
Clears both the DSA and RSA key.
– 259 –
Secure Shell
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ This command clears the host key from volatile memory (RAM). Use the no ip
ssh save host-key command to clear the host key from flash memory.
◆ The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command.
Example
Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa
Console#
Related Commands
ip ssh save host-key (260)
no ip ssh server (256)
ip ssh save host-key This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory.
Syntax
ip ssh save host-key
Default Setting
Saves both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#ip ssh save host-key dsa
Console#
Related Commands
show ip ssh This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client
access to the SSH server.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 260 –
Secure Shell
Example
Console#show ip ssh
SSH Enabled - Version 2.0
Negotiation Timeout : 120 seconds; Authentication Retries : 3
Server Key Size : 768 bits
Console#
show public-key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host.
Syntax
show public-key [user [username]| host]
Default Setting
Shows all public keys.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword is
entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all users are
displayed.
◆ When an RSA key is displayed, the first field indicates the size of the host key
(e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 35), and the
last string is the encoded modulus. When a DSA key is displayed, the first field
indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital
Signature Standard (DSS), and the last string is the encoded modulus.
Example
Console#show public-key host
Host:
RSA:
1024 65537 13236940658254764031382795526536375927835525327972629521130241
071942106165575942459093923609695405036277525755625100386613098939383452310
332802149888661921595568598879891919505883940181387440468908779160305837768
185490002831341625008348718449522087429212255691665655296328163516964040831
5547660664151657116381
DSA:
ssh-dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV/yrDbKStIlnzD/Dg0h2Hxc
YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW/a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XFfAKxl5fwFfv
JlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjwbv
wrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY4i8cZvH+/p9cnrfwFTMU01VFDly3IR
2G395NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9mCOfT/yyEfbobMJZi8oGCstSNOxrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw/Kjw6Bm
iFq7O+jAhf1Dg45loAc27s6TLdtny1wRq/ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOy
DbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyjKXKVYNLQkTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF/+DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2
o/dVzX4Gg+yqdTlYmGA7fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7
w0W
Console#
– 261 –
802.1X Port Authentication
show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ssh
Connection Version State Username Encryption
0 2.0 Session-Started admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
Console#
Table 47: show ssh - display description

Field Description
Connection The session number. (Range: 0-3)
Version The Secure Shell version number.
State The authentication negotiation state.

(Values: Negotiation-Started, Authentication-Started, Session-Started)
Username The user name of the client.

The switch supports IEEE 802.1X (dot1x) port-based access control that prevents
unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials
for authentication. Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server
using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).
Table 48: 802.1X Port Authentication Commands

General Commands
dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC
dot1x eapol-pass-through Passes EAPOL frames to all ports in STP forwarding state GC
when dot1x is globally disabled
dot1x system-auth-control Enables dot1x globally on the switch. GC
Authenticator Commands
dot1x intrusion-action Sets the port response to intrusion when authentication IC

fails
dot1x max-reauth-req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch sends IC
an EAP-request/identity frame to the client before
restarting the authentication process
dot1x max-req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch IC
retransmits an EAP request/identity packet to the client
before it times out the authentication session
– 262 –
Table 48: 802.1X Port Authentication Commands (Continued)

dot1x operation-mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port IC
dot1x port-control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC
dot1x re-authentication Enables re-authentication for all ports IC
dot1x timeout quiet-period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request IC
Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a
new client
dot1x timeout re-authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must IC
be re-authenticated
dot1x timeout supp-timeout Sets the interval for a supplicant to respond IC
dot1x timeout tx-period Sets the time period during an authentication session that IC
the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet
dot1x re-authenticate Forces re-authentication on specific ports PE
Supplicant Commands
dot1x identity profile Configures dot1x supplicant user name and password GC
dot1x max-start Sets the maximum number of times that a port supplicant IC
will send an EAP start frame to the client
dot1x pae supplicant Enables dot1x supplicant mode on an interface IC
dot1x timeout auth-period Sets the time that a supplicant port waits for a response IC
from the authenticator
dot1x timeout held-period Sets the time a port waits after the maximum start count IC
has been exceeded before attempting to find another
authenticator
dot1x timeout start-period Sets the time that a supplicant port waits before resending IC
an EAPOL start frame to the authenticator
Information Display Commands
show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE
General Commands
dot1x default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default
values.
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dot1x default
Console(config)#
– 263 –
dot1x eapol- This command passes EAPOL frames through to all ports in STP forwarding state
pass-through when dot1x is globally disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] dot1x eapol-pass-through
Default Setting
Discards all EAPOL frames when dot1x is globally disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When this device is functioning as intermediate node in the network and does
not need to perform dot1x authentication, the dot1x eapol pass-through
command can be used to forward EAPOL frames from other switches on to the
authentication servers, thereby allowing the authentication process to still be
carried out by switches located on the edge of the network.
◆ When this device is functioning as an edge switch but does not require any
attached clients to be authenticated, the no dot1x eapol-pass-through
command can be used to discard unnecessary EAPOL traffic.
Example
This example instructs the switch to pass all EAPOL frame through to any ports in
STP forwarding state.
Console(config)#dot1x eapol-pass-through
Console(config)#
dot1x system- This command enables IEEE 802.1X port authentication globally on the switch.
auth-control Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] dot1x system-auth-control
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control
Console(config)#
– 264 –
Authenticator Commands
dot1x intrusion-action This command sets the port’s response to a failed authentication, either to block all
traffic, or to assign all traffic for the port to a guest VLAN. Use the no form to reset
the default.
Syntax
dot1x intrusion-action {block-traffic | guest-vlan}
no dot1x intrusion-action
block-traffic - Blocks traffic on this port.
guest-vlan - Assigns the user to the Guest VLAN.
Default
block-traffic
Command Mode
Command Usage
For guest VLAN assignment to be successful, the VLAN must be configured and set
as active (see the vlan database command) and assigned as the guest VLAN for the
port (see the network-access guest-vlan command).
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x intrusion-action guest-vlan
Console(config-if)#
dot1x max-reauth-req This command sets the maximum number of times that the switch sends an EAP-
request/identity frame to the client before restarting the authentication process.
Syntax
dot1x max-reauth-req count
no dot1x max-reauth-req
count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)
Default
2
Command Mode
– 265 –
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-reauth-req 2
Console(config-if)#
dot1x max-req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit
an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication
session. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
dot1x max-req count
no dot1x max-req
count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)
Default
2
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 2
Console(config-if)#
dot1x This command allows hosts (clients) to connect to an 802.1X-authorized port. Use
operation-mode the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host. Use the no form
with the multi-host max-count keywords to restore the default maximum count.
Syntax
dot1x operation-mode {single-host | multi-host [max-count count] | mac-
based-auth}
no dot1x operation-mode [multi-host max-count]
single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.
multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.
max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.
count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.
(Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)
mac-based – Allows multiple hosts to connect to this port, with each host
needing to be authenticated.
– 266 –
Default
Single-host
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only effective if the
dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control command.
◆ In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass

authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access. Similarly, a port
can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re-
authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.
◆ In “mac-based-auth” mode, each host connected to a port needs to pass

authentication. The number of hosts allowed access to a port operating in this
mode is limited only by the available space in the secure address table (i.e., up
to 1024 addresses).
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10
Console(config-if)#
dot1x port-control This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}
no dot1x port-control
auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by the
RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.
force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all clients, either
dot1x-aware or otherwise.
force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all clients,
either dot1x-aware or otherwise.
Default
force-authorized
Command Mode
– 267 –
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto
Console(config-if)#
dot1x This command enables periodic re-authentication for a specified port. Use the no
re-authentication form to disable re-authentication.
Syntax
[no] dot1x re-authentication
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The re-authentication process verifies the connected client’s user ID and
password on the RADIUS server. During re-authentication, the client remains
connected the network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x
client software. Only if re-authentication fails is the port blocked.
◆ The connected client is re-authenticated after the interval specified by the

dot1x timeout re-authperiod command. The default is 3600 seconds.
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
dot1x timeout re-authperiod (269)
dot1x timeout This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the maximum request
quiet-period count (see page 266) has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client.
Use the no form to reset the default.
Syntax
dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds
no dot1x timeout quiet-period
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)
Default
60 seconds
– 268 –
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-
re-authperiod authenticated. Use the no form of this command to reset the default.
Syntax
dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds
no dot1x timeout re-authperiod
Default
3600 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits for a response to
supp-timeout an EAP request from a client before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form
to reset to the default value.
Syntax
dot1x timeout supp-timeout seconds
no dot1x timeout supp-timeout
Default
30 seconds
Command Mode
– 269 –
Command Usage
This command sets the timeout for EAP-request frames other than EAP-request/
identity frames. If dot1x authentication is enabled on a port, the switch will initiate
authentication when the port link state comes up. It will send an EAP-request/
identity frame to the client to request its identity, followed by one or more requests
for authentication information. It may also send other EAP-request frames to the
client during an active connection as required for reauthentication.
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout supp-timeout 300
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an
tx-period authentication session before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form to
reset to the default value.
Syntax
dot1x timeout tx-period seconds
no dot1x timeout tx-period
Default
30 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300
Console(config-if)#
dot1x re-authenticate This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.
Syntax
dot1x re-authenticate [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
– 270 –
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The re-authentication process verifies the connected client’s user ID and password
on the RADIUS server. During re-authentication, the client remains connected the
network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x client software.
Only if re-authentication fails is the port blocked.
Example
Console#dot1x re-authenticate
Console#
Supplicant Commands
dot1x identity profile This command sets the dot1x supplicant user name and password. Use the no form
to delete the identity settings.
Syntax
dot1x identity profile {username username | password password}
no dot1x identity profile {username | password}
username - Specifies the supplicant user name. (Range: 1-8 characters)
password - Specifies the supplicant password. (Range: 1-8 characters)
Default
No user name or password
Command Mode
Command Usage
The global supplicant user name and password are used to identify this switch as a
supplicant when responding to an MD5 challenge from the authenticator. These
parameters must be set when this switch passes client authentication requests to
another authenticator on the network (see the dot1x pae supplicant command.
Example
Console(config)#dot1x identity profile username steve
Console(config)#dot1x identity profile password excess
Console(config)#
– 271 –
dot1x max-start This command sets the maximum number of times that a port supplicant will send
an EAP start frame to the client before assuming that the client is 802.1X unaware.
Use the no form to restore the default value.
Syntax
dot1x max-start count
no dot1x max-start
count - Specifies the maximum number of EAP start frames.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default
3
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-start 10
Console(config-if)#
dot1x pae supplicant This command enables dot1x supplicant mode on a port. Use the no form to
disable dot1x supplicant mode on a port.
Syntax
[no] dot1x pae supplicant
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When devices attached to a port must submit requests to another
authenticator on the network, configure the identity profile parameters (see
dot1x identity profile command) which identify this switch as a supplicant, and
enable dot1x supplicant mode for those ports which must authenticate clients
through a remote authenticator using this command. In this mode the port will
not respond to dot1x messages meant for an authenticator.
◆ This switch can be configured to serve as the authenticator on selected ports

by setting the control mode to “auto” (see the dot1x port-control command),
and as a supplicant on other ports by the setting the control mode to “force-
authorized” and enabling dot1x supplicant mode with this command.
– 272 –
◆ A port cannot be configured as a dot1x supplicant if it is a member of a trunk or

LACP is enabled on the port.
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x pae supplicant
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout This command sets the time that a supplicant port waits for a response from the
auth-period authenticator. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
dot1x timeout auth-period seconds
no dot1x timeout auth-period
Default
30 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the time that the supplicant waits for a response from the
authenticator for packets other than EAPOL-Start.
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout auth-period 60
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout This command sets the time that a supplicant port waits before resending its
held-period credentials to find a new an authenticator. Use the no form to reset the default.
Syntax
dot1x timeout held-period seconds
no dot1x timeout held-period
Default
60 seconds
– 273 –
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout held-period 120
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout This command sets the time that a supplicant port waits before resending an
start-period EAPOL start frame to the authenticator. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
dot1x timeout start-period seconds
no dot1x timeout start-period
Default
30 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout start-period 60
Console(config-if)#
Information Display Commands
show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or
a specific interface.
Syntax
show dot1x [statistics] [interface interface]
statistics - Displays dot1x status for each port.
interface
ethernet unit/port
– 274 –
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the following information:
◆ Global 802.1X Parameters – Shows whether or not 802.1X port authentication is

globally enabled on the switch (page 264).
◆ Authenticator Parameters – Shows whether or not EAPOL pass-through is

enabled (page 264).
◆ Supplicant Parameters – Shows the supplicant user name used when the switch
responds to an MD5 challenge from an authenticator (page 271).
◆ 802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters for each
interface that has enabled 802.1X, including the following items:
■ Type – Administrative state for port access control (Enabled, Authenticator,

or Supplicant).
■ Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (page 266).
■ Control Mode – Dot1x port control mode (page 267).
■ Authorized – Authorization status (yes or n/a - not authorized).
◆ 802.1X Port Details – Displays the port access control parameters for each
interface, including the following items:
■ Reauthentication – Periodic re-authentication (page 268).

■ Reauth Period – Time after which a connected client must be re-
authenticated (page 269).
■ Quiet Period – Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded
before attempting to acquire a new client (page 268).
■ TX Period – Time a port waits during authentication session before re-
transmitting EAP packet (page 270).
■ Supplicant Timeout – Supplicant timeout.
■ Server Timeout – Server timeout. A RADIUS server must be set before the
correct operational value of 10 seconds will be displayed in this field.
■ Reauth Max Retries – Maximum number of reauthentication attempts.
■ Max Request – Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP
request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication
session (page 266).
■ Operation Mode– Shows if single or multiple hosts (clients) can connect to
an 802.1X-authorized port.
■ Port Control–Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto, force-authorized, or
force-unauthorized (page 267).
■ Intrusion Action– Shows the port response to intrusion when
authentication fails (page 265).
■ Supplicant– MAC address of authorized client.
– 275 –
◆ Authenticator PAE State Machine
■ State – Current state (including initialize, disconnected, connecting,

authenticating, authenticated, aborting, held, force_authorized,
force_unauthorized).
■ Reauth Count– Number of times connecting state is re-entered.
■ Current Identifier– The integer (0-255) used by the Authenticator to identify
the current authentication session.
◆ Backend State Machine
■ State – Current state (including request, response, success, fail, timeout,

idle, initialize).
■ Request Count– Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant
without receiving a response.
■ Identifier (Server)– Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success, Failure
or Request packet received from the Authentication Server.
◆ Reauthentication State Machine
State – Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).
Example
Console#show dot1x
Global 802.1X Parameters
System Auth Control : Enabled
Authenticator Parameters:
EAPOL Pass Through : Disabled
Supplicant Parameters:
Identity Profile Username : steve
802.1X Port Summary
Port Type Operation Mode Control Mode Authorized

-------- ------------- -------------- ------------------ ----------
Eth 1/ 1 Disabled Single-Host Force-Authorized Yes
Eth 1/ 2 Disabled Single-Host Force-Authorized Yes
.
.
.
Eth 1/27 Disabled Single-Host Force-Authorized Yes
Eth 1/28 Enabled Single-Host Auto Yes
802.1X Port Details
802.1X Authenticator is enabled on port 1/1

802.1X Supplicant is disabled on port 1/1
.
.
.
802.1X Authenticator is enabled on port 28
Reauthentication : Enabled
Reauth Period : 3600
Quiet Period : 60
TX Period : 30
Supplicant Timeout : 30
Server Timeout : 10
– 276 –
Management IP Filter
Reauth Max Retries : 2

Max Request : 2
Operation Mode : Multi-host
Port Control : Auto
Intrusion Action : Block traffic
Supplicant : 00-e0-29-94-34-65
Authenticator PAE State Machine

State : Authenticated
Reauth Count : 0
Current Identifier : 3
Backend State Machine

State : Idle
Request Count : 0
Identifier(Server) : 2
Reauthentication State Machine

State : Initialize
Console#
This section describes commands used to configure IP management access to the
switch.
Table 49: Management IP Filter Commands

management Configures IP addresses that are allowed management GC

access
show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a PE

browser
management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management
access to the switch through various protocols. A list of up to 15 IP addresses or IP
address groups can be specified. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client} start-
address [end-address]
all-client - Adds IP address(es) to all groups.
http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.
snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.
telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.
start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.
– 277 –
end-address - The end address of a range.
Default Setting
All addresses
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default. Once you
add an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is restricted to the specified
addresses.
◆ If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid

address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.
◆ IP address can be configured for SNMP, web, and Telnet access respectively.
Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either
individual addresses or address ranges.
◆ When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web, or Telnet), the
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses
for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.
◆ You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must
delete the entire range, and re-enter the addresses.
◆ You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by
specifying both the start address and end address.
Example
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19

Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
Console#
show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management
access to the switch through various protocols.
Syntax
show management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}
all-client - Displays IP addresses for all groups.
http-client - Displays IP addresses for the web group.
snmp-client - Displays IP addresses for the SNMP group.
– 278 –
PPPoE Intermediate Agent
telnet-client - Displays IP addresses for the Telnet group.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show management all-client
Management Ip Filter
HTTP-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
SNMP-Client:
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
TELNET-Client:
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
Console#

This section describes commands used to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent
(PPPoE IA) relay parameters required for passing authentication messages between
a client and broadband remote access servers.
Table 50: PPPoE Intermediate Agent Commands

pppoe intermediate-agent Enables the PPPoE IA globally on the switch GC
pppoe intermediate-agent Sets the access node identifier and generic error message GC
format-type for the switch
pppoe intermediate-agent Enables the PPPoE IA on an interface IC

port-enable
pppoe intermediate-agent Sets the circuit-id or remote-id for an interface IC

port-format-type
pppoe intermediate-agent Sets the remote-id delimiter for an interface IC

port-format-type remote-
id-delimiter
pppoe intermediate-agent Sets the trust mode for an interface IC

trust
pppoe intermediate-agent Enables the stripping of vendor tags from PPPoE Discovery IC
vendor-tag strip packets sent from a PPPoE server
– 279 –
Table 50: PPPoE Intermediate Agent Commands (Continued)

clear pppoe intermediate- Clears PPPoE IA statistics PE

agent statistics
show pppoe intermediate- Displays PPPoE IA configuration settings PE

agent info
show pppoe intermediate- Displays PPPoE IA statistics PE

agent statistics
pppoe This command enables the PPPoE Intermediate Agent globally on the switch. Use
intermediate-agent the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] pppoe intermediate-agent
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The switch inserts a tag identifying itself as a PPPoE Intermediate Agent
residing between the attached client requesting network access and the ports
connected to broadband remote access servers (BRAS). The switch extracts
access-loop information from the client’s PPPoE Active Discovery Request, and
forwards this information to all trusted ports designated by the pppoe
intermediate-agent trust command. The BRAS detects the presence of the
subscriber’s circuit-ID tag inserted by the switch during the PPPoE discovery
phase, and sends this tag as a NAS-port-ID attribute in PPP authentication and
AAA accounting requests to a RADIUS server.
◆ PPPoE IA must be enabled globally by this command before this feature can be
enabled on an interface using the pppoe intermediate-agent port-enable
command.
Example
Console(config)#pppoe intermediate-agent
Console(config)#
– 280 –
pppoe This command sets the access node identifier and generic error message for the
intermediate-agent switch. Use the no form to restore the default settings.
format-type
Syntax
pppoe intermediate-agent format-type {access-node-identifier id-string |
generic-error-message error-message}
no pppoe intermediate-agent format-type {access-node-identifier |
generic-error-message}
id-string - String identifying this switch as an PPPoE IA to the PPPoE server.
(Range: 1-48 ASCII characters)
error-message - An error message notifying the sender that the PPPoE
Discovery packet was too large.
Default Setting
◆ Access Node Identifier: IP address of the first IPv4 interface on the switch.
◆ Generic Error Message: PPPoE Discover packet too large to process. Try
reducing the number of tags added.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The switch uses the access-node-identifier to generate the circuit-id for PPPoE
discovery stage packets sent to the BRAS, but does not modify the source or
destination MAC address of these PPPoE discovery packets.
◆ These messages are forwarded to all trusted ports designated by the pppoe
intermediate-agent trust command.
Example
Console(config)#pppoe intermediate-agent format-type access-node-identifier
billibong
Console(config)#
pppoe This command enables the PPPoE IA on an interface. Use the no form to disable this
intermediate-agent feature.
port-enable
Syntax
[no] pppoe intermediate-agent port-enable
Default Setting
Disabled
– 281 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
PPPoE IA must also be enabled globally on the switch for this command to take
effect.
Example
Console(config-if)#pppoe intermediate-agent port-enable
Console(config-if)#
pppoe This command sets the circuit-id or remote-id for an interface. Use the no form to
intermediate-agent restore the default settings.
port-format-type
Syntax
pppoe intermediate-agent port-format-type {circuit-id | remote-id}
id-string
circuit-id - String identifying the circuit identifier (or interface) on this
switch to which the user is connected. (Range: 1-10 ASCII characters)
remote-id - String identifying the remote identifier (or interface) on this
switch to which the user is connected. (Range: 1-63 ASCII characters)
Default Setting
circuit-id: unit/port:vlan-id or 0/trunk-id:vlan-id
remote-id: port MAC address
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The PPPoE server extracts the Line-ID tag from PPPoE discovery stage
messages, and uses the Circuit-ID field of that tag as a NAS-Port-ID attribute in
AAA access and accounting requests.
◆ The switch intercepts PPPoE discovery frames from the client and inserts a
unique line identifier using the PPPoE Vendor-Specific tag (0x0105) to PPPoE
Active Discovery Initiation (PADI) and Request (PADR) packets. The switch then
forwards these packets to the PPPoE server. The tag contains the Line-ID of the
customer line over which the discovery packet was received, entering the
switch (or access node) where the intermediate agent resides.
◆ Outgoing PAD Offer (PADO) and Session-confirmation (PADS) packets sent from
the PPPoE Server include the Circuit-ID tag inserted by the switch, and should
be stripped out of PADO and PADS packets which are to be passed directly to
end-node clients using the pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip
– 282 –
command.
◆ If the remote-id is unspecified, the port name will be used for this parameter. If
the port name is not configured, the remote-id is set to the port MAC (yy-yy-yy-
yy-yy-yy#), where # is the default delimiter.
Example
Console(config-if)#pppoe intermediate-agent port-format-type circuit-id
ECS4510-28T
Console(config-if)#
pppoe This command sets the remote-id delimiter for an interface. Use the enable
intermediate-agent keyword to enable the delimiter. Use the no form with the enable keyword to
port-format-type disable the delimiter. Use the no form without any keywords toto restore the
remote-id-delimiter default settings.
Syntax
pppoe intermediate-agent port-format-type remote-id-delimiter
{enable | ascii-code}
ascii-code - ASCII character of delimiter. (Range: 0-255)
Default Setting
Disabled
ASCII code: 35 (“#”)
Command Mode
Command Usage
If the delimiter is enabled and it occurs in the remote ID string, the string will be
truncated at that point.
Example
This command enables the delimiter for port 5.

Console(config-if)#pppoe intermediate-agent port-format-type remote-id-
delimiter
Console(config-if)#
– 283 –
pppoe This command sets an interface to trusted mode to indicate that it is connected to a
intermediate-agent PPPoE server. Use the no form to set an interface to untrusted mode.
trust
Syntax
[no] pppoe intermediate-agent trust
Default Setting
Untrusted
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Set any interfaces connecting the switch to a PPPoE Server as trusted.
Interfaces that connect the switch to users (PPPoE clients) should be set as
untrusted.
◆ At least one trusted interface must be configured on the switch for the PPPoE
IA to function.
Example
Console(config-if)#pppoe intermediate-agent trust
Console(config-if)#
pppoe This command enables the stripping of vendor tags from PPPoE Discovery packets
intermediate-agent sent from a PPPoE server. Use the no form to disable this feature.
vendor-tag strip
Syntax
[no] pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command only applies to trusted interfaces. It is used to strip off vendor-
specific tags (which carry subscriber and line identification information) in PPPoE
Discovery packets received from an upstream PPPoE server before forwarding
them to a user.
– 284 –
Example
Console(config-if)#pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip
Console(config-if)#
clear pppoe This command clears statistical counters for the PPPoE Intermediate Agent.
intermediate-agent
statistics Syntax
clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics
Console#
show pppoe This command displays configuration settings for the PPPoE Intermediate Agent.
intermediate-agent
info Syntax
show pppoe intermediate-agent info [interface [interface]]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show pppoe intermediate-agent info
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Global Status : Enabled
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Admin Access Node Identifier : 192.168.0.2
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Oper Access Node Identifier : 192.168.0.2
– 285 –
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Admin Generic Error Message :

PPPoE Intermediate Agent Oper Generic Error Message :
PPPoE Discover packet too large to process. Try reducing the number of tags
added.
Console#show pppoe intermediate-agent info interface ethernet 1/1
Interface PPPoE IA Trusted Vendor-Tag Strip Admin Circuit-ID Admin Remote-ID
--------- -------- ------- ---------------- ------------ ----------------
Eth 1/2 Yes Yes Yes 1/2:vid 00-00-E8-94-40-02
R-ID Delimiter Delimiter ASCII Oper Circuit-ID Oper Remote-ID
---------------- ---------------- ---------------- -----------------
Yes 3 1/2:vid 00-00-E8-94-40-02
Console#
show pppoe This command displays statistics for the PPPoE Intermediate Agent.
intermediate-agent
statistics Syntax
show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics interface ethernet 1/1
Eth 1/1 statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Received : All PADI PADO PADR PADS PADT
---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
3 0 0 0 0 3
Dropped : Response from untrusted Request towards untrusted Malformed

----------------------- ------------------------- ---------
0 0 0
Console#
Table 51: show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics - display description

Field Description
PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation
PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer
PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request
– 286 –
Table 51: show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics - display description

Field Description
PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session-Confirmation
PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate
– 287 –
– 288 –
9 General Security Measures
This switch supports many methods of segregating traffic for clients attached to
each of the data ports, and for ensuring that only authorized clients gain access to
the network. Port-based authentication using IEEE 802.1X is commonly used for
these purposes. In addition to these method, several other options of providing
client security are described in this chapter. These include port-based
authentication, which can be configured to allow network client access
by specifying a fixed set of MAC addresses. The addresses assigned to DHCP clients
can also be carefully controlled with IP Source Guard and DHCP Snooping
commands.
Table 52: General Security Commands

Port Security* Configures secure addresses for a port
802.1X Port Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1X

Authentication*
Network Access* Configures MAC authentication and dynamic VLAN assignment
Web Authentication* Configures Web authentication

Access Control Lists* Provides filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, TCP/UDP
port number or TCP control code) or non-IP frames (based on MAC
address or Ethernet type)
DHCPv4 Snooping* Filters untrusted DHCPv4 messages on unsecure ports by building and
maintaining a DHCPv4 snooping binding table
DHCPv6 Snooping* Filters untrusted DHCPv6 messages on unsecure ports by building and
maintaining a DHCPv6 snooping binding table
IPv4 Source Guard* Filters IP traffic on insecure ports for which the source address cannot
be identified via DHCP snooping nor static source bindings
IPv6 Source Guard* Filters IPv6 traffic on insecure ports for which the source address cannot
be identified via DHCPv6 snooping nor static source bindings
ND Snooping Maintains IPv6 prefix table and user address binding table which can be
used for stateless address auto-configuration or for address filtering by
IPv6 Source Guard
ARP Inspection Validates the MAC-to-IP address bindings in ARP packets
DoS Protection Protects against Denial-of-Service attacks
Port-based Traffic Configures traffic segmentation for different client sessions based on
Segmentation specified downlink and uplink ports
* The priority of execution for these filtering commands is Port Security, Port Authentication,
Network Access, Web Authentication, Access Control Lists, DHCP Snooping, and then IP Source
Guard.
– 289 –
Chapter 9 | General Security Measures
Port Security
Port Security
These commands can be used to enable port security on a port.
When MAC address learning is disabled on an interface, only incoming traffic with
source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port
will be authorized to access the network.
When using port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the
specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming
traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table
for this port will be authorized to access the network. The port will drop any
incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been
previously learned from another port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC
address attempts to use the switch port, the intrusion will be detected and the
switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap
message.
Table 53: Management IP Filter Commands

mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC
mac-learning Enables MAC address learning on the selected physical IC

interface or VLAN
port security Configures a secure port IC
port security mac-address- Saves the MAC addresses learned by port security as static PE
as-permanent entries.
show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database PE
show port security Displays port security status and secure address count PE
mac-learning This command enables MAC address learning on the selected interface. Use the no
form to disable MAC address learning.
Syntax
[no] mac-learning
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet or Port Channel)
Command Usage
◆ The no mac-learning command immediately stops the switch from learning
new MAC addresses on the specified port or trunk. Incoming traffic with source
addresses not stored in the static address table, will be flooded. However, if a
– 290 –
Port Security
security function such as 802.1X or DHCP snooping is enabled and mac-

learning is disabled, then only incoming traffic with source addresses stored in
the static address table will be accepted, all other packets are dropped. Note
that the dynamic addresses stored in the address table when MAC address
learning is disabled are flushed from the system, and no dynamic addresses are
subsequently learned until MAC address learning has been re-enabled.
◆ The mac-learning commands cannot be used if 802.1X Port Authentication has

been globally enabled on the switch with the dot1x system-auth-control
command, or if MAC Address Security has been enabled by the port security
command on the same interface.
Example
The following example disables MAC address learning for port 2.

Console(config-if)#no mac-learning
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
show interfaces status (415)
port security This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form without any
keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to
restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum
number of allowed addresses.
Syntax
port security [action {shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown} | max-mac-
count address-count]
no port security [action | max-mac-count]
action - Response to take when port security is violated.
shutdown - Disable port only.
trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.
trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.
max-mac-count
address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024, where 0 means disabled)
Default Setting
Status: Disabled
Action: None
Maximum Addresses: 0
– 291 –
Port Security
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is
zero (that is, port security is disabled). To use port security, you must configure
the maximum number of addresses allowed on a port using the port security
max-mac-count command.
◆ When port security is enabled using the port security command, or the
maximum number or allowed addresses is set to a value lower than the current
limit after port security has been enabled, the switch first clears all dynamically
learned entries from the address table. It then starts learning new MAC
addresses on the specified port, and stops learning addresses when it reaches a
configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses
already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted.
◆ To configure the maximum number of address entries which can be learned on

a port, specify the maximum number of dynamic addresses allowed. The switch
will learn up to the maximum number of allowed address pairs <source MAC
address, VLAN> for frames received on the port. (The specified maximum
address count is effective when port security is enabled or disabled.) Note that
you can manually add additional secure addresses to a port using the mac-
address-table static command. When the port has reached the maximum
number of MAC addresses, the port will stop learning new addresses. The MAC
addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not be aged out.
◆ MAC addresses that port security has learned, can be saved in the configuration
file as static entries. See command port security mac-address-as-permanent.
◆ If port security is enabled, and the maximum number of allowed addresses are
set to a non-zero value, any device not in the address table that attempts to use
the port will be prevented from accessing the switch.
◆ If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually re-enabled

using the no shutdown command.
◆ A secure port has the following restrictions:

■ Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.
■ Cannot be a trunk port.
■ RSPAN and port security are mutually exclusive functions. If port security is
enabled on a port, that port cannot be set as an RSPAN uplink port, source
port, or destination port. Also, when a port is configured as an RSPAN
uplink port, source port, or destination port, port security cannot be
enabled on that port.
– 292 –
Port Security
Example
The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a
security violation to issue a trap message:

Console(config-if)#port security action trap
Related Commands
show interfaces status (415)
shutdown (407)
mac-address-table static (495)
port security Use this command to save the MAC addresses that port security has learned as
mac-address-as- static entries.
permanent
Syntax
port security mac-address-as-permanent [interface interface]
interface - Specifies a port interface.
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows the switch saving the MAC addresses learned by port security
on ethernet port 1/3.
Console#port security mac-address-as-permanent interface ethernet 1/3

Console#
show port security This command displays port security status and the secure address count.
Syntax
show port security [interface interface]
ethernet unit/port
– 293 –
Port Security
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows the port security settings and number of secure addresses for
all ports.
Console#show port security

Global Port Security Parameters
Secure MAC Aging Mode : Disabled
Port Security Port Summary

Port Port Security Port Status Intrusion Action MaxMacCnt CurrMacCnt
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1 Disabled Secure/Down None 0 2
Eth 1/ 2 Enabled Secure/Up None 10 0
.
.
.
Table 54: show port security - display description

Field Description
Port Security The configured status (enabled or disabled).
Port Status The operational status:

◆ Secure/Down – Port security is disabled.
◆ Secure/Up – Port security is enabled.
◆ Shutdown – Port is shut down due to a response to a port security violation.
Intrusion Action The configured intrusion response.
MaxMacCnt The maximum number of addresses which can be stored in the address table for
this interface (either dynamic or static).
CurrMacCnt The current number of secure entries in the address table.
The following example shows the port security settings and number of secure
addresses for a specific port. The Last Intrusion MAC and Last Time Detected
Intrusion MAC fields show information about the last detected intrusion MAC
address. These fields are not applicable if no intrusion has been detected or port
security is disabled. The MAC Filter ID field is configured by the network-access
port-mac-filter command. If this field displays Disabled, then any unknown source
MAC address can be learned as a secure MAC address. If it displays a filter identifier,
then only source MAC address entries in MAC Filter table can be learned as secure
MAC addresses.
Console#show port security interface ethernet 1/2

– 294 –
Network Access (MAC Address Authentication)
Port Security Details

Port : 1/2
Port Security : Enabled
Port Status : Secure/Up
Intrusion Action : None
Max MAC Count : 0
Current MAC Count : 0
MAC Filter : Disabled
Last Intrusion MAC : NA
Last Time Detected Intrusion MAC : NA
Console#
This example shows information about a detected intrusion.
Console#show port security interface ethernet 1/2

Port Security Details

Port : 1/2
Port Security : Enabled
Port Status : Secure/Up
Intrusion Action : None
Max MAC Count : 0
Current MAC Count : 0
MAC Filter : Disabled
Last Intrusion MAC : 00-10-22-00-00-01
Last Time Detected Intrusion MAC : 2010/7/29 15:13:03
Console#

Network Access authentication controls access to the network by authenticating
the MAC address of each host that attempts to connect to a switch port. Traffic
received from a specific MAC address is forwarded by the switch only if the source
MAC address is successfully authenticated by a central RADIUS server. While
authentication for a MAC address is in progress, all traffic is blocked until
authentication is completed. Once successfully authenticated, the RADIUS server
may optionally assign VLAN and QoS settings for the switch port.
Table 55: Network Access Commands

network-access aging Enables MAC address aging GC
network-access mac-filter Adds a MAC address to a filter table GC
mac-authentication reauth-time Sets the time period after which a connected MAC GC
address must be re-authenticated
network-access dynamic-qos Enables the dynamic quality of service feature IC
network-access dynamic-vlan Enables dynamic VLAN assignment from a RADIUS server IC
network-access guest-vlan Specifies the guest VLAN IC
– 295 –
Table 55: Network Access Commands (Continued)

network-access link-detection Enables the link detection feature IC
network-access link-detection Configures the link detection feature to detect and act IC
link-down upon link-down events
link-up upon link-up events
link-up-down upon both link-up and link-down events
network-access max-mac-count Sets the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be IC
authenticated on a port via all forms of authentication
network-access mode Enables MAC authentication on an interface IC

mac-authentication
network-access port-mac-filter Enables the specified MAC address filter IC
mac-authentication Determines the port response when a connected host IC

intrusion-action fails MAC authentication.
mac-authentication Sets the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be IC

max-mac-count authenticated on a port via MAC authentication
clear network-access Clears authenticated MAC addresses from the address PE

table
show network-access Displays the MAC authentication settings for port PE

interfaces
show network-access Displays information for entries in the secure MAC PE

mac-address-table address table
show network-access mac-filter Displays information for entries in the MAC filter tables PE
network-access aging Use this command to enable aging for authenticated MAC addresses stored in the
secure MAC address table. Use the no form of this command to disable address
aging.
Syntax
[no] network-access aging
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Authenticated MAC addresses are stored as dynamic entries in the switch’s
secure MAC address table and are removed when the aging time expires. The
address aging time is determined by the mac-address-table aging-time
command.
– 296 –
◆ This parameter applies to authenticated MAC addresses configured by the MAC

Address Authentication process described in this section, as well as to any
secure MAC addresses authenticated by 802.1X, regardless of the 802.1X
Operation Mode (Single-Host, Multi-Host, or MAC-Based authentication as
described on page 266).
◆ The maximum number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch
system is 1024.
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access aging
Console(config-if)#
network-access Use this command to add a MAC address into a filter table. Use the no form of this
mac-filter command to remove the specified MAC address.
Syntax
[no] network-access mac-filter filter-id
mac-address mac-address [mask mask-address]
filter-id - Specifies a MAC address filter table. (Range: 1-64)
mac-address - Specifies a MAC address entry. (Format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)
mask - Specifies a MAC address bit mask for a range of addresses.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Specified addresses are exempt from network access authentication.
◆ This command is different from configuring static addresses with the mac-
address-table static command in that it allows you configure a range of
addresses when using a mask, and then to assign these addresses to one or
more ports with the network-access port-mac-filter command.
◆ Up to 64 filter tables can be defined.
◆ There is no limitation on the number of entries that can entered in a filter table.
Example
Console(config)#network-access mac-filter 1 mac-address 11-22-33-44-55-66
Console(config)#
– 297 –
mac-authentication Use this command to set the time period after which a connected MAC address
reauth-time must be re-authenticated. Use the no form of this command to restore the default
value.
Syntax
mac-authentication reauth-time seconds
no mac-authentication reauth-time
seconds - The reauthentication time period. (Range: 120-1000000 seconds)
Default Setting
1800
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The reauthentication time is a global setting and applies to all ports.
◆ When the reauthentication time expires for a secure MAC address it is

reauthenticated with the RADIUS server. During the reauthentication process
traffic through the port remains unaffected.
Example
Console(config)#mac-authentication reauth-time 300
Console(config)#
network-access Use this command to enable the dynamic QoS feature for an authenticated port.
dynamic-qos Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] network-access dynamic-qos
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The RADIUS server may optionally return dynamic QoS assignments to be
applied to a switch port for an authenticated user. The “Filter-ID” attribute
– 298 –
(attribute 11) can be configured on the RADIUS server to pass the following
QoS information:
Table 56: Dynamic QoS Profiles

Profile Attribute Syntax Example
DiffServ service-policy-in=policy-map-name service-policy-in=p1
Rate Limit rate-limit-input=rate (kbps) rate-limit-input=100 (kbps)
rate-limit-output=rate (kbps) rate-limit-output=200 (kbps)
802.1p switchport-priority-default=value switchport-priority-default=2
IP ACL ip-access-group-in=ip-acl-name ip-access-group-in=ipv4acl
IPv6 ACL ipv6-access-group-in=ipv6-acl-name ipv6-access-group-in=ipv6acl
MAC ACL mac-access-group-in=mac-acl-name mac-access-group-in=macAcl
◆ When the last user logs off of a port with a dynamic QoS assignment, the switch
restores the original QoS configuration for the port.
◆ When a user attempts to log into the network with a returned dynamic QoS
profile that is different from users already logged on to the same port, the user
is denied access.
◆ While a port has an assigned dynamic QoS profile, any manual QoS
configuration changes only take effect after all users have logged off of the
port.
Note: Any configuration changes for dynamic QoS are not saved to the switch
configuration file.
Example
The following example enables the dynamic QoS feature on port 1.

Console(config-if)#network-access dynamic-qos
Console(config-if)#
network-access Use this command to enable dynamic VLAN assignment for an authenticated port.
dynamic-vlan Use the no form to disable dynamic VLAN assignment.
Syntax
[no] network-access dynamic-vlan
Default Setting
Enabled
– 299 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When enabled, the VLAN identifiers returned by the RADIUS server through the
802.1X authentication process will be applied to the port, providing the VLANs
have already been created on the switch. GVRP is not used to create the VLANs.
◆ The VLAN settings specified by the first authenticated MAC address are
implemented for a port. Other authenticated MAC addresses on the port must
have same VLAN configuration, or they are treated as an authentication failure.
◆ If dynamic VLAN assignment is enabled on a port and the RADIUS server

returns no VLAN configuration, the authentication is still treated as a success,
and the host assigned to the default untagged VLAN.
◆ When the dynamic VLAN assignment status is changed on a port, all

authenticated addresses are cleared from the secure MAC address table.
Example
The following example enables dynamic VLAN assignment on port 1.

Console(config-if)#network-access dynamic-vlan
Console(config-if)#
network-access Use this command to assign all traffic on a port to a guest VLAN when 802.1x
guest-vlan authentication is rejected. Use the no form of this command to disable guest VLAN
assignment.
Syntax
network-access guest-vlan vlan-id
no network-access guest-vlan
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The VLAN to be used as the guest VLAN must be defined and set as active (See
the vlan database command).
– 300 –
◆ When used with 802.1X authentication, the intrusion-action must be set for
“guest-vlan” to be effective (see the dot1x intrusion-action command).
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access guest-vlan 25
Console(config-if)#
network-access Use this command to enable link detection for the selected port. Use the no form of
link-detection this command to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] network-access link-detection
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection
Console(config-if)#
network-access link- Use this command to detect link-down events. When detected, the switch can shut
detection link-down down the port, send an SNMP trap, or both. Use the no form of this command to
disable this feature.
Syntax
network-access link-detection link-down
action [shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown]
no network-access link-detection
trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable the port.
Default Setting
Disabled
– 301 –
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-down action trap
Console(config-if)#
network-access link- Use this command to detect link-up events. When detected, the switch can shut
detection link-up down the port, send an SNMP trap, or both. Use the no form of this command to
Syntax
network-access link-detection link-up
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-up action trap
Console(config-if)#
– 302 –
network-access Use this command to detect link-up and link-down events. When either event is
link-detection detected, the switch can shut down the port, send an SNMP trap, or both. Use the
link-up-down no form of this command to disable this feature.
Syntax
network-access link-detection link-up-down
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-up-down action trap
Console(config-if)#
network-access Use this command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
max-mac-count authenticated on a port interface via all forms of authentication. Use the no form of
this command to restore the default.
Syntax
network-access max-mac-count count
no network-access max-mac-count
count - The maximum number of authenticated IEEE 802.1X and MAC
addresses allowed. (Range: 0-2048; 0 for unlimited)
Default Setting
1024
Command Mode
– 303 –
Command Usage
The maximum number of MAC addresses per port is 1024, and the maximum
number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system is 1024. When
the limit is reached, all new MAC addresses are treated as authentication failures.
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access max-mac-count 5
Console(config-if)#
network-access mode Use this command to enable network access authentication on a port. Use the no
mac-authentication form of this command to disable network access authentication.
Syntax
[no] network-access mode mac-authentication
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When enabled on a port, the authentication process sends a Password
Authentication Protocol (PAP) request to a configured RADIUS server. The user
name and password are both equal to the MAC address being authenticated.
◆ On the RADIUS server, PAP user name and passwords must be configured in the
MAC address format XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX (all in upper case).
◆ Authenticated MAC addresses are stored as dynamic entries in the switch

secure MAC address table and are removed when the aging time expires. The
maximum number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system is
1024.
◆ Configured static MAC addresses are added to the secure address table when
seen on a switch port. Static addresses are treated as authenticated without
sending a request to a RADIUS server.
◆ MAC authentication, 802.1X, and port security cannot be configured together

on the same port. Only one security mechanism can be applied.
◆ MAC authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports.
◆ When port status changes to down, all MAC addresses are cleared from the
secure MAC address table. Static VLAN assignments are not restored.
– 304 –
◆ The RADIUS server may optionally return a VLAN identifier list. VLAN identifier
list is carried in the “Tunnel-Private-Group-ID” attribute. The VLAN list can
contain multiple VLAN identifiers in the format “1u,2t,” where “u” indicates
untagged VLAN and “t” tagged VLAN. The “Tunnel-Type” attribute should be
set to “VLAN,” and the “Tunnel-Medium-Type” attribute set to “802.”
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access mode mac-authentication
Console(config-if)#
network-access Use this command to enable the specified MAC address filter. Use the no form of
port-mac-filter this command to disable the specified MAC address filter.
Syntax
network-access port-mac-filter filter-id
no network-access port-mac-filter
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Mode
◆ Entries in the MAC address filter table can be configured with the network-
access mac-filter command.
◆ Only one filter table can be assigned to a port.
Example
Console(config-if)#network-access port-mac-filter 1
Console(config-if)#
– 305 –
mac-authentication Use this command to configure the port response to a host MAC authentication
intrusion-action failure. Use the no form of this command to restore the default.
Syntax
mac-authentication intrusion-action {block traffic | pass traffic}
no mac-authentication intrusion-action
Default Setting
Block Traffic
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#mac-authentication intrusion-action block-traffic
Console(config-if)#
mac-authentication Use this command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
max-mac-count authenticated on a port via MAC authentication. Use the no form of this command
to restore the default.
Syntax
mac-authentication max-mac-count count
no mac-authentication max-mac-count
count - The maximum number of MAC-authenticated MAC addresses
allowed. (Range: 1-1024)
Default Setting
1024
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#mac-authentication max-mac-count 32
Console(config-if)#
– 306 –
clear network-access Use this command to clear entries from the secure MAC addresses table.
Syntax
clear network-access mac-address-table [static | dynamic]
[address mac-address] [interface interface]
static - Specifies static address entries.
dynamic - Specifies dynamic address entries.
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear network-access mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1
Console#
show network-access Use this command to display the MAC authentication settings for port interfaces.
Syntax
show network-access [interface interface]
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
Displays the settings for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 307 –
Example
Console#show network-access interface ethernet 1/1
Global secure port information
Reauthentication Time : 1800
MAC Address Aging : Disabled
Port : 1/1
MAC Authentication : Disabled
MAC Authentication Intrusion Action : Block traffic
MAC Authentication Maximum MAC Counts : 1024
Maximum MAC Counts : 1024
Dynamic VLAN Assignment : Enabled
Dynamic QoS Assignment : Disabled
MAC Filter ID : Disabled
Guest VLAN : Disabled
Link Detection : Disabled
Detection Mode : Link-down
Detection Action : Trap
Console#
show network-access Use this command to display secure MAC address table entries.
mac-address-table
Syntax
show network-access mac-address-table [static | dynamic]
[address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface] [sort {address |
interface}]
static - Specifies static address entries.
dynamic - Specifies dynamic address entries.
mac-address - Specifies a MAC address entry.
(Format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)
mask - Specifies a MAC address bit mask for filtering displayed addresses.
ethernet unit/port
sort - Sorts displayed entries by either MAC address or interface.
Default Setting
Displays all filters.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
When using a bit mask to filter displayed MAC addresses, a 1 means “care” and a 0
means “don't care”. For example, a MAC of 00-00-01-02-03-04 and mask FF-FF-FF-
– 308 –
00-00-00 would result in all MACs in the range 00-00-01-00-00-00 to 00-00-01-FF-

FF-FF to be displayed. All other MACs would be filtered out.
Example
Console#show network-access mac-address-table
Interface MAC Address RADIUS Server Time Attribute
--------- ----------------- --------------- ------------------------- ---------
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-04 172.155.120.17 00d06h32m50s Static
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-05 172.155.120.17 00d06h33m20s Dynamic
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-06 172.155.120.17 00d06h35m10s Static
1/3 00-00-01-02-03-07 172.155.120.17 00d06h34m20s Dynamic
Console#
show network-access Use this command to display information for entries in the MAC filter tables.
mac-filter
Syntax
show network-access mac-filter [filter-id]
Default Setting
Displays all filters.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show network-access mac-filter
Filter ID MAC Address MAC Mask
--------- ----------------- -----------------
1 00-00-01-02-03-08 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
Console#
– 309 –
Web Authentication
Web Authentication
Web authentication allows stations to authenticate and access the network in
situations where 802.1X or Network Access authentication are infeasible or
impractical. The web authentication feature allows unauthenticated hosts to
request and receive a DHCP assigned IP address and perform DNS queries. All other
traffic, except for HTTP protocol traffic, is blocked. The switch intercepts HTTP
protocol traffic and redirects it to a switch-generated web page that facilitates user
name and password authentication via RADIUS. Once authentication is successful,
the web browser is forwarded on to the originally requested web page. Successful
authentication is valid for all hosts connected to the port.
Note: RADIUS authentication must be activated and configured for the web
authentication feature to work properly (see “Authentication Sequence” on
page 228).
Note: Web authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports.
Table 57: Web Authentication

web-auth login-attempts Defines the limit for failed web authentication login GC
attempts
web-auth quiet-period Defines the amount of time to wait after the limit for GC
failed login attempts is exceeded.
web-auth session-timeout Defines the amount of time a session remains valid GC
web-auth system-auth-control Enables web authentication globally for the switch GC
web-auth Enables web authentication for an interface IC
web-auth re-authenticate (Port) Ends all web authentication sessions on the port and PE
forces the users to re-authenticate
web-auth re-authenticate (IP) Ends the web authentication session associated with the PE
designated IP address and forces the user to re-
authenticate
show web-auth Displays global web authentication parameters PE
show web-auth interface Displays interface-specific web authentication PE

parameters and statistics
show web-auth summary Displays a summary of web authentication port PE

parameters and statistics
– 310 –
Web Authentication
web-auth This command defines the limit for failed web authentication login attempts. After
login-attempts the limit is reached, the switch refuses further login attempts until the quiet time
expires. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
web-auth login-attempts count
no web-auth login-attempts
count - The limit of allowed failed login attempts. (Range: 1-3)
Default Setting
3 login attempts
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#web-auth login-attempts 2
Console(config)#
web-auth This command defines the amount of time a host must wait after exceeding the
quiet-period limit for failed login attempts, before it may attempt web authentication again. Use
the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
web-auth quiet-period time
no web-auth quiet period
time - The amount of time the host must wait before attempting
authentication again. (Range: 1-180 seconds)
Default Setting
60 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#web-auth quiet-period 120
Console(config)#
– 311 –
Web Authentication
web-auth This command defines the amount of time a web-authentication session remains
session-timeout valid. When the session timeout has been reached, the host is logged off and must
re-authenticate itself the next time data transmission takes place. Use the no form
Syntax
web-auth session-timeout timeout
no web-auth session timeout
timeout - The amount of time that an authenticated session remains valid.
Default Setting
3600 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#web-auth session-timeout 1800
Console(config)#
web-auth This command globally enables web authentication for the switch. Use the no form
system-auth-control to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] web-auth system-auth-control
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
Both web-auth system-auth-control for the switch and web-auth for an interface
must be enabled for the web authentication feature to be active.
Example
Console(config)#web-auth system-auth-control
Console(config)#
– 312 –
Web Authentication
web-auth This command enables web authentication for an interface. Use the no form to
Syntax
[no] web-auth
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
Both web-auth system-auth-control for the switch and web-auth for a port must
be enabled for the web authentication feature to be active.
Example
Console(config-if)#web-auth
Console(config-if)#
web-auth This command ends all web authentication sessions connected to the port and
re-authenticate (Port) forces the users to re-authenticate.
Syntax
web-auth re-authenticate interface interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#web-auth re-authenticate interface ethernet 1/2
Console#
– 313 –
Web Authentication
web-auth This command ends the web authentication session associated with the
re-authenticate (IP) designated IP address and forces the user to re-authenticate.
Syntax
web-auth re-authenticate interface interface ip
ethernet unit/port
ip - IPv4 formatted IP address
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#web-auth re-authenticate interface ethernet 1/2 192.168.1.5
Console#
show web-auth This command displays global web authentication parameters.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show web-auth
Global Web-Auth Parameters
Session Timeout : 3600
Quiet Period : 60
Max Login Attempts : 3
Console#
– 314 –
Web Authentication
show web-auth This command displays interface-specific web authentication parameters and
interface statistics.
Syntax
show web-auth interface interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show web-auth interface ethernet 1/2
Web Auth Status : Enabled
Host Summary
IP address Web-Auth-State Remaining-Session-Time

--------------- -------------- ----------------------
1.1.1.1 Authenticated 295
1.1.1.2 Authenticated 111
Console#
show web-auth This command displays a summary of web authentication port parameters and
summary statistics.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show web-auth summary
Global Web-Auth Parameters
Port Status Authenticated Host Count
---- ------ ------------------------
1/ 1 Disabled 0
1/ 2 Enabled 8
1/ 3 Disabled 0
1/ 4 Disabled 0
1/ 5 Disabled 0
.
.
.
– 315 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
DHCPv4 Snooping
DHCPv4 snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCPv4 servers
or other devices which send port-related information to a DHCPv4 server. This
information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port. This
section describes commands used to configure DHCPv4 snooping.
Table 58: DHCP Snooping Commands

ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP snooping globally GC
ip dhcp snooping information Enables or disables the use of DHCP Option 82 GC

option information, and specifies frame format for the remote-id
ip dhcp snooping information Disables use of sub-type and sub-length for the GC
option encode no-subtype CID/RID in Option 82 information
ip dhcp snooping information Sets the remote ID to the switch’s IP address, MAC GC
option remote-id address, arbitrary string, or TR-101 compliant node
identifier
ip dhcp snooping information Sets the board identifier used in Option 82 information GC
option tr101 board-id based on TR-101 syntax
ip dhcp snooping information Sets the information option policy for DHCP client GC
policy packets that include Option 82 information
ip dhcp snooping limit rate Sets the maximum number of DHCP packets that can be GC
trapped for DHCP snooping
ip dhcp snooping verify Verifies the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP GC
mac-address packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet
header
ip dhcp snooping vlan Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN GC
ip dhcp snooping information Specifies DHCP Option 82 circuit-id suboption IC

option circuit-id information
ip dhcp snooping trust Configures the specified interface as trusted IC
clear ip dhcp snooping Clears DHCP snooping binding table entries from RAM PE
binding
clear ip dhcp snooping Removes all dynamically learned snooping entries from PE
database flash flash memory.
ip dhcp snooping database Writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash PE
flash memory
show ip dhcp snooping Shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings PE
show ip dhcp snooping Shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries PE
binding
– 316 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
ip dhcp snooping This command enables DHCP snooping globally. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received
from an outside source. DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages
received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or fire wall. When
DHCP snooping is enabled globally by this command, and enabled on a VLAN
interface by the ip dhcp snooping vlan command, DHCP messages received on
an untrusted interface (as specified by the no ip dhcp snooping trust
command) from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be
dropped.
◆ When enabled, DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered

based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping.
◆ Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces. Each entry includes a MAC
address, IP address, lease time, VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
◆ When DHCP snooping is enabled, the rate limit for the number of DHCP
messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second. Any
DHCP packets in excess of this limit are dropped.
◆ Filtering rules are implemented as follows:
■ If global DHCP snooping is disabled, all DHCP packets are forwarded.
■ If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where
the DHCP packet is received, all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted
port. If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message, a dynamic DHCP
snooping entry is also added to the binding table.
■ If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where
the DHCP packet is received, but the port is not trusted, it is processed as
follows:
■ If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server (including

OFFER, ACK or NAK messages), the packet is dropped.
– 317 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
■ If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DECLINE or RELEASE

message, the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding
entry is found in the binding table.
■ If the DHCP packet is from client, such as a DISCOVER, REQUEST,

INFORM, DECLINE or RELEASE message, the packet is forwarded if MAC
address verification is disabled (as specified by the ip dhcp snooping
verify mac-address command). However, if MAC address verification is
enabled, then the packet will only be forwarded if the client’s hardware
address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC
address in the Ethernet header.
■ If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type, it is dropped.
■ If a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above, it will only
be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN.
■ If a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port, it will be

forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN.
◆ If DHCP snooping is globally disabled, all dynamic bindings are removed from
the binding table.
◆ Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s)
through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be
configured as trusted (using the ip dhcp snooping trust command). Note that
the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it
receives an ACK message from a DHCP server. Also, when the switch sends out
DHCP client packets for itself, no filtering takes place. However, when the
switch receives any messages from a DHCP server, any packets received from
untrusted ports are dropped.
Example
This example enables DHCP snooping globally for the switch.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping

Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip dhcp snooping vlan (324)
ip dhcp snooping trust (326)
– 318 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
ip dhcp snooping This command enables the use of DHCP Option 82 information for the switch, and
information option specifies the frame format to use for the remote-id when Option 82 information is
generated by the switch. Use the no form without any keywords to disable this
function, the no form with the encode no-subtype keyword to enable use of sub-
type and sub-length in CID/RID fields, or the no form with the remote-id keyword
to set the remote ID to the switch’s MAC address encoded in hexadecimal.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information option
[encode no-subtype] [remote-id {ip-address [encode {ascii | hex}] |
mac-address [encode {ascii | hex}] | string string}]
no ip dhcp snooping information option [encode no-subtype]
[remote-id [ip-address encode] | [mac-address encode]]
encode no-subtype - Disables use of sub-type and sub-length fields in
circuit-ID (CID) and remote-ID (RID) in Option 82 information.
mac-address - Inserts a MAC address in the remote ID sub-option for the
DHCP snooping agent (that is, the MAC address of the switch’s CPU).
ip-address - Inserts an IP address in the remote ID sub-option for the DHCP
snooping agent (that is, the IP address of the management interface).
encode - Indicates encoding in ASCII or hexadecimal.
string - An arbitrary string inserted into the remote identifier field.
Default Setting
Option 82: Disabled
CID/RID sub-type: Enabled
Remote ID: MAC address (hexadecimal)
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch
and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server. Known as DHCP Option 82, it allows
compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses,
or to set other services or policies for clients.
◆ When the DHCP Snooping Information Option 82 is enabled, the requesting

client (or an intermediate relay agent that has used the information fields to
describe itself ) can be identified in the DHCP request packets forwarded by the
switch and in reply packets sent back from the DHCP server.
◆ When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled, clients can be

identified by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their
MAC address. DHCP client-server exchange messages are then forwarded
– 319 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
directly between the server and client without having to flood them to the
entire VLAN.
◆ DHCP snooping must be enabled for the DHCP Option 82 information to be

inserted into packets. When enabled, the switch will only add/remove option
82 information in incoming DCHP packets but not relay them. Packets are
processed as follows:
■ If an incoming packet is a DHCP request packet with option 82 information,
it will modify the option 82 information according to settings specified with
ip dhcp snooping information policy command.
■ If an incoming packet is a DHCP request packet without option 82
information, enabling the DHCP snooping information option will add
option 82 information to the packet.
■ If an incoming packet is a DHCP reply packet with option 82 information,
enabling the DHCP snooping information option will remove option 82
information from the packet.
Example
This example enables the DHCP Snooping Information Option.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping information option

Console(config)#
ip dhcp snooping This command disables the use of sub-type and sub-length fields for the
information option circuit-ID (CID) and remote-ID (RID) in Option 82 information generated by the
encode no-subtype switch. Use the no form to enable the use of these fields.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping information option encode no-subtype
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
See the Command Usage section under the ip dhcp snooping information option
circuit-id command for a description of how these fields are included in TR-101
syntax.
– 320 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
EXAMPLE
This example enables the use of sub-type and sub-length fields for the
circuit-ID (CID) and remote-ID (RID).
Console(config)#no ip dhcp snooping information option encode no-subtype

Console(config)#
ip dhcp snooping This command sets the remote ID to the switch’s IP address, MAC address, arbitrary
information option string, or TR-101 compliant node identifier. Use the no form to restore the default
remote-id setting.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information option remote-id
{ip-address [encode {ascii | hex}] |
mac-address [encode {ascii | hex}] | string |
tr101 node-identifier {ip | sysname}]
no ip dhcp snooping information option remote-id
[ip-address encode] | [mac-address encode]
mac-address - Inserts a MAC address in the remote ID sub-option for the
DHCP snooping agent (that is, the MAC address of the switch’s CPU).
ip-address - Inserts an IP address in the remote ID sub-option for the DHCP
snooping agent (that is, the IP address of the management interface).
encode - Indicates encoding in ASCII or hexadecimal.
string - An arbitrary string inserted into the remote identifier field.
tr101 node-identifier - The remote ID generated by the switch is based on
TR-101 syntax (R-124, Access_Node_ID).
ip - Specifies the switch’s IP address as the node identifier.
sysname - Specifies the system name as the node identifier.
Default Setting
MAC address (hexadecimal)
Command Mode
Example
This example sets the remote ID to the switch’s IP address.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping information option remote-id tr101

node-identifier ip
Console(config)#
– 321 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
ip dhcp snooping This command sets the board identifier used in Option 82 information based on
information option TR-101 syntax. Use the no form to remove the board identifier.
tr101 board-id
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information option tr101 board-id board-id
no ip dhcp snooping information option tr101 board-id
board-id – TR101 Board ID. (Range: 0-9)
Default Setting
not defined
Command Mode
Example
This example sets the board ID to 0.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping information option tr101 board-id 0

Console(config)#
ip dhcp snooping This command sets the DHCP snooping information option policy for DHCP client
information policy packets that include Option 82 information.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information policy {drop | keep | replace}
drop - Drops the client’s request packet instead of relaying it.
keep - Retains the Option 82 information in the client request, and
forwards the packets to trusted ports.
replace - Replaces the Option 82 information circuit-id and remote-id fields
in the client’s request with information about the relay agent itself, inserts
the relay agent’s address (when DHCP snooping is enabled), and forwards
the packets to trusted ports.
Default Setting
replace
Command Mode
Command Usage
When the switch receives DHCP packets from clients that already include DHCP
Option 82 information, the switch can be configured to set the action policy for
these packets. The switch can either drop the DHCP packets, keep the existing
information, or replace it with the switch’s relay information.
– 322 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
Example
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping information policy drop
Console(config)#
ip dhcp snooping This command sets the maximum number of DHCP packets that can be trapped by
limit rate the switch for DHCP snooping. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping limit rate rate

no dhcp snooping limit rate
rate - The maximum number of DHCP packets that may be trapped for
DHCP snooping. (Range: 1-2048 packets/second)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
This example sets the DHCP snooping rate limit to 100 packets per second.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping limit rate 100

Console(config)#
ip dhcp snooping This command verifies the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet
verify mac-address against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header. Use the no form to disable
this function.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp binding verify mac-address
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
If MAC address verification is enabled, and the source MAC address in the Ethernet
header of the packet is not same as the client’s hardware address in the DHCP
packet, the packet is dropped.
– 323 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
Example
This example enables MAC address verification.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip dhcp snooping (317)
ip dhcp snooping vlan This command enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN. Use the no form to
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-id
vlan-id - ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When DHCP snooping is enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping
command, and enabled on a VLAN with this command, DHCP packet filtering
will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN as specified by the ip
dhcp snooping trust command.
◆ When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, DHCP snooping can still be
configured for specific VLANs, but the changes will not take effect until DHCP
snooping is globally re-enabled.
◆ When DHCP snooping is globally enabled, and then disabled on a VLAN, all
dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table.
Example
This example enables DHCP snooping for VLAN 1.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1

Console(config)#
– 324 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
Related Commands
ip dhcp snooping This command specifies DHCP Option 82 circuit-id suboption information. Use the
information option no form to use the default settings.
circuit-id
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information option circuit-id string string
no dhcp snooping information option circuit-id
string - An arbitrary string inserted into the circuit identifier field.
Default Setting
VLAN-Unit-Port
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch
and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server. DHCP Option 82 allows compatible
DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses, to set other
services or policies for clients. For more information of this process, refer to the
Command Usage section under the ip dhcp snooping information option
command.
◆ Option 82 information generated by the switch is based on TR-101 syntax as

shown below:
Table 59: Option 82 information

82 3-69 1 1-67 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x63
opt82 opt-len sub-opt1 string-len R-124 string
The circuit identifier used by this switch starts at sub-option1 and goes to the
end of the R-124 string. The R-124 string includes the following information:
■ sub-type - Distinguishes different types of circuit IDs.
■ sub-length - Length of the circuit ID type
■ access node identifier - ASCII string. Default is the MAC address of the
switch’s CPU. This field is set by the ip dhcp snooping information option
command,
■ eth - The second field is the fixed string “eth”
■ slot - The slot represents the stack unit for this system.
– 325 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
■ port - The port which received the DHCP request. If the packet arrives over
a trunk, the value is the ifIndex of the trunk.
■ vlan - Tag of the VLAN which received the DHCP request.

Note that the sub-type and sub-length fields can be enabled or disabled
using the ip dhcp snooping information option command.
■ The ip dhcp snooping information option circuit-id command can be
used to modify the default settings described above.
Example
This example sets the DHCP Snooping Information circuit-id suboption string.

Console(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information option circuit-id string mv2
Console(config-if)#
ip dhcp snooping trust This command configures the specified interface as trusted. Use the no form to
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping trust
Default Setting
All interfaces are untrusted
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages
from within the network. An untrusted interface is an interface that is
configured to receive messages from outside the network or fire wall.
◆ Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the local network or fire wall to
trusted, and all other ports outside the local network or fire wall to untrusted.
◆ When DHCP snooping is enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping

command, and enabled on a VLAN with ip dhcp snooping vlan command,
DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the
VLAN according to the default status, or as specifically configured for an
interface with the no ip dhcp snooping trust command.
◆ When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port, all the dynamic DHCP
snooping bindings associated with this port are removed.
– 326 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
◆ Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s)
through which it submits a client request to the DHCP server must be
configured as trusted.
Example
This example sets port 5 to untrusted.

Console(config-if)#no ip dhcp snooping trust
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
clear ip dhcp This command clears DHCP snooping binding table entries from RAM. Use this
snooping binding command without any optional keywords to clear all entries from the binding
table.
Syntax
clear ip dhcp snooping binding [mac-address vlan vlan-id]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear ip dhcp snooping binding 11-22-33-44-55-66 vlan 1
Console#
clear ip dhcp This command removes all dynamically learned snooping entries from flash
snooping database memory.
flash
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear ip dhcp snooping database flash
Console#
– 327 –
DHCPv4 Snooping
ip dhcp snooping This command writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash memory.
database flash
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command can be used to store the currently learned dynamic DHCP snooping
entries to flash memory. These entries will be restored to the snooping table when
the switch is reset. However, note that the lease time shown for a dynamic entry
that has been restored from flash memory will no longer be valid.
Example
Console#ip dhcp snooping database flash
Console#
show ip dhcp This command shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings.
snooping
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip dhcp snooping
Global DHCP Snooping Status: enabled
DHCP Snooping Information Option Status: enabled
DHCP Snooping Information Option Sub-option Format: extra subtype included
DHCP Snooping Information Option Remote ID: MAC Address (ascii encoded)
DHCP Snooping Information Option TR101 Board ID: none
DHCP Snooping Information Policy: replace
DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs:
1,
Verify Source MAC-Address: enabled
DHCP Snooping rate limit: unlimited
Interface Trusted Circuit-ID mode Circuit-ID Value
---------- ---------- --------------- --------------------------------
Eth 1/1 No Vlan-Unit-Port ---
.
.
.
– 328 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
show ip dhcp This command shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries.
snooping binding
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip dhcp snooping binding
MAC Address IP Address Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------------- ---- ------
11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.99 0 Dynamic-DHCPSNP 1 Eth 1/5
Console#
DHCPv6 Snooping
DHCPv6 snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCPv6 servers
or other devices which send port-related information to a DHCPv6 server. This
information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port. This
section describes commands used to configure DHCPv6 snooping.
Table 60: DHCP Snooping Commands

ipv6 dhcp snooping Enables DHCPv6 snooping globally GC
ipv6 dhcp snooping option Enables insertion of DHCPv6 Option 37 relay agent GC
remote-id remote-id
ipv6 dhcp snooping option Sets the information option policy for DHCPv6 client GC
remote-id policy packets that include Option 37 information
ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan Enables DHCPv6 snooping on the specified VLAN GC
ipv6 dhcp snooping Sets the maximum number of entries which can be IC
max-binding stored in the binding database for an interface
ipv6 dhcp snooping trust Configures the specified interface as trusted IC
clear ipv6 dhcp snooping Clears DHCPv6 snooping binding table entries from RAM PE
binding
clear ipv6 dhcp snooping Clears statistical counters for DHCPv6 snooping PE
statistics client, server and relay packets
show ipv6 dhcp snooping Shows the DHCPv6 snooping configuration settings PE
show ipv6 dhcp snooping Shows the DHCPv6 snooping binding table entries PE
binding
show ipv6 dhcp snooping Shows statistics for DHCPv6 snooping client, server and PE
statistics relay packets
– 329 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
ipv6 dhcp snooping This command enables DHCPv6 snooping globally. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 dhcp snooping
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCPv6 messages are
received from an outside source. DHCPv6 snooping is used to filter DHCPv6
messages received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or fire
wall. When DHCPv6 snooping is enabled globally by this command, and
enabled on a VLAN interface by the ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command, DHCP
messages received on an untrusted interface (as specified by the no ipv6 dhcp
snooping trust command) from a device not listed in the DHCPv6 snooping
table will be dropped.
◆ When enabled, DHCPv6 messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered

based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCPv6 snooping.
◆ Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces. Each entry includes a MAC
address, IPv6 address, lease time, binding type, VLAN identifier, and port
identifier.
◆ When DHCPv6 snooping is enabled, the rate limit for the number of DHCPv6
messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second. Any
DHCPv6 packets in excess of this limit are dropped.
■ If global DHCPv6 snooping is disabled, all DHCPv6 packets are forwarded.
■ If DHCPv6 snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN

where the DHCPv6 packet is received, DHCPv6 packets are forwarded for a
trusted port as described below.
■ If DHCPv6 snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN

where the DHCP packet is received, but the port is not trusted, DHCP
packets are processed according to message type as follows:
DHCP Client Packet

■ Request: Update entry in binding cache, recording client’s DHCPv6
Unique Identifier (DUID), server’s DUID, Identity Association (IA) type, IA
– 330 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
Identifier, and address (4 message exchanges to get IPv6 address), and

forward to trusted port.
■ Solicit: Add new entry in binding cache, recording client’s DUID, IA type,
IA ID (2 message exchanges to get IPv6 address with rapid commit
option, otherwise 4 message exchanges), and forward to trusted port.
■ Decline: If no matching entry is found in binding cache, drop this

packet.
■ Renew, Rebind, Release, Confirm: If no matching entry is found in

binding cache, drop this packet.
■ If the DHCPv6 packet is not a recognizable type, it is dropped.
If a DHCPv6 packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above, it will
only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN.
DHCP Server Packet

■ If a DHCP server packet is received on an untrusted port, drop this
packet and add a log entry in the system.
■ If a DHCPv6 Reply packet is received from a server on a trusted port, it

will be processed in the following manner:
A. Check if IPv6 address in IA option is found in binding table:

■ If yes, continue to C.
■ If not, continue to B.
B. Check if IPv6 address in IA option is found in binding cache:

■ If yes, continue to C.
■ If not, check failed, and forward packet to trusted port.
C. Check status code in IA option:

■ If successful, and entry is in binding table, update lease time
and forward to original destination.
■ If successful, and entry is in binding cache, move entry from
binding cache to binding table, update lease time and forward
to original destination.
■ Otherwise, remove binding entry. and check failed.
■ If a DHCPv6 Relay packet is received, check the relay message option in

Relay-Forward or Relay-Reply packet, and process client and server
packets as described above.
◆ If DHCPv6 snooping is globally disabled, all dynamic bindings are removed

from the binding table.
– 331 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
◆ Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCPv6 client – The port(s)
through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCPv6 server must
be configured as trusted (using the ipv6 dhcp snooping trust command). Note
that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when
it receives an ACK message from a DHCPv6 server. Also, when the switch sends
out DHCPv6 client packets for itself, no filtering takes place. However, when the
switch receives any messages from a DHCPv6 server, any packets received from
untrusted ports are dropped.
Example
This example enables DHCPv6 snooping globally for the switch.
Console(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping

Console(config)#
Related Commands
ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan (334)
ipv6 dhcp snooping trust (335)
ipv6 dhcp snooping This command enables the insertion of remote-id option 37 information into
option remote-id DHCPv6 client messages. Remote-id option information such as the port attached
to the client, DUID, and VLAN ID is used by the DHCPv6 server to assign
preassigned configuration data specific to the DHCPv6 client. Use the no form of
the command to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ DHCPv6 provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch
and its DHCPv6 clients to the DHCPv6 server. Known as DHCPv6 Option 37, it
allows compatible DHCPv6 servers to use the information when assigning IP
addresses, or to set other services or policies for clients.
◆ When DHCPv6 Snooping Information Option 37 is enabled, the requesting

client (or an intermediate relay agent that has used the information fields to
describe itself ) can be identified in the DHCPv6 request packets forwarded by
the switch and in reply packets sent back from the DHCPv6 server.
◆ When the DHCPv6 Snooping Option 37 is enabled, clients can be identified by

the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC address.
– 332 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
DHCPv6 client-server exchange messages are then forwarded directly between

the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN.
◆ DHCPv6 snooping must be enabled for the DHCPv6 Option 37 information to

be inserted into packets. When enabled, the switch will either drop, keep or
remove option 37 information in incoming DCHPv6 packets. Packets are
processed as follows:
■ If an incoming packet is a DHCPv6 request packet with option 37
information, it will modify the option 37 information according to settings
specified with ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id policy command.
■ If an incoming packet is a DHCPv6 request packet without option 37
information, enabling the DHCPv6 snooping information option will add
option 37 information to the packet.
■ If an incoming packet is a DHCPv6 reply packet with option 37 information,
enabling the DHCPv6 snooping information option will remove option 37
information from the packet.
◆ When this switch inserts Option 37 information in DHCPv6 client request

packets, the switch’s MAC address (hexadecimal) is used for the remote ID.
Example
This example enables the DHCPv6 Snooping Remote-ID Option.
Console(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id

Console(config)#
ipv6 dhcp snooping This command sets the remote-id option policy for DHCPv6 client packets that
option remote-id include Option 37 information. Use the no form to disable this function.
policy
Syntax
ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id policy {drop | keep | replace}
no ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id policy
drop - Drops the client’s request packet instead of relaying it.
keep - Retains the Option 37 information in the client request, and
forwards the packets to trusted ports.
replace - Replaces the Option 37 remote-ID in the client’s request with the
relay agent’s remote-ID (when DHCPv6 snooping is enabled), and forwards
the packets to trusted ports.
Default Setting
drop
Command Mode
– 333 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
Command Usage
When the switch receives DHCPv6 packets from clients that already include DHCP
Option 37 information, the switch can be configured to set the action policy for
these packets. The switch can either drop the DHCPv6 packets, keep the existing
information, or replace it with the switch’s relay agent information.
Example
This example configures the switch to keep existing remote-id option 37
information within DHCPv6 client packets and forward it.
Console(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id policy keep

Console(config)#
ipv6 dhcp snooping This command enables DHCPv6 snooping on the specified VLAN. Use the no form
vlan to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan {vlan-id | vlan-range}
vlan-range - A consecutive range of VLANs indicated by the use a hyphen,
or a random group of VLANs with each entry separated by a comma.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When DHCPv6 snooping enabled globally using the ipv6 dhcp snooping
command, and enabled on a VLAN with this command, DHCPv6 packet
filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN as specified
by the ipv6 dhcp snooping trust command.
◆ When the DHCPv6 snooping is globally disabled, DHCPv6 snooping can still be
configured for specific VLANs, but the changes will not take effect until DHCPv6
snooping is globally re-enabled.
◆ When DHCPv6 snooping is enabled globally, and then disabled on a VLAN, all
dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table.
– 334 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
Example
This example enables DHCP6 snooping for VLAN 1.
Console(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan 1

Console(config)#
Related Commands
ipv6 dhcp snooping (330)
ipv6 dhcp snooping trust (335)
ipv6 dhcp snooping This command sets the maximum number of entries which can be stored in the
max-binding binding database for an interface. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 dhcp snooping max-binding count
no ipv6 dhcp snooping max-binding
count - Maximum number of entries. (Range: 1-5)
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Example
This example sets the maximum number of binding entries to 1.

Console(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp snooping max-binding 1
Console(config-if)#
ipv6 dhcp snooping This command configures the specified interface as trusted. Use the no form to
trust restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 dhcp snooping trust
Default Setting
All interfaces are untrusted
Command Mode
– 335 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
Command Usage
◆ A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages
from within the network. An untrusted interface is an interface that is
configured to receive messages from outside the network or fire wall.
◆ Set all ports connected to DHCv6 servers within the local network or fire wall to
trusted, and all other ports outside the local network or fire wall to untrusted.
◆ When DHCPv6 snooping is enabled globally using the ipv6 dhcp snooping
command, and enabled on a VLAN with ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command,
DHCPv6 packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the
VLAN according to the default status, or as specifically configured for an
interface with the no ipv6 dhcp snooping trust command.
◆ When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port, all the dynamic DHCPv6
snooping bindings associated with this port are removed.
◆ Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCPv6 client – The port(s)
through which it submits a client request to the DHCPv6 server must be
configured as trusted.
Example
This example sets port 5 to untrusted.

Console(config-if)#no ipv6 dhcp snooping trust
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
clear ipv6 dhcp This command clears DHCPv6 snooping binding table entries from RAM. Use this
snooping binding command without any optional keywords to clear all entries from the binding
table.
Syntax
clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding [mac-address ipv6-address]
ipv6-address - Corresponding IPv6 address. This address must be entered
according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing Architecture,” using 8 colon-
separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One double colon may be used in the
address to indicate the appropriate number of zeros required to fill the
undefined fields.
– 336 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding 00-12-cf-01-02-03 2001::1
Console(config)#
clear ipv6 dhcp This command clears statistical counters for DHCPv6 snooping client, server and
snooping statistics relay packets.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#clear ipv6 dhcp snooping statistics
Console(config)#
show ipv6 dhcp This command shows the DHCPv6 snooping configuration settings.
snooping
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 dhcp snooping
Global DHCPv6 Snooping status: disabled
DHCPv6 Snooping remote-id option status: disabled
DHCPv6 Snooping remote-id policy: drop
DHCPv6 Snooping is configured on the following VLANs:
1,
Interface Trusted Max-binding Current-binding
--------- --------- ----------- ---------------
Eth 1/1 No 5 0
Eth 1/2 No 5 0
Eth 1/3 No 5 0
Eth 1/4 No 5 0
Eth 1/5 Yes 5 0
.
.
.
– 337 –
DHCPv6 Snooping
show ipv6 dhcp This command shows the DHCPv6 snooping binding table entries.
snooping binding
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 dhcp snooping binding
NA - Non-temporary address
TA - Temporary address
-------------------------------------- ----------- ---- ------- ----
Link-layer Address: 00-13-49-aa-39-26
IPv6 Address Lifetime VLAN Port Type
--------------------------------------- ---------- ---- ------- ----
2001:b021:1435:5612:ab3c:6792:a452:6712 2591998 1 Eth 1/5 NA
--------------------------------------- ---------- ---- ------- ----
Link-layer Address: 00-12-cf-01-02-03
IPv6 Address Lifetime VLAN Port Type
--------------------------------------- ---------- ---- ------- ----
2001:b000::1 2591912 1 Eth 1/3 NA
Console#
show ipv6 dhcp This command shows statistics for DHCPv6 snooping client, server and relay
snooping statistics packets.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 dhcp snooping statistics
DHCPv6 Snooping Statistics:
Client Packet: Solicit, Request, Confirm, Renew, Rebind,
Decline, Release, Information-request
Server Packet: Advertise, Reply, Reconfigure
Relay Packet: Relay-forward, Relay-reply
State Client Server Relay Total
-------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Received 10 9 0 19
Sent 9 9 0 18
Droped 1 0 0 1
Console#
– 338 –
IPv4 Source Guard
IPv4 Source Guard

IPv4 Source Guard is a security feature that filters IPv4 traffic on network interfaces
based on manually configured entries in the IPv4 Source Guard table, or dynamic
entries in the DHCPv4 Snooping table when enabled (see “DHCPv4 Snooping” on
page 316). IPv4 source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a
host tries to use the IPv4 address of a neighbor to access the network. This section
describes commands used to configure IPv4 Source Guard.
Table 61: IPv4 Source Guard Commands

ip source-guard binding Adds a static address to the source-guard binding table GC
ip source-guard Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on IC

source IP address, or source IP address and
corresponding MAC address
ip source-guard max-binding Sets the maximum number of entries that can be bound IC
to an interface
ip source-guard mode Sets the source-guard learning mode to search for IC

addresses in the ACL binding table or the MAC address
binding table
clear ip source-guard Remove all blocked records PE

binding blocked
show ip source-guard Shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on PE

each interface
show ip source-guard Shows the source guard binding table PE

binding
ip source-guard This command adds a static address to the source-guard binding table. Use the no
binding form to remove a static entry.
Syntax
ip source-guard binding [mode {acl | mac}] mac-address
vlan vlan-id ip-address interface ethernet unit/port-list
no ip source-guard binding [mode {acl | mac}] mac-address vlan vlan-id
mode - Specifies the binding mode.
acl - Adds binding to ACL table.
mac - Adds binding to MAC address table.
mac-address - A valid unicast MAC address.
vlan-id - ID of a configured VLAN for an ACL filtering table or a range of
VLANs for a MAC address filtering table. To specify a list separate
nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a
hyphen to designate a range of IDs. (Range: 1-4094)
ip-address - A valid unicast IP address, including classful types A, B or C.
– 339 –
IPv4 Source Guard

port-list - Physical port number or list of port numbers. Separate
nonconsecutive port numbers with a comma and no spaces; or use a
hyphen to designate a range of port numbers. (Range: 1-28/52)
Default Setting
No configured entries
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If the binding mode is not specified in this command, the entry is bound to the
ACL table by default.
◆ Table entries include a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type (Static-IP-
SG-Binding, Dynamic-DHCP-Binding), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
◆ All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time, which is indicated
with a value of zero by the show ip source-guard command (page 345).
◆ When source guard is enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries
learned via DHCP snooping, or static addresses configured in the source guard
binding table with this command.
◆ Static bindings are processed as follows:
■ A valid static IP source guard entry will be added to the binding table in
ACL mode if one of the following conditions is true:
■ If there is no binding entry with the same VLAN ID and MAC address, a
new entry will be added to the binding table using the type of static IP
source guard binding.
■ If there is an entry with the same VLAN ID and MAC address, and the
type of entry is static IP source guard binding, then the new entry will
replace the old one.
■ If there is an entry with the same VLAN ID and MAC address, and the
type of the entry is dynamic DHCP snooping binding, then the new
entry will replace the old one and the entry type will be changed to
static IP source guard binding.
■ A valid static IP source guard entry will be added to the binding table in
MAC mode if one of the following conditions are true:
■ If there is no binding entry with the same IP address and MAC address,
a new entry will be added to the binding table using the type of static
IP source guard binding entry.
■ If there is a binding entry with same IP address and MAC address, then
the new entry shall replace the old one.
– 340 –
IPv4 Source Guard
◆ Only unicast addresses are accepted for static bindings.
Example
This example configures a static source-guard binding on port 5. Since the binding
mode is not specified, the entry is bound to the ACL table by default.
Console(config)#ip source-guard binding 11-22-33-44-55-66 vlan 1 192.168.0.99

Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip source-guard (341)
ip source-guard This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on source IP
address, or source IP address and corresponding MAC address. Use the no form to
disable this function.
Syntax
ip source-guard {sip | sip-mac}
no ip source-guard
sip - Filters traffic based on IP addresses stored in the binding table.
sip-mac - Filters traffic based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC
addresses stored in the binding table.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Source guard is used to filter traffic on an insecure port which receives
messages from outside the network or fire wall, and therefore may be subject
to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor.
◆ Setting source guard mode to “sip” or “sip-mac” enables this function on the
selected port. Use the “sip” option to check the VLAN ID, source IP address, and
port number against all entries in the binding table. Use the “sip-mac” option
to check these same parameters, plus the source MAC address. Use the no ip
source guard command to disable this function on the selected port.
◆ When enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP
snooping, or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table.
– 341 –
IPv4 Source Guard
◆ Table entries include a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type (Static-IP-
SG-Binding, Dynamic-DHCP-Binding, VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
◆ Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table with the ip source-
guard binding command are automatically configured with an infinite lease
time. Dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping are configured by the DHCP
server itself.
◆ If the IP source guard is enabled, an inbound packet’s IP address (sip option) or

both its IP address and corresponding MAC address (sip-mac option) will be
checked against the binding table. If no matching entry is found, the packet
will be dropped.
■ If DHCPv4 snooping is disabled (see page 317), IP source guard will check
the VLAN ID, source IP address, port number, and source MAC address (for
the sip-mac option). If a matching entry is found in the binding table and
the entry type is static IP source guard binding, the packet will be
forwarded.
■ If the DHCP snooping is enabled, IP source guard will check the VLAN ID,
source IP address, port number, and source MAC address (for the sip-mac
option). If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type
is static IP source guard binding, or dynamic DHCP snooping binding, the
packet will be forwarded.
■ If IP source guard if enabled on an interface for which IP source bindings

(dynamically learned via DHCP snooping or manually configured) are not
yet configured, the switch will drop all IP traffic on that port, except for
DHCP packets.
■ Only unicast addresses are accepted for static bindings.
Example
This example enables IP source guard on port 5.

Console(config-if)#ip source-guard sip
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip source-guard binding (339)
– 342 –
IPv4 Source Guard
ip source-guard This command sets the maximum number of entries that can be bound to an
max-binding interface. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip source-guard [mode {acl | mac}] max-binding number
no ip source-guard [mode {acl | mac}] max-binding
mode - Specifies the learning mode.
acl - Searches for addresses in the ACL table.
mac - Searches for addresses in the MAC address table.
number - The maximum number of IP addresses that can be mapped to an
interface in the binding table. (Range: 1-16 for ACL mode; 1-1024 for MAC
mode)
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum number of address entries that can be mapped
to an interface in the binding table, including both dynamic entries discovered by
DHCP snooping and static entries set by the ip source-guard command.
Example
This example sets the maximum number of allowed entries in the binding table for
port 5 to one entry. The mode is not specified, and therefore defaults to the ACL
binding table.

Console(config-if)#ip source-guard max-binding 1
Console(config-if)#
ip source-guard mode This command sets the source-guard learning mode to search for addresses in the
ACL binding table or the MAC address binding table. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
ip source-guard mode {acl | mac}
no ip source-guard mode
mode - Specifies the learning mode.
acl - Searches for addresses in the ACL binding table.
mac - Searches for addresses in the MAC address binding table.
– 343 –
IPv4 Source Guard
Default Setting
ACL
Command Mode
Command Usage
There are two modes for the filtering table:
◆ ACL - IP traffic will be forwarded if it passes the checking process in the ACL
mode binding table.
◆ MAC - A MAC entry will be added in MAC address table if IP traffic passes the
checking process in MAC mode binding table.
Example
This command sets the binding table mode for the specified interface to MAC
mode:

Console(config-if)#ip source-guard mode mac
Console(config-if)#
clear ip source-guard This command clears source-guard binding table entries from RAM.
binding blocked
Syntax
clear ip source-guard binding blocked
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
When IP Source-Guard detects an invalid packet it creates a blocked
record. These records can be viewed using the show ip source-guard
binding blocked command. A maximum of 512 blocked records can be
stored before the switch overwrites the oldest record with new blocked
records. Use the clear ip source-guard binding blocked command to
clear this table.
Example
This command clears the blocked record table.
Console(config)#clear ip source-guard binding blocked

Console(config)#
– 344 –
IPv4 Source Guard
show ip source-guard This command shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each
interface.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip source-guard
ACL Table MAC Table
Interface Filter-type Filter-table Max-binding Max-binding
--------- ----------- ------------ ----------- -----------
Eth 1/1 DISABLED ACL 5 1024
Eth
. 1/5 DISABLED ACL 5 1024
.
.
show ip source-guard This command shows the source guard binding table.
binding
Syntax
show ip source-guard binding [dhcp-snooping | static [acl | mac] |
blocked [vlan vlan-id | interface interface]
dhcp-snooping - Shows dynamic entries configured with DHCP Snooping
commands (see page 316)
static - Shows static entries configured with the ip source-guard binding
command.
acl - Shows static entries in the ACL binding table.
mac - Shows static entries in the MAC address binding table.
blocked - Shows MAC addresses which have been blocked by IP Source
Guard.
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 345 –
IPv6 Source Guard
Example
Console#show ip source-guard binding
MAC Address IP Address Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------- --------- ---------
11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.99 0 Static 1 Eth 1/5
Console#
IPv6 Source Guard

IPv6 Source Guard is a security feature that filters IPv6 traffic on non-routed, Layer 2
network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IPv6 Source Guard
table, or dynamic entries in the Neighbor Discovery Snooping table or DHCPv6
Snooping table when either snooping protocol is enabled (see “DHCPv6 Snooping”
on page 329). IPv6 source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when
a host tries to use the IPv6 address of a neighbor to access the network. This section
describes commands used to configure IPv6 Source Guard.
Table 62: IPv6 Source Guard Commands

ipv6 source-guard binding Adds a static address to the source-guard binding table GC
ipv6 source-guard Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on IC

source IP address
ipv6 source-guard max- Sets the maximum number of entries that can be bound IC
binding to an interface
show ipv6 source-guard Shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on PE

each interface
show ipv6 source-guard Shows the source guard binding table PE

binding
ipv6 source-guard This command adds a static address to the source-guard binding table. Use the no
binding form to remove a static entry.
Syntax
ipv6 source-guard binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ipv6-address
interface interface
no ipv6 source-guard binding mac-address vlan vlan-id
mac-address - A valid unicast MAC address.
undefined fields.
– 346 –
IPv6 Source Guard
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
No configured entries
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Table entries include an associated MAC address, IPv6 global unicast address,
entry type (Static-IPv6-SG-Binding, Dynamic-ND-Snooping, Dynamic-DHCPv6-
Snooping), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
◆ Traffic filtering is based only on the source IPv6 address, VLAN ID, and port
number.
◆ All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time, which is indicated
with a value of zero by the show ipv6 source-guard command.
◆ When source guard is enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries
learned via ND snooping, DHCPv6 snooping, or static addresses configured in
the source guard binding table with this command.
◆ Static bindings are processed as follows:
■ If there is no entry with same and MAC address and IPv6 address, a new
entry is added to binding table using static IPv6 source guard binding.
■ If there is an entry with same MAC address and IPv6 address, and the type
of entry is static IPv6 source guard binding, then the new entry will replace
the old one.
■ If there is an entry with same MAC address and IPv6 address, and the type
of the entry is either a dynamic ND snooping binding or DHCPv6 snooping
binding, then the new entry will replace the old one and the entry type will
be changed to static IPv6 source guard binding.
■ Only unicast addresses are accepted for static bindings.
– 347 –
IPv6 Source Guard
Example
This example configures a static source-guard binding on port 5.
Console(config)#ipv6 source-guard binding 00-ab-11-cd-23-45 vlan 1 2001::1

Console(config)#
Related Commands
ipv6 source-guard (348)
ipv6 source-guard This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on the source IP
address stored in the binding table. Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
ipv6 source-guard sip
no ipv6 source-guard
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Source guard is used to filter traffic on an insecure port which receives
messages from outside the network or fire wall, and therefore may be subject
to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor.
◆ This command checks the VLAN ID, IPv6 global unicast source IP address, and
port number against all entries in the binding table. Use the no ipv6 source
guard command to disable this function on the selected port.
◆ After IPv6 source guard is enabled on an interface, the switch initially blocks all
IPv6 traffic received on that interface, except for ND packets allowed by ND
snooping and DHCPv6 packets allowed by DHCPv6 snooping. A port access
control list (ACL) is applied to the interface. Traffic is then filtered based upon
dynamic entries learned via ND snooping or DHCPv6 snooping, or static
addresses configured in the source guard binding table. The port allows only
IPv6 traffic with a matching entry in the binding table and denies all other IPv6
traffic.
◆ Table entries include a MAC address, IPv6 global unicast address, entry type
(Static-IPv6-SG-Binding, Dynamic-ND-Snooping, Dynamic-DHCPv6-Snooping),
VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
– 348 –
IPv6 Source Guard
◆ Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table with the ipv6
source-guard binding command are automatically configured with an infinite
lease time. Dynamic entries learned via DHCPv6 snooping are configured by
the DHCPv6 server itself.
◆ If IPv6 source guard is enabled, an inbound packet’s source IPv6 address will be
checked against the binding table. If no matching entry is found, the packet
will be dropped.

■ If ND snooping and DHCPv6 snooping are disabled, IPv6 source guard will
check the VLAN ID, source IPv6 address, and port number. If a matching
entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IPv6 source
guard binding, the packet will be forwarded.
■ If ND snooping or DHCPv6 snooping is enabled, IPv6 source guard will
check the VLAN ID, source IP address, and port number. If a matching entry
is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IPv6 source guard
binding, dynamic ND snooping binding, or dynamic DHCPv6 snooping
binding, the packet will be forwarded.
■ If IPv6 source guard if enabled on an interface for which IPv6 source
bindings (dynamically learned via ND snooping or DHCPv6 snooping, or
manually configured) are not yet configured, the switch will drop all IPv6
traffic on that port, except for ND packets and DHCPv6 packets.
■ Only IPv6 global unicast addresses are accepted for static bindings.
Example
This example enables IP source guard on port 5.

Console(config-if)#ipv6 source-guard sip
Console(config-if)#
RELATED COMMANDS
ipv6 source-guard binding (346)
ipv6 source-guard This command sets the maximum number of entries that can be bound to an
max-binding interface. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 source-guard max-binding number
no ipv6 source-guard max-binding
number - The maximum number of IPv6 addresses that can be mapped to
an interface in the binding table. (Range: 1-5)
– 349 –
IPv6 Source Guard
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command sets the maximum number of address entries that can be
mapped to an interface in the binding table, including both dynamic entries
discovered by ND snooping, DHCPv6 snooping, and static entries set by the
ipv6 source-guard command.
◆ IPv6 source guard maximum bindings must be set to a value higher than
DHCPv6 snooping maximum bindings and ND snooping maximum bindings.
◆ If IPv6 source guard, ND snooping, and DHCPv6 snooping are enabled on a

port, the dynamic bindings used by ND snooping, DHCPv6 snooping, and IPv6
source guard static bindings cannot exceed the maximum allowed bindings set
by the ipv6 source-guard max-binding command. In other words, no new
entries will be added to the IPv6 source guard binding table.
◆ If IPv6 source guard is enabled on a port, and the maximum number of allowed
bindings is changed to a lower value, precedence is given to deleting entries
learned through DHCPv6 snooping, ND snooping, and then manually
configured IPv6 source guard static bindings, until the number of entries in the
binding table reaches the newly configured maximum number of allowed
bindings.
Example
This example sets the maximum number of allowed entries in the binding table for
port 5 to one entry.

Console(config-if)#ipv6 source-guard max-binding 1
Console(config-if)#
show ipv6 This command shows whether IPv6 source guard is enabled or disabled on each
source-guard interface, and the maximum allowed bindings.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 source-guard
Interface Filter-type Max-binding
--------- ----------- -----------
Eth 1/1 DISABLED 5
Eth 1/2 DISABLED 5
– 350 –
ARP Inspection
Eth 1/3 DISABLED 5

Eth 1/4 DISABLED 5
Eth 1/5 SIP 1
Eth 1/6 DISABLED 5
.
.
.
show ipv6 This command shows the IPv6 source guard binding table.
source-guard binding
Syntax
show ipv6 source-guard binding [dynamic | static]
dynamic - Shows dynamic entries configured with ND Snooping or
DHCPv6 Snooping commands (see page 329)
static - Shows static entries configured with the ipv6 source-guard binding
command.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 source-guard binding
MAC Address IPv6 Address VLAN Interface Type
-------------- --------------------------------------- ---- --------- ----
00AB-11CD-2345 2001::1 1 Eth 1/5 STA
Console#
ARP Inspection
ARP Inspection validates the MAC-to-IP address bindings in Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) packets. It protects against ARP traffic with invalid address bindings,
which forms the basis for certain “man-in-the-middle” attacks. This is accomplished
by intercepting all ARP requests and responses and verifying each of these packets
before the local ARP cache is updated or the packet is forwarded to the appropriate
destination, dropping any invalid ARP packets.
ARP Inspection determines the validity of an ARP packet based on valid IP-to-MAC
address bindings stored in a trusted database – the DHCP snooping binding
database. ARP Inspection can also validate ARP packets against user-configured
ARP access control lists (ACLs) for hosts with statically configured IP addresses.
– 351 –
ARP Inspection
This section describes commands used to configure ARP Inspection.
Table 63: ARP Inspection Commands

ip arp inspection Enables ARP Inspection globally on the switch GC
ip arp inspection filter Specifies an ARP ACL to apply to one or more VLANs GC
ip arp inspection log-buffer Sets the maximum number of entries saved in a log GC
logs message, and the rate at these messages are sent
ip arp inspection validate Specifies additional validation of address components in GC

an ARP packet
ip arp inspection vlan Enables ARP Inspection for a specified VLAN or range of GC
VLANs
ip arp inspection limit Sets a rate limit for the ARP packets received on a port IC
ip arp inspection trust Sets a port as trusted, and thus exempted from ARP IC
Inspection
show ip arp inspection Displays the global configuration settings for ARP PE
configuration Inspection
show ip arp inspection Shows the trust status and inspection rate limit for ports PE
interface
show ip arp inspection log Shows information about entries stored in the log, PE
including the associated VLAN, port, and address
components
show ip arp inspection Shows statistics about the number of ARP packets PE
statistics processed, or dropped for various reasons
show ip arp inspection vlan Shows configuration setting for VLANs, including ARP PE
Inspection status, the ARP ACL name, and if the DHCP
Snooping database is used after ACL validation is
completed
ip arp inspection This command enables ARP Inspection globally on the switch. Use the no form to
Syntax
[no] ip arp inspection
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When ARP Inspection is enabled globally with this command, it becomes active
only on those VLANs where it has been enabled with the ip arp inspection vlan
command.
– 352 –
ARP Inspection
◆ When ARP Inspection is enabled globally and enabled on selected VLANs, all
ARP request and reply packets on those VLANs are redirected to the CPU and
their switching is handled by the ARP Inspection engine.
◆ When ARP Inspection is disabled globally, it becomes inactive for all VLANs,
including those where ARP Inspection is enabled.
◆ When ARP Inspection is disabled, all ARP request and reply packets bypass the
ARP Inspection engine and their manner of switching matches that of all other
packets.
◆ Disabling and then re-enabling global ARP Inspection will not affect the ARP
Inspection configuration for any VLANs.
◆ When ARP Inspection is disabled globally, it is still possible to configure ARP

Inspection for individual VLANs. These configuration changes will only become
active after ARP Inspection is globally enabled again.
Example
Console(config)#ip arp inspection
Console(config)#
ip arp inspection filter This command specifies an ARP ACL to apply to one or more VLANs. Use the no
form to remove an ACL binding.
Syntax
ip arp inspection filter arp-acl-name vlan {vlan-id | vlan-range} [static]
arp-acl-name - Name of an ARP ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
vlan-id - VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
static - ARP packets are only validated against the specified ACL, address
bindings in the DHCP snooping database is not checked.
Default Setting
ARP ACLs are not bound to any VLAN
Static mode is not enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ ARP ACLs are configured with the commands described on page 393.
– 353 –
ARP Inspection
◆ If static mode is enabled, the switch compares ARP packets to the specified ARP
ACLs. Packets matching an IP-to-MAC address binding in a permit or deny rule
are processed accordingly. Packets not matching any of the ACL rules are
dropped. Address bindings in the DHCP snooping database are not checked.
◆ If static mode is not enabled, packets are first validated against the specified
ARP ACL. Packets matching a deny rule are dropped. All remaining packets are
validated against the address bindings in the DHCP snooping database.
Example
Console(config)#ip arp inspection filter sales vlan 1
Console(config)#
ip arp inspection This command sets the maximum number of entries saved in a log message, and
log-buffer logs the rate at which these messages are sent. Use the no form to restore the default
settings.
Syntax
ip arp inspection log-buffer logs message-number interval seconds
no ip arp inspection log-buffer logs
message-number - The maximum number of entries saved in a log message.
(Range: 0-256, where 0 means no events are saved)
seconds - The interval at which log messages are sent.
(Range: 0-86400)
Default Setting
Message Number: 5
Interval: 1 second
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ ARP Inspection must be enabled with the ip arp inspection command before
this command will be accepted by the switch.
◆ By default, logging is active for ARP Inspection, and cannot be disabled.
◆ When the switch drops a packet, it places an entry in the log buffer. Each entry
contains flow information, such as the receiving VLAN, the port number, the
source and destination IP addresses, and the source and destination MAC
addresses.
– 354 –
ARP Inspection
◆ If multiple, identical invalid ARP packets are received consecutively on the

same VLAN, then the logging facility will only generate one entry in the log
buffer and one corresponding system message.
◆ The maximum number of entries that can be stored in the log buffer is
determined by the message-number parameter. If the log buffer fills up before a
message is sent, the oldest entry will be replaced with the newest one.
◆ The switch generates a system message on a rate-controlled basis determined

by the seconds values. After the system message is generated, all entries are
cleared from the log buffer.
Example
Console(config)#ip arp inspection log-buffer logs 1 interval 10
Console(config)#
ip arp inspection This command specifies additional validation of address components in an ARP
validate packet. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip arp inspection validate
{dst-mac [ip [allow-zeros] [src-mac]] |
ip [allow-zeros] [src-mac]] | src-mac}
no ip arp inspection validate
dst-mac - Checks the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header
against the target MAC address in the ARP body. This check is performed
for ARP responses. When enabled, packets with different MAC addresses
are classified as invalid and are dropped.
ip - Checks the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP addresses.
Addresses include 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, and all IP multicast addresses.
Sender IP addresses are checked in all ARP requests and responses, while
target IP addresses are checked only in ARP responses.
allow-zeros - Allows sender IP address to be 0.0.0.0.
src-mac - Checks the source MAC address in the Ethernet header against
the sender MAC address in the ARP body. This check is performed on both
ARP requests and responses. When enabled, packets with different MAC
addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.
Default Setting
No additional validation is performed
Command Mode
– 355 –
ARP Inspection
Command Usage
By default, ARP Inspection only checks the IP-to-MAC address bindings specified in
an ARP ACL or in the DHCP Snooping database.
Example
Console(config)#ip arp inspection validate dst-mac
Console(config)#
ip arp inspection vlan This command enables ARP Inspection for a specified VLAN or range of VLANs. Use
the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip arp inspection vlan {vlan-id | vlan-range}
Default Setting
Disabled on all VLANs
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When ARP Inspection is enabled globally with the ip arp inspection command,
it becomes active only on those VLANs where it has been enabled with this
command.
◆ When ARP Inspection is enabled globally and enabled on selected VLANs, all
ARP request and reply packets on those VLANs are redirected to the CPU and
their switching is handled by the ARP Inspection engine.
◆ When ARP Inspection is disabled globally, it becomes inactive for all VLANs,
including those where ARP Inspection is enabled.
◆ When ARP Inspection is disabled, all ARP request and reply packets bypass the
ARP Inspection engine and their manner of switching matches that of all other
packets.
◆ Disabling and then re-enabling global ARP Inspection will not affect the ARP
Inspection configuration for any VLANs.
◆ When ARP Inspection is disabled globally, it is still possible to configure ARP

Inspection for individual VLANs. These configuration changes will only become
active after ARP Inspection is globally enabled again.
– 356 –
ARP Inspection
Example
Console(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 1,2
Console(config)#
ip arp inspection limit This command sets a rate limit for the ARP packets received on a port. Use the no
Syntax
ip arp inspection limit {rate pps | none}
no ip arp inspection limit
pps - The maximum number of ARP packets that can be processed by the
CPU per second. (Range: 0-2048, where 0 means that no ARP packets can
be forwarded)
none - There is no limit on the number of ARP packets that can be
processed by the CPU.
Default Setting
15
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Port, Static Aggregation)
Command Usage
◆ This command applies to both trusted and untrusted ports.
◆ When the rate of incoming ARP packets exceeds the configured limit, the
switch drops all ARP packets in excess of the limit.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip arp inspection limit rate 150
Console(config-if)#
ip arp inspection trust This command sets a port as trusted, and thus exempted from ARP Inspection. Use
the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] ip arp inspection trust
Default Setting
Untrusted
– 357 –
ARP Inspection
Command Mode
Command Usage
Packets arriving on untrusted ports are subject to any configured ARP Inspection
and additional validation checks. Packets arriving on trusted ports bypass all of
these checks, and are forwarded according to normal switching rules.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip arp inspection trust
Console(config-if)#
show ip arp inspection This command displays the global configuration settings for ARP Inspection.
configuration
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip arp inspection configuration
ARP Inspection Global Information:
Global IP ARP Inspection Status : disabled

Log Message Interval : 1 s
Log Message Number : 5
Need Additional Validation(s) : Yes
Additional Validation Type : Destination MAC address
Console#
show ip arp inspection This command shows the trust status and ARP Inspection rate limit for ports.
interface
Syntax
show ip arp inspection interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 358 –
ARP Inspection
Example
Console#show ip arp inspection interface ethernet 1/1
Port Number Trust Status Rate Limit (pps)

------------- -------------------- ------------------------------
Eth 1/1 Trusted 150
Console#
show ip arp inspection This command shows information about entries stored in the log, including the
log associated VLAN, port, and address components.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip arp inspection log
Total log entries number is 1
Num VLAN Port Src IP Address Dst IP Address Src MAC Address Dst MAC Address
--- ---- ---- -------------- -------------- --------------- --------------
1 1 11 192.168.2.2 192.168.2.1 00-04-E2-A0-E2-7C FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
Console#
show ip arp inspection This command shows statistics about the number of ARP packets processed, or
statistics dropped for various reasons.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip arp inspection statistics
ARP packets received : 150

ARP packets dropped due to rate limt : 5
Total ARP packets processed by ARP Inspection : 150
ARP packets dropped by additional validation (source MAC address) : 0
ARP packets dropped by additional validation (destination MAC address): 0
ARP packets dropped by additional validation (IP address) : 0
ARP packets dropped by ARP ACLs : 0
ARP packets dropped by DHCP snooping : 0
Console#
– 359 –
Denial of Service Protection
show ip arp inspection This command shows the configuration settings for VLANs, including ARP
vlan Inspection status, the ARP ACL name, and if the DHCP Snooping database is used
after ARP ACL validation is completed.
Syntax
show ip arp inspection vlan [vlan-id | vlan-range]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Enter this command to display the configuration settings for all VLANs, or display
the settings for a specific VLAN by entering the VLAN identifier.
Example
Console#show ip arp inspection vlan 1
VLAN ID DAI Status ACL Name ACL Status

-------- --------------- -------------------- --------------------
1 disabled sales static
Console#

A denial-of-service attack (DoS attack) is an attempt to block the services provided
by a computer or network resource. This kind of attack tries to prevent an Internet
site or service from functioning efficiently or at all. In general, DoS attacks are
implemented by either forcing the target to reset, to consume most of its resources
so that it can no longer provide its intended service, or to obstruct the
communication media between the intended users and the target so that they can
no longer communicate adequately.
This section describes commands used to protect against DoS attacks.
Table 64: DoS Protection Commands

dos-protection echo-chargen Protects against DoS echo/chargen attacks GC
dos-protection smurf Protects against DoS smurf attacks GC
dos-protection tcp-flooding Protects against DoS TCP-flooding attacks GC
dos-protection tcp-null-scan Protects against DoS TCP-null-scan attacks GC
dos-protection tcp-syn-fin-scan Protects against DoS TCP-SYN/FIN-scan attacks GC
– 360 –
Table 64: DoS Protection Commands (Continued)

dos-protection tcp-udp-port-zero Protects against attacks which set the Layer 4 source GC
or destination port to zero
dos-protection tcp-xmas-scan Protects against DoS TCP-XMAS-scan attacks GC
dos-protection udp-flooding Protects against DoS UDP-flooding attacks GC
dos-protection win-nuke Protects against DoS WinNuke attacks GC
show dos-protection Shows the configuration settings for DoS protection PE
dos-protection This command protects against DoS echo/chargen attacks in which the echo
echo-chargen service repeats anything sent to it, and the chargen (character generator) service
generates a continuous stream of data. When used together, they create an infinite
loop and result in a denial-of-service. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
dos-protection echo-chargen [bit-rate-in-kilo rate]
no dos-protection echo-chargen
rate – Maximum allowed rate. (Range: 64-2000 kbits/second)
Default Setting
Disabled, 1000 kbits/second
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection echo-chargen 65
Console(config)#
dos-protection smurf This command protects against DoS smurf attacks in which a perpetrator generates
a large amount of spoofed ICMP Echo Request traffic to the broadcast destination
IP address (255.255.255.255), all of which uses a spoofed source address of the
intended victim. The victim should crash due to the many interrupts required to
send ICMP Echo response packets. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] dos-protection smurf
Default Setting
Enabled
– 361 –
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection smurf
Console(config)#
dos-protection This command protects against DoS TCP-flooding attacks in which a perpetrator
tcp-flooding sends a succession of TCP SYN requests (with or without a spoofed-Source IP) to a
target and never returns ACK packets. These half-open connections will bind
resources on the target, and no new connections can be made, resulting in a denial
of service. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
dos-protection tcp-flooding [bit-rate-in-kilo rate]
no dos-protection tcp-flooding
Default Setting
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection tcp-flooding 65
Console(config)#
dos-protection This command protects against DoS TCP-null-scan attacks in which a TCP NULL
tcp-null-scan scan message is used to identify listening TCP ports. The scan uses a series of
strangely configured TCP packets which contain a sequence number of 0 and no
flags. If the target's TCP port is closed, the target replies with a TCP RST (reset)
packet. If the target TCP port is open, it simply discards the TCP NULL scan. Use the
no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] dos-protection tcp-null-scan
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
– 362 –
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection tcp-null-scan
Console(config)#
dos-protection This command protects against DoS TCP-SYN/FIN-scan attacks in which a TCP SYN/
tcp-syn-fin-scan FIN scan message is used to identify listening TCP ports. The scan uses a series of
strangely configured TCP packets which contain SYN (synchronize) and FIN (finish)
flags. If the target's TCP port is closed, the target replies with a TCP RST (reset)
packet. If the target TCP port is open, it simply discards the TCP SYN FIN scan. Use
the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] dos-protection syn-fin-scan
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection syn-fin-scan
Console(config)#
dos-protection This command protects against DoS attacks in which the TCP or UDP source port or
tcp-udp-port-zero destination port is set to zero. This technique may be used as a form of DoS attack,
or it may just indicate a problem with the source device. When this command is
enabled, the switch will drop these packets. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
[no] dos-protection tcp-udp-port-zero
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection tcp-udp-port-zero
Console(config)#
– 363 –
dos-protection This command protects against DoS TCP-xmas-scan in which a so-called TCP XMAS
tcp-xmas-scan scan message is used to identify listening TCP ports. This scan uses a series of
strangely configured TCP packets which contain a sequence number of 0 and the
URG, PSH and FIN flags. If the target's TCP port is closed, the target replies with a
TCP RST packet. If the target TCP port is open, it simply discards the TCP XMAS scan.
Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] dos-protection tcp-xmas-scan
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection tcp-xmas-scan
Console(config)#
dos-protection This command protects against DoS UDP-flooding attacks in which a perpetrator
udp-flooding sends a large number of UDP packets (with or without a spoofed-Source IP) to
random ports on a remote host. The target will determine that application is
listening at that port, and reply with an ICMP Destination Unreachable packet. It
will be forced to send many ICMP packets, eventually leading it to be unreachable
by other clients. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
dos-protection udp-flooding [bit-rate-in-kilo rate]
no dos-protection udp-flooding
Default Setting
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection udp-flooding 65
Console(config)#
– 364 –
dos-protection This command protects against DoS WinNuke attacks in which affected the
win-nuke Microsoft Windows 3.1x/95/NT operating systems. In this type of attack, the
perpetrator sends the string of OOB out-of-band (OOB) packets contained a TCP
URG flag to the target computer on TCP port 139 (NetBIOS), casing it to lock up and
display a “Blue Screen of Death.” This did not cause any damage to, or change data
on, the computer’s hard disk, but any unsaved data would be lost. Microsoft made
patches to prevent the WinNuke attack, but the OOB packets still put the service in
a tight loop that consumed all available CPU time. Use the no form to disable this
feature.
Syntax
dos-protection win-nuke [bit-rate-in-kilo rate]
no dos-protection udp-flooding
Default Setting
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#dos-protection win-nuke 65
Console(config)#
show dos-protection This command shows the configuration settings for the DoS protection commands.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show dos-protection
Global DoS Protection:
Echo/Chargen Attack : Disabled, 1000 kilobits per second

Smurf Attack : Enabled
TCP Flooding Attack : Disabled, 1000 kilobits per second
TCP Null Scan : Enabled
TCP SYN/FIN Scan : Enabled
TCP/UDP Packets with Port 0 : Enabled
TCP XMAS Scan : Enabled
UDP Flooding Attack : Disabled, 1000 kilobits per second
WinNuke Attack : Disabled, 1000 kilobits per second
Console#
– 365 –
Port-based Traffic Segmentation

If tighter security is required for passing traffic from different clients through
downlink ports on the local network and over uplink ports to the service provider,
port-based traffic segmentation can be used to isolate traffic for individual clients.
Traffic belonging to each client is isolated to the allocated downlink ports. But the
switch can be configured to either isolate traffic passing across a client’s allocated
uplink ports from the uplink ports assigned to other clients, or to forward traffic
through the uplink ports used by other clients, allowing different clients to share
access to their uplink ports where security is less likely to be compromised.
Table 65: Commands for Configuring Traffic Segmentation

traffic-segmentation Enables traffic segmentation GC
traffic-segmentation session Creates a client session GC
traffic-segmentation uplink/ Configures uplink/downlink ports for client sessions GC

downlink
traffic-segmentation Specifies whether or not traffic can be forwarded GC

uplink-to-uplink between uplink ports assigned to different client
sessions
show traffic-segmentation Displays the configured traffic segments PE
traffic-segmentation This command enables traffic segmentation. Use the no form to disable traffic
segmentation.
Syntax
[no] traffic-segmentation
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Traffic segmentation provides port-based security and isolation between ports
within the VLAN. Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to,
and from, the designated uplink port(s). Data cannot pass between downlink
ports in the same segmented group, nor to ports which do not belong to the
same group.
◆ Traffic segmentation and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the
same switch. Traffic may pass freely between uplink ports in segmented groups
and ports in normal VLANs.
– 366 –
◆ When traffic segmentation is enabled, the forwarding state for the uplink and
downlink ports assigned to different client sessions is shown below.
Table 66: Traffic Segmentation Forwarding
Destination Session #1 Session #1 Session #2 Session #2 Normal
Source Downlinks Uplinks Downlinks Uplinks Ports
Session #1 Blocking Forwarding Blocking Blocking Blocking

Downlink Ports
Session #1 Forwarding Forwarding Blocking Blocking/ Forwarding

Uplink Ports Forwarding*
Session #2 Blocking Blocking Blocking Forwarding Blocking

Downlink Ports
Session #2 Blocking Blocking/ Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding

Uplink Ports Forwarding*
Normal Ports Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding
* The forwarding state for uplink-to-uplink ports is configured by the traffic-

segmentation uplink-to-uplink command.
◆ When traffic segmentation is disabled, all ports operate in normal forwarding

mode based on the settings specified by other functions such as VLANs and
spanning tree protocol.
◆ Enter the traffic-segmentation command without any parameters to enable

traffic segmentation. Then set the interface members for segmented groups
using the traffic-segmentation uplink/downlink command.
◆ Enter no traffic-segmentation to disable traffic segmentation and clear the

configuration settings for segmented groups.
Example
This example enables traffic segmentation globally on the switch.
Console(config)#traffic-segmentation
Console(config)#
traffic-segmentation This command creates a traffic-segmentation client session. Use the no form to
session remove a client session.
Syntax
[no] pvlan session session-id
session-id – Traffic segmentation session. (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
– 367 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to create a new traffic-segmentation client session.
◆ Using the no form of this command will remove any assigned uplink or
downlink ports, restoring these interfaces to normal operating mode.
Example
Console(config)#traffic-segmentation session 1
Console(config)#
traffic-segmentation This command configures the uplink and down-link ports for a segmented group of
uplink/downlink ports. Use the no form to remove a port from the segmented group.
Syntax
[no] traffic-segmentation [session session-id] {uplink interface-list
[downlink interface-list] | downlink interface-list}
session-id – Traffic segmentation session. (Range: 1-4)
uplink – Specifies an uplink interface.
downlink – Specifies a downlink interface.
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
Session 1 if not defined
No segmented port groups are defined.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A port cannot be configured in both an uplink and downlink list.
◆ A port can only be assigned to one traffic-segmentation session.
◆ When specifying an uplink or downlink, a list of ports may be entered by using

a hyphen or comma in the port field. Note that lists are not supported for the
channel-id field.
– 368 –
◆ A downlink port can only communicate with an uplink port in the same session.
Therefore, if an uplink port is not configured for a session, the assigned
downlink ports will not be able to communicate with any other ports.
◆ If a downlink port is not configured for the session, the assigned uplink ports
will operate as normal ports.
Example
This example enables traffic segmentation, and then sets port 10 as the uplink and
ports 5-8 as downlinks.
Console(config)#traffic-segmentation
Console(config)#traffic-segmentation uplink ethernet 1/10
downlink ethernet 1/5-8
Console(config)#
traffic-segmentation This command specifies whether or not traffic can be forwarded between uplink
uplink-to-uplink ports assigned to different client sessions. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] traffic-segmentation uplink-to-uplink {blocking | forwarding}
blocking – Blocks traffic between uplink ports assigned to different
sessions.
forwarding – Forwards traffic between uplink ports assigned to different
sessions.
Default Setting
Blocking
Command Mode
Example
This example enables forwarding of traffic between uplink ports assigned to
different client sessions.
Console(config)#traffic-segmentation uplink-to-uplink forwarding

Console(config)#
– 369 –
show This command displays the configured traffic segments.

traffic-segmentation
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show traffic-segmentation
Private VLAN Status : Enabled

Uplink-to-Uplink Mode : Forwarding
Session Uplink Ports Downlink Ports

--------- ------------------------------ -----------------------------
1 Ethernet 1/1 Ethernet 1/2
Ethernet 1/3
Ethernet 1/4
Console#
– 370 –
10 Access Control Lists
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IPv4 frames (based on
address, protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code), IPv6 frames
(based on address, DSCP traffic class, or next header type), or any frames (based on
MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter packets, first create an access list, add the
required rules, and then bind the list to a specific port. This section describes the
Access Control List commands.
Table 67: Access Control List Commands

IPv4 ACLs Configures ACLs based on IPv4 addresses, TCP/UDP port number,
protocol type, and TCP control code
IPv6 ACLs Configures ACLs based on IPv6 addresses, DSCP traffic class, or next
header type
MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and
Ethernet type
ARP ACLs Configures ACLs based on ARP messages addresses
ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules; shows ACLs assigned to each port
IPv4 ACLs
The commands in this section configure ACLs based on IPv4 addresses, TCP/UDP
port number, protocol type, and TCP control code. To configure IPv4 ACLs, first
create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules, and then bind the
access list to one or more ports.
Table 68: IPv4 ACL Commands

access-list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode for GC

standard or extended IPv4 ACLs
ip access-group Binds an IPv4 ACL to all ports for ingress traffic GC
permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source IPv4 address IPv4-STD-ACL
permit, deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, including IPv4-EXT-ACL
source and destination IPv4 address, TCP/UDP port
number, protocol type, and TCP control code
ip access-group Binds an IPv4 ACL to a port IC
show ip access-group Shows port assignments for IPv4 ACLs PE
show ip access-list Displays the rules for configured IPv4 ACLs PE
– 371 –
Chapter 10 | Access Control Lists
IPv4 ACLs
access-list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or
extended IPv4 ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list ip {standard | extended} acl-name
standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP
address.
extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or
destination IP address, and other more specific criteria.
acl-name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.
◆ To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the

exact text of a previously configured rule.
◆ An ACL can contain up to 64 rules.
Example
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david
Console(config-std-acl)#
Related Commands
permit, deny (374)
ip access-group (Interface Configuration) (377)
show ip access-list (378)
– 372 –
IPv4 ACLs
ip access-group This command binds an IPv4 ACL to all ports for ingress traffic. Use the no form to
(Global Configuration) remove the port.
Syntax
ip access-group acl-name in
[time-range time-range-name] [counter]
no ip access-group acl-name in
in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.
time-range-name - Name of the time range. (Range: 1-16 characters)
counter – Enables counter for ACL statistics.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
If an ACL is already bound to a port and you bind a different ACL to it, the switch
will replace the old binding with the new one.
Example
Console(config)#ip access-group david in
Console(config)#
Related Commands
Time Range (172)
– 373 –
IPv4 ACLs
permit, deny This command adds a rule to a Standard IPv4 ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for
(Standard IP ACL) packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
{permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source}
[time-range time-range-name]
no {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source}
any – Any source IP address.
source – Source IP address.
bitmask – Dotted decimal number representing the address bits to match.
host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Standard IPv4 ACL
Command Usage
◆ New rules are appended to the end of the list.
◆ Address bit masks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from 0
to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.
Example
This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21 and
another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21

Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
Console(config-std-acl)#
Related Commands
access-list ip (372)
Time Range (172)
– 374 –
IPv4 ACLs
permit, deny This command adds a rule to an Extended IPv4 ACL. The rule sets a filter condition
(Extended IPv4 ACL) for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, protocol types, source
or destination protocol ports, or TCP control codes. Use the no form to remove a
rule.
Syntax
{permit | deny} [protocol-number | udp]
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}
[precedence precedence] [dscp dscp]
[source-port sport [bitmask]]
[destination-port dport [port-bitmask]]
no {permit | deny} [protocol-number | udp]
{permit | deny} tcp
[control-flag control-flags flag-bitmask]
no {permit | deny} tcp
[control-flag control-flags flag-bitmask]
protocol-number – A specific protocol number. (Range: 0-255)
source – Source IP address.
destination – Destination IP address.
address-bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.
precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)
dscp – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)
sport – Protocol4 source port number. (Range: 0-65535)
dport – Protocol4 destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)
4. Includes TCP, UDP or other protocol types.
– 375 –
IPv4 ACLs
port-bitmask – Decimal number representing the port bits to match.

(Range: 0-65535)
control-flags – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag
bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)
flag-bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Extended IPv4 ACL
Command Usage
◆ All new rules are appended to the end of the list.
◆ Address bit masks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from 0
to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bit mask is bitwise ANDed with the
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.
◆ You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule. However, if DSCP is
used, then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified.
◆ The control-code bitmask is a decimal number (representing an equivalent bit

mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the
equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit.
The following bits may be specified:
■ 1 (fin) – Finish
■ 2 (syn) – Synchronize
■ 4 (rst) – Reset
■ 8 (psh) – Push
■ 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement
■ 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the
following flags set:
■ SYN flag valid, use “control-code 2 2”
■ Both SYN and ACK valid, use “control-code 18 18”
■ SYN valid and ACK invalid, use “control-code 2 18”
– 376 –
IPv4 ACLs
Example
This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet
10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0)
equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any

Console(config-ext-acl)#
This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port

80
This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the TCP control
code set to “SYN.”
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any control-

flag 2 2
Related Commands
access-list ip (372)
Time Range (172)
ip access-group This command binds an IPv4 ACL to a port. Use the no form to remove the port.
(Interface Configuration)
Syntax
ip access-group acl-name {in | out}
no ip access-group acl-name {in | out}
out – Indicates that this list applies to egress packets.
Default Setting
None
– 377 –
IPv4 ACLs
Command Mode
Command Usage
Example
Console(config)#int eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
Time Range (172)
show ip access-group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip access-group
Interface ethernet 1/2
IP access-list david in
Global
IP access-list david in
Console#
Related Commands
show ip access-list This command displays the rules for configured IPv4 ACLs.
Syntax
show ip access-list {standard | extended} [acl-name]
standard – Specifies a standard IP ACL.
extended – Specifies an extended IP ACL.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 378 –
IPv6 ACLs
Example
Console#show ip access-list standard
IP standard access-list david:
permit host 10.1.1.21
permit 168.92.0.0 255.255.15.0
Console#
Related Commands
permit, deny (374)
IPv6 ACLs
The commands in this section configure ACLs based on IPv6 addresses, DSCP traffic
class, or next header type. To configure IPv6 ACLs, first create an access list
containing the required permit or deny rules, and then bind the access list to one or
more ports.
Table 69: IPv6 ACL Commands

access-list ipv6 Creates an IPv6 ACL and enters configuration mode for GC
standard or extended IPv6 ACLs
ipv6 access-group Binds an IPv6 ACL to all ports for ingress traffic GC
permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source IPv6 address IPv6- STD-ACL
permit, deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, including IPv6- EXT-ACL
source or destination IPv6 address, DSCP traffic class, or
next header type
ipv6 access-group Binds an IPv6 ACL to a port IC
show ipv6 access-group Shows port assignments for IPv6 ACLs PE
show ipv6 access-list Displays the rules for configured IPv6 ACLs PE
access-list ipv6 This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or
extended IPv6 ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list ipv6 {standard | extended} acl-name
standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP
address.
extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the destination IP
address, and other more specific criteria.
– 379 –
IPv6 ACLs
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list. To
create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.

Example
Console(config)#access-list ipv6 standard david
Console(config-std-ipv6-acl)#
Related Commands
permit, deny (Standard Pv6 ACL) (381)
permit, deny (Extended IPv6 ACL) (382)
ipv6 access-group (Interface Configuration) (384)
show ipv6 access-list (385)
ipv6 access-group This command binds an IPv6 ACL to all ports for ingress traffic. Use the no form to
(Global Configuration) remove the port.
Syntax
ipv6 access-group acl-name in
no ipv6 access-group acl-name in
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
– 380 –
IPv6 ACLs
Command Usage
If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the switch
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 access-group standard david in
Console(config)#
Related Commands
Time Range (172)
permit, deny This command adds a rule to a Standard IPv6 ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for
(Standard Pv6 ACL) packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
{permit | deny} {any | host source-ipv6-address |
source-ipv6-address[/prefix-length]}
no {permit | deny} {any | host source-ipv6-address |
any – Any source IP address.
source-ipv6-address - An IPv6 source address or network class. The address
must be formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing Architecture,”
using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One double colon may
be used in the address to indicate the appropriate number of zeros
required to fill the undefined fields.
prefix-length - A decimal value indicating how many contiguous bits (from
the left) of the address comprise the prefix; i.e., the network portion of the
address. (Range: 0-128)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Standard IPv6 ACL
Command Usage
New rules are appended to the end of the list.
– 381 –
IPv6 ACLs
Example
This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 2009:DB9:2229::79
and another rule for the addresses with the network prefix 2009:DB9:2229:5::/64.
Console(config-std-ipv6-acl)#permit host 2009:DB9:2229::79

Console(config-std-ipv6-acl)#permit 2009:DB9:2229:5::/64
Console(config-std-ipv6-acl)#
Related Commands
access-list ipv6 (379)
Time Range (172)
permit, deny This command adds a rule to an Extended IPv6 ACL. The rule sets a filter condition
(Extended IPv6 ACL) for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, or next header type.
Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
{permit | deny} {any | host source-ipv6-address |
{any | destination-ipv6-address[/prefix-length]}
[dscp dscp] [next-header next-header]
no {permit | deny} {any | host source-ipv6-address |
{any | destination-ipv6-address[/prefix-length]}
[dscp dscp] [next-header next-header]
any – Any IP address (an abbreviation for the IPv6 prefix ::/0).
host – Keyword followed by a specific source IP address.
source-ipv6-address - An IPv6 source address or network class. The address
must be formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing Architecture,”
using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One double colon may
be used in the address to indicate the appropriate number of zeros
destination-ipv6-address - An IPv6 destination address or network class. The
address must be formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing
Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One
double colon may be used in the address to indicate the appropriate
number of zeros required to fill the undefined fields.
the left) of the address comprise the prefix; i.e., the network portion of the
address. (Range: 0-128 for source prefix, 0-8 for destination prefix)
dscp – DSCP traffic class. (Range: 0-63)
next-header – Identifies the type of header immediately following the IPv6
header. (Range: 0-255)
– 382 –
IPv6 ACLs
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Extended IPv6 ACL
Command Usage
◆ All new rules are appended to the end of the list.
◆ Optional internet-layer information is encoded in separate headers that may be

placed between the IPv6 header and the upper-layer header in a packet. There
are a small number of such extension headers, each identified by a distinct Next
Header value. IPv6 supports the values defined for the IPv4 Protocol field in RFC
1700, including these commonly used headers:
0 : Hop-by-Hop Options (RFC 2460)
6 : TCP Upper-layer Header (RFC 1700)
17 : UDP Upper-layer Header (RFC 1700)
43 : Routing (RFC 2460)
44 : Fragment (RFC 2460)
51 : Authentication (RFC 2402)
50 : Encapsulating Security Payload (RFC 2406)
60 : Destination Options (RFC 2460)
Example
This example accepts any incoming packets if the destination address is
2009:DB9:2229::79/8.
Console(config-ext-ipv6-acl)#permit 2009:DB9:2229::79/8
Console(config-ext-ipv6-acl)#
This allows packets to any destination address when the DSCP value is 5.
Console(config-ext-ipv6-acl)#permit any dscp 5

This allows any packets sent to the destination 2009:DB9:2229::79/48 when the
next header is 43.”
Console(config-ext-ipv6-acl)#permit 2009:DB9:2229::79/48 next-header 43

Related Commands
access-list ipv6 (379)
Time Range (172)
– 383 –
IPv6 ACLs
ipv6 access-group This command binds an IPv6 ACL to a port. Use the no form to remove the port.
Syntax
ipv6 access-group acl-name {in | out}
no ipv6 access-group acl-name {in | out}
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the switch
Example
Console(config-if)#ipv6 access-group standard david in
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
Time Range (172)
show ipv6 This command shows the ports assigned to IPv6 ACLs.
access-group
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 access-group
IPv6 standard access-list david in
Global
IPv6 standard access-list david in
Console#
– 384 –
MAC ACLs
Related Commands
show ipv6 access-list This command displays the rules for configured IPv6 ACLs.
Syntax
show ipv6 access-list {standard | extended} [acl-name]
standard – Specifies a standard IPv6 ACL.
extended – Specifies an extended IPv6 ACL.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 access-list standard
IPv6 standard access-list david:
permit host 2009:DB9:2229::79
permit 2009:DB9:2229:5::/64
Console#
Related Commands
permit, deny (Standard Pv6 ACL) (381)
permit, deny (Extended IPv6 ACL) (382)
MAC ACLs
The commands in this section configure ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet
format, and Ethernet type. The ACLs can further specify optional IP and IPv6
addresses including protocol type and upper layer ports. To configure MAC ACLs,
first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules, and then
bind the access list to one or more ports.
Table 70: MAC ACL Commands

access-list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode GC
mac access-group Binds a MAC ACL to all ports for ingress traffic GC
permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source and destination MAC-ACL
address, packet format, and Ethernet type. They can be
further specified using optional IP and IPv6 addresses
including protocol type and upper layer ports.
mac access-group Binds a MAC ACL to a port IC
– 385 –
MAC ACLs
Table 70: MAC ACL Commands (Continued)

show mac access-group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE
show mac access-list Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE
access-list mac This command enters MAC ACL configuration mode. Rules can be added to filter
packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer
address), or Ethernet protocol type. Rules can also be used to filter packets based
on IPv4/v6 addresses, including Layer 4 ports and protocol types. Use the no form
to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list mac acl-name
acl-name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 32 characters,)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.

Example
Console(config)#access-list mac jerry
Console(config-mac-acl)#
Related Commands
permit, deny (387)
mac access-group (Interface Configuration) (391)
show mac access-list (392)
– 386 –
MAC ACLs
mac access-group This command binds a MAC ACL to all ports for ingress traffic. Use the no form to
(Global Configuration) remove this binding.
Syntax
mac access-group acl-name in
no mac access-group acl-name in
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Example
Console(config)#mac access-group jerry in
Console(config)#
Related Commands
Time Range (172)
permit, deny (MAC ACL) This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets matching a
specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer address), or
Ethernet protocol type. Rules can also filter packets based on IPv4/v6 addresses,
including Layer 4 ports and protocol types. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
{permit | deny}
{any | host source | source address-bitmask}
{any | host destination | destination address-bitmask}
[vid vid vid-bitmask] [ethertype ethertype [ethertype-bitmask]]
{{ip {any | host source-ip | source-ip network-mask}
{any | host destination-ip | destination-ip network-mask}
– 387 –
MAC ACLs
{ipv6 {any | host source-ipv6 | source-ipv6/prefix-length}

{any | host destination-ipv6 | destination-ipv6/prefix-length}}
[protocol protocol]
[l4-source-port sport [port-bitmask]]
[l4-destination-port dport [port-bitmask]}]
no {permit | deny}
[protocol protocol]
Note: The default is for Ethernet II packets.
{permit | deny} tagged-eth2

[protocol protocol]
no {permit | deny} tagged-eth2
[protocol protocol]
– 388 –
MAC ACLs
{permit | deny} untagged-eth2

[ethertype ethertype [ethertype-bitmask]]
[protocol protocol]
[l4-destination-port dport [port-bitmask]}
no {permit | deny} untagged-eth2
[ethertype ethertype [ethertype-bitmask]]
[protocol protocol]
{permit | deny} tagged-802.3
[vid vid vid-bitmask] [time-range time-range-name]
no {permit | deny} tagged-802.3
[vid vid vid-bitmask]
{permit | deny} untagged-802.3
no {permit | deny} untagged-802.3
tagged-eth2 – Tagged Ethernet II packets.
untagged-eth2 – Untagged Ethernet II packets.
tagged-802.3 – Tagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.
untagged-802.3 – Untagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.
any – Any MAC, IPv4 or IPv6 source or destination address.
host – A specific MAC, IPv4 or IPv6 address.
source – Source MAC, IPv4 or IPv6 address.
– 389 –
MAC ACLs
destination – Destination MAC, IPv4 or IPv6 address.

address-bitmask5 – Bitmask for MAC address (in hexadecimal format).
network-mask – Network mask for IP subnet. This mask identifies the host
address bits used for routing to specific subnets.
prefix-length - Length of IPv6 prefix. A decimal value indicating how many
contiguous bits (from the left) of the address comprise the prefix; i.e., the
network portion of the address. (Range: 0-128)
vid – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
vid-bitmask5 – VLAN bitmask. (Range: 1-4095)
ethertype – A specific Ethernet protocol number. (Range: 0-ffff hex)
ethertype-bitmask5 – Protocol bitmask. (Range: 0-ffff hex)
protocol - IP protocol or IPv6 next header. (Range: 0-255)
For information on next headers, see permit, deny (Extended IPv6 ACL).
sport6 – Protocol source port number. (Range: 0-65535)
dport6 – Protocol destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)
port-bitmask – Decimal number representing the port bits to match.
(Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
MAC ACL
Command Usage
◆ New rules are added to the end of the list.
◆ The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets.
◆ A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few of
the more common types include the following:
■ 0800 - IP
■ 0806 - ARP
■ 8137 - IPX
5. For all bitmasks, “1” means relevant and “0” means ignore.
6. Includes TCP, UDP or other protocol types.
– 390 –
MAC ACLs
Example
This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address
00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800

Related Commands
access-list mac (386)
Time Range (172)
mac access-group This command binds a MAC ACL to a port. Use the no form to remove the port.
Syntax
mac access-group acl-name {in | out}
no mac access-group acl-name {in | out}
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Example
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
Time Range (172)
– 391 –
MAC ACLs
show mac This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.
access-group
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show mac access-group
MAC access-list M5 in
Global
MAC access-list M5 in
Console#
Related Commands
show mac access-list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs.
Syntax
show mac access-list [acl-name]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show mac access-list
MAC access-list jerry:
permit any 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800
Console#
Related Commands
permit, deny (387)
– 392 –
ARP ACLs
ARP ACLs
The commands in this section configure ACLs based on the IP or MAC address
contained in ARP request and reply messages. To configure ARP ACLs, first create an
access list containing the required permit or deny rules, and then bind the access
list to one or more VLANs using the ip arp inspection vlan command.
Table 71: ARP ACL Commands

access-list arp Creates a ARP ACL and enters configuration mode GC
permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source or destination ARP-ACL

address in ARP messages
show access-list arp Displays the rules for configured ARP ACLs PE
access-list arp This command adds an ARP access list and enters ARP ACL configuration mode. Use
the no form to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list arp acl-name
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list. To
create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.

Example
Console(config)#access-list arp factory
Console(config-arp-acl)#
Related Commands
permit, deny (394)
show access-list arp (395)
– 393 –
ARP ACLs
permit, deny (ARP ACL) This command adds a rule to an ARP ACL. The rule filters packets matching a
specified source or destination address in ARP messages. Use the no form to
remove a rule.
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny}
ip {any | host source-ip | source-ip ip-address-bitmask}
mac {any | host source-mac | source-mac mac-address-bitmask} [log]
This form indicates either request or response packets.
[no] {permit | deny} request

mac {any | host source-mac | source-mac mac-address-bitmask} [log]
[no] {permit | deny} response
{any | host destination-ip | destination-ip ip-address-bitmask}
mac {any | host source-mac | source-mac mac-address-bitmask}
[any | host destination-mac | destination-mac mac-address-bitmask] [log]
source-ip – Source IP address.
destination-ip – Destination IP address with bitmask.
ip-address-bitmask7 – IPv4 number representing the address bits to match.
source-mac – Source MAC address.
destination-mac – Destination MAC address range with bitmask.
mac-address-bitmask7 – Bitmask for MAC address (in hexadecimal format).
log - Logs a packet when it matches the access control entry.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
ARP ACL
Command Usage
New rules are added to the end of the list.
Example
This rule permits packets from any source IP and MAC address to the destination
subnet address 192.168.0.0.
Console(config-arp-acl)#$permit response ip any 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0 mac

any any
7. For all bitmasks, binary “1” means relevant and “0” means ignore.
– 394 –
ACL Information
Related Commands
access-list arp (393)
show access-list arp This command displays the rules for configured ARP ACLs.
Syntax
show access-list arp [acl-name]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show access-list arp
ARP access-list factory:
permit response ip any 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0 mac any any
Console#
Related Commands
permit, deny (394)
ACL Information
This section describes commands used to display ACL information.
Table 72: ACL Information Commands

clear access-list Clears hit counter for rules in all ACLs, or in a specified ACL. PE
hardware counters
show access-group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE
show access-list Show all ACLs and associated rules PE
clear access-list This command clears the hit counter for the rules in all ACLs, or for the rules in a
hardware counters specified ACL.
Syntax
clear access-list hardware counters
[direction {in | out} [interface interface]] |
[interface interface] | [name acl-name]
in – Clears counter for ingress rules.
out – Clears counter for egress rules.
– 395 –
ACL Information
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear access-list hardware counters
Console#
show access-group This command shows the port assignments of ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Executive
Example
Console#show access-group
IP access-list david
MAC access-list jerry
Console#
show access-list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules.
Syntax
show access-list
[[arp [acl-name]] |
[ip [extended [acl-name] | standard [acl-name]] |
[ipv6 [extended [acl-name] | standard [acl-name]] |
[mac [acl-name]] | [tcam-utilization] | [hardware counters]]
arp – Shows ingress or egress rules for ARP ACLs.
hardware counters – Shows statistics for all ACLs.8
ip extended – Shows ingress or egress rules for Extended IPv4 ACLs.
ip standard – Shows ingress or egress rules for Standard IPv4 ACLs.
ipv6 extended – Shows ingress or egress rules for Extended IPv6 ACLs.
ipv6 standard – Shows ingress or egress rules for Standard IPv6 ACLs.
8. Due to a hardware limitation, this option only displays statistics for permit rules.
– 396 –
ACL Information
mac – Shows ingress or egress rules for MAC ACLs.

tcam-utilization – Shows the percentage of user configured ACL rules as a
percentage of total ACL rules
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show access-list
IP standard access-list david:
permit host 10.1.1.21
permit 168.92.0.0 255.255.15.0
IP extended access-list bob:
permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any protocol tcp control-code 2 2
MAC access-list jerry:
permit any host 00-30-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800
IP extended access-list A6:
deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2
permit any any
Console#
– 397 –
ACL Information
– 398 –
11 Interface Commands
These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an

Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN; or perform cable diagnostics on the
specified interface.
Table 73: Interface Commands

interface Configures an interface type and enters interface GC

configuration mode
alias Configures an alias name for the interface IC
capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in IC

autonegotiation
description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC
discard Discards CDP or PVST packets IC
flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface IC
history Configures a periodic sampling of statistics, specifying the IC

sampling interval and number of samples
media-type Forces transceiver mode to use for SFP/SFP+ ports, or the IC

port type to use for combination RJ-45/SFP ports
negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC
shutdown Disables an interface IC
speed-duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given IC

interface when autonegotiation is disabled
clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE
show discard Displays if CDP and PVST packets are being discarded PE
show interfaces brief Displays a summary of key information, including PE

operational status, native VLAN ID, default priority, speed/
duplex mode, and port type
show interfaces counters Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE, PE
show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE, PE
show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an NE, PE
interface
– 399 –
Chapter 11 | Interface Commands
Table 73: Interface Commands (Continued)

Transceiver Threshold Configuration
transceiver-monitor Sends a trap when any of the transceiver’s operational IC

values fall outside specified thresholds
transceiver-threshold-auto Uses default threshold settings obtained from the IC

transceiver to determine when an alarm or trap message
should be sent
transceiver-threshold Sets thresholds for transceiver current which can be used IC

current to trigger an alarm or warning message
transceiver-threshold Sets thresholds for the transceiver power level of the IC

rx-power received signal which can be used to trigger an alarm or
warning message
transceiver-threshold Sets thresholds for the transceiver temperature which can IC

temperature be used to trigger an alarm or warning message
transceiver-threshold Sets thresholds for the transceiver power level of the IC

tx-power transmitted signal which can be used to trigger an alarm or
warning message
transceiver-threshold Sets thresholds for the transceiver voltage which can be IC

voltage used to trigger an alarm or warning message
show interfaces transceiver Displays the temperature, voltage, bias current, transmit PE
power, and receive power
show interfaces transceiver- Displays the alarm/warning thresholds for temperature, PE

threshold voltage, bias current, transmit power, and receive power
Cable Diagnostics
test cable-diagnostics Performs cable diagnostics on the specified port PE
show cable-diagnostics Shows the results of a cable diagnostics test PE
Power Savings
power-save Enables power savings mode on the specified port IC
show power-save Shows the configuration settings for power savings PE
interface This command configures an interface type and enters interface configuration
mode. Use the no form with a trunk to remove an inactive interface. Use the no
form with a Layer 3 VLAN (normal type) to change it back to a Layer 2 interface.
Syntax
[no] interface interface
interface
ethernet unit/port-list
– 400 –

nonconsecutive port numbers with a comma and no spaces; or use
a hyphen to designate a range of port numbers. (Range: 1-28/52)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
To specify several different ports, enter the following command:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/17-20,23

Console(config-if)#
alias This command configures an alias name for the interface. Use the no form to
remove the alias name.
Syntax
alias string
no alias
string - A mnemonic name to help you remember what is attached to this
interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The alias is displayed in the running-configuration file. An example of the value
which a network manager might store in this object for a WAN interface is the
(Telco's) circuit number/identifier of the interface.
Example
The following example adds an alias to port 4.

Console(config-if)#alias finance
Console(config-if)#
– 401 –
capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during auto-
negotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability,
or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.
Syntax
[no] capabilities {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half | flowcontrol}
1000full - Supports 1 Gbps full-duplex operation
100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
flowcontrol - Supports flow control
Default Setting
100BASE-FX: 100full (SFP9)
1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX (SFP9/ SFP+): 1000full
10GBASE-SR/LR/ER (SFP+): 10Gfull
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ 10GBASE-SFP+ connections are fixed at 10G, full duplex. When auto-
negotiation is enabled, the only attribute which can be advertised is flow
control.
◆ The 1000BASE-T standard does not support forced mode. Auto-negotiation

should always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE-T port or
trunk.
◆ When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the switch

will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command.
When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link
attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.
Example
The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to include 100half
and 100full.

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol
Console(config-if)#
9. ECS4510-28F/28F-DC
– 402 –
Related Commands
negotiation (407)
speed-duplex (408)
flowcontrol (404)
description This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to remove the
description.
Syntax
description string
no description
string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached
to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The description is displayed by the show interfaces status command and in the
running-configuration file. An example of the value which a network manager
might store in this object is the name of the manufacturer, and the product name.
Example
The following example adds a description to port 4.

Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3
Console(config-if)#
discard This command discards CDP or PVST packets. Use the no form to forward the
specified packet type to other ports configured the same way.
Syntax
[no] discard {cdp | pvst}
cdp – Cisco Discovery Protocol
pvst – Per-VLAN Spanning Tree
Default Setting
Default - Forward CDP and PVST packets
– 403 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
Use the no discard command to allow CDP or PVST packets to be forwarded to
other ports in the same VLAN which are also configured to forward the specified
packet type.
Example
The following example forwards CDP packets entering port 5.

Console(config-if)#no discard cdp
Console(config-if)#
flowcontrol This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control.
Syntax
[no] flowcontrol
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ 1000BASE-T does not support forced mode. Auto-negotiation should always be
used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE-T port or trunk.
◆ Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or
segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,
back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3-2002 (formally
IEEE 802.3x) for full-duplex operation.
◆ To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol

command), use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on
the selected interface.
◆ When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the optimal

settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To enable flow
control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must be included in the
capabilities list for any port
– 404 –
Example
The following example enables flow control on port 5.

Console(config-if)#flowcontrol
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
negotiation (407)
capabilities (402)
history This command configures a periodic sampling of statistics, specifying the sampling
interval and number of samples. Use the no form to remove a named entry from
the sampling table.
Syntax
history name interval buckets
no history name
name - A symbolic name for this entry in the sampling table.
interval - The interval for sampling statistics. (Range: 1-1440
minutes.
buckets - The number of samples to take. (Range: 1-96)
Default Setting
15min - 15 minute interval, 96 buckets
1day - 1 day interval, 7 buckets
Command Mode
Example
This example sets a interval of 15 minutes for sampling standard statisical values on
port 1.

Console(config-if)#history 15min 15 10
Console(config-if)#
– 405 –
media-type This command forces the transceiver mode to use for SFP/SFP+ ports, or
the port type to use for combination RJ-45/SFP ports. Use the no form to
restore the default mode.
Syntax
media-type {copper-forced | sfp-forced [mode] | sfp-preferred-auto}
no media-type
none - Mode is not forced.
copper-forced10 - Always uses the built-in RJ-45 port.
sfp-forced - Forces transceiver mode for the SFP/SFP+ port.
sfp-preferred-auto10 - Uses SFP port if both combination types are
functioning and the SFP port has a valid link.
mode
1000sfp - Always uses 1000BASE SFP mode.
100fx10 - Always uses 100BASE-FX mode.
Default Setting
SFP/SFP+ ports: None
Combination ports10: sfp-preferred-auto
Command Mode
Command Usage
Available sfp-forced modes include:
ECS4510-52T/P: Ports 49-52 (10G SFP+) support 1000sfp
ECS4510-28T/P: Ports 25-28 (10G SFP+) support 1000sfp
ECS4510-28F/28F-DC: Ports 25-28 (10G SFP+) support 1000sfp
Ports 1-24 (1000BASE SFP) support 1000sfp or 100fx
Example
This forces the switch to use the 1000sfp mode for SFP port 28.

Console(config-if)#media-type sfp-forced 1000sfp
Console(config-if)#
10. ECS4510-28F/28F-DC
– 406 –
negotiation This command enables auto-negotiation for a given interface. Use the no form to
disable auto-negotiation.
Syntax
[no] negotiation
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ 1000BASE-T does not support forced mode. Auto-negotiation should always be
used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE-T port or trunk.
◆ When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings
for a link based on the capabilities command. When auto-negotiation is
disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex
and flowcontrol commands.
◆ If auto-negotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal configuration will

also be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.
Note: Auto-negotiation is not supported for 1000BASE SFP transceivers used in

10G SFP+ Ports 25-28/49-52.
Example
The following example configures port 10 to use auto-negotiation.

Console(config-if)#negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
capabilities (402)
speed-duplex (408)
shutdown This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no
form.
Syntax
[no] shutdown
– 407 –
Default Setting
All interfaces are enabled.
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior
(e.g., excessive collisions), and then re-enable it after the problem has been
resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.
Example
The following example disables port 5.

Console(config-if)#shutdown
Console(config-if)#
speed-duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when
auto-negotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
speed-duplex {100full | 100half | 10full | 10half }
no speed-duplex
100full - Forces 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
10full - Forces 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
Default Setting
◆ Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.
◆ When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting is 100full

for 1000BASE-T ports
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The 1000BASE-T standard does not support forced mode. Auto-negotiation
should always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE-T port or
trunk. If not used, the success of the link process cannot be guaranteed when
connecting to other types of switches.
– 408 –
◆ To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed-duplex

command, use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on
the selected interface.
◆ When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the optimal

settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To set the speed/
duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required mode must be specified in
the capabilities list for an interface.
Example
The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.

Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
negotiation (407)
capabilities (402)
clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface.
Syntax
clear counters interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the base value for
displayed statistics to zero for the current management session. However, if you log
out and back into the management interface, the statistics displayed will show the
absolute value accumulated since the last power reset.
– 409 –
Example
The following example clears statistics on port 5.
Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5

Console#
show discard This command displays whether or not CDP and PVST packets are being discarded.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
In this example, “Default” means that the packets are not discarded.
Console#show discard
Port CDP PVST
-------- ------- -------
Eth 1/ 1 Default Default
Eth
. 1/ 6 Default Default
.
.
show interfaces brief This command displays a summary of key information, including operational
status, native VLAN ID, default priority, speed/duplex mode, and port type for all
ports.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show interfaces brief
Interface Name Status PVID Pri Speed/Duplex Type Trunk
--------- ----------------- --------- ---- --- ------------- ------------ -----
Eth 1/ 6
. Down 1 0 Auto 1000BASE-T None
.
.
– 410 –
show interfaces This command displays interface statistics.

counters
Syntax
show interfaces counters [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
Shows the counters for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.
Example
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/1
Ethernet 1/ 1
===== IF table Stats =====
2166458 Octets Input
14734059 Octets Output
14707 Unicast Input
19806 Unicast Output
0 Discard Input
0 Discard Output
0 Error Input
0 Error Output
0 Unknown Protocols Input
0 QLen Output
===== Extended Iftable Stats =====
23 Multi-cast Input
5525 Multi-cast Output
170 Broadcast Input
11 Broadcast Output
===== Ether-like Stats =====
0 Alignment Errors
0 FCS Errors
0 Single Collision Frames
0 Multiple Collision Frames
0 SQE Test Errors
0 Deferred Transmissions
0 Late Collisions
0 Excessive Collisions
0 Internal Mac Transmit Errors
0 Internal Mac Receive Errors
0 Frames Too Long
0 Carrier Sense Errors
0 Symbol Errors
– 411 –
0 Pause Frames Input

0 Pause Frames Output
===== RMON Stats =====
0 Drop Events
16900558 Octets
40243 Packets
170 Broadcast PKTS
23 Multi-cast PKTS
0 Undersize PKTS
0 Oversize PKTS
0 Fragments
0 Jabbers
0 CRC Align Errors
0 Collisions
21065 Packet Size <= 64 Octets
3805 Packet Size 65 to 127 Octets
===== Port Utilization =====
111 Octets Input in kbits per second
0 Packets Input per second
0.00 % Input Utilization
606 Octets Output in kbits per second
1 Packets Output per second
0.00 % Output Utilization
Console#
Table 74: show interfaces counters - display description

IF Table Stats
Octets Input The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
Octets Output The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
Unicast Input The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer

protocol.
Unicast Output The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that
were discarded or not sent.
Discard Input The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being
deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for
discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
Discard Output The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being
transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be
to free up buffer space.
Error Input The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Error Output The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted
because of errors.
Unknown Protocols Input The number of packets received which were discarded because of an
unknown or unsupported protocol.
– 412 –
Table 74: show interfaces counters - display description (Continued)

QLen Output The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
Extended IF Table Stats
Multicast Input The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-
)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Multicast Output The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Broadcast Input The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-
)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Broadcast Output The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Etherlike Statistics
Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).
FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral
number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count
does not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-
short error.
Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission
is inhibited by exactly one collision.
Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is
inhibited by more than one collision.
SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the
PLS sublayer for a particular interface.
Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a
particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy.
Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times
into the transmission of a packet.
Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails
due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the
interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Internal MAC Transmit A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails
Errors due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.
Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due
to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.
Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the
maximum permitted frame size.
Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never
asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.
– 413 –

Symbol Errors For an interface operating at 100 Mb/s, the number of times there was
an invalid data symbol when a valid carrier was present.
For an interface operating in half-duplex mode at 1000 Mb/s, the
number of times the receiving media is non-idle (a carrier event) for a
period of time equal to or greater than slotTime, and during which
there was at least one occurrence of an event that causes the PHY to
indicate
'Data reception error' or 'carrier extend error' on the GMII.
For an interface operating in full-duplex mode at 1000 Mb/s, the
number of times the receiving media is non-idle (a carrier event) for a
period of time equal to or greater than minFrameSize, and during
which there was at least one occurrence of an event that causes the
PHY to indicate 'Data reception error' on the GMII
RMON Statistics
Octets Total number of octets of data received on the network. This statistic
can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization.
Packets The total number of packets (bad, broadcast and multicast) received.
Broadcast Packets The total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets The total number of good packets received that were directed to this
multicast address.
Undersize Packets The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise
well formed.
Oversize Packets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise
well formed.
Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either
an FCS or alignment error.
Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an
FCS or alignment error.
CRC Align Errors
Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet
segment.
64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received and
transmitted that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
65-127 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received and
128-255 Octets transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range
256-511 Octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
512-1023 Octets
1024-1518 Octets
1519-1536 Octets
Utilization Statistics
Octets input per second Number of octets entering this interface in kbits per second.
Packets input per second Number of packets entering this interface in packets per second.
– 414 –

Input utilization The input utilization rate for this interface.
Octets output per second Number of octets leaving this interface in kbits per second.
Packets output per second Number of packets leaving this interface in packets per second.
Output utilization The output utilization rate for this interface.
show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface.
Syntax
show interfaces status [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
Shows the status for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Command Usage
Example
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/1
Information of Eth 1/1
Basic Information:
Port Type : 1000BASE-T
MAC Address : 00-E0-0C-00-00-FE
Configuration:
Name :
Port Admin : Up
Speed-duplex : Auto
Capabilities : 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full
Broadcast Storm : Enabled
Broadcast Storm Limit : 500 packets/second
Multicast Storm : Disabled
Multicast Storm Limit : 500 packets/second
Unknown Unicast Storm : Disabled
Unknown Unicast Storm Limit : 500 packets/second
Flow Control : Disabled
VLAN Trunking : Disabled
– 415 –
LACP : Disabled
MAC Learning : Enabled
Media Type : None
Current Status:
Link Status : Up
Port Operation Status : Up
Operation Speed-duplex : 100full
Up Time : 0w 0d 1h 11m 2s (4262 seconds)
Flow Control Type : None
Max Frame Size : 1518 bytes (1522 bytes for tagged frames)
MAC Learning Status : Enabled
Console#
show interfaces This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified
switchport interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces switchport [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
Shows all interfaces.
Command Mode
Command Usage
Example
This example shows the configuration setting for port 1.
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/1

Broadcast Threshold : Enabled, 500 packets/second
Multicast Threshold : Disabled
Unknown Unicast Threshold : Disabled
LACP Status : Disabled
Ingress Rate Limit : Disabled, 1000M bits per second
Egress Rate Limit : Disabled, 1000M bits per second
VLAN Membership Mode : Hybrid
Ingress Rule : Disabled
Acceptable Frame Type : All frames
Native VLAN : 1
Priority for Untagged Traffic : 0
GVRP Status : Disabled
– 416 –
Allowed VLAN : 1(u)

Forbidden VLAN :
802.1Q Tunnel Status : Disabled
802.1Q Tunnel Mode : Normal
802.1Q Tunnel TPID : 8100 (Hex)
Layer 2 Protocol Tunnel : None
Console#
Table 75: show interfaces switchport - display description

Field Description
Broadcast Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also

Threshold shows the threshold level (page 463).
Multicast Threshold Shows if multicast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also
shows the threshold level (page 463).
Unknown-unicast Shows if unknown unicast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled

Threshold it also shows the threshold level (page 463).
LACP Status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled
(page 435).
Ingress/Egress Rate Shows if rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit (page 1023).
Limit
VLAN Membership Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid (page 575).

Mode
Ingress Rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled (page 574).
Acceptable Frame Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only
Type (page 572).
Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 576).
Priority for Indicates the default priority for untagged frames (page 612).
Untagged Traffic
GVRP Status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled (page 566).
Allowed VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)” indicates untagged and
“(t)” indicates tagged (page 573).
Forbidden VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP (page 566).
802.1Q-tunnel Shows if 802.1Q tunnel is enabled on this interface (page 580).

Status
802.1Q-tunnel Shows the tunnel mode as Normal, 802.1Q Tunnel or 802.1Q Tunnel Uplink
Mode (page 581).
802.1Q-tunnel TPID Shows the Tag Protocol Identifier used for learning and switching packets
(page 584).
Layer 2 Protocol Shows if L2 Protocol Tunnel is enabled for spanning tree protocol (page 589).
Tunnel
– 417 –
transceiver-monitor This command sends a trap when any of the transceiver’s operational values fall
outside of specified thresholds. Use the no form to disable trap messages.
Syntax
transceiver-monitor
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (SFP/SFP+ Ports)
Example
Console(config)interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#transceiver-monitor
Console#
transceiver-threshold- This command uses default threshold settings obtained from the transceiver to
auto determine when an alarm or warning message should be sent. Use the no form to
Syntax
transceiver-threshold-auto
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold-auto
Console#
– 418 –
transceiver-threshold This command sets thresholds for transceiver current which can be used to trigger
current an alarm or warning message.
Syntax
transceiver-threshold current {high-alarm | high-warning | low-alarm |
low-warning} threshold-value
high-alarm – Sets the high current threshold for an alarm message.
high-warning – Sets the high current threshold for a warning message.
low-alarm – Sets the low current threshold for an alarm message.
low-warning – Sets the low current threshold for a warning message.
threshold-value – The threshold of the transceiver current.
(Range: 0-13100 in units of 0.01 mA)
Default Setting
High Alarm: 100 mA
HIgh Warning: 90 mA
Low Warning: 7 mA
Low Alarm: 6 mA
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If trap messages are enabled with the transceiver-monitor command, and a
high-threshold alarm or warning message is sent if the current value is greater
than or equal to the threshold, and the last sample value was less than the
threshold. After a rising event has been generated, another such event will not
be generated until the sampled value has fallen below the high threshold and
reaches the low threshold.
◆ If trap messages are enabled with the transceiver-monitor command, and a

low-threshold alarm or warning message is sent if the current value is less than
or equal to the threshold, and the last sample value was greater than the
threshold. After a falling event has been generated, another such event will not
be generated until the sampled value has risen above the low threshold and
reaches the high threshold.
◆ Threshold events are triggered as described above to avoid a hysteresis effect

which would continuously trigger event messages if the power level were to
fluctuate just above and below either the high threshold or the low threshold.
◆ Trap messages enabled by the transceiver-monitor command are sent to any

management station configured by the snmp-server host command.
– 419 –
Example
The following example sets alarm thresholds for the transceiver current at port 1.

Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold current low-alarm 100
Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold rx-power high-alarm 700
Console#
transceiver-threshold This command sets thresholds for the transceiver power level of the received signal
rx-power which can be used to trigger an alarm or warning message.
Syntax
transceiver-threshold rx-power {high-alarm | high-warning | low-alarm |
high-alarm – Sets the high power threshold for an alarm message.
high-warning – Sets the high power threshold for a warning message.
low-alarm – Sets the low power threshold for an alarm message.
low-warning – Sets the low power threshold for a warning message.
threshold-value – The power threshold of the received signal.
(Range: -4000 - 820 in units of 0.01 dBm)
Default Setting
High Alarm: -3.00 dBm
HIgh Warning: -3.50 dBm
Low Warning: -21.00 dBm
Low Alarm: -21.50 dBm
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The threshold value is the power ratio in decibels (dB) of the measured power
referenced to one milliwatt (mW).
◆ Refer to the Command Usage section under the transceiver-threshold current

command for more information on configuring transceiver thresholds.

– 420 –
Example
The following example sets alarm thresholds for the signal power received at port
1.

Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold rx-power low-alarm -21
Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold rx-power high-alarm -3
Console#
transceiver-threshold This command sets thresholds for the transceiver temperature which can be used
temperature to trigger an alarm or warning message.
Syntax
transceiver-threshold temperature {high-alarm | high-warning | low-alarm
| low-warning} threshold-value
high-alarm – Sets the high temperature threshold for an alarm message.
high-warning – Sets the high temperature threshold for a warning
message.
low-alarm – Sets the low temperature threshold for an alarm message.
low-warning – Sets the low temperature threshold for a warning message.
threshold-value – The threshold of the transceiver temperature.
(Range: -12800 - 12800 in units of 0.01 Celsius)
Default Setting
High Alarm: 75.00 C
HIgh Warning: 70.00 C
Low Alarm: -123.00 C
Low Warning: 0.00 C
Command Mode
Command Usage

– 421 –
Example
The following example sets alarm thresholds for the transceiver temperature at
port 1.

Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold temperature low-alarm 97
Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold temperature high-alarm -83
Console#
transceiver-threshold This command sets thresholds for the transceiver power level of the transmitted
tx-power signal which can be used to trigger an alarm or warning message.
Syntax
transceiver-threshold tx-power {high-alarm | high-warning | low-alarm |
high-alarm – Sets the high power threshold for an alarm message.
high-warning – Sets the high power threshold for a warning message.
low-alarm – Sets the low power threshold for an alarm message.
low-warning – Sets the low power threshold for a warning message.
threshold-value – The power threshold of the transmitted signal.
(Range: -4000 - 820 in units of 0.01 dBm)
Default Setting
High Alarm: -9.00 dBm
HIgh Warning: -9.50 dBm
Low Warning: -21.00 dBm
Low Alarm: -21.50 dBm
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The threshold value is the power ratio in decibels (dB) of the measured power
referenced to one milliwatt (mW).


– 422 –
Example
The following example sets alarm thresholds for the signal power transmitted at
port 1.

Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold tx-power low-alarm 8
Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold tx-power high-alarm -3
Console#
transceiver-threshold This command sets thresholds for the transceiver voltage which can be used to
voltage trigger an alarm or warning message.
Syntax
transceiver-threshold voltage {high-alarm | high-warning | low-alarm |
high-alarm – Sets the high voltage threshold for an alarm message.
high-warning – Sets the high voltage threshold for a warning message.
low-alarm – Sets the low voltage threshold for an alarm message.
low-warning – Sets the low voltage threshold for a warning message.
threshold-value – The threshold of the transceiver voltage.
(Range: 0-655 in units of 0.01 Volt)
Default Setting
High Alarm: 3.50 Volts
HIgh Warning: 3.45 Volts
Low Warning: 3.15 Volts
Low Alarm: 3.10 Volts
Command Mode
Command Usage

– 423 –
Example
The following example sets alarm thresholds for the transceiver voltage at port 1.

Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold voltage low-alarm 4
Console(config-if)#transceiver-threshold voltage high-alarm 2
Console#
show interfaces This command displays identifying information for the specified transceiver,
transceiver including connector type and vendor-related parameters, as well as the
temperature, voltage, bias current, transmit power, and receive power.
Syntax
show interfaces transceiver [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
port - Port number. (ECS4510-28F/28F-DC: 1-28,
Other models: SFP+ ports 25-28 / 49-52)
Default Setting
Shows all SFP interfaces.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The switch can display diagnostic information for SFP modules which support the
SFF-8472 Specification for Diagnostic Monitoring Interface for Optical Transceivers.
This information allows administrators to remotely diagnose problems with optical
devices. This feature, referred to as Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) in the
command display, provides information on transceiver parameters including
temperature, supply voltage, laser bias current, laser power, and received optical
power, and related alarm thresholds.
Example
Console#show interfaces transceiver ethernet 1/49
Connector Type : LC
Fiber Type : [0x00]
Eth Compliance Codes : 1000BASE-ZX
Baud Rate : 1300 MBd
Vendor OUI : 00-00-5F
Vendor Name : SumitomoElectric
Vendor PN : SCP6G94-FN-BWH
Vendor Rev : Z
Vendor SN : SE08T712Z00006
Date Code : 10-09-14
– 424 –
DDM Info
Temperature : 35.64 degree C
Vcc : 3.25 V
Bias Current : 12.13 mA
TX Power : 2.36 dBm
RX Power : -24.20 dBm
DDM Thresholds
Low Alarm Low Warning High Warning High Alarm
----------- ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------
Temperature(Celsius) -45.00 -40.00 85.00 90.00
Voltage(Volts) 2.90 3.00 3.60 3.70
Current(mA) 1.00 3.00 50.00 60.00
TxPower(dBm) -11.50 -10.50 -2.00 -1.00
RxPower(dBm) -23.98 -23.01 -1.00 0.00
Console#
show interfaces This command Displays the alarm/warning thresholds for temperature,
transceiver-threshold voltage, bias current, transmit power, and receive power. Syntax
Syntax
show interfaces transceiver-threshold [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Other models: SFP+ ports 25-28 / 49-52)
Default Setting
Shows all SFP interfaces.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ The switch can display diagnostic information for SFP modules which support
the SFF-8472 Specification for Diagnostic Monitoring Interface for Optical
Transceivers. This information allows administrators to remotely diagnose
problems with optical devices. This feature, referred to as Digital Diagnostic
Monitoring (DDM) in the command display, provides information on
transceiver parameters including temperature, supply voltage, laser bias
current, laser power, received optical power, and related alarm thresholds.
◆ The DDM thresholds displayed by this command only apply to ports which
have a DDM-compliant transceiver inserted.
Example
Console#show interfaces transceiver-threshold ethernet 1/25
DDM Thresholds
Transceiver-monitor : Disabled
– 425 –
Cable Diagnostics
Transceiver-threshold-auto : Enabled
Low Alarm Low Warning High Warning High Alarm
----------- ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------
Temperature(Celsius) -123.00 0.00 70.00 75.00
Voltage(Volts) 3.10 3.15 3.45 3.50
Current(mA) 6.00 7.00 90.00 100.00
TxPower(dBm) -12.00 -11.50 -9.50 -9.00
RxPower(dBm) -21.50 -21.00 -3.50 -3.00
Console#
Cable Diagnostics
test cable-diagnostics This command performs cable diagnostics on the specified port to diagnose any
cable faults (short, open, etc.) and report the cable length.
Syntax
test cable-diagnostics interface interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Other models: 1-24/48)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Cable diagnostics are performed using Digital Signal Processing (DSP) test
methods. DSP analyses the cable by sending a pulsed signal into the cable, and
then examining the reflection of that pulse.
◆ This cable test is only accurate for Ethernet cables 7 - 100 meters long.
◆ The test takes approximately 5 seconds. Use the show cable-diagnostics

command to display the results of the test, including common cable failures, as
well as the status and approximate length of each cable pair.
◆ Ports are linked down while running cable diagnostics.
◆ To ensure more accurate measurement of the length to a fault, first disable

power-saving mode (using the no power-save command) on the link partner
before running cable diagnostics.
Example
Console#test cable-diagnostics interface ethernet 1/24
Console#
– 426 –
Cable Diagnostics
show This command shows the results of a cable diagnostics test.

cable-diagnostics
Syntax
show cable-diagnostics interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ The results include common cable failures, as well as the status and
approximate distance to a fault, or the approximate cable length if no fault is
found.
◆ For link-down ports, the reported distance to a fault is accurate to within +/- 2
meters. For link-up ports, the accuracy is +/- 10 meters.
◆ Potential conditions which may be listed by the diagnostics include:

■ OK: Correctly terminated pair
■ Open: Open pair, no link partner
■ Short: Shorted pair
■ Not Supported: This message is displayed for any Gigabit Ethernet ports
linked up at a speed lower than 1000 Mbps.
■ Impedance mismatch: Terminating impedance is not in the reference
range.
Example
Console#show cable-diagnostics interface ethernet 1/48
Port Type Link Status Pair A (meters) Pair B (meters) Last Update
-------- ---- ----------- ---------------- ---------------- -------------------
Eth 1/48 GE Up OK (1) OK (1) 2012-08-09 10:24:49
Console#
– 427 –
Power Savings
Power Savings
power-save This command enables power savings mode on the specified port. Use the no form
to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] power-save
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ IEEE 802.3 defines the Ethernet standard and subsequent power requirements
based on cable connections operating at 100 meters. Enabling power saving
mode can reduce power used for cable lengths of 60 meters or less, with more
significant reduction for cables of 20 meters or less, and continue to ensure
signal integrity.
◆ Power saving mode only applies to the Gigabit Ethernet ports using copper
media.
◆ Power savings can be enabled on Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports.
◆ The power-saving methods provided by this switch include:
■ Power saving when there is no link partner:

Under normal operation, the switch continuously auto-negotiates to find a
link partner, keeping the MAC interface powered up even if no link
connection exists. When using power-savings mode, the switch checks for
energy on the circuit to determine if there is a link partner. If none is
detected, the switch automatically turns off the transmitter, and most of
the receive circuitry (entering Sleep Mode). In this mode, the low-power
energy-detection circuit continuously checks for energy on the cable. If
none is detected, the MAC interface is also powered down to save
additional energy. If energy is detected, the switch immediately turns on
both the transmitter and receiver functions, and powers up the MAC
interface.
■ Power saving when there is a link partner:

Traditional Ethernet connections typically operate with enough power to
support at least 100 meters of cable even though average network cable
length is shorter. When cable length is shorter, power consumption can be
reduced since signal attenuation is proportional to cable length. When
power-savings mode is enabled, the switch analyzes cable length to
– 428 –
Power Savings
determine whether or not it can reduce the signal amplitude used on a

particular link.
Note: Power-savings mode on a active link only works when the connection speed
is 100 Mbps or higher at linkup, and line length is less than 60 meters.
Note: Power savings can only be implemented on Gigabit Ethernet ports using
twisted-pair cabling. Power-savings mode on a active link only works when
connection speed is 1 Gbps, and line length is less than 60 meters.
Example
Console(config-if)#power-save
Console(config-if)#
show power-save This command shows the configuration settings for power savings.
Syntax
show power-save [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show power-save interface ethernet 1/24
Power Saving Status:
Ethernet 1/24 : Enabled
Console#
– 429 –
Power Savings
– 430 –
12 Link Aggregation Commands
Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the
bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link
between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches
have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the
switches have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to 16 trunks, and up to
32 for the stack. For example, a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can
support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.
Table 76: Link Aggregation Commands

interface port-channel Configures a trunk and enters interface GC

configuration mode for the trunk
port channel Sets the load-distribution method among ports in GC

load-balance aggregated links
channel-group Adds a port to a trunk IC (Ethernet)
Dynamic Configuration Commands
lacp Configures LACP for the current interface IC (Ethernet)
lacp admin-key Configures a port's administration key IC (Ethernet)
lacp port-priority Configures a port's LACP port priority IC (Ethernet)
lacp system-priority Configures a port's LACP system priority IC (Ethernet)
lacp admin-key Configures an port channel’s administration key IC (Port Channel)
lacp timeout Configures the timeout to wait for next LACPDU IC (Port Channel)
Trunk Status Display Commands
show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE, PE

port-channel
show lacp Shows LACP information PE
show port-channel load- Shows the load-distribution method used on PE

balance aggregated links
– 431 –
Chapter 12 | Link Aggregation Commands
Guidelines for Creating Trunks
General Guidelines –
◆ Finish configuring trunks before you connect the corresponding network
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.
◆ A trunk can have up to 8 ports.
◆ The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.
◆ All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including
communication mode (i.e., speed and duplex mode), VLAN assignments, and
CoS settings.
◆ Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together, including
ports of different media types.
◆ All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to,
added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.
◆ STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the
specified port-channel.
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –

Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:
◆ Ports must have the same LACP system priority.

◆ Ports must have the same port admin key (Ethernet Interface).
◆ If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when a
channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used by
the interfaces that joined the group.
◆ However, if the port channel admin key is set, then the port admin key must be
set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.
◆ If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select the backup link.
port channel This command sets the load-distribution method among ports in aggregated links
load-balance (for both static and dynamic trunks). Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
port channel load-balance {dst-ip | dst-mac | src-dst-ip | src-dst-mac | src-ip
| src-mac}
no port channel load-balance
dst-ip - Load balancing based on destination IP address.
dst-mac - Load balancing based on destination MAC address.
– 432 –
src-dst-ip - Load balancing based on source and destination IP address.

src-dst-mac - Load balancing based on source and destination MAC
address.
src-ip - Load balancing based on source IP address.
src-mac - Load balancing based on source MAC address.
Default Setting
src-dst-ip
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command applies to all static and dynamic trunks on the switch.
◆ To ensure that the switch traffic load is distributed evenly across all links in a
trunk, select the source and destination addresses used in the load-balance
calculation to provide the best result for trunk connections:
■ dst-ip: All traffic with the same destination IP address is output on the
same link in a trunk. This mode works best for switch-to-router trunk links
where traffic through the switch is destined for many different hosts. Do
not use this mode for switch-to-server trunk links where the destination IP
address is the same for all traffic.
■ dst-mac: All traffic with the same destination MAC address is output on the
same link in a trunk. This mode works best for switch-to-switch trunk links
where traffic through the switch is destined for many different hosts. Do
not use this mode for switch-to-router trunk links where the destination
MAC address is the same for all traffic.
■ src-dst-ip: All traffic with the same source and destination IP address is
output on the same link in a trunk. This mode works best for switch-to-
router trunk links where traffic through the switch is received from and
destined for many different hosts.
■ src-dst-mac: All traffic with the same source and destination MAC address
is output on the same link in a trunk. This mode works best for switch-to-
switch trunk links where traffic through the switch is received from and
destined for many different hosts.
■ src-ip: All traffic with the same source IP address is output on the same link
in a trunk. This mode works best for switch-to-router or switch-to-server
trunk links where traffic through the switch is received from many different
hosts.
– 433 –
■ src-mac: All traffic with the same source MAC address is output on the
same link in a trunk. This mode works best for switch-to-switch trunk links
where traffic through the switch is received from many different hosts.
Example
Console(config)#port-channel load-balance dst-ip
Console(config)#
channel-group This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a
trunk.
Syntax
channel-group channel-id
no channel-group
channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-16)
Default Setting
The current port will be added to this trunk.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the Cisco
EtherChannel standard.
◆ Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.
◆ Use no interface port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.
Example
The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 10:
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1
Console(config-if)#channel-group 1
Console(config-if)#
– 434 –
lacp This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the
current interface. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] lacp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex,
either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.
◆ A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned
the next available port-channel ID.
◆ If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk
will be activated automatically.
◆ If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled,
the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be enabled if
one of the active links fails.
Example
The following shows LACP enabled on ports 1-3. Because LACP has also been
enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show interfaces status port-
channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established.

Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1
Information of Trunk 1
Basic Information:
Port Type : 1000BASE-T
MAC Address : 12-34-12-34-12-3F
Configuration:
Name :
Port Admin : Up
Speed-duplex : Auto
Capabilities : 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full
Broadcast Storm : Enabled
Broadcast Storm Limit : 500 packets/second
– 435 –
Multicast Storm : Disabled

Multicast Storm Limit : 500 packets/second
Unknown Unicast Storm : Disabled
Unknown Unicast Storm Limit : 500 packets/second
Flow Control : Disabled
VLAN Trunking : Disabled
Current status:
Created By : LACP
Link Status : Up
Port Operation Status : Up
Operation Speed-duplex : 1000full
Up Time : 0w 0d 0h 0m 53s (53 seconds)
Flow Control Type : None
Max Frame Size : 1518 bytes (1522 bytes for tagged frames)
MAC Learning Status : Enabled
Member Ports : Eth1/1, Eth1/2, Eth1/3,
Active Member Ports : Eth1/1, Eth1/2, Eth1/3,
Console#
lacp admin-key This command configures a port's LACP administration key. Use the no form to
(Ethernet Interface) restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key
no lacp {actor | partner} admin-key
actor - The local side an aggregate link.
partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
key - The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that
belong to the same link aggregation group (LAG). (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
Actor: 1, Partner: 0
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority
matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port channel
key matches (if configured).
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used
by the interfaces that joined the group.
◆ Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational settings
are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the partner only
applies to its administrative state, not its operational state.
– 436 –
Example
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120
Console(config-if)#
lacp port-priority This command configures LACP port priority. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} port-priority priority
no lacp {actor | partner} port-priority
priority - LACP port priority is used to select a backup link. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority.
◆ If an active port link goes down, the backup port with the highest priority is
selected to replace the downed link. However, if two or more ports have the
same LACP port priority, the port with the lowest physical port number will be
selected as the backup port.
◆ If an LAG already exists with the maximum number of allowed port members,
and LACP is subsequently enabled on another port using a higher priority than
an existing member, the newly configured port will replace an existing port
member that has a lower priority.
applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take
effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.
Example
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128
– 437 –
lacp system-priority This command configures a port's LACP system priority. Use the no form to restore
the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} system-priority priority
no lacp {actor | partner} system-priority
priority - This priority is used to determine link aggregation group (LAG)
membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG
negotiations. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.
◆ System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG
identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP
negotiations with other systems.
applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take
effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.
Example
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3
Console(config-if)#
lacp admin-key This command configures a port channel's LACP administration key string. Use the
(Port Channel) no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp admin-key key
no lacp admin-key
key - The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link
aggregation group (LAG) during local LACP setup on this switch.
(Range: 0-65535)
– 438 –
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Port Channel)
Command Usage
◆ Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority
matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port channel
key matches (if configured).
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used by
the interfaces that joined the group. Note that when the LAG is no longer used,
the port channel admin key is reset to 0.
Example
Console(config-if)#lacp admin-key 3
Console(config-if)#
lacp timeout This command configures the timeout to wait for the next LACP data unit
(LACPDU). Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp timeout {long | short}
no lacp timeout
long - Specifies a slow timeout of 90 seconds.
short - Specifies a fast timeout of 3 seconds.
Default Setting
long
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Port Channel)
Command Usage
◆ The timeout configured by this command is set in the LACP timeout bit of the
Actor State field in transmitted LACPDUs. When the partner switch receives an
LACPDU set with a short timeout from the actor switch, the partner adjusts the
transmit LACPDU interval to 1 second. When it receives an LACPDU set with a
long timeout from the actor, it adjusts the transmit LACPDU interval to 30
seconds.
– 439 –
◆ If the actor does not receive an LACPDU from its partner before the configured
timeout expires, the partner port information will be deleted from the LACP
group.
◆ When a dynamic port-channel member leaves a port-channel, the default

timeout value will be restored on that port.
◆ When a dynamic port-channel is torn down, the configured timeout value will
be retained. When the dynamic port-channel is constructed again, that timeout
value will be used.
Example
Console(config-if)#lacp timeout short
Console(config-if)#
show lacp This command displays LACP information.
Syntax
show lacp [port-channel] {counters | internal | neighbors | sys-id}
port-channel - Local identifier for a link aggregation group. (Range: 1-16)
counters - Statistics for LACP protocol messages.
internal - Configuration settings and operational state for local side.
neighbors - Configuration settings and operational state for remote side.
sys-id - Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel
groups.
Default Setting
Port Channel: all
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show lacp 1 counters
Port Channel: 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Sent : 12
LACPDUs Received : 6
Marker Sent : 0
Marker Received : 0
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts : 0
. LACPDUs Illegal Pkts : 0
– 440 –
.
.
Table 77: show lacp counters - display description

Field Description
LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.
LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.
Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.
Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.
LACPDUs Unknown Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet
Pkts Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow
Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet
Type.
LACPDUs Illegal Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but
Pkts contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.
Console#show lacp 1 internal

Port Channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oper Key : 3
Admin Key : 0
Timeout : long
Eth 1/ 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Internal : 30 seconds
LACP System Priority : 32768
LACP Port Priority : 32768
Admin Key : 3
Oper Key : 3
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization,
. aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
Table 78: show lacp internal - display description

Field Description
Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.
Timeout Time to wait for the next LACPDU before deleting partner port information.
LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.
LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.

Priority
LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.
– 441 –
Table 78: show lacp internal - display description (Continued)

Field Description
Admin State, Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:

Oper State ◆ Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;
◆ Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational

partner information, administratively configured for the partner.
◆ Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is
disabled; i.e., distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be
enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received
protocol information.
◆ Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e.,
collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the
absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol
information.
◆ Synchronization – The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC; i.e., it has
been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group, the group has been
associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link
Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key
information transmitted.
◆ Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a
potential candidate for aggregation.
◆ Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission
rate.
◆ LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link.
(0: Passive; 1: Active)
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors

Port Channel 1 neighbors
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Partner Admin System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00
Partner Oper System ID : 32768, 00-12-CF-61-24-2F
Partner Admin Port Number : 1
Partner Oper Port Number : 1
Port Admin Priority : 32768
Port Oper Priority : 32768
Admin Key : 0
Oper Key : 3
Admin State: defaulted, distributing, collecting,
synchronization, long timeout,
Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,
. aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
Table 79: show lacp neighbors - display description

Field Description
Partner Admin LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.

System ID
Partner Oper LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.

System ID
Partner Admin Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.
Port Number
Partner Oper Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s
Port Number protocol partner.
– 442 –
Table 79: show lacp neighbors - display description (Continued)

Field Description
Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.
Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Admin State Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)
Oper State Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)
Console#show lacp sysid

Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
2 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
3 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
4 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
5 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
6 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7
7 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0
8 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0
9 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0
10 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0
11 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0
. 12 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0
.
.
Table 80: show lacp sysid - display description

Field Description
Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch.
System Priority* LACP system priority for this channel group.
System MAC System MAC address.

Address*
* The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID.
show port-channel This command shows the load-distribution method used on aggregated links.
load-balance
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show port-channel load-balance
Trunk Load Balance Mode: Destination IP address
Console#
– 443 –
– 444 –
13 Power over Ethernet Commands
The commands in this group control the power that can be delivered to attached
PoE devices through the RJ-45 ports 1-24/48 on the ECS4510-28P/52P.
The switch’s power management enables total switch power and individual port
power to be controlled within a configured power budget. Port power can be
automatically turned on and off for connected devices, and a per-port power
priority can be set so that the switch never exceeds its allocated power budget.
When a device is connected to a switch port, its power requirements are detected
by the switch before power is supplied. If the power required by a device exceeds
the power budget of the port or the whole switch, power is not supplied.
Table 81: PoE Commands

power inline Turns power on and off for specific ports IC
power inline maximum Sets the maximum power available to specific switch ports IC
allocation
power inline priority Sets the priority for power supplied to specific ports IC
show power inline status Displays the current status of power management on specific PE
ports or all ports
show power mainpower Displays the current status of power management for switch PE
power inline This command instructs the switch to automatically detect if a PoE-compliant
device is connected to the specified port, and turn power on or off accordingly. Use
the no form to turn off power for a port.
Syntax
[no] power inline
Default Setting
Detection is enabled for PoE-compliant devices.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (ECS4510-28P/52P Ethernet ports 1-24/48)
Command Usage
◆ The switch only provides power to the Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports.
– 445 –
Chapter 13 | Power over Ethernet Commands
◆ When detection is enabled for PoE-compliant devices, power is automatically

supplied when a device is detected on the port, providing that the power
demanded does not exceed the port’s power budget or the switch’s power
budget.
Example
Console(config-if)#power inline
Console(config-if)#no power inline
Console(config-if)#
power inline This command limits the power allocated to specific ports. Use the no form to
maximum allocation restore the default setting.
Syntax
power inline maximum allocation milliwatts
no power inline maximum allocation
milliwatts - The maximum power budget for the port.
(Range: 3000 - 30000 milliwatts)
Default Setting
30000 milliwatts
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The ECS4510-28P can supply up to 30W of power for 13 ports (based on
IEEE 802.3at), or up to 15.4W to 24 ports (based on IEEE 802.3af ).
◆ The ECS4510-52P can supply up to 30W of power for 23 ports (based on

IEEE 802.3at) when power is provided from the RPS, or up to 15.4W to 48 ports
(based on IEEE 802.3af ).
◆ If a device is connected to a switch port and the switch detects that it requires
more than the maximum power allocated to the port or to the overall switch,
no power is supplied to the device (i.e., port power remains off ).
Example
Console(config-if)#power inline maximum allocation 8000
Console(config-if)#
– 446 –
power inline priority This command sets the power priority for specific ports. Use the no form to restore
Syntax
power inline priority priority
no power inline priority
priority - The power priority for the port.
Options: 1 (critical), 2 (high), or 3 (low)
Default Setting
3 (low)
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If the power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power
budget setting as determined during bootup, the switch uses port power
priority settings to control the supplied power. For example:
■ A device connected to a low-priority port that causes the switch to exceed

its budget is not supplied power.
■ If a device is connected to a critical or high-priority port and causes the

switch to exceed its budget, port power is still be turned on if the switch
can drop power to one or more lower-priority ports and keep within its
budget.
Power will be dropped from lower-priority ports starting in reverse
sequence from ECS4510-28P/52P port number 24/48.
■ If sufficient power cannot be freed up for a critical or high-priority port by

turning off power to lower-priority ports, power will not be supplied to the
newly connected device.
◆ If a device is connected to a port after the switch has finished booting up and
would cause the switch to exceed its budget, power will not be provided to
that port regardless of its priority setting.
Example
Console(config-if)#power inline priority 2
Console(config-if)#
– 447 –
show power inline This command displays the current power status for all ports or for specific ports.
status
Syntax
show power inline status [interface]
interface
ethernet
port - Port number. (ECS4510-28P/52P Ethernet ports 1-24/48)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show power inline status
Unit: 1
Compatible mode : Enabled
Max Used
Interface Admin Oper Power Power Priority
--------- -------- ---- -------- -------- --------
Eth 1/ 1 Enabled Off 30000 mW 0 mW Low
Eth 1/10 Enabled Off 15400 mW 0 mW Low
Eth 1/11 Enabled Off 15400 mW 0 mW Low
Eth
. 1/12 Enabled Off 15400 mW 0 mW Low
.
.
Table 82: show power inline status - display description

Field Description
Admin The power mode set on the port (see power inline)
Oper The current operating power status (displays on or off )
Power (mWatt) The maximum power allocated to this port (see power inline maximum
allocation)
Power (used) The current power consumption on the port in milliwatts
Priority The port’s power priority setting (see power inline priority)
– 448 –
show power Use this command to display the current power status for the switch.
mainpower
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show power mainpower
Unit 1 Main Power Status
PoE Maximum Available Power : 780.0 Watts (using main power)
PoE Maximum Allocation Power : 780.0 Watts
System Operation Status : On
PoE Power Consumption : 0 Watts
Software Version : Version 0148 (Hex), Build 66 (Hex)
Console#
Table 83: show power mainpower - display description

Field Description
PoE Maximum The available power budget for the switch

Available Power
PoE Maximum The power budget for the switch. If devices connected to the switch require
Allocation Power more power than the switch
budget, the port power priority settings are used to control the supplied
power.
System Operation The current operating power status (displays on or off )

Status
PoE Power The current power consumption on the switch in watts

Consumption
Software Version The version of software running on the PoE controller subsystem in the switch.
– 449 –
– 450 –
14 Port Mirroring Commands
Data can be mirrored from a local port on the same switch or from a remote port on
another switch for analysis at the target port using software monitoring tools or a
hardware probe. This switch supports the following mirroring modes.
Table 84: Port Mirroring Commands

Command Function
Local Port Mirroring Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data passing
through or the performance of the monitored port
RSPAN Mirroring Mirrors data from remote switches over a dedicated VLAN
Local Port Mirroring Commands

This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port.
Table 85: Mirror Port Commands

port monitor Configures a mirror session IC
show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE
port monitor This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a mirror
session.
Syntax
port monitor {interface [rx | tx | both] | vlan vlan-id |
mac-address mac-address | access-list acl-name}
no port monitor {interface | vlan vlan-id |
mac-address mac-address | access-list acl-name}
interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)
rx - Mirror received packets.
tx - Mirror transmitted packets.
both - Mirror both received and transmitted packets.
– 451 –
Chapter 14 | Port Mirroring Commands

mac-address - MAC address in the form of xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or
xxxxxxxxxxxx.
acl-name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters, no spaces or
other special characters)
Default Setting
◆ No mirror session is defined.
◆ When enabled for an interface, default mirroring is for both received and
transmitted packets.
◆ When enabled for a VLAN or a MAC address, mirroring is restricted to received
packets.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)
Command Usage
◆ You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real-time
analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination
port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive
manner.
◆ Set the destination port by specifying an Ethernet interface with the interface
configuration command, and then use the port monitor command to specify
the source of the traffic to mirror.
◆ All VLAN mirror sessions must share the same target port, preferably one that is
not a member of the source VLAN.
◆ When mirroring traffic from a port, the mirror port and monitor port speeds
should match, otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port. When
mirroring traffic from a VLAN, traffic may also be dropped under heavy loads.
◆ When VLAN mirroring and port mirroring are both enabled, the target port can
receive a mirrored packet twice; once from the source mirror port and again
from the source mirror VLAN.
◆ When mirroring traffic from a MAC address, ingress traffic with the specified
source address entering any port in the switch, other than the target port, will
be mirrored to the destination port.
◆ Spanning Tree BPDU packets are not mirrored to the target port.
◆ When mirroring VLAN traffic or packets based on a source MAC address, the
target port cannot be set to the same target port as that used for basic port
mirroring.
– 452 –
◆ You can create multiple mirror sessions, but all sessions must share the same
destination port.
◆ The destination port cannot be a trunk or trunk member port.
◆ ACL-based mirroring is only used for ingress traffic. To mirror an ACL, follow
these steps:
1. Use the access-list command (page 371) to add an ACL.
2. Use the access-group command to add a mirrored port to access control
list.
3. Use the port monitor access-list command to specify the destination port
to which traffic matching the ACL will be mirrored.
Example
The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 5:

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 both
Console(config-if)#
This example configures port 2 to monitor packets matching the MAC address 00-
12-CF-XX-XX-XX received by port 1:
Console(config)#access-list mac m1
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit 00-12-cf-00-00-00 ff-ff-ff-00-00-00 any
Console(config-mac-acl)#exit
Console(config-if)#mac access-group m1 in
Console(config-if)#port monitor access-list m1
Console(config-if)#
show port monitor This command displays mirror information.
Syntax
show port monitor [interface | vlan vlan-id | mac-address mac-address]
interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)
mac-address - MAC address in the form of xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or
xxxxxxxxxxxx.
– 453 –
RSPAN Mirroring Commands
Default Setting
Shows all sessions.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port, and
mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX, RX/TX).
Example
The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 5:

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6
Console#show port monitor
Port Mirroring
-------------------------------------
Destination Port (listen port):Eth1/5
Source Port (monitored port) :Eth1/6
Mode :RX/TX
Console#

Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN) allows you to mirror traffic from remote
switches for analysis on a local destination port.
Table 86: RSPAN Commands

vlan rspan Creates a VLAN dedicated to carrying RSPAN traffic VC
rspan source Specifies the source port and traffic type to be GC

mirrored
rspan destination Specifies the destination port to monitor the GC

mirrored traffic
rspan remote vlan Specifies the RSPAN VLAN, switch role (source, GC
intermediate or destination), and the uplink ports
no rspan session Deletes a configured RSPAN session GC
show rspan Displays the configuration settings for an RSPAN PE

session
– 454 –
Configuration Guidelines
Take the following steps to configure an RSPAN session:
1. Use the vlan rspan command to configure a VLAN to use for RSPAN. (Default
VLAN 1 is prohibited.)
2. Use the rspan source command to specify the interfaces and the traffic type
(RX, TX or both) to be monitored.
3. Use the rspan destination command to specify the destination port for the
traffic mirrored by an RSPAN session.
4. Use the rspan remote vlan command to specify the VLAN to be used for an
RSPAN session, to specify the switch’s role as a source, intermediate relay, or
destination of the mirrored traffic, and to configure the uplink ports designated
to carry this traffic.
RSPAN Limitations
The following limitations apply to the use of RSPAN on this switch:
◆ RSPAN Ports – Only ports can be configured as an RSPAN source, destination, or

uplink; static and dynamic trunks are not allowed. A port can only be
configured as one type of RSPAN interface – source, destination, or uplink. Also,
note that the source port and destination port cannot be configured on the
same switch.
Only 802.1Q trunk or hybrid (i.e., general use) ports can be configured as an
RSPAN uplink or destination port – access ports are not allowed (see switchport
mode).
◆ Local/Remote Mirror – The destination of a local mirror session (created with the
port monitor command) cannot be used as the destination for RSPAN traffic.
Only one mirror session is allowed, including both local and remote mirroring.
If local mirroring is enabled, then no session can be configured for RSPAN.
◆ Spanning Tree – If the spanning tree is disabled, BPDUs will not be flooded onto
the RSPAN VLAN.
MAC address learning is not supported on RSPAN uplink ports when RSPAN is
enabled on the switch. Therefore, even if spanning tree is enabled after RSPAN
has been configured, MAC address learning will still not be re-started on the
RSPAN uplink ports.
◆ IEEE 802.1X – RSPAN and 802.1X are mutually exclusive functions. When 802.1X
is enabled globally, RSPAN uplink ports cannot be configured, even though
RSPAN source and destination ports can still be configured. When RSPAN uplink
ports are enabled on the switch, 802.1X cannot be enabled globally.
– 455 –
RSPAN uplink ports cannot be configured to use IEEE 802.1X Port

Authentication, but RSPAN source ports and destination ports can be
configured to use it
◆ Port Security – If port security is enabled on any port, that port cannot be set as
an RSPAN uplink port, even though it can still be configured as an RSPAN source
or destination port. Also, when a port is configured as an RSPAN uplink port,
port security cannot be enabled on that port.
rspan source Use this command to specify the source port and traffic type to be mirrored
remotely. Use the no form to disable RSPAN on the specified port, or with a traffic
type keyword to disable mirroring for the specified type.
Syntax
[no] rspan session session-id source interface interface-list [rx | tx | both]
session-id – A number identifying this RSPAN session. (Range: 1)
Only one mirror session is allowed, including both local and remote
mirroring. If local mirroring is enabled with the port monitor command,
then no session can be configured for RSPAN.
interface-list – One or more source ports. Use a hyphen to indicate a
consecutive list of ports or a comma between non-consecutive ports.
ethernet unit/port
rx - Mirror received packets.
tx - Mirror transmitted packets.
both - Mirror both received and transmitted packets.
Default Setting
Both TX and RX traffic is mirrored
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ One or more source ports can be assigned to the same RSPAN session, either on
the same switch or on different switches.
◆ Only ports can be configured as an RSPAN source – static and dynamic trunks
are not allowed.
◆ The source port and destination port cannot be configured on the same switch.
– 456 –
Example
The following example configures the switch to mirror received packets from port 2
and 3:
Console(config)#rspan session 1 source interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config)#rspan session 1 source interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config)#
rspan destination Use this command to specify the destination port to monitor the mirrored traffic.
Use the no form to disable RSPAN on the specified port.
Syntax
rspan session session-id destination interface interface [tagged | untagged]
no rspan session session-id destination interface interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
tagged - Traffic exiting the destination port carries the RSPAN VLAN tag.
untagged - Traffic exiting the destination port is untagged.
Default Setting
Traffic exiting the destination port is untagged.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Only one destination port can be configured on the same switch per session,
but a destination port can be configured on more than one switch for the same
session.
◆ Only 802.1Q trunk or hybrid (i.e., general use) ports can be configured as an
RSPAN destination port – access ports are not allowed (see switchport mode).
◆ Only ports can be configured as an RSPAN destination – static and dynamic

trunks are not allowed.
◆ The source port and destination port cannot be configured on the same switch.
– 457 –
◆ A destination port can still send and receive switched traffic, and participate in
any Layer 2 protocols to which it has been assigned.
Example
The following example configures port 4 to receive mirrored RSPAN traffic:
Console(config)#rspan session 1 destination interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config)#
rspan remote vlan Use this command to specify the RSPAN VLAN, switch role (source, intermediate or
destination), and the uplink ports. Use the no form to disable the RSPAN on the
specified VLAN.
Syntax
[no] rspan session session-id remote vlan vlan-id
{source | intermediate | destination} uplink interface
vlan-id - ID of configured RSPAN VLAN. (Range: 2-4092)
Use the vlan rspan command to reserve a VLAN for RSPAN mirroring before
enabling RSPAN with this command.
source - Specifies this device as the source of remotely mirrored traffic.
intermediate - Specifies this device as an intermediate switch,
transparently passing mirrored traffic from one or more sources to one or
more destinations.
destination - Specifies this device as a switch configured with a destination
port which is to receive mirrored traffic for this session.
uplink - A port configured to receive or transmit remotely mirrored traffic.
interface - ethernet unit/port
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
– 458 –
Command Usage
◆ Only 802.1Q trunk or hybrid (i.e., general use) ports can be configured as an
RSPAN uplink port – access ports are not allowed (see switchport mode).
◆ Only one uplink port can be configured on a source switch, but there is no
limitation on the number of uplink ports configured on an intermediate or
destination switch.
◆ Only destination and uplink ports will be assigned by the switch as members of
this VLAN. Ports cannot be manually assigned to an RSPAN VLAN with the
switchport allowed vlan command. Nor can GVRP dynamically add port
members to an RSPAN VLAN. Also, note that the show vlan command will not
display any members for an RSPAN VLAN, but will only show configured RSPAN
VLAN identifiers.
Example
The following example enables RSPAN on VLAN 2, specifies this device as an RSPAN
destination switch, and the uplink interface as port 3:
Console(config)#rspan session 1 remote vlan 2 destination uplink ethernet 1/3

Console(config)#
no rspan session Use this command to delete a configured RSPAN session.
Syntax
no rspan session session-id
Command Mode
Command Usage
The no rspan session command must be used to disable an RSPAN VLAN before it
can be deleted from the VLAN database (see the vlan command).
Example
Console(config)#no rspan session 1
Console(config)#
– 459 –
show rspan Use this command to displays the configuration settings for an RSPAN session.
Syntax
show rspan session [session-id]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show rspan session
RSPAN Session ID : 1
Source Ports (mirrored ports) : None
RX Only : None
TX Only : None
BOTH : None
Destination Port (monitor port) : Eth 1/2
Destination Tagged Mode : Untagged
Switch Role : Destination
RSPAN VLAN : 2
RSPAN Uplink Ports : Eth 1/3
Operation Status : Up
Console#
– 460 –
15 Congestion Control Commands
The switch can set the maximum upload or download data transfer rate for any
port. It can control traffic storms by setting a maximum threshold for broadcast
traffic or multicast traffic. It can also set bounding thresholds for broadcast and
multicast storms which can be used to automatically trigger rate limits or to shut
down a port.
Table 87: Congestion Control Commands

Rate Limiting Sets the input and output rate limits for a port.
Storm Control Sets the traffic storm threshold for each port.
Automatic Traffic Control Sets thresholds for broadcast and multicast storms which can be used
to trigger configured rate limits or to shut down a port.
Rate Limit Commands

Rate limit commands allow the network manager to control the maximum rate for
traffic transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on
interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network.
Packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is

configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped.
Table 88: Rate Limit Commands

rate-limit Configures the maximum input or output rate for an IC

interface
– 461 –
Chapter 15 | Congestion Control Commands
Rate Limit Commands
rate-limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface. Use this command
without specifying a rate to enable rate limiting. Use the no form to disable rate
limiting.
Syntax
rate-limit {input | output} [rate]
no rate-limit {input | output}
input – Input rate for specified interface
output – Output rate for specified interface
rate – Maximum value in kbps.
(Range: 64 - 1,000,000 kbits per second for Gigabit Ethernet ports;
64 - 10,000,000 kbits per second for 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
Using both rate limiting and storm control on the same interface may lead to
unexpected results. It is therefore not advisable to use both of these commands on
the same interface.
Example
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 64
Console(config-if)#
Related Command
show interfaces switchport (416)
– 462 –
Storm Control Commands
Storm Control Commands

Storm control commands can be used to configure broadcast, multicast, and
unknown unicast storm control thresholds. Traffic storms may occur when a device
on your network is malfunctioning, or if application programs are not well
designed or properly configured. If there is too much traffic on your network,
performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt.
You can protect your network from traffic storms by setting a threshold for
broadcast, multicast or unknown unicast traffic. Any packets exceeding the
specified threshold will then be dropped.
Table 89: Rate Limit Commands

switchport packet-rate* Configures broadcast, multicast, and unknown IC

unicast storm control thresholds
show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational status NE, PE

switchport of an interface
* Enabling hardware-level storm control with this command on a port will disable software-level
automatic storm control on the same port if configured by the auto-traffic-control command.
switchport This command configures broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast storm
packet-rate control. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
switchport {broadcast | multicast | unknown-unicast} packet-rate rate
no switchport {broadcast | multicast | unknown-unicast}
broadcast - Specifies storm control for broadcast traffic.
multicast - Specifies storm control for multicast traffic.
unknown-unicast - Specifies storm control for unknown unicast traffic.
rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., packets per second.
(Range: 500-14881000 pps)
Default Setting
Broadcast Storm Control: Enabled, 500 pps
Multicast Storm Control: Disabled
Unknown Unicast Storm Control: Disabled
Command Mode
– 463 –
Automatic Traffic Control Commands
Command Usage
◆ When traffic exceeds the threshold specified for broadcast and multicast or
unknown unicast traffic, packets exceeding the threshold are dropped until the
rate falls back down beneath the threshold.
◆ Traffic storms can be controlled at the hardware level using this command or at
the software level using the auto-traffic-control command. However, only one
of these control types can be applied to a port. Enabling hardware-level storm
control on a port will disable automatic storm control on that port.
◆ The rate limits set by this command are also used by automatic storm control
when the control response is set to rate limiting by the auto-traffic-control
action command.
◆ Using both rate limiting and storm control on the same interface may lead to
unexpected results. It is therefore not advisable to use both of these commands
on the same interface.
Example
The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per
second:

Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 600
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands

Automatic Traffic Control (ATC) configures bounding thresholds for broadcast and
multicast storms which can be used to trigger configured rate limits or to shut
down a port.
Table 90: ATC Commands

Threshold Commands
auto-traffic-control Sets the time at which to apply the control response GC

apply-timer after ingress traffic has exceeded the upper
threshold
auto-traffic-control Sets the time at which to release the control GC

release-timer response after ingress traffic has fallen beneath the
lower threshold
auto-traffic-control* Enables automatic traffic control for broadcast or IC (Port)

multicast storms
– 464 –
Table 90: ATC Commands (Continued)

auto-traffic-control Sets the control action to limit ingress traffic or shut IC (Port)
action down the offending port
auto-traffic-control Sets the lower threshold for ingress traffic beneath IC (Port)
alarm-clear-threshold which a cleared storm control trap is sent
auto-traffic-control Sets the upper threshold for ingress traffic beyond IC (Port)
alarm-fire-threshold which a storm control response is triggered after the
apply timer expires
auto-traffic-control auto- Automatically releases a control response IC (Port)

control-release
auto-traffic-control Manually releases a control response PE

control-release
SNMP Trap Commands
snmp-server Sends a trap when broadcast traffic falls beneath IC (Port)

enable port-traps atc the lower threshold after a storm control response
broadcast-alarm-clear has been triggered
snmp-server Sends a trap when broadcast traffic exceeds the IC (Port)

enable port-traps atc upper threshold for automatic storm control
broadcast-alarm-fire
snmp-server Sends a trap when broadcast traffic exceeds the IC (Port)

enable port-traps atc upper threshold for automatic storm control and
broadcast-control-apply the apply timer expires
snmp-server Sends a trap when broadcast traffic falls beneath IC (Port)

enable port-traps atc the lower threshold after a storm control response
broadcast-control- has been triggered and the release timer expires
release
snmp-server Sends a trap when multicast traffic falls beneath the IC (Port)
enable port-traps atc lower threshold after a storm control response has
multicast-alarm-clear been triggered
snmp-server Sends a trap when multicast traffic exceeds the IC (Port)

enable port-traps atc upper threshold for automatic storm control
multicast-alarm-fire
snmp-server Sends a trap when multicast traffic exceeds the IC (Port)

enable port-traps atc upper threshold for automatic storm control and
multicast-control-apply the apply timer expires
snmp-server Sends a trap when multicast traffic falls beneath the IC (Port)
enable port-traps atc lower threshold after a storm control response has
multicast-control- been triggered and the release timer expires
release
ATC Display Commands
show auto-traffic-control Shows global configuration settings for automatic PE

storm control
show auto-traffic-control Shows interface configuration settings and storm PE
interface control status for the specified port
* Enabling automatic storm control on a port will disable hardware-level storm control on the
same port if configured by the switchport packet-rate command.
– 465 –
Usage Guidelines
ATC includes storm control for broadcast or multicast traffic. The control response
for either of these traffic types is the same, as shown in the following diagrams.
Figure 1: Storm Control by Limiting the Traffic Rate

TrafficControl Traffic without storm control
Apply Trap
Storm Alarm Storm Alarm Traffic with storm control
Traffic Fire TRAP Fire TRAP
[kpps]
StromAlarm
StromAlarm ClearTRAP
Alarm Fire
Threshold ClearTRAP
TrafficControl
（1～255kpps） Release Timer Release Trap
expired
(0～300sec)
AlarmClear
Threshold
（1～255kpps）
Apply Timer
expired Auto Storm Control
(0～300sec)
Time
The key elements of this diagram are described below:
◆ Alarm Fire Threshold – The highest acceptable traffic rate. When ingress traffic
exceeds the threshold, ATC sends a Storm Alarm Fire Trap and logs it.
◆ When traffic exceeds the alarm fire threshold and the apply timer expires, a
traffic control response is applied, and a Traffic Control Apply Trap is sent and
logged.
◆ Alarm Clear Threshold – The lower threshold beneath which a control response
can be automatically terminated after the release timer expires. When ingress
traffic falls below this threshold, ATC sends a Storm Alarm Clear Trap and logs it.
◆ When traffic falls below the alarm clear threshold after the release timer
expires, traffic control (for rate limiting) will be stopped and a Traffic Control
Release Trap sent and logged. Note that if the control action has shut down a
port, it can only be manually re-enabled using the auto-traffic-control control-
release command).
◆ The traffic control response of rate limiting can be released automatically or

manually. The control response of shutting down a port can only be released
manually.
– 466 –
Figure 2: Storm Control by Shutting Down a Port
The key elements of this diagram are the same as that described in the preceding
diagram, except that automatic release of the control response is not provided.
When traffic control is applied, you must manually re-enable the port.
Functional Limitations
Automatic storm control is a software level control function. Traffic storms can also
be controlled at the hardware level using the switchport packet-rate command.
However, only one of these control types can be applied to a port. Enabling
automatic storm control on a port will disable hardware-level storm control on that
port.
Threshold Commands
auto-traffic-control This command sets the time at which to apply the control response after ingress
apply-timer traffic has exceeded the upper threshold. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} apply-timer seconds
no auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} apply-timer
broadcast - Specifies automatic storm control for broadcast traffic.
multicast - Specifies automatic storm control for multicast traffic.
seconds - The interval after the upper threshold has been exceeded at
which to apply the control response. (Range: 1-300 seconds)
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
– 467 –
Command Usage
After the apply timer expires, a control action may be triggered as specified by the
auto-traffic-control action command and a trap message sent as specified by the
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control-apply command or snmp-
server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-apply command.
Example
This example sets the apply timer to 200 seconds for all ports.
Console(config)#auto-traffic-control broadcast apply-timer 200

Console(config)#
auto-traffic-control This command sets the time at which to release the control response after ingress
release-timer traffic has fallen beneath the lower threshold. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} release-timer seconds
no auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} release-timer
seconds - The time at which to release the control response after ingress
traffic has fallen beneath the lower threshold. (Range: 1-900 seconds)
Default Setting
900 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the delay after which the control response can be terminated.
The auto-traffic-control auto-control-release command must be used to enable or
disable the automatic release of a control response of rate-limiting. To re-enable a
port which has been shut down by automatic traffic control, you must manually re-
enable the port using the auto-traffic-control control-release command.
Example
This example sets the release timer to 800 seconds for all ports.
Console(config)#auto-traffic-control broadcast release-timer 800

Console(config)#
– 468 –
auto-traffic-control This command enables automatic traffic control for broadcast or multicast storms.
Syntax
[no] auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast}
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Automatic storm control can be enabled for either broadcast or multicast
traffic. It cannot be enabled for both of these traffic types at the same time.
◆ Automatic storm control is a software level control function. Traffic storms can
also be controlled at the hardware level using the switchport packet-rate
command. However, only one of these control types can be applied to a port.
Enabling automatic storm control on a port will disable hardware-level storm
control on that port.
Example
This example enables automatic storm control for broadcast traffic on port 1.

Console(config-if)#auto-traffic-control broadcast
Console(config-if)#
auto-traffic-control This command sets the control action to limit ingress traffic or shut down the
action offending port. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} action {rate-control | shutdown}
no auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} action
rate-control - If a control response is triggered, the rate of ingress traffic is
limited based on the threshold configured by the auto-traffic-control
alarm-clear-threshold command.
– 469 –
shutdown - If a control response is triggered, the port is administratively

disabled. A port disabled by automatic traffic control can only be manually
re-enabled.
Default Setting
rate-control
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When the upper threshold is exceeded and the apply timer expires, a control
response will be triggered based on this command.
◆ When the control response is set to rate limiting by this command, the rate
limits are determined by the auto-traffic-control alarm-clear-threshold
command.
◆ If the control response is to limit the rate of ingress traffic, it can be

automatically terminated once the traffic rate has fallen beneath the lower
threshold and the release timer has expired.
◆ If a port has been shut down by a control response, it will not be re-enabled by
automatic traffic control. It can only be manually re-enabled using the auto-
traffic-control control-release command.
Example
This example sets the control response for broadcast traffic on port 1.

Console(config-if)#auto-traffic-control broadcast action shutdown
Console(config-if)#
auto-traffic-control This command sets the lower threshold for ingress traffic beneath which a control
alarm-clear-threshold response for rate limiting will be released after the Release Timer expires, if so
configured by the auto-traffic-control auto-control-release command. Use the no
Syntax
auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} alarm-clear-threshold threshold
no auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} alarm-clear-threshold
threshold - The lower threshold for ingress traffic beneath which a cleared
storm control trap is sent. (Range: 1-255 kilo-packets per second)
– 470 –
Default Setting
128 kilo-packets per second
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Once the traffic rate falls beneath the lower threshold, a trap message may be
sent if configured by the snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-
clear command or snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-clear
command.
◆ If rate limiting has been configured as a control response, it will be

discontinued after the traffic rate has fallen beneath the lower threshold, and
the release timer has expired. Note that if a port has been shut down by a
control response, it will not be re-enabled by automatic traffic control. It can
only be manually re-enabled using the auto-traffic-control control-release
command.
Example
This example sets the clear threshold for automatic storm control for broadcast
traffic on port 1.

Console(config-if)#auto-traffic-control broadcast alarm-clear-threshold 155
Console(config-if)#
auto-traffic-control This command sets the upper threshold for ingress traffic beyond which a storm
alarm-fire-threshold control response is triggered after the apply timer expires. Use the no form to
Syntax
auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} alarm-fire-threshold threshold
no auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} alarm-fire-threshold
threshold - The upper threshold for ingress traffic beyond which a storm
control response is triggered after the apply timer expires. (Range: 1-255
kilo-packets per second)
Default Setting
128 kilo-packets per second
Command Mode
– 471 –
Command Usage
◆ Once the upper threshold is exceeded, a trap message may be sent if
configured by the snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-fire
command or snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-fire command.
◆ After the upper threshold is exceeded, the control timer must first expire as
configured by the auto-traffic-control apply-timer command before a control
response is triggered if configured by the auto-traffic-control action command.
Example
This example sets the trigger threshold for automatic storm control for broadcast
traffic on port 1.

Console(config-if)#auto-traffic-control broadcast alarm-fire-threshold 255
Console(config-if)#
auto-traffic-control This command automatically releases a control response of rate-limiting after the
auto-control-release time specified in the auto-traffic-control release-timer command has expired.
Syntax
auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} auto-control-release
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command can be used to automatically stop a control response of rate-
limiting after the specified action has been triggered and the release timer has
expired.
◆ To release a control response which has shut down a port after the specified
action has been triggered and the release timer has expired, use the auto-
traffic-control control-release command.
Example
Console(config-if)#auto-traffic-control broadcast auto-control-release
Console(config-if)#
– 472 –
auto-traffic-control This command manually releases a control response.

control-release
Syntax
auto-traffic-control {broadcast | multicast} control-release
interface interface
interface
ethernet unit/port-list
nonconsecutive port numbers with a comma and no spaces; or use
a hyphen to designate a range of port numbers. (Range: 1-28/52)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command can be used to manually stop a control response of rate-limiting or
port shutdown any time after the specified action has been triggered.
Example
Console#auto-traffic-control broadcast control-release interface ethernet 1/1
Console#
SNMP Trap Commands
snmp-server This command sends a trap when broadcast traffic falls beneath the lower
enable port-traps atc threshold after a storm control response has been triggered. Use the no form to
broadcast-alarm-clear disable this trap.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-clear
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 473 –
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-clear
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
auto-traffic-control action (469)
auto-traffic-control alarm-clear-threshold (470)
snmp-server This command sends a trap when broadcast traffic exceeds the upper threshold for
enable port-traps atc automatic storm control. Use the no form to disable this trap.
broadcast-alarm-fire
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-fire
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-fire
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
auto-traffic-control alarm-fire-threshold (471)
snmp-server This command sends a trap when broadcast traffic exceeds the upper threshold for
enable port-traps atc automatic storm control and the apply timer expires. Use the no form to disable
broadcast-control- this trap.
apply
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control-apply
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 474 –
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control-apply
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
auto-traffic-control apply-timer (467)
snmp-server This command sends a trap when broadcast traffic falls beneath the lower
enable port-traps atc threshold after a storm control response has been triggered and the release timer
broadcast-control- expires. Use the no form to disable this trap.
release
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control-release
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control-
release
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
auto-traffic-control release-timer (468)
snmp-server This command sends a trap when multicast traffic falls beneath the lower threshold
enable port-traps atc after a storm control response has been triggered. Use the no form to disable this
multicast-alarm-clear trap.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-clear
Default Setting
Disabled
– 475 –
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-clear
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
snmp-server This command sends a trap when multicast traffic exceeds the upper threshold for
enable port-traps atc automatic storm control. Use the no form to disable this trap.
multicast-alarm-fire
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-fire
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-fire
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
snmp-server This command sends a trap when multicast traffic exceeds the upper threshold for
enable port-traps atc automatic storm control and the apply timer expires. Use the no form to disable
multicast-control- this trap.
apply
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-apply
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 476 –
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-apply
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
auto-traffic-control apply-timer (467)
snmp-server This command sends a trap when multicast traffic falls beneath the lower threshold
enable port-traps atc after a storm control response has been triggered and the release timer expires.
multicast-control- Use the no form to disable this trap.
release
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-release
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-
release
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
auto-traffic-control release-timer (468)
ATC Display Commands
show auto-traffic- This command shows global configuration settings for automatic storm control.
control
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show auto-traffic-control
Storm-control: Broadcast
Apply-timer (sec) : 300
– 477 –
release-timer (sec) : 900
Storm-control: Multicast
Apply-timer(sec) : 300
release-timer(sec) : 900
Console#
show auto-traffic- This command shows interface configuration settings and storm control status for
control interface the specified port.
Syntax
show auto-traffic-control interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show auto-traffic-control interface ethernet 1/1
Eth 1/1 Information
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Storm Control: Broadcast Multicast
State: Disabled Disabled
Action: rate-control rate-control
Auto Release Control: Disabled Disabled
Alarm Fire Threshold(Kpps): 128 128
Alarm Clear Threshold(Kpps):128 128
Trap Storm Fire: Disabled Disabled
Trap Storm Clear: Disabled Disabled
Trap Traffic Apply: Disabled Disabled
Trap Traffic Release: Disabled Disabled
Console#
– 478 –
16 Loopback Detection Commands
The switch can be configured to detect general loopback conditions caused by

hardware problems or faulty protocol settings. When enabled, a control frame is
transmitted on the participating ports, and the switch monitors inbound traffic to
see if the frame is looped back.
Table 91: Loopback Detection Commands

loopback-detection Enables loopback detection globally on the switch GC, IC

or on a specified interface
loopback-detection Specifies the response to take for a detected GC

action loopback condition
loopback-detection Specifies the interval to wait before releasing an GC

recover-time interface from shutdown state
loopback-detection Specifies the interval at which to transmit loopback GC

transmit-interval detection control frames
loopback detection trap Configures the switch to send a trap when a GC

loopback condition is detected or the switch
recover from a loopback
loopback-detection Manually releases all interfaces currently shut down PE

release by the loopback detection feature
show loopback- Shows loopback detection configuration settings PE

detection for the switch or for a specified interface
Usage Guidelines
◆ The default settings for the control frame transmit interval and recover time
may be adjusted to improve performance for your specific environment. The
shutdown mode may also need to be changed once you determine what kind
of packets are being looped back.
◆ General loopback detection provided by the commands described in this

section and loopback detection provided by the spanning tree protocol cannot
both be enabled at the same time. If loopback detection is enabled for the
spanning tree protocol, general loopback detection cannot be enabled on the
same interface.
◆ When a loopback event is detected on an interface or when a interface is

released from a shutdown state caused by a loopback event, a trap message is
sent and the event recorded in the system log.
◆ Loopback detection must be enabled both globally and on an interface for

loopback detection to take effect.
– 479 –
Chapter 16 | Loopback Detection Commands
loopback-detection This command enables loopback detection globally on the switch or on a specified
interface. Use the no form to disable loopback detection.
Syntax
[no] loopback-detection
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
Loopback detection must be enabled globally for the switch by this command and
enabled for a specific interface for this function to take effect.
Example
This example enables general loopback detection on the switch, disables loopback
detection provided for the spanning tree protocol on port 1, and then enables
general loopback detection for that port.
Console(config)#loopback-detection
Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree loopback-detection
Console(config-if)#loopback-detection
Console(config)#
loopback-detection This command specifies the protective action the switch takes when a loopback
action condition is detected. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
loopback-detection action {block | none | shutdown}
no loopback-detection action
block - When a loopback is detected on a port which a member of a
specific VLAN, packets belonging to that VLAN are dropped at the
offending port.
none - No action is taken.
shutdown - Shuts down the interface.
Default Setting
Shut down
Command Mode
– 480 –
Command Usage
◆ When the response to a detected loopback condition is set to block user traffic,
loopback detection control frames may untagged or tagged depending on the
port’s VLAN membership type.
◆ When the response to a detected loopback condition is set to block user traffic,
ingress filtering for the port is enabled automatically if not already enabled by
the switchport ingress-filtering command. The port’s original setting for ingress
filtering will be restored when loopback detection is disabled.
◆ Use the loopback-detection recover-time command to set the time to wait

before re-enabling an interface shut down by the loopback detection process.
◆ When the loopback detection response is changed, any ports placed in

shutdown state by the loopback detection process will be immediately
restored to operation regardless of the remaining recover time.
Example
This example sets the loopback detection mode to block user traffic.
Console(config)#loopback-detection action block

Console(config)#
loopback-detection This command specifies the interval to wait before the switch automatically
recover-time releases an interface from shutdown state. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
loopback-detection recover-time seconds
no loopback-detection recover-time
seconds - Recovery time from shutdown state. (Range: 60-1,000,000
seconds, or 0 to disable automatic recovery)
Default Setting
60 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When the loopback detection mode is changed, any ports placed in shutdown
state by the loopback detection process will be immediately restored to
operation regardless of the remaining recover time.
◆ If the recovery time is set to zero, all ports placed in shutdown state can be
restored to operation using the loopback-detection release command. To
– 481 –
restore a specific port, use the no shutdown command.
Example
Console(config)#loopback-detection recover-time 120
Console(config-if)#
loopback-detection This command specifies the interval at which to transmit loopback detection
transmit-interval control frames. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
loopback-detection transmit-interval seconds
no loopback-detection transmit-interval
seconds - The transmission interval for loopback detection control frames.
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#loopback-detection transmit-interval 60
Console(config)#
loopback detection This command sends a trap when a loopback condition is detected, or when the
trap switch recovers from a loopback condition. Use the no form to restore the default
state.
Syntax
loopback-detection trap [both | detect | none | recover]
no loopback-detection trap
both - Sends an SNMP trap message when a loopback condition is
detected, or when the switch recovers from a loopback condition.
detect - Sends an SNMP trap message when a loopback condition is
detected.
none - Does not send an SNMP trap for loopback detection or recovery.
recover - Sends an SNMP trap message when the switch recovers from a
loopback condition.
– 482 –
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
Refer to the loopback-detection recover-time command for information on
conditions which constitute loopback recovery.
Example
Console(config)#loopback-detection trap both
Console(config)#
loopback-detection This command releases all interfaces currently shut down by the loopback
release detection feature.
Syntax
loopback-detection release
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#loopback-detection release
Console(config)#
show loopback- This command shows loopback detection configuration settings for the switch or
detection for a specified interface.
Syntax
show loopback-detection [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 483 –
Example
Console#show loopback-detection
Loopback Detection Global Information
Global Status : Enabled
Transmit Interval : 10
Recover Time : 60
Action : Shutdown
Trap : None
Loopback Detection Port Information
Port Admin State Oper State
-------- ----------- ----------
Eth 1/ 1 Enabled Normal
Eth 1/ 2 Disabled Disabled
. Eth 1/ 3 Disabled Disabled
.
.
Console#show loopback-detection ethernet 1/1
Loopback Detection Information of Eth 1/1
Admin State : Enabled
Oper State : Normal
Looped VLAN : None
Console#
– 484 –
17 UniDirectional Link Detection
Commands
The switch can be configured to detect and disable unidirectional Ethernet fiber or
copper links. When enabled, the protocol advertises a port’s identity and learns
about its neighbors on a specific LAN segment; and stores information about its
neighbors in a cache. It can also send out a train of echo messages under
circumstances that require fast notifications or re-synchronization of the cached
information.
Table 92: UniDirectional Link Detection Commands

udld detection-interval Sets the amount of time the switch remains in GC

detection state after discovering a neighbor
udld message-interval Configures the message interval between UDLD GC

probe messages
udld recovery Automatically recovers from UDLD disabled port GC

state after a period specified by the udld recovery-
interval command
udld recovery-interval Specifies the period after which to automatically GC

recover from UDLD disabled port state
udld aggressive Sets UDLD to aggressive mode on an interface IC
udld port Enables UDLD on a port IC
show udld Shows UDLD configuration settings and operational PE

status
udld detection- This command sets the amount of time the switch remains in detection state after
interval discovering a neighbor. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
udld detection-interval detection-interval
no detection-interval
detection-interval – The amount of time the switch remains in detection
state after discovering a neighbor through UDLD. (Range: 5-255 seconds)
Default Setting
5 seconds
Command Mode
– 485 –
Chapter 17 | UniDirectional Link Detection Commands
Command Usage
When a neighbor device is discovered by UDLD, the switch enters “detection state”
and remains in this state for specified detection-interval. After the detection-
interval expires, the switch tries to decide whether or the link is unidirectional
based on the information collected during “detection state.”
Example
Console(config)#udld detection-interval 10
Console(config)#
udld message-interval This command configures the message interval between UDLD probe messages for
ports in the advertisement phase and determined to be bidirectional. Use the no
Syntax
udld message-interval message-interval
no message-interval
message-interval – The interval at which a port sends UDLD probe
messages after linkup or detection phases. (Range: 7-90 seconds)
Default Setting
15 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
During the detection phase, messages are exchanged at the maximum rate of one
per second. After that, if the protocol reaches a stable state and determines that the
link is bidirectional, the message interval is increased to a configurable value based
on a curve known as M1(t), a time-based function described in RFC 5171.
If the link is deemed anything other than bidirectional at the end of the detection
phase, this curve becomes a flat line with a fixed value of Mfast (7 seconds).
If the link is instead deemed bidirectional, the curve will use Mfast for the first four
subsequent message transmissions and then transition to an Mslow value for all
other steady-state transmissions. Mslow is the value configured by this command.
Example
This example sets the message interval to 10 seconds.
Console(config)#udld message-interval 10
Console(config)#
– 486 –
udld recovery This command configures the switch to automatically recover from UDLD disabled
port state after a period specified by the udld recovery-interval command. Use the
no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] udld recovery
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
When automatic recovery state is changed by this command, any ports shut down
by UDLD will be reset.
Example
Console(config)#udld recovery
Console(config)#
udld recovery-interval This command specifies the period after which to automatically recover from UDLD
disabled port state. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
udld recovery-interval recovery-interval

no recovery-interval
recovery-interval – The interval after which a port is reset after being placed
in UDLD disabled state. (Range: 30-86400 seconds)
Default Setting
7 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command is only applicable when automatic recovery has been enabled
with the udld recovery command.
◆ When the recovery interval is changed by this command, any ports shut down
by UDLD will be reset.
– 487 –
Example
Console(config)#udld recovery-interval 15
Console(config)#
udld aggressive This command sets UDLD to aggressive mode on an interface. Use the no form to
Syntax
[no] udld aggressive
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet Port)
Command Usage
UDLD can function in two modes: normal mode and aggressive mode.
◆ In normal mode, determination of link status at the end of the detection

process is always based on information received in UDLD messages: whether
that’s information about the exchange of proper neighbor identification or the
absence of such. Hence, albeit bound by a timer, normal mode determinations
are always based on gleaned information, and as such are “event-based.” If no
such information can be obtained (e.g., because of a bidirectional loss of
connectivity), UDLD follows a conservative approach to minimize false
positives during the detection process and deems a port to be in
“undetermined” state. In other words, normal mode will shut down a port only
if it can explicitly determine that the associated link is faulty for an extended
period of time.
◆ In aggressive mode, UDLD will also shut down a port if it loses bidirectional
connectivity with the neighbor for the same extended period of time (as that
mentioned above for normal mode) and subsequently fails repeated last-resort
attempts to re-establish communication with the other end of the link. This
mode of operation assumes that loss of communication with the neighbor is a
meaningful network event in itself, and a symptom of a serious connectivity
problem. Because this type of detection can be event-less, and lack of
information cannot always be associated to an actual malfunction of the link,
this mode is recommended only in certain scenarios (typically only on point-to-
point links where no communication failure between two neighbors is
admissible).
– 488 –
Example
This example enables UDLD aggressive mode on port 1.

Console(config-if)#udld aggressive
Console(config-if)#
udld port This command enables UDLD on a port. Use the no form to disable UDLD on an
interface.
Syntax
[no] udld port
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet Port)
Command Usage
◆ UDLD requires that all the devices connected to the same LAN segment be
running the protocol in order for a potential mis-configuration to be detected
and for prompt corrective action to be taken.
◆ Whenever a UDLD device learns about a new neighbor or receives a

resynchronization request from an out-of-synch neighbor, it (re)starts the
detection process on its side of the connection and sends N echo messages in
reply. (This mechanism implicitly assumes that N packets are sufficient to get
through a link and reach the other end, even though some of them might get
dropped during the transmission.)
Since this behavior must be the same on all the neighbors, the sender of the
echoes expects to receive an echo in reply. If the detection process ends
without the proper echo information being received, the link is considered to
be unidirectional.
Example
Console(config-if)#udld port
Console(config-if)#
– 489 –
show udld This command shows UDLD configuration settings and operational status for the
switch or for a specified interface.
Syntax
show udld [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show udld
Message Interval : 15
Detection Interval : 5 seconds
Recovery : Disabled
Recovery Interval : 300 seconds
Interface UDLD ModeOper State Msg Invl

Port State Det Invl
--------- -------- ---------- ------------------------------------- --------
Eth 1/ 1 Disabled Normal Disabled 7 s
Unknown 5 s
Unknown 5 s
Unknown 5 s
Unknown 5 s
Unknown 5 s
.
.
.
Console#show udld interface ethernet 1/1
Interface UDLD Mode Oper State Msg Invl
Port State Det Invl
--------- -------- ---------- ------------------------------------- --------
Unknown 5 s
Console#
Table 93: show udld - display description

Field Description
Message Interval The interval between UDLD probe messages for ports in advertisement phase
Detection Interval The period the switch remains in detection state after discovering a neighbor
Recovery Shows if automatic recovery from UDLD disabled port state is enabled
– 490 –
Table 93: show udld - display description (Continued)

Field Description
Recovery Interval Shows the period after which to recover from UDLD disabled port state if
automatic recovery is enabled
UDLD Shows if UDLD is enabled or disabled on a port
Mode Shows if UDLD is functioning in Normal or Aggressive mode
Oper State Shows the UDLD operational state (Disabled, Link down, Link up,
Advertisement, Detection, Disabled port, Advertisement - Single neighbor,
Advertisement - Multiple neighbors)
Port State Shows the UDLD port state (Unknown, Bidirectional, Unidirectional, Transmit-
to-receive loop, Mismatch with neighbor state reported, Neighbor's echo is
empty)
The state is Unknown if the link is down or not connected to a UDLD-capable
device. The state is Bidirectional if the link has a normal two-way connection to
a UDLD-capable device. All other states indicate mis-wiring.
Msg Invl The interval between UDLD probe messages used for the indicated operational
state
Det Invl The period the switch remains in detection state after discovering a neighbor
Timeout The time that UDLD waits for echoes from a neighbor device during the
detection window
– 491 –
– 492 –
18 Address Table Commands
These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified
addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.
Table 94: Address Table Commands

mac-address-table Sets the aging time of the address table GC

aging-time
mac-address-table Sets the hash lookup depth of MAC address table GC

hash-lookup-depth
mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC
clear collision-mac- Removes all entries from the collision MAC address PE
address-table table
clear mac-address-table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding PE

dynamic database
show collision-mac- Shows a shows a list of MAC addresses that cannot PE

address-table be learned by the switch due to hash collisions
show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database PE
show mac-address-table Shows the aging time for the address table PE
aging-time
show mac-address-table Shows the number of MAC addresses used and the PE
count number of available MAC addresses
show mac-address-table Shows the hash lookup depth of MAC address table PE
hash-lookup-depth
mac-address-table This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the no form
aging-time to restore the default aging time.
Syntax
mac-address-table aging-time seconds
no mac-address-table aging-time
seconds - Aging time. (Range: 6-7200 seconds; 0 to disable aging)
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
– 493 –
Chapter 18 | Address Table Commands
Command Usage
The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.
Example
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100
Console(config)#
mac-address-table This command sets the hash lookup depth used when searching the MAC address
hash-lookup-depth table. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth depth
no mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth
depth - The depth used in the hash lookup process. (Range: 4-32, in
multiples of 4)
Default Setting
4
Command Mode
Command Usage
Using the default depth of 4, MAC address collisions tend to increase once more
than 8K entries have been learned. Setting the depth to a larger value reduces the
occurrence of hash collisions, but can also decrease forwarding performance.
Example
Console(config)#mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth 5
Console(config)#
– 494 –
mac-address-table This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use the no
static form to remove an address.
Syntax
mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface vlan vlan-id [action]
no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id
mac-address - MAC address.
interface
ethernet unit/port
action -
delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.
permanent - Assignment is permanent.
Default Setting
No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent.
Command Mode
Command Usage
The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a
specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table.
Static addresses have the following characteristics:
◆ Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given
interface link is down.
◆ Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored
and will not be written to the address table.
◆ A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed
with the no form of this command.
Example
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface ethernet
1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset
Console(config)#
– 495 –
clear collision-mac- This command removes all entries from the collision MAC address table.
address-table
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear collision-mac-address-table
Console#
clear mac-address- This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database.
table dynamic
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Even if a hash collision for a MAC address is resolved, entries in collision MAC
address table are not removed until this command is issued to reset the table, or
the system is reset.
Example
Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic
Console#
show collision-mac- This command shows a list of MAC addresses that cannot be learned by the switch
address-table due to hash collisions.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show collision-mac-address-table
MAC Address VLAN Collision Count
----------------- ----- ----------------
90-e6-ba-cb-cd-d6 1 2
Total collision mac number: 1
Console#
– 496 –
show mac-address- This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
table
Syntax
show mac-address-table [address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface]
[vlan vlan-id]
[sort {address | vlan | interface}]
mac-address - MAC address.
mask - Bits to match in the address.
interface
ethernet unit/port
sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each
interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types:
■ Learn - Dynamic address entries
■ Config - Static entry
■ Security - Port Security
◆ The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit

mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified MAC
address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent binary bit “0” means
to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For example, a mask of 00-00-00-
00-00-00 means an exact match, and a mask of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF means “any.”
◆ The maximum number of address entries is 16K.
Example
Console#show mac-address-table
Interface MAC Address VLAN Type Life Time
--------- ----------------- ---- -------- -----------------
CPU 00-E0-00-00-00-01 1 CPU Delete on Reset
Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-0C-10-90-09 1 Learn Delete on Timeout
– 497 –
Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-29-94-34-64 1 Learn Delete on Timeout

Console#
show mac-address- This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.
table aging-time
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show mac-address-table aging-time
Aging Status : Enabled
Aging Time: 300 sec.
Console#
show mac-address- This command shows the number of MAC addresses used and the number of
table count available MAC addresses for the overall system or for an interface.
Syntax
show mac-address-table count [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show mac-address-table count interface ethernet 1/1
MAC Entries for Eth 1/1

Total Address Count :0
Static Address Count :0
Dynamic Address Count :0
Console#show mac-address-table count
Compute the number of MAC Address...
– 498 –
Maximum number of MAC Address which can be created in the system:

Total Number of MAC Address : 16384
Number of Static MAC Address : 1024
Current number of entries which have been created in the system:

Total Number of MAC Address : 3
Number of Static MAC Address : 1
Number of Dynamic MAC Address : 2
Console#
show mac-address- This command shows the hash lookup depth used when searching the MAC
table hash-lookup- address table.
depth
Syntax
show mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth
Configured Hash Lookup Depth: 4
Activated Hash Lookup Depth: 4
Console#
– 499 –
– 500 –
19 Spanning Tree Commands
This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)
globally for the switch, and commands that configure STA for the selected
interface.
Table 95: Spanning Tree Commands

spanning-tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC
spanning-tree Configures spanning tree operation to be compatible with GC

cisco-prestandard Cisco prestandard versions
spanning-tree forward-time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC
spanning-tree hello-time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC
spanning-tree max-age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC
spanning-tree mode Configures STP, RSTP or MSTP mode GC
spanning-tree pathcost Configures the path cost method for RSTP/MSTP GC

method
spanning-tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC
spanning-tree Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC

mst configuration
spanning-tree Floods BPDUs to all other ports or just to all other ports in GC
system-bpdu-flooding the same VLAN when global spanning tree is disabled
spanning-tree tc-prop Configures a topology change propagation domain GC
spanning-tree Configures the transmission limit for RSTP/MSTP GC

transmission-limit
max-hops Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the MST

region before a BPDU is discarded
mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance MST
mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST
name Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree MST
revision Configures the revision number for the multiple spanning MST
tree
spanning-tree bpdu-filter Filters BPDUs for edge ports IC
spanning-tree bpdu-guard Shuts down an edge port if it receives a BPDU IC
spanning-tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface IC
spanning-tree edge-port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC
spanning-tree link-type Configures the link type for RSTP/MSTP IC
– 501 –
Chapter 19 | Spanning Tree Commands
Table 95: Spanning Tree Commands (Continued)

spanning-tree Enables BPDU loopback detection for a port IC

loopback-detection
spanning-tree loopback- Configures the response for loopback detection to block IC

detection action user traffic or shut down the interface
spanning-tree loopback- Configures loopback release mode for a port IC

detection release-mode
spanning-tree Enables BPDU loopback SNMP trap notification for a port IC

loopback-detection trap
spanning-tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST IC
spanning-tree Configures the priority of an instance in the MST IC

mst port-priority
spanning-tree Floods BPDUs to other ports when global spanning tree is IC

port-bpdu-flooding disabled
spanning-tree port-priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface IC
spanning-tree root-guard Prevents a designated port from passing superior BPDUs IC
spanning-tree Disables spanning tree for an interface IC

spanning-disabled
spanning-tree tc-prop-stop Stops propagation of topology change information IC
spanning-tree Manually releases a port placed in discarding state by PE

loopback-detection release loopback-detection
spanning-tree Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format PE

protocol-migration
show spanning-tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common PE

spanning tree (i.e., overall bridge), a selected interface, or
an instance within the multiple spanning tree
show spanning-tree Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration PE

mst configuration
show spanning-tree tc-prop Shows configuration of topology change propagation PE

domains
spanning-tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch. Use
the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree
Default Setting
Spanning tree is enabled.
Command Mode
– 502 –
Command Usage
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable network
loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This
allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STA-compliant
switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists
between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which
automatically take over when a primary link goes down.
Example
This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch:
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#
spanning-tree This command configures spanning tree operation to be compatible with Cisco
cisco-prestandard prestandard versions. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
[no] spanning-tree cisco-prestandard
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
Cisco prestandard versions prior to Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SEC do not fully
follow the IEEE standard, causing some state machine procedures to function
incorrectly. The command forces the spanning tree protocol to function in a
manner compatible with Cisco prestandard versions.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree cisco-prestandard
Console(config)#
spanning-tree This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this
forward-time switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree forward-time seconds
no spanning-tree forward-time
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1].
– 503 –
Default Setting
15 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a port will wait before
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting
information that would make it return to the discarding state; otherwise, temporary
data loops might result.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20
Console(config)#
spanning-tree This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this
hello-time switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree hello-time time
no spanning-tree hello-time
time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).
The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) - 1].
Default Setting
2 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits
a configuration message.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5
Console(config)#
Related Commands
spanning-tree forward-time (503)
spanning-tree max-age (505)
– 504 –
spanning-tree This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this
max-age switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-age seconds
no spanning-tree max-age
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].
The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].
Default Setting
20 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconverge. All device
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a
root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the
network.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40
Console(config)#
Related Commands
spanning-tree forward-time (503)
spanning-tree hello-time (504)
spanning-tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no form to
Syntax
spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp | mstp}
no spanning-tree mode
stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
mstp - Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)
– 505 –
Default Setting
rstp
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Spanning Tree Protocol
This option uses RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode. It uses RSTP for the
internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs. This creates one
spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple VLANs are
implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN members may be
inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus isolating group
members. When operating multiple VLANs, we recommend selecting the MSTP
option.
◆ Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the
incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol
messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:
■ STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s migration
delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge
and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.
■ RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP
BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration delay
timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.
◆ Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
■ To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network, you must
configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration,
allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances.
■ A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible
VLAN instance assignments.
■ Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing

modes stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts
the system in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.
Example
The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp

Console(config)#
– 506 –
spanning-tree This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and
pathcost method Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}
no spanning-tree pathcost method
long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.
This method is based on the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.
This method is based on the IEEE 802.1 Spanning Tree Protocol.
Default Setting
Long method
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices.
Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media,
and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. Note that path cost
(page 515) takes precedence over port priority (page 523).
◆ The path cost methods apply to all spanning tree modes (STP, RSTP and MSTP).
Specifically, the long method can be applied to STP since this mode is
supported by a backward compatible mode of RSTP.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long
Console(config)#
spanning-tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch. Use
the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree priority priority
no spanning-tree priority
priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options:
0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960,
45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440)
Default Setting
32768
– 507 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port.
The device with the highest priority (i.e., lower numeric value) becomes the STA
root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the
lowest MAC address will then become the root device.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000
Console(config)#
spanning-tree This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) configuration mode.
mst configuration
Default Setting
No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance.
The region name is set the switch’s MAC address.
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration
Console(config-mstp)#
Related Commands
mst vlan (512)
mst priority (511)
name (512)
revision (513)
max-hops (510)
spanning-tree This command configures the system to flood BPDUs to all other ports on the
system-bpdu-flooding switch or just to all other ports in the same VLAN when spanning tree is disabled
globally on the switch or disabled on a specific port. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding {to-all | to-vlan}
no spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding
to-all - Floods BPDUs to all other ports on the switch.
to-vlan - Floods BPDUs to all other ports within the receiving port’s native
VLAN (i.e., as determined by port’s PVID).
– 508 –
Default Setting
Floods to all other ports in the same VLAN.
Command Mode
Command Usage
The spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding command has no effect if BPDU
flooding is disabled on a port (see the spanning-tree port-bpdu-flooding
command).
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding
Console(config)#
spanning-tree tc-prop This command configures a topology change propagation domain. Use the no
form to remove a propagation domain.
Syntax
spanning-tree tc-prop group group-id {ethernet interface |
port-channel trunk-id}
group-id - Group identifier. (Range: 1-255)
interface - unit/port
port - Port number or list of ports. To enter a list, separate
nonconsecutive port identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a
hyphen to designate a range of ports. (Range: 1-28/52)
trunk-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-16)
Default Setting
All ports and trunks belong to a common group.
Command Mode
Command Usage
A port can only belong to one group. When an interface is added to a group, it is
removed from the default group. When a TCN BPDU or BPDU with the TC flag set is
received on an interface, that interface will only notify members in same group to
propagate this topology change.
– 509 –
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree tc-prop group 1 ethernet 1/1-5
Console(config)#
spanning-tree This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of
transmission-limit consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree transmission-limit count
no spanning-tree transmission-limit
count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4
Console(config)#
max-hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a
BPDU is discarded. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
max-hops hop-number
hop-number - Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree.
(Range: 1-40)
Default Setting
20
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols. Therefore,
the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never changed. However, each
– 510 –
spanning tree instance within a region, and the internal spanning tree (IST) that
connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of
bridges that will propagate a BPDU. Each bridge decrements the hop count by one
before passing on the BPDU. When the hop count reaches zero, the message is
dropped.
Example
Console(config-mstp)#max-hops 30
mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance. Use the no form
Syntax
mst instance-id priority priority
no mst instance-id priority
instance-id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-4094)
priority - Priority of the a spanning tree instance.
(Range: 0-61440 in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384,
20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344,
61440)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
◆ MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the
specified instance. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lowest numerical
value) becomes the MSTI root device. However, if all devices have the same
priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root
device.
◆ You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of
0, or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384.
Example
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 priority 4096
– 511 –
mst vlan This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance. Use the no form to remove
the specified VLANs. Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all
VLANs.
Syntax
[no] mst instance-id vlan vlan-range
vlan-range - Range of VLANs. (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
none
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances. MSTP
generates a unique spanning tree for each instance. This provides multiple
pathways across the network, thereby balancing the traffic load, preventing
wide-scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails, and
allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance.
◆ By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree (MSTI 0) that
connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region. This switch supports up
to 32 instances. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general
area of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges
within the same MSTI Region (page 512) with the same set of instances, and the
same instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also, note that
RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all regions to the
Common Spanning Tree.
Example
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 2-5
name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which
this switch is located. Use the no form to clear the name.
Syntax
name name
name - Name of the spanning tree.
Default Setting
Switch’s MAC address
– 512 –
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
The MST region name and revision number (page 513) are used to designate a
unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device such as this
switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the same region must
be configured with the same MST instances.
Example
Console(config-mstp)#name R&D
Related Commands
revision (513)
revision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree
configuration of this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
revision number
number - Revision number of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
The MST region name (page 512) and revision number are used to designate a
unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device such as this
switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the same region must
be configured with the same MST instances.
Example
Console(config-mstp)#revision 1
Related Commands
name (512)
– 513 –
spanning-tree This command filters all BPDUs received on an edge port. Use the no form to
bpdu-filter disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree bpdu-filter
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command filters all Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) received on an
interface to save CPU processing time. This function is designed to work in
conjunction with edge ports which should only connect end stations to the
switch, and therefore do not need to process BPDUs. However, note that if a
trunking port connected to another switch or bridging device is mistakenly
configured as an edge port, and BPDU filtering is enabled on this port, this
might cause a loop in the spanning tree.
◆ Before enabling BPDU Filter, the interface must first be configured as an edge
port with the spanning-tree edge-port command.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree bpdu-filter
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
spanning-tree edge-port (517)
spanning-tree This command shuts down an edge port (i.e., an interface set for fast forwarding) if
bpdu-guard it receives a BPDU. Use the no form without any keywords to disable this feature, or
with a keyword to restore the default settings.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpdu-guard [auto-recovery [interval interval]]
no spanning-tree bpdu-guard [auto-recovery [interval]]
auto-recovery - Automatically re-enables an interface after the specified
interval.
interval - The time to wait before re-enabling an interface. (Range: 30-86400
seconds)
– 514 –
Default Setting
BPDU Guard: Disabled
Auto-Recovery: Disabled
Auto-Recovery Interval: 300 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ An edge port should only be connected to end nodes which do not generate
BPDUs. If a BPDU is received on an edge port, this indicates an invalid network
configuration, or that the switch may be under attack by a hacker. If an
interface is shut down by BPDU Guard, it must be manually re-enabled using
the no spanning-tree spanning-disabled command if the auto-recovery
interval is not specified.
◆ Before enabling BPDU Guard, the interface must be configured as an edge port
with the spanning-tree edge-port command. Also note that if the edge port
attribute is disabled on an interface, BPDU Guard will also be disabled on that
interface.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree bpdu-guard
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
spanning-tree edge-port (517)
spanning-tree spanning-disabled (525)
spanning-tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface.
Use the no form to restore the default auto-configuration mode.
Syntax
spanning-tree cost cost
no spanning-tree cost
cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 0 for auto-configuration, 1-65535
for short path cost method11, 1-200,000,000 for long path cost method)
Table 96: Recommended STA Path Cost Range
Port Type Short Path Cost Long Path Cost
(IEEE 802.1D-1998) (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
Ethernet 50-600 200,000-20,000,000
Fast Ethernet 10-60 20,000-2,000,000
– 515 –
Table 96: Recommended STA Path Cost Range (Continued)

(IEEE 802.1D-1998) (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
Gigabit Ethernet 3-10 2,000-200,000
10G Ethernet 1-5 200-20,000
Default Setting
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on
each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown below. Path
cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost
method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w
standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.
Table 97: Default STA Path Costs

(IEEE 802.1D-1998) (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
Ethernet 65,535 1,000,000
Fast Ethernet 65,535 100,000
Gigabit Ethernet 10,000 10,000
10G Ethernet 1,000 1,000
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best
path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports
attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower
media.
◆ Path cost takes precedence over port priority.
◆ When the path cost method (page 507) is set to short, the maximum value for
path cost is 65,535.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50
Console(config-if)#
11. Use the spanning-tree pathcost method command to set the path cost method.
– 516 –
spanning-tree This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to restore the
edge-port default.
Syntax
spanning-tree edge-port [auto]
no spanning-tree edge-port
auto - Automatically determines if an interface is an edge port.
Default Setting
Auto
Command Mode
Command Usage
You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the
end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding
loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state.
Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as
workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the
amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during
reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration
when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related time out
problems. However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports
connected to an end-node device.
Example
Console(config-if)#
spanning-tree This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple
link-type Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared}
no spanning-tree link-type
auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.
point-to-point - Point-to-point link.
shared - Shared medium.
Default Setting
auto
– 517 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly
one other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges.
◆ When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type from the
duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while a
half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.
◆ RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you designate
a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden. Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP,
this same restriction applies.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point
spanning-tree This command enables the detection and response to Spanning Tree loopback
loopback-detection BPDU packets on the port. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree loopback-detection
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If Port Loopback Detection is not enabled and a port receives it’s own BPDU,
then the port will drop the loopback BPDU according to IEEE Standard 802.1W-
2001 9.3.4 (Note 1).
◆ Port Loopback Detection will not be active if Spanning Tree is disabled on the
switch.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree loopback-detection
– 518 –
spanning-tree This command configures the response for loopback detection to block user traffic
loopback-detection or shut down the interface. Use the no form to restore the default.
action
Syntax
spanning-tree loopback-detection action {block | shutdown duration}
no spanning-tree loopback-detection action
block - Blocks user traffic.
shutdown - Shuts down the interface.
duration - The duration to shut down the interface.
Default Setting
block
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If an interface is shut down by this command, and the release mode is set to
“auto” with the spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode command, the
selected interface will be automatically enabled when the shutdown interval
has expired.
◆ If an interface is shut down by this command, and the release mode is set to
“manual,” the interface can be re-enabled using the spanning-tree
loopback-detection release command.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree loopback-detection action shutdown 600
spanning-tree This command configures the release mode for a port that was placed in the
loopback-detection discarding state because a loopback BPDU was received. Use the no form to restore
release-mode the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode {auto | manual}
no spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode
auto - Allows a port to automatically be released from the discarding state
when the loopback state ends.
manual - The port can only be released from the discarding state manually.
– 519 –
Default Setting
auto
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If the port is configured for automatic loopback release, then the port will only
be returned to the forwarding state if one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
■ The port receives any other BPDU except for it’s own, or;
■ The port’s link status changes to link down and then link up again, or;
■ The port ceases to receive it’s own BPDUs in a forward delay interval.
◆ If Port Loopback Detection is not enabled and a port receives it’s own BPDU,
then the port will drop the loopback BPDU according to IEEE Standard 802.1W-
2001 9.3.4 (Note 1).
◆ Port Loopback Detection will not be active if Spanning Tree is disabled on the
switch.
◆ When configured for manual release mode, then a link down / up event will not
release the port from the discarding state. It can only be released using the
spanning-tree loopback-detection release command.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode manual
Console(config-if)#
spanning-tree This command enables SNMP trap notification for Spanning Tree loopback BPDU
loopback-detection detections. Use the no form to restore the default.
trap
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree loopback-detection trap
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 520 –
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree loopback-detection trap
spanning-tree This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple
mst cost Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default auto-configuration mode.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance-id cost cost
no spanning-tree mst instance-id cost
cost - Path cost for an interface. (Range: 0 for auto-configuration, 1-65535
for short path cost method12, 1-200,000,000 for long path cost method)
The recommended path cost range is listed in Table 96 on page 515.
Default Setting
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on
each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown below. Path
cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost
method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w
standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535. The default path costs are
listed in Table 97 on page 516.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Each spanning-tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs.
◆ This command is used by the multiple spanning-tree algorithm to determine

the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to
interfaces attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to interfaces
with slower media.
◆ Use the no spanning-tree mst cost command to specify auto-configuration

mode.
◆ Path cost takes precedence over interface priority.
Example
Console(config)#interface Ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 cost 50
Console(config-if)#
12. Use the spanning-tree pathcost method command to set the path cost method.
– 521 –
Related Commands
spanning-tree mst port-priority (522)
spanning-tree This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the
mst port-priority Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority priority
no spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority
priority - Priority for an interface. (Range: 0-240 in steps of 16)
Default Setting
128
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple
spanning-tree. If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same, the
interface with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an
active link in the spanning tree.
◆ Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority, the interface
with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
Example
Console(config)#interface Ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority 0
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
spanning-tree mst cost (521)
spanning-tree This command floods BPDUs to other ports when spanning tree is disabled globally
port-bpdu-flooding or disabled on a specific port. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree port-bpdu-flooding
Default Setting
Enabled
– 522 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When enabled, BPDUs are flooded to all other ports on the switch or to all other
ports within the receiving port’s native VLAN as specified by the spanning-tree
system-bpdu-flooding command.
◆ The spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding command has no effect if BPDU

flooding is disabled on a port by the spanning-tree port-bpdu-flooding
command.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-bpdu-flooding
Console(config-if)#
spanning-tree This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the no form to
port-priority restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree port-priority priority
no spanning-tree port-priority
priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)
Default Setting
128
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree
Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with
the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in
the spanning tree.
◆ Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest
numeric identifier will be enabled.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0
– 523 –
Related Commands
spanning-tree cost (515)
spanning-tree This command prevents a designated port from taking superior BPDUs into
root-guard account and allowing a new STP root port to be elected. Use the no form to disable
this feature.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree root-guard
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A bridge with a lower bridge identifier (or same identifier and lower MAC
address) can take over as the root bridge at any time.
◆ When Root Guard is enabled, and the switch receives a superior BPDU on this
port, it is set to the Discarding state until it stops receiving superior BPDUs for a
fixed recovery period. While in the discarding state, no traffic is forwarded
across the port.
◆ Root Guard can be used to ensure that the root bridge is not formed at a
suboptimal location. Root Guard should be enabled on any designated port
connected to low-speed bridges which could potentially overload a slower link
by taking over as the root port and forming a new spanning tree topology. It
could also be used to form a border around part of the network where the root
bridge is allowed.
◆ When spanning tree is initialized globally on the switch or on an interface, the

switch will wait for 20 seconds to ensure that the spanning tree has converged
before enabling Root Guard.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree root-guard
Console(config-if)#
– 524 –
spanning-tree This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface. Use
spanning-disabled the no form to re-enable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree spanning-disabled
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5.

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree spanning-disabled
Console(config-if)#
spanning-tree This command stops the propagation of topology change notifications (TCN). Use
tc-prop-stop the no form to allow propagation of TCN messages.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree tc-prop-stop
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
When this command is enabled on an interface, topology change information
originating from the interface will still be propagated.
This command should not be used on an interface which is purposely configured in

a ring topology.
Example
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree tc-prop-stop
Console(config-if)#
– 525 –
spanning-tree This command manually releases a port placed in discarding state by loopback-
loopback-detection detection.
release
Syntax
spanning-tree loopback-detection release interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
unit - Unit identifier. (Range: 1)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Use this command to release an interface from discarding state if loopback
detection release mode is set to “manual” by the spanning-tree loopback-detection
release-mode command and BPDU loopback occurs.
Example
Console#spanning-tree loopback-detection release ethernet 1/1
Console#
spanning-tree This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected
protocol-migration interface.
Syntax
spanning-tree protocol-migration interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or Topology
Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected interface to forced
STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the spanning-tree protocol-
– 526 –
migration command at any time to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU

format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e., RSTP or STP-compatible).
Example
Console#spanning-tree protocol-migration eth 1/5
Console#
show spanning-tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree (CST), for all
instances within the multiple spanning tree (MST), or for a specific instance within
the multiple spanning tree (MST).
Syntax
show spanning-tree [interface | mst instance-id | brief | stp-enabled-only]
interface
ethernet unit/port
instance-id - Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree.
(Range: 0-4094)
brief - Shows a summary of global and interface settings.
stp-enabled-only - Displays global settings, and settings for interfaces for
which STP is enabled.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to display the
spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree
(CST) and for every interface in the tree.
◆ Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the spanning tree
configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree (CST).
◆ Use the show spanning-tree mst command to display the spanning tree
configuration for all instances within the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST),
including global settings and settings for active interfaces.
– 527 –
◆ Use the show spanning-tree mst instance-id command to display the

spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree
(MST), including global settings and settings for all interfaces.
Example
Console#show spanning-tree
Spanning Tree Information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Spanning Tree Mode : MSTP
Spanning Tree Enabled/Disabled : Enabled
Instance : 0
VLANs Configured : 1-4094
Priority : 32768
Bridge Hello Time (sec.) : 2
Bridge Max. Age (sec.) : 20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.) : 15
Root Hello Time (sec.) : 2
Root Max. Age (sec.) : 20
Root Forward Delay (sec.) : 15
Max. Hops : 20
Remaining Hops : 20
Designated Root : 32768.0.0001ECF8D8C6
Current Root Port : 21
Current Root Cost : 100000
Number of Topology Changes : 5
Last Topology Change Time (sec.): 11409
Transmission Limit : 3
Path Cost Method : Long
Flooding Behavior : To VLAN
Cisco Prestandard : Disabled
---------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1 Information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Admin Status : Enabled
Role : Disabled
State : Discarding
External Admin Path Cost : 0
Internal Admin Path Cost : 0
External Oper Path Cost : 100000
Internal Oper Path Cost : 100000
Priority : 128
Designated Cost : 100000
Designated Port : 128.1
Designated Root : 32768.0.0001ECF8D8C6
Designated Bridge : 32768.0.123412341234
Forward Transitions : 4
Admin Edge Port : Disabled
Oper Edge Port : Disabled
Admin Link Type : Auto
Oper Link Type : Point-to-point
Flooding Behavior : Enabled
Spanning-Tree Status : Enabled
Loopback Detection Status : Enabled
Loopback Detection Release Mode : Auto
Loopback Detection Trap : Disabled
Loopback Detection Action : Block
Root Guard Status : Disabled
BPDU Guard Status : Disabled
BPDU Guard Auto Recovery : Disabled
BPDU Guard Auto Recovery Interval : 300
BPDU Filter Status : Disabled
.
– 528 –
.
.
This example shows a brief summary of global and interface setting for the
spanning tree.
Console#show spanning-tree brief

Spanning Tree Mode : RSTP
Spanning Tree Enabled/Disabled : Enabled
Designated Root : 32768.0000E8944000
Current Root Port (Eth) : 1/24
Current Root Cost : 10000
Interface Pri Designated Designated Oper STP Role State Oper

Bridge ID Port ID Cost Status Edge
--------- --- --------------------- ---------- -------- ------ ---- ----- ---
Eth 1/ 1 128 32768.0000E89382A0 128.1 100000 EN DESG FWD No
Eth 1/ 2 128 32768.0000E89382A0 128.2 10000 EN DISB BLK No
.
.
.
show spanning-tree This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree.
mst configuration
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show spanning-tree mst configuration
Mstp Configuration Information
--------------------------------------------------------------
Configuration Name : R&D
Revision Level :0
Instance VLANs
--------------------------------------------------------------
0 1-4094
Console#
show spanning-tree This command shows the configuration of topology change propagation domains.
tc-prop
Syntax
show spanning-tree tc-prop [group group-id]
group-id - Group identifier. (Range: 1-255)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 529 –
Example
Console#show spanning-tree tc-prop group 1
Group 1
Eth 1/ 1, Eth 1/ 2, Eth 1/ 3, Eth 1/ 4, Eth 1/ 5
Console#
– 530 –
20 ERPS Commands
The G.8032 recommendation, also referred to as Ethernet Ring Protection

Switching (ERPS), can be used to increase the availability and robustness of
Ethernet rings.
This chapter describes commands used to configure ERPS.
Table 98: ERPS Commands

erps Enables ERPS globally on the switch GC
erps domain Creates an ERPS ring and enters ERPS configuration mode GC
control-vlan Adds a Control VLAN to an ERPS ring ERPS
enable Activates the current ERPS ring ERPS
guard-timer Sets the timer to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS ERPS
messages
holdoff-timer Sets the timer to filter out intermittent link faults ERPS
major-domain Specifies the ERPS ring used for sending control packets ERPS
meg-level Sets the Maintenance Entity Group level for a ring ERPS
mep-monitor Specifies the CCM MEPs used to monitor the link on a ring node ERPS
node-id Sets the MAC address for a ring node ERPS
non-erps- Sends non-standard health-check packets when in protection state ERPS

dev-protect
non-revertive Enables non-revertive mode, which requires the protection state on ERPS
the RPL to manually cleared
propagate-tc Enables propagation of topology change messages from a secondary ERPS

ring to the primary ring
raps-def-mac Sets the switch’s MAC address to be used as the node identifier in R- ERPS
APS messages
raps-without- Terminates the R-APS channel at the primary ring to sub-ring ERPS
vc interconnection nodes
ring-port Configures a node’s connection to the ring through the east or west ERPS
interface
rpl neighbor Configures a ring node to be the RPL neighbor ERPS
rpl owner Configures a ring node to be the RPL owner ERPS
version Specifies compatibility with ERPS version 1 or 2 ERPS
wtr-timer Sets timer to verify that the ring has stabilized before blocking the ERPS
RPL after recovery from a signal failure
– 531 –
Chapter 20 | ERPS Commands
Table 98: ERPS Commands (Continued)

clear erps Clears statistics, including SF, NR, NR-RB, FS, MS, Event, and Health PE
statistics protocol messages
erps clear Manually clears protection state which has been invoked by a Forced PE
Switch or Manual Switch command, and the node is operating under
non-revertive mode; or before the WTR or WTB timer expires when
the node is operating in revertive mode
erps Blocks the specified ring port PE

forced-switch
erps Blocks the specified ring port, in the absence of a failure or an erps PE
manual-switch forced-switch command
show erps Displays status information for all configured rings, or for a specified PE
ring
Configuration Guidelines for ERPS
1. Create an ERPS ring: Create a ring using the erps domain command. The ring
name is used as an index in the G.8032 database.
2. Configure the east and west interfaces: Each node on the ring connects to it
through two ring ports. Use the ring-port command to configure one port
connected to the next node in the ring to the east (or clockwise direction); and
then use the ring-port command again to configure another port facing west in
the ring.
3. Configure the RPL owner: Configure one node in the ring as the Ring Protection
Link (RPL) owner using the rpl owner command. When this switch is configured
as the RPL owner, the west ring port is set as being connected to the RPL. Under
normal operations (Idle state), the RPL is blocked to ensure that a loop cannot
form in the ring. If a signal failure brings down any other link in the ring, the RPL
will be unblocked (Protection state) to ensure proper connectivity among all
ring nodes until the failure is recovered.
4. Configure ERPS timers: Use the guard-timer command to set the timer is used
to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages, the holdoff-
timer command to filter out intermittent link faults, and the wtr-timer
command to verify that the ring has stabilized before blocking the RPL after
recovery from a signal failure.
5. Configure the ERPS Control VLAN (CVLAN): Use the control-vlan command to
create the VLAN used to pass R-APS ring maintenance commands. The CVLAN
must NOT be configured with an IP address. In addition, only ring ports may be
added to the CVLAN (prior to configuring the VLAN as a CVLAN). No other ports
can be members of this VLAN (once set as a CVLAN). Also, the ring ports of the
CVLAN must be tagged. Failure to observe these restrictions can result in a loop
in the network.
– 532 –
6. Enable ERPS: Before enabling a ring as described in the next step, first use the
erps command to globally enable ERPS on the switch. If ERPS has not yet been
enabled or has been disabled with the no erps command, no ERPS rings will
work.
7. Enable an ERPS ring: Before an ERPS ring can work, it must be enabled using the
enable command. When configuration is completed and the ring enabled, R-
APS messages will start flowing in the control VLAN, and normal traffic will
begin to flow in the data VLANs. To stop a ring, it can be disabled on any node
using the no enable command.
8. Display ERPS status information: Use the show erps command to display
general ERPS status information or detailed ERPS status information for a
specific ring.
erps This command enables ERPS on the switch. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] erps
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
ERPS must be enabled globally on the switch before it can enabled on an ERPS ring
using the enable command.
Example
Console(config)#erps
Console(config)#
Related Commands
enable (535)
– 533 –
erps domain This command creates an ERPS ring and enters ERPS configuration mode for the
specified domain. Use the no form to delete a ring.
Syntax
erps domain ring-name [id ring-id]
no erps domain ring-name
ring-name - Name of a specific ERPS ring. (Range: 1-12 characters)
ring-id - ERPS ring identifier used in R-APS messages. (Range: 1-255)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Service Instances within each ring are based on a unique maintenance
association for the specific users, distinguished by the ring name, maintenance
level, maintenance association’s name, and assigned VLAN. Up to 6 ERPS rings
can be configured on the switch.
◆ R-APS information is carried in an R-APS PDUs. The last octet of the MAC
address is designated as the Ring ID (01-19-A7-00-00-[Ring ID]). If use of the
default MAC address is disabled with the no raps-def-mac command, then the
Ring ID configured by the erps domain command will be used in R-APS PDUs.
Example
Console(config)#erps domain r&d id 1
Console(config-erps)#
control-vlan This command specifies a dedicated VLAN used for sending and receiving ERPS
protocol messages. Use the no form to remove the Control VLAN.
Syntax
[no] control-vlan vlan-id
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
– 534 –
Command Usage
◆ Configure one control VLAN for each ERPS ring. First create the VLAN to be used
as the control VLAN (vlan, page 570), add the ring ports for the east and west
interface as tagged members to this VLAN (switchport allowed vlan, page 573),
and then use the control-vlan command to add it to the ring.
◆ The following restrictions are recommended to avoid creating a loop in the

network or other problems which may occur under some situations:
■ The Control VLAN must not be configured as a Layer 3 interface (with an IP
address), a dynamic VLAN (with GVRP enabled), nor as a private VLAN.
■ In addition, only ring ports may be added to the Control VLAN. No other
ports can be members of this VLAN.
■ Also, the ring ports of the Control VLAN must be tagged.
◆ Once the ring has been activated with the enable command, the configuration
of the control VLAN cannot be modified. Use the no enable command to stop
the ERPS ring before making any configuration changes to the control VLAN.
Example
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name rdc media ethernet state active
Console(config-vlan)#exit
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged
Console(config)#erps domain rd1
Console(config-erps)#control-vlan 2
enable This command activates the current ERPS ring. Use the no form to disable the
current ring.
Syntax
[no] enable
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ Before enabling a ring, the global ERPS function should be enabled with the
erps command, the east and west ring ports configured on each node with the
– 535 –
ring-port command, the RPL owner specified with the rpl owner command,
and the control VLAN configured with the control-vlan command.
◆ Once enabled, the RPL owner node and non-owner node state machines will
start, and the ring will enter idle state if no signal failures are detected.
Example
Console(config-erps)#enable
Related Commands
erps (533)
guard-timer This command sets the guard timer to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated
R-APS messages. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
guard-timer milliseconds
milliseconds - The guard timer is used to prevent ring nodes from receiving
outdated R-APS messages. During the duration of the guard timer, all
received R-APS messages are ignored by the ring protection control
process, giving time for old messages still circulating on the ring to expire.
(Range: 10-2000 milliseconds, in steps of 10 milliseconds)
Default Setting
500 milliseconds
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
The guard timer duration should be greater than the maximum expected
forwarding delay for an R-APS message to pass around the ring. A side-effect of the
guard timer is that during its duration, a node will be unaware of new or existing
ring requests transmitted from other nodes.
Example
Console(config-erps)#guard-timer 300
– 536 –
holdoff-timer This command sets the timer to filter out intermittent link faults. Use the no form to
Syntax
holdoff-timer milliseconds
milliseconds - The hold-off timer is used to filter out intermittent link faults.
Faults will only be reported to the ring protection mechanism if this timer
expires. (Range: 0-10000 milliseconds, in steps of 100 milliseconds)
Default Setting
0 milliseconds
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
In order to coordinate timing of protection switches at multiple layers, a hold-off
timer may be required. Its purpose is to allow, for example, a server layer protection
switch to have a chance to fix the problem before switching at a client layer.
When a new defect or more severe defect occurs (new Signal Failure), this event will
not be reported immediately to the protection switching mechanism if the
provisioned hold-off timer value is non-zero. Instead, the hold-off timer will be
started. When the timer expires, whether a defect still exists or not, the timer will be
checked. If one does exist, that defect will be reported to the protection switching
mechanism. The reported defect need not be the same one that started the timer.
Example
Console(config-erps)#holdoff-timer 300
major-domain This command specifies the ERPS ring used for sending control packets. Use the no
form to remove the current setting.
Syntax
major-domain name
no major-domain
name - Name of the ERPS ring used for sending control packets.
Default Setting
None
– 537 –
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ This switch can support up to six rings. However, ERPS control packets can only
be sent on one ring. This command is used to indicate that the current ring is a
secondary ring, and to specify the major ring which will be used to send ERPS
control packets.
◆ The Ring Protection Link (RPL) is the west port and can not be configured. So
the physical port on a secondary ring must be the west port. In other words, if a
domain has two physical ring ports, this ring can only be a major ring, not a
secondary ring (or sub-domain) which can have only one physical ring port.
This command will therefore fail if the east port is already configured (see the
ring-port command).
Example
Console(config-erps)#major-domain rd0
meg-level This command sets the Maintenance Entity Group level for a ring. Use the no form
to restore the default setting.
Syntax
meg-level level
level - The maintenance entity group (MEG) level which provides a
communication channel for ring automatic protection switching (R-APS)
information. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
1
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ This parameter is used to ensure that received R-APS PDUs are directed for this
ring. A unique level should be configured for each local ring if there are many R-
APS PDUs passing through this switch.
◆ If CFM continuity check messages are used to monitor the link status of an ERPS
ring node as specified by the mep-monitor command, then the MEG level set
by the meg-level command must match the authorized maintenance level of
the CFM domain to which the specified MEP belongs. The MEP’s primary VLAN
must also be the same as that used for the ERPS ring’s control VLAN.
– 538 –
Example
Console(config-erps)#meg-level 0
Related Commands
ethernet cfm domain (773)
ethernet cfm mep (778)
mep-monitor This command specifies the CFM MEPs used to monitor the link on a ring node. Use
Syntax
mep-monitor {east | west} mep mpid
east - Connects to next ring node to the east.
west - Connects to next ring node to the west.
mpid – Maintenance end point identifier. (Range: 1-8191)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ If this command is used to monitor the link status of an ERPS node with CFM
continuity check messages, then the MEG level set by the meg-level command
must match the authorized maintenance level of the CFM domain to which the
specified MEP belongs.
◆ To ensure complete monitoring of a ring node, use the mep-monitor

command to specify the CFM MEPs used to monitor both the east and west
ports of the ring node.
◆ If CFM determines that a MEP node which has been configured to monitor a
ring port with this command has gone down, this information is passed to
ERPS, which in turn processes it as a ring node failure. For more information on
how ERPS recovers from a node failure, refer to “Ethernet Ring Protection
Switching” in the Web Management Guide.
Example
Console(config-erps)#mep-monitor east mep 1
– 539 –
Related Commands
ethernet cfm domain (773)
ethernet cfm mep (778)
node-id This command sets the MAC address for a ring node. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
node-id mac-address
mac-address – A MAC address unique to the ring node. The MAC address
must be specified in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx.
Default Setting
CPU MAC address
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ The ring node identifier is used to identify a node in R-APS messages for both
automatic and manual switching recovery operations.
For example, a node that has one ring port in SF condition and detects that the
condition has been cleared, will continuously transmit R-APS (NR) messages
with its own Node ID as priority information over both ring ports, informing its
neighbors that no request is present at this node. When another recovered
node holding the link blocked receives this message, it compares the Node ID
information with its own. If the received R-APS (NR) message has a higher
priority, this unblocks its ring ports. Otherwise, the block remains unchanged.
◆ The node identifier may also be used for debugging, such as to distinguish
messages when a node is connected to more than one ring.
Example
Console(config-erps)#node-id 00-12-CF-61-24-2D
non-erps-dev-protect This command sends non-standard health-check packets when an owner node
enters protection state without any link down event having been detected through
SF messages. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] non-erps-dev-protect
– 540 –
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ The RPL owner node detects a failed link when it receives R-APS (SF - signal
fault) messages from nodes adjacent to the failed link. The owner then enters
protection state by unblocking the RPL. However, using this standard recovery
procedure may cause a non-EPRS device to become isolated when the ERPS
device adjacent to it detects a continuity check message (CCM) loss event and
blocks the link between the non-ERPS device and ERPS device.
CCMs are propagated by the Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) protocol as
described under “CFM Commands” on page 767. If the standard recovery
procedure were used as shown in the following figure, and node E detected
CCM loss, it would send an R-APS (SF) message to the RPL owner and block the
link to node D, isolating that non-ERPS device.
Figure 3: Non-ERPS Device Protection
RPL
RPL
A B C D E F Owner
blocked blocked
fault
X X
non-ERPS non-ERPS
When non-ERPS device protection is enabled on the ring, the ring ports on the
RPL owner node and non-owner nodes will not be blocked when signal loss is
detected by CCM loss events.
◆ When non-ERPS device protection is enabled on an RPL owner node, it will

send non-standard health-check packets to poll the ring health when it enters
the protection state. It does not use the normal procedure of waiting to receive
an R-APS (NR - no request) message from nodes adjacent to the recovered link.
Instead, it waits to see if the non-standard health-check packets loop back. If
they do, indicating that the fault has been resolved, the RPL will be blocked.
After blocking the RPL, the owner node will still transmit an R-APS (NR, RB - ring
blocked) message. ERPS-compliant nodes receiving this message flush their
forwarding database and unblock previously blocked ports. The ring is now
returned to Idle state.
Example
Console(config-erps)#non-erps-dev-protect
– 541 –
non-revertive This command enables non-revertive mode, which requires the protection state on
the RPL to manually cleared. Use the no form to restore the default revertive mode.
Syntax
[no] non-revertive
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ Revertive behavior allows the switch to automatically return the RPL from
Protection state to Idle state through the exchange of protocol messages.
Non-revertive behavior for Protection, Forced Switch, and Manual Switch states
are basically the same. Non-revertive behavior requires the erps clear
command to used to return the RPL from Protection state to Idle state.
◆ Recovery for Protection Switching – A ring node that has one or more ring ports
in an SF (Signal Fail) condition, upon detecting the SF condition cleared, keeps
at least one of its ring ports blocked for the traffic channel and for the R-APS
channel, until the RPL is blocked as a result of ring protection reversion, or until
there is another higher priority request (e.g., an SF condition) in the ring.
A ring node that has one ring port in an SF condition and detects the SF
condition cleared, continuously transmits the R-APS (NR – no request) message
with its own Node ID as the priority information over both ring ports, informing
that no request is present at this ring node and initiates a guard timer. When
another recovered ring node (or nodes) holding the link block receives this
message, it compares the Node ID information with its own Node ID. If the
received R-APS (NR) message has the higher priority, this ring node unblocks its
ring ports. Otherwise, the block remains unchanged. As a result, there is only
one link with one end blocked.
The ring nodes stop transmitting R-APS (NR) messages when they accept an R-
APS (NR, RB – RPL Blocked), or when another higher priority request is received.
■ Recovery with Revertive Mode – When all ring links and ring nodes have
recovered and no external requests are active, reversion is handled in the
following way:
a. The reception of an R-APS (NR) message causes the RPL Owner Node to
start the WTR (Wait-to-Restore) timer.
b. The WTR timer is cancelled if during the WTR period a higher priority
request than NR is accepted by the RPL Owner Node or is declared
locally at the RPL Owner Node.
c. When the WTR timer expires, without the presence of any other higher
priority request, the RPL Owner Node initiates reversion by blocking its
– 542 –
traffic channel over the RPL, transmitting an R-APS (NR, RB) message
over both ring ports, informing the ring that the RPL is blocked, and
performing a flush FDB action.
d. The acceptance of the R-APS (NR, RB) message causes all ring nodes to
unblock any blocked non-RPL link that does not have an SF condition. If
it is an R-APS (NR, RB) message without a DNF (do not flush) indication,
all ring nodes flush the FDB.
■ Recovery with Non-revertive Mode – In non-revertive operation, the ring

does not automatically revert when all ring links and ring nodes have
recovered and no external requests are active. Non-revertive operation is
handled in the following way:
a. The RPL Owner Node does not generate a response on reception of an
R-APS (NR) messages.
b. When other healthy ring nodes receive the NR (Node ID) message, no
action is taken in response to the message.
c. When the operator issues the erps clear command for non-revertive
mode at the RPL Owner Node, the non-revertive operation is cleared,
the RPL Owner Node blocks its RPL port, and transmits an R-APS (NR,
RB) message in both directions, repeatedly.
d. Upon receiving an R-APS (NR, RB) message, any blocking node should
unblock its non-failed ring port. If it is an R-APS (NR, RB) message
without a DNF indication, all ring nodes flush the FDB.
◆ Recovery for Forced Switching – An erps forced-switch command is removed

by issuing the erps clear command to the same ring node where Forced Switch
mode is in effect. The clear command removes any existing local operator
commands, and triggers reversion if the ring is in revertive behavior mode.
The ring node where the Forced Switch was cleared keeps the ring port
blocked for the traffic channel and for the R-APS channel, due to the previous
Forced Switch command. This ring port is kept blocked until the RPL is blocked
as a result of ring protection reversion, or until there is another higher priority
request (e.g., an SF condition) in the ring.
The ring node where the Forced Switch was cleared continuously transmits the
R-APS (NR) message on both ring ports, informing other nodes that no request
is present at this ring node. The ring nodes stop transmitting R-APS (NR)
messages when they accept an RAPS (NR, RB) message, or when another higher
priority request is received.
If the ring node where the Forced Switch was cleared receives an R-APS (NR)
message with a Node ID higher than its own Node ID, it unblocks any ring port
which does not have an SF condition and stops transmitting R-APS (NR)
message over both ring ports.
■ Recovery with revertive mode is handled in the following way:

a. The reception of an R-APS (NR) message causes the RPL Owner Node to
start the WTB timer.
– 543 –
b. The WTB timer is cancelled if during the WTB period a higher priority
request than NR is accepted by the RPL Owner Node or is declared
locally at the RPL Owner Node.
c. When the WTB timer expires, in the absence of any other higher priority
request, the RPL Owner Node initiates reversion by blocking the traffic
channel over the RPL, transmitting an R-APS (NR, RB) message over
both ring ports, informing the ring that the RPL is blocked, and flushes
the FDB.
d. The acceptance of the R-APS (NR, RB) message causes all ring nodes to
unblock any blocked non-RPL that does not have an SF condition. If it is
an R-APS (NR, RB) message without a DNF indication, all ring nodes
flush their FDB. This action unblocks the ring port which was blocked as
a result of an operator command.
■ Recovery with non-revertive mode is handled in the following way:

a. The RPL Owner Node, upon reception of an R-APS(NR) message and in
the absence of any other higher priority request does not perform any
action.
b. Then, after the operator issues the erps clear command at the RPL
Owner Node, this ring node blocks the ring port attached to the RPL,
transmits an R-APS (NR, RB) message on both ring ports, informing the
ring that the RPL is blocked, and flushes its FDB.
c. The acceptance of the R-APS (NR, RB) message triggers all ring nodes to
unblock any blocked non-RPL which does not have an SF condition. If it
is an R-APS (NR, RB) message without a DNF indication, all ring nodes
result of an operator command.
◆ Recovery for Manual Switching – An erps manual-switch command is removed

by issuing the erps clear command at the same ring node where the Manual
Switch is in effect. The clear command removes any existing local operator
commands, and triggers reversion if the ring is in revertive behavior mode.
The ring node where the Manual Switch was cleared keeps the ring port
blocked for the traffic channel and for the R-APS channel, due to the previous
Manual Switch command. This ring port is kept blocked until the RPL is blocked
as a result of ring protection reversion, or until there is another higher priority
request (e.g., an SF condition) in the ring.
The Ethernet Ring Node where the Manual Switch was cleared continuously
transmits the R-APS (NR) message on both ring ports, informing that no request
is present at this ring node. The ring nodes stop transmitting R-APS (NR)
messages when they accept an RAPS (NR, RB) message, or when another higher
priority request is received.
If the ring node where the Manual Switch was cleared receives an R-APS (NR)
message with a Node ID higher than its own Node ID, it unblocks any ring port
which does not have an SF condition and stops transmitting R-APS (NR)
message on both ring ports.
– 544 –
■ Recovery with revertive mode is handled in the following way:

a. The RPL Owner Node, upon reception of an R-APS (NR) message and in
the absence of any other higher priority request, starts the WTB timer
and waits for it to expire. While the WTB timer is running, any latent R-
APS (MS) message is ignored due to the higher priority of the WTB
running signal.
b. When the WTB timer expires, it generates the WTB expire signal. The
RPL Owner Node, upon reception of this signal, initiates reversion by
blocking the traffic channel on the RPL, transmitting an R-APS (NR, RB)
message over both ring ports, informing the ring that the RPL is
blocked, and flushes its FDB.
c. The acceptance of the R-APS (NR, RB) message causes all ring nodes to
unblock any blocked non-RPL that does not have an SF condition. If it is
an R-APS (NR, RB) message without a DNF indication, all Ethernet Ring
Nodes flush their FDB. This action unblocks the ring port which was
blocked as a result of an operator command.
■ Recovery with non-revertive mode is handled in the following way:

a. The RPL Owner Node, upon reception of an R-APS (NR) message and in
the absence of any other higher priority request does not perform any
action.
b. Then, after the operator issues the erps clear command at the RPL
Owner Node, this ring node blocks the ring port attached to the RPL,
transmits an R-APS (NR, RB) message over both ring ports, informing
the ring that the RPL is blocked, and flushes its FDB.
c. The acceptance of the R-APS (NR, RB) message triggers all ring nodes to
unblock any blocked non-RPL which does not have an SF condition. If it
is an R-APS (NR, RB) message without a DNF indication, all ring nodes
result of an operator command.
Example
Console(config-erps)#non-revertive
propagate-tc This command enables propagation of topology change messages for a secondary
ring to the primary ring. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] propagate-tc
Default Setting
Disabled
– 545 –
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ When a secondary ring detects a topology change, it can pass a message about
this event to the major ring. When the major ring receives this kind of message
from a secondary ring, it can clear the MAC addresses on its ring ports to help
the secondary ring restore its connections more quickly through protection
switching.
◆ When the MAC addresses are cleared, data traffic may flood onto the major
ring. The data traffic will become stable after the MAC addresses are learned
again. The major ring will not be broken, but the bandwidth of data traffic on
the major ring may suffer for a short period of time due to this flooding
behavior.
Example
Console(config-erps)#propagate-tc
raps-def-mac This command sets the switch’s MAC address to be used as the node identifier in R-
APS messages. Use the no form to use the node identifier specified in the G8032
standards.
Syntax
[no] raps-def-mac
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ When ring nodes running ERPSv1 and ERPSv2 co-exist on the same ring, the
Ring ID of each ring node must be configured as “1”.
◆ If this command is disabled, the following strings are used as the node
identifier:
■ ERPSv1: 01-19-A7-00-00-01
■ ERPSv2: 01-19-A7-00-00-[Ring ID]
Example
Console(config-erps)#raps-def-mac
– 546 –
raps-without-vc This command terminates the R-APS channel at the primary ring to sub-ring
interconnection nodes. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] raps-without-vc
Default Setting
R-APS with Virtual Channel
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ A sub-ring may be attached to a primary ring with or without a virtual channel.
A virtual channel is used to connect two interconnection points on the sub-
ring, tunneling R-APS control messages across an arbitrary Ethernet network
topology. If a virtual channel is not used to cross the intermediate Ethernet
network, data in the traffic channel will still flow across the network, but the all
R-APS messages will be terminated at the interconnection points.
◆ Sub-ring with R-APS Virtual Channel – When using a virtual channel to tunnel
R-APS messages between interconnection points on a sub-ring, the R-APS
virtual channel may or may not follow the same path as the traffic channel over
the network. R-APS messages that are forwarded over the sub-ring’s virtual
channel are broadcast or multicast over the interconnected network. For this
reason the broadcast/multicast domain of the virtual channel should be limited
to the necessary links and nodes. For example, the virtual channel could span
only the interconnecting rings or sub-rings that are necessary for forwarding
R-APS messages of this sub-ring. Care must also be taken to ensure that the
local RAPS messages of the sub-ring being transported over the virtual channel
into the interconnected network can be uniquely distinguished from those of
other interconnected ring R-APS messages. This can be achieved by, for
example, by using separate VIDs for the virtual channels of different sub-rings.
Note that the R-APS virtual channel requires a certain amount of bandwidth to
forward R-APS messages on the interconnected Ethernet network where a sub-
ring is attached. Also note that the protection switching time of the sub-ring
may be affected if R-APS messages traverse a long distance over an R-APS
virtual channel.
– 547 –
Figure 4: Sub-ring with Virtual Channel

RPL Port Interconnection Node Ring Node
Sub-ring Major Ring

with Virtual
Channel
Virtual
Channel
◆ Sub-ring without R-APS Virtual Channel – Under certain circumstances it may

not be desirable to use a virtual channel to interconnect the sub-ring over an
arbitrary Ethernet network. In this situation, the R-APS messages are
terminated on the interconnection points. Since the sub-ring does not provide
an R-APS channel nor R-APS virtual channel beyond the interconnection points,
R-APS channel blocking is not employed on the normal ring links to avoid
channel segmentation. As a result, a failure at any ring link in the sub-ring will
cause the R-APS channel of the sub-ring to be segmented, thus preventing R-
APS message exchange between some of the sub-ring’s ring nodes.
No R-APS messages are inserted or extracted by other rings or sub- rings at the
interconnection nodes where a sub-ring is attached. Hence there is no need for
either additional bandwidth or for different VIDs/Ring IDs for the ring
interconnection. Furthermore, protection switching time for a sub-ring is
independent from the configuration or topology of the interconnected rings. In
addition, this option always ensures that an interconnected network forms a
tree topology regardless of its interconnection configuration. This means that it
is not necessary to take precautions against forming a loop which is potentially
composed of a whole interconnected network.
Figure 5: Sub-ring without Virtual Channel
RPL Port Interconnection Node Ring Node
Sub-ring Major Ring

with Virtual
Channel
Example
Console(config-erps)#raps-without-vc
– 548 –
ring-port This command configures a node’s connection to the ring through the east or west
interface. Use the no form to disassociate a node from the ring.
Syntax
ring-port {east | west} interface interface
east - Connects to next ring node to the east.
west - Connects to next ring node to the west.
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
Not associated
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ Each node must be connected to two neighbors on the ring. For convenience,
the ports connected are referred to as east and west ports. Alternatively, the
closest neighbor to the east should be the next node in the ring in a clockwise
direction, and the closest neighbor to the west should be the next node in the
ring in a counter-clockwise direction.
◆ Note that a ring port cannot be configured as a member of a spanning tree, a

dynamic trunk, or a static trunk.
◆ If a port channel (static trunk) is specified as a ring port, it can not be destroyed
before it is removed from the domain configuration.
◆ A static trunk will be treated as a signal fault, if it contains no member ports or

all of its member ports are in signal fault.
◆ If a static trunk is configured as a ring port prior to assigning any member ports,
spanning tree will be disabled for the first member port assigned to the static
trunk.
Example
Console(config-erps)#ring-port east interface ethernet 1/12
– 549 –
rpl neighbor This command configures a ring node to be the Ring Protection Link (RPL)
neighbor. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
rpl neighbor
no rpl
Default Setting
None (that is, neither owner nor neighbor)
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ The RPL neighbor node, when configured, is a ring node adjacent to the RPL
that is responsible for blocking its end of the RPL under normal conditions (i.e.,
the ring is established and no requests are present in the ring) in addition to the
block at the other end by the RPL Owner Node. The RPL neighbor node may
participate in blocking or unblocking its end of the RPL, but is not responsible
for activating the reversion behavior.
◆ Only one RPL owner can be configured on a ring. If the switch is set as the RPL
owner for an ERPS domain, the west ring port is set as one end of the RPL. If the
switch is set as the RPL neighbor for an ERPS domain, the east ring port is set as
the other end of the RPL.
◆ The east and west connections to the ring must be specified for all ring nodes
using the ring-port command. When this switch is configured as the RPL
neighbor, the east ring port is set as being connected to the RPL.
◆ Note that is not mandatory to declare a RPL neighbor.
Example
Console(config-erps)#rpl neighbor
rpl owner This command configures a ring node to be the Ring Protection Link (RPL) owner.
Syntax
rpl owner
no rpl
Default Setting
None (that is, neither owner nor neighbor)
– 550 –
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ Only one RPL owner can be configured on a ring. The owner blocks traffic on
the RPL during Idle state, and unblocks it during Protection state (that is, when
a signal fault is detected on the ring or the protection state is enabled with the
erps forced-switch or erps manual-switch command).
◆ The east and west connections to the ring must be specified for all ring nodes
using the ring-port command. When this switch is configured as the RPL owner,
the west ring port is automatically set as being connected to the RPL.
Example
Console(config-erps)#rpl owner
version This command specifies compatibility with ERPS version 1 or 2.
Syntax
version {1 | 2}
1 - ERPS version 1 based on ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
2 - ERPS version 2 based on ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344 Version 2.
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
◆ In addition to the basic features provided by version 1, version 2 also supports:
■ Multi-ring/ladder network support
■ Revertive/Non-revertive recovery
■ Forced Switch (FS) and Manual Switch (MS) commands for manually
blocking a particular ring port
■ Flush FDB (forwarding database) logic which reduces amount of flush FDB
operations in the ring
■ Support of multiple ERP instances on a single ring
◆ Version 2 is backward compatible with Version 1. If version 2 is specified, the

inputs and commands are forwarded transparently. If set to version 1, MS and
FS operator commands are filtered, and the switch set to revertive mode.
– 551 –
◆ The version number is automatically set to “1” when a ring node, supporting
only the functionalities of G.8032v1, exists on the same ring with other nodes
that support G.8032v2.
◆ When ring nodes running G.8032v1 and G.8032v2 co-exist on a ring, the ring ID
of each node is configured as “1”.
◆ In version 1, the MAC address 01-19-A7-00-00-01 is used for the node identifier.
The raps-def-mac command has no effect.
Example
Console(config-erps)#version 1
wtr-timer This command sets the wait-to-restore timer which is used to verify that the ring
has stabilized before blocking the RPL after recovery from a signal failure. Use the
no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
wtr-timer minutes
minutes - The wait-to-restore timer is used to verify that the ring has
stabilized before blocking the RPL after recovery from a signal failure.
Default Setting
5 minutes
Command Mode
ERPS Configuration
Command Usage
If the switch goes into ring protection state due to a signal failure, after the failure
condition is cleared, the RPL owner will start the wait-to-restore timer and wait until
it expires to verify that the ring has stabilized before blocking the RPL and returning
to the Idle (normal operating) state.
Example
Console(config-erps)#wtr-timer 10
– 552 –
clear erps statistics This command clears statistics, including SF, NR, NR-RB, FS, MS, Event, and Health
protocol messages.
Syntax
clear erps statistics [domain ring-name]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear erps statistics domain r&d
Console#
erps clear This command manually clears the protection state which has been invoked by a
forced switch or manual switch command, and the node is operating under non-
revertive mode; or before the WTR or WTB timer expires when the node is
operating in revertive mode.
Syntax
erps clear domain ring-name
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Two steps are required to make a ring operating in non-revertive mode return
to Idle state from forced switch or manual switch state:
1. Issue an erps clear command to remove the forced switch command on

the node where a local forced switch command is active.
2. Issue an erps clear command on the RPL owner node to trigger the
reversion.
◆ The erps clear command will also stop the WTR and WTB delay timers and
reset their values.
◆ More detailed information about using this command for non-revertive mode
is included under the Command Usage section for the non-revertive command.
– 553 –
Example
Console#erps clear domain r&d
Console#
erps forced-switch This command blocks the specified ring port.
Syntax
erps forced-switch [domain ring-name] {east | west}
east - East ring port.
west - West ring port.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ A ring with no pending request has a logical topology with the traffic channel
blocked at the RPL and unblocked on all other ring links. In this situation, the
erps forced-switch command triggers protection switching as follows:
a. The ring node where a forced switch command was issued blocks the traffic
channel and R-APS channel on the ring port to which the command was
issued, and unblocks the other ring port.
b. The ring node where the forced switch command was issued transmits R-
APS messages indicating FS over both ring ports. R-APS (FS) messages are
continuously transmitted by this ring node while the local FS command is
the ring node’s highest priority command (see Table 99 on page 555). The
R-APS (FS) message informs other ring nodes of the FS command and that
the traffic channel is blocked on one ring port.
c. A ring node accepting an R-APS (FS) message, without any local higher
priority requests unblocks any blocked ring port. This action subsequently
unblocks the traffic channel over the RPL.
d. The ring node accepting an R-APS (FS) message, without any local higher
priority requests stops transmission of R-APS messages.
e. The ring node receiving an R-APS (FS) message flushes its FDB.
◆ Protection switching on a forced switch request is completed when the above

actions are performed by each ring node. At this point, traffic flows around the
ring are resumed. From this point on the following rules apply regarding
processing of further forced switch commands:
– 554 –
While an existing forced switch request is present in a ring, any new forced
switch request is accepted, except on a ring node having a prior local forced
switch request. The ring nodes where further forced switch commands are
issued block the traffic channel and R-APS channel on the ring port at which
the forced switch was issued. The ring node where the forced switch command
was issued transmits an R-APS message over both ring ports indicating FS. R-
APS (FS) messages are continuously transmitted by this ring node while the
local FS command is the ring node’s highest priority command. As such, two or
more forced switches are allowed in the ring, which may inadvertently cause
the segmentation of an ring. It is the responsibility of the operator to prevent
this effect if it is undesirable.
Ring protection requests, commands and R-APS signals have the priorities as
specified in the following table.
Table 99: ERPS Request/State Priority

Request / State and Status Type Priority
Clear local highest
FS local |
R-APS (FS) remote |
local SF* local |
local clear SF local |
R-APS (SF) remote |
R-APS (MS) remote |
MS local |
WTR Expires local |
WTR Running local |
WTB Expires local |
WTB Running local |
R-APS (NR, RB) remote |
R-APS (NR) remote lowest
* If an Ethernet Ring Node is in the Forced Switch state, local SF is ignored.
◆ Recovery for forced switching under revertive and non-revertive mode is

described under the Command Usage section for the non-revertive command.
◆ When a ring is under an FS condition, and the node at which an FS command

was issued is removed or fails, the ring remains in FS state because the FS
command can only be cleared at node where the FS command was issued. This
results in an unrecoverable FS condition.
When performing a maintenance procedure (e.g., replacing, upgrading) on a
ring node (or a ring link), it is recommended that FS commands be issued at the
two adjacent ring nodes instead of directly issuing a FS command at the ring
– 555 –
node under maintenance in order to avoid falling into the above mentioned
unrecoverable situation.
Example
Console#erps forced-switch domain r&d west
Console#
erps manual-switch This command blocks the specified ring port, in the absence of a failure or an erps
forced-switch command.
Syntax
erps manual-switch [domain ring-name] {east | west}
east - East ring port.
west - West ring port.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ A ring with no request has a logical topology with the traffic channel blocked at
the RPL and unblocked on all other ring links. In this situation, the erps
manual-switch command triggers protection switching as follows:
a. If no other higher priority commands exist, the ring node, where a manual
switch command was issued, blocks the traffic channel and R-APS channel
on the ring port to which the command was issued, and unblocks the other
ring port.
b. If no other higher priority commands exist, the ring node where the
manual switch command was issued transmits R-APS messages over both
ring ports indicating MS. R-APS (MS) message are continuously transmitted
by this ring node while the local MS command is the ring node’s highest
priority command (see Table 99 on page 555). The R-APS (MS) message
informs other ring nodes of the MS command and that the traffic channel is
blocked on one ring port.
c. If no other higher priority commands exist and assuming the ring node was
in Idle state before the manual switch command was issued, the ring node
flushes its local FDB.
d. A ring node accepting an R-APS (MS) message, without any local higher
priority requests unblocks any blocked ring port which does not have an SF
condition. This action subsequently unblocks the traffic channel over the
RPL.
– 556 –
e. A ring node accepting an R-APS (MS) message, without any local higher
priority requests stops transmitting R-APS messages.
f. A ring node receiving an R-APS (MS) message flushes its FDB.
◆ Protection switching on a manual switch request is completed when the above

actions are performed by each ring node. At this point, traffic flows around the
ring are resumed. From this point on, the following rules apply regarding
processing of further manual switch commands:
a. While an existing manual switch request is present in the ring, any new
manual switch request is rejected. The request is rejected at the ring node
where the new request is issued and a notification is generated to inform
the operator that the new MS request was not accepted.
b. A ring node with a local manual switch command which receives an R-APS
(MS) message with a different Node ID clears its manual switch request and
starts transmitting R-APS (NR) messages. The ring node keeps the ring port
blocked due to the previous manual switch command.
c. An ring node with a local manual switch command that receives an R-APS
message or a local request of higher priority than R-APS (MS) clear its
manual switch request. The ring node then processes the new higher
priority request.
◆ Recovery for manual switching under revertive and non-revertive mode is

described under the Command Usage section for the non-revertive command.
Example
Console#erps manual-switch domain r&d west
Console#
show erps This command displays status information for all configured rings, or for a specified
ring
Syntax
show erps [domain ring-name] [statistics]
domain - Keyword to display ERPS ring configuration settings.
statistics - Keyword to display ERPS ring statistics.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 557 –
Example
This example displays a summary of all the ERPS rings configured on the switch.
Console#show erps
ERPS Status : Enabled
Number of ERPS Domains : 1
Domain ID Enabled Ver MEL Ctrl VLAN State Type Revertive

------------ --- ------- --- --- --------- ---------- ------------ ---------
r&d 1 Yes 2 1 1 Idle RPL Owner Yes
W/E Interface Port State Local SF Local FS Local MS MEP RPL

---- --------- ---------- -------- -------- -------- ---- ---
West Eth 1/ 1 Blocking No No No Yes
East Eth 1/ 3 Forwarding No No No No
Console#
Table 100: show erps - summary display description

Field Description
Node Information
ERPS Status Shows whether ERPS is enabled on the switch.
Number of ERPS Domains Shows the number of ERPS rings configured on the switch.
Domain Displays the name of each ring followed by a brief list of status
information
ID ERPS ring identifier used in R-APS messages.
Enabled Shows if the specified ring is enabled.
Ver Shows the ERPS version.
MEL The maintenance entity group (MEG) level providing a communication

channel for ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) information.
Ctrl VLAN Shows the Control VLAN ID.
State Shows the following ERPS states:

Init – The ERPS ring has started but has not yet determined the status of
the ring.
Idle – If all nodes in a ring are in this state, it means that all the links in
the ring are up. This state will switch to protection state if a link failure
occurs.
Protection – If a node in this state, it means that a link failure has
occurred. This state will switch to idle state if all the failed links recover.
Type Shows ERPS node type as None, RPL Owner or RPL Neighbor.
Revertive Shows if revertive or non-revertive recovery is selected.
Interface Information
W/E Shows information on the west and east ring port for this node.
Interface The port or trunk which is configured as a ring port.
– 558 –
Table 100: show erps - summary display description (Continued)

Field Description
Port State The operational state:

Blocking – The transmission and reception of traffic is blocked and the
forwarding of R-APS messages is blocked, but the transmission of
locally generated R-APS messages is allowed and the reception of all R-
APS messages is allowed.
Forwarding – The transmission and reception of traffic is allowed;
transmission, reception and forwarding of R-APS messages is allowed.
Unknown – The interface is not in a known state (includes the domain
being disabled).
Local SF A signal fault generated on a link to the local node.
Local FS Shows if a forced switch command was issued on this interface.
Local MS Shows if a manual switch command was issued on this interface.
MEP The CFM MEP used to monitor the status on this link.
RPL Shows if this node is connected to the RPL.
This example displays detailed information for the specified ERPS ring.
Console#show erps domain rd1

Domain ID Enabled Ver MEL Ctrl VLAN State Type Revertive
------------ --- ------- --- --- --------- ---------- ------------ ---------
r&d 1 Yes 2 1 1 Idle RPL Owner Yes
Major Domain Node ID R-APS With VC

------------ ----------------- -------------
00-E0-0C-00-00-FD Yes
R-APS Def MAC Propagate TC Non-ERPS Device Protect

------------- ------------ -----------------------
Yes No No
Holdoff Guard WTB WTR WTB Expire WTR Expire

-------- ------- ------- ------- ---------- ----------
0 ms 500 ms 5500 ms 5 min
W/E Interface Port State Local SF Local FS Local MS MEP RPL

---- --------- ---------- -------- -------- -------- ---- ---
West Eth 1/ 1 Blocking No No No Yes
East Eth 1/ 3 Forwarding No No No No
Console#
Table 100 on page 558 describes most of the parameters shown by show erps
domain command. The following table includes the remaining parameters.
Table 101: show erps domain - detailed display description

Field Description
Major Domain Name of the ERPS major domain.
Node ID A MAC address unique to this ring node.
– 559 –
Table 101: show erps domain - detailed display description (Continued)

Field Description
R-APS with VC The R-APS Virtual Channel is the R-APS channel connection used to
tunnel R-APS messages between two interconnection nodes of a sub-
ring in another Ethernet ring or network.
R-APS Def MAC Indicates if the switch’s MAC address is used to identify the node in R-
APS messages.
Propagate TC Shows if the ring is configured to propagate topology change

notification messages.
Non-ERPS Device Protect Shows if the RPL owner node is configured to send non-standard
health-check packets when it enters protection state without any link
down event having been detected through SF messages
Holdoff The hold-off timer interval used to filter out intermittent link faults.
Guard The guard timer interval used to prevent ring nodes from receiving
outdated R-APS messages.
WTB The wait-to-block timer interval used to delay reversion after a Forced
Switch or Manual Switch has been cleared.
WTR The wait-to-restore timer interval used to verify that the ring has
stabilized before blocking the RPL after recovery from a signal failure.
WTB Expire The time before the wait-to-block timer expires.
WTR Expire The time before the wait-to-restore timer expires.
This example displays statistics for all configured ERPS rings.
Console#show erps statistics

ERPS statistics for domain r&d :
Interface Local SF Local Clear SF
------------ ---------- --------------
(W) Eth 1/ 1 0 0
SF NR NR-RB FS MS
---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Sent 0 62 948 0 0
Received 0 0 0 0 0
Ignored 0 0 0 0 0
EVENT HEALTH
---------- ----------
Sent 0 0
Received 0 0
Ignored 0 0
Interface Local SF Local Clear SF

------------ ---------- --------------
(E) Eth 1/ 3 0 0
SF NR NR-RB FS MS
---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Sent 0 62 948 0 0
Received 0 0 0 0 0
Ignored 0 0 0 0 0
EVENT HEALTH
---------- ----------
Sent 0 0
Received 0 0
Ignored 0 0
Console#
– 560 –
Table 102: show erps statistics - detailed display description

Field Description
Interface The direction, and port or trunk which is configured as a ring port.
Local SF A signal fault generated on a link to the local node.
Local Clear SF The number of times a clear command was issued to terminate
protection state entered through a forced switch or manual switch
SF The number of signal fault messages
NR The number of no request messages
NR-RB The number no request - RPL blocked messages
FS The number of forced switch messages
MS The number of manual switch messages
EVENT Any request/state message, excluding FS, SF, MS, and NR
HEALTH The number of non-standard health-check messages
– 561 –
– 562 –
21 VLAN Commands
A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but
communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment. This section
describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how
VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected
interface.
Table 103: VLAN Commands

GVRP and Bridge Extension Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning; shows
Commands the configuration for bridge extension MIB
Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID and state
Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters, including ingress and egress
Interfaces tagging mode, ingress filtering, PVID, and GVRP
Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups, status, port members, and MAC addresses
Information
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Configures 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ Tunneling)

Tunneling
Configuring L2CP Configures Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) tunneling, either by

Tunneling* discarding, processing, or transparently passing control packets across
a QinQ tunnel
Configuring VLAN Maps VLAN ID between customer and service provider for networks
Translation* that do not support IEEE 802.1Q tunneling
Configuring Protocol-based Configures protocol-based VLANs based on frame type and protocol
VLANs
Configuring IP Subnet Configures IP Subnet-based VLANs

VLANs
Configuring MAC Based Configures MAC-based VLANs

VLANs
Configuring Voice VLANs Configures VoIP traffic detection and enables a Voice VLAN
* These functions are not compatible.
– 563 –
Chapter 21 | VLAN Commands
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN
information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across
the network. This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces
and globally for the switch, as well as how to display default configuration settings
for the Bridge Extension MIB.
Table 104: GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands

bridge-ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the switch GC
garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function IC
switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC
switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC
show bridge-ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration PE
show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function NE, PE
show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE, PE
bridge-ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] bridge-ext gvrp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register
VLAN members on ports across the network. This function should be enabled to
permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond
the local switch.
Example
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp
Console(config)#
– 564 –
garp timer This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use the no
form to restore the timers’ default values.
Syntax
garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer-value
no garp timer {join | leave | leaveall}
{join | leave | leaveall} - Timer to set.
timer-value - Value of timer.
Ranges:
join: 20-1000 centiseconds
leave: 60-3000 centiseconds
leaveall: 500-18000 centiseconds
Default Setting
join: 20 centiseconds
leave: 60 centiseconds
leaveall: 1000 centiseconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or
deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The default
values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or
data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing
difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration/deregistration.
◆ Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs.
◆ Timer values must meet the following restrictions:
■ leave > (2 x join)

■ leaveall > leave
Note: Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the
same values. Otherwise, GVRP may not operate successfully.
Example
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 100
Console(config-if)#
– 565 –
Related Commands
show garp timer (568)
switchport forbidden This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove the list of
vlan forbidden VLANs.
Syntax
switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}
no switchport forbidden vlan
add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.
remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.
vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. (Range: 1-4093).
Default Setting
No VLANs are included in the forbidden list.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the
specified interface via GVRP.
◆ If a VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface, then you
cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface.
◆ GVRP cannot be enabled for ports set to Access mode (see the switchport
mode command).
Example
The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3:

Console(config-if)#switchport forbidden vlan add 3
Console(config-if)#
switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] switchport gvrp
– 566 –
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
GVRP cannot be enabled for ports set to Access mode using the switchport mode
command.
Example
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp
Console(config-if)#
show bridge-ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show bridge-ext
Maximum Supported VLAN Numbers : 4094
Maximum Supported VLAN ID : 4093
Extended Multicast Filtering Services : No
Static Entry Individual Port : Yes
VLAN Version Number : 2
VLAN Learning : IVL
Configurable PVID Tagging : Yes
Local VLAN Capable : No
Traffic Classes : Enabled
Global GVRP Status : Disabled
Console#
Table 105: show bridge-ext - display description

Field Description
Maximum The maximum number of VLANs supported on this switch.

Supported VLAN
Numbers
Maximum The maximum configurable VLAN identifier supported on this switch.

Supported VLAN ID
Extended Multicast This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses
Filtering Services based on GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol).
– 567 –
Table 105: show bridge-ext - display description (Continued)

Field Description
Static Entry This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses. (Refer to
Individual Port the mac-address-table static command.)
VLAN Version Based on IEEE 802.1Q, “1” indicates Bridges that support only single spanning
Number tree (SST) operation, and “2” indicates Bridges that support multiple spanning
tree (MST) operation.
VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning (IVL), where each port maintains
its own filtering database.
Configurable PVID This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID (PVID used in frame
Tagging tags) and egress status (VLAN-Tagged or Untagged) on each port. (Refer to the
switchport allowed vlan command.)
Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of
802.1Q defined VLANs.
Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes. (Refer
to “Class of Service Commands” on page 609.)
Global GVRP Status GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN
information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces
across the network. This field shows if GVRP is globally enabled or disabled.
(Refer to the bridge-ext gvrp command.)
show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface.
Syntax
show garp timer [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
Shows all GARP timers.
Command Mode
Example
Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1
Eth 1/ 1 GARP Timer Status:
Join Timer : 20 centiseconds
Leave Timer : 60 centiseconds
Leave All Timer : 1000 centiseconds
Console#
– 568 –
Editing VLAN Groups
Related Commands
garp timer (565)
show gvrp This command shows if GVRP is enabled.

configuration
Syntax
show gvrp configuration [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
Shows both global and interface-specific configuration.
Command Mode
Example
Console#show gvrp configuration ethernet 1/7
Eth 1/ 7:
GVRP Configuration : Disabled
Console#
Editing VLAN Groups

Table 106: Commands for Editing VLAN Groups
vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete GC
VLANs
vlan Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state VC
vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take
effect immediately.
Default Setting
None
– 569 –
Editing VLAN Groups
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete VLANs.
After finishing configuration changes, you can display the VLAN settings by
entering the show vlan command.
◆ Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode
and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The results of these commands are
written to the running-configuration file, and you can display this file by
entering the show running-config command.
Example
Console(config-vlan)#
Related Commands
show vlan (578)
vlan This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or
delete a VLAN.
Syntax
vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active | suspend}]
[rspan]
no vlan vlan-id [name | state]
vlan-id - VLAN ID, specified as a single number, a range of consecutive
numbers separated by a hyphen, or multiple numbers separated by
commas. (Range: 1-4093)
name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.
media ethernet - Ethernet media type.
state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.
active - VLAN is operational.
suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.
rspan - Keyword to create a VLAN used for mirroring traffic from
remote switches. The VLAN used for RSPAN cannot include VLAN 1 (the
switch’s default VLAN). Nor should it include VLAN 4093 (which is used
for switch clustering). Configuring VLAN 4093 for other purposes may
cause problems in the Clustering operation. For more information on
configuring RSPAN through the CLI, see “RSPAN Mirroring Commands”
on page 454.
– 570 –
Configuring VLAN Interfaces
Default Setting
By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.
Command Mode
VLAN Database Configuration
Command Usage
◆ no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.
◆ no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.
◆ no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state (i.e., active).
◆ You can configure up to 4094 VLANs on the switch.
Example
The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5. The VLAN is
activated by default.
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet
Console(config-vlan)#
Related Commands
show vlan (578)

Table 107: Commands for Configuring VLAN Interfaces
interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC
switchport acceptable- Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC

frame-types
switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC
switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC
switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC
switchport ingress-filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC
switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface IC
switchport native vlan Configures the PVID (native VLAN) of an interface IC
switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC
vlan-trunking Allows unknown VLANs to cross the switch IC
– 571 –
interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is used to
configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface. Use the no form to change a
Layer 3 normal VLAN back to a Layer 2 interface.
Syntax
[no] interface vlan vlan-id
vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Creating a “normal” VLAN with the vlan command initializes it as a Layer 2
interface. To change it to a Layer 3 interface, use the interface command to
enter interface configuration for the desired VLAN, enter any Layer 3
configuration commands, and save the configuration settings.
◆ To change a Layer 3 normal VLAN back to a Layer 2 VLAN, use the no interface
command.
Example
The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to
VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
shutdown (407)
interface (400)
vlan (570)
switchport This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the no form to
acceptable-frame- restore the default.
types
Syntax
switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged}
no switchport acceptable-frame-types
all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.
tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.
– 572 –
Default Setting
All frame types
Command Mode
Command Usage
When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged are
assigned to the default VLAN.
Example
The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to
tagged frames:

Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
switchport mode (575)
switchport This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use the no form
allowed vlan to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport allowed vlan {add vlan-list [tagged | untagged] |
remove vlan-list}
no switchport allowed vlan
add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.
remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.
Default Setting
All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default.
The default frame type is untagged.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be assigned to at
least one VLAN as untagged.
– 573 –
◆ If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you can only
assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.
◆ Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged parameter
used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or
remove the tag from a frame on egress.
◆ If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the
connection supports VLANs, the interface should be added to these VLANs as
an untagged member. Otherwise, it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN
as untagged, and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface.
◆ If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that

interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that
interface.
Example
The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the allowed list as
tagged VLANs for port 1:

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged
Console(config-if)#
switchport This command enables ingress filtering for an interface. Use the no form to restore
ingress-filtering the default.
Syntax
[no] switchport ingress-filtering
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.
◆ If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for
which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except
for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).
◆ If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for
which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.
– 574 –
◆ Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP
or STA. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such as GMRP.
Example
The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable
ingress filtering:

Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering
Console(config-if)#
switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use the no form
Syntax
switchport mode {access | hybrid | trunk}
no switchport mode
access - Specifies an access VLAN interface. The port transmits and receives
untagged frames on a single VLAN only.
hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or
untagged frames.
trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that
identify the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default
VLAN (i.e., associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.
Default Setting
All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.
Command Mode
Command Usage
Access mode is mutually exclusive with VLAN trunking (see the vlan-trunking
command). If VLAN trunking is enabled on an interface, then that interface cannot
be set to access mode, and vice versa.
Example
The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and then set the
switchport mode to hybrid:

Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid
Console(config-if)#
– 575 –
Related Commands
switchport acceptable-frame-types (572)
switchport native vlan This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port. Use the no form
Syntax
switchport native vlan vlan-id
no switchport native vlan
vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port. (Range: 1-4093)
Default Setting
VLAN 1
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When using Access mode, and an interface is assigned to a new VLAN, its PVID
is automatically set to the identifier for that VLAN. When using Hybrid mode,
the PVID for an interface can be set to any VLAN for which it is an untagged
member.
◆ If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid, the
PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port.
Example
The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:

Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3
Console(config-if)#
vlan-trunking This command allows unknown VLAN groups to pass through the specified
interface. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] vlan-trunking
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 576 –
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to configure a tunnel across one or more intermediate
switches which pass traffic for VLAN groups to which they do not belong.
The following figure shows VLANs 1 and 2 configured on switches A and B, with
VLAN trunking being used to pass traffic for these VLAN groups across switches
C, D and E.
Figure 6: Configuring VLAN Trunking
Without VLAN trunking, you would have to configure VLANs 1 and 2 on all
intermediate switches – C, D and E; otherwise these switches would drop any
frames with unknown VLAN group tags. However, by enabling VLAN trunking
on the intermediate switch ports along the path connecting VLANs 1 and 2,
you only need to create these VLAN groups in switches A and B. Switches C, D
and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (groups that
are unknown to those switches) to pass through their VLAN trunking ports.
◆ VLAN trunking is mutually exclusive with the “access” switchport mode (see the
switchport mode command). If VLAN trunking is enabled on an interface, then
that interface cannot be set to access mode, and vice versa.
◆ To prevent loops from forming in the spanning tree, all unknown VLANs will be
bound to a single instance (either STP/RSTP or an MSTP instance, depending on
the selected STA mode).
◆ If both VLAN trunking and ingress filtering are disabled on an interface, packets
with unknown VLAN tags will still be allowed to enter this interface and will be
flooded to all other ports where VLAN trunking is enabled. (In other words,
VLAN trunking will still be effectively enabled for the unknown VLAN).
Example
The following example enables VLAN trunking on ports 9 and 10 to establish a path
across the switch for unknown VLAN groups:

Console(config-if)#vlan-trunking
Console(config-if)#vlan-trunking
Console(config-if)#
– 577 –
Displaying VLAN Information
Displaying VLAN Information

This section describes commands used to display VLAN information.
Table 108: Commands for Displaying VLAN Information

show interfaces status vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE, PE
show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an NE, PE
interface
show vlan Shows VLAN information NE, PE
show vlan This command shows VLAN information.
Syntax
show vlan [id vlan-id | name vlan-name]
id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID.
vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093)
name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.
Default Setting
Shows all VLANs.
Command Mode
Example
The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:
Console#show vlan id 1
VLAN ID: 1
Type: Static
Name: DefaultVlan
Status: Active
Ports/Port Channels : Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Eth1/28(S)
Console#
– 578 –
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling

IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ tunneling) uses a single Service Provider VLAN
(SPVLAN) for customers who have multiple VLANs. Customer VLAN IDs are
preserved and traffic from different customers is segregated within the service
provider’s network even when they use the same customer-specific VLAN IDs. QinQ
tunneling expands VLAN space by using a VLAN-in-VLAN hierarchy, preserving the
customer’s original tagged packets, and adding SPVLAN tags to each frame (also
called double tagging).
This section describes commands used to configure QinQ tunneling.
Table 109: 802.1Q Tunneling Commands

dot1q-tunnel Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ GC

system-tunnel-control mode
switchport dot1q-tunnel Configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port IC

mode
switchport dot1q-tunnel Creates a CVLAN to SPVLAN mapping entry IC

service match cvid
switchport dot1q-tunnel Sets the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of a tunnel port IC
tpid
show dot1q-tunnel Displays the configuration of QinQ tunnel ports PE
show interfaces switchport Displays port QinQ operational status PE
General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ
1. Configure the switch to QinQ mode (dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control).
2. Create a SPVLAN (vlan).
3. Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to dot1Q-tunnel access mode

(switchport dot1q-tunnel mode).
4. Set the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of the tunnel access port. This step is
required if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to
identify 802.1Q tagged frames. The standard ethertype value is 0x8100. (See
switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid.)
5. Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged
member (switchport allowed vlan).
6. Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel access port
(switchport native vlan).
7. Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to dot1Q-tunnel uplink mode

(switchport dot1q-tunnel mode).
– 579 –
8. Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged member
(switchport allowed vlan).
Limitations for QinQ
◆ The native VLAN for the tunnel uplink ports and tunnel access ports cannot be
the same. However, the same service VLANs can be set on both tunnel port
types.
◆ IGMP Snooping should not be enabled on a tunnel access port.
◆ If the spanning tree protocol is enabled, be aware that a tunnel access or tunnel
uplink port may be disabled if the spanning tree structure is automatically
reconfigured to overcome a break in the tree. It is therefore advisable to disable
spanning tree on these ports.
dot1q-tunnel This command sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode. Use the no form to disable
system-tunnel-control QinQ operating mode.
Syntax
[no] dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
QinQ tunnel mode must be enabled on the switch for QinQ interface settings to be
functional.
Example
Console(config)#dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show dot1q-tunnel (585)
– 580 –
switchport This command configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port. Use the no form to
dot1q-tunnel mode disable QinQ on the interface.
Syntax
switchport dot1q-tunnel mode {access | uplink}
no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode
access – Sets the port as an 802.1Q tunnel access port.
uplink – Sets the port as an 802.1Q tunnel uplink port.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ QinQ tunneling must be enabled on the switch using the dot1q-tunnel
system-tunnel-control command before the switchport dot1q-tunnel mode
interface command can take effect.
◆ When a tunnel uplink port receives a packet from a customer, the customer tag
(regardless of whether there are one or more tag layers) is retained in the inner
tag, and the service provider’s tag added to the outer tag.
◆ When a tunnel uplink port receives a packet from the service provider, the
outer service provider’s tag is stripped off, and the packet passed on to the
VLAN indicated by the inner tag. If no inner tag is found, the packet is passed
onto the native VLAN defined for the uplink port.
Example
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode access
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
show dot1q-tunnel (585)
– 581 –
switchport This command creates a CVLAN to SPVLAN mapping entry. Use the no form to
dot1q-tunnel service delete a VLAN mapping entry.
match cvid
Syntax
switchport dot1q-tunnel service svid match cvid cvid
svid - VLAN ID for the outer VLAN tag (Service Provider VID). (Range: 1-4093)
cvid - VLAN ID for the inner VLAN tag (Customer VID). (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Default mapping uses the PVID of the ingress port on the edge router for the SPVID.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The inner VLAN tag of a customer packet entering the edge router of a service
provider’s network is mapped to an outer tag indicating the service provider
VLAN that will carry this traffic across the 802.1Q tunnel. This process is
performed in a transparent manner.
◆ When priority bits are found in the inner tag, these are also copied to the outer
tag. This allows the service provider to differentiate service based on the
indicated priority and appropriate methods of queue management at
intermediate nodes across the tunnel.
◆ Rather than relying on standard service paths and priority queuing, QinQ VLAN
mapping can be used to further enhance service by defining a set of
differentiated service pathways to follow across the service provider’s network
for traffic arriving from specified inbound customer VLANs.
◆ Note that all customer interfaces should be configured as access interfaces

(that is, a user-to-network interface) and service provider interfaces as uplink
interfaces (that is, a network-to-network interface). Use the switchport
dot1q-tunnel mode uplink command to set an interface to access or uplink
mode.
Example
This example sets the SVID to 99 in the outer tag for egress packets exiting port 1
when the packet’s CVID is 2.

Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel service 99 match cvid 2
Console(config-if)#
– 582 –
The following example maps C-VLAN 10 to S-VLAN 100, C-VLAN 20 to S-VLAN 200
and C-VLAN 30 to S-VLAN 300 for ingress traffic on port 1 of Switches A and B.
Figure 7: Mapping QinQ Service VLAN to Customer VLAN
Switch C
Port 1 Port 2
[SVID 100, CVID 10] [SVID 100, CVID 10]
Port 2 Port 2
Port 1 Port 1
[VID 10]
Switch A Switch B [VID 10]
[VID 20] [VID 20]
[VID 30] [VID 30]
Step 1. Configure Switch A and B.
1. Create VLANs 100, 200 and 300.

Console(config-vlan)#vlan 100,200,300 media ethernet state active
2. Enable QinQ.
3. Configure port 2 as a tagged member of VLANs 100, 200 and 300 using uplink
mode.
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 100,200,300 tagged
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode uplink
4. Configures port 1 as an untagged member of VLANs 100, 200 and 300 using
access mode.
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 100,200,300 untagged
5. Configure the following selective QinQ mapping entries.

6. Configures port 1 as member of VLANs 10, 20 and 30 to avoid filtering out

incoming frames tagged with VID 10, 20 or 30 on port 1
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 10,20,30
7. Verify configuration settings.
Console#show dot1q-tunnel service

802.1Q Tunnel Service Subscriptions
Port Match C-VID S-VID

-------- ----------- -----
Eth 1/ 1 10 100
Eth 1/ 1 20 200
Eth 1/ 1 30 300
– 583 –
Step 2. Configure Switch C.
1. Create VLAN 100, 200 and 300.

Console(config-vlan)#vlan 100,200,300 media ethernet state active
2. Configure port 1 and port 2 as tagged members of VLAN 100, 200 and 300.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1,2
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 100,200,300 tagged
switchport This command sets the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of a tunnel port. Use the
dot1q-tunnel tpid no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid tpid
no switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid
tpid – Sets the ethertype value for 802.1Q encapsulation. This identifier is
used to select a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged
frames. The standard ethertype value is 0x8100. (Range: 0800-FFFF
hexadecimal)
Default Setting
0x8100
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use the switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid command to set a custom 802.1Q
ethertype value on the selected interface. This feature allows the switch to
interoperate with third-party switches that do not use the standard 0x8100
ethertype to identify 802.1Q-tagged frames. For example, 0x1234 is set as the
custom 802.1Q ethertype on a trunk port, incoming frames containing that
ethertype are assigned to the VLAN contained in the tag following the
ethertype field, as they would be with a standard 802.1Q trunk. Frames arriving
on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as untagged
frames, and assigned to the native VLAN of that port.
◆ The specified ethertype only applies to ports configured in Uplink mode using
the switchport dot1q-tunnel mode command. If the port is in normal mode (i.e,
unspecified), the TPID is always 8100. If the port is in Access mode, received
packets are processes as untagged packets.
Example
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid 9100
Console(config-if)#
– 584 –
Related Commands
show dot1q-tunnel This command displays information about QinQ tunnel ports.
Syntax
show dot1q-tunnel [interface interface [service svid] | service [svid]]
interface
ethernet unit/port
svid - VLAN ID for the outer VLAN tag (SPVID). (Range: 1-4093)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode uplink
Console#show dot1q-tunnel
802.1Q Tunnel Status : Enabled
Port Mode TPID (hex)

-------- ------ ----------
Eth 1/ 1 Access 8100
Eth 1/ 2 Uplink 8100
Eth 1/ 3 Normal
. 8100
.
.
Console#show dot1q-tunnel interface ethernet 1/5

-------- ----------- -----
Eth 1/ 5 1 100
Console#show dot1q-tunnel service 100


-------- ----------- -----
Eth 1/ 5 1 100
Eth 1/ 6 1 100
Console#
– 585 –
Configuring L2CP Tunneling
Related Commands
switchport dot1q-tunnel mode (581)

This section describes the commands used to configure Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
(L2PT).
Table 110: L2 Protocol Tunnel Commands

l2protocol-tunnel tunnel- Configures the destination address for Layer 2 Protocol GC

dmac Tunneling
switchport Enables Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling for the specified IC

l2protocol-tunnel protocol
show l2protocol-tunnel Shows settings for Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling PE
l2protocol-tunnel This command configures the destination address for Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
tunnel-dmac (L2PT). Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
l2protocol-tunnel tunnel-dmac mac-address
mac-address – The switch rewrites the destination MAC address in all
upstream L2PT protocol packets (i.e, STP BPDUs) to this value, and forwards
them on to uplink ports. The MAC address must be specified in the format
xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx.
Default Setting
01-12-CF-.00-00-02, proprietary tunnel address
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When L2PT is not used, protocol packets (such as STP) are flooded to 802.1Q
access ports on the same edge switch, but filtered from 802.1Q tunnel ports.
This creates disconnected protocol domains in the customer’s network.
◆ L2PT can be used to pass various types of protocol packets belonging to the
same customer transparently across a service provider’s network. In this way,
normally segregated network segments can be configured to function inside a
common protocol domain.
◆ L2PT encapsulates protocol packets entering ingress ports on the service

provider’s edge switch, replacing the destination MAC address with a
– 586 –
proprietary MAC address (for example, the spanning tree protocol uses 10-12-
CF-00-00-02), a reserved address for other specified protocol types (as defined
in IEEE 802.1ad – Provider Bridges), or a user-defined address. All intermediate
switches carrying this traffic across the service provider’s network treat these
encapsulated packets in the same way as normal data, forwarding them across
to the tunnel’s egress port. The egress port decapsulates these packets, restores
the proper protocol and MAC address information, and then floods them onto
the same VLANs at the customer’s remote site (via all of the appropriate tunnel
ports and access ports13 connected to the same metro VLAN).
◆ The way in which L2PT processes packets is based on the following criteria – (1)
packet is received on a QinQ uplink port, (2) packet is received on a QinQ access
port, or (3) received packet is Cisco-compatible L2PT (i.e., as indicated by a
proprietary MAC address).
Processing protocol packets defined in IEEE 802.1ad – Provider Bridges

◆ When an IEEE 802.1ad protocol packet is received on an uplink port (i.e., an
802.1Q tunnel ingress port connecting the edge switch to the service provider
network)
■ with the destination address 01-80-C2-00-00-00,0B~0F (C-VLAN tag), it is

forwarded to all QinQ uplink ports and QinQ access ports in the same S-
VLAN for which L2PT is enabled for that protocol.
■ with the destination address 01-80-C2-00-00-01~0A (S-VLAN tag), it is

filtered, decapsulated, and processed locally by the switch if the protocol is
supported.
◆ When a protocol packet is received on an access port (i.e., an 802.1Q trunk port
connecting the edge switch to the local customer network)
■ with the destination address 01-80-C2-00-00-00,0B~0F (C-VLAN), and
■ L2PT is enabled on the port, the frame is forwarded to all QinQ uplink
ports and QinQ access ports on which L2PT is enabled for that protocol
in the same S-VLAN.
■ L2PT is disabled on the port, the frame is decapsulated and processed

locally by the switch if the protocol is supported.
■ with destination address 01-80-C2-00-00-01~0A (S-VLAN), the frame is

filtered, decapsulated, and processed locally by the switch if the protocol is
supported.
13. Access ports in this context are 802.1Q trunk ports.
– 587 –
Processing Cisco-compatible protocol packets

◆ When a Cisco-compatible L2PT packet is received on an uplink port, and
■ recognized as a CDP/VTP/STP/PVST+ protocol packet (where STP means

STP/RSTP/MSTP), it is forwarded to the following ports in the same S-VLAN:
(a) all access ports for which L2PT has been disabled, and (b) all uplink
ports.
■ recognized as a Generic Bridge PDU Tunneling (GBPT) protocol packet (i.e.,

having the destination address 01-00-0C-CD-CD-D0), it is forwarded to the
following ports in the same S-VLAN:
■ other access ports for which L2PT is enabled after decapsulating the
packet and restoring the proper protocol and MAC address
information.
■ all uplink ports.
◆ When a Cisco-compatible L2PT packet is received on an access port, and
■ recognized as a CDP/VTP/STP/PVST+ protocol packet, and
■ L2PT is enabled on this port, it is forwarded to the following ports in the

same S-VLAN: (a) other access ports for which L2PT is enabled, and
(b) uplink ports after rewriting the destination address to make it a
GBPT protocol packet (i.e., setting the destination address to 01-00-0C-
CD-CD-D0).
■ L2PT is disabled on this port, it is forwarded to the following ports in

the same S-VLAN: (a) other access ports for which L2PT is disabled, and
(b) all uplink ports.
■ recognized as a GBPT protocol packet (i.e., having the destination address

01-00-0C-CD-CD-D0), and
■ L2PT is enabled on this port, it is forwarded to other access ports in the

same S-VLAN for which L2PT is enabled
■ L2PT is disabled on this port, it is forwarded to the following ports in

the same S-VLAN: (a) other access ports for which L2PT is disabled, and
(b) all uplink ports.
◆ For L2PT to function properly, QinQ must be enabled on the switch using the
dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control command, and the interface configured to
802.1Q tunnel mode using the switchport dot1q-tunnel mode command.
– 588 –
Example
Console(config)#l2protocol-tunnel tunnel-dmac 01-80-C2-00-00-01
Console(config-)#
switchport This command enables Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) for the specified protocol.
l2protocol-tunnel Use the no form to disable L2PT for the specified protocol.
Syntax
switchport l2protocol-tunnel {cdp | lldp | pvst+ | spanning-tree | vtp}
cdp - Cisco Discovery Protocol
lldp - Link Layer Discovery Protocol
pvst+ - Cisco Per VLAN Spanning Tree Plus
spanning-tree - Spanning Tree (STP, RSTP, MSTP)
vtp - Cisco VLAN Trunking Protocol
Default Setting
Disabled for all protocols
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Refer to the Command Usage section for the l2protocol-tunnel tunnel-dmac
command.
◆ For L2PT to function properly, QinQ must be enabled on the switch using the
dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control command, and the interface configured to
802.1Q tunnel mode using the switchport dot1q-tunnel mode command.
Example
Console(config-if)#switchport l2protocol-tunnel spanning-tree
Console(config-if)#
– 589 –
Configuring VLAN Translation
show This command shows settings for Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT).
l2protocol-tunnel
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show l2protocol-tunnel
Layer 2 Protocol Tunnel
Tunnel MAC Address : 01-12-CF-00-00-00
Interface Protocol
----------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1 Spanning Tree
Console#

QinQ tunneling uses double tagging to preserve the customer’s VLAN tags on
traffic crossing the service provider’s network. However, if any switch in the path
crossing the service provider’s network does not support this feature, then the
switches directly connected to that device can be configured to swap the
customer’s VLAN ID with the service provider’s VLAN ID for upstream traffic, or the
service provider’s VLAN ID with the customer’s VLAN ID for downstream traffic.
This section describes commands used to configure VLAN translation.
Table 111: VLAN Translation Commands

switchport vlan-translation Maps VLAN IDs between the customer and service provider IC
show vlan-translation Displays the configuration settings for VLAN translation PE
switchport This command maps VLAN IDs between the customer and service provider.
vlan-translation
Syntax
switchport vlan-translation original-vlan new-vlan
no switchport vlan-translation original-vlan
original-vlan - The original VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4093)
new-vlan - The new VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4093)
Default Setting
Disabled
– 590 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If the next switch upstream does not support QinQ tunneling, then use this
command to map the customer’s VLAN ID to the service provider’s VLAN ID for
the upstream port. Similarly, if the next switch downstream does not support
QinQ tunneling, then use this command to map the service provider’s VLAN ID
to the customer’s VLAN ID for the downstream port. Note that one command
maps both the original-vlan to new-vlan for ingress traffic and the new-vlan to
original-vlan for egress traffic on the specified port.
For example, assume that the upstream switch does not support QinQ
tunneling. If the command switchport vlan-translation 10 100 is used to map
VLAN 10 to VLAN 100 for upstream traffic entering port 1, and VLAN 100 to
VLAN 10 for downstream traffic leaving port 1, then the VLAN IDs will be
swapped as shown below.
Figure 8: Configuring VLAN Translation
(VLAN 10) (VLAN 100)
upstream
1 2
(VLAN 100) (VLAN 10)
downstream
◆ The maximum number of VLAN translation entries is 8 per port, and up to 96 for
the system. However, note that configuring a large number of entries may
degrade the performance of other processes that also use the TCAM, such as IP
Source Guard filter rules, Quality of Service (QoS) processes, QinQ, MAC-based
VLANs, VLAN translation, or traps.
◆ If VLAN translation is set on an interface with this command, and the same
interface is also configured as a QinQ access port with the switchport
dot1q-tunnel mode command, VLAN tag assignments will be determined by
the QinQ process, not by VLAN translation.
Example
This example configures VLAN translation for Port 1 as described in the Command
Usage section above.
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 10 media ethernet state active
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 100 media ethernet state active
Console(config-vlan)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1,2
Console(config-if)#switchport vlan-translation 10 100
Console#show vlan-translation
Interface Old VID New VID

--------- ------- -------
Eth 1/ 1 10 100
– 591 –
Configuring Protocol-based VLANs
Console#
show vlan-translation This command displays the configuration settings for VLAN translation.
Syntax
show vlan-translation [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show vlan-translation
Interface Old VID New VID

--------- ------- -------
Eth 1/ 1 10 100
Console#

The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily
grouped into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass
traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating
in a specific protocol. This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits
of VLANs, including security and easy accessibility.
To avoid these problems, you can configure this switch with protocol-based VLANs
that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required
protocol. When a frame is received at a port, its VLAN membership can then be
determined based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets.
Table 112: Protocol-based VLAN Commands

protocol-vlan Create a protocol group, specifying the supported GC

protocol-group protocols
protocol-vlan Maps a protocol group to a VLAN IC

protocol-group
– 592 –
Table 112: Protocol-based VLAN Commands (Continued)

show protocol-vlan Shows the configuration of protocol groups PE

protocol-group
show interfaces Shows the interfaces mapped to a protocol group and the PE
protocol-vlan corresponding VLAN
protocol-group
To configure protocol-based VLANs, follow these steps:
1. First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use (page 570).
Although not mandatory, we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each
major protocol running on your network. Do not add port members at this
time.
2. Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN
using the protocol-vlan protocol-group command (Global Configuration
mode).
3. Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the
protocol-vlan protocol-group command (Interface Configuration mode).
protocol-vlan This command creates a protocol group, or to add specific protocols to a group. Use
protocol-group the no form to remove a protocol group.
(Configuring Groups)
Syntax
protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id [{add | remove}
frame-type frame protocol-type protocol]
no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id
group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)
frame14 - Frame type used by this protocol. (Options: ethernet, rfc_1042,
llc_other)
protocol - Protocol type. The only option for the llc_other frame type is
ipx_raw. The options for all other frames types include: arp, ip, ipv6, rarp.
Default Setting
No protocol groups are configured.
Command Mode
14. SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations.
– 593 –
Example
The following creates protocol group 1, and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and
ARP protocol types:
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 add frame-type ethernet

protocol-type ip
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 add frame-type ethernet
protocol-type arp
Console(config)#
protocol-vlan This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface. Use the
protocol-group no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface.
(Configuring Interfaces)
Syntax
protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id vlan vlan-id priority priority
no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id vlan
group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)
vlan-id - VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded.
(Range: 1-4093)
priority - The priority assigned to untagged ingress traffic.
(Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)
Default Setting
No protocol groups are mapped for any interface.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When creating a protocol-based VLAN, only assign interfaces via this
command. If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands
(such as the vlan command), these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol
type into the associated VLAN.
◆ When MAC-based, IP subnet-based, and protocol-based VLANs are supported

concurrently, priority is applied in this sequence, and then port-based VLANs
last.
◆ When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN, it is
processed in the following manner:
■ If the frame is tagged, it will be processed according to the standard rules

applied to tagged frames.
■ If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches, the frame is
forwarded to the appropriate VLAN.
– 594 –
■ If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match, the frame is
forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface.
Example
The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol
type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2.

Console(config-if)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 vlan 2 priority 0
Console(config-if)#
show protocol-vlan This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups.
protocol-group
Syntax
show protocol-vlan protocol-group [group-id]
group-id - Group identifier for a protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)
Default Setting
All protocol groups are displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet:
Console#show protocol-vlan protocol-group
Protocol Group ID Frame Type Protocol Type

------------------ ------------- ---------------
1 ethernet 08 00
Console#
show interfaces This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected
protocol-vlan interfaces.
protocol-group
Syntax
show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
– 595 –
Configuring IP Subnet VLANs
Default Setting
The mapping for all interfaces is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol
group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2:
Console#show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group
Port ProtocolGroup ID VLAN ID

---------- ------------------ -----------
Eth 1/1 1 vlan2
Console#

When using IEEE 802.1Q port-based VLAN classification, all untagged frames
received by a port are classified as belonging to the VLAN whose VID (PVID) is
associated with that port.
When IP subnet-based VLAN classification is enabled, the source address of

untagged ingress frames are checked against the IP subnet-to-VLAN mapping
table. If an entry is found for that subnet, these frames are assigned to the VLAN
indicated in the entry. If no IP subnet is matched, the untagged frames are classified
as belonging to the receiving port’s VLAN ID (PVID).
Table 113: IP Subnet VLAN Commands

subnet-vlan Defines the IP Subnet VLANs GC
show subnet-vlan Displays IP Subnet VLAN settings PE
– 596 –
subnet-vlan This command configures IP Subnet VLAN assignments. Use the no form to remove
an IP subnet-to-VLAN assignment.
Syntax
subnet-vlan subnet ip-address mask vlan vlan-id [priority priority]
no subnet-vlan subnet {ip-address mask | all}
ip-address – The IP address that defines the subnet. Valid IP addresses
consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.
mask – This mask identifies the host address bits of the IP subnet.
vlan-id – VLAN to which matching IP subnet traffic is forwarded.
(Range: 1-4093)
priority – The priority assigned to untagged ingress traffic. (Range: 0-7,
where 7 is the highest priority)
Default Setting
Priority: 0
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Each IP subnet can be mapped to only one VLAN ID. An IP subnet consists of an
IP address and a subnet mask. The specified VLAN need not be an existing
VLAN.
◆ When an untagged frame is received by a port, the source IP address is checked

against the IP subnet-to-VLAN mapping table, and if an entry is found, the
corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the frame. If no mapping is found, the
PVID of the receiving port is assigned to the frame.
◆ The IP subnet cannot be a broadcast or multicast IP address.

last.
Example
The following example assigns traffic for the subnet 192.168.12.192, mask
255.255.255.224, to VLAN 4.
Console(config)#subnet-vlan subnet 192.168.12.192 255.255.255.224 vlan 4

Console(config)#
– 597 –
Configuring MAC Based VLANs
show subnet-vlan This command displays IP Subnet VLAN assignments.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to display subnet-to-VLAN mappings.
◆ The last matched entry is used if more than one entry can be matched.
Example
The following example displays all configured IP subnet-based VLANs.
Console#show subnet-vlan
IP Address Mask VLAN ID Priority
--------------- --------------- ------- --------
192.168.12.0 255.255.255.128 1 0
192.168.12.128 255.255.255.192 3 0
192.168.12.192 255.255.255.224 4 0
192.168.12.224 255.255.255.240 5 0
192.168.12.240 255.255.255.248 6 0
192.168.12.248 255.255.255.252 7 0
192.168.12.252 255.255.255.254 8 0
192.168.12.254 255.255.255.255 9 0
192.168.12.255 255.255.255.255 10 0
Console#

When using IEEE 802.1Q port-based VLAN classification, all untagged frames
received by a port are classified as belonging to the VLAN whose VID (PVID) is
associated with that port.
When MAC-based VLAN classification is enabled, the source address of untagged

ingress frames are checked against the MAC address-to-VLAN mapping table. If an
entry is found for that address, these frames are assigned to the VLAN indicated in
the entry. If no MAC address is matched, the untagged frames are classified as
belonging to the receiving port’s VLAN ID (PVID).
Table 114: MAC Based VLAN Commands

mac-vlan Defines the IP Subnet VLANs GC
show mac-vlan Displays IP Subnet VLAN settings PE
– 598 –
mac-vlan This command configures MAC address-to-VLAN mapping. Use the no form to
remove an assignment.
Syntax
mac-vlan mac-address mac-address [mask mask-address] vlan vlan-id
[priority priority]
no mac-vlan mac-address {mac-address [mask mask-address] | all}
mac-address – The source MAC address to be matched. Configured MAC
addresses can only be unicast addresses. The MAC address must be
specified in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx.
mask-address - Identifies a range of MAC addresses. The mask can be
specified in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx, where an
equivalent binary value “1” means relevant and “0” means ignore.
vlan-id – VLAN to which the matching source MAC address traffic is
forwarded. (Range: 1-4093)
priority – The priority assigned to untagged ingress traffic. (Range: 0-7,
where 7 is the highest priority)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The MAC-to-VLAN mapping applies to all ports on the switch.
◆ Source MAC addresses can be mapped to only one VLAN ID.
◆ Configured MAC addresses cannot be broadcast or multicast addresses.

last.
Example
The following example assigns traffic from source MAC address 00-00-00-11-22-33
to VLAN 10.
Console(config)#mac-vlan mac-address 00-00-00-11-22-33 mask FF-FF-FF-FF-00-00

vlan 10
Console(config)#
– 599 –
Configuring Voice VLANs
show mac-vlan This command displays MAC address-to-VLAN assignments.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Use this command to display MAC address-to-VLAN mappings.
Example
The following example displays all configured MAC address-based VLANs.
Console#show mac-vlan
MAC Address VLAN ID Priority
----------------- -------- --------
00-00-00-11-22-33 10 0
Console#

The switch allows you to specify a Voice VLAN for the network and set a CoS priority
for the VoIP traffic. VoIP traffic can be detected on switch ports by using the source
MAC address of packets, or by using LLDP (IEEE 802.1AB) to discover connected
VoIP devices. When VoIP traffic is detected on a configured port, the switch
automatically assigns the port to the Voice VLAN. Alternatively, switch ports can be
manually configured.
Table 115: Voice VLAN Commands

voice vlan Defines the Voice VLAN ID GC

voice vlan aging Configures the aging time for Voice VLAN ports GC
voice vlan mac-address Configures VoIP device MAC addresses GC
switchport voice vlan Sets the Voice VLAN port mode IC
switchport voice vlan Sets the VoIP traffic priority for ports IC
priority
switchport voice vlan rule Sets the automatic VoIP traffic detection method for ports IC
switchport voice vlan Enables Voice VLAN security on ports IC

security
show voice vlan Displays Voice VLAN settings PE
– 600 –
voice vlan This command enables VoIP traffic detection and defines the Voice VLAN ID. Use
the no form to disable the Voice VLAN.
Syntax
voice vlan voice-vlan-id
no voice vlan
voice-vlan-id - Specifies the voice VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4093)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When IP telephony is deployed in an enterprise network, it is recommended to
isolate the Voice over IP (VoIP) network traffic from other data traffic. Traffic
isolation helps prevent excessive packet delays, packet loss, and jitter, which
results in higher voice quality. This is best achieved by assigning all VoIP traffic
to a single VLAN.
◆ VoIP traffic can be detected on switch ports by using the source MAC address of
packets, or by using LLDP (IEEE 802.1AB) to discover connected VoIP devices.
When VoIP traffic is detected on a configured port, the switch automatically
assigns the port as a tagged member of the Voice VLAN.
◆ Only one Voice VLAN is supported and it must already be created on the switch
before it can be specified as the Voice VLAN.
◆ The Voice VLAN ID cannot be modified when the global auto-detection status
is enabled (see the switchport voice vlan command.
Example
The following example enables VoIP traffic detection and specifies the Voice VLAN
ID as 1234.
Console(config)#voice vlan 1234

Console(config)#
– 601 –
voice vlan aging This command sets the Voice VLAN ID time out. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
voice vlan aging minutes
no voice vlan
minutes - Specifies the port Voice VLAN membership time out.
Default Setting
1440 minutes
Command Mode
Command Usage
The Voice VLAN aging time is the time after which a port is removed from the Voice
VLAN when VoIP traffic is no longer received on the port.
The VoIP aging time starts to count down when the OUI’s MAC address expires from
the MAC address table. Therefore, the MAC address aging time should be added to
the overall aging time. For example, if you configure the MAC address table aging
time to 30 seconds, and voice VLAN aging time to 5 minutes, then after 5.5 minutes,
a port will be removed from the voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is no longer received
on the port. Alternatively, if you clear the MAC address table manually, then the
switch will also start counting down the voice VLAN aging time.
Example
The following example configures the Voice VLAN aging time as 3000 minutes.
Console(config)#voice vlan aging 3000

Console(config)#
voice vlan This command specifies MAC address ranges to add to the OUI Telephony list. Use
mac-address the no form to remove an entry from the list.
Syntax
voice vlan mac-address mac-address mask mask-address
[description description]
no voice vlan mac-address mac-address mask mask-address
mac-address - Defines a MAC address OUI that identifies VoIP devices in the
network. (For example, 01-23-45-00-00-00)
mask-address - Identifies a range of MAC addresses. (Range: 80-00-00-00-
00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF)
– 602 –
description - User-defined text that identifies the VoIP devices. (Range: 1-32
characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ VoIP devices attached to the switch can be identified by the manufacturer’s
Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) in the source MAC address of received
packets. OUI numbers are assigned to manufacturers and form the first three
octets of device MAC addresses. The MAC OUI numbers for VoIP equipment can
be configured on the switch so that traffic from these devices is recognized as
VoIP.
◆ Setting a mask of FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 identifies all devices with the same OUI
(the first three octets). Other masks restrict the MAC address range. Setting a
mask of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF specifies a single MAC address.
Example
The following example adds a MAC OUI to the OUI Telephony list.
Console(config)#voice vlan mac-address 00-12-34-56-78-90 mask ff-ff-ff-00-00-

00 description A new phone
Console(config)#
switchport voice vlan This command specifies the Voice VLAN mode for ports. Use the no form to disable
the Voice VLAN feature on the port.
Syntax
switchport voice vlan {manual | auto}
no switchport voice vlan
manual - The Voice VLAN feature is enabled on the port, but the port must
be manually added to the Voice VLAN.
auto - The port will be added as a tagged member to the Voice VLAN when
VoIP traffic is detected on the port.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 603 –
Command Usage
◆ When auto is selected, you must select the method to use for detecting VoIP
traffic, either OUI or 802.1ab (LLDP) using the switchport voice vlan rule
command. When OUI is selected, be sure to configure the MAC address ranges
in the Telephony OUI list using the voice vlan mac-address command.
◆ All ports are set to VLAN hybrid mode by default. Prior to enabling VoIP for a
port (by setting the VoIP mode to Auto or Manual as described below), ensure
that VLAN membership is not set to access mode using the switchport mode
command.
Example
The following example sets port 1 to Voice VLAN auto mode.

Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan auto
Console(config-if)#
switchport voice vlan This command specifies a CoS priority for VoIP traffic on a port. Use the no form to
priority restore the default priority on a port.
Syntax
switchport voice vlan priority priority-value
no switchport voice vlan priority
priority-value - The CoS priority value. (Range: 0-6)
Default Setting
6
Command Mode
Command Usage
Specifies a CoS priority to apply to the port VoIP traffic on the Voice VLAN. The
priority of any received VoIP packet is overwritten with the new priority when the
Voice VLAN feature is active for the port.
Example
The following example sets the CoS priority to 5 on port 1.

Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan priority 5
Console(config-if)#
– 604 –
switchport voice vlan This command selects a method for detecting VoIP traffic on a port. Use the no
rule form to disable the detection method on the port.
Syntax
[no] switchport voice vlan rule {oui | lldp}
oui - Traffic from VoIP devices is detected by the Organizationally Unique
Identifier (OUI) of the source MAC address.
lldp - Uses LLDP to discover VoIP devices attached to the port.
Default Setting
OUI: Enabled
LLDP: Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When OUI is selected, be sure to configure the MAC address ranges in the
Telephony OUI list (see the voice vlan mac-address command. MAC address OUI
numbers must be configured in the Telephony OUI list so that the switch
recognizes the traffic as being from a VoIP device.
◆ LLDP checks that the “telephone bit” in the system capability TLV is turned on.
See “LLDP Commands” on page 741 for more information on LLDP.
Example
The following example enables the OUI method on port 1 for detecting VoIP traffic.

Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan rule oui
Console(config-if)#
switchport voice vlan This command enables security filtering for VoIP traffic on a port. Use the no form
security to disable filtering on a port.
Syntax
[no] switchport voice vlan security
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 605 –
Command Usage
◆ Security filtering discards any non-VoIP packets received on the port that are
tagged with the voice VLAN ID. VoIP traffic is identified by source MAC
addresses configured in the Telephony OUI list, or through LLDP that discovers
VoIP devices attached to the switch. Packets received from non-VoIP sources
are dropped.
◆ When enabled, be sure the MAC address ranges for VoIP devices are configured
in the Telephony OUI list (voice vlan mac-address).
Example
The following example enables security filtering on port 1.

Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan security
Console(config-if)#
show voice vlan This command displays the Voice VLAN settings on the switch and the OUI
Telephony list.
Syntax
show voice vlan {oui | status}
oui - Displays the OUI Telephony list.
status - Displays the global and port Voice VLAN settings.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show voice vlan status
Global Voice VLAN Status
Voice VLAN Status : Enabled
Voice VLAN ID : 1234
Voice VLAN aging time : 1440 minutes
Voice VLAN Port Summary

Port Mode Security Rule Priority Remaining Age
(minutes)
-------- -------- -------- --------- -------- -------------
Eth 1/ 1 Auto Enabled OUI 6 100
Eth 1/ 2 Disabled Disabled OUI 6 NA
Eth 1/ 3 Manual Enabled OUI 5 100
Eth 1/ 4 Auto Enabled OUI 6 100
– 606 –

Eth 1/10 Disabled Disabled OUI 6 NA
Console#show voice vlan oui

OUI Address Mask Description
----------------- ----------------- ------------------------------
00-12-34-56-78-9A FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 old phones
00-11-22-33-44-55 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 new phones
00-98-76-54-32-10 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Chris' phone
Console#
– 607 –
– 608 –
22 Class of Service Commands
The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets
have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion.
This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port. Data packets in a
port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority
queues. The default priority can be set for each interface, also the queue service
mode and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch's priority queues can be
configured.
Table 116: Priority Commands

Priority Commands Configures the queue mode, queue weights, and default priority for
(Layer 2) untagged frames
Priority Commands Sets the default priority processing method (CoS or DSCP), maps
(Layer 3 and 4) priority tags for internal processing, maps values from internal priority
table to CoS values used in tagged egress packets for Layer 2 interfaces,
maps internal per hop behavior to hardware queues
Priority Commands (Layer 2)

This section describes commands used to configure Layer 2 traffic priority on the
switch.
Table 117: Priority Commands (Layer 2)

queue mode Sets the queue mode to Weighted Round-Robin (WRR), GC

strict priority, or a combination of strict and weighted
queuing
queue weight Assigns round-robin weights to the priority queues GC
switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC
show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an PE

interface
show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE
show queue weight Shows weights assigned to the weighted queues PE
– 609 –
Chapter 22 | Class of Service Commands
queue mode This command sets the scheduling mode used for processing each of the class of
service (CoS) priority queues. The options include strict priority, Weighted Round-
Robin (WRR), or a combination of strict and weighted queuing. Use the no form to
restore the default value.
Syntax
queue mode {strict | wrr | strict-wrr [queue-type-list]}
no queue mode
strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all
traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.
This ensures that the highest priority packets are always serviced first,
ahead of all other traffic.
wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using
scheduling weights (based on the queue weight command), and servicing
each queue in a round-robin fashion.
strict-wrr - Uses strict or weighted service as specified for each queue.
queue-type-list - Indicates if the queue is a normal or strict type.
(Options: 0 indicates a normal queue, 1 indicates a strict queue)
Default Setting
WRR
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The switch can be set to service the port queues based on strict priority, WRR,
or a combination of strict and weighted queueing.
◆ Strict priority requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed

before lower priority queues are serviced.
◆ Weighted Round Robin (WRR) uses a predefined relative weight for each queue
that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue
before moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking
that can occur with strict priority queuing. Use the queue weight command to
assign weights for WRR queuing to the eight priority queues.
◆ If Strict and WRR mode is selected, a combination of strict and weighted service
is used as specified for each queue. The queues assigned to use strict or WRR
priority should be specified using the queue-type-list parameter.
◆ A weight can be assigned to each of the weighted queues (and thereby to the
corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets the frequency at which each
queue is polled for service, and subsequently affects the response time for
software applications assigned a specific priority value.
– 610 –
◆ Service time is shared at the egress ports by defining scheduling weights for
WRR, or for the queuing mode that uses a combination of strict and weighted
queuing. Service time is allocated to each queue by calculating a precise
number of bytes per second that will be serviced on each round.
◆ The specified queue mode applies to all interfaces.
Example
The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:
Console(config)#queue mode strict

Console(config)#
Related Commands
queue weight (611)
show queue mode (613)
queue weight This command assigns weights to the eight class of service (CoS) priority queues
when using weighted queuing, or one of the queuing modes that use a
combination of strict and weighted queuing. Use the no form to restore the default
weights.
Syntax
queue weight weight0...weight7
no queue weight
weight0...weight7 - The ratio of weights for queues 0 - 7 determines the
weights used by the WRR scheduler. (Range: 1-255)
Default Setting
Weights 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 are assigned to queues 0 - 7 respectively.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command shares bandwidth at the egress port by defining scheduling
weights for Weighted Round-Robin, or for the queuing mode that uses a
combination of strict and weighted queuing (page 610).
◆ Bandwidth is allocated to each queue by calculating a precise number of bytes

per second that will be serviced on each round.
– 611 –
Example
The following example shows how to assign round-robin weights of 1 - 8 to the CoS
priority queues 0 - 7.
Console(config)#queue weight 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Console(config)#
Related Commands
queue mode (610)
show queue weight (613)
switchport priority This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no form to
default restore the default value.
Syntax
switchport priority default default-priority-id
no switchport priority default
default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic. The
priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.
Default Setting
The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames received on the
interface is zero.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP, and then default switchport
priority.
◆ The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to
accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This
priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming
frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits
will be used.
◆ The switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It can be configured to
use strict priority queuing, Weighted Round Robin (WRR), or a combination of
strict and weighted queuing using the queue mode command. Inbound frames
that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port's default ingress
user priority, and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output
port. The default priority for all ingress ports is zero. Therefore, any inbound
frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 2 of the output
port. (Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated
VLAN, these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.)
– 612 –
Example
The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:

Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show queue mode
Queue Mode : Weighted Round Robin Mode

Console#
show queue weight This command displays the weights used for the weighted queues.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show queue weight
Queue ID Weight
-------- ------
0 1
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10
6 12
7 14
Console#
– 613 –
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)

This section describes commands used to configure Layer 3 and 4 traffic priority
mapping on the switch.
Table 118: Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)

qos map cos-dscp Maps CoS/CFI values in incoming packets to per-hop IC

behavior and drop precedence values for internal priority
processing
qos map dscp-mutation Maps DSCP values in incoming packets to per-hop IC

behavior and drop precedence values for internal priority
processing
qos map phb-queue Maps internal per-hop behavior values to hardware queues IC
qos map trust-mode Sets QoS mapping to DSCP or CoS IC
show qos map cos-dscp Shows ingress CoS to internal DSCP map PE
show qos map Shows ingress DSCP to internal DSCP map PE

dscp-mutation
show qos map phb-queue Shows internal per-hop behavior to hardware queue map PE
show qos map trust-mode Shows the QoS mapping mode PE
* The default settings used for mapping priority values to internal DSCP values and back to the
hardware queues are designed to optimize priority services for the majority of network
applications. It should not be necessary to modify any of the default settings unless a queuing
problem occurs with a particular application.
qos map cos-dscp This command maps CoS/CFI values in incoming packets to per-hop behavior and
drop precedence values for priority processing. Use the no form to restore the
default settings.
Syntax
qos map cos-dscp phb drop-precedence from cos0 cfi0...cos7 cfi7
no qos map cos-dscp cos0 cfi0...cos7 cfi7
phb - Per-hop behavior, or the priority used for this router hop. (Range: 0-7)
drop-precedence - Drop precedence used for controlling traffic congestion.
(Range: 0 - Green, 3 - Yellow, 1 - Red)
cos - CoS value in ingress packets. (Range: 0-7)
cfi - Canonical Format Indicator. Set to this parameter to “0” to indicate that
the MAC address information carried in the frame is in canonical format.
(Range: 0-1)
– 614 –
Default Setting
Table 119: Default Mapping of CoS/CFI to Internal PHB/Drop Precedence

CFI 0 1
CoS
0 (0,0) (0,0)
1 (1,0) (1,0)
2 (2,0) (2,0)
3 (3,0) (3,0)
4 (4,0) (4,0)
5 (5,0) (5,0)
6 (6,0) (6,0)
7 (7,0) (7,0)
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The default mapping of CoS to PHB values shown in Table 119 is based on the
recommended settings in IEEE 802.1p for mapping CoS values to output
queues.
◆ Enter a value pair for the internal per-hop behavior and drop precedence,
followed by the keyword “from” and then up to eight CoS/CFI paired values
separated by spaces.
◆ If a packet arrives with a 802.1Q header but it is not an IP packet, then the CoS/
CFI-to-PHB/Drop Precedence mapping table is used to generate priority and
drop precedence values for internal processing. Note that priority tags in the
original packet are not modified by this command.
◆ The internal DSCP consists of three bits for per-hop behavior (PHB) which
determines the queue to which a packet is sent; and two bits for drop
precedence (namely color) which is used to control traffic congestion.
◆ The specified mapping applies to all interfaces.
Example
Console(config-if)#qos map cos-dscp 0 0 from 0 1
Console(config-if)#
– 615 –
qos map This command maps DSCP values in incoming packets to per-hop behavior and
dscp-mutation drop precedence values for priority processing. Use the no form to restore the
default settings.
Syntax
qos map dscp-mutation phb drop-precedence from dscp0 ... dscp7
no qos map dscp-mutation dscp0 ... dscp7
drop-precedence - Drop precedence used for controlling traffic congestion.
(Range: 0 - Green, 3 - Yellow, 1 - Red)
dscp - DSCP value in ingress packets. (Range: 0-63)
DEFAULT SETTING.
Table 120: Default Mapping of DSCP Values to Internal PHB/Drop Values

ingress- 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
dscp1
ingress-
dscp10
0 0,0 0,1 0,0 0,3 0,0 0,1 0,0 0,3 1,0 1,1
1 1,0 1,3 1,0 1,1 1,0 1,3 2,0 2,1 2,0 2,3
2 2,0 2,1 2,0 2,3 3,0 3,1 3,0 3,3 3.0 3,1
3 3,0 3,3 4,0 4,1 4,0 4,3 4,0 4,1 4.0 4,3
4 5,0 5,1 5,0 5,3 5,0 5,1 6,0 5,3 6,0 6,1
5 6,0 6,3 6,0 6,1 6,0 6,3 7,0 7,1 7.0 7,3
6 7,0 7,1 7,0 7,3
The ingress DSCP is composed of ingress-dscp10 (most significant digit in the left column) and
ingress-dscp1 (least significant digit in the top row (in other words, ingress-dscp = ingress-
dscp10 * 10 + ingress-dscp1); and the corresponding internal-dscp is shown at the intersecting
cell in the table.
The ingress DSCP is bitwise ANDed with the binary value 11 to determine the drop precedence.
If the resulting value is 10 binary, then the drop precedence is set to 0.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Enter a value pair for the internal per-hop behavior and drop precedence,
followed by the keyword “from” and then up to eight DSCP values separated by
spaces.
◆ This map is only used when the QoS mapping mode is set to “DSCP” by the qos
map trust-mode command, and the ingress packet type is IPv4.
– 616 –
◆ Two QoS domains can have different DSCP definitions, so the DSCP-to-PHB/
Drop Precedence mutation map can be used to modify one set of DSCP values
to match the definition of another domain. The mutation map should be
applied at the receiving port (ingress mutation) at the boundary of a QoS
administrative domain.
◆ The specified mapping applies to all interfaces.
Example
This example changes the priority for all packets entering port 1 which contain a
DSCP value of 1 to a per-hop behavior of 3 and a drop precedence of 1. Referring to
Table 120, note that the DSCP value for these packets is now set to 25 (3x23+1) and
passed on to the egress interface.

Console(config-if)#qos map dscp-mutation 3 1 from 1
Console(config-if)#
qos map phb-queue This command determines the hardware output queues to use based on the
internal per-hop behavior value. Use the no form to restore the default settings.
Syntax
qos map phb-queue queue-id from phb0 ... phb7
no map phb-queue phb0 ... phb7
queue-id - The ID of the priority queue. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest
priority queue)
DEFAULT SETTING.
Table 121: Mapping Internal Per-hop Behavior to Hardware Queues

Per-hop Behavior 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Hardware Queues 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Enter a queue identifier, followed by the keyword “from” and then up to eight
internal per-hop behavior values separated by spaces.
◆ Egress packets are placed into the hardware queues according to the mapping
defined by this command.
– 617 –
Example
Console(config-if)#qos map phb-queue 0 from 1 2 3
Console(config-if)#
qos map trust-mode This command sets QoS mapping to DSCP or CoS. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
qos map trust-mode {dscp | cos}
no qos map trust-mode
dscp - Sets the QoS mapping mode to DSCP.
cos - Sets the QoS mapping mode to CoS.
Default Setting
CoS
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Port)
Command Usage
◆ If the QoS mapping mode is set to DSCP with this command, and the ingress
packet type is IPv4, then priority processing will be based on the DSCP value in
the ingress packet.
◆ If the QoS mapping mode is set to DSCP, and a non-IP packet is received, the
packet's CoS and CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) values are used for priority
processing if the packet is tagged. For an untagged packet, the default port
priority (see page 612) is used for priority processing.
◆ If the QoS mapping mode is set to CoS with this command, and the ingress
packet type is IPv4, then priority processing will be based on the CoS and CFI
values in the ingress packet.
For an untagged packet, the default port priority (see page 612) is used for
priority processing.
Example
This example sets the QoS priority mapping mode to use DSCP based on the
conditions described in the Command Usage section.
Console(config)#interface ge1/1
Console(config-if)#qos map trust-mode dscp
Console(config-if)#
– 618 –
show qos map This command shows ingress CoS/CFI to internal DSCP map.
cos-dscp
Syntax
show qos map cos-dscp interface interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show qos map cos-dscp interface ethernet 1/5
CoS Information of Eth 1/5
CoS-DSCP map.(x,y),x: PHB,y: drop precedence:
CoS : CFI 0 1
---------------------------------
0 (0,0) (0,0)
1 (1,0) (1,0)
2 (2,0) (2,0)
3 (3,0) (3,0)
4 (4,0) (4,0)
5 (5,0) (5,0)
6 (6,0) (6,0)
7 (7,0) (7,0)
Console#
show qos map This command shows the ingress DSCP to internal DSCP map.
dscp-mutation
Syntax
show qos map dscp-mutation interface interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This map is only used when the QoS mapping mode is set to “DSCP” by the qos
map trust-mode command, and the ingress packet type is IPv4.
– 619 –
Example
The ingress DSCP is composed of “d1” (most significant digit in the left column) and
“d2” (least significant digit in the top row (in other words, ingress DSCP = d1 * 10 +
d2); and the corresponding Internal DSCP and drop precedence is shown at the
intersecting cell in the table.
Console#show qos map dscp-mutation interface ethernet 1/5

DSCP mutation map.(x,y),x: PHB,y: drop precedence:
d1: d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-----------------------------------------------------------------
0 : (0,0) (0,1) (0,0) (0,3) (0,0) (0,1) (0,0) (0,3) (1,0) (1,1)
1 : (1,0) (1,3) (1,0) (1,1) (1,0) (1,3) (2,0) (2,1) (2,0) (2,3)
2 : (2,0) (2,1) (2,0) (2,3) (3,0) (3,1) (3,0) (3,3) (3,0) (3,1)
3 : (3,0) (3,3) (4,0) (4,1) (4,0) (4,3) (4,0) (4,1) (4,0) (4,3)
4 : (5,0) (5,1) (5,0) (5,3) (5,0) (5,1) (6,0) (5,3) (6,0) (6,1)
5 : (6,0) (6,3) (6,0) (6,1) (6,0) (6,3) (7,0) (7,1) (7,0) (7,3)
6 : (7,0) (7,1) (7,0) (7,3)
Console#
show qos map This command shows internal per-hop behavior to hardware queue map.
phb-queue
Syntax
show qos map phb-queue interface interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show qos map phb-queue interface ethernet 1/5
PHB Queue Map:
PHB: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-------------------------------------------------------
Queue: 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7
Console#
– 620 –
show qos map This command shows the QoS mapping mode.
trust-mode
Syntax
show qos map trust-mode interface interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows that the trust mode is set to CoS:
Console#show qos map trust-mode interface ethernet 1/5

CoS Map Mode: CoS mode
Console#
– 621 –
– 622 –
23 Quality of Service Commands
The commands described in this section are used to configure Differentiated

Services (DiffServ) classification criteria and service policies. You can classify traffic
based on access lists, IP Precedence or DSCP values, or VLANs. Using access lists
allows you select traffic based on Layer 2, Layer 3, or Layer 4 information contained
in each packet.
Table 122: Quality of Service Commands

class-map Creates a class map for a type of traffic GC
description Specifies the description of a class map CM
match Defines the criteria used to classify traffic CM
rename Redefines the name of a class map CM
policy-map Creates a policy map for multiple interfaces GC
description Specifies the description of a policy map PM
class Defines a traffic classification for the policy to act on PM
rename Redefines the name of a policy map PM
police flow Defines an enforcer for classified traffic based on a metered PM-C
flow rate
police srtcm-color Defines an enforcer for classified traffic based on a single PM-C
rate three color meter
police trtcm-color Defines an enforcer for classified traffic based on a two rate PM-C
three color meter
set cos Services IP traffic by setting a class of service value for PM-C
matching packets for internal processing
set ip dscp Services IP traffic by setting a IP DSCP value for matching PM-C
packets for internal processing
set phb Services IP traffic by setting a per-hop behavior value for PM-C
matching packets for internal processing
service-policy Applies a policy map defined by the policy-map command IC

to a particular interface
show class-map Displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria PE
used for classifying traffic
show policy-map Displays the QoS policy maps which define classification PE
criteria for incoming traffic, and may include policers for
bandwidth limitations
show policy-map interface Displays the configuration of all classes configured for all PE
service policies on the specified interface
– 623 –
Chapter 23 | Quality of Service Commands
To create a service policy for a specific category of ingress traffic, follow these steps:
1. Use the class-map command to designate a class name for a specific category
of traffic, and enter the Class Map configuration mode.
2. Use the match command to select a specific type of traffic based on an access
list, an IPv4 DSCP value, IPv4 Precedence value, IPv6 DSCP value, a VLAN, a CoS
value, or a source port.
3. Use the policy-map command to designate a policy name for a specific manner
in which ingress traffic will be handled, and enter the Policy Map configuration
mode.
4. Use the class command to identify the class map, and enter Policy Map Class
configuration mode. A policy map can contain up to 16 class maps.
5. Use the set phb, set cos, or set ip dscp command to modify the per-hop
behavior, the class of service value in the VLAN tag, or the priority bits in the IP
header (IP DSCP value) for the matching traffic class, and use one of the police
commands to monitor parameters such as the average flow and burst rate, and
drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate, or just reduce the DSCP service
level for traffic exceeding the specified rate.
6. Use the service-policy command to assign a policy map to a specific interface.
Note: Create a Class Map before creating a Policy Map.
class-map This command creates a class map used for matching packets to the specified class,
and enters Class Map configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a class map.
Syntax
[no] class-map class-map-name [match-all | match-any]
class-map-name - Name of the class map. (Range: 1-32 characters)
match-all - Match all conditions within a class map.
match-any - Match any condition within a class map.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
– 624 –
Command Usage
◆ First enter this command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map
configuration mode. Then use match commands to specify the criteria for
ingress traffic that will be classified under this class map.
◆ One or more class maps can be assigned to a policy map (page 628). The policy
map is then bound by a service policy to an interface (page 639). A service
policy defines packet classification, service tagging, and bandwidth policing.
Once a policy map has been bound to an interface, no additional class maps
may be added to the policy map, nor any changes made to the assigned class
maps with the match or set commands.
Example
This example creates a class map call “rd-class,” and sets it to match packets marked
for DSCP service value 3:
Console(config)#class-map rd-class match-any

Console(config-cmap)#match ip dscp 3
Console(config-cmap)#
Related Commands
show class-map (639)
description This command specifies the description of a class map or policy map.
Syntax
description string
string - Description of the class map or policy map. (Range: 1-64 characters)
Command Mode
Class Map Configuration
Policy Map Configuration
Example
Console(config)#class-map rd-class#1
Console(config-cmap)#description matches packets marked for DSCP service
value 3
– 625 –
match This command defines the criteria used to classify traffic. Use the no form to delete
the matching criteria.
Syntax
[no] match {access-list acl-name | cos cos | ip dscp dscp |
ip precedence ip-precedence | ipv6 dscp dscp | source-port interface |
vlan vlan}
acl-name - Name of the access control list. Any type of ACL can be specified,
including standard or extended IPv4/IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs.
cos - A Class of Service value. (Range: 0-7)
dscp - A Differentiated Service Code Point value. (Range: 0-63)
ip-precedence - An IP Precedence value. (Range: 0-7)
interface
unit/port
vlan - A VLAN. (Range:1-4093)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ First enter the class-map command to designate a class map and enter the
Class Map configuration mode. Then use match commands to specify the fields
within ingress packets that must match to qualify for this class map.
◆ If an ingress packet matches an ACL specified by this command, any deny rules
included in the ACL will be ignored.
◆ If match criteria includes an IP ACL or IP priority rule, then a VLAN rule cannot
be included in the same class map.
◆ If match criteria includes a MAC ACL or VLAN rule, then neither an IP ACL nor IP
priority rule can be included in the same class map.
◆ Up to 16 match entries can be included in a class map.
– 626 –
Example
This example creates a class map called “rd-class#1,” and sets it to match packets
marked for DSCP service value 3.
Console(config)#class-map rd-class#1 match-any

Console(config-cmap)#match ip dscp 3
This example creates a class map call “rd-class#2,” and sets it to match packets
marked for IP Precedence service value 5.

Console(config-cmap)#match ip precedence 5
This example creates a class map call “rd-class#3,” and sets it to match packets
marked for VLAN 1.

Console(config-cmap)#match vlan 1
rename This command redefines the name of a class map or policy map.
Syntax
rename map-name
map-name - Name of the class map or policy map. (Range: 1-32 characters)
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#class-map rd-class#1
Console(config-cmap)#rename rd-class#9
– 627 –
policy-map This command creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces,
and enters Policy Map configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a policy map.
Syntax
[no] policy-map policy-map-name
policy-map-name - Name of the policy map. (Range: 1-32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use the policy-map command to specify the name of the policy map, and then
use the class command to configure policies for traffic that matches the criteria
defined in a class map.
◆ A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the
same interface with the service-policy command.
◆ Create a Class Map (page 628) before assigning it to a Policy Map.
Example
This example creates a policy called “rd-policy,” uses the class command to specify
the previously defined “rd-class,” uses the set command to classify the service that
incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police flow command to limit the
average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 4000 bytes, and configure the
response to drop any violating packets.
Console(config)#policy-map rd-policy
Console(config-pmap)#class rd-class
Console(config-pmap-c)#set cos 0
Console(config-pmap-c)#police flow 10000 4000 conform-action transmit
violate-action drop
Console(config-pmap-c)#
class This command defines a traffic classification upon which a policy can act, and
enters Policy Map Class configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a class map.
Syntax
[no] class class-map-name
Default Setting
None
– 628 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use the policy-map command to specify a policy map and enter Policy Map
configuration mode. Then use the class command to enter Policy Map Class
configuration mode. And finally, use the set command and one of the police
commands to specify the match criteria, where the:
■ set phb command sets the per-hop behavior value in matching packets.
(This modifies packet priority for internal processing only.)
■ set cos command sets the class of service value in matching packets.
(This modifies packet priority in the VLAN tag.)
■ set ip dscp command sets the IP DSCP value in matching packets.

(This modifies packet priority in the IP header.)
■ police commands define parameters such as the maximum throughput,

burst rate, and response to non-conforming traffic.
◆ Up to 16 classes can be included in a policy map.
Example
the previously defined “rd-class,” uses the set phb command to classify the service
that incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police flow command to limit
the average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 4,000 bytes, and
configure the response to drop any violating packets.
Console(config-pmap-c)#set phb 3
violate-action drop
– 629 –
police flow This command defines an enforcer for classified traffic based on the metered flow
rate. Use the no form to remove a policer.
Syntax
[no] police flow committed-rate committed-burst
conform-action transmit
violate-action {drop| new-dscp}
committed-rate - Committed information rate (CIR) in kilobits per second.
(Range: 0-10000000 kbps at a granularity of 64 kbps or maximum port
speed, whichever is lower)
committed-burst - Committed burst size (BC) in bytes.
(Range: 64-16000000 at a granularity of 4k bytes)
conform-action - Action to take when packet is within the CIR and BC.
(There are enough tokens to service the packet, the packet is set green).
violate-action - Action to take when packet exceeds the CIR and BC. (There
are not enough tokens to service the packet, the packet is set red).
transmit - Transmits without taking any action.
drop - Drops packet as required by violate-action.
new-dscp - Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) value. (Range: 0-63)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Policy Map Class Configuration
Command Usage
◆ You can configure up to 16 policers (i.e., class maps) for ingress ports.
◆ The committed-rate cannot exceed the configured interface speed, and the
committed-burst cannot exceed 16 Mbytes.
◆ Policing is based on a token bucket, where bucket depth (i.e., the maximum
burst before the bucket overflows) is by specified the committed-burst field, and
the average rate tokens are added to the bucket is by specified by the
committed-rate option. Note that the token bucket functions similar to that
described in RFC 2697 and RFC 2698.
◆ The behavior of the meter is specified in terms of one token bucket (C), the rate
at which the tokens are incremented (CIR – Committed Information Rate), and
the maximum size of the token bucket (BC – Committed Burst Size).
The token bucket C is initially full, that is, the token count Tc(0) = BC. Thereafter,
the token count Tc is updated CIR times per second as follows:
■ If Tc is less than BC, Tc is incremented by one, else
– 630 –
■ Tc is not incremented.
When a packet of size B bytes arrives at time t, the following happens:

■ If Tc(t)-B  0, the packet is green and Tc is decremented by B down to the
minimum value of 0, else
■ else the packet is red and Tc is not decremented.
Example
the average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 4000 bytes, and configure
the response to drop any violating packets.
violate-action drop
police srtcm-color This command defines an enforcer for classified traffic based on a single rate three
color meter (srTCM). Use the no form to remove a policer.
Syntax
[no] police {srtcm-color-blind | srtcm-color-aware}
committed-rate committed-burst excess-burst
exceed-action {drop | new-dscp}
violate action {drop | new-dscp}
srtcm-color-blind - Single rate three color meter in color-blind mode.
srtcm-color-aware - Single rate three color meter in color-aware mode.
excess-burst - Excess burst size (BE) in bytes.
conform-action - Action to take when rate is within the CIR and BC. (There
are enough tokens in bucket BC to service the packet, packet is set green).
exceed-action - Action to take when rate exceeds the CIR and BC but is
within the BE. (There are enough tokens in bucket BE to service the packet,
the packet is set yellow.)
– 631 –
violate-action - Action to take when rate exceeds the BE. (There are not
enough tokens in bucket BE to service the packet, the packet is set red.)
drop - Drops packet as required by exceed-action or violate-action.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The committed-rate cannot exceed the configured interface speed, and the
committed-burst and excess-burst cannot exceed 16 Mbytes.
◆ The srTCM as defined in RFC 2697 meters a traffic stream and processes its
packets according to three traffic parameters – Committed Information Rate
(CIR), Committed Burst Size (BC), and Excess Burst Size (BE).
◆ The PHB label is composed of five bits, three bits for per-hop behavior, and two
bits for the color scheme used to control queue congestion. A packet is marked
green if it doesn't exceed the CIR and BC, yellow if it does exceed the CIR and
BC, but not the BE, and red otherwise.
◆ The meter operates in one of two modes. In the color-blind mode, the meter
assumes that the packet stream is uncolored. In color-aware mode the meter
assumes that some preceding entity has pre-colored the incoming packet
stream so that each packet is either green, yellow, or red. The marker (re)colors
an IP packet according to the results of the meter. The color is coded in the DS
field [RFC 2474] of the packet.
◆ The behavior of the meter is specified in terms of its mode and two token
buckets, C and E, which both share the common rate CIR. The maximum size of
the token bucket C is BC and the maximum size of the token bucket E is BE.
The token buckets C and E are initially full, that is, the token count Tc(0) = BC
and the token count Te(0) = BE. Thereafter, the token counts Tc and Te are
updated CIR times per second as follows:
■ If Tc is less than BC, Tc is incremented by one, else
■ if Te is less then BE, Te is incremented by one, else
■ neither Tc nor Te is incremented.
– 632 –
When a packet of size B bytes arrives at time t, the following happens if srTCM is
configured to operate in color-blind mode:
■ If Tc(t)-B  0, the packet is green and Tc is decremented by B down to the
minimum value of 0, else
■ if Te(t)-B  0, the packets is yellow and Te is decremented by B down to the
minimum value of 0,
■ else the packet is red and neither Tc nor Te is decremented.
When a packet of size B bytes arrives at time t, the following happens if srTCM is
configured to operate in color-aware mode:
■ If the packet has been precolored as green and Tc(t)-B  0, the packet is
green and Tc is decremented by B down to the minimum value of 0, else
■ If the packet has been precolored as yellow or green and if
■ Te(t)-B  0, the packets is yellow and Te is decremented by B down to the
minimum value of 0, else the packet is red and neither Tc nor Te is
decremented.
The metering policy guarantees a deterministic behavior where the volume of

green packets is never smaller than what has been determined by the CIR and
BC, that is, tokens of a given color are always spent on packets of that color.
Refer to RFC 2697 for more information on other aspects of srTCM.
Example
that incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police srtcm-color-blind
command to limit the average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the committed burst
rate to 4000 bytes, the excess burst rate to 6000 bytes, to remark any packets
exceeding the committed burst size, and to drop any packets exceeding the excess
burst size.
Console(config-pmap-c)#police srtcm-color-blind 100000 4000 6000 conform-
action transmit exceed-action 0 violate-action drop
– 633 –
police trtcm-color This command defines an enforcer for classified traffic based on a two rate three
color meter (trTCM). Use the no form to remove a policer.
Syntax
[no] police {trtcm-color-blind | trtcm-color-aware}
committed-rate committed-burst peak-rate peak-burst
exceed-action {drop | new-dscp}
violate action {drop | new-dscp}
trtcm-color-blind - Two rate three color meter in color-blind mode.
trtcm-color-aware - Two rate three color meter in color-aware mode.
peak-rate - Peak information rate (PIR) in kilobits per second.
peak-burst - Peak burst size (BP) in bytes.
conform-action - Action to take when rate is within the CIR and BP. (Packet
size does not exceed BP and there are enough tokens in bucket BC to
service the packet, the packet is set green.)
exceed-action - Action to take when rate exceeds the CIR but is within the
PIR. (Packet size exceeds BC but there are enough tokens in bucket BP to
service the packet, the packet is set yellow.)
violate-action - Action to take when rate exceeds the PIR. (There are not
enough tokens in bucket BP to service the packet, the packet is set red.)
drop - Drops packet as required by exceed-action or violate-action.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The committed-rate and peak-rate cannot exceed the configured interface

speed, and the committed-burst and peak-burst cannot exceed 16 Mbytes.
– 634 –
◆ The trTCM as defined in RFC 2698 meters a traffic stream and processes its
packets based on two rates – Committed Information Rate (CIR) and Peak
Information Rate (PIR), and their associated burst sizes - Committed Burst Size
(BC) and Peak Burst Size (BP).
◆ The PHB label is composed of five bits, three bits for per-hop behavior, and two
bits for the color scheme used to control queue congestion. A packet is marked
red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green
depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.
The trTCM is useful for ingress policing of a service, where a peak rate needs to
be enforced separately from a committed rate.
◆ The meter operates in one of two modes. In the color-blind mode, the meter
assumes that the packet stream is uncolored. In color-aware mode the meter
assumes that some preceding entity has pre-colored the incoming packet
stream so that each packet is either green, yellow, or red. The marker (re)colors
an IP packet according to the results of the meter. The color is coded in the DS
field [RFC 2474] of the packet.
◆ The behavior of the meter is specified in terms of its mode and two token
buckets, P and C, which are based on the rates PIR and CIR, respectively. The
maximum size of the token bucket P is BP and the maximum size of the token
bucket C is BC.
◆ The token buckets P and C are initially (at time 0) full, that is, the token count
Tp(0) = BP and the token count Tc(0) = BC. Thereafter, the token count Tp is
incremented by one PIR times per second up to BP and the token count Tc is
incremented by one CIR times per second up to BC.
When a packet of size B bytes arrives at time t, the following happens if trTCM is
configured to operate in color-blind mode:
■ If Tp(t)-B < 0, the packet is red, else
■ if Tc(t)-B < 0, the packet is yellow and Tp is decremented by B, else
■ the packet is green and both Tp and Tc are decremented by B.
When a packet of size B bytes arrives at time t, the following happens if trTCM is
configured to operate in color-aware mode:
■ If the packet has been precolored as red or if Tp(t)-B < 0, the packet is red,
else
■ if the packet has been precolored as yellow or if Tc(t)-B < 0, the packet is
yellow and Tp is decremented by B, else
■ the packet is green and both Tp and Tc are decremented by B.
◆ The trTCM can be used to mark a IP packet stream in a service, where different,
decreasing levels of assurances (either absolute or relative) are given to packets
which are green, yellow, or red. Refer to RFC 2698 for more information on
other aspects of trTCM.
– 635 –
Example
that incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police trtcm-color-blind
command to limit the average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the committed burst
rate to 4000 bytes, the peak information rate to 1,000,000 kbps, the peak burst size
to 6000, to remark any packets exceeding the committed burst size, and to drop
any packets exceeding the peak information rate.
Console(config-pmap-c)#police trtcm-color-blind 100000 4000 100000 6000
conform-action transmit exceed-action 0 violate-action drop
set cos This command modifies the class of service (CoS) value for a matching packet (as
specified by the match command) in the packet’s VLAN tag. Use the no form to
remove this setting.
Syntax
[no] set cos cos-value
cos-value - Class of Service value. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The set cos command is used to set the CoS value in the VLAN tag for matching
packets.
◆ The set cos and set phb command function at the same level of priority.
Therefore setting either of these commands will overwrite any action already
configured by the other command.
– 636 –
Example
the previously defined “rd-class,” uses the set cos command to classify the service
Console(config-pmap-c)#set cos 3
violate-action drop
set ip dscp This command modifies the IP DSCP value in a matching packet (as specified by the
match command). Use the no form to remove this traffic classification.
Syntax
[no] set ip dscp new-dscp
new-dscp - New Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) value.
(Range: 0-63)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The set ip dscp command is used to set the priority values in the packet’s ToS field
for matching packets.
Example
the previously defined “rd-class,” uses the set ip dscp command to classify the
service that incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police flow command
to limit the average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 4000 bytes, and
configure the response to drop any violating packets.
Console(config-pmap-c)#set ip dscp 3
violate-action drop
– 637 –
set phb This command services IP traffic by setting a per-hop behavior value for a matching
packet (as specified by the match command) for internal processing. Use the no
form to remove this setting.
Syntax
[no] set phb phb-value
phb-value - Per-hop behavior value. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The set phb command is used to set an internal QoS value in hardware for
matching packets (see Table 120, "Default Mapping of DSCP Values to Internal
PHB/Drop Values"). The QoS label is composed of five bits, three bits for per-
hop behavior, and two bits for the color scheme used to control queue
congestion by the police srtcm-color command and police trtcm-color
command.
◆ The set cos and set phb command function at the same level of priority.
Therefore setting either of these commands will overwrite any action already
configured by the other command.
Example
violate-action drop
– 638 –
service-policy This command applies a policy map defined by the policy-map command to the
ingress or egress side of a particular interface. Use the no form to remove this
mapping.
Syntax
[no] service-policy {input | output} policy-map-name
input - Apply to the input traffic.
output - Apply to the output traffic.
policy-map-name - Name of the policy map for this interface.
Default Setting
No policy map is attached to an interface.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Only one policy map can be assigned to an interface.
◆ First define a class map, then define a policy map, and finally use the service-
policy command to bind the policy map to the required interface.
Example
This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface.

Console(config-if)#service-policy input rd-policy
Console(config-if)#
show class-map This command displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria used for
classifying traffic.
Syntax
show class-map [class-map-name]
Default Setting
Displays all class maps.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 639 –
Example
Console#show class-map
Class Map match-any rd-class#1
Description:
Match ip dscp 10
Match access-list rd-access
Match ip dscp 0

Match ip precedence 5

Match vlan 1
Console#
show policy-map This command displays the QoS policy maps which define classification criteria for
incoming traffic, and may include policers for bandwidth limitations.
Syntax
show policy-map [policy-map-name [class class-map-name]]
policy-map-name - Name of the policy map. (Range: 1-32 characters)
Default Setting
Displays all policy maps and all classes.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show policy-map
Policy Map rd-policy
Description:
class rd-class
set PHB 3
Console#show policy-map rd-policy class rd-class
Policy Map rd-policy
class rd-class
set PHB 3
Console#
– 640 –
show policy-map This command displays the service policy assigned to the specified interface.
interface
Syntax
show policy-map interface interface input
interface
unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show policy-map interface 1/5 input
Service-policy rd-policy
Console#
– 641 –
– 642 –
24 Multicast Filtering Commands
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to check for any
attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the
ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only.
It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/
router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.
Table 123: Multicast Filtering Commands

IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment,
sets the IGMP version, enables proxy reporting, displays current
snooping settings, and displays the multicast service and group
members
Static Multicast Routing Configures static multicast router ports which forward all inbound
multicast traffic to the attached VLANs
IGMP Filtering and Configures IGMP filtering and throttling

Throttling
MLD Snooping Configures multicast snooping for IPv6
MLD Filtering and Configures MLD filtering and throttling for IPv6.
Throttling
MVR for IPv4 Configures a single network-wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts
residing in other standard or private VLAN groups, preserving security
and data isolation for normal traffic
MVR for IPv6 Configures a single network-wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts
residing in other standard or private VLAN groups, preserving security
and data isolation for normal traffic
IGMP Snooping
This section describes commands used to configure IGMP snooping on the switch.
Table 124: IGMP Snooping Commands

ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC
ip igmp snooping priority Assigns a priority to all multicast traffic GC
ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP Snooping with Proxy Reporting GC

proxy-reporting
ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC
– 643 –
Chapter 24 | Multicast Filtering Commands
IGMP Snooping
Table 124: IGMP Snooping Commands (Continued)

ip igmp snooping router- Discards any IGMPv2/v3 packets that do not include the GC
alert-option-check Router Alert option
ip igmp snooping Configures the querier timeout GC

router-port-expire-time
ip igmp snooping tcn-flood Floods multicast traffic when a Spanning Tree topology GC
change occurs
ip igmp snooping Sends an IGMP Query Solicitation when a Spanning Tree GC

tcn-query-solicit topology change occurs
ip igmp snooping Floods unregistered multicast traffic into the attached GC

unregistered-data-flood VLAN
ip igmp snooping Specifies how often the upstream interface should GC

unsolicited-report-interval transmit unsolicited IGMP reports (when proxy reporting is
enabled)
ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC
ip igmp snooping Discards received IGMP messages which use a version GC

version-exclusive different to that currently configured
ip igmp snooping vlan Suppresses general queries except for ports attached to GC
general-query-suppression downstream multicast hosts
ip igmp snooping vlan Immediately deletes a member port of a multicast service GC

immediate-leave if a leave packet is received at that port and immediate-
leave is enabled for the parent VLAN
ip igmp snooping vlan last- Configures the number of IGMP proxy query messages that GC
memb-query-count are sent out before the system assumes there are no local
members
ip igmp snooping vlan last- Configures the last-member-query interval GC

memb-query-intvl
ip igmp snooping vlan mrd Sends multicast router solicitation messages GC
ip igmp snooping vlan Configures a static address for proxy IGMP query and GC
proxy-address reporting
ip igmp snooping vlan Enables IGMP Snooping with Proxy Reporting GC

proxy-reporting
ip igmp snooping vlan Configures the interval between sending IGMP general GC
query-interval queries
ip igmp snooping vlan Configures the maximum time the system waits for a GC
query-resp-intvl response to general queries
ip igmp snooping vlan Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC

static
ip igmp snooping Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC

vlan version
ip igmp snooping Discards received IGMP messages which use a version GC

vlan version-exclusive different to that currently configured
clear ip igmp snooping Clears multicast group information dynamically learned PE

groups dynamic through IGMP snooping
clear ip igmp snooping Clears IGMP snooping statistics PE

statistics
– 644 –
IGMP Snooping
Table 124: IGMP Snooping Commands (Continued)

show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping, proxy, and query configuration PE
show ip igmp snooping Shows known multicast group, source, and host port PE
group mapping
show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE

mrouter
show ip igmp snooping Shows IGMP snooping protocol statistics for the specified PE
statistics interface
ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping globally on the switch or on a selected
VLAN interface. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id]
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When IGMP snooping is enabled globally, the per VLAN interface settings for
IGMP snooping take precedence.
◆ When IGMP snooping is disabled globally, snooping can still be configured per
VLAN interface, but the interface settings will not take effect until snooping is
re-enabled globally.
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping globally.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping

Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping This command assigns a priority to all multicast traffic. Use the no form to restore
priority the default setting.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping priority priority
no ip igmp snooping priority
– 645 –
IGMP Snooping
priority - The CoS priority assigned to all multicast traffic. (Range: 0-7, where
7 is the highest priority)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command can be used to set a high priority for low-latency multicast traffic
such as a video-conference, or to set a low priority for normal multicast traffic not
sensitive to latency.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping priority 6
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show ip igmp snooping (661)
ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP Snooping with Proxy Reporting. Use the no form to
proxy-reporting restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping proxy-reporting
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id proxy-reporting {enable | disable}
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id proxy-reporting
enable - Enable on the specified VLAN.
disable - Disable on the specified VLAN.
Default Setting
Global: Enabled
VLAN: Based on global setting
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When proxy reporting is enabled with this command, the switch performs
“IGMP Snooping with Proxy Reporting” (as defined in DSL Forum TR-101, April
2006), including last leave, and query suppression. Last leave sends out a proxy
query when the last member leaves a multicast group, and query suppression
– 646 –
IGMP Snooping
means that specific queries are not forwarded from an upstream multicast
router to hosts downstream from this device.
◆ If the IGMP proxy reporting is configured on a VLAN, this setting takes

precedence over the global configuration.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping proxy-reporting
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier. Use the no form to disable it.
querier
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping querier
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ IGMP snooping querier is not supported for IGMPv3 snooping (see ip igmp
snooping version).
◆ If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is responsible
for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping This command discards any IGMPv2/v3 packets that do not include the Router
router-alert-option- Alert option. Use the no form to ignore the Router Alert Option when receiving
check IGMP messages.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping router-alert-option-check
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 647 –
IGMP Snooping
Command Usage
As described in Section 9.1 of RFC 3376 for IGMP Version 3, the Router Alert Option
can be used to protect against DOS attacks. One common method of attack is
launched by an intruder who takes over the role of querier, and starts overloading
multicast hosts by sending a large number of group-and-source-specific queries,
each with a large source list and the Maximum Response Time set to a large value.
To protect against this kind of attack, (1) routers should not forward queries. This is
easier to accomplish if the query carries the Router Alert option. (2) Also, when the
switch is acting in the role of a multicast host (such as when using proxy routing), it
should ignore version 2 or 3 queries that do not contain the Router Alert option.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-alert-option-check
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping This command configures the querier timeout. Use the no form to restore the
router-port- default.
expire-time
Syntax
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time seconds
no ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time
seconds - The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before
it considers it to have expired. (Range: 1-65535;
Recommended Range: 300-500)
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Example
The following shows how to configure the timeout to 400 seconds:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 400

Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping This command enables flooding of multicast traffic if a spanning tree topology
tcn-flood change notification (TCN) occurs. Use the no form to disable flooding.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping tcn-flood
– 648 –
IGMP Snooping
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When a spanning tree topology change occurs, the multicast membership
information learned by the switch may be out of date. For example, a host
linked to one port before the topology change (TC) may be moved to another
port after the change. To ensure that multicast data is delivered to all receivers,
by default, a switch in a VLAN (with IGMP snooping enabled) that receives a
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) with the TC bit set (by the root bridge) will
enter into “multicast flooding mode” for a period of time until the topology has
stabilized and the new locations of all multicast receivers are learned.
◆ If a topology change notification (TCN) is received, and all the uplink ports are
subsequently deleted, a timeout mechanism is used to delete all of the
currently learned multicast channels.
◆ When a new uplink port starts up, the switch sends unsolicited reports for all
current learned channels out through the new uplink port.
◆ By default, the switch immediately enters into “multicast flooding mode” when
a spanning tree topology change occurs. In this mode, multicast traffic will be
flooded to all VLAN ports. If many ports have subscribed to different multicast
groups, flooding may cause excessive loading on the link between the switch
and the end host. Flooding may be disabled to avoid this, causing multicast
traffic to be delivered only to those ports on which multicast group members
have been learned.
◆ When the spanning tree topology changes, the root bridge sends a proxy
query to quickly re-learn the host membership/port relations for multicast
channels. The root bridge also sends an unsolicited Multicast Router Discover
(MRD) request to quickly locate the multicast routers in this VLAN.
The proxy query and unsolicited MRD request are flooded to all VLAN ports
except for the receiving port when the switch receives such packets.
Example
The following example enables TCN flooding.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping tcn-flood

Console(config)#
– 649 –
IGMP Snooping
ip igmp snooping This command instructs the switch to send out an IGMP general query solicitation
tcn-query-solicit when a spanning tree topology change notification (TCN) occurs. Use the no form
to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping tcn-query-solicit
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When the root bridge in a spanning tree receives a topology change
notification for a VLAN where IGMP snooping is enabled, it issues a global IGMP
leave message (query solicitation). When a switch receives this solicitation, it
floods it to all ports in the VLAN where the spanning tree change occurred.
When an upstream multicast router receives this solicitation, it will also
immediately issues an IGMP general query.
◆ The ip igmp snooping tcn query-solicit command can be used to send a

query solicitation whenever it notices a topology change, even if the switch is
not the root bridge in the spanning tree.
Example
The following example instructs the switch to issue an IGMP general query
whenever it receives a spanning tree topology change notification.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping tcn query-solicit

Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping This command floods unregistered multicast traffic into the attached VLAN. Use the
unregistered-data- no form to drop unregistered multicast traffic.
flood
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping unregistered-data-flood
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 650 –
IGMP Snooping
Command Usage
Once the table used to store multicast entries for IGMP snooping and multicast
routing is filled, no new entries are learned. If no router port is configured in the
attached VLAN, and unregistered-flooding is disabled, any subsequent multicast
traffic not found in the table is dropped, otherwise it is flooded throughout the
VLAN.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping unregistered-data-flood
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping This command specifies how often the upstream interface should transmit
unsolicited-report- unsolicited IGMP reports when proxy reporting is enabled. Use the no form to
interval restore the default value.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping unsolicited-report-interval seconds
no ip igmp snooping version-exclusive
seconds - The interval at which to issue unsolicited reports. (Range: 1-65535
seconds)
Default Setting
400 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When a new upstream interface (that is, uplink port) starts up, the switch sends
unsolicited reports for all currently learned multicast channels out through the
new upstream interface.
◆ This command only applies when proxy reporting is enabled (see page 646).
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping unsolicited-report-interval 5
Console(config)#
– 651 –
IGMP Snooping
ip igmp snooping This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form to restore
version the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id] version {1 | 2 | 3}
no ip igmp snooping version
1 - IGMP Version 1
2 - IGMP Version 2
3 - IGMP Version 3
Default Setting
Global: IGMP Version 2
VLAN: Not configured, based on global setting
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command configures the IGMP report/query version used by IGMP
snooping. Versions 1 - 3 are all supported, and versions 2 and 3 are backward
compatible, so the switch can operate with other devices, regardless of the
snooping version employed.
◆ If the IGMP snooping version is configured on a VLAN, this setting takes

precedence over the global configuration.
Example
The following configures the global setting for IGMP snooping to version 1.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 1

Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping This command discards any received IGMP messages (except for multicast protocol
version-exclusive packets) which use a version different to that currently configured by the ip igmp
snooping version command. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id] version-exclusive
no ip igmp snooping version-exclusive
– 652 –
IGMP Snooping
Default Setting
Global: Disabled
VLAN: Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If version exclusive is disabled on a VLAN, then this setting is based on the
global setting. If it is enabled on a VLAN, then this setting takes precedence
over the global setting.
◆ When this function is disabled, the currently selected version is backward

compatible (see the ip igmp snooping version command.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version-exclusive
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping vlan This command suppresses general queries except for ports attached to
general-query- downstream multicast hosts. Use the no form to flood general queries to all ports
suppression except for the multicast router port.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id general-query-suppression
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ By default, general query messages are flooded to all ports, except for the
multicast router through which they are received.
◆ If general query suppression is enabled, then these messages are forwarded

only to downstream ports which have joined a multicast service.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 general-query-suppression
Console(config)#
– 653 –
IGMP Snooping
ip igmp snooping vlan This command immediately deletes a member port of a multicast service if a leave
immediate-leave packet is received at that port and immediate-leave is enabled for the parent VLAN.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id immediate-leave [by-host-ip]
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id immediate-leave
by-host-ip - Specifies that the member port will be deleted only when
there are no hosts joining this group.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If immediate-leave is not used, a multicast router (or querier) will send a group-
specific query message when an IGMPv2/v3 group leave message is received.
The router/querier stops forwarding traffic for that group only if no host replies
to the query within the timeout period. (The timeout for this release is defined
by Last Member Query Interval (fixed at one second) * Robustness Variable
(fixed at 2) as defined in RFC 2236.)
◆ If immediate-leave is used, the switch assumes that only one host is connected
to the interface. Therefore, immediate leave should only be enabled on an
interface if it is connected to only one IGMP-enabled device, either a service
host or a neighbor running IGMP snooping.
◆ If the “by-host-ip” option is used, the router/querier will not send out a group-
specific query when an IGMPv2/v3 leave message is received. But will check if
there are other hosts joining the multicast group. Only when all hosts on that
port leave the group will the member port be deleted.
◆ This command is only effective if IGMP snooping is enabled, and IGMPv2 or

IGMPv3 snooping is used.
Example
The following shows how to enable immediate leave.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 immediate-leave

Console(config)#
– 654 –
IGMP Snooping
ip igmp snooping vlan This command configures the number of IGMP proxy group-specific or group-and-
last-memb-query- source-specific query messages that are sent out before the system assumes there
count are no more local members. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id last-memb-query-count count
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id last-memb-query-count
count - The number of proxy group-specific or group-and-source-specific
query messages to issue before assuming that there are no more group
members. (Range: 1-255)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command will take effect only if IGMP snooping proxy reporting or IGMP
querier is enabled (page 646).
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 last-memb-query-count 7
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping vlan This command configures the last-member-query interval. Use the no form to
last-memb-query- restore the default.
intvl
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id last-memb-query-intvl interval
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id last-memb-query-intvl
interval - The interval to wait for a response to a group-specific or group-
and-source-specific query message. (Range: 1-31744 tenths of a second)
Default Setting
10 (1 second)
Command Mode
– 655 –
IGMP Snooping
Command Usage
◆ When a multicast host leaves a group, it sends an IGMP leave message. When
the leave message is received by the switch, it checks to see if this host is the
last to leave the group by sending out an IGMP group-specific or group-and-
source-specific query message, and starts a timer. If no reports are received
before the timer expires, the group record is deleted, and a report is sent to the
upstream multicast router.
◆ A reduced value will result in reduced time to detect the loss of the last
member of a group or source, but may generate more bursty traffic.
◆ This command will take effect only if IGMP snooping proxy reporting is enabled
(page 646).
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 last-memb-query-intvl 700
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping vlan This command enables sending of multicast router solicitation messages. Use the
mrd no form to disable these messages.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrd
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Multicast Router Discovery (MRD) uses multicast router advertisement,
multicast router solicitation, and multicast router termination messages to
discover multicast routers. Devices send solicitation messages in order to solicit
advertisement messages from multicast routers. These messages are used to
discover multicast routers on a directly attached link. Solicitation messages are
also sent whenever a multicast forwarding interface is initialized or re-
initialized. Upon receiving a solicitation on an interface with IP multicast
forwarding and MRD enabled, a router will respond with an advertisement.
◆ Advertisements are sent by routers to advertise that IP multicast forwarding is

enabled. These messages are sent unsolicited periodically on all router
interfaces on which multicast forwarding is enabled. They are sent upon the
expiration of a periodic timer, as a part of a router's start up procedure, during
the restart of a multicast forwarding interface, and on receipt of a solicitation
– 656 –
IGMP Snooping
message. When the multicast services provided to a VLAN is relatively stable,

the use of solicitation messages is not required and may be disabled using the
no ip igmp snooping vlan mrd command.
◆ This command may also be used to disable multicast router solicitation

messages when the upstream router does not support MRD, to reduce the
loading on a busy upstream router, or when IGMP snooping is disabled in a
VLAN.
Example
This example disables sending of multicast router solicitation messages on VLAN 1.
Console(config)#no ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrd

Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping vlan This command configures a static source address for locally generated query and
proxy-address report messages used by IGMP proxy reporting. Use the no form to restore the
default source address.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id proxy-address source-address
source-address - The source address used for proxied IGMP query and
report, and leave messages. (Any valid IP unicast address)
Default Setting
0.0.0.0
Command Mode
Command Usage
IGMP Snooping uses a null IP address of 0.0.0.0 for the source of IGMP query
messages which are proxied to downstream hosts to indicate that it is not the
elected querier, but is only proxying these messages as defined in RFC 4541. The
switch also uses a null address in IGMP reports sent to upstream ports.
Many hosts do not implement RFC 4541, and therefore do not understand query
messages with the source address of 0.0.0.0. These hosts will therefore not reply to
the queries, causing the multicast router to stop sending traffic to them.
To resolve this problem, the source address in proxied IGMP query and report
messages can be replaced with any valid unicast address (other than the router's
own address) using this command.
– 657 –
IGMP Snooping
Rules Used for Proxy Reporting

When IGMP Proxy Reporting is disabled, the switch will use a null IP address for the
source of IGMP query and report messages unless a proxy query address has been
set.
When IGMP Proxy Reporting is enabled, the source address is based on the
following criteria:
◆ If a proxy query address is configured, the switch will use that address as the
source IP address in general and group-specific query messages sent to
downstream hosts, and in report and leave messages sent upstream from the
multicast router port.
◆ If a proxy query address is not configured, the switch will use the VLAN’s IP
address as the IP source address in general and group-specific query messages
sent downstream, and use the source address of the last IGMP message
received from a downstream host in report and leave messages sent upstream
from the multicast router port.
Example
The following example sets the source address for proxied IGMP query messages to
10.0.1.8.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 proxy-address 10.0.1.8

Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping vlan This command configures the interval between sending IGMP general queries. Use
query-interval the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id query-interval interval
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id query-interval
interval - The interval between sending IGMP general queries.
Default Setting
100 (10 seconds)
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ An IGMP general query message is sent by the switch at the interval specified
by this command. When this message is received by downstream hosts, all
receivers build an IGMP report for the multicast groups they have joined.
– 658 –
IGMP Snooping
◆ This command applies when the switch is serving as the querier (page 647), or
as a proxy host when IGMP snooping proxy reporting is enabled (page 646).
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 query-interval 150
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping vlan This command configures the maximum time the system waits for a response to
query-resp-intvl general queries. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id query-resp-intvl interval
no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id query-resp-intvl
interval - The maximum time the system waits for a response to general
queries. (Range: 10-31740 tenths of a second)
Default Setting
100 (10 seconds)
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command applies when the switch is serving as the querier (page 647), or as a
proxy host when IGMP snooping proxy reporting is enabled (page 646).
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 query-resp-intvl 20
Console(config)#
– 659 –
IGMP Snooping
ip igmp snooping vlan This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to remove the
static port.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface
ip-address - IP address for multicast group
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Static multicast entries are never aged out.
◆ When a multicast entry is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the

corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN.
Example
The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.0.0.12 ethernet 1/5

Console(config)#
clear ip igmp This command clears multicast group information dynamically learned through
snooping groups IGMP snooping.
dynamic
Syntax
clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command only clears entries learned though IGMP snooping. Statically
configured multicast address are not cleared.
– 660 –
IGMP Snooping
Example
Console#clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic
Console#
clear ip igmp This command clears IGMP snooping statistics.

snooping statistics
Syntax
clear ip igmp snooping statistics [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
vlan vlan-id - VLAN identifier (Range: 1-4093)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear ip igmp snooping statistics
Console#
show ip igmp This command shows the IGMP snooping, proxy, and query configuration settings.
snooping
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id]
vlan-id - VLAN ID (1-4093)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays global and VLAN-specific IGMP configuration settings.
Example
The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration:
Console#show ip igmp snooping

IGMP Snooping : Enabled
Router Port Expire Time : 300 s
Router Alert Check : Disabled
– 661 –
IGMP Snooping
Router Port Mode : Forward

TCN Flood : Disabled
TCN Query Solicit : Disabled
Unregistered Data Flood : Disabled
802.1p Forwarding Priority : Disabled
Unsolicited Report Interval : 400 s
Version Exclusive : Disabled
Version : 2
Proxy Reporting : Disabled
Report Suppression : Disabled
Querier : Disabled
VLAN 1:
--------
IGMP Snooping : Enabled
IGMP Snooping Running Status : Inactive
Version : Using global Version (2)
Version Exclusive : Using global status (Disabled)
Immediate Leave : Disabled
Last Member Query Interval : 10 (unit: 1/10s)
Last Member Query Count : 2
General Query Suppression : Disabled
Query Interval : 125
Query Response Interval : 100 (unit: 1/10s)
Proxy Query Address : 0.0.0.0
Proxy Reporting : Using global status (Disabled)
Report Suppression : Using global status (Disabled)
Multicast Router Discovery : Disabled
VLAN Static Group Port

---- --------------- --------
1 224.1.1.1 Eth 1/ 1
.
.
.
show ip igmp This command shows known multicast group, source, and host port mappings for
snooping group the specified VLAN interface, or for all interfaces if none is specified.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping group [host-ip-addr ip-address interface | igmpsnp |
sort-by-port | user | vlan vlan-id [user | igmpsnp]]
ip-address - IP address for multicast group
interface
ethernet unit/port
igmpsnp - Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping.
sort-by-port - Display entries sorted by port.
user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries.
vlan-id - VLAN ID (1-4093)
– 662 –
IGMP Snooping
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on selected options.
Example
The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for
VLAN 1.
Console#show ip igmp snooping group vlan 1

Bridge Multicast Forwarding Entry Count:1
Flag: R - Router port, M - Group member port
H - Host counts (number of hosts join the group on this port).
P - Port counts (number of ports join the group).
Up time: Group elapsed time (d:h:m:s).
Expire : Group remaining time (m:s).
VLAN Group Port Up time Expire Count

---- --------------- ----------- ----------- ------ --------
1 224.1.1.1 00:00:00:37 2(P)
Eth 1/ 1(R)
Eth 1/ 2(M) 0(H)
Console#
show ip igmp This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically
snooping mrouter learned multicast router ports.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]
Default Setting
Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic.
Example
The following shows the ports in VLAN 1 which are attached to multicast routers.
– 663 –
IGMP Snooping
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Port Type Expire
---- ------------------ ------- --------
1 Eth 1/4 Dynamic 0:4:28
1 Eth 1/10 Static
Console#
show ip igmp This command shows IGMP snooping protocol statistics for the specified interface.
snooping statistics
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping statistics
{input [interface interface] |
output [interface interface] |
query [vlan vlan-id]}
interface
ethernet unit/port
vlan vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)
query - Displays IGMP snooping-related statistics.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows IGMP protocol statistics input:
Console#show ip igmp snooping statistics input interface ethernet 1/1

Interface Report Leave G Query G(-S)-S Query Drop Join Succ Group
--------- -------- -------- -------- ------------- -------- --------- ------
Eth 1/ 1 23 11 4 10 5 14 5
Console#
Table 125: show ip igmp snooping statistics input - display description

Field Description
Interface Shows interface.
Report The number of IGMP membership reports received on this interface.
Leave The number of leave messages received on this interface.
– 664 –
IGMP Snooping
Table 125: show ip igmp snooping statistics input - display description

Field Description
G Query The number of general query messages received on this interface.
G(-S)-S Query The number of group specific or group-and-source specific query

messages received on this interface.
Drop The number of times a report, leave or query was dropped. Packets may
be dropped due to invalid format, rate limiting, or packet content not
allowed.
Join Succ The number of times a multicast group was successfully joined.
Group The number of multicast groups active on this interface.
The following shows IGMP protocol statistics output:
Console#show ip igmp snooping statistics output interface ethernet 1/1

Output Statistics:
Interface Report Leave G Query G(-S)-S Query
--------- -------- -------- -------- -------------
Eth 1/ 1 12 0 1 0
Console#
Table 126: show ip igmp snooping statistics output - display description

Field Description
Interface Shows interface.
Report The number of IGMP membership reports sent from this interface.
Leave The number of leave messages sent from this interface.
G Query The number of general query messages sent from this interface.

messages sent from this interface.
The following shows IGMP query-related statistics for VLAN 1:
Console#show ip igmp snooping statistics query vlan 1

Querier IP Address : 192.168.1.1
Querier Expire Time : 00:00:30
General Query Received : 10
General Query Sent : 0
Specific Query Received : 2
Specific Query Sent : 0
Number of Reports Sent : 2
Number of Leaves Sent : 0
Console#
– 665 –
Static Multicast Routing
Table 127: show ip igmp snooping statistics vlan query - display description
Field Description
Querier IP Address The IP address of the querier on this interface.
Querier Expire Time The time after which this querier is assumed to have expired.
General Query Received The number of general queries received on this interface.
General Query Sent The number of general queries sent from this interface.
Specific Query Received The number of specific queries received on this interface.
Specific Query Sent The number of specific queries sent from this interface.
Number of Reports Sent The number of reports sent from this interface.
Number of Leaves Sent The number of leaves sent from this interface.
Static Multicast Routing

This section describes commands used to configure static multicast routing on
the switch.
Table 128: Static Multicast Interface Commands

ip igmp snooping vlan Adds a multicast router port GC

mrouter
show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE

mrouter
ip igmp snooping vlan This command statically configures a (Layer 2) multicast router port on the
mrouter specified VLAN. Use the no form to remove the configuration.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
No static multicast router ports are configured.
– 666 –
IGMP Filtering and Throttling
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be
able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known
multicast router or switch connected over the network to an interface (port or
trunk) on this switch, that interface can be manually configured to join all the
current multicast groups.
◆ IGMP Snooping must be enabled globally on the switch (using the ip igmp
snooping command) before a multicast router port can take effect.
Example
The following shows how to configure port 10 as a multicast router port within VLAN
1.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/10

Console(config)#

In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast
services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a
specific subscription plan. The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by
restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and IGMP
throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.
Table 129: IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands

ip igmp filter Enables IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch GC
ip igmp profile Sets a profile number and enters IGMP filter profile GC
configuration mode
permit, deny Sets a profile access mode to permit or deny IPC
range Specifies one or a range of multicast addresses for a profile IPC
ip igmp authentication Enables RADIUS authentication for IGMP JOIN IC

requests.
ip igmp filter Assigns an IGMP filter profile to an interface IC
ip igmp max-groups Specifies an IGMP throttling number for an interface IC
ip igmp max-groups action Sets the IGMP throttling action for an interface IC
ip igmp query-drop Drops any received IGMP query packets IC
ip multicast-data-drop Drops all multicast data packets IC
– 667 –
Table 129: IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands (Continued)

show ip igmp Displays IGMP authentication settings for interfaces PE

authentication
show ip igmp filter Displays the IGMP filtering status PE
show ip igmp profile Displays IGMP profiles and settings PE
show ip igmp query-drop Shows if the interface is configured to drop IGMP query PE
packets
show ip igmp throttle Displays the IGMP throttling setting for interfaces PE
interface
show ip multicast-data- Shows if the interface is configured to drop multicast data PE

drop packets
ip igmp filter This command globally enables IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch. Use the
(Global Configuration) no form to disable the feature.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp filter
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies
multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. An IGMP filter profile
can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile
can be assigned to a port. When enabled, IGMP join reports received on the
port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is
permitted, the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast
group is denied, the IGMP join report is dropped.
◆ IGMP filtering and throttling only applies to dynamically learned multicast

groups, it does not apply to statically configured groups.
◆ The IGMP filtering feature operates in the same manner when MVR is used to
forward multicast traffic.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp filter
Console(config)#
– 668 –
ip igmp profile This command creates an IGMP filter profile number and enters IGMP profile
configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a profile number.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp profile profile-number
profile-number - An IGMP filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
A profile defines the multicast groups that a subscriber is permitted or denied to
join. The same profile can be applied to many interfaces, but only one profile can
be assigned to one interface. Each profile has only one access mode; either permit
or deny.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19
Console(config-igmp-profile)#
permit, deny This command sets the access mode for an IGMP filter profile. Use the no form to
delete a profile number.
Syntax
{permit | deny}
Default Setting
Deny
Command Mode
IGMP Profile Configuration
Command Usage
◆ Each profile has only one access mode; either permit or deny.
◆ When the access mode is set to permit, IGMP join reports are processed when a
multicast group falls within the controlled range. When the access mode is set
to deny, IGMP join reports are only processed when a multicast group is not in
the controlled range.
– 669 –
Example
Console(config-igmp-profile)#permit
range This command specifies multicast group addresses for a profile. Use the no form to
delete addresses from a profile.
Syntax
[no] range low-ip-address [high-ip-address]
low-ip-address - A valid IP address of a multicast group or start of a group
range.
high-ip-address - A valid IP address for the end of a multicast group range.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
IGMP Profile Configuration
Command Usage
Enter this command multiple times to specify more than one multicast address or
address range for a profile.
Example
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.1.1.1
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100
ip igmp This command enables IGMP authentication on the specified interface. When
authentication enabled and an IGMP JOIN request is received, an authentication request is sent to
a configured RADIUS server. Use the no form to disable IGMP authentication.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp authentication
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 670 –
Command Usage
◆ If IGMP authentication is enabled on an interface, and a join report is received
on the interface, the switch will send an access request to the RADIUS server to
perform authentication.
◆ Only when the RADIUS server responds with an authentication success

message will the switch learn the group report. Once the group is learned, the
switch will not send an access request to the RADIUS server when receiving the
same report again within a one (1) day period.
◆ If the RADIUS server responds that authentication failed or the timer expires,
the report will be dropped and the group will not be learned. The entry (host
MAC, port number, VLAN ID, and group IP) will be put in the “authentication
failed list”.
◆ The “authentication failed list” is valid for the period of the interval defined by
the command ip igmp snooping vlan query-interval. When receiving the same
report during this interval, the switch will not send the access request to the
RADIUS server.
◆ If the interface leaves the group and subsequently rejoins the same group, the
join report needs to again be authenticated.
◆ When receiving an IGMP v3 report message, the switch will send the access
request to the RADIUS server only when the record type is either IS_EX or
TO_EX, and the source list is empty. Other types of packets will not initiate
RADIUS authentication.
IS_EX (MODE_IS_EXCLUDE) - Indicates that the interface’s filter mode is
EXCLUDE for the specified multicast address. The Source Address fields in this
Group Record contain the interface's source list for the specified multicast
address, if not empty.
TO_EX (CHANGE_TO_EXCLUDE_MODE) - Indicates that the interface has
changed to EXCLUDE filter mode for the specified multicast address. The
Source Address fields in this Group Record contain the interface's new source
list for the specified multicast address, if not empty.
◆ When a report is received for the first time and is being authenticated, whether
authentication succeeds or fails, the report will still be sent to the multicast-
router port.
◆ The following table shows the RADIUS server Attribute Value Pairs used for
authentication:
Table 130: IGMP Authentication RADIUS Attribute Value Pairs

Attribute Name AVP Type Entry
USER_NAME 1 User MAC address
USER_PASSWORD 2 User MAC address
NAS_IP_ADDRESS 4 Switch IP address
– 671 –
Table 130: IGMP Authentication RADIUS Attribute Value Pairs

Attribute Name AVP Type Entry
NAS_PORT 5 User Port Number
FRAMED_IP_ADDRESS 8 Multicast Group ID
Example
This example shows how to enable IGMP Authentication on all of the switch’s
Ethernet interfaces.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1-28

Console(config-if)#ip igmp authentication
Console#
Related Commands
show ip igmp authentication
ip igmp filter This command assigns an IGMP filtering profile to an interface on the switch. Use
(Interface Configuration) the no form to remove a profile from an interface.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp filter profile-number
profile-number - An IGMP filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The IGMP filtering profile must first be created with the ip igmp profile
command before being able to assign it to an interface.
◆ Only one profile can be assigned to an interface.
◆ A profile can also be assigned to a trunk interface. When ports are configured as
trunk members, the trunk uses the filtering profile assigned to the first port
member in the trunk.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip igmp filter 19
Console(config-if)#
– 672 –
ip igmp max-groups This command sets the IGMP throttling number for an interface on the switch. Use
Syntax
ip igmp max-groups number
no ip igmp max-groups
number - The maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at
the same time. (Range: 1-1024)
Default Setting
1024
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can
join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a
port, the switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace” (see the
ip igmp max-groups action command). If the action is set to deny, any new
IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch
randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast
group.
◆ IGMP throttling can also be set on a trunk interface. When ports are configured
as trunk members, the trunk uses the throttling settings of the first port
Example
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups 10
Console(config-if)#
ip igmp This command sets the IGMP throttling action for an interface on the switch.
max-groups action
Syntax
ip igmp max-groups action {deny | replace}
deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped.
replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group.
Default Setting
Deny
– 673 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take
one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to deny, any new
IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch
randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups action replace
Console(config-if)#
ip igmp query-drop This command drops any received IGMP query packets. Use the no form to restore
Syntax
[no] ip igmp query-drop
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command can be used to drop any query packets received on the specified
interface. If this switch is acting as a Querier, this prevents it from being affected by
messages received from another Querier.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip igmp query-drop
Console(config-if)#
ip multicast-data-drop This command drops all multicast data packets. Use the no form to disable this
feature.
Syntax
[no] ip multicast-data-drop
Default Setting
Disabled
– 674 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command can be used to stop multicast services from being forwarded to
users attached to the downstream port (i.e., the interfaces specified by this
command).
Example
Console(config-if)#ip multicast-data-drop
Console(config-if)#
show ip igmp This command displays the interface settings for IGMP authentication.
authentication
Syntax
show ip igmp authentication interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Using this command without specifying an interface displays information for all
interfaces.
Example
Console#show ip igmp authentication
Ethernet 1/1: Enabled
Ethernet
. 1/3: Enabled
.
.
Console#
– 675 –
show ip igmp filter This command displays the global and interface settings for IGMP filtering.
Syntax
show ip igmp filter [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip igmp filter
IGMP filter enabled
Console#show ip igmp filter interface ethernet 1/1
Ethernet 1/1 information
---------------------------------
IGMP Profile 19
Deny
Range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1
Range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100
Console#
show ip igmp profile This command displays IGMP filtering profiles created on the switch.
Syntax
show ip igmp profile [profile-number]
profile-number - An existing IGMP filter profile number.
(Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip igmp profile
IGMP Profile 19
IGMP Profile 50
– 676 –
Console#show ip igmp profile 19

IGMP Profile 19
Deny
Range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1
Range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100
Console#
show ip igmp This command shows if the specified interface is configured to drop IGMP query
query-drop packets.
Syntax
show ip igmp throttle interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Using this command without specifying an interface displays all interfaces.
Example
Console#show ip igmp query-drop interface ethernet 1/1
Console#
show ip igmp throttle This command displays the interface settings for IGMP throttling.
interface
Syntax
interface
ethernet unit/port
– 677 –
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
interfaces.
Example
Console#show ip igmp throttle interface ethernet 1/1
Eth 1/1 Information
Status : TRUE
Action : Deny
Max Multicast Groups : 32
Current Multicast Groups : 0
Console#
show ip This command shows if the specified interface is configured to drop multicast data
multicast-data-drop packets.
Syntax
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Example
Console#show ip multicast-data-drop interface ethernet 1/1
Console#
– 678 –
MLD Snooping
MLD Snooping
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping operates on IPv6 traffic and performs
a similar function to IGMP snooping for IPv4. That is, MLD snooping dynamically
configures switch ports to limit IPv6 multicast traffic so that it is forwarded only to
ports with users that want to receive it. This reduces the flooding of IPv6 multicast
packets in the specified VLANs.
There are two versions of the MLD protocol, version 1 and version 2. MLDv1 control
packets include Listener Query, Listener Report, and Listener Done messages
(equivalent to IGMPv2 query, report, and leave messages). MLDv2 control packets
include MLDv2 query and report messages, as well as MLDv1 report and done
messages.
Remember that IGMP Snooping and MLD Snooping are independent functions,
and can therefore both function at the same time.
Table 131: MLD Snooping Commands

ipv6 mld snooping Enables MLD Snooping globally GC
ipv6 mld snooping querier Allows the switch to act as the querier for MLD snooping GC
ipv6 mld snooping Configures the interval between sending MLD general GC
query-interval query messages
ipv6 mld snooping query- Configures the maximum response time for a general GC
max-response-time queries
ipv6 mld snooping Configures the robustness variable GC

robustness
ipv6 mld snooping Configures the router port expire time GC

router-port-expire-time
ipv6 mld snooping Sets an action for unknown multicast packets GC

unknown-multicast mode
ipv6 mld snooping version Configures the MLD Snooping version GC
ipv6 mld snooping vlan Removes a member port of an IPv6 multicast service if a GC
immediate-leave leave packet is received at that port and MLD immediate-
leave is enabled for the parent VLAN
ipv6 mld snooping vlan Adds an IPv6 multicast router port GC

mrouter
ipv6 mld snooping vlan Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC

static
clear ipv6 mld snooping Clears multicast group information dynamically learned PE
groups dynamic through MLD snooping
clear ipv6 mld snooping Clears MLD snooping statistics PE

statistics
show ipv6 mld snooping Displays MLD Snooping configuration PE
show ipv6 mld snooping Displays the learned groups PE

group
– 679 –
MLD Snooping
Table 131: MLD Snooping Commands (Continued)

show ipv6 mld snooping Displays the learned groups and corresponding source list PE
group source-list
show ipv6 mld snooping Displays the information of multicast router ports PE
mrouter
ipv6 mld snooping This command enables MLD Snooping globally on the switch. Use the no form to
disable MLD Snooping.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld snooping
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
The following example enables MLD Snooping:
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping

Console(config)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command allows the switch to act as the querier for MLDv2 snooping. Use the
querier no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld snooping querier
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is responsible
for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.
◆ An IPv6 address must be configured on the VLAN interface from which the
querier will act if elected. When serving as the querier, the switch uses its own
IPv6 address as the query source address.
– 680 –
MLD Snooping
◆ The querier will not start or will disable itself after having started if it detects an
IPv6 multicast router on the network.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier
Console(config)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command configures the interval between sending MLD general queries. Use
query-interval the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping query-interval interval
no ipv6 mld snooping query-interval
interval - The interval between sending MLD general queries.
Default Setting
125 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command applies when the switch is serving as the querier.
◆ An MLD general query message is sent by the switch at the interval specified by
this command. When this message is received by downstream hosts, all
receivers build an MLD report for the multicast groups they have joined.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping query-interval 150
Console(config)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command configures the maximum response time advertised in MLD general
query-max-response- queries. Use the no form to restore the default.
time
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping query-max-response-time seconds
no ipv6 mld snooping query-max-response-time
seconds - The maximum response time allowed for MLD general queries.
– 681 –
MLD Snooping
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command controls how long the host has to respond to an MLD Query
message before the switch deletes the group if it is the last member.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping query-max-response-time seconds 15
Console(config)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command configures the MLD Snooping robustness variable. Use the no form
robustness to restore the default value.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping robustness value
no ipv6 mld snooping robustness
value - The number of the robustness variable. (Range: 2-10)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Command Usage
A port will be removed from the receiver list for a multicast service when no MLD
reports are detected in response to a number of MLD queries. The robustness
variable sets the number of queries on ports for which there is no report.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping robustness 2
Console(config)#
– 682 –
MLD Snooping
ipv6 mld snooping This command configures the MLD query timeout. Use the no form to restore the
router-port- default.
expire-time
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping router-port-expire-time time
no ipv6 mld snooping router-port-expire-time
time - Specifies the timeout of a dynamically learned router port.
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
The router port expire time is the time the switch waits after the previous querier
stops before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface that had been receiving
query packets) to have expired.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping router-port-expire-time 300
Console(config)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command sets the action for dealing with unknown multicast packets. Use the
unknown-multicast no form to restore the default.
mode
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping unknown-multicast mode {flood | to-router-port}
no ipv6 mld snooping unknown-multicast mode
flood - Floods the unknown multicast data packets to all ports.
to-router-port - Forwards the unknown multicast data packets to router
ports.
Default Setting
to-router-port
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When set to “flood,” any received IPv6 multicast packets that have not been
requested by a host are flooded to all ports in the VLAN.
– 683 –
MLD Snooping
◆ When set to “router-port,” any received IPv6 multicast packets that have not
been requested by a host are forwarded to ports that are connected to a
detected multicast router.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping unknown-multicast mode flood
Console(config)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command configures the MLD snooping version. Use the no form to restore
version the default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping version {1 | 2}
1 - MLD version 1.
2 - MLD version 2.
Default Setting
Version 2
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping version 1
Console(config)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command immediately deletes a member port of an IPv6 multicast service
vlan immediate-leave when a leave packet is received at that port and immediate-leave is enabled for the
parent VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id immediate-leave
vlan-id - A VLAN identification number. (Range: 1-4093)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 684 –
MLD Snooping
Command Usage
◆ If MLD immediate-leave is not used, a multicast router (or querier) will send a
group-specific query message when an MLD group leave message is received.
The router/querier stops forwarding traffic for that group only if no host replies
to the query within the specified timeout period.
◆ If MLD immediate-leave is enabled, the switch assumes that only one host is
connected to the interface. Therefore, immediate leave should only be enabled
on an interface if it is connected to only one MLD-enabled device, either a
service host or a neighbor running MLD snooping.
Example
The following shows how to enable MLD immediate leave.
Console(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
Console(config-if)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command statically configures an IPv6 multicast router port. Use the no form
vlan mrouter to remove the configuration.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
No static multicast router ports are configured.
Command Mode
Command Usage
Depending on your network connections, MLD snooping may not always be able
to locate the MLD querier. Therefore, if the MLD querier is a known multicast router/
switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on the switch,
you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups.
– 685 –
MLD Snooping
Example
The following shows how to configure port 1 as a multicast router port within VLAN
1:
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/1

Console(config)#
ipv6 mld snooping This command adds a port to an IPv6 multicast group. Use the no form to remove
vlan static the port.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id static ipv6-address interface
vlan - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)
ipv6-address - An IPv6 address of a multicast group. (Format: X:X:X:X::X)
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 static FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:10C ethernet
1/6
Console(config)#
clear ipv6 mld This command clears multicast group information dynamically learned through
snooping groups MLD snooping.
dynamic
Syntax
clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 686 –
MLD Snooping
Command Usage
This command only clears entries learned though MLD snooping. Statically
configured multicast address are not cleared.
Example
Console#clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic
Console#
clear ipv6 mld This command clears MLD snooping statistics.

snooping statistics
Syntax
clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics
Console#
show ipv6 This command shows the current MLD Snooping configuration.
mld snooping
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows MLD Snooping configuration information
Console#show ipv6 mld snooping

Service Status : Disabled
Querier Status : Disabled
Robustness : 2
Query Interval : 125 sec
– 687 –
MLD Snooping
Query Max Response Time : 10 sec

Router Port Expiry Time : 300 sec
Immediate Leave : Disabled on all VLAN
Unknown Flood Behavior : To Router Port
MLD Snooping Version : Version 2
Console#
show ipv6 mld This command shows known multicast groups, member ports, and the means by
snooping group which each group was learned.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping group
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows MLD Snooping group configuration information:
Console#show ipv6 mld snooping group
VLAN Multicast IPv6 Address Member port Type

---- --------------------------------------- ----------- ---------------
1 FF02::01:01:01:01 Eth 1/1 MLD Snooping
1 FF02::01:01:01:02 Eth 1/1 Multicast Data
1 FF02::01:01:01:02 Eth 1/1 User
Console#
show ipv6 mld This command shows known multicast groups, member ports, the means by which
snooping group each group was learned, and the corresponding source list.
source-list
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping group source-list
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows MLD Snooping group mapping information:
Console#show ipv6 mld snooping group source-list
Console#show ipv6 mld snooping group source-list

VLAN ID : 1
Mutlicast IPv6 Address : FF02::01:01:01:01
Member Port : Eth 1/1
Type : MLD Snooping
– 688 –
MLD Filtering and Throttling
Filter Mode : Include

(if exclude filter mode)
Filter Timer elapse : 10 sec.
Request List : ::01:02:03:04, ::01:02:03:05, ::01:02:03:06,
::01:02:03:07
Exclude List : ::02:02:03:04, ::02:02:03:05, ::02:02:03:06,
::02:02:03:07
(if include filter mode)
Include List : ::02:02:03:04, ::02:02:03:05, ::02:02:03:06,
::02:02:03:06
Option:
Filter Mode: Include, Exclude
Console#
show ipv6 mld This command shows MLD Snooping multicast router information.
snooping mrouter
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan vlan-id
vlan-id - A VLAN identification number. (Range: 1-4093)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan 1
VLAN Multicast Router Port Type Expire
---- --------------------- --------- ------
1 Eth 1/ 2 Static
Console#

In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast
services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a
specific subscription plan. The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by
restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and MLD
throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.
Table 132: MLD Filtering and Throttling Commands

ipv6 mld filter Enables MLD filtering and throttling on the switch GC
ipv6 mld profile Sets a profile number and enters MLD filter profile GC
configuration mode
permit, deny Sets a profile access mode to permit or deny IPC
– 689 –
Table 132: MLD Filtering and Throttling Commands (Continued)

range Specifies one or a range of multicast addresses for a profile IPC
ipv6 mld filter Assigns an MLD filter profile to an interface IC
ipv6 mld max-groups Specifies an M:D throttling number for an interface IC
ipv6 mld max-groups Sets the MLD throttling action for an interface IC
action
ipv6 mld query-drop Drops any received MLD query packets IC
ipv6 multicast-data-drop Enable multicast data guard mode on a port interface IC
show ipv6 mld filter Displays the MLD filtering status PE
show ipv6 mld profile Displays MLD profiles and settings PE
show ipv6 mld query-drop Shows if the interface is configured to drop MLD query PE
packets
show ipv6 mld throttle Displays the MLD throttling setting for interfaces PE
interface
ipv6 mld filter This command globally enables MLD filtering and throttling on the switch. Use the
(Global Configuration) no form to disable the feature.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld filter
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies
multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. An MLD filter profile
can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile
can be assigned to a port. When enabled, MLD join reports received on the port
are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is
permitted, the MLD join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast
group is denied, the MLD join report is dropped.
◆ MLD filtering and throttling only applies to dynamically learned multicast

groups, it does not apply to statically configured groups.
◆ The MLD filtering feature operates in the same manner when MVR6 is used to
forward multicast traffic.
– 690 –
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld filter
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show ipv6 mld filter
ipv6 mld profile This command creates an MLD filter profile number and enters MLD profile
configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a profile number.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld profile profile-number
profile-number - An MLD filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
A profile defines the multicast groups that a subscriber is permitted or denied to
join. The same profile can be applied to many interfaces, but only one profile can
be assigned to one interface. Each profile has only one access mode; either permit
or deny.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld profile 19
Console(config-mld-profile)#
Related Commands
show ipv6 mld profile
permit, deny This command sets the access mode for an MLD filter profile. Use the no form to
delete a profile number.
Syntax
{permit | deny}
Default Setting
deny
– 691 –
Command Mode
MLD Profile Configuration
Command Usage
◆ Each profile has only one access mode; either permit or deny.
◆ When the access mode is set to permit, MLD join reports are processed when a
multicast group falls within the controlled range. When the access mode is set
to deny, MLD join reports are only processed when a multicast group is not in
the controlled range.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 mld profile 19
Console(config-mld-profile)#permit
range This command specifies multicast group addresses for a profile. Use the no form to
delete addresses from a profile.
Syntax
[no] range low-ipv6-address [high-ipv6-address]
low-ipv6-address - A valid IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of a multicast group or
start of a group range.
high-ipv6-address - A valid IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) for the end of a
multicast group range.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
MLD Profile Configuration
Command Usage
Enter this command multiple times to specify more than one multicast address or
address range for a profile.
Example
Console(config-mld-profile)#range ff01::0101 ff01::0202
– 692 –
ipv6 mld filter This command assigns an MLD filtering profile to an interface on the switch. Use
(Interface Configuration) the no form to remove a profile from an interface.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld filter profile-number
profile-number - An MLD filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The MLD filtering profile must first be created with the ipv6 mld profile
command before being able to assign it to an interface.
◆ Only one profile can be assigned to an interface.
◆ A profile can also be assigned to a trunk interface. When ports are configured as
trunk members, the trunk uses the filtering profile assigned to the first port
Example
Console(config-if)#ipv6 mld filter 19
Console(config-if)#
ipv6 mld max-groups This command configures the maximum number of MLD groups that an interface
can join. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 mld max-groups number
no ipv6 mld max-groups
number - The maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at
the same time. (Range: 1-1024)
Default Setting
1024
Command Mode
– 693 –
Command Usage
◆ MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join
at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port,
the switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is
set to deny, any new MLD join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to
replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with
the new multicast group.
◆ MLD throttling can also be set on a trunk interface. When ports are configured
as trunk members, the trunk uses the throttling settings of the first port
◆ If the maximum number of MLD groups is set to the default value, the running
status of MLD throttling will change to false. This means that any configuration
for MLD throttling will have no effect until the maximum number of MLD
groups is configured to another value.
Example
Console(config-if)#ipv6 mld max-groups 10
Console(config-if)#
ipv6 mld max-groups This command sets the MLD throttling action for an interface on the switch.
action
Syntax
ipv6 mld max-groups action {deny | replace}
deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped.
replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group.
Default Setting
Deny
Command Mode
Command Usage
When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take
one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to deny, any new
MLD join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly
removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group.
Example
Console(config-if)#ipv6 mld max-groups action replace
Console(config-if)#
– 694 –
ipv6 mld query-drop This command drops any received MLD query packets. Use the no form to restore
Syntax
[no] ipv6 mld query-drop
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command can be used to drop any query packets received on the specified
interface. If this switch is acting as a Querier, this prevents it from being affected by
messages received from another Querier.
Example
Console(config-if)#ipv6 mld query-drop
Console(config-if)#
ipv6 Use this command to enable multicast data guard mode on a port interface. Use
multicast-data-drop the no form of the command to disable multicast data guard.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 multicast-data-drop
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#ipv6 multicast-data-drop
Console(config-if)#
– 695 –
show ipv6 mld filter This command displays the global and interface settings for MLD filtering.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld filter [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 mld filter
MLD filter Enabled
Console#show ipv6 mld filter interface ethernet 1/3
Ethernet 1/3 information
---------------------------------
MLD Profile 19
Deny
Range ff01::101 ff01::faa
Console#
show ipv6 mld profile This command displays MLD filtering profiles created on the switch.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld profile [profile-number]
profile-number - An existing MLD filter profile number.
(Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 mld profile
MLD Profile 19
MLD Profile 50
Console#show ipv6 mld profile 19
– 696 –
Console#show ipv6 mld profile 5

MLD Profile 19
Deny
Range ff01::101 ff01::faa
Console#
show ipv6 mld This command shows if the specified interface is configured to drop MLD query
query-drop packets.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld throttle interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Example
Console#show ipv6 mld query-drop interface ethernet 1/1
Console#
show ipv6 mld throttle This command displays the interface settings for MLD throttling.
interface
Syntax
show ipv6 mld throttle interface [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
– 697 –
MVR for IPv4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
interfaces.
Example
Console#show ipv6 mld throttle interface ethernet 1/3
Eth 1/3 Information
Status : TRUE
Action : Replace
Max Multicast Groups : 10
Current Multicast Groups : 0
Console#
MVR for IPv4

This section describes commands used to configure Multicast VLAN Registration for
IPv4 (MVR). A single network-wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic
(such as television channels) across a service provider’s network. Any multicast
traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers. This can significantly reduce
to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the
distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN. Also note that MVR maintains the
user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only
multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong.
Table 133: Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 Commands

mvr Globally enables MVR GC
mvr associated-profile Binds the MVR group addresses specified in a profile to an GC

MVR domain
mvr domain Enables MVR for a specific domain GC
mvr priority Assigns a priority to all multicast traffic in the MVR GC

VLAN
mvr profile Maps a range of MVR group addresses to a profile GC
mvr proxy-query-interval Configures the interval at which the receiver port sends out GC
general queries.
mvr proxy-switching Enables MVR proxy switching, where the source port acts GC
as a host, and the receiver port acts as an MVR router with
querier service enabled
– 698 –
MVR for IPv4
Table 133: Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv4 Commands (Continued)

mvr robustness-value Configures the expected packet loss, and thereby the GC
number of times to generate report and group-specific
queries
mvr source-port-mode Configures the switch to only forward multicast streams GC

dynamic which the source port has dynamically joined
mvr upstream-source-ip Configures the source IP address assigned to all control GC

packets sent upstream
mvr vlan Specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is GC
received
mvr immediate-leave Enables immediate leave capability IC
mvr type Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port IC
mvr vlan group Statically binds a multicast group to a port IC
clear mrv groups dynamic Clears multicast group information dynamically learned PE
through MVR
clear mrv statistics Clears MRV statistics PE
show mvr Shows information about MVR domain settings, including PE

MVR operational status, the multicast VLAN, the current
number of group addresses, and the upstream source IP
address
show mvr Shows the profiles bound the specified domain PE

associated-profile
show mvr interface Shows MVR settings for interfaces attached to the MVR PE
VLAN
show mvr members Shows information about the current number of entries in PE
the forwarding database, or detailed information about a
specific multicast address
show mvr profile Shows all configured MVR profiles PE
show mvr statistics Shows MVR protocol statistics for the specified interface PE
mvr This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) globally on the switch.
Use the no form of this command to globally disable MVR.
Syntax
[no] mvr
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 699 –
MVR for IPv4
Command Usage
Only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages. If MVR
must be configured for an IGMP version 1 host, the multicast groups must be
statically assigned using the mvr vlan group command.
Example
The following example enables MVR globally.
Console(config)#mvr
Console(config)#
mvr associated-profile This command binds the MVR group addresses specified in a profile to an MVR
domain. Use the no form of this command to remove the binding.
Syntax
[no] mvr domain domain-id associated-profile profile-name
domain-id - An independent multicast domain. (Range: 1-5)
profile-name - The name of a profile containing one or more MVR group
addresses. (Range: 1-21 characters)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Example
The following an MVR group address profile to domain 1:
Console(config)#mvr domain 1 associated-profile rd

Console(config)#
Related Commands
mvr profile (702)
mvr domain This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) for a specific domain.
Use the no form of this command to disable MVR for a domain.
Syntax
[no] mvr domain domain-id
– 700 –
MVR for IPv4
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
Only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages. If MVR
must be configured for an IGMP version 1 host, the multicast groups must be
statically assigned using the mvr vlan group command.
Example
The following example enables MVR for domain 1:
Console(config)#mvr domain 1
Console(config)#
mvr priority This command assigns a priority to all multicast traffic in the MVR VLAN. Use the no
form of this command to restore the default setting.
Syntax
mvr priority priority
no mvr priority
priority - The CoS priority assigned to all multicast traffic forwarded into the
MVR VLAN. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
Example
Console(config)#mvr priority 6
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show mvr
– 701 –
MVR for IPv4
mvr profile This command maps a range of MVR group addresses to a profile. Use the no form
of this command to remove the profile.
Syntax
mvr profile profile-name start-ip-address end-ip-address
start-ip-address - Starting IPv4 address for an MVR multicast group.
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)
end-ip-address - Ending IPv4 address for an MVR multicast group.
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)
Default Setting
No profiles are defined
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to statically configure all multicast group addresses that will
join the MVR VLAN. Any multicast data associated an MVR group is sent from all
source ports to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that
multicast group.
◆ The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast

streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast
address range of 224.0.0.x.
◆ IGMP snooping and MVR share a maximum number of 1024 groups. Any
multicast streams received in excess of this limitation will be flooded to all ports
in the associated domain.
Example
The following example maps a range of MVR group addresses to a profile:
Console(config)#mvr profile rd 228.1.23.1 228.1.23.10

Console(config)#
– 702 –
MVR for IPv4
mvr This command configures the interval at which the receiver port sends out general
proxy-query-interval queries. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
mvr proxy-query-interval interval
no mvr proxy-query-interval
interval - The interval at which the receiver port sends out general queries.
Default Setting
125 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the general query interval at which active receiver ports send
out general queries. This interval is only effective when proxy switching is enabled
with the mvr proxy-switching command.
Example
This example sets the proxy query interval for MVR proxy switching.
Console(config)#mvr proxy-query-interval 250

Console(config)#
mvr proxy-switching This command enables MVR proxy switching, where the source port acts as a host,
and the receiver port acts as an MVR router with querier service enabled. Use the
no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] mvr proxy-switching
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When MVR proxy-switching is enabled, an MVR source port serves as the
upstream or host interface. The source port performs only the host portion of
MVR by sending summarized membership reports, and automatically disables
MVR router functions.
– 703 –
MVR for IPv4
◆ Receiver ports are known as downstream or router interfaces. These interfaces

perform the standard MVR router functions by maintaining a database of all
MVR subscriptions on the downstream interface. Receiver ports must therefore
be configured on all downstream interfaces which require MVR proxy service.
◆ When the source port receives report and leave messages, it only forwards
them to other source ports.
◆ When receiver ports receive any query messages, they are dropped.
◆ When changes occurring in the downstream MVR groups are learned by the
receiver ports through report and leave messages, an MVR state change report
is created and sent to the upstream source port, which in turn forwards this
information upstream.
◆ When MVR proxy switching is disabled:

■ Any membership reports received from receiver/source ports are
forwarded to all source ports.
■ When a source port receives a query message, it will be forwarded to all
downstream receiver ports.
■ When a receiver port receives a query message, it will be dropped.
Example
The following example enable MVR proxy switching.
Console(config)#mvr proxy-switching
Console(config)#
Related Commands
mvr robustness-value (704)
mvr robustness-value This command configures the expected packet loss, and thereby the number of
times to generate report and group-specific queries. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
mvr robustness-value value
no mvr robustness-value
value - The robustness used for all interfaces. (Range: 1-255)
Default Setting
2
– 704 –
MVR for IPv4
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command is used to set the number of times report messages are sent
upstream when changes are learned about downstream groups, and the
number of times group-specific queries are sent to downstream receiver ports.
◆ This command only takes effect when MVR proxy switching is enabled.
Example
Console(config)#mvr robustness-value 5
Console(config)#
Related Commands
mvr proxy-switching (703)
mvr source-port-mode This command configures the switch to only forward multicast streams which the
dynamic source port has dynamically joined. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] mvr source-port-mode dynamic
Default Setting
Forwards all multicast streams which have been specified in a profile and bound to
a domain.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ By default, the switch forwards any multicast streams within the address range
set by a profile, and bound to a domain. The multicast streams are sent to all
source ports on the switch and to all receiver ports that have elected to receive
data on that multicast address.
◆ When the mvr source-port-mode dynamic command is used, the switch only
forwards multicast streams which the source port has dynamically joined. In
other words, both the receiver port and source port must subscribe to a
multicast group before a multicast stream is forwarded to any attached client.
Note that the requested streams are still restricted to the address range which
has been specified in a profile and bound to a domain.
– 705 –
MVR for IPv4
Example
Console(config)#mvr source-port-mode dynamic
Console(config)#
mvr This command configures the source IP address assigned to all MVR control packets
upstream-source-ip sent upstream on all domains or on a specified domain. Use the no form to restore
Syntax
mvr [domain domain-id] upstream-source-ip source-ip-address
no mvr [domain domain-id] upstream-source-ip
source-ip-address – The source IPv4 address assigned to all MVR control
packets sent upstream.
Default Setting
All MVR reports sent upstream use a null source IP address
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#mvr domain 1 upstream-source-ip 192.168.0.3
Console(config)#
mvr vlan This command specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is received.
Use the no form of this command to restore the default MVR VLAN.
Syntax
mvr [domain domain-id] vlan vlan-id
no [mvr domain domain-id] vlan
vlan-id - Specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is received.
This is also the VLAN to which all source ports must be assigned.
(Range: 1-4093)
Default Setting
VLAN 1
Command Mode
– 706 –
MVR for IPv4
Command Usage
◆ This command specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is
received. This is the VLAN to which all source ports must be assigned.
◆ The VLAN specified by this command must be an existing VLAN configured

with the vlan command.
◆ MVR source ports can be configured as members of the MVR VLAN using the
switchport allowed vlan command and switchport native vlan command, but
MVR receiver ports should not be statically configured as members of this
VLAN.
Example
The following example sets the MVR VLAN to VLAN 2:
Console(config)#mvr
Console(config)#mvr domain 1 vlan 2
Console(config)#
mvr immediate-leave This command causes the switch to immediately remove an interface from a
multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group. Use the no
form to restore the default settings.
Syntax
mvr [domain domain-id] immediate-leave [by-host-ip]
no mvr [domain domain-id] immediate-leave
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver port
is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave
message. When immediate leave is disabled, the switch follows the standard
rules by sending a group-specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a
response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast
group before removing the port from the group list.
◆ If the “by-host-ip” option is used, the router/querier will not send out a group-
specific query when an IGMPv2/v3 leave message is received (the same as it
– 707 –
MVR for IPv4
would without this option having been used). Instead of immediately deleting
that group, it will look up the record, and only delete the group if there are no
other subscribers for it on the member port. Only when all hosts on that port
leave the group will the member port be deleted.
◆ Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency, but should only be enabled
on a port attached to only one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services
to other group members attached to the same interface.
◆ Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically
assigned to a port with the mvr vlan group command.
Example
The following enables immediate leave on a receiver port.

Console(config-if)#mvr domain 1 immediate-leave
Console(config-if)#
mvr type This command configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port. Use the
no form to restore the default settings.
Syntax
[no] mvr [domain domain-id] type {receiver | source}
receiver - Configures the interface as a subscriber port that can receive
multicast data.
source - Configures the interface as an uplink port that can send and
receive multicast data for the configured multicast groups.
Default Setting
The port type is not defined.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use IGMP
snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules for
multicast filtering.
◆ Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs, but should not normally be
configured as a member of the MVR VLAN. IGMP snooping can also be used to
allow a receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups not sourced
through the MVR VLAN. Also, note that VLAN membership for MVR receiver
ports cannot be set to access mode (see the switchport mode command).
– 708 –
MVR for IPv4
◆ One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports. A source port is
able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has joined
through the MVR protocol or which have been assigned through the mvr vlan
group command.
◆ Only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages. If
MVR must be configured for an IGMP version 1 host, the multicast groups must
be statically assigned using the mvr vlan group command.
Example
The following configures one source port and several receiver ports on the switch.

Console(config-if)#mvr domain 1 type source
Console(config-if)#mvr domain 1 type receiver
Console(config-if)#
mvr vlan group This command statically binds a multicast group to a port which will receive long-
term multicast streams associated with a stable set of hosts. Use the no form to
restore the default settings.
Syntax
[no] mvr [domain domain-id] vlan vlan-id group ip-address
vlan-id - Receiver VLAN to which the specified multicast traffic is flooded.
(Range: 1-4093)
group - Defines a multicast service sent to the selected port.
ip-address - Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic
from the IPv4 address specified for an MVR multicast group.
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)
Default Setting
No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Multicast groups can be statically assigned to a receiver port using this
command.
– 709 –
MVR for IPv4
◆ The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast

streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast
address range of 224.0.0.x.
◆ Only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages. If
MVR must be configured for an IGMP version 1 host, the multicast groups must
be statically assigned using the mvr vlan group command.
◆ The MVR VLAN cannot be specified as the receiver VLAN for static bindings.
Example
The following statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port:

Console(config-if)#mvr domain 1 vlan 3 group 225.0.0.5
Console(config-if)#
clear mrv groups This command clears multicast group information dynamically learned through
dynamic MRV.
Syntax
clear mrv groups dynamic
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command only clears entries learned though MRV. Statically configured
multicast address are not cleared.
Example
Console#clear mrv groups dynamic
Console#
clear mrv statistics This command clears MRV statistics.
Syntax
clear mrv statistics [interface interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
– 710 –
MVR for IPv4

Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear ip igmp snooping statistics
Console#
show mvr This command shows information about MVR domain settings, including MVR
operational status, the multicast VLAN, the current number of group addresses, and
the upstream source IP address.
Syntax
show mvr [domain domain-id]
Default Setting
Displays configuration settings for all MVR domains.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows the MVR settings:
Console#show mvr
MVR 802.1p Forwarding Priority : Disabled
MVR Proxy Switching : Enabled
MVR Robustness Value : 1
MVR Proxy Query Interval : 125(sec.)
MVR Source Port Mode : Always Forward
MVR Domain : 1
MVR Config Status : Enabled
MVR Running Status : Active
MVR Multicast VLAN : 1
MVR Current Learned Groups : 10
. MVR Upstream Source IP : 192.168.0.3
.
.
– 711 –
MVR for IPv4
Table 134: show mvr - display description

Field Description
MVR 802.1p Forwarding Priority assigned to multicast traffic forwarded into the MVR VLAN
Priority
MVR Proxy Switching Shows if MVR proxy switching is enabled
MVR Robustness Value Shows the number of reports or query messages sent when proxy
switching is enabled
MVR Proxy Query Interval Shows the interval at which the receiver port sends out general queries
MVR Source Port Mode Shows if the switch forwards all multicast streams, or only those which
the source port has dynamically joined
MVR Domain An independent multicast domain.
MVR Config Status Shows if MVR is globally enabled on the switch.
MVR Running Status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR
environment are satisfied. (Running status is true as long as MVR Status
is enabled, and the specified MVR VLAN exists.)
MVR Multicast VLAN Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic.
MVR Current Learned The current number of MVR group addresses

Groups
MVR Upstream Source IP The source IP address assigned to all upstream control packets.
show mvr This command shows the profiles bound the specified domain.
associated-profile
Syntax
show mvr [domain domain-id] associated-profile
Default Setting
Displays profiles bound to all MVR domains.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following displays the profiles bound to domain 1:
Console#show mvr domain 1 associated-profile

Domain ID : 1
MVR Profile Name Start IP Addr. End IP Addr.
-------------------- --------------- ---------------
rd 228.1.23.1 228.1.23.10
testing 228.2.23.1 228.2.23.10
Console#
– 712 –
MVR for IPv4
show mvr interface This command shows MVR configuration settings for interfaces attached to the
MVR VLAN.
Syntax
show mvr [domain domain-id] interface
Default Setting
Displays configuration settings for all attached interfaces.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN
in domain 1:
Console#show mvr domain 1 interface

MVR Domain : 1
Flag: H - immediate leave by host ip
Port Type Status Immediate Static Group Address
-------- -------- ------------------- --------- -------------------------
Eth 1/ 1 Source Active/Forwarding
Eth 1/ 2 Receiver Inactive/Discarding Disabled 234.5.6.8(VLAN2)
Eth 1/ 3 Source Inactive/Discarding
Eth 1/ 1 Receiver Active/Forwarding Disabled 225.0.0.1(VLAN1)
225.0.0.9(VLAN3)
Eth 1/ 4 Receiver Active/Discarding Disabled
Console#
Table 135: show mvr interface - display description

Field Description
MVR Domain An independent multicast domain.
Port Shows interfaces attached to the MVR.
Type Shows the MVR port type.
Status Shows the MVR status and interface status. MVR status for source ports
is “ACTIVE” if MVR is globally enabled on the switch. MVR status for
receiver ports is “ACTIVE” only if there are subscribers receiving
multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups, or a multicast group has
been statically assigned to an interface. Also shows if MVR traffic is
being forwarded or discarded.
Immediate Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled.
Static Group Address Shows any static MVR group assigned to an interface, and the receiver
VLAN.
– 713 –
MVR for IPv4
show mvr members This command shows information about the current number of entries in the
forwarding database, detailed information about a specific multicast address, the IP
address of the hosts subscribing to all active multicast groups, or the multicast
groups associated with each port.
Syntax
show mvr [domain domain-id] members [ip-address |
host-ip-address [interface] | igmp | sort-by-port [interface | unknown |
user]]]
ip-address - IPv4 address for an MVR multicast group.
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)
members - The multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.
host-ip-address - The subscriber IP addresses.
igmp - Entry created by IGMP protocol.
sort-by-port - The multicast groups associated with an interface.
interface
ethernet unit/port
unknown - Entry created by receiving a multicast stream.
user - Snooping entry learned from user’s configuration settings.
Default Setting
Displays configuration settings for all domains and all forwarding entries.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows information about the number of multicast forwarding entries
currently active in domain 1:
Console#show mvr domain 1 members

MVR Domain : 1
MVR Forwarding Entry Count :1
Flag: S - Source port, R - Receiver port.
H - Host counts (number of hosts joined to group on this port).
P - Port counts (number of ports joined to group).
– 714 –
MVR for IPv4
Group Address VLAN Port Up time Expire Count

--------------- ---- ----------- ----------- ------ --------
234.5.6.7 1 00:00:09:17 2(P)
1 Eth 1/ 1(S)
2 Eth 1/ 2(R)
Console#
The following example shows detailed information about a specific multicast

address:
Console#show mvr domain 1 members 234.5.6.7

MVR Domain : 1
MVR Forwarding Entry Count :1
H - Host counts (number of hosts joined to group on this port).
P - Port counts (number of ports joined to group).

--------------- ---- ----------- ----------- ------ --------
234.5.6.7 1 2(P)
1 Eth 1/ 1(S)
2 Eth 1/ 2(R)
Console#
Table 136: show mvr members - display description

Field Description
Group Address Multicast group address.
VLAN VLAN to which this address is forwarded.
Port Port to which this address is forwarded.
Uptime Time that this multicast group has been known.
Expire The time until this entry expires.
Count The number of times this address has been learned by IGMP snooping.
– 715 –
MVR for IPv4
show mvr profile This command shows all configured MVR profiles.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows all configured MVR profiles:
Console#show mvr profile

MVR Profile Name Start IP Addr. End IP Addr.
-------------------- --------------- ---------------
rd 228.1.23.1 228.1.23.10
testing 228.2.23.1 228.2.23.10
Console#
show mvr statistics This command shows MVR protocol-related statistics for the specified interface.
Syntax
show mvr [domain domain-id] statistics
input [interface interface] | output [interface interface] |
query | summary interface [interface | mvr-vlan]
interface
ethernet unit/port
query - Displays MVR query-related statistics.
summary - Displays summary of MVR statistics.
mvr vlan - Displays summary statistics for the MVR VLAN.
Default Setting
Displays statistics for all domains.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 716 –
MVR for IPv4
Example
The following shows MVR protocol-related statistics received:
Console#show mvr domain 1 statistics input

MVR Domain : 1 , MVR VLAN: 2
Input Statistics:
--------- -------- -------- -------- ------------- -------- --------- ------
Eth 1/ 1 23 11 4 10 5 20 9
Eth 1/ 2 12 15 8 3 5 19 4
DVLAN 1 2 0 0 2 2 20 9
MVLAN 1 2 0 0 2 2 20 9
Console#
Table 137: show mvr statistics input - display description

Field Description
Interface Shows interfaces attached to the MVR.

messages received on this interface.
Drop The number of times a report, leave or query was dropped. Packets may
be dropped due to invalid format, rate limiting, packet content not
allowed, or MVR group report received
Group The number of MVR groups active on this interface.
The following shows MVR protocol-related statistics sent:
Console#show mvr domain 1 statistics output

MVR Domain : 1 , MVR VLAN: 2
Output Statistics:
Interface Report Leave G Query G(-S)-S Query
--------- -------- -------- -------- -------------
Eth 1/ 1 12 0 1 0
Eth 1/ 2 5 1 4 1
DVLAN 1 7 2 3 0
MVLAN 1 7 2 3 0
Console#
Table 138: show mvr statistics output - display description

Field Description
– 717 –
MVR for IPv4
Table 138: show mvr statistics output - display description (Continued)

Field Description

messages sent from this interface.
The following shows MVR query-related statistics:
Console#show mvr domain 1 statistics query

Domain 1:
Other Querier : None
Other Querier Expire : 0(m):0(s)
Other Querier Uptime : 0(h):0(m):0(s)
Self Querier : None
Self Querier Expire : 0(m):30(s)
Self Querier Uptime : 0(h):9(m):55(s)
Warn Rate Limit : 0 sec.
V1 Warning Count : 0
Console#
Table 139: show mvr statistics query - display description

Field Description
Other Querier The IP address of the querier on this interface.
Other Querier Expire The time after which this querier is assumed to have expired.
Other Querier Uptime Other querier’s time up.
Self Querier This querier’s IP address.
Self Querier Expire This querier’s expire time.
Self Querier Uptime This querier’s time up.
Warn Rate Limit Count down from 15 seconds after receiving a Query different
from the configured version.
V# Warning Count Number of queries received on MVR that were configured for IGMP
version 1, 2 or 3.
– 718 –
MVR for IPv4
The following shows MVR summary statistics for an interface:
Console#show mvr domain 1 statistics summary interface ethernet 1/1

Domain 1:
Number of Groups: 0
Querier: : Report & Leave: :
Transmit : Transmit :
General : 0 Report : 7
Group Specific : 0 Leave : 4
Received : Received :
V1 Warning Count: 0 Join Success : 0
V2 Warning Count: 0 Filter Drop : 0
V3 Warning Count: 0
Source Port Drop: 0
Others Drop : 0
Console#
Table 140: show mvr statistics summary interface - display description
Field Description
Domain An independent multicast domain.
Number of Groups Number of groups learned on this port.
Querier
Transmit
General Number of general queries transmitted.
Group Specific Number of group specific queries transmitted.
Received
General Number of general queries received.
Group Specific Number of group specific queries received.
V# Warning Count Number of queries received on MVR that were configured for IGMP
version 1, 2 or 3.
Report & Leave
Transmit
Report Number of transmitted reports.
Leave Number of transmitted leaves.
Received
Report Number of reports received.
Leave Number of leaves received.
Join Success Number of join reports processed successfully.
Filter Drop Number of report/leave messages dropped by IGMP filter.
Source Port Drop Number of report/leave messages dropped by MVR source port.
Others Drop Number of report/leave messages dropped for other reasons.
– 719 –
MVR for IPv4
The following shows MVR summary statistics for the MVR VLAN:
Console#show mvr domain 1 statistics summary interface mvr-vlan

Domain 1:
Number of Groups: 0
Querier: : Report & Leave: :
Other Querier : None Host IP Addr : 192.168.0.66
Other Expire : 0(m):0(s) Unsolicit Expire : 5(m):4(s)
Other Uptime : 0(h):0(m):0(s)
Self Querier : None
Self Expire : 1(m):45(s) :
Self Uptime : 0(h):14(m):54(s)
Transmit : Transmit :
Received : Received :
V1 Warning Count: 0 Join Success : 6
V2 Warning Count: 0 Filter Drop : 0
V3 Warning Count: 0
Source Port Drop: 0
Others Drop : 0
Console#
Table 141: show mvr statistics summary interface mvr vlan - description
Field Description
Number of Groups Number of groups learned on this port.
Querier
Other Querier Other IGMP querier’s IP address.
Other Expire Other querier’s expire time.
Other Uptime Other querier’s time up.
Self Querier This querier’s IP address.
Self Expire This querier’s expire time.
Self Uptime This querier’s time up.
Transmit
General Number of general queries sent from receiver port.
Group Specific Number of group specific queries sent from receiver port.
Received
General Number of general queries received.
Group Specific Number of group specific queries received.
V# Warning Count Number of queries received on MVR that were configured by IGMP
version 1, 2 or 3.
Report & Leave
Host IP Addr Source IP address used to send report/leave messages from

source port.
Unsolicit Expire Expiration time for unsolicit reports sent out from source port
– 720 –
MVR for IPv6
Table 141: show mvr statistics summary interface mvr vlan - description
Field Description
Transmit
Report Number of reports sent out from source port.
Leave Number of leaves sent out from source port.
Received Field header
Report Number of reports received.
Leave Number of leaves received.
Join Success Number of join reports processed successfully.
Filter Drop Number of report/leave messages dropped by IGMP filter.
Source Port Drop Number of report/leave messages dropped by MVR source port.
Others Drop Number of report/leave messages dropped for other reasons.
MVR for IPv6

This section describes commands used to configure Multicast VLAN Registration for
IPv6 (MVR6). A single network-wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic
(such as television channels) across a service provider’s network. Any multicast
traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers. This can significantly reduce
to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the
distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN. Also note that MVR maintains the
user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only
multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong.
Table 142: Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 Commands

mvr6 associated-profile Binds the MVR group addresses specified in a profile to an GC

MVR domain
mvr6 domain Enables MVR for a specific domain GC
mvr6 priority Assigns a priority to all multicast traffic in the MVR GC

VLAN
mvr6 profile Maps a range of MVR group addresses to a profile GC
mvr6 proxy-query-interval Configures the interval at which the receiver port sends out GC
general queries.
mvr6 proxy-switching Enables MVR proxy switching, where the source port acts as a GC
host, and the receiver port acts as an MVR router with querier
service enabled
mvr6 robustness-value Configures the expected packet loss, and thereby the number GC
of times to generate report and group-specific queries
mvr6 source-port-mode Configures the switch to only forward multicast streams GC

dynamic which the source port has dynamically joined
– 721 –
MVR for IPv6
Table 142: Multicast VLAN Registration for IPv6 Commands (Continued)

mvr6 upstream-source-ip Configures the source IP address assigned to all control GC

packets sent upstream
mvr6 vlan Specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is GC
received
mvr6 immediate-leave Enables immediate leave capability IC
mvr6 type Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port IC
mvr6 vlan group Statically binds a multicast group to a port IC
clear mvr6 groups dynamic Clears multicast group information dynamically learned PE
through MVR6
clear mvr6 statistics Clears the MVR statistics globally or on a per-interface basis. PE
show mvr6 Shows information about MVR domain settings, including PE

MVR operational status, the multicast VLAN, the current
number of group addresses, and the upstream source IP
address
show mvr6 associated- Shows the profiles bound the specified domain PE
profile
show mvr6 interface Shows MVR settings for interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN PE
show mvr6 members Shows information about the current number of entries in the PE
forwarding database, or detailed information about a specific
multicast address
show mvr6 profile Shows all configured MVR profiles PE
show mvr6 statistics Shows MVR protocol statistics for the specified interface PE
mvr6 This command binds the MVR group addresses specified in a profile to an MVR
associated-profile domain. Use the no form of this command to remove the binding.
Syntax
[no] mvr6 domain domain-id associated-profile profile-name
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
MRV6 domains can be associated with more than one MVR6 profile. But since MVR6
domains cannot share the group range, an MRV6 profile can only be associated
with one MVR6 domain.
– 722 –
MVR for IPv6
Example
The following an MVR6 group address profile to domain 1:
Console(config)#mvr6 domain 1 associated-profile rd

Console(config)#
mvr6 domain This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) for a specific domain.
Use the no form of this command to disable MVR for a domain.
Syntax
[no] mvr6 domain domain-id
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
When MVR6 is enabled on a domain, any multicast data associated with an MVR6
group is sent from all designated source ports, to all receiver ports that have
registered to receive data from that multicast group.
Example
The following example enables MVR for domain 1:
Console(config)#mvr6 domain 1
Console(config)#
mvr6 priority This command assigns a priority to all multicast traffic in the MVR VLAN. Use the no
form of this command to restore the default setting.
Syntax
mvr priority priority
no mvr priority
priority - The CoS priority assigned to all multicast traffic forwarded into the
MVR VLAN. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)
Default Setting
Disabled
– 723 –
MVR for IPv6
Command Mode
Command Usage
Example
Console(config)#mvr priority 6
Console(config)#
RELATED COMMANDS
show mvr6 (733)
mvr6 profile This command maps a range of MVR group addresses to a profile. Use the no form
of this command to remove the profile.
Syntax
mvr6 profile profile-name start-ip-address end-ip-address
start-ip-address - Starting IPv6 address for an MVR multicast group. This
parameter must be a full IPv6 address including the network prefix and
host address bits.
end-ip-address - Ending IPv6 address for an MVR multicast group. This
parameter must be a full IPv6 address including the network prefix and
host address bits.
Default Setting
No profiles are defined
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to statically configure all multicast group addresses that will
join the MVR VLAN. Any multicast data associated with an MVR group is sent
from all source ports, and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive
data from that multicast group.
◆ All IPv6 addresses must be according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing

Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One double
colon may be used in the address to indicate the appropriate number of zeros
required to fill the undefined fields. (Note that the IP address ff02::X is reserved.)
– 724 –
MVR for IPv6
◆ The MVR6 group address range assigned to a profile cannot overlap with the
group address range of any other profile.
Example
The following example maps a range of MVR6 group addresses to a profile:
Console(config)#mvr6 profile rd ff01:0:0:0:0:0:0:fe ff01:0:0:0:0:0:0:ff

Console(config)#
mvr6 This command configures the interval at which the receiver port sends out general
proxy-query-interval queries. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
mvr proxy-query-interval interval
no mvr proxy-query-interval
interval - The interval at which the receiver port sends out general queries.
Default Setting
125 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command sets the general query interval at which active receiver ports send
out general queries. This interval is only effective when proxy switching is enabled
with the mvr6 proxy-switching command.
Example
This example sets the proxy query interval for MVR6.
Console(config)#mvr proxy-query-interval 228

Console(config)#
mvr6 proxy-switching This command enables MVR proxy switching, where the source port acts as a host,
and the receiver port acts as an MVR router with querier service enabled. Use the
no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] mvr6 proxy-switching
– 725 –
MVR for IPv6
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When MVR proxy-switching is enabled, an MVR source port serves as the
upstream or host interface, and the MVR receiver port serves as the querier. The
source port performs only the host portion of MVR by sending summarized
membership reports, and automatically disables MVR router functions.
◆ Receiver ports are known as downstream or router interfaces. These interfaces

perform the standard MVR router functions by maintaining a database of all
MVR subscriptions on the downstream interface. Receiver ports must therefore
be configured on all downstream interfaces which require MVR proxy service.
◆ When the source port receives report and leave messages, it only forwards
them to other source ports.
◆ When receiver ports receive any query messages, they are dropped.
◆ When changes occurring in the downstream MVR groups are learned by the
receiver ports through report and leave messages, an MVR state change report
is created and sent to the upstream source port, which in turn forwards this
information upstream.
◆ When MVR proxy switching is disabled:

■ Any membership reports received from receiver/source ports are
forwarded to all source ports.
■ When a source port receives a query message, it will be forwarded to all
downstream receiver ports.
■ When a receiver port receives a query message, it will be dropped.
Example
The following example enable MVR6 proxy switching.
Console(config)#mvr6 proxy-switching
Console(config)#
Related Commands
mvr6 robustness-value (727)
– 726 –
MVR for IPv6
mvr6 This command configures the expected packet loss, and thereby the number of
robustness-value times to generate report and group-specific queries. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
mvr6 robustness-value value
no mvr6 robustness-value
value - The robustness used for all interfaces. (Range: 1-10)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command sets the number of times report messages are sent upstream
when changes are learned about downstream groups, and the number of times
group-specific queries are sent to downstream receiver ports.
◆ This command only takes effect when MVR6 proxy switching is enabled.
Example
Console(config)#mvr6 robustness-value 5
Console(config)#
Related Commands
mvr6 proxy-switching (725)
mvr6 This command configures the switch to only forward multicast streams which the
source-port-mode source port has dynamically joined. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
dynamic
Syntax
[no] mvr6 source-port-mode dynamic
Default Setting
Forwards all multicast streams which have been specified in a profile and bound to
a domain.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ By default, the switch forwards any multicast streams within the address range
set by a profile, and bound to a domain. The multicast streams are sent to all
– 727 –
MVR for IPv6
source ports on the switch and to all receiver ports that have elected to receive
data on that multicast address.
◆ When the mvr6 source-port-mode dynamic command is used, the switch

only forwards multicast streams which the source port has dynamically joined.
In other words, both the receiver port and source port must subscribe to a
multicast group before a multicast stream is forwarded to any attached client.
Note that the requested streams are still restricted to the address range which
has been specified in a profile and bound to a domain.
Example
Console(config)#mvr6 source-port-mode dynamic
Console(config)#
mvr6 This command configures the source IPv6 address assigned to all MVR control
upstream-source-ip packets sent upstream on the specified domain. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
mvr6 domain domain-id upstream-source-ip source-ip-address
no mvr6 domain domain-id upstream-source-ip
source-ip-address – The source IPv6 address assigned to all MVR control
packets sent upstream. This parameter must be a full IPv6 address
including the network prefix and host address bits.
Default Setting
All MVR reports sent upstream use a null source IP address
Command Mode
Command Usage
All IPv6 addresses must be according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing Architecture,”
using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values. One double colon may be used
in the address to indicate the appropriate number of zeros required to fill the
undefined fields. (Note that the IP address ff02::X is reserved.)
Example
Console(config)#mvr6 domain 1 upstream-source-ip 2001:DB8:2222:7223::72
Console(config)#
– 728 –
MVR for IPv6
mvr6 vlan This command specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is received.
Use the no form of this command to restore the default MVR VLAN.
Syntax
mvr6 domain domain-id vlan vlan-id
no mvr6 domain domain-id vlan
vlan-id - Specifies the VLAN through which MVR multicast data is received.
This is also the VLAN to which all source ports must be assigned.
(Range: 1-4093)
Default Setting
VLAN 1
Command Mode
Command Usage
MVR source ports can be configured as members of the MVR VLAN using the
switchport allowed vlan command and switchport native vlan command, but MVR
receiver ports should not be statically configured as members of this VLAN.
Example
The following example sets the MVR6 VLAN to VLAN 1:
Console(config)#mvr6 domain 1 vlan 1

Console(config)#
mvr6 immediate-leave This command causes the switch to immediately remove an interface from a
multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group. Use the no
form to restore the default settings.
Syntax
[no] mvr6 domain domain-id immediate-leave [by-host-ip]
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
– 729 –
MVR for IPv6
Command Usage
◆ Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver port
is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave
message. When immediate leave is disabled, the switch follows the standard
rules by sending a group-specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a
response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast
group before removing the port from the group list.
◆ If the “by-host-ip” option is enabled, the switch will not send out a group-
specific query to the receiver port. But it will check if there are other hosts
joining the multicast group. Only when all hosts on that port leave the group
will the member port be deleted.
◆ Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency, but should only be enabled
on a port attached to only one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services
to other group members attached to the same interface.
◆ Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically
assigned to a port with the mvr6 vlan group command.
Example
The following enables immediate leave on a receiver port.

Console(config-if)#mvr6 domain 1 immediate-leave
Console(config-if)#
mvr6 type This command configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port. Use the
no form to restore the default settings.
Syntax
[no] mvr6 domain domain-id type {receiver | source}
receiver - Configures the interface as a subscriber port that can receive
multicast data.
source - Configures the interface as an uplink port that can send and
receive multicast data for the configured multicast groups. Note that the
source port must be manually configured as a member of the MVR6 VLAN
using the switchport allowed vlan command.
Default Setting
The port type is not defined.
Command Mode
– 730 –
MVR for IPv6
Command Usage
◆ A port configured as an MVR6 receiver or source port can join or leave multicast
groups configured under MVR6. A port which is not configured as an MVR
receiver or source port can use MLD snooping to join or leave multicast groups
using the standard rules for multicast filtering (see “MLD Snooping” on
page 679).
◆ Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs, but should not be configured as a
member of the MVR VLAN. MLD snooping can be used to allow a receiver port
to dynamically join or leave multicast groups not sourced through the MVR
VLAN. Also, note that VLAN membership for MVR receiver ports cannot be set
to access mode (see the switchport mode command).
◆ One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports. A source port is
able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has joined
through the MVR6 protocol or which have been assigned through the mvr6
vlan group command.
All source ports must belong to the MVR6 VLAN.
Subscribers should not be directly connected to source ports.
◆ The same port cannot be configured as a source port in one MVR domain and
as a receiver port in another domain.
Example
The following configures one source port and several receiver ports on the switch.

Console(config-if)#mvr6 domain 1 type source
Console(config-if)#mvr6 domain 1 type receiver
Console(config-if)#
mvr6 vlan group This command statically binds a multicast group to a port which will receive long-
term multicast streams associated with a stable set of hosts. Use the no form to
restore the default settings.
Syntax
[no] mvr6 domain domain-id vlan vlan-id group ip-address
vlan-id - Receiver VLAN to which the specified multicast traffic is flooded.
(Range: 1-4093)
group - Defines a multicast service sent to the selected port.
– 731 –
MVR for IPv6
ip-address - Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic

from the IPv6 address specified for an MVR multicast group. This parameter
must be a full IPv6 address including the network prefix and host address
bits.
Default Setting
No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Multicast groups can be statically assigned to a receiver port using this
command. The assigned address must fall within the range set by the mvr6
associated-profile command.

required to fill the undefined fields. (Note that the IP address ff02::X is reserved.)
◆ The MVR VLAN cannot be specified as the receiver VLAN for static bindings.
Example
The following statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port:

Console(config-if)#mvr6 domain 1 vlan 2 group ff00::1
Console(config-if)#
clear mvr6 groups This command clears multicast group information dynamically learned through
dynamic MVR6.
Syntax
clear mvr6 groups dynamic [domain domain-id]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command only clears entries learned though MVR6. Statically configured
multicast addresses are not cleared.
– 732 –
MVR for IPv6
Example
Console#clear mvr6 groups dynamic
Console#
clear mvr6 statistics Use this command to clear the MVR6 statistics.
Syntax
clear mvr6 statistics [interface {ethernet unit/port | port-channel channel-id |
vlan vlan-id}]
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If the interface option is not used then all MVR6 statistics are cleared. Otherwise
using the interface option will only clear MVR6 statistics for the specified interface.
Example
The following shows how to clear all the MVR6 statistics:
Console#clear mvr6 statistics

Console#
show mvr6 This command shows information about MVR domain settings, including MVR
operational status, the multicast VLAN, the current number of group addresses, and
the upstream source IP address.
Syntax
show mvr6 [domain domain-id]
Default Setting
Displays configuration settings for all MVR domains.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 733 –
MVR for IPv6
Example
The following shows the MVR6 settings:
Console#show mvr6
MVR6 802.1p Forwarding Priority: Disabled
MVR6 Proxy Switching : Enabled
MVR6 Robustness Value : 1
MVR6 Proxy Query Interval : 125(sec.)
MVR6 Source Port Mode : Always Forward
Domain : 1
MVR6 Config Status : Enabled
MVR6 Running Status : Active
MVR6 Multicast VLAN : 1
MVR6 Current Learned Groups : 0
. MVR6 Upstream Source IP : FF05::25
.
.
Table 143: show mvr6 - display description

Field Description
MVR6 802.1p Priority assigned to multicast traffic forwarded into the MVR6 VLAN
Forwarding Priority
MVR6 Proxy Switching Shows if MVR proxy switching is enabled
MVR6 Robustness Value Shows the number of reports or query messages sent when proxy
switching is enabled
MVR6 Proxy Query The interval at which the receiver port sends out general queries
Interval
MVR6 Source Port Mode Shows if the switch only forwards multicast streams which the source port
has dynamically joined or always forwards multicast streams
MVR6 Config Status Shows if MVR is globally enabled on the switch.
MVR6 Running Status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment
are satisfied. (Running status is true as long as MVR Status is enabled, and
the specified MVR VLAN exists, and a source port with a valid link has been
configured (using the mvr6 type command.)
MVR6 Multicast VLAN Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic.
MVR6 Upstream Source The source IP address assigned to all upstream control packets.
IP
show mvr6 This command shows the profiles bound the specified domain.
associated-profile
Syntax
show mvr6 [domain domain-id] associated-profile
Default Setting
Displays profiles bound to all MVR domains.
– 734 –
MVR for IPv6
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following displays the profiles bound to domain 1:
Console#show mvr6 domain 1 associated-profile

Domain ID : 1
MVR Profile Name Start IPv6 Addr. End IPv6 Addr.
-------------------- ------------------------- -------------------------
rd ff01::fe ff01::ff
Console#
show mvr6 interface This command shows MVR configuration settings for interfaces attached to the
MVR VLAN.
Syntax
show mvr6 [domain domain-id] interface
Default Setting
Displays configuration settings for all attached interfaces.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR6
VLAN in domain 1:
Console#show mvr6 domain 1 interface

MVR6 Domain : 1
Port Type Status Immediate Leave Static Group Address
-------- -------- ------------------- ---------------- ---------------------
Eth1/ 1 Source Active/Forwarding
Eth1/ 2 Receiver Active/Forwarding Disabled ff00::1(VLAN2)
Console#
Table 144: show mvr6 interface - display description

Field Description
Port Shows interfaces attached to the MVR.
Type Shows the MVR port type.
– 735 –
MVR for IPv6
Table 144: show mvr6 interface - display description (Continued)

Field Description
Status Shows the MVR status and interface status. MVR status for source ports is
“ACTIVE” if MVR is globally enabled on the switch. MVR status for receiver
ports is “ACTIVE” only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from
one of the MVR groups, or a multicast group has been statically assigned to
an interface.
Immediate Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled.
Static Group Address Shows any static MVR group assigned to an interface, and the receiver VLAN.
show mvr6 members This command shows information about the current number of entries in the
forwarding database, or detailed information about a specific multicast address.
Syntax
show mvr6 [domain domain-id] members [ip-address]
ip-address - IPv6 address for an MVR multicast group.
Default Setting
Displays configuration settings for all domains and all forwarding entries.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows information about the number of multicast forwarding entries
currently active in domain 1:
Console#show mvr6 domain 1 members

MVR6 Domain : 1
MVR6 Forwarding Entry Count :1
P - Port counts (number of forwarding ports).

------------------------------ ---- ----------- ----------- ------ --------
ff05::101 2 00:00:00:19 2(P)
2 Eth1/ 2(S)
1 Eth1/ 4(R) 0(H)
Console#
– 736 –
MVR for IPv6
The following example shows detailed information about a specific multicast

address:
Console#show mvr6 domain 1 members ff00::1

MVR6 Domain : 1
MVR6 Forwarding Entry Count :1
P - Port counts (number of forwarding ports).

------------------------------ ---- ----------- ----------- ------ --------
ff05::101 2 00:00:03:18 2(P)
2 Eth1/ 2(S)
1 Eth1/ 4(R) 0(H)
Console#
Table 145: show mvr6 members - display description

Field Description
Group Address Multicast group address.
VLAN VLAN to which this address is forwarded.
Port Port to which this address is forwarded.
Up time Time that this multicast group has been known.
Expire The time until this entry expires.
Count The number of times this address has been learned by MVR (MLD
snooping).
show mvr6 profile This command shows all configured MVR profiles.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows all configured MVR6 profiles:
Console#show mvr6 profile

MVR6 Profile Name Start IPv6 Addr. End IPv6 Addr.
-------------------- ------------------------- -------------------------
rd ff01::fe ff01::ff
Console#
– 737 –
MVR for IPv6
show mvr6 statistics This command shows MVR protocol-related statistics for the specified interface.
Syntax
show mvr6 statistics {input | output} [interface interface]
show mvr6 domain domain-id statistics
{input [interface interface] | output [interface interface] | query}
interface
ethernet unit/port
query - Displays MVR query-related statistics.
Default Setting
Displays statistics for all domains.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows MVR6 protocol-related statistics received:
Console#show mvr6 domain 1 statistics input

MVR6 Domain 1, MVR6 VLAN 2:
Input Statistics:
--------- -------- -------- -------- ------------- -------- --------- ------
Eth 1/ 1 23 11 4 10 5 20 9
Eth 1/ 2 12 15 8 3 5 19 4
DVLAN 1 2 0 0 2 2 20 9
MVLAN 2 2 0 0 2 2 20 9
Console#
Table 146: show mvr6 statistics input - display description

Field Description
G(-S)-S Query The number of group specific or group-and-source specific query messages
received on this interface.
– 738 –
MVR for IPv6
Table 146: show mvr6 statistics input - display description (Continued)

Field Description
Drop The number of times a report, leave or query was dropped. Packets may be
dropped due to invalid format, rate limiting, packet content not allowed, or MVR
group report received
The following shows MVR protocol-related statistics sent:
Console#show mvr6 domain 1 statistics output

MVR6 Domain 1, MVR6 VLAN 2:
Output Statistics:
Interface Report Done G Query G(-S)-S Query Drop Group
---------- -------- -------- -------- ------------- -------- ------
Eth 1/ 1 12 0 1 0 0 0
Eth 1/ 3 5 1 4 1 0 0
DVLAN 1 7 2 3 0 0 0
MVLAN 2 7 2 3 0 0 0
Console#
Table 147: show mvr6 statistics output - display description

Field Description
G(-S)-S Query The number of group specific or group-and-source specific query messages sent
from this interface.
The following shows MVR query-related statistics:
Console#show mvr6 domain 1 statistics query

Other Querier Address : fe80::2e0:cff:fe00:fb/64
Other Querier Uptime : 0(h):0(m):0(s)
Other Querier Expire Time : 0(m):0(s)
Self Querier Address : None
Self Querier Uptime : 0(h):13(m):16(s)
Self Querier Expire Time : 3(m):23(s)
Console#
– 739 –
MVR for IPv6
Table 148: show mvr6 statistics query - display description
Field Description
Other Querier Address The IPv6 address of the querier on this interface.
Other Querier Uptime Other querier’s time up.
Other Querier Expire Time The time after which this querier is assumed to have expired.
Self Querier Address This querier’s IPv6 address.
Self Querier Uptime This querier’s time up.
Self Querier Expire Time This querier’s expire time.
– 740 –
25 LLDP Commands
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about
neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that
uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device.
Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according
to the IEEE 802.1AB standard, and can include details such as device identification,
capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and
maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an

extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP
phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as
network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. LLDP and LLDP-MED
information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting,
enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.
Table 149: LLDP Commands

lldp Enables LLDP globally on the switch GC
lldp holdtime-multiplier Configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP GC

advertisements
lldp Configures how many medFastStart packets are GC

med-fast-start-count transmitted
lldp notification-interval Configures the allowed interval for sending SNMP GC

notifications about LLDP changes
lldp refresh-interval Configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP GC

advertisements
lldp reinit-delay Configures the delay before attempting to re- GC

initialize after LLDP ports are disabled or the link
goes down
lldp tx-delay Configures a delay between the successive GC

transmission of advertisements initiated by a
change in local LLDP MIB variables
lldp admin-status Enables LLDP transmit, receive, or transmit and IC

receive mode on the specified port
lldp basic-tlv Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the IC

management-ip-address management address for this device
lldp basic-tlv Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC

port-description port description

system-capabilities system capabilities
– 741 –
Chapter 25 | LLDP Commands
Table 149: LLDP Commands (Continued)

lldp basic-tlv Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the IC

system-description system description

system-name system name
lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident* Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the IC

supported protocols
lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid* Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise port- IC

based protocol related VLAN information
lldp dot1-tlv pvid* Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC

default VLAN ID
lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name* Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC

VLAN name
lldp dot3-tlv link-agg Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC

link aggregation capabilities
lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC

MAC and physical layer specifications
lldp dot3-tlv max-frame Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC

maximum frame size
lldp dot3-tlv poe Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its IC

Power-over-Ethernet capabilities
lldp med-location Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise IC

civic-addr its location identification details
lldp med-notification Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications IC

about LLDP-MED changes
lldp med-tlv ext-poe Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise IC

its extended Power over Ethernet configuration and
usage information
lldp med-tlv inventory Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise IC

its inventory identification details
lldp med-tlv location Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise IC

its location identification details
lldp med-tlv med-cap Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise IC

its Media Endpoint Device capabilities
lldp med-tlv Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise IC

network-policy its network policy configuration
lldp notification Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications IC

about LLDP changes
show lldp config Shows LLDP configuration settings for all ports PE
show lldp info Shows LLDP global and interface-specific PE

local-device configuration settings for this device
show lldp info Shows LLDP global and interface-specific PE

remote-device configuration settings for remote devices
show lldp info statistics Shows statistical counters for all LLDP-enabled PE
interfaces
* Vendor-specific options may or may not be advertised by neighboring devices.
– 742 –
lldp This command enables LLDP globally on the switch. Use the no form to disable
LLDP.
Syntax
[no] lldp
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#lldp
Console(config)#
lldp This command configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP advertisements.
holdtime-multiplier Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lldp holdtime-multiplier value
no lldp holdtime-multiplier
value - Calculates the TTL in seconds based on the following rule:
minimum of ((Transmission Interval * Holdtime Multiplier), or65536)
(Range: 2 - 10)
Default Setting
Holdtime multiplier: 4
TTL: 4*30 = 120 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
The time-to-live tells the receiving LLDP agent how long to retain all information
pertaining to the sending LLDP agent if it does not transmit updates in a timely
manner.
Example
Console(config)#lldp holdtime-multiplier 10
Console(config)#
– 743 –
lldp This command specifies the amount of MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit during
med-fast-start-count the activation process of the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism. Use the no form to
Syntax
lldp med-fast-start-count packets
no lldp med-fast-start-count
seconds - Amount of packets. (Range: 1-10 packets; Default: 4 packets)
Default Setting
4 packets
Command Mode
Command Usage
This parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the LLDP-MED Fast Start
mechanism is active for the port. LLDP-MED Fast Start is critical to the timely
startup of LLDP, and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call
Service.
Example
Console(config)#lldp med-fast-start-count 6
Console(config)#
lldp This command configures the allowed interval for sending SNMP notifications
notification-interval about LLDP MIB changes. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lldp notification-interval seconds
no lldp notification-interval
seconds - Specifies the periodic interval at which SNMP notifications are
sent. (Range: 5 - 3600 seconds)
Default Setting
5 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This parameter only applies to SNMP applications which use data stored in the
LLDP MIB for network monitoring or management.
– 744 –
◆ Information about changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between SNMP

notifications is not transmitted. Only state changes that exist at the time of a
notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should therefore
periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect
any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to throttling or
transmission loss.
Example
Console(config)#lldp notification-interval 30
Console(config)#
lldp refresh-interval This command configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP advertisements.
Syntax
lldp refresh-interval seconds
no lldp refresh-delay
seconds - Specifies the periodic interval at which LLDP advertisements are
sent. (Range: 5 - 32768 seconds)
Default Setting
30 seconds
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#lldp refresh-interval 60
Console(config)#
lldp reinit-delay This command configures the delay before attempting to re-initialize after LLDP
ports are disabled or the link goes down. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
lldp reinit-delay seconds
no lldp reinit-delay
seconds - Specifies the delay before attempting to re-initialize LLDP.
(Range: 1 - 10 seconds)
Default Setting
2 seconds
– 745 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
When LLDP is re-initialized on a port, all information in the remote systems LLDP
MIB associated with this port is deleted.
Example
Console(config)#lldp reinit-delay 10
Console(config)#
lldp tx-delay This command configures a delay between the successive transmission of
advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables. Use the no form
Syntax
lldp tx-delay seconds
no lldp tx-delay
seconds - Specifies the transmit delay. (Range: 1 - 8192 seconds)
Default Setting
2 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The transmit delay is used to prevent a series of successive LLDP transmissions
during a short period of rapid changes in local LLDP MIB objects, and to
increase the probability that multiple, rather than single changes, are reported
in each transmission.
◆ This attribute must comply with the following rule:

(4 * tx-delay) refresh-interval
Example
Console(config)#lldp tx-delay 10
Console(config)#
– 746 –
lldp admin-status This command enables LLDP transmit, receive, or transmit and receive mode on the
specified port. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
lldp admin-status {rx-only | tx-only | tx-rx}
no lldp admin-status
rx-only - Only receive LLDP PDUs.
tx-only - Only transmit LLDP PDUs.
tx-rx - Both transmit and receive LLDP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).
Default Setting
tx-rx
Command Mode
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp admin-status rx-only
Console(config-if)#
lldp basic-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the management
management-ip- address for this device. Use the no form to disable this feature.
address
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the
switch. If no management address is available, the address should be the MAC
address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement.
◆ The management address TLV may also include information about the specific
interface associated with this address, and an object identifier indicating the
type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address.
The interface number and OID are included to assist SNMP applications to
perform network discovery by indicating enterprise specific or other starting
points for the search, such as the Interface or Entity MIB.
– 747 –
◆ Since there are typically a number of different addresses associated with a

Layer 3 device, an individual LLDP PDU may contain more than one
management address TLV.
◆ Every management address TLV that reports an address that is accessible on a

port and protocol VLAN through the particular port should be accompanied by
a port and protocol VLAN TLV that indicates the VLAN identifier (VID)
associated with the management address reported by this TLV.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address
Console(config-if)#
lldp basic-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its port description.
port-description Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv port-description
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
The port description is taken from the ifDescr object in RFC 2863, which includes
information about the manufacturer, the product name, and the version of the
interface hardware/software.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv port-description
Console(config-if)#
lldp basic-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its system
system-capabilities capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities
Default Setting
Enabled
– 748 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
The system capabilities identifies the primary function(s) of the system and
whether or not these primary functions are enabled. The information advertised by
this TLV is described in IEEE 802.1AB.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities
Console(config-if)#
lldp basic-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the system
system-description description. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv system-description
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
The system description is taken from the sysDescr object in RFC 3418, which
includes the full name and version identification of the system's hardware type,
software operating system, and networking software.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-description
Console(config-if)#
lldp basic-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the system name. Use
system-name the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv system-name
Default Setting
Enabled
– 749 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
The system name is taken from the sysName object in RFC 3418, which contains the
system’s administratively assigned name, and is in turn based on the hostname
command.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-name
Console(config-if)#
lldp dot1-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the supported
proto-ident protocols. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
This option advertises the protocols that are accessible through this interface.
Example
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident
Console(config-if)#
lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise port-based protocol
VLAN information. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
– 750 –
Command Usage
This option advertises the port-based protocol VLANs configured on this interface
(see “Configuring Protocol-based VLANs” on page 592).
Example
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid
Console(config-if)#
lldp dot1-tlv pvid This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its default VLAN ID.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot1-tlv pvid
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
The port’s default VLAN identifier (PVID) indicates the VLAN with which untagged
or priority-tagged frames are associated (see the switchport native vlan command).
Example
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot1-tlv pvid
Console(config-if)#
lldp dot1-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its VLAN name. Use
vlan-name the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
– 751 –
Command Usage
This option advertises the name of all VLANs to which this interface has been
assigned. See “switchport allowed vlan” on page 573 and “protocol-vlan protocol-
group (Configuring Interfaces)” on page 594.
Example
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name
Console(config-if)#
lldp dot3-tlv link-agg This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise link aggregation
capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot3-tlv link-agg
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
This option advertises link aggregation capabilities, aggregation status of the link,
and the 802.3 aggregated port identifier if this interface is currently a link
aggregation member.
Example
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot3-tlv link-agg
Console(config-if)#
lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its MAC and physical
layer capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
– 752 –
Command Usage
This option advertises MAC/PHY configuration/status which includes information
about auto-negotiation support/capabilities, and operational Multistation Access
Unit (MAU) type.
Example
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy
Console(config-if)#
lldp dot3-tlv This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its maximum frame
max-frame size. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot3-tlv max-frame
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
Refer to “Frame Size” on page 122 for information on configuring the maximum
frame size for this switch.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp dot3-tlv max-frame
Console(config-if)#
lldp dot3-tlv poe This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its Power-over-
Ethernet (PoE) capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot3-tlv poe
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
– 753 –
Command Usage
◆ This command only applies to the ECS4510-28P/52P.
◆ This option advertises Power-over-Ethernet capabilities, including whether or

not PoE is supported, currently enabled, if the port pins through which power is
delivered can be controlled, the port pins selected to deliver power, and the
power class.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp dot3-tlv poe
Console(config-if)#
lldp med-location This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its location
civic-addr identification details. Use the no form to restore the default settings.
Syntax
lldp med-location civic-addr [[country country-code] | [what device-type] |
[ca-type ca-value]]
no lldp med-location civic-addr [[country] | [what] | [ca-type]]
country-code – The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters.
(Example: DK, DE or US)
device-type – The type of device to which the location applies.

0 – Location of DHCP server.
1 – Location of network element closest to client.
2 – Location of client.
ca-type – A one-octet descriptor of the data civic address value.

(Range: 0-255)
ca-value – Description of a location. (Range: 1-32 characters)
Default Setting
Not advertised
No description
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use this command without any keywords to advertise location identification
details.
– 754 –
◆ Use the ca-type to advertise the physical location of the device, that is the city,
street number, building and room information. The address location is
specified as a type and value pair, with the civic address (CA) type being
defined in RFC 4776. The following table describes some of the CA type
numbers and provides examples.
Table 150: LLDP MED Location CA Types

CA Type Description CA Value Example
1 National subdivisions (state, canton, province) California
2 County, parish Orange
3 City, township Irvine
4 City division, borough, city district West Irvine
5 Neighborhood, block Riverside
6 Group of streets below the neighborhood level Exchange
18 Street suffix or type Avenue
19 House number 320
20 House number suffix A
21 Landmark or vanity address Tech Center
26 Unit (apartment, suite) Apt 519
27 Floor 5
28 Room 509B
Any number of CA type and value pairs can be specified for the civic address
location, as long as the total does not exceed 250 characters.
◆ For the location options defined for device-type, normally option 2 is used to
specify the location of the client device. In situations where the client device
location is not known, 0 and 1 can be used, providing the client device is
physically close to the DHCP server or network element.
Example
The following example enables advertising location identification details.

Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 1 California
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 2 Orange
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 3 Irvine
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 4 West Irvine
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 6 Exchange
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 18 Avenue
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 19 320
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 27 5
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr 28 509B
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr country US
– 755 –
Console(config-if)#lldp med-location civic-addr what 2

Console(config-if)#
lldp med-notification This command enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about LLDP-
MED changes. Use the no form to disable LLDP-MED notifications.
Syntax
[no] lldp med-notification
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This option sends out SNMP trap notifications to designated target stations at
the interval specified by the lldp notification-interval command. Trap
notifications include information about state changes in the LLDP MIB (IEEE
802.1AB), the LLDP-MED MIB (ANSI/TIA 1057), or organization-specific LLDP-
EXT-DOT1 and LLDP-EXT-DOT3 MIBs.
◆ SNMP trap destinations are defined using the snmp-server host command.
◆ Information about additional changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between

SNMP notifications is not transmitted. Only state changes that exist at the time
of a trap notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should
therefore periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to
detect any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to throttling
or transmission loss.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp med-notification
Console(config-if)#
lldp med-tlv ext-poe This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise and accept
Extended Power-over-Ethernet configuration and usage information. Use the no
form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp med-tlv ext-poe
Default Setting
Enabled
– 756 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
This command only applies to the ECS4510-28P/52P.
This option advertises extended Power-over-Ethernet capability details, such as
power availability from the switch, and power state of the switch, including
whether the switch is operating from primary or backup power (the Endpoint
Device could use this information to decide to enter power conservation mode).
Example
Console(config-if)#no lldp med-tlv ext-poe
Console(config-if)#
lldp med-tlv inventory This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its inventory
identification details. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp med-tlv inventory
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
This option advertises device details useful for inventory management, such as
manufacturer, model, software version and other pertinent information.
Example
Console(config-if)#no lldp med-tlv inventory
Console(config-if)#
lldp med-tlv location This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its location
identification details. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp med-tlv location
Default Setting
Enabled
– 757 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
This option advertises location identification details.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp med-tlv location
Console(config-if)#
lldp med-tlv med-cap This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its Media
Endpoint Device capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp med-tlv med-cap
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
This option advertises LLDP-MED TLV capabilities, allowing Media Endpoint and
Connectivity Devices to efficiently discover which LLDP-MED related TLVs are
supported on the switch.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp med-tlv med-cap
Console(config-if)#
lldp med-tlv This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its network
network-policy policy configuration. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp med-tlv network-policy
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
– 758 –
Command Usage
This option advertises network policy configuration information, aiding in the
discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port. Improper
network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or
complete service disruption.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp med-tlv network-policy
Console(config-if)#
lldp notification This command enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about LLDP
changes. Use the no form to disable LLDP notifications.
Syntax
[no] lldp notification
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This option sends out SNMP trap notifications to designated target stations at
the interval specified by the lldp notification-interval command. Trap
notifications include information about state changes in the LLDP MIB (IEEE
802.1AB), or organization-specific LLDP-EXT-DOT1 and LLDP-EXT-DOT3 MIBs.
◆ SNMP trap destinations are defined using the snmp-server host command.
◆ Information about additional changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between

SNMP notifications is not transmitted. Only state changes that exist at the time
of a trap notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should
therefore periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to
detect any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to throttling
or transmission loss.
Example
Console(config-if)#lldp notification
Console(config-if)#
– 759 –
show lldp config This command shows LLDP configuration settings for all ports.
Syntax
show lldp config [detail interface]
detail - Shows configuration summary.
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show lldp config
LLDP Global Configuation
LLDP Enabled : Yes

LLDP Transmit Interval : 30 seconds
LLDP Hold Time Multiplier : 4
LLDP Delay Interval : 2 seconds
LLDP Re-initialization Delay : 2 seconds
LLDP Notification Interval : 5 seconds
LLDP MED Fast Start Count : 4
LLDP Port Configuration

Port Admin Status Notification Enabled
-------- ------------ --------------------
Eth 1/1 Tx-Rx True
Eth 1/2 Tx-Rx True
Eth 1/3 Tx-Rx True
Eth 1/4 Tx-Rx True
Eth 1/5 Tx-Rx True
.
.
.
Console#show lldp config detail ethernet 1/1
LLDP Port Configuration Detail
Port : Eth 1/1
Admin Status : Tx-Rx
Notification Enabled : True
Basic TLVs Advertised : port-description
system-name
system-description
system-capabilities
management-ip-address
802.1 specific TLVs Advertised : port-vid
vlan-name
proto-vlan
proto-ident
802.3 specific TLVs Advertised : mac-phy
link-agg
max-frame
MED Notification Status : Enabled
– 760 –
MED Enabled TLVs Advertised : med-cap

network-policy
location
ext-poe
inventory
MED Location Identification:
Location Data Format : Civic Address LCI
Civic Address Status : Enabled
Country Name : US
What : 2
CA-Type : 1
CA-Value : Alabama
CA-Type : 2
CA-Value : Tuscaloosa
Console#
show lldp info This command shows LLDP global and interface-specific configuration settings for
local-device this device.
Syntax
show lldp info local-device [detail interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show lldp info local-device
LLDP Local Global Information
Chassis Type : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-05
System Name :
System Description : ECS4510-28T
System Capabilities Support : Bridge, Router
System Capabilities Enabled : Bridge, Router
Management Address : 192.168.0.101 (IPv4)
LLDP Port Information

Port PortID Type PortID Port Description
-------- ---------------- ----------------- --------------------------------
Eth 1/1 MAC Address 00-12-CF-DA-FC-E9 Ethernet Port on unit 0, port 1
Eth 1/2 MAC Address 00-12-CF-DA-FC-EA Ethernet Port on unit 0, port 2
Eth 1/3 MAC Address 00-12-CF-DA-FC-EB Ethernet Port on unit 0, port 3
Eth 1/4 MAC Address 00-12-CF-DA-FC-EC Ethernet Port on unit 0, port 4
.
.
.
– 761 –
Console#show lldp info local-device detail ethernet 1/1

LLDP Local Port Information Detail
Port : Eth 1/1
Port ID Type : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-12-CF-DA-FC-E9
Port Description : Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 1
MED Capability : LLDP-MED Capabilities
Network Policy
Location Identification
Inventory
Console#
show lldp info This command shows LLDP global and interface-specific configuration settings for
remote-device remote devices attached to an LLDP-enabled port.
Syntax
show lldp info remote-device [detail interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Note that an IP phone or other end-node device which advertises LLDP-MED
capabilities must be connected to the switch for information to be displayed in the
“LLDP-MED Capability” and other related fields.
Console#show lldp info remote-device
LLDP Remote Devices Information
Interface Chassis ID Port ID System Name

--------- ----------------- ----------------- ---------------------
Eth 1/1 00-E0-0C-00-00-FD 00-E0-0C-00-01-02
Console#show lldp info remote-device detail ethernet 1/1

LLDP Remote Devices Information Detail
---------------------------------------------------------------
Index : 2
Chassis Type : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 70-72-CF-91-1C-B2
Port ID Type : MAC Address
Port ID : 70-72-CF-91-1C-B4
Time To Live : 120 seconds
Port Description : Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 2
– 762 –
System Description : ECS4510-52P

System Capabilities : Bridge, Router
Enabled Capabilities : Bridge, Router
Management Address : 192.168.0.4 (IPv4)
Port VLAN ID : 1
Port and Protocol VLAN ID : supported, disabled
VLAN Name : VLAN 1 - DefaultVlan
Protocol Identity (Hex) : 88-CC
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status
Port Auto-neg Supported : Yes
Port Auto-neg Enabled : Yes
Port Auto-neg Advertised Cap (Hex) : 6C00
Port MAU Type : 16
Power via MDI

Power Class : PSE
Power MDI Supported : Yes
Power MDI Enabled : Yes
Power Pair Controllable : No
Power Pairs : Spare
Power Classification : Class 1
Link Aggregation
Link Aggregation Capable : Yes
Link Aggregation Enable : No
Link Aggregation Port ID : 0
Max Frame Size : 1522
Console#
The following example shows information which is displayed for end-node device
which advertises LLDP-MED TLVs.
...
LLDP-MED Capability :
Device Class : Network Connectivity
Supported Capabilities : LLDP-MED Capabilities
Network Policy
Extended Power via MDI - PSE
Inventory
Current Capabilities : LLDP-MED Capabilities
Extended Power via MDI - PSE
Inventory
Location Identification :
Location Data Format : Civic Address LCI
Country Name : TW
What : 2
Extended Power via MDI :
Power Type : PSE
Power Source : Unknown
Power Priority : Unknown
Power Value : 0 Watts
– 763 –
Inventory :
Hardware Revision : R0A
Firmware Revision : 1.2.6.0
Software Revision : 1.2.6.0
Serial Number : S123456
Manufacture Name : Prye
Model Name : VP101
Asset ID : 340937
Console#
show lldp info This command shows statistics based on traffic received through all attached LLDP-
statistics enabled interfaces.
Syntax
show lldp info statistics [detail interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show lldp info statistics
LLDP Global Statistics
Neighbor Entries List Last Updated : 485 seconds
New Neighbor Entries Count : 2
Neighbor Entries Deleted Count : 1
Neighbor Entries Dropped Count : 0
Neighbor Entries Ageout Count : 1
LLDP Port Statistics

Port NumFramesRecvd NumFramesSent NumFramesDiscarded
-------- -------------- ------------- ------------------
Eth 1/1 12 12 0
Eth 1/2 17 17 0
Eth 1/3 0 0 0
Eth 1/4 0 0 0
. Eth 1/5 0 0 0
.
.
Console#show lldp info statistics detail ethernet 1/1
LLDP Port Statistics Detail
Port Name : Eth 1/1
Frames Discarded : 0
Frames Invalid : 0
Frames Received : 12
Frames Sent : 12
TLVs Unrecognized : 0
– 764 –
TLVs Discarded : 0
Neighbor Ageouts : 1
Console#
– 765 –
– 766 –
26 CFM Commands
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is an OAM protocol that includes proactive

connectivity monitoring using continuity check messages, fault verification
through loop back messages, and fault isolation by examining end-to-end
connections between provider edge devices or between customer edge devices.
CFM is implemented as a service level protocol based on service instances which

encompass only that portion of the metropolitan area network supporting a
specific customer. CFM can also provide controlled management access to a
hierarchy of maintenance domains (such as the customer, service provider, and
equipment operator).
The following list of commands support functions for defining the CFM structure,
including domains, maintenance associations, and maintenance access points. It
also provides commands for fault detection through continuity check messages for
all known maintenance points, and cross-check messages for statically configured
maintenance points located on other devices. Fault verification is supported
through loop back messages, and fault isolation through link trace messages. Fault
notification is also provided by SNMP alarms which are automatically generated by
maintenance points when connectivity faults or configuration errors are detected
in the local maintenance domain.
Table 151: CFM Commands

Defining CFM Structures
ethernet cfm ais level Configures the maintenance level at which Alarm GC
Indication Signal information will be sent
ethernet cfm ais ma Enables the MEPs within the specified MA to send frames GC
with AIS information
ethernet cfm ais period Configures the interval at which AIS information is sent GC
ethernet cfm ais suppress Suppresses AIS messages following the detection of GC
alarm defect conditions
ethernet cfm domain Defines a CFM maintenance domain, sets the authorized GC
maintenance level, and enters CFM configuration mode;
also specifies the MIP creation method for MAs within this
domain
ethernet cfm enable Enables CFM processing globally on the switch GC
ma index name Creates a maintenance association within the current CFM

maintenance domain, maps it to a customer service
instance, and sets the manner in which MIPs are created for
this service instance
– 767 –
Chapter 26 | CFM Commands
Table 151: CFM Commands (Continued)

ma index name-format Specifies the name format for the maintenance association CFM
as IEEE 802.1ag character based, or ITU-T SG13/SG15 Y.1731
defined ICC-based format
ethernet cfm mep Sets an interface as a domain boundary, defines it as a IC

maintenance end point (MEP), and sets direction of the
MEP in regard to sending and receiving CFM messages
ethernet cfm port-enable Enables CFM processing on an interface IC
clear ethernet cfm ais mpid Clears AIS defect information for the specified MEP PE
show ethernet cfm Displays CFM configuration settings, including global PE

configuration settings, SNMP traps, and interface settings
show ethernet cfm md Displays configured maintenance domains PE
show ethernet cfm ma Displays configured maintenance associations PE
show ethernet cfm Displays maintenance points configured on this device PE

maintenance-points local
show ethernet cfm Displays detailed CFM information about a specified local PE
maintenance-points local MEP in the continuity check database
detail mep
show ethernet cfm Displays detailed CFM information about a specified PE

maintenance-points remote MEP in the continuity check database
remote detail
Continuity Check Operations
ethernet cfm cc ma interval Sets the transmission delay between continuity check GC
messages
ethernet cfm cc enable Enables transmission of continuity check messages within GC

a specified maintenance association
snmp-server enable traps Enables SNMP traps for CFM continuity check events GC
ethernet cfm cc
mep archive-hold-time Sets the time that data from a missing MEP is kept in the CFM
continuity check database before being purged
clear ethernet cfm Clears the contents of the continuity check database PE
maintenance-points
remote
clear ethernet cfm errors Clears continuity check errors logged for the specified PE
maintenance domain and maintenance level
show ethernet cfm errors Displays CFM continuity check errors logged on this device PE
Cross Check Operations
ethernet cfm mep Sets the maximum delay that a device waits for remote GC
crosscheck start-delay MEPs to come up before starting the cross-check operation
snmp-server enable traps Enables SNMP traps for CFM continuity check events, in GC
ethernet cfm crosscheck relation to the cross-check operations between statically
configured MEPs and those learned via continuity check
messages
mep crosscheck mpid Statically defines a remote MEP in a maintenance CFM

association
– 768 –
Table 151: CFM Commands (Continued)

ethernet cfm mep Enables cross-checking between the list of configured PE

crosscheck remote MEPs within a maintenance association and MEPs
learned through continuity check messages
show ethernet cfm Displays information about remote maintenance points PE

maintenance-points configured statically in a cross-check list
remote crosscheck
Link Trace Operations
ethernet cfm linktrace Enables caching of CFM data learned through link trace GC
cache messages
ethernet cfm linktrace Sets the hold time for CFM link trace cache entries GC
cache hold-time
ethernet cfm linktrace Sets the maximum size for the link trace cache GC
cache size
ethernet cfm linktrace Sends CFM link trace messages to the MAC address for a PE
MEP
clear ethernet cfm Clears link trace messages logged on this device PE
linktrace-cache
show ethernet cfm Displays the contents of the link trace cache PE
linktrace-cache
Loopback Operations
ethernet cfm loopback Sends CFM loopback messages to a MAC address for a MEP PE
or MIP
Fault Generator Operations
mep fault-notify alarm-time Sets the time a defect must exist before a fault alarm is CFM
issued
mep fault-notify lowest- Sets the lowest priority defect that is allowed to generate a CFM
priority fault alarm
mep fault-notify reset-time Configures the time after a fault alarm has been issued, and CFM
no defect exists, before another fault alarm can be issued
show ethernet cfm fault- Displays configuration settings for the fault notification PE
notify-generator generator
Delay Measure Operations
ethernet cfm delay- Sends periodic delay-measure requests to a specified MEP PE

measure two-way within a maintenance association
Basic Configuration Steps for CFM
1. Configure the maintenance domains with the ethernet cfm domain command.
2. Configure the maintenance associations with the ma index name command.
3. Configure the local maintenance end points (MEPs) which will serve as the
domain service access points for the specified maintenance association using
the ethernet cfm mep command.
– 769 –
4. Enter a static list of MEPs assigned to other devices within the same
maintenance association using the mep crosscheck mpid command. This
allows CFM to automatically verify the functionality of these remote end points
by cross-checking the static list configured on this device against information
learned through continuity check messages.
5. Enable CFM globally on the switch with the ethernet cfm enable command.
6. Enable CFM on the local MEPs with the ethernet cfm port-enable command.
7. Enable continuity check operations with the ethernet cfm cc enable command.
8. Enable cross-check operations with the ethernet cfm mep crosscheck

command.
Other configuration changes may be required for your particular environment,

such as adjusting the interval at which continuity check messages are sent
(page 787), or setting the start-up delay for the cross-check operation (page 793).
You can also enable SNMP traps for events discovered by continuity check
messages (page 789) or cross-check messages (page 793).
ethernet cfm ais level This command configures the maintenance level at which Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS) information will be sent within the specified MA. Use the no form restore the
default setting.
Syntax
ethernet cfm ais level level-id md domain-name ma ma-name
no ethernet cfm ais level md domain-name ma ma-name
level-id – Maintenance level at which AIS information will be sent.
(Range: 0-7)
domain-name – Domain name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric characters)
ma-name – Maintenance association name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric
characters)
Default Setting
Level 0
Command Mode
Command Usage
The configured AIS level must be higher than the maintenance level of the domain
containing the specified MA.
– 770 –
Example
This example sets the maintenance level for sending AIS messages within the
specified MA.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm ais level 4 md voip ma rd

Console(config)#
ethernet cfm ais ma This command enables the MEPs within the specified MA to send frames with AIS
information following detection of defect conditions. Use the no form to disable
this feature.
Syntax
[no] ethernet cfm ais md domain-name ma ma-name
ma-name – Maintenance association name15. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric
characters)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Each MA name must be unique within the CFM domain.
◆ Frames with AIS information can be issued at the client’s maintenance level by
a MEP upon detecting defect conditions. For example, defect conditions may
include:
■ Signal failure conditions if continuity checks are enabled.
■ AIS condition or LCK condition if continuity checks are disabled.
◆ A MEP continues to transmit periodic frames with AIS information until the
defect condition is removed.
Example
This example enables the MEPs within the specified MA to send frames with AIS
information.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm ais md voip ma rd

Console(config)#
15. The total length of the MD name and MA name cannot exceed 44 characters.
– 771 –
ethernet cfm ais This command configures the interval at which AIS information is sent. Use the no
period form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ethernet cfm ais period period md domain-name ma ma-name
no ethernet cfm ais period md domain-name ma ma-name
period – The interval at which AIS information is sent.
(Options: 1 second, 60 seconds)
characters)
Default Setting
1 second
Command Mode
Example
This example sets the interval for sending frames with AIS information at 60
seconds.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm ais period 60 md voip ma rd

Console(config)#
ethernet cfm ais This command suppresses sending frames containing AIS information following
suppress alarm the detection of defect conditions. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] ethernet cfm ais suppress alarm md domain-name ma ma-name
characters)
Default Setting
Suppression is disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ For multipoint connectivity, a MEP cannot determine the specific maintenance
level entity that has encountered defect conditions upon receiving a frame
– 772 –
with AIS information. More importantly, it cannot determine the associated

subset of its peer MEPs for which it should suppress alarms since the received
AIS information does not contain that information. Therefore, upon reception
of a frame with AIS information, the MEP will suppress alarms for all peer MEPs
whether there is still connectivity or not.
◆ However, for a point-to-point connection, a MEP has only a single peer MEP for
which to suppress alarms when it receives frames with AIS information.
◆ If suppression is enabled by this command, upon receiving a frame with AIS

information, a MEP detects an AIS condition and suppresses loss of continuity
alarms associated with all its peer MEPs. A MEP resumes loss of continuity alarm
generation upon detecting loss of continuity defect conditions in the absence
of AIS messages.
Example
This example suppresses sending frames with AIS information.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm ais suppress alarm md voip ma rd

Console(config)#
ethernet cfm domain This command defines a CFM maintenance domain, sets the authorized
maintenance level, and enters CFM configuration mode. Use the no form to delete
a CFM maintenance domain.
Syntax
ethernet cfm domain index index name domain-name level level-id
[mip-creation type]
no ethernet cfm domain index index
index – Domain index. (Range: 1-65535)
level-id – Authorized maintenance level for this domain. (Range: 0-7)
type – Specifies the CFM protocol’s creation method for maintenance
intermediate points (MIPs) in this domain:
default – MIPs can be created for any maintenance association (MA)
configured in this domain on any bridge port through which the MA’s
VID can pass.
explicit – MIPs can be created for any MA configured in this domain
only on bridge ports through which the MA’s VID can pass, and only if a
maintenance end point (MEP) is created at some lower MA Level.
none – No MIP can be created for any MA configured in this domain.
– 773 –
Default Setting
No maintenance domains are configured.
No MIPs are created for any MA in the specified domain.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A domain can only be configured with one name.
◆ Where domains are nested, an upper-level hierarchical domain must have a

higher maintenance level than the ones it encompasses. The higher to lower
level domain types commonly include entities such as customer, service
provider, and operator.
◆ More than one domain can be configured at the same maintenance level, but a
single domain can only be configured with one maintenance level.
◆ If MEPs or MAs are configured for a domain using the ethernet cfm mep
command or ma index name command, they must first be removed before you
can remove the domain.
◆ Maintenance domains are designed to provide a transparent method of

verifying and resolving connectivity problems for end-to-end connections. By
default, these connections run between the domain service access points
(DSAPs) within each MA defined for a domain, and are manually configured
using the ethernet cfm mep command.
In contrast, MIPs are interconnection points that make up all possible paths
between the DSAPs within an MA. MIPs are automatically generated by the
CFM protocol when the mip-creation option in this command is set to “default”
or “explicit,” and the MIP creation state machine is invoked (as defined in IEEE
802.1ag). The default option allows MIPs to be created for all interconnection
points within an MA, regardless of the domain’s level in the maintenance
hierarchy (e.g., customer, provider, or operator). While the explicit option only
generates MIPs within an MA if its associated domain is not at the bottom of the
maintenance hierarchy. This option is used to hide the structure of network at
the lowest domain level.
The diagnostic functions provided by CFM can be used to detect connectivity
failures between any pair of MEPs in an MA. Using MIPs allows these failures to
be isolated to smaller segments of the network.
Allowing the CFM to generate MIPs exposes more of the network structure to
users at higher domain levels, but can speed up the process of fault detection
and recovery. This trade-off should be carefully considered when designing a
CFM maintenance structure.
Also note that while MEPs are active agents which can initiate consistency
check messages (CCMs), transmit loop back or link trace messages, and
maintain the local CCM database. MIPs, on the other hand are passive agents
– 774 –
which can only validate received CFM messages, and respond to loop back and
link trace messages.
The MIP creation method defined by the ma index name command takes
precedence over the method defined by this command.
Example
This example creates a maintenance domain set to maintenance level 3, and enters
CFM configuration mode for this domain.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm domain index 1 name voip level 3 mip-creation

explicit
Console(config-ether-cfm)#
Related Commands
ma index name (776)
ethernet cfm enable This command enables CFM processing globally on the switch. Use the no form to
disable CFM processing globally.
Syntax
[no] ethernet cfm enable
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ To avoid generating an excessive number of traps, the complete CFM
maintenance structure and process parameters should be configured prior to
globally enabling CFM processing with this command. Specifically, the
maintenance domains, maintenance associations, and MEPs should be
configured on each participating bridge.
◆ When CFM is enabled, hardware resources are allocated for CFM processing.
Example
This example enables CFM globally on the switch.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm enable

Console(config)#
– 775 –
ma index name This command creates a maintenance association (MA) within the current
maintenance domain, maps it to a customer service instance (S-VLAN), and sets the
manner in which MIPs are created for this service instance. Use the no form with
the vlan keyword to remove the S-VLAN from the specified MA. Or use the no form
with only the index keyword to remove the MA from the current domain.
Syntax
ma index index name ma-name [vlan vlan-list [mip-creation type]]
no ma index index [vlan vlan-list]
index – MA identifier. (Range: 1-2147483647)
ma-name – MA name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric characters)
type – Specifies the CFM protocol’s creation method for maintenance
intermediate points (MIPs) in this MA:
default – MIPs can be created for this MA on any bridge port through
which the MA’s VID can pass.
explicit – MIPs can be created this MA only on bridge ports through
which the MA’s VID can pass, and only if a maintenance end point (MEP)
is created at some lower MA Level.
none – No MIP can be created for this MA.
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
CFM Domain Configuration
Command Usage
◆ The maintenance domain used to enter CFM domain configuration mode, the
MA name and VLAN identifier specified by this command, and the DSAPs
configured with the mep crosscheck mpid command create a unique service
instance for each customer.
◆ If only the MA index and name are entered for this command, the MA will be
recorded in the domain database, but will not function. No MEPs can be
created until the MA is associated with a service VLAN.
◆ Note that multiple domains at the same maintenance level (see the ethernet
cfm domain command) cannot have an MA on the same VLAN. Also, each MA
name must be unique within the CFM-managed network.
◆ The first VLAN entered in the list by this command is the primary VLAN, and is
the VLAN on which all CFM functions are executed.
– 776 –
◆ Before removing an MA, first remove all the MEPs configured for it (see the mep
crosscheck mpid command).
◆ If the MIP creation method is not defined by this command, the creation
method defined by the ethernet cfm domain command is applied to this MA.
For a detailed description of the MIP types, refer to the Command Usage
section under the ethernet cfm domain command.
Example
This example creates a maintenance association, binds it to VLAN 1, and allows
MIPs to be created within this MA using the default method.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm domain index 1 name voip level 3

Console(config-ether-cfm)#ma index 1 name rd vlan 1 mip-creation default
ma index This command specifies the name format for the maintenance association as IEEE
name-format 802.1ag character based, or ITU-T SG13/SG15 Y.1731 defined ICC-based format. Use
Syntax
ma index index name-format {character-string | icc-based}
no ma index index name-format
index – MA identifier. (Range: 1-2147483647)
character-string – IEEE 802.1ag defined character string format. This is an
IETF RFC 2579 DisplayString.
icc-based – ITU-T SG13/SG15 Y.1731 defined ICC based format.
Default Setting
character-string
Command Mode
Example
This example specifies the name format as character string.

Console(config-ether-cfm)#ma index 1 name-format character-string
– 777 –
ethernet cfm mep This command sets an interface as a domain boundary, defines it as a maintenance
end point (MEP), and sets direction of the MEP in regard to sending and receiving
CFM messages. Use the no form to delete a MEP.
Syntax
ethernet cfm mep mpid mpid md domain-name ma ma-name [up]
no ethernet cfm mep mpid mpid ma ma-name
characters)
up – Indicates that the MEP faces inward toward the switch cross-connect
matrix, and transmits CFM messages towards, and receives them from, the
direction of the internal bridge relay mechanism. If the up keyword is not
included in this command, then the MEP is facing away from the switch,
and transmits CFM messages towards, and receives them from, the
direction of the physical medium.
Default Setting
No MEPs are configured.
The MEP faces outward (down).
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ CFM elements must be configured in the following order: (1) maintenance
domain at the same level as the MEP to be configured (using the ethernet cfm
domain command), (2) maintenance association within the domain (using the
ma index name command), and (3) finally the MEP using this command.
◆ An interface may belong to more than one domain. This command can be used
to configure an interface as a MEP for different MAs in different domains.
◆ To change the MEP’s MA or the direction it faces, first delete the MEP, and then
create a new one.
Example
This example sets port 1 as a DSAP for the specified maintenance association.

Console(config-if)#ethernet cfm mep mpid 1 md voip ma rd
Console(config-if)#
– 778 –
ethernet cfm This command enables CFM processing on an interface. Use the no form to disable
port-enable CFM processing on an interface.
Syntax
[no] ethernet cfm port-enable
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ An interface must be enabled before a MEP can be created with the ethernet
cfm mep command.
◆ If a MEP has been configured on an interface with the ethernet cfm mep
command, it must first be deleted before CFM can be disabled on that
interface.
◆ When CFM is disabled, hardware resources previously used for CFM processing
on that interface are released, and all CFM frames entering that interface are
forwarded as normal data traffic.
Example
This example enables CFM on port 1.

Console(config-if)#ethernet cfm port-enable
Console(config-if)#
clear ethernet cfm This command clears AIS defect information for the specified MEP.
ais mpid
Syntax
clear ethernet cfm ais mpid mpid md domain-name ma ma-name
characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 779 –
Command Usage
This command can be used to clear AIS defect entries if a MEP does not exit the AIS
state when all errors are resolved.
Example
This example clears AIS defect entries on port 1.
Console#clear ethernet cfm ais mpid 1 md voip ma rd

Console(config)#
show ethernet cfm This command displays CFM configuration settings, including global settings,
configuration SNMP traps, and interface settings.
Syntax
show ethernet cfm configuration {global | traps | interface interface}
global – Displays global settings including CFM global status, cross-check
start delay, and link trace parameters.
traps – Displays the status of all continuity check and cross-check traps.
interface – Displays CFM status for the specified interface.
ethernet unit/port
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows the global settings for CFM.
Console#show ethernet cfm configuration global

CFM Global Status : Enabled
Crosscheck Start Delay : 10 seconds
Linktrace Cache Status : Enabled
Linktrace Cache Hold Time : 100 minutes
Linktrace Cache Size : 100 entries
Console#
– 780 –
This example shows the configuration status for continuity check and cross-check
traps.
Console#show ethernet cfm configuration traps

CC MEP Up Trap :Disabled
CC MEP Down Trap :Disabled
CC Configure Trap :Disabled
CC Loop Trap :Disabled
Cross Check MEP Unknown Trap :Disabled
Cross Check MEP Missing Trap :Disabled
Cross Check MA Up :Disabled
Console#
Table 152: show ethernet cfm configuration traps - display description

Field Description
CC MEP Up Trap Sends a trap if a remote MEP is discovered and added to the local
database, the port state of a previously discovered remote MEP changes,
or a CCM is received from a remote MEP which as an expired entry in the
archived database.
CC Mep Down Trap Sends a trap if this device loses connectivity with a remote MEP, or
connectivity has been restored to a remote MEP which has recovered from
an error condition.
CC Configure Trap Sends a trap if this device receives a CCM with the same MPID as its own
but with a different source MAC address, indicating that a CFM
configuration error exists.
CC Loop Trap Sends a trap if this device receives a CCM with the same source MAC
address and MPID as its own, indicating that a forwarding loop exists.
Cross Check MEP A CCM is received from a MEP that has not been configured as a DSAP (see
Unknown Trap the ethernet cfm mep command), manually configured as a remote MEP
(see the mep crosscheck mpid command), nor learned through previous
CCM messages.
Cross Check MEP Missing This device failed to receive three consecutive CCMs from another MEP in
Trap the same MA.
Cross Check MA Up Generates a trap when all remote MEPs belonging to an MA come up.
This example shows the CFM status for port 1.
Console#show ethernet cfm configuration interface ethernet 1/1

Ethernet 1/1 CFM Status:Enabled
Console#
– 781 –
show ethernet cfm md This command displays the configured maintenance domains.
Syntax
show ethernet cfm md [level level]
level – Maintenance level. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows all configured maintenance domains.
Console#show ethernet cfm md

MD Index MD Name Level MIP Creation Archive Hold Time (m.)
-------- -------------------- ----- ------------ ----------------------
1 rd 0 default 100
Console#
show ethernet cfm ma This command displays the configured maintenance associations.
Syntax
show ethernet cfm ma [level level]
level – Maintenance level. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
For a description of the values displayed in the CC Interval field, refer to the
ethernet cfm cc ma interval command.
Example
This example shows all configured maintenance associations.
Console#show ethernet cfm ma

MD Name MA Index MA Name Primary VID CC Interval MIP Creation
--------------- -------- --------------- ----------- ----------- ------------
steve 1 voip 1 4 Default
Console#
– 782 –
show ethernet cfm This command displays the maintenance points configured on this device.
maintenance-points
local Syntax
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local
{mep [domain domain-name | interface interface | level level-id] | mip
[domain domain-name | level level-id]}
mep – Displays only local maintenance end points.
mip – Displays only local maintenance intermediate points.
ethernet unit/port
level-id – Maintenance level for this domain. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use the mep keyword with this command to display the MEPs configured on
this device as DSAPs through the ethernet cfm mep command.
◆ Using the mip keyword with this command to display the MIPs generated on
this device by the CFM protocol when the mip-creation method is set to either
“default” or “explicit” by the ethernet cfm domain command or the ma index
name command.
Example
This example shows all MEPs configured on this device for maintenance domain rd.
Console#show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local mep

MPID MD Name Level Direct VLAN Port CC Status MAC Address
---- ---------------- ----- ------ ---- -------- --------- -----------------
1 rd 0 UP 1 Eth 1/ 1 Enabled 00-12-CF-3A-A8-C0
Console#
– 783 –
show ethernet cfm This command displays detailed CFM information about a local MEP in the
maintenance-points continuity check database.
local detail mep
Syntax
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep
[domain domain-name | interface interface | level level-id]
ethernet unit/port
level-id – Maintenance level for this domain. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows detailed information about the local MEP on port 1.
Console#show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep interface

ethernet 1/1
MEP Settings:
-------------
MPID : 1
MD Name : vopu
MA Name : r&d
MA Name Format : Character String
Level : 0
Direction : Up
Interface : Eth 1/ 1
CC Status : Enabled
MAC Address : 00-E0-0C-00-00-FD
Defect Condition : No Defect
Received RDI : False
AIS Status : Enabled
AIS Period : 1 seconds
AIS Transmit Level : Default
Suppress Alarm : Disabled
Suppressing Alarms : Disabled
Console#
– 784 –
Table 153: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep - display
Field Description
MPID MEP identifier
MD Name The maintenance domain for this entry.
MA Name Maintenance association to which this remote MEP belongs
MA Name Format The format of the Maintenance Association name, including primary VID,
character string, unsigned Integer 16, or RFC 2865 VPN ID
Level Maintenance level of the local maintenance point
Direction The direction in which the MEP faces on the Bridge port (up or down).
Interface The port to which this MEP is attached.
CC Status Shows if the MEP will generate CCM messages.
MAC Address MAC address of the local maintenance point. (If a CCM for the specified
remote MEP has never been received or the local MEP record times out,
the address will be set to the initial value of all Fs.)
Defect Condition Shows the defect detected on the MEP.
Received RDI Receive status of remote defect indication (RDI) messages on the MEP.
AIS Status Shows if MEPs within the specified MA are enabled to send frames with
AIS information following detection of defect conditions.
AIS Period The interval at which AIS information is sent.
AIS Transmit Level The maintenance level at which AIS information will be sent for the
specified MEP.
Suppress Alarm Shows if the specified MEP is configured to suppress sending frames
containing AIS information following the detection of defect conditions.
Suppressing Alarms Shows if the specified MEP is currently suppressing sending frames
containing AIS information following the detection of defect conditions.
show ethernet cfm This command displays detailed CFM information about a remote MEP in the
maintenance-points continuity check database.
remote detail
Syntax
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail
{mac mac-address | mpid mpid}
[domain domain-name | level level-id | ma ma-name]
mac-address – MAC address of a remote maintenance point.
This address can be entered in either of the following formats: xx-xx-xx-xx-
xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx
characters)
– 785 –
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Use the mpid keyword with this command to display information about a specific
maintenance point, or use the mac keyword to display information about all
maintenance points that have the specified MAC address.
Example
This example shows detailed information about the remote MEP designated by
MPID 2.
Console#show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail mpid 2

MAC Address : 00-0D-54-FC-A2-73
Domain/Level : voip / 3
MA Name : rd
Primary VLAN : 1
MPID : 2
Incoming Port : Eth 1/ 2
CC Lifetime : 645 seconds
Age of Last CC Message : 2 seconds
Frame Loss : 137
CC Packet Statistics : 647/1
Port State : Up
Interface State : Up
Crosscheck Status : Enabled
Console#
Table 154: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail - display

Field Description
MAC Address MAC address of the remote maintenance point. (If a CCM for the specified
remote MEP has never been received or the remote MEP record times out,
the address will be set to the initial value of all Fs.)
Domain/Level Maintenance domain and level of the remote maintenance point
MA Name Maintenance association to which this remote MEP belongs
Primary VLAN VLAN to which this MEP belongs
MPID MEP identifier
Incoming Port Port to which this remote MEP is attached.
CC Lifetime Length of time to hold messages about this MEP in the CCM database
Age of Last CC Message Length of time the last CCM message about this MEP has been in the CCM
database
Frame Loss Percentage of transmitted frames lost
CC Packet Statistics The number of CCM packets received successfully and those with errors
(received/error)
– 786 –
Table 154: show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail - display

Field Description
Port State Port states include:

Up – The port is functioning normally.
Blocked – The port has been blocked by the Spanning Tree Protocol.
No port state – Either no CCM has been received, or nor port status TLV
was received in the last CCM.
Interface State Interface states include:

No Status – Either no CCM has been received, or no interface status TLV
was received in the last CCM.
Up – The interface is ready to pass packets.
Down – The interface cannot pass packets.
Testing – The interface is in some test mode.
Unknown – The interface status cannot be determined for some reason.
Dormant – The interface is not in a state to pass packets but is in a pending
state, waiting for some external event.
Not Present – Some component of the interface is missing.
isLowerLayerDown – The interface is down due to state of the lower layer
interfaces.
Crosscheck Status Shows if crosscheck function has been enabled.
ethernet cfm cc ma This command sets the transmission delay between continuity check messages
interval (CCMs). Use the no form to restore the default settings.
Syntax
ethernet cfm cc md domain-name ma ma-name interval interval-level
no ethernet cfm cc ma ma-name interval
characters)
interval-level – The transmission delay between connectivity check
messages. The setting for this parameter is expressed as levels 4 through 7,
which in turn map to specific intervals of time. (CCM interval field options:
4 - 1 second, 5 - 10 seconds, 6 - 1 minute, 7 - 10 minutes)
Default Setting
4 (1 second)
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ CCMs provide a means to discover other MEPs and to detect connectivity
failures in an MA. If any MEP fails to receive three consecutive CCMs from any
other MEPs in its MA, a connectivity failure is registered. The interval at which
– 787 –
CCMs are issued should therefore be configured to detect connectivity

problems in a timely manner, as dictated by the nature and size of the MA.
◆ The maintenance of a MIP CCM database by a MIP presents some difficulty for
bridges carrying a large number of Service Instances, and for whose MEPs are
issuing CCMs at a high frequency. For this reason, slower CCM transmission
rates may have to be used.
Example
This example sets the transmission delay for continuity check messages to level 7
(60 seconds).
Console(config)#ethernet cfm cc md voip ma rd interval 7

Console(config)#
Related Commands
ethernet cfm cc enable (788)
ethernet cfm cc This command enables the transmission of continuity check messages (CCMs)
enable within a specified maintenance association. Use the no form to disable the
transmission of these messages.
Syntax
[no] ethernet cfm cc enable md domain-name ma ma-name
characters)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ CCMs are multicast periodically by a MEP in order to discover other MEPs in the
same MA, and to assure connectivity to all other MEPs/MIPs in the MA.
◆ Each CCM received is checked to verify that the MEP identifier field sent in the
message does not match its own MEPID, which would indicate a duplicate MEP
or network loop. If these error types are not found, the CCM is stored in the
MEP’s local database until aged out.
◆ If a maintenance point fails to receive three consecutive CCMs from any other
MEP in the same MA, a connectivity failure is registered.
– 788 –
◆ If a maintenance point receives a CCM with an invalid MEPID or MA level or an

MA level lower than its own, a failure is registered which indicates a
configuration error or cross-connect error (i.e., overlapping MAs).
Example
This example enables continuity check messages for the specified maintenance
association.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm cc enable md voip ma rd

Console(config)#
snmp-server enable This command enables SNMP traps for CFM continuity check events. Use the no
traps ethernet cfm cc form to disable these traps.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm cc [config | loop | mep-down |
mep-up]
config – Sends a trap if this device receives a CCM with the same MPID as its
own but with a different source MAC address, indicating that a CFM
configuration error exists.
loop – Sends a trap if this device receives a CCM with the same source MAC
address and MPID as its own, indicating that a forwarding loop exists.
mep-down – Sends a trap if this device loses connectivity with a remote
MEP, or connectivity has been restored to a remote MEP which has
recovered from an error condition.
mep-up – Sends a trap if a remote MEP is discovered and added to the local
database, the port state of a previously discovered remote MEP changes, or
a CCM is received from a remote MEP which as an expired entry in the
archived database.
Default Setting
All continuity checks are enabled.
Command Mode
Command Usage
All mep-up traps are suppressed when cross-checking of MEPs is enabled because
cross-check traps include more detailed status information.
– 789 –
Example
This example enables SNMP traps for mep-up events.
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm cc mep-up

Console(config)#
Related Commands
ethernet cfm mep crosscheck (795)
mep archive-hold- This command sets the time that data from a missing MEP is retained in the
time continuity check message (CCM) database before being purged. Use the no form to
Syntax
mep archive-hold-time hold-time
hold-time – The time to retain data for a missing MEP.
Default Setting
100 minutes
Command Mode
Command Usage
A change to the hold time only applies to entries stored in the database after this
command is entered.
Example
This example sets the aging time for missing MEPs in the CCM database to 30
minutes.

Console(config-ether-cfm)#mep archive-hold-time 30
clear ethernet cfm This command clears the contents of the continuity check database.
maintenance-points
remote Syntax
clear ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote [domain domain-name |
level level-id]
level-id – Maintenance level. (Range: 0-7)
– 790 –
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Use this command without any keywords to clear all entries in the CCM database.
Use the domain keyword to clear the CCM database for a specific domain, or the
level keyword to clear it for a specific maintenance level.
Example
Console#clear ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote domain voip
Console#
clear ethernet cfm This command clears continuity check errors logged for the specified maintenance
errors domain or maintenance level.
Syntax
clear ethernet cfm errors [domain domain-name | level level-id]
level-id – Maintenance level. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Use this command without any keywords to clear all entries in the error database.
Use the domain keyword to clear the error database for a specific domain, or the
level keyword to clear it for a specific maintenance level.
Example
Console#clear ethernet cfm errors domain voip
Console#
– 791 –
show ethernet cfm This command displays the CFM continuity check errors logged on this device.
errors
Syntax
show ethernet cfm errors [domain domain-name | level level-id]
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ethernet cfm errors
Level VLAN MPID Interface Remote MAC Reason MA Name
----- ---- ---- --------- ----------------- ---------------- ----------------
5 2 40 Eth 1/1 ab.2f.9c.00.05.01 LEAK provider_1_2
Console#
Table 155: show ethernet cfm errors - display description

Field Description
Level Maintenance level associated with this entry.
VLAN VLAN in which this error occurred.
MPID Identifier of remote MEP.
Interface Port at which the error was recorded
Remote MAC MAC address of remote MEP.

Reason Error types include:
LEAK – MA x is associated with a specific VID list*, one or more of the VIDs
in this MA can pass through the bridge port, no MEP is configured facing
outward (down) on any bridge port for this MA, and some other MA y, at a
higher maintenance level, and associated with at least one of the VID(s)
also in MA x, does have a MEP configured on the bridge port.
VIDS – MA x is associated with a specific VID list* on this MA on the bridge
port, and some other MA y, associated with at least one of the VID(s) also
in MA x, also has an Up MEP configured facing inward (up) on some bridge
port.
EXCESS_LEV – The number of different MD levels at which MIPs are to be
created on this port exceeds the bridge's capabilities.
OVERLAP_LEV – A MEP is created for one VID at one maintenance level,
but a MEP is configured on another VID at an equivalent or higher level,
exceeding the bridge's capabilities.
MA The maintenance association for this entry.

* This definition is based on the IEEE 802.1ag standard. Current software for this switch only supports a single
VLAN per MA. However, since it may interact with other devices which support multiple VLAN assignments per
MA, this error message may be reported.
– 792 –
ethernet cfm mep This command sets the maximum delay that a device waits for remote MEPs to
crosscheck start-delay come up before starting the cross-check operation. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
ethernet cfm mep crosscheck start-delay delay
delay – The time a device waits for remote MEPs to come up before the
cross-check is started. (Range: 1-65535 seconds)
Default Setting
30 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command sets the delay that a device waits for a remote MEP to come up,
and it starts cross-checking the list of statically configure remote MEPs in the
local maintenance domain against the MEPs learned through CCMs.
◆ The cross-check start delay should be configured to a value greater than or

equal to the continuity check message interval to avoid generating
unnecessary traps.
Example
This example sets the maximum delay before starting the cross-check process.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm mep crosscheck start-delay 60

Console(config)#
snmp-server enable This command enables SNMP traps for CFM continuity check events, in relation to
traps ethernet cfm the cross-check operations between statically configured MEPs and those learned
crosscheck via continuity check messages (CCMs). Use the no form to restore disable these
traps.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm crosscheck [ma-up |
mep-missing | mep-unknown]
ma-up – Sends a trap when all remote MEPs in an MA come up.
mep-missing – Sends a trap if the cross-check timer expires and no CCMs
have been received from a remote MEP configured in the static list.
mep-unknown – Sends a trap if an unconfigured MEP comes up.
– 793 –
Default Setting
All continuity checks are enabled.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ For this trap type to function, cross-checking must be enabled on the required
maintenance associations using the ethernet cfm mep crosscheck command.
◆ A mep-missing trap is sent if cross-checking is enabled (with the ethernet cfm

mep crosscheck command), and no CCM is received for a remote MEP
configured in the static list (with the mep crosscheck mpid command).
◆ A mep-unknown trap is sent if cross-checking is enabled, and a CCM is received

from a remote MEP that is not configured in the static list.
◆ A ma-up trap is sent if cross-checking is enabled, and a CCM is received from all
remote MEPs configured in the static list for this maintenance association.
Example
This example enables SNMP traps for mep-unknown events detected in cross-
check operations.
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm crosscheck mep-unknown

Console(config)#
mep crosscheck mpid This command statically defines a remote MEP in a maintenance association. Use
the no form to remove a remote MEP.
Syntax
[no] mep crosscheck mpid mpid ma ma-name
mpid – Identifier for a maintenance end point which exists on another CFM-
enabled device within the same MA. (Range: 1-8191)
characters)
Default Setting
No remote MEPs are configured.
Command Mode
– 794 –
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to statically configure remote MEPs that exist inside the
maintenance association. These remote MEPs are used in the cross-check
operation to verify that all endpoints in the specified MA are operational.
◆ Remote MEPs can only be configured with this command if domain service
access points (DSAPs) have already been created with the ethernet cfm mep
command at the same maintenance level and in the same MA. DSAPs are MEPs
that exist on the edge of the domain, and act as primary service access points
for end-to-end cross-check, loop-back, and link-trace functions.
Example
This example defines a static MEP for the specified maintenance association.

Console(config-ether-cfm)#ma index 1 name rd vlan 1
Console(config-ether-cfm)#mep crosscheck mpid 2 ma rd
ethernet cfm mep This command enables cross-checking between the static list of MEPs assigned to
crosscheck other devices within the same maintenance association and the MEPs learned
through continuity check messages (CCMs). Use the disable keyword to stop the
cross-check process.
Syntax
ethernet cfm mep crosscheck {enable | disable} md domain-name
ma ma-name
enable – Starts the cross-check process.
disable – Stops the cross-check process.
ma-name – MA name. (Range: 1-43 alphanumeric characters)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Before using this command to start the cross-check process, first configure the
remote MEPs that exist on other devices inside the maintenance association
using the mep crosscheck mpid command. These remote MEPs are used in the
cross-check operation to verify that all endpoints in the specified MA are
operational.
– 795 –
◆ The cross-check process is disabled by default, and must be manually started

using this command with the enable keyword.
Example
This example enables cross-checking within the specified maintenance association.
Console#ethernet cfm mep crosscheck enable md voip ma rd

Console#
show ethernet cfm This command displays information about remote MEPs statically configured in a
maintenance-points cross-check list.
remote crosscheck
Syntax
show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote crosscheck
[domain domain-name | mpid mpid]
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows all remote MEPs statically configured on this device.
Console#show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote crosscheck

MPID MA Name Level VLAN MEP Up Remote MAC
---- -------------------- ----- ---- ------ ------------------
2 downtown 4 2 Yes 00-0D-54-FC-A2-73
Console#
ethernet cfm linktrace This command enables caching of CFM data learned through link trace messages.
cache Use the no form to disable caching.
Syntax
[no] ethernet cfm linktrace cache
Default Setting
Enabled
– 796 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A link trace message is a multicast CFM frame initiated by a MEP, and forwarded
from MIP to MIP, with each MIP generating a link trace reply, up to the point at
which the link trace message reaches its destination or can no longer be
forwarded.
◆ Use this command to enable the link trace cache to store the results of link
trace operations initiated on this device. Use the ethernet cfm linktrace
command to transmit a link trace message.
◆ Link trace responses are returned from each MIP along the path and from the
target MEP. Information stored in the cache includes the maintenance domain
name, MA name, MEPID, sequence number, and TTL value.
Example
This example enables link trace caching.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm linktrace cache

Console(config)#
ethernet cfm linktrace This command sets the hold time for CFM link trace cache entries. Use the no form
cache hold-time to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ethernet cfm linktrace cache hold-time minutes
minutes – The aging time for entries stored in the link trace cache.
Default Setting
100 minutes
Command Mode
Command Usage
Before setting the aging time for cache entries, the cache must first be enabled
with the ethernet cfm linktrace cache command.
– 797 –
Example
This example sets the aging time for entries in the link trace cache to 60 minutes.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm linktrace cache hold-time 60

Console(config)#
ethernet cfm linktrace This command sets the maximum size for the link trace cache. Use the no form to
cache size restore the default setting.
Syntax
ethernet cfm linktrace cache size entries
entries – The number of link trace responses stored in the link trace cache.
(Range: 1-4095 entries)
Default Setting
100 entries
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Before setting the cache size, the cache must first be enabled with the ethernet
cfm linktrace cache command.
◆ If the cache reaches the maximum number of specified entries, or the size is set
to a value less than the current number of stored entries, no new entries are
added. To add additional entries, the cache size must first be increased with this
command, or purged with the clear ethernet cfm linktrace-cache command.
Example
This example limits the maximum size of the link trace cache to 500 entries.
Console(config)#ethernet cfm linktrace cache size 500

Console(config)#
ethernet cfm linktrace This command sends CFM link trace messages to the MAC address of a remote MEP.
Syntax
ethernet cfm linktrace {dest-mep destination-mpid | src-mep source-mpid
{dest-mep destination-mpid | mac-address} | mac-address} md domain-name
ma ma-name [ttl number]
destination-mpid – The identifier of a remote MEP that is the target of the
link trace message. (Range: 1-8191)
– 798 –
source-mpid – The identifier of a source MEP that will send the link trace
message. (Range: 1-8191)
mac-address – MAC address of a remote MEP that is the target of the link
trace message. This address can be entered in either of the following
formats: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx
characters)
number – The time to live of the linktrace message. (Range: 0-255 hops)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Link trace messages can be targeted to MEPs, not MIPs. Before sending a link
trace message, be sure you have configured the target MEP for the specified
MA.
◆ If the MAC address of target MEP has not been learned by any local MEP, then
the linktrace may fail. Use the show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote
crosscheck command to verify that a MAC address has been learned for the
target MEP.
◆ Link trace messages (LTMs) are sent as multicast CFM frames, and forwarded
from MIP to MIP, with each MIP generating a link trace reply, up to the point at
which the LTM reaches its destination or can no longer be forwarded.
◆ Link trace messages are used to isolate faults. However, this task can be difficult
in an Ethernet environment, since each node is connected through multipoint
links. Fault isolation is even more challenging since the MAC address of the
target node can age out in several minutes. This can cause the traced path to
vary over time, or connectivity lost if faults cause the target MEP to be isolated
from other MEPs in an MA.
◆ When using the command line or web interface, the source MEP used by to
send a link trace message is chosen by the CFM protocol. However, when using
SNMP, the source MEP can be specified by the user.
Example
This example sends a link trace message to the specified MEP with a maximum hop
count of 25.
Console#linktrace ethernet dest-mep 2 md voip ma rd ttl 25

Console#
– 799 –
clear ethernet cfm This command clears link trace messages logged on this device.
linktrace-cache
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear ethernet cfm linktrace-cache
Console#
show ethernet cfm This command displays the contents of the link trace cache.
linktrace-cache
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache
Hops MA IP / Alias Ingress MAC Ing. Action Relay
Forwarded Egress MAC Egr. Action
---- -------------- ----------------------- ----------------- ----------- -----
2 rd 192.168.0.6 00-12-CF-12-12-2D ingOk Hit
Not Forwarded
Console#
Table 156: show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache - display description

Field Description
Hops The number hops taken to reach the target MEP.
MA Name of the MA to which this device belongs.
IP/Alias IP address or alias of the target device’s CPU.
Forwarded Shows whether or not this link trace message was forwarded. A message
is not forwarded if received by the target MEP.
Ingress MAC MAC address of the ingress port on the target device.
Egress MAC MAC address of the egress port on the target device.
Ing. Action Action taken on the ingress port:

IngOk – The target data frame passed through to the MAC Relay Entity.
IngDown – The bridge port’s MAC_Operational parameter is false. This
value could be returned, for example, by an operationally Down MEP that
has another Down MEP at a higher MD level on the same bridge port that
is causing the bridge port’s MAC_Operational parameter to be false.
IngBlocked – The ingress port can be identified, but the target data frame
was not forwarded when received on this port due to active topology
management, i.e., the bridge port is not in the forwarding state.
IngVid – The ingress port is not in the member set of the LTM’s VIDs, and
ingress filtering is enabled, so the target data frame was filtered by ingress
filtering.
– 800 –
Loopback Operations
Table 156: show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache - display description (Continued)

Field Description
Egr. Action Action taken on the egress port:

EgrOk – The targeted data frame was forwarded.
EgrDown – The Egress Port can be identified, but that bridge port’s
MAC_Operational parameter is false.
EgrBlocked – The egress port can be identified, but the data frame was not
passed through the egress port due to active topology management, i.e.,
the bridge port is not in the forwarding state.
EgrVid – The Egress Port can be identified, but the bridge port is not in the
LTM’s VID member set, and was therefore filtered by egress filtering.
Relay Relay action:

FDB – Target address found in forwarding database.
MPDB – Target address found in the maintenance point database.
HIT – Target located on this device.
Loopback Operations
ethernet cfm This command sends CFM loopback messages to a MAC address for a MEP or MIP.
loopback
Syntax
ethernet cfm loopback {dest-mep destination-mpid | src-mep source-mpid
{dest-mep destination-mpid | mac-address} | mac-address} md domain-name
ma ma-name [count transmit-count] [size packet-size]
destination-mpid – The identifier of a MEP that is the target of the loopback
source-mpid – The identifier of a source MEP that will send the loopback
mac-address – MAC address of the remote maintenance point that is the
target of the loopback message. This address can be entered in either of
the following formats: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx
characters)
transmit-count – The number of times the loopback message is sent.
(Range: 1-1024)
packet-size – The size of the loopback message. (Range: 64-1518 bytes)
Default Setting
Loop back count: One loopback message is sent.
Loop back size: 64 bytes
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 801 –
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to test the connectivity between maintenance points. If the
continuity check database does not have an entry for the specified
maintenance point, an error message will be displayed.
◆ The point from which the loopback message is transmitted (i.e., the DSAP) and
the target maintenance point specified in this command must be within the
same MA.
◆ Loop back messages can be used for fault verification and isolation after
automatic detection of a fault or receipt of some other error report. Loopback
messages can also used to confirm the successful restoration or initiation of
connectivity. The receiving maintenance point should respond to the loop back
message with a loopback reply.
◆ When using the command line or web interface, the source MEP used by to
send a loopback message is chosen by the CFM protocol. However, when using
SNMP, the source MEP can be specified by the user.
Example
This example sends a loopback message to the specified remote MEP.
Console#ethernet cfm loopback dest-mep 1 md voip ma rd

Console#
mep fault-notify This command sets the time a defect must exist before a fault alarm is issued. Use
alarm-time the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
mep fault-notify alarm-time alarm-time
no fault-notify alarm-time
alarm-time – The time that one or more defects must be present before a
fault alarm is generated. (Range: 3-10 seconds)
Default Setting
3 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
A fault alarm is issued when the MEP fault notification generator state machine
detects that a time period configured by this command has passed with one or
more defects indicated, and fault alarms are enabled at or above the priority level
– 802 –
set by the mep fault-notify lowest-priority command.
Example
This example set the delay time before generating a fault alarm.

Console(config-ether-cfm)#mep fault-notify alarm-time 10
mep fault-notify This command sets the lowest priority defect that is allowed to generate a fault
lowest-priority alarm. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
mep fault-notify lowest-priority priority
no fault-notify lowest-priority
priority – Lowest priority default allowed to generate a fault alarm.
(Range: 1-6)
Default Setting
Priority level 2
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ A fault alarm can generate an SNMP notification. It is issued when the MEP fault
notification generator state machine detects that a configured time period (see
the mep fault-notify alarm-time command) has passed with one or more
defects indicated, and fault alarms are enabled at or above the priority level set
by this command. The state machine transmits no further fault alarms until it is
reset by the passage of a configured time period (see the mep fault-notify
reset-time command) without a defect indication. The normal procedure upon
receiving a fault alarm is to inspect the reporting MEP’s managed objects using
an appropriate SNMP software tool, diagnose the fault, correct it, re-examine
the MEP’s managed objects to see whether the MEP fault notification generator
state machine has been reset, and repeat those steps until the fault is resolved.
◆ Only the highest priority defect currently detected is reported in the fault
alarm.
– 803 –
◆ Priority defects include the following items:
Table 157: Remote MEP Priority Levels

Priority Level Level Name Description
1 allDef All defects.
2 macRemErrXcon DefMACstatus, DefRemoteCCM, DefErrorCCM, or

DefXconCCM.
3 remErrXcon DefErrorCCM, DefXconCCM or DefRemoteCCM.
4 errXcon DefErrorCCM or DefXconCCM.
5 xcon DefXconCCM
6 noXcon No defects DefXconCCM or lower are to be reported.
Table 158: MEP Defect Descriptions

Field Description
DefMACstatus Either some remote MEP is reporting its Interface Status TLV as not
isUp, or all remote MEPs are reporting a Port Status TLV that contains
some value other than psUp.
DefRemoteCCM The MEP is not receiving valid CCMs from at least one of the remote
MEPs.
DefErrorCCM The MEP has received at least one invalid CCM whose CCM Interval has
not yet timed out.
DefXconCCM The MEP has received at least one CCM from either another MAID or a
lower MD Level whose CCM Interval has not yet timed out.
Example
This example sets the lowest priority defect that will generate a fault alarm.

Console(config-ether-cfm)#mep fault-notify lowest-priority 1
mep fault-notify This command configures the time after a fault alarm has been issued, and no
reset-time defect exists, before another fault alarm can be issued. Use the no form to restore
Syntax
mep fault-notify reset-time reset-time
no fault-notify reset-time
reset-time – The time that must pass without any further defects indicated
before another fault alarm can be generated. (Range: 3-10 seconds)
– 804 –
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Example
This example sets the reset time after which another fault alarm can be generated.

Console(config-ether-cfm)#mep fault-notify reset-time 7
show ethernet cfm This command displays configuration settings for the fault notification generator.
fault-notify-generator
Syntax
show ethernet cfm fault-notify-generator mep mpid
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows the fault notification settings configured for one MEP.
Console#show ethernet cfm fault-notify-generator mep 1

MD Name MA Name Highest Defect Lowest Alarm Alarm Time Reset Time
------------ ------------ -------------- ------------- ---------- ----------
voip rd none macRemErrXcon 3sec. 10sec.
Console#
Table 159: show fault-notify-generator - display description

Field Description
MD Name The maintenance domain for this entry.
MA Name The maintenance association for this entry.
Hihest Defect The highest defect that will generate a fault alarm. (This is disabled by
default.)
Lowest Alarm The lowest defect that will generate a fault alarm (see the mep fault-notify
lowest-priority command).
– 805 –
Table 159: show fault-notify-generator - display description (Continued)

Field Description
Alarm Time The time a defect must exist before a fault alarm is issued (see the mep
fault-notify alarm-time, command).
Reset Time The time after a fault alarm has been issued, and no defect exists, before
another fault alarm can be issued (see the mep fault-notify reset-time
command).
ethernet cfm delay- This command sends periodic delay-measure requests to a specified MEP within a
measure two-way maintenance association.
Syntax
ethernet cfm delay-measure two-way [src-mep source-mpid] {dest-mep
destination-mpid | mac-address} md domain-name ma ma-name
[count transmit-count] [interval interval] [size packet-size] [timeout timeout]
source-mpid – The identifier of a source MEP that will send the delay-
measure message. (Range: 1-8191)
destination-mpid – The identifier of a remote MEP that is the target of the
delay-measure message. (Range: 1-8191)
mac-address – MAC address of a remote MEP that is the target of the delay-
measure message. This address can be entered in either of the following
formats: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or xxxxxxxxxxxx
characters)
count – The number of times to retry sending the message if no response is
received before the specified timeout. (Range: 1-5)
interval – The transmission delay between delay-measure messages.
packet-size – The size of the delay-measure message. (Range: 64-1518
bytes)
timeout - The timeout to wait for a response. (Range: 1-5 seconds)
Default Setting
Count: 5
Interval: 1 second
Size: 64 bytes
Timeout: 5 seconds
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 806 –
Command Usage
◆ Delay measurement can be used to measure frame delay and frame delay
variation between MEPs.
◆ A local MEP must be configured for the same MA before you can use this
command.
◆ If a MEP is enabled to generate frames with delay measurement (DM)

information, it periodically sends DM frames to its peer MEP in the same MA.,
and expects to receive DM frames back from it.
◆ Frame delay measurement can be made only for two-way measurements,

where the MEP transmits a frame with DM request information with the
TxTimeStampf (Timestamp at the time of sending a frame with DM request
information), and the receiving MEP responds with a frame with DM reply
information with TxTimeStampf copied from the DM request information,
RxTimeStampf (Timestamp at the time of receiving a frame with DM request
information), and TxTimeStampb (Timestamp at the time of transmitting a
frame with DM reply information):
Frame Delay=(RxTimeStampb-TxTimeStampf )-(TxTimeStampb-RxTimeStampf )
◆ The MEP can also make two-way frame delay variation measurements based on
its ability to calculate the difference between two subsequent two-way frame
delay measurements.
Example
This example sends periodic delay-measure requests to a remote MEP.
Console#ethernet cfm delay-measure two-way dest-mep 1 md voip ma rd

Type ESC to abort.
Sending 5 Ethernet CFM delay measurement message, timeout is 5 sec.
Sequence Delay Time (ms.) Delay Variation (ms.)
-------- ---------------- ---------------------
1 < 10 0
2 < 10 0
3 < 10 0
4 40 40
5 < 10 40
Success rate is 100% (5/5), delay time min/avg/max=0/8/40 ms.
Average frame delay variation is 16 ms.
Console#
– 807 –
– 808 –
27 OAM Commands
The switch provides OAM (Operation, Administration, and Maintenance) remote

management tools required to monitor and maintain the links to subscriber CPEs
(Customer Premise Equipment). This section describes functions including
enabling OAM for selected ports, loop back testing, and displaying device
information.
Table 160: OAM Commands

efm oam Enables OAM services IC
efm oam critical-link-event Enables reporting of critical event or dying gasp IC
efm oam Enables reporting of errored frame link events IC

link-monitor frame
efm oam link-monitor Sets the threshold for errored frame link events IC
frame threshold
efm oam link-monitor Sets the monitor period for errored frame link events IC
frame window
efm oam mode Sets the OAM operational mode to active or passive IC
clear efm oam counters Clears statistical counters for various OAMPDU message PE
types
clear efm oam event-log Clears all entries from the OAM event log for the specified PE
port
efm oam remote-loopback Initiates or terminates remote loopback test PE
efm oam remote-loopback Performs remote loopback test, sending a specified PE

test number of packets
show efm oam counters Displays counters for various OAM PDU message types NE,PE
interface
show efm oam event-log Displays OAM event log NE,PE

interface
show efm oam remote- Displays results of OAM remote loopback test NE,PE
loopback interface
show efm oam Displays OAM configuration settings and event counters NE,PE
status interface
show efm oam status Displays information about attached OAM-enabled NE,PE
remote interface devices
– 809 –
Chapter 27 | OAM Commands
efm oam This command enables OAM functions on the specified port. Use the no form to
Syntax
[no] efm oam
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If the remote device also supports OAM, both exchange Information OAMPDUs
to establish an OAM link.
◆ Not all CPEs support OAM functions, and OAM is therefore disabled by default.
If the CPE attached to a port supports OAM, then this functionality must first be
enabled by the efm oam command to gain access to other remote
configuration functions.
Example
Console(config-if)#efm oam
Console(config-if)#
efm oam This command enables reporting of critical event or dying gasp. Use the no form to
critical-link-event disable this function.
Syntax
[no] efm oam critical-link-event {critical-event | dying-gasp}
critical-event - If a critical event occurs, the local OAM entity (this switch)
indicates this to its peer by setting the appropriate flag in the next
OAMPDU to be sent and stores this information in its OAM event log.
dying-gasp - If an unrecoverable condition occurs, the local OAM entity
indicates this by immediately sending a trap message.
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
– 810 –
Command Usage
◆ Critical events are vendor-specific and may include various failures, such as
abnormal voltage fluctuations, out-of-range temperature detected, fan failure,
CRC error in flash memory, insufficient memory, or other hardware faults.
◆ Dying gasp events are caused by an unrecoverable failure, such as a power

failure or device reset.
Note: When system power fails, the switch will always send a dying gasp trap
message prior to power down.
Example
Console(config-if)#efm oam critical-link-event dying-gasp
Console(config-if)#
efm oam This command enables reporting of errored frame link events. Use the no form to
link-monitor frame disable this function.
Syntax
[no] efm oam link-monitor frame
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ An errored frame is a frame in which one or more bits are errored.
◆ If this feature is enabled and an errored frame link event occurs, the local OAM
entity (this switch) sends an Event Notification OAMPDU.
Example
Console(config-if)#efm oam link-monitor frame
Console(config-if)#
– 811 –
efm oam link-monitor This command sets the threshold for errored frame link events. Use the no form to
frame threshold restore the default setting.
Syntax
efm oam link-monitor frame threshold count
no efm oam link-monitor frame threshold
count - The threshold for errored frame link events. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
1
Command Mode
Command Usage
If this feature is enabled, an event notification message is sent if the threshold is
reached or exceeded within the period specified by the efm oam link-monitor
frame window command. The Errored Frame Event TLV includes the number of
errored frames detected during the specified period.
Example
Console(config-if)#efm oam link-monitor frame threshold 5
Console(config-if)#
efm oam link-monitor This command sets the monitor period for errored frame link events. Use the no
frame window form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
efm oam link-monitor frame window size
no efm oam link-monitor frame window
size - The period of time in which to check the reporting threshold for
errored frame link events. (Range: 10-65535 units of 10 milliseconds)
Default Setting
10 (units of 100 milliseconds) = 1 second
Command Mode
Command Usage
If this feature is enabled, an event notification message is sent if the threshold
specified by the efm oam link-monitor frame threshold command is reached or
– 812 –
exceeded within the period specified by this command. The Errored Frame Event
TLV includes the number of errored frames detected during the specified period.
Example
This example set the window size to 5 seconds.

Console(config-if)#efm oam link-monitor frame window 50
Console(config-if)#
efm oam mode This command sets the OAM mode on the specified port. Use the no form to
Syntax
efm oam mode {active | passive}
no efm oam mode
active - All OAM functions are enabled.
passive - All OAM functions are enabled, except for OAM discovery, and
sending loopback control OAMPDUs.
Default Setting
Active
Command Mode
Command Usage
When set to active mode, the selected interface will initiate the OAM discovery
process. When in passive mode, it can only respond to discovery messages.
Example
Console(config-if)#efm oam mode active
Console(config-if)#
– 813 –
clear efm oam This command clears statistical counters for various OAMPDU message types.
counters
Syntax
clear efm oam counters [interface-list]
interface-list - unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear efm oam counters
Console#
Related Commands
show efm oam counters interface (817)
clear efm oam This command clears all entries from the OAM event log for the specified port.
event-log
Syntax
clear efm oam event-log [interface-list]
port - Port number or list of ports. To enter a list, separate nonconsecutive
port identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a
range of ports. (Range: 1-28/52)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear efm oam event-log
Console#
– 814 –
efm oam This command starts or stops OAM loopback test mode to the attached CPE.
remote-loopback
Syntax
efm oam remote-loopback {start | stop} interface
start - Starts remote loopback test mode.
stop - Stops remote loopback test mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ OAM remote loop back can be used for fault localization and link performance
testing. Statistics from both the local and remote DTE can be queried and
compared at any time during loop back testing.
◆ Use the efm oam remote-loopback start command to start OAM remote loop
back test mode on the specified port. Afterwards, use the efm oam remote-
loopback test command to start sending test packets. Then use the efm oam
remote loopback stop command to terminate testing (if test packets are still
being sent) and to terminate loop back test mode.
◆ The port that you specify to run this test must be connected to a peer OAM
device capable of entering into OAM remote loopback mode.
◆ During a remote loopback test, the remote OAM entity loops back every frame
except for OAMPDUs and pause frames.
◆ During loopback testing, both the switch and remote device are permitted to
send OAMPDUs to the peer device and to process any OAMPDUs received from
the peer.
Example
Console#efm oam remote-loopback start 1/1
Loopback operation is processing, please wait.
Enter loopback mode succeeded.
Console#
– 815 –
efm oam remote- This command performs a remote loopback test, sending a specified number of
loopback test packets.
Syntax
efm oam remote-loopback test interface [number-of-packets [packet-size]]
number-of-packets - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-99999999)
packet-size - Size of packets to send. (Range: 64-1518 bytes)
Default Setting
Number of packets: 10,000
Packet size: 64 bytes
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ You can use this command to perform an OAM remote loopback test on the
specified port. The port that you specify to run this test must be connected to a
peer OAM device capable of entering into OAM remote loopback mode.
◆ During a remote loopback test, the remote OAM entity loops back every frame
except for OAMPDUs and pause frames.
◆ OAM remote loopback can be used for fault localization and link performance
testing. Statistics from both the local and remote DTE can be queried and
compared at any time during loopback testing.
◆ A summary of the test is displayed after it is finished.
Example
Console#efm oam remote-loopback test 1/1
Loopback test is processing, press ESC to suspend.
....
Port OAM loopback Tx OAM loopback Rx Loss Rate
---- --------------- --------------- ---------
1/2 1990 1016 48.94 %
Console#
– 816 –
show efm oam This command displays counters for various OAM PDU message types.
counters interface
Syntax
show efm oam counters interface [interface-list]
Command Mode
Example
Console#show efm oam counters interface 1/1
Port OAMPDU Type TX RX
---- --------------------- ---------- ----------
1/1 Information 1121 1444
1/1 Event Notification 0 0
1/1 Loopback Control 1 0
1/1 Organization Specific 76 0
Console#
show efm oam This command displays the OAM event log for the specified port(s) or for all ports
event-log interface that have logs.
show efm oam event-log interface [interface-list]

Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When a link event occurs, no matter whether the location is local or remote, this
information is entered in the OAM event log.
◆ When the log system becomes full, older events are automatically deleted to
make room for new entries.
– 817 –
Example
Console#show efm oam event-log interface 1/1
OAM event log of Eth 1/1:
00:24:07 2001/01/01
"Unit 1, Port 1: Dying Gasp at Remote"
Console#
This command can show OAM link status changes for link partner as shown in this
example.

10:22:55 2013/09/13
"Unit 1, Port 1: Connection to remote device is up at Local"
10:22:44 2013/09/13
"Unit 1, Port 1: Connection to remote device is down at Local"
<--- When the link is down,this event will be written to OAM event-log
10:20:02 2013/09/13
<--- When the link is up,this event will be written to OAM event-log,
Console#clear efm oam event-log
<--- Use he "clear efm oam event-log” command to clear the event-log.
Console#
This command can show OAM dying gasp changes for link partner as shown in this
example.

<--- When dying gasp happens and the switch get these packets, it will log
this event in OAM event-log.
10:27:21 2013/09/13
"Unit 1, Port 1: Connection to remote device is down at Local"
10:27:20 2013/09/13
"Unit 1, Port 1: Dying Gasp occurred at Remote"
10:28:31 2013/09/13
10:28:28 2013/09/13
"Unit 1, Port 1: Dying Gasp clear occurred at Remote"
<--- When the remote device comes up, the switch will get OAM packets
without the dying gasp bit and display "dying gasp event clear".
Console#
– 818 –
show efm oam This command displays the results of an OAM remote loopback test.
remote-loopback
interface Syntax
show efm oam remote-loopback interface [interface-list]
Command Mode
Example
Console#show efm oam remote-loopback interface 1/1
Port OAM loopback Tx OAM loopback Rx Loss Rate
---- --------------- --------------- ---------
1/1 2300 2250 0.01 %
Console#
show efm oam This command displays OAM configuration settings and event counters.
status interface
Syntax
show efm oam status interface [interface-list] [brief ]
brief - Displays a brief list of OAM configuration states.
Command Mode
Example
Console#show efm oam status interface 1/1
OAM information of Eth 1/1:
Basic Information:
Admin State : Enabled
Operation State : Operational
Mode : Active
Remote Loopback : Disabled
Remote Loopback Status : No loopback
Dying Gasp : Enabled
Critical Event : Enabled
– 819 –
Link Monitor (Errored Frame) : Enabled

Link Monitor:
Errored Frame Window (100msec) : 10
Errored Frame Threshold : 1
Console#show efm oam status interface 1/1 brief
$ = local OAM in loopback
* = remote OAM in loopback
Port Admin Mode Remote Dying Critical Errored

State Loopback Gasp Event Frame
---- ------- ------- -------- ------- -------- -------
1/1 Enabled Active Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Console#
show efm oam status This command displays information about attached OAM-enabled devices.
remote interface
Syntax
show efm oam status remote interface [interface-list]
Command Mode
Example
Console#show efm oam status remote interface 1/1
Port MAC Address OUI Remote Unidirectional Link MIB Variable
Loopback Monitor Retrieval
---- ----------------- ------ -------- -------------- ------- ------------
1/1 00-12-CF-6A-07-F6 000084 Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled
Console#
– 820 –
28 Domain Name Service
Commands
These commands are used to configure Domain Naming System (DNS) services.
Entries can be manually configured in the DNS domain name to IP address
mapping table, default domain names configured, or one or more name servers
specified to use for domain name to address translation.
Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server
is specified with the ip name-server command and domain lookup is enabled with
the ip domain-lookup command.
Table 161: Address Table Commands

ip domain-list Defines a list of default domain names for incomplete host GC

names
ip domain-lookup Enables DNS-based host name-to-address translation GC
ip domain-name Defines a default domain name for incomplete host names GC
ip host Creates a static IPv4 host name-to-address mapping GC
ip name-server Specifies the address of one or more name servers to use for GC
host name-to-address translation
ipv6 host Creates a static IPv6 host name-to-address mapping GC
clear dns cache Clears all entries from the DNS cache PE
clear host Deletes entries from the host name-to-address table PE
show dns Displays the configuration for DNS services PE
show dns cache Displays entries in the DNS cache PE
show hosts Displays the static host name-to-address mapping table PE
ip domain-list This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete
host names (i.e., host names passed from a client that are not formatted with
dotted notation). Use the no form to remove a name from this list.
Syntax
[no] ip domain-list name
name - Name of the host. Do not include the initial dot that separates the
host name from the domain name. (Range: 1-127 characters)
Default Setting
None
– 821 –
Chapter 28 | Domain Name Service Commands
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Domain names are added to the end of the list one at a time.
◆ When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch, it
will work through the domain list, appending each domain name in the list to
the host name, and checking with the specified name servers for a match.
◆ If there is no domain list, the domain name specified with the ip domain-name
command is used. If there is a domain list, the default domain name is not used.
Example
This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list.
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.jp

Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.uk
Console(config)#end
Console#show dns
Domain Lookup Status:
DNS Disabled
Default Domain Name:
sample.com
Domain Name List:
sample.com.jp
sample.com.uk
Name Server List:
Console#
Related Commands
ip domain-name (823)
ip domain-lookup This command enables DNS host name-to-address translation. Use the no form to
disable DNS.
Syntax
[no] ip domain-lookup
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ At least one name server must be specified before DNS can be enabled.
◆ If all name servers are deleted, DNS will automatically be disabled.
– 822 –
Example
This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration.
Console(config)#ip domain-lookup
Console(config)#end
Console#show dns
DNS Enabled
sample.com
Domain Name List:
sample.com.jp
sample.com.uk
Name Server List:
192.168.1.55
10.1.0.55
Console#
Related Commands
ip name-server (824)
ip domain-name This command defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host
names (i.e., host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted
notation). Use the no form to remove the current domain name.
Syntax
ip domain-name name
no ip domain-name
name - Name of the host. Do not include the initial dot that separates the
host name from the domain name. (Range: 1-127 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ip domain-name sample.com
Console(config)#end
Console#show dns
DNS Disabled
sample.com
Domain Name List:
Name Server List:
Console#
– 823 –
Related Commands
ip domain-list (821)
ip name-server (824)
ip domain-lookup (822)
ip host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an
IPv4 address. Use the no form to remove an entry.
Syntax
[no] ip host name address
name - Name of an IPv4 host. (Range: 1-100 characters)
address - Corresponding IPv4 address.
Default Setting
No static entries
Command Mode
Command Usage
Use the no ip host command to clear static entries, or the clear host command to
clear dynamic entries.
Example
This example maps an IPv4 address to a host name.
Console(config)#ip host rd5 192.168.1.55

Console(config)#end
Console#show hosts
No. Flag Type IP Address TTL Domain
---- ---- ------- -------------------- ----- ------------------------------
0 2 Address 192.168.1.55 rd5
Console#
ip name-server This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for
name-to-address resolution. Use the no form to remove a name server from this
list.
Syntax
[no] ip name-server server-address1 [server-address2 …
server-address6]
server-address1 - IPv4 or IPv6 address of domain-name server.
server-address2 … server-address6 - IPv4 or IPv6 address of additional
domain-name servers.
– 824 –
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is
received, or the end of the list is reached with no response.
Example
This example adds two domain-name servers to the list and then displays the list.
Console(config)#ip name-server 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55

Console(config)#end
Console#show dns
DNS disabled
sample.com
Domain Name List:
sample.com.jp
sample.com.uk
Name Server List:
192.168.1.55
10.1.0.55
Console#
Related Commands
ip domain-lookup (822)
ipv6 host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an
IPv6 address. Use the no form to remove an entry.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 host name ipv6-address
name - Name of an IPv6 host. (Range: 1-100 characters)
undefined fields.
Default Setting
No static entries
– 825 –
Command Mode
Example
This example maps an IPv6 address to a host name.
Console(config)#ipv6 host rd6 2001:0db8:1::12

Console(config)#end
Console#show hosts
---- ---- ------- -------------------- ----- -------------------------------
0 2 Address 192.168.1.55 rd5
1 2 Address 2001:DB8:1::12 rd6
Console#
clear dns cache This command clears all entries in the DNS cache.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear dns cache
Console#show dns cache
------- ------- ------- --------------- ------- --------
Console#
clear host This command deletes dynamic entries from the DNS table.
Syntax
clear host {name | *}
name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-100 characters)
* - Removes all entries.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Use the clear host command to clear dynamic entries, or the no ip host command
to clear static entries.
– 826 –
Example
This example clears all dynamic entries from the DNS table.
Console(config)#clear host *
Console(config)#
show dns This command displays the configuration of the DNS service.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show dns
DNS enabled
sample.com
Domain Name List:
sample.com.jp
sample.com.uk
Name Server List:
192.168.1.55
10.1.0.55
Console#
show dns cache This command displays entries in the DNS cache.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show dns cache
No. Flag Type IP Address TTL Host
------- ------- ------- --------------- ------- --------
3 4 Host 209.131.36.158 115 www-real.wa1.b.yahoo.com
4 4 CNAME POINTER TO:3 115 www.yahoo.com
5 4 CNAME POINTER TO:3 115 www.wa1.b.yahoo.com
Console#
Table 162: show dns cache - display description

Field Description
No. The entry number for each resource record.
Flag The flag is always “4” indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable.
Type This field includes “Host” which specifies the primary name for the owner, and
“CNAME” which specifies multiple domain names (or aliases) which are
mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry.
– 827 –
Table 162: show dns cache - display description (Continued)

Field Description
IP Address The IP address associated with this record.
TTL The time to live reported by the name server.
Host The host name associated with this record.
show hosts This command displays the static host name-to-address mapping table.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same
address(es) as a previously configured entry.
Console#show hosts
---- ---- ------- -------------------- ----- -------------------------------
0 2 Address 192.168.1.55 rd5
1 2 Address 2001:DB8:1::12 rd6
3 4 Address 209.131.36.158 65 www-real.wa1.b.yahoo.com
4 4 CNAME POINTER TO:3 65 www.yahoo.com
5 4 CNAME POINTER TO:3 65 www.wa1.b.yahoo.com
Console#
Table 163: show hosts - display description

Field Description
No. The entry number for each resource record.

Flag The field displays “2” for a static entry, or “4” for a dynamic entry stored in the
cache.
Type This field includes “Address” which specifies the primary name for the owner,
and “CNAME” which specifies multiple domain names (or aliases) which are
mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry.
IP Address The IP address associated with this record.
TTL The time to live reported by the name server. This field is always blank for static
entries.
Domain The domain name associated with this record.
– 828 –
29 DHCP Commands
These commands are used to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

(DHCP) client relay functions. Any VLAN interface on this switch can be configured
to automatically obtain an IP address through DHCP. This switch can also be
configured to relay DHCP client configuration requests to a DHCP server on another
network.
Table 164: DHCP Commands

DHCP Client Allows interfaces to dynamically acquire IP address information
DHCP Relay Relays DHCP requests from local hosts to a remote DHCP server
DHCP Client
Use the commands in this section to allow the switch’s VLAN interfaces to
dynamically acquire IP address information.
Table 165: DHCP Client Commands

DHCP for IPv4
ip dhcp dynamic-provision Enables dynamic provision via DHCP GC
ip dhcp client class-id Specifies the DHCP client identifier for an interface IC
ip dhcp restart client Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE
show ip dhcp Shows the status of dynamic provision via DHCP PE

dynamic-provision
DHCP for IPv6
ipv6 dhcp client Specifies the Rapid Commit option for DHCPv6 message GC
rapid-commit vlan exchange
ipv6 dhcp restart client vlan Submits a DHCPv6 client request PE
show ipv6 dhcp duid Shows the DHCP Unique Identifier for this switch PE
show ipv6 dhcp vlan Shows DHCPv6 information for specified interface PE
– 829 –
Chapter 29 | DHCP Commands
DHCP Client
DHCP for IPv4
ip dhcp This command enables dynamic provisioning via DHCP. Use the no form to disable
dynamic-provision this feature.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp dynamic-provision
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
DHCPD is the daemon used by Linux to dynamically configure TCP/IP information
for client systems. To support DHCP option 66/67, you have to add corresponding
statements to the configuration file of DHCPD. Information on how to complete
this process are described in “Downloading a Configuration File and Other
Parameters Provided by a DHCP Server” on page 71.
The following are some alternative commands which can be added to the DHCPD
to complete the dynamic provisioning process.
By default, the parameters for DHCP option 66/67 are not carried by the reply sent
from the DHCP server. To ask for a DHCP reply with option 66/67, the client can
inform the server that it is interested in option 66/67 by sending a DHCP request
that includes a 'parameter request list' option. Besides this, the client can also send
a DHCP request that includes a 'vendor class identifier' option to the server so that
the DHCP server can identify the device, and determine what information should
be given to requesting device.
The following are two additional sample configurations of the dhcpd.conf file for
the server version dhcp-3.0.4rc1, you can choose either one of them.
1. Define the conditions in subnet section:

shared-network Sample1 {
subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
# option 55
option dhcp-parameter-request-list 1,66,67;
# option 66
# option 67
option bootfile-name "dhcp_config.cfg ";
}
}
– 830 –
DHCP Client
2. Define the conditions in class section:

class "OPT66_67" { # for option 66/67
# option 124
match if option vendor-class-identifier = "SMC";
# option 55
option dhcp-parameter-request-list 1,66,67;
# option 66
# option 67
option bootfile-name "dhcp_config.cfg";
}
shared-network Sample2 {
subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
}
pool {
allow members of "OPT66_67";
range 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.20;
}
}
Example
In the following example enables dhcp dynamic provisioning.
Console(config)#ip dhcp dynamic provisioning

Console(config)#
ip dhcp client class-id This command specifies the DCHP client vendor class identifier for the current
interface. Use the no form to remove the class identifier from the DHCP packet.
Syntax
ip dhcp client class-id [text text | hex hex]
no ip dhcp client class-id
text - A text string. (Range: 1-32 characters)
hex - A hexadecimal value. (Range: 1-64 characters)
Default Setting
Class identifier option enabled, using the model number as the string
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN)
Command Usage
◆ Use this command without any keyword to restore the default setting.
– 831 –
DHCP Client
◆ This command is used to identify the vendor class and configuration of the
switch to the DHCP server, which then uses this information to decide on how
to service the client or the type of information to return.
◆ The general framework for this DHCP option is set out in RFC 2132 (Option 60).
This information is used to convey configuration settings or other identification
information about a client, but the specific string to use should be supplied by
your service provider or network administrator. Options 60, 66 and 67
statements can be added to the server daemon’s configuration file.
Table 166: Options 60, 66 and 67 Statements

Statement
Option
Keyword Parameter
66 tftp-server-name a string indicating the tftp server name
67 bootfile-name a string indicating the bootfile name
◆ By default, DHCP option 66/67 parameters are not carried in a DHCP server
reply. To ask for a DHCP reply with option 66/67 information, the DHCP client
request sent by this switch includes a “parameter request list” asking for this
information. Besides, the client request also includes a “vendor class identifier”
set by the ip dhcp client class-id command that allows the DHCP server to
identify the device, and select the appropriate configuration file for download.
This information is included in Option 55 and 124.
Table 167: Options 55 and 124 Statements

Statement
Option
Keyword Parameter
55 dhcp-parameter-request-list a list of parameters, separated by ','

◆ The server should reply with Option 66 attributes, including the TFTP server
name and boot file name.
◆ Note that the vendor class identifier can be formatted in either text or
hexadecimal using the ip dhcp client class-id command, but the format used
by both the client and server must be the same.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip dhcp client class-id hex 0000e8666572
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip dhcp restart client (833)
– 832 –
DHCP Client
ip dhcp restart client This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that
has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode through the ip address command.
◆ DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if available.
◆ If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain, the
network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new
domain.
Example
In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
Console#ip dhcp restart client
Address is 00-E0-00-00-00-01
Index: 1001, MTU: 1500
IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Mask: 255.255.255.0
Console#
Related Commands
ip address (844)
show ip dhcp This command shows the status of dynamic provision via DHCP.
dynamic-provision
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip dhcp dynamic provisioning
Dynamic Provision via DHCP Status: Disabled
Console#
– 833 –
DHCP Client
DHCP for IPv6
ipv6 dhcp client This command specifies the Rapid Commit option for DHCPv6 message exchange
rapid-commit vlan for all DHCPv6 client requests submitted from the specified interface. Use the no
form to disable this option.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 dhcp client rapid-commit vlan vlan-id
commas. (Range: 1-4093; Maximum command length: 300 characters)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ DHCPv6 clients can obtain configuration parameters from a server through a
normal four-message exchange (solicit, advertise, request, reply), or through a
rapid two-message exchange (solicit, reply). The rapid-commit option must be
enabled on both client and server for the two-message exchange to be used.
◆ This command allows two-message exchange method for prefix delegation.

When enabled, DCHPv6 client requests submitted from the specified interface
will include the rapid commit option in all solicit messages.
◆ If the rapid commit option has been enabled on the switch with this command,
and on the DHCPv6 server, message exchange can be reduced from the normal
four step process to a two-step exchange of only solicit and reply messages.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 dhcp client rapid-commit vlan 2
Console(config)#
ipv6 dhcp restart This command submits a DHCPv6 client request.

client vlan
Syntax
ipv6 dhcp restart client vlan vlan-id
– 834 –
DHCP Client
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ This command starts the DHCPv6 client process if it is not yet running by
submitting requests for configuration information through the specified
interface(s). When DHCPv6 is restarted, the switch may attempt to acquire an IP
address prefix through stateful address autoconfiguration. If the router
advertisements have the “other stateful configuration” flag set, the switch may
also attempt to acquire other non-address configuration information (such as a
default gateway or DNS server) when DHCPv6 is restarted.
Prior to submitting a client request to a DHCPv6 server, the switch should be
configured with a link-local address using the ipv6 address autoconfig
command. The state of the Managed Address Configuration flag (M flag) and
Other Stateful Configuration flag (O flag) received in Router Advertisement
messages will determine the information this switch should attempt to acquire
from the DHCPv6 server as described below.
■ Both M and O flags are set to 1:

DHCPv6 is used for both address and other configuration settings.
This combination is known as DHCPv6 stateful, in which a DHCPv6 server
assigns stateful addresses to IPv6 hosts.
■ The M flag is set to 0, and the O flag is set to 1:

DHCPv6 is used only for other configuration settings.
Neighboring routers are configured to advertise non-link-local address
prefixes from which IPv6 hosts derive stateless addresses.
This combination is known as DHCPv6 stateless, in which a DHCPv6 server
does not assign stateful addresses to IPv6 hosts, but does assign stateless
configuration settings.
◆ DHCPv6 clients build a list of servers by sending a solicit message and

collecting advertised message replies. These servers are then ranked based on
their advertised preference value. If the client needs to acquire prefixes from
servers, only servers that have advertised prefixes are considered.
◆ If the rapid commit option has been enabled on the switch using the ipv6 dhcp
client rapid-commit vlan command, and on the DHCPv6 server, message
exchange can be reduced from the normal four step process to a two-step
exchange of only solicit and reply messages.
– 835 –
DHCP Client
Example
The following command submits a client request on VLAN 1.
Console#ipv6 dhcp restart client vlan 1

Console#
Related Commands
ipv6 address autoconfig (858)
show ipv6 dhcp duid This command shows the DHCP Unique Identifier for this switch.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
DHCPv6 clients and servers are identified by a DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID)
included in the client identifier and server identifier options. Static or dynamic
address prefixes may be assigned by a DHCPv6 server based on the client’s DUID.
Example
Console#show ipv6 dhcp duid
DHCPv6 Unique Identifier (DUID): 0001-0001-4A8158B4-00E00C0000FD
Console#
show ipv6 dhcp vlan This command shows DHCPv6 information for the specified interface(s).
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp vlan vlan-list
vlan-list - VLAN ID, specified as a single number, a range of consecutive
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 dhcp vlan 1
VLAN 1 is in DHCP client mode, Rapid-Commit
List of known servers:
Server address : FE80::250:FCFF:FEF9:A494
DUID : 0001-0001-48CFB0D5-F48F2A006801
Server address : FE80::250:FCFF:FEF9:A405

DUID : 0001-0001-38CF5AB0-F48F2A003917
Console#
– 836 –
DHCP Relay
RELATED COMMANDS
ipv6 address (857)
DHCP RELAY
This section describes commands used to configure the switch to relay DHCP
requests from local hosts to a remote DHCP server.
Table 168: DHCP Relay Option 82 Commands

DHCP Relay for IPv4
ip dhcp relay server Specifies DHCP server or relay server addresses IC
ip dhcp restart relay Enables DHCP relay agent PE
ip dhcp relay server This command specifies the DHCP server or relay server addresses to use.
Use the no form to clear all addresses.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay server address1 [address2 [address3 ...]]
no ip dhcp relay server
address - IP address of DHCP server. (Range: 1-5 addresses)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Usage Guidelines
◆ DHCP relay service applies to DHCP client requests received on the specified
VLAN.
◆ This command is used to configure DHCP relay for host devices attached to the
switch. If DHCP relay service is enabled, and this switch sees a DHCP client
request, it inserts its own IP address into the request so that the DHCP server
will know the subnet where the client is located. Then, the switch forwards the
packet to a DHCP server on another network. When the server receives the
DHCP request, it allocates a free IP address for the DHCP client from its defined
scope for the DHCP client’s subnet, and sends a DHCP response back to the
DHCP relay agent (i.e., this switch). This switch then passes the DHCP response
received from the server to the client.
– 837 –
DHCP Relay
◆ You must specify the IP address for at least one active DHCP server. Otherwise,
the switch’s DHCP relay agent will not be able to forward client requests to a
DHCP server. Up to five DHCP servers can be specified in order of preference.
If any of the specified DHCP server addresses are not located in the same
network segment with this switch, use the ip default-gateway or ipv6 default-
gateway command to specify the default router through which this switch can
reach other IP subnetworks.
◆ To start DHCP relay service, enter the ip dhcp restart relay command.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip dhcp relay server 192.168.10.19
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip dhcp restart relay (838)
ip dhcp restart relay This command enables DHCP relay for the specified VLAN. Use the no form to
disable it.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command is used to configure DHCP relay functions for host devices attached
to the switch. If DHCP relay service is enabled, and this switch sees a DHCP request
broadcast, it inserts its own IP address into the request so the DHCP server will
know the subnet where the client is located. Then, the switch forwards the packet
to the DHCP server on another network. When the server receives the DHCP
request, it allocates a free IP address for the DHCP client from its defined scope for
the DHCP client’s subnet, and sends a DHCP response back to the DHCP relay agent
(i.e., this switch). This switch then broadcasts the DHCP response received from the
server to the client.
Example
In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.
Console#ip dhcp restart relay

Address is 00-00-E8-93-82-A0
Index: 1001, MTU: 1500
IP Address: 10.1.0.254 Mask: 255.255.255.0
– 838 –
DHCP Relay

Console#
Related Commands
ip dhcp relay server (837)
DHCP Relay for IPv6
ipv6 dhcp relay This command specifies the destination address or VLAN to which client messages
destination are forwarded for DHCP service. Use the no form to remove an entry.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 dhcp relay destination {ipv6-address | multicast {all | vlan vlan-id}}
ipv6-address - A full IPv6 address including the network prefix and host
address bits. This address may designate another relay server or a DHCPv6
server.
multicast - All DHCP server multicast address (FF:05::1:3).
all - All configured VLANs.
vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Usage Guidelines
◆ This command is used to configure DHCPv6 relay functions for host devices
attached to the switch. If DHCPv6 relay service is enabled, and this switch sees a
DHCPv6 request broadcast, it inserts its own IP address into the request so the
DHCPv6 server will know the subnet where the client is located. Then, the
switch forwards the packet to the next relay agent or DHCPv6 server on
another network. When the server receives the DHCPv6 request, it allocates a
free IP address for the DHCPv6 client from its defined scope for the DHCPv6
client’s subnet, and sends a DHCPv6 response back to the DHCPv6 relay agent
(i.e., this switch). This switch then broadcasts the DHCPv6 response received
from the server to the client.
◆ When the multicast option is used, the switch multicasts the modified client
request to all configured VLANs or to a specified VLAN, and enables DHCPv6
relay service for those VLANs.
◆ Up to five relay destinations may be configured by repeating this command.
– 839 –
DHCP Relay
◆ When issuing the no ipv6 dhcp relay destination command without any
arguments, the switch will delete all configured destination addresses and
disable DHCP for IPv6 relay for all VLANs.
EXAMPLE
Console(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp relay destination 2001:0DB8:3000:3000::42
Console(config-if)#
show ipv6 dhcp relay This command shows the destination addresses or VLAN to which client messages
destination are forwarded for DHCP relay service.
Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp relay destination interface [vlan vlan-id]
vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 dhcp relay destination interface vlan 1
DHCP relay destination :
VLAN 1 :
Unicast : 2001:DB8:3000:3000::42
Console#
show ip dhcp This command displays a brief list of .
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show ip dhcp poolThis command
Syntax
show ip dhcp [host | network]
host - Shows detailed settings for host device pools.network - Shows

detailed settings for network pools.Default Setting
None
– 840 –
DHCP Relay
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip dhcp pool
Console#
– 841 –
DHCP Relay
– 842 –
30 IP Interface Commands
An IP Version 4 and Version 6 address may be used for management access to the
switch over the network. Both IPv4 or IPv6 addresses can be used simultaneously to
access the switch. You can manually configure a specific IPv4 or IPv6 address or
direct the switch to obtain an IPv4 address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is
powered on. An IPv6 address can either be manually configured or dynamically
generated.
An IPv4 address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default for VLAN 1. You may
also need to a establish an IPv4 or IPv6 default gateway between this device and
management stations that exist on another network segment.
Table 169: IP Interface Commands

IPv4 Interface Configures an IPv4 address for the switch
IPv6 Interface Configures an IPv6 address for the switch
ND Snooping Maintains IPv6 prefix table and user address binding table which can be
used for stateless address auto-configuration or for address filtering by
IPv6 Source Guard
IPv4 Interface
There are no IP addresses assigned to this switch by default. You must manually
configure a new address to manage the switch over your network or to connect the
switch to existing IP subnets. You may also need to a establish a default gateway
between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on
another network segment (if routing is not enabled).
This section includes commands for configuring IP interfaces, the Address

Resolution Protocol (ARP) and Proxy ARP.
Table 170: IPv4 Interface Commands

Basic IPv4 Configuration Configures the IP address for interfaces and the gateway router
ARP Configuration Configures static, dynamic and proxy ARP service
– 843 –
Chapter 30 | IP Interface Commands
IPv4 Interface
Basic IPv4 Configuration This section describes commands used to configure IP addresses for VLAN
interfaces on the switch.
Table 171: Basic IP Configuration Commands

ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC
ip default-gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can GC
reach other subnetworks
show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE
show ip route Displays specified entries in the routing table PE
show ip traffic Displays statistics for IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP protocols PE
traceroute Shows the route packets take to the specified host PE
ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the NE, PE
network
ip address This command sets the IPv4 address for the currently selected VLAN interface. Use
the no form to remove an IP address.
Syntax
ip address {ip-address netmask [secondary]
[default-gateway ip-address] | bootp | dhcp}
no ip address [ip-address netmask [secondary] | dhcp]
ip-address - IP address
netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets. The network
mask can be either in the traditional format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx or use classless
format with the range /5 to /32. For example the subnet 255.255.224.0
would be /19.
secondary - Specifies a secondary IP address.
default-gateway - The default gateway. (Refer to the ip default-gateway
command which provides the same function.)
bootp - Obtains IP address from BOOTP.
dhcp - Obtains IP address from DHCP.
Default Setting
DHCP
Command Mode
– 844 –
IPv4 Interface
Command Usage
◆ If this router is directly connected to end node devices (or connected to end
nodes via shared media) that will be assigned to a specific subnet, then you
must create a router interface for each VLAN that will support routing. The
router interface consists of an IP address and subnet mask. This interface
address defines both the network number to which the router interface is
attached and the router’s host number on that network. In other words, a
router interface address defines the network and subnetwork numbers of the
segment that is connected to that interface, and allows you to send IP packets
to or from the router.
◆ Before any network interfaces are configured on the router, first create a VLAN
for each unique user group, or for each network application and its associated
users. Then assign the ports associated with each of these VLANs.
◆ An IP address must be assigned to this device to gain management access over

the network or to connect the router to existing IP subnets. A specific IP address
can be manually configured, or the router can be directed to obtain an address
from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to
255, separated by periods. Anything other than this format is not be accepted
by the configuration program.
◆ An interface can have only one primary IP address, but can have many
secondary IP addresses. In other words, secondary addresses need to be
specified if more than one IP subnet can be accessed through this interface.
Note that a secondary address cannot be configured prior to setting the
primary IP address, and the primary address cannot be removed if a secondary
address is still present. Also, if any router/switch in a network segment uses a
secondary address, all other routers/switches in that segment must also use a
secondary address from the same network or subnet address space.
◆ If bootp or dhcp options are selected, the system will immediately start
broadcasting service requests for all VLANs configured to obtain address
assignments through BOOTP or DHCP. IP is enabled but will not function until a
BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests are broadcast periodically
by the router in an effort to learn its IP address. (BOOTP and DHCP values can
include the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask). If the DHCP/BOOTP
server is slow to respond, you may need to use the ip dhcp restart client
command to re-start broadcasting service requests, or reboot the router.
Note: Each VLAN group can be assigned its own IP interface address. You can
manage the router via any of these IP addresses.
– 845 –
IPv4 Interface
Example
In the following example, the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1.
Console(config-if)#
This example assigns an IP address to VLAN 2 using a classless network mask.
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.2.2.1/24
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip dhcp restart client (833)
ip default-gateway (846)
ipv6 address (857)
ip default-gateway This command specifies the default gateway for destinations not found in the local
routing tables. Use the no form to remove a default gateway.
Syntax
ip default-gateway gateway
no ip default-gateway
gateway - IP address of the default gateway
Default Setting
No default gateway is established.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The default gateway can also be defined using the following Global
configuration command: ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 gateway-address.
◆ Static routes can also be defined using the ip route command to ensure that
traffic to the designated address or subnet passes through a preferred gateway.
◆ A default gateway can only be successfully set when a network interface that
directly connects to the gateway has been configured on the router.
◆ The same link-local address may be used by different interfaces/nodes in

different zones (RFC 4007). Therefore, when specifying a link-local address for a
default gateway, include zone-id information indicating the VLAN identifier
– 846 –
IPv4 Interface
after the % delimiter. For example, FE80::7272%1 identifies VLAN 1 as the

interface.
Example
The following example defines a default gateway for this device:

Console(config)#end
Console#show ip route
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2
i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, ia - IS-IS inter area
* - candidate default
S* 0.0.0.0/0 [1/0] via 192.168.0.1, VLAN1

C 192.168.0.0/24 is directly connected, VLAN1
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip address (844)
ip route (894)
ipv6 default-gateway (856)
show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IPv4 interface.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Address is 00-E0-00-00-00-01
Index: 1001, MTU: 1500
IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Mask: 255.255.255.0
Console#
Related Commands
ip address (844)
show ipv6 interface (866)
– 847 –
IPv4 Interface
show ip traffic This command displays statistics for IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP protocols.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip traffic
IP Statistics:
IP received
7845 total received
header errors
unknown protocols
address errors
discards
7845 delivers
reassembly request datagrams
reassembly succeeded
reassembly failed
IP sent
forwards datagrams
9903 requests
discards
no routes
generated fragments
fragment succeeded
fragment failed
ICMP Statistics:
ICMP received
input
errors
destination unreachable messages
time exceeded messages
parameter problem message
echo request messages
echo reply messages
redirect messages
timestamp request messages
timestamp reply messages
source quench messages
address mask request messages
address mask reply messages
ICMP sent
output
errors
echo reply messages
redirect messages
UDP Statistics:
input
no port errors
other errors
output
TCP Statistics:
7841 input
– 848 –
IPv4 Interface
input errors
9897 output
Console#
traceroute This command shows the route packets take to the specified destination.
Syntax
traceroute host
host - IP address or alias of the host.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use the traceroute command to determine the path taken to reach a specified
destination.
◆ A trace terminates when the destination responds, when the maximum

timeout (TTL) is exceeded, or the maximum number of hops is exceeded.
◆ The traceroute command first sends probe datagrams with the TTL value set at
one. This causes the first router to discard the datagram and return an error
message. The trace function then sends several probe messages at each
subsequent TTL level and displays the round-trip time for each message. Not all
devices respond correctly to probes by returning an “ICMP port unreachable”
message. If the timer goes off before a response is returned, the trace function
prints a series of asterisks and the “Request Timed Out” message. A long
sequence of these messages, terminating only when the maximum timeout
has been reached, may indicate this problem with the target device.
◆ If the target device does not respond or other errors are detected, the switch
will indicate this by one of the following messages:
■ * - No Response
■ H - Host Unreachable
■ N - Network Unreachable
■ P - Protocol Unreachable
■ O -Other
– 849 –
IPv4 Interface
Example
Console#traceroute 192.168.0.1
Press "ESC" to abort.
Traceroute to 192.168.0.99, 30 hops max, timeout is 3 seconds
Hop Packet 1 Packet 2 Packet 3 IP Address
--- -------- -------- -------- ---------------
1 20 ms <10 ms <10 ms 192.168.0.99
Trace completed.
Console#
ping This command sends (IPv4) ICMP echo request packets to another node on the
network.
Syntax
ping host [count count] [size size]
host - IP address or alias of the host.
count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16)
size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 32-512)
The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified
because the router adds header information.
Default Setting
count: 5
size: 32 bytes
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached.
◆ The following are some results of the ping command:
■ Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds,

depending on network traffic.
■ Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout”
appears in ten seconds.
■ Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that

the destination is unreachable.
■ Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry

in the route table.
– 850 –
IPv4 Interface
◆ When pinging a host name, be sure the DNS server has been defined
(page 824) and host name-to-address translation enabled (page 822). If
necessary, local devices can also be specified in the DNS static host table
(page 824).
Example
Console#ping 10.1.0.9
Type ESC to abort.
PING to 10.1.0.9, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets, timeout is 5 seconds
response time: 10 ms
response time: 0 ms
Ping statistics for 10.1.0.9:
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)
Approximate round trip times:
Minimum = 0 ms, Maximum = 10 ms, Average = 8 ms
Console#
Related Commands
interface (400)
ARP Configuration This section describes commands used to configure the Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) on the switch.
Table 172: Address Resolution Protocol Commands

arp Adds a static entry in the ARP cache GC
arp timeout Sets the time a dynamic entry remains in the ARP cache GC
ip proxy-arp Enables proxy ARP service IC

clear arp-cache Deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache PE
show arp Displays entries in the ARP cache NE, PE
arp This command adds a static entry in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.
Use the no form to remove an entry from the cache.
Syntax
arp ip-address hardware-address
no arp ip-address
ip-address - IP address to map to a specified hardware address.
hardware-address - Hardware address to map to a specified IP address. (The
format for this address is xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.)
– 851 –
IPv4 Interface
Default Setting
No default entries
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The ARP cache is used to map 32-bit IP addresses into 48-bit hardware (i.e.,
Media Access Control) addresses. This cache includes entries for hosts and
other routers on local network interfaces defined on this router.
◆ The maximum number of static entries allowed in the ARP cache is 128.
◆ A static entry may need to be used if there is no response to an ARP broadcast

message. For example, some applications may not respond to ARP requests or
the response arrives too late, causing network operations to time out.
◆ Static entries will not be aged out nor deleted when power is reset. A static
entry can only be removed through the configuration interface.
Example
Console(config)#arp 10.1.0.19 01-02-03-04-05-06
Console(config)#
Related Commands
clear arp-cache (854)
show arp (854)
arp timeout This command sets the aging time for dynamic entries in the Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) cache. Use the no form to restore the default timeout.
Syntax
arp timeout seconds
no arp timeout
seconds - The time a dynamic entry remains in the ARP cache.
(Range: 300-86400; 86400 seconds is one day)
Default Setting
1200 seconds (20 minutes)
Command Mode
– 852 –
IPv4 Interface
Command Usage
◆ When a ARP entry expires, it is deleted from the cache and an ARP request
packet is sent to re-establish the MAC address.
◆ The aging time determines how long dynamic entries remain in the cache. If
the timeout is too short, the router may tie up resources by repeating ARP
requests for addresses recently flushed from the table.
Example
This example sets the ARP cache timeout for 15 minutes (i.e., 900 seconds).
Console(config)#arp timeout 900

Console(config)#
ip proxy-arp This command enables proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). Use the no form
to disable proxy ARP.
Syntax
[no] ip proxy-arp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Proxy ARP allows a non-routing device to determine the MAC address of a host
on another subnet or network.
◆ End stations that require Proxy ARP must view the entire network as a single
network. These nodes must therefore use a smaller subnet mask than that used
by the router or other relevant network devices.
◆ Extensive use of Proxy ARP can degrade router performance because it may
lead to increased ARP traffic and increased search time for larger ARP address
tables.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip proxy-arp
Console(config-if)#
– 853 –
IPv4 Interface
clear arp-cache This command deletes all dynamic entries from the Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) cache.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example clears all dynamic entries in the ARP cache.
Console#clear arp-cache
This operation will delete all the dynamic entries in ARP Cache.
Are you sure to continue this operation (y/n)?y
Console#
show arp This command displays entries in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command displays information about the ARP cache. The first line shows
the cache timeout. It also shows each cache entry, including the IP address,
MAC address, type (static, dynamic, other), and VLAN interface. Note that entry
type “other” indicates local addresses for this router.
◆ Static entries are only displayed for VLANs that are up. In other words, static
entries are only displayed when configured for the IP subnet of a existing VLAN,
and that VLAN is linked up.
Example
This example displays all entries in the ARP cache.
Console#show arp
ARP Cache Timeout: 1200 (seconds)
IP Address MAC Address Type Interface

--------------- ----------------- --------- -----------
10.1.0.0 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF other VLAN1
10.1.0.254 00-00-AB-CD-00-00 other VLAN1
10.1.0.255 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF other VLAN1
145.30.20.23 09-50-40-30-20-10 dynamic VLAN3
Total entry : 4
Console#
Interface VLAN 1:
– 854 –
IPv6 Interface
IPv6 Interface
This switch supports the following IPv6 interface commands.
Table 173: IPv6 Configuration Commands

Interface Address Configuration and Utilities
ipv6 default-gateway Sets an IPv6 default gateway for traffic with no known next GC
hop
ipv6 address Configures an IPv6 global unicast address, and enables IC

IPv6 on an interface
ipv6 address autoconfig Enables automatic configuration of IPv6 addresses on an IC

interface and enables IPv6 on the interface
ipv6 address eui-64 Configures an IPv6 global unicast address for an interface IC
using an EUI-64 interface ID in the low order 64 bits, and
enables IPv6 on the interface
ipv6 address link-local Configures an IPv6 link-local address for an interface and IC
enables IPv6 on the interface
ipv6 enable Enables IPv6 on an interface that has not been configured IC
with an explicit IPv6 address
ipv6 mtu Sets the size of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for IC
IPv6 packets sent on an interface
show ipv6 default-gateway Displays the current IPv6 default gateway PE
show ipv6 interface Displays the usability and configured settings for IPv6 PE
interfaces
show ipv6 mtu Displays maximum transmission unit (MTU) information for PE
IPv6 interfaces
show ipv6 traffic Displays statistics about IPv6 traffic PE
clear ipv6 traffic Resets IPv6 traffic counters PE
ping6 Sends IPv6 ICMP echo request packets to another node on PE

the network
traceroute6 Shows the route packets take to the specified host PE
Neighbor Discovery
ipv6 hop-limit Configures the maximum number of hops used in router GC

advertisements that are originated by this router
ipv6 nd dad attempts Configures the number of consecutive neighbor IC

solicitation messages sent on an interface during duplicate
address detection
ipv6 nd ns-interval Configures the interval between IPv6 neighbor solicitation IC

retransmissions on an interface
ipv6 nd raguard Blocks incoming Router Advertisement and Router IC

Redirect packets
ipv6 nd reachable-time Configures the amount of time that a remote IPv6 node is IC
considered reachable after some reachability confirmation
event has occurred
– 855 –
IPv6 Interface
Table 173: IPv6 Configuration Commands (Continued)

clear ipv6 neighbors Deletes all dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery PE
cache
show ipv6 nd raguard Displays the configuration setting for RA Guard PE
show ipv6 neighbors Displays information in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache PE
Interface Address Configuration and Utilities
ipv6 default-gateway This command sets an IPv6 default gateway to use for destinations with no known
next hop. Use the no form to remove a previously configured default gateway.
Syntax
ipv6 default-gateway ipv6-address
no ipv6 address
ipv6-address - The IPv6 address of the default next hop router to use for
destinations with no known next hop.
Default Setting
No default gateway is defined
Command Mode
Command Usage

different zones (RFC 4007). Therefore, when specifying a link-local address,
include zone-id information indicating the VLAN identifier after the % delimiter.
For example, FE80::7272%1 identifies VLAN 1 as the interface.
◆ An IPv6 default gateway should be defined if the destination has been assigned
an IPv6 address that is located in a different IP segment.
◆ An IPv6 default gateway can only be successfully set when a network interface
that directly connects to the gateway has been configured on the router.
– 856 –
IPv6 Interface
Example
The following example defines a default gateway for this device:
Console(config)#ipv6 default-gateway FE80::269:3EF9:FE19:6780%1

Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip default-gateway (846)
ipv6 address This command configures an IPv6 global unicast address and enables IPv6 on an
interface. Use the no form without any arguments to remove all IPv6 addresses
from the interface, or use the no form with a specific IPv6 address to remove that
address from the interface.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 address ipv6-address[/prefix-length]
ipv6-address - A full IPv6 address including the network prefix and host
address bits.
the left) of the address comprise the prefix (i.e., the network portion of the
address).
Default Setting
No IPv6 addresses are defined
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ To connect to a larger network with multiple subnets, you must configure a

global unicast address. This address can be manually configured with this
command, or it can be automatically configured using the ipv6 address
autoconfig command.
◆ If a link-local address has not yet been assigned to this interface, this command
will assign the specified static global unicast address and also dynamically
generate a link-local unicast address for the interface. (The link-local address is
made with an address prefix of FE80 and a host portion based the switch’s MAC
address in modified EUI-64 format.)
– 857 –
IPv6 Interface
◆ If a duplicate address is detected, a warning message is sent to the console.
Example
This example specifies a full IPv6 address and prefix length.
Console(config-if)#ipv6 address 2001:DB8:2222:7272::72/96
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled
Link-local address:
fe80::7272:cfff:fe83:3466%1/64
2001:db8:2222:7272::72/96, subnet is 2001:db8:2222:7272::/96
ff02::1:ff00:72
ff02::1:ff83:3466
ff02::1
Console#
Related Commands
ipv6 address eui-64 (860)
ip address (844)
ipv6 address This command enables stateless autoconfiguration of IPv6 addresses on an

autoconfig interface and enables IPv6 on the interface. The network portion of the address is
based on prefixes received in IPv6 router advertisement messages; the host portion
in based on the modified EUI-64 form of the interface identifier (i.e., the switch’s
MAC address). Use the no form to remove the address generated by this command.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 address autoconfig
Default Setting
Command Mode
– 858 –
IPv6 Interface
Command Usage
◆ If a link local address has not yet been assigned to this interface, this command
will dynamically generate a global unicast address (if a global prefix is included
in received router advertisements) and a link local address for the interface.
(The link-local address is made with an address prefix of FE80 and a host
portion based the switch’s MAC address in modified EUI-64 format.)
◆ When DHCPv6 is restarted, the switch may attempt to acquire an IP address

prefix through stateful address autoconfiguration. If the router advertisements
have the “other stateful configuration” flag set, the switch may also attempt to
acquire other non-address configuration information (such as a default
gateway) from a DHCPv6 server when DHCPv6 is restarted.
Example
This example assigns a dynamic global unicast address of
2001:DB8:2222:7272:2E0:CFF:FE00:FD to the switch.
Console(config-if)#ipv6 address autoconfig

VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled.
Link-local address:
fe80::7272:cfff:fe83:3466%1/64
2001:db8:2222:7272:7272:cfff:fe83:3466/64, subnet is 2001:db8:2222:7272::/
64[AUTOCONFIG]
valid lifetime 2591531 preferred lifetime 604331
ff02::1:ff83:3466
ff02::1
Console#
Related Commands
ipv6 address (857)
– 859 –
IPv6 Interface
ipv6 address eui-64 This command configures an IPv6 address for an interface using an EUI-64 interface
ID in the low order 64 bits and enables IPv6 on the interface. Use the no form
without any arguments to remove all manually configured IPv6 addresses from the
interface. Use the no form with a specific address to remove it from the interface.
Syntax
ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui-64
no ipv6 address [ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui-64]
ipv6-prefix - The IPv6 network portion of the address assigned to the
interface.
the left) of the address comprise the prefix (i.e., the network portion of the
address).
Default Setting
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The prefix must be formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6 Addressing
◆ If a link local address has not yet been assigned to this interface, this command
will dynamically generate a global unicast address and a link-local address for
this interface. (The link-local address is made with an address prefix of FE80 and
a host portion based the switch’s MAC address in modified EUI-64 format.)
◆ Note that the value specified in the ipv6-prefix may include some of the high-
order host bits if the specified prefix length is less than 64 bits. If the specified
prefix length exceeds 64 bits, then the network portion of the address will take
precedence over the interface identifier.
◆ IPv6 addresses are 16 bytes long, of which the bottom 8 bytes typically form a
unique host identifier based on the device’s MAC address. The EUI-64
specification is designed for devices that use an extended 8-byte MAC address.
For devices that still use a 6-byte MAC address (also known as EUI-48 format), it
must be converted into EUI-64 format by inverting the universal/local bit in the
address and inserting the hexadecimal number FFFE between the upper and
lower three bytes of the MAC address.
◆ For example, if a device had an EUI-48 address of 28-9F-18-1C-82-35, the

global/local bit must first be inverted to meet EUI-64 requirements (i.e., 1 for
– 860 –
IPv6 Interface
globally defined addresses and 0 for locally defined addresses), changing 28 to

2A. Then the two bytes FFFE are inserted between the OUI (i.e., company id)
and the rest of the address, resulting in a modified EUI-64 interface identifier of
2A-9F-18-FF-FE-1C-82-35.
◆ This host addressing method allows the same interface identifier to be used on
multiple IP interfaces of a single device, as long as those interfaces are attached
to different subnets.
Example
This example uses the network prefix of 2001:0DB8:0:1::/64, and specifies that the
EUI-64 interface identifier be used in the lower 64 bits of the address.
Console(config-if)#ipv6 address 2001:0DB8:0:1::/64 eui-64
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled
Link-local address:
fe80::7272:cfff:fe83:3466%1/64
2001:db8:0:1:7272:cfff:fe83:3466/64, subnet is 2001:db8:0:1::/64[EUI]
2001:db8:2222:7272::72/96, subnet is 2001:db8:2222:7272::/96
ff02::1:ff00:72
ff02::1:ff83:3466
ff02::1
Console#
Related Commands
– 861 –
IPv6 Interface
ipv6 address link-local This command configures an IPv6 link-local address for an interface and enables
IPv6 on the interface. Use the no form without any arguments to remove all
manually configured IPv6 addresses from the interface. Use the no form with a
specific address to remove it from the interface.
Syntax
ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local
no ipv6 address [ipv6-address link-local]
ipv6-address - The IPv6 address assigned to the interface.
Default Setting
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The specified address must be formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6
Addressing Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal values.
One double colon may be used in the address to indicate the appropriate
number of zeros required to fill the undefined fields. And the address prefix
must be in the range of FE80~FEBF.
◆ The address specified with this command replaces a link-local address that was
automatically generated for the interface.
◆ You can configure multiple IPv6 global unicast addresses per interface, but only
one link-local address per interface.
Example
This example assigns a link-local address of FE80::269:3EF9:FE19:6779 to VLAN 1.
Note that a prefix in the range of FE80~FEBF is required for link-local addresses, and
the first 16-bit group in the host address is padded with a zero in the form 0269.
Console(config-if)#ipv6 address FE80::269:3EF9:FE19:6779 link-local
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled
Link-local address:
fe80::269:3ef9:fe19:6779%1/64
2001:db8:2222:7272::72/96, subnet is 2001:db8:2222:7272::/96
ff02::1:ff19:6779
ff02::1:ff00:72
ff02::1:ff83:3466
– 862 –
IPv6 Interface
ff02::1
Console#
Related Commands
ipv6 enable (863)
ipv6 enable This command enables IPv6 on an interface that has not been configured with an
explicit IPv6 address. Use the no form to disable IPv6 on an interface that has not
been configured with an explicit IPv6 address.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 enable
Default Setting
IPv6 is disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command enables IPv6 on the current VLAN interface and automatically
generates a link-local unicast address. The address prefix uses FE80, and the
host portion of the address is generated by converting the switch’s MAC
address to modified EUI-64 format (see page 860). This address type makes the
switch accessible over IPv6 for all devices attached to the same local subnet.
◆ If a duplicate address is detected on the local segment, this interface will be

disabled and a warning message displayed on the console.
◆ The no ipv6 enable command does not disable IPv6 for an interface that has
been explicitly configured with an IPv6 address.
Example
In this example, IPv6 is enabled on VLAN 1, and the link-local address
FE80::2E0:CFF:FE00:FD/64 is automatically generated by the switch.
VLAN 1 is up
– 863 –
IPv6 Interface
IPv6 is enabled
Link-local address:
fe80::269:3ef9:fe19:6779%1/64
2001:db8:2222:7272::72/96, subnet is 2001:db8:2222:7272::/96
ff02::1:ff19:6779
ff02::1:ff00:72
ff02::1:ff83:3466
ff02::1
Console#
Related Commands
ipv6 address link-local (862)
ipv6 mtu This command sets the size of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for IPv6
packets sent on an interface. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 mtu size
no ipv6 mtu
size - Specifies the MTU size. (Range: 1280-65535 bytes)
Default Setting
1500 bytes
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If a non-default value is configured, an MTU option is included in the router
advertisements sent from this device.
◆ The maximum value set by this command cannot exceed the MTU of the
physical interface, which is currently fixed at 1500 bytes.
◆ IPv6 routers do not fragment IPv6 packets forwarded from other routers.
However, traffic originating from an end-station connected to an IPv6 router
may be fragmented.
– 864 –
IPv6 Interface
◆ All devices on the same physical medium must use the same MTU in order to
operate correctly.
◆ IPv6 must be enabled on an interface before the MTU can be set.
Example
The following example sets the MTU for VLAN 1 to 1280 bytes:
Console(config-if)#ipv6 mtu 1280
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
show ipv6 mtu (868)
jumbo frame (122)
show ipv6 This command displays the current IPv6 default gateway.
default-gateway
Command Mode
Example
The following shows the default gateway configured for this device:
Console#show ipv6 default-gateway

IPv6 default gateway 2001:DB8:2222:7272::254
Console#
– 865 –
IPv6 Interface
show ipv6 interface This command displays the usability and configured settings for IPv6 interfaces.
Syntax
show ipv6 interface [brief [vlan vlan-id [ipv6-prefix/prefix-length]]]
brief - Displays a brief summary of IPv6 operational status and the
addresses configured for each interface.
ipv6-prefix - The IPv6 network portion of the address assigned to the
interface. The prefix must be formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6
Addressing Architecture,” using 8 colon-separated 16-bit hexadecimal
values. One double colon may be used in the address to indicate the
appropriate number of zeros required to fill the undefined fields.
prefix-length - A decimal value indicating how many of the contiguous bits
(from the left) of the address comprise the prefix (i.e., the network portion
of the address).
Command Mode
Example
This example displays all the IPv6 addresses configured for the switch.

VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled
Link-local address:
fe80::269:3ef9:fe19:6779%1/64
2001:db8:2222:7272::72/96, subnet is 2001:db8:2222:7272::/96
ff02::1:ff19:6779
ff02::1:ff00:72
ff02::1:ff83:3466
ff02::1
Console#
– 866 –
IPv6 Interface
Table 174: show ipv6 interface - display description

Field Description
VLAN A VLAN is marked “up” if the switch can send and receive packets on this interface,
“down” if a line signal is not present, or “administratively down” if the interface has
been disabled by the administrator.
IPv6 IPv6 is marked “enable” if the switch can send and receive IP traffic on this
interface, “disable” if the switch cannot send and receive IP traffic on this interface,
or “stalled” if a duplicate link-local address is detected on the interface.
Link-local Shows the link-local address assigned to this interface

address
Global unicast Shows the global unicast address(es) assigned to this interface
address(es)
Joined group In addition to the unicast addresses assigned to an interface, a node is required to
address(es) join the all-nodes multicast addresses FF01::1 and FF02::1 for all IPv6 nodes within
scope 1 (interface-local) and scope 2 (link-local), respectively.
FF01::1/16 is the transient interface-local multicast address for all attached IPv6
nodes, and FF02::1/16 is the link-local multicast address for all attached IPv6
nodes. The interface-local multicast address is only used for loopback
transmission of multicast traffic. Link-local multicast addresses cover the same
types as used by link-local unicast addresses, including all nodes (FF02::1), all
routers (FF02::2), and solicited nodes (FF02::1:FFXX:XXXX) as described below.
A node is also required to compute and join the associated solicited-node
multicast addresses for every unicast and anycast address it is assigned. IPv6
addresses that differ only in the high-order bits, e.g. due to multiple high-order
prefixes associated with different aggregations, will map to the same solicited-
node address, thereby reducing the number of multicast addresses a node must
join. In this example, FF02::1:FF90:0/104 is the solicited-node multicast address
which is formed by taking the low-order 24 bits of the address and appending
those bits to the prefix.
ND DAD Indicates whether (neighbor discovery) duplicate address detection is enabled.
number of DAD The number of consecutive neighbor solicitation messages sent on the interface
attempts during duplicate address detection.
ND retransmit The interval between IPv6 neighbor solicitation retransmissions sent on an

interval interface during duplicate address detection.
ND advertised The retransmit interval is included in all router advertisements sent out of an
retransmit interface so that nodes on the same link use the same time value.
interval
ND reachable The amount of time a remote IPv6 node is considered reachable after a
time reachability confirmation event has occurred
ND advertised The reachable time is included in all router advertisements sent out of an
reachable time interface so that nodes on the same link use the same time value.
ND advertised The length of time during which the prefix is valid for on-link determination.
router lifetime
This example displays a brief summary of IPv6 addresses configured on the switch.
Console#show ipv6 interface brief

Interface VLAN IPv6 IPv6 Address
--------------- ---------- ---------- ------------------------------------
VLAN 1 Up Up 2001:DB8:2222:7273::72/96
VLAN 1 Up Up FE80::2E0:CFF:FE00:FD%1/64
Console#
– 867 –
IPv6 Interface
Related Commands
show ip interface (847)
show ipv6 mtu This command displays the maximum transmission unit (MTU) cache for
destinations that have returned an ICMP packet-too-big message along with an
acceptable MTU to this switch.
Command Mode
Example
The following example shows the MTU cache for this device:
Console#show ipv6 mtu

MTU Since Destination Address
1400 00:04:21 5000:1::3
1280 00:04:50 FE80::203:A0FF:FED6:141D
Console#
Table 175: show ipv6 mtu - display description*

Field Description
MTU Adjusted MTU contained in the ICMP packet-too-big message returned from this
destination, and now used for all traffic sent along this path.
Since Time since an ICMP packet-too-big message was received from this destination.
Destination Address which sent an ICMP packet-too-big message.

Address
* No information is displayed if an IPv6 address has not been assigned to the switch.
show ipv6 traffic This command displays statistics about IPv6 traffic passing through this switch.
Command Mode
Example
The following example shows statistics for all IPv6 unicast and multicast traffic, as
well as ICMP, UDP and TCP statistics:
Console#show ipv6 traffic

IPv6 Statistics:
IPv6 received
total received
header errors
too big errors
no routes
address errors
unknown protocols
– 868 –
IPv6 Interface
truncated packets
discards
delivers
reassembly succeeded
reassembly failed
IPv6 sent
forwards datagrams
requests
discards
no routes
generated fragments
fragment succeeded
fragment failed
ICMPv6 Statistics:
ICMPv6 received
input
errors
packet too big messages
echo reply messages
router solicit messages
router advertisement messages
neighbor solicit messages
neighbor advertisement messages
redirect messages
group membership query messages
group membership response messages
group membership reduction messages
multicast listener discovery version 2 reports
ICMPv6 sent
output
packet too big messages
echo reply messages
router solicit messages
router advertisement messages
neighbor solicit messages
neighbor advertisement messages
redirect messages
group membership query messages
group membership response messages
group membership reduction messages
multicast listener discovery version 2 reports
UDP Statistics:
input
no port errors
other errors
output
Console#
– 869 –
IPv6 Interface
Table 176: show ipv6 traffic - display description

Field Description
IPv6 Statistics
IPv6 received
total received The total number of input datagrams received by the interface,
including those received in error.
header errors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6
headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors, hop
count exceeded, IPv6 options, etc.
too big errors The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because
their size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface.
no routes The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be

found to transmit them to their destination.
address errors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in
their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be
received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (e.g., ::0)
and unsupported addresses (e.g., addresses with unallocated prefixes).
For entities which are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward
datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the
destination address was not a local address.
unknown protocols The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This
counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were
addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some
of the datagrams.
truncated packets The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame
didn't carry enough data.
discards The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were
encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were
discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not
include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.
delivers The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 user-

protocols (including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the interface
to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be
necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams.
reassembly request The number of IPv6 fragments received which needed to be

datagrams reassembled at this interface. Note that this counter is incremented at
the interface to which these fragments were addressed which might
not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments.
reassembly succeeded The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. Note that this
counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were
addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some
of the fragments.
reassembly failed The number of failures detected by the IPv6 re-assembly algorithm (for
whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc.). Note that this is not necessarily
a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably
the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by
combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at
the interface to which these fragments were addressed which might
not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments.
– 870 –
IPv6 Interface
Table 176: show ipv6 traffic - display description (Continued)

Field Description
IPv6 sent
forwards datagrams The number of output datagrams which this entity received and
forwarded to their final destinations. In entities which do not act as IPv6
routers, this counter will include only those packets which were Source-
Routed via this entity, and the Source-Route processing was successful.
Note that for a successfully forwarded datagram the counter of the
outgoing interface is incremented.
requests The total number of IPv6 datagrams which local IPv6 user-protocols
(including ICMP) supplied to IPv6 in requests for transmission. Note
that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in
ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams.
discards The number of output IPv6 datagrams for which no problem was
encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but
which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that this
counter would include datagrams counted in
ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams if any such packets met this
(discretionary) discard criterion.
no routes The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be

found to transmit them to their destination.
generated fragments The number of output datagram fragments that have been generated
as a result of fragmentation at this output interface.
fragment succeeded The number of IPv6 datagrams that have been successfully fragmented
at this output interface.
fragment failed The number of IPv6 datagrams that have been discarded because they
needed to be fragmented at this output interface but could not be.
ICMPv6 Statistics
ICMPv6 received
input The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface which
includes all those counted by ipv6IfIcmpInErrors. Note that this
interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed
which may not be necessarily the input interface for the messages.
errors The number of ICMP messages which the interface received but
determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad
length, etc.).
destination unreachable The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by

messages the interface.
packet too big messages The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface.
time exceeded messages The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the
interface.
parameter problem The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the
message interface.
echo request messages The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the interface.
echo reply messages The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface.
router solicit messages The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface.
router advertisement The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the
messages interface.
– 871 –
IPv6 Interface

Field Description
neighbor solicit messages The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the
interface.
neighbor advertisement The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by

redirect messages The number of Redirect messages received by the interface.
group membership query The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received
messages by the interface.
group membership The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages

response messages received by the interface.
group membership The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages

reduction messages received by the interface.
multicast listener discovery The number of MLDv2 reports received by the interface.
version 2 reports
ICMPv6 sent
output The total number of ICMP messages which this interface attempted to
send. Note that this counter includes all those counted by
icmpOutErrors.
destination unreachable The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent by the
messages interface.
packet too big messages The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface.
time exceeded messages The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface.
parameter problem The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent by the
message interface.
echo request messages The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent by the interface.
echo reply messages The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface.
router solicit messages The number of ICMP Router Solicitation messages sent by the interface.
router advertisement The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the
messages interface.
neighbor solicit messages The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages sent by the interface.
neighbor advertisement The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the
messages interface.
redirect messages The number of Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object will
always be zero, since hosts do not send redirects.
group membership query The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent by
group membership The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent.
response messages
group membership The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent.
reduction messages
multicast listener discovery The number of MLDv2 reports sent by the interface.
version 2 reports
– 872 –
IPv6 Interface

Field Description
UDP Statistics
input The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users.
no port errors The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no
application at the destination port.
other errors The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for
reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.
output The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity.
clear ipv6 traffic This command resets IPv6 traffic counters.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command resets all of the counters displayed by the show ipv6 traffic
command.
Example
Console#clear ipv6 traffic
Console#
ping6 This command sends (IPv6) ICMP echo request packets to another node on the
network.
Syntax
ping6 {ipv6-address | host-name} [count count] [size size]
ipv6-address - The IPv6 address of a neighbor device. You can specify either
a link-local or global unicast address formatted according to RFC 2373 “IPv6
host-name - A host name string which can be resolved into an IPv6 address
through a domain name server.
count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16)
size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 48-18024 bytes)
The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified
because the router adds header information.
– 873 –
IPv6 Interface
Default Setting
count: 5
size: 100 bytes
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use the ping6 command to see if another site on the network can be reached,
or to evaluate delays over the path.

For example, FE80::7272%1 identifies VLAN 1 as the interface from which the
ping is sent.
◆ When pinging a host name, be sure the DNS server has been enabled (see
page 822). If necessary, local devices can also be specified in the DNS static host
table (see page 824).
◆ When using ping6 with a host name, the router first attempts to resolve the
alias into an IPv6 address before trying to resolve it into an IPv4 address.
Example
Console#ping6 FE80::2E0:CFF:FE00:FC%1/64
Type ESC to abort.
PING to FE80::2E0:CFF:FE00:FC%1/64, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets,
timeout is 3 seconds
response time: 20 ms [FE80::2E0:CFF:FE00:FC] seq_no: 1
Ping statistics for FE80::2E0:CFF:FE00:FC%1/64:
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)
Approximate round trip times:
Minimum = 0 ms, Maximum = 20 ms, Average = 4 ms
Console#
traceroute6 This command shows the route packets take to the specified destination.
Syntax
traceroute6 {ipv6-address | host-name} [max-failures failure-count]
– 874 –
IPv6 Interface
host-name - A host name string which can be resolved into an IPv6 address
through a domain name server.
failure-count - The maximum number of failures before which the trace
route is terminated. (Range: 1-255)
Default Setting
Maximum failures: 5
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ Use the traceroute6 command to determine the path taken to reach a
specified destination.

For example, FE80::7272%1 identifies VLAN 1 as the interface from which the
ping is sent.
◆ A trace terminates when the destination responds, when the maximum

timeout (TTL) is exceeded, or the maximum number of hops is exceeded.
◆ The traceroute command first sends probe datagrams with the TTL value set at
one. This causes the first router to discard the datagram and return an error
message. The trace function then sends several probe messages at each
subsequent TTL level and displays the round-trip time for each message. Not all
devices respond correctly to probes by returning an “ICMP port unreachable”
message. If the timer goes off before a response is returned, the trace function
prints a series of asterisks and the “Request Timed Out” message. A long
sequence of these messages, terminating only when the maximum timeout
has been reached, may indicate this problem with the target device.
Example
Console#traceroute6 FE80::2E0:CFF:FE9C:CA10%1/64
Press "ESC" to abort.
Traceroute to FE80::2E0:CFF:FE9C:CA10%1/64, 30 hops max, timeout is 3

seconds, 5 max failure(s) before termination.
Hop Packet 1 Packet 2 Packet 3 IPv6 Address

--- -------- -------- -------- --------------------------------------------
1 <10 ms <10 ms <10 ms FE80::2E0:CFF:FE9C:CA10%1/64
Trace completed.
Console#
– 875 –
IPv6 Interface
Neighbor Discovery
ipv6 hop-limit This command configures the maximum number of hops used in router
advertisements that are originated by this router. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 hop-limit hops
no ipv6 hop-limit
hops - The maximum number of hops in router advertisements and all IPv6
packets. (Range: 1-255)
Default Setting
1
Command Mode
Example
The following sets the hop limit for router advertisements to 64:
Console(config)#ipv6 hop-limit 64
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show ipv6 neighbors (881)
ipv6 nd dad attempts This command configures the number of consecutive neighbor solicitation
messages sent on an interface during duplicate address detection. Use the no form
Syntax
ipv6 nd dad attempts count
no ipv6 nd dad attempts
count - The number of neighbor solicitation messages sent to determine
whether or not a duplicate address exists on this interface. (Range: 0-600)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
– 876 –
IPv6 Interface
Command Usage
◆ Configuring a value of 0 disables duplicate address detection.
◆ Duplicate address detection determines if a new unicast IPv6 address already

exists on the network before it is assigned to an interface.
◆ Duplicate address detection is stopped on any interface that has been

suspended (see the vlan command). While an interface is suspended, all unicast
IPv6 addresses assigned to that interface are placed in a “pending” state.
Duplicate address detection is automatically restarted when the interface is
administratively re-activated.
◆ An interface that is re-activated restarts duplicate address detection for all

unicast IPv6 addresses on the interface. While duplicate address detection is
performed on the interface’s link-local address, the other IPv6 addresses remain
in a “tentative” state. If no duplicate link-local address is found, duplicate
address detection is started for the remaining IPv6 addresses.
◆ If a duplicate address is detected, it is set to “duplicate” state, and a warning

message is sent to the console. If a duplicate link-local address is detected, IPv6
processes are disabled on the interface. If a duplicate global unicast address is
detected, it is not used. All configuration commands associated with a
duplicate address remain configured while the address is in “duplicate” state.
◆ If the link-local address for an interface is changed, duplicate address detection

is performed on the new link-local address, but not for any of the IPv6 global
unicast addresses already associated with the interface.
Example
The following configures five neighbor solicitation attempts for addresses
configured on VLAN 1. The show ipv6 interface command indicates that the
duplicate address detection process is still on-going.
Console(config-if)#ipv6 nd dad attempts 5
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled
Link-local address:
fe80::200:e8ff:fe90:0/64
2009:db9:2229::79, subnet is 2009:db9:2229:0::/64
ff01::1/16
ff02::1/16
ff02::1:ff00:79/104
ff02::1:ff90:0/104
IPv6 link MTU is 1500 bytes.
– 877 –
IPv6 Interface

Console#
Related Commands
ipv6 nd ns-interval (878)
show ipv6 neighbors (881)
ipv6 nd ns-interval This command configures the interval between transmitting IPv6 neighbor
solicitation messages on an interface. Use the no form to restore the default value.
Syntax
ipv6 nd ns-interval milliseconds
no ipv6 nd ns-interval
milliseconds - The interval between transmitting IPv6 neighbor solicitation
messages. (Range: 1000-3600000)
Default Setting
1000 milliseconds is used for neighbor discovery operations
0 milliseconds is advertised in router advertisements
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When a non-default value is configured, the specified interval is used both for
router advertisements and by the router itself.
◆ This command specifies the interval between transmitting neighbor

solicitation messages when resolving an address, or when probing the
reachability of a neighbor. Therefore, avoid using very short intervals for normal
IPv6 operations.
◆ Setting the neighbor solicitation interval to 0 means that the configured time is
unspecified by this router.
Example
The following sets the interval between sending neighbor solicitation messages to
30000 milliseconds:
Console(config)#pv6 nd ns-interval 30000
Console(config)#end
VLAN 1 is up
IPv6 is enabled
Link-local address:
fe80::200:e8ff:FE90:0/64
– 878 –
IPv6 Interface
2009:db9:2229::79, subnet is 2009:db9:2229:0::/64

ff01::1/16
ff02::1/16
ff02::1:ff00:79/104
ff02::1:ff90:0/104
IPv6 link MTU is 1500 bytes.
Console#
Related Commands
show running-config (115)
ipv6 nd raguard This command blocks incoming Router Advertisement and Router Redirect
packets. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 nd raguard
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ IPv6 Router Advertisements (RA) convey information that enables nodes to
auto-configure on the network. This information may include the default router
address taken from the observed source address of the RA message, as well as
on-link prefix information. However, unintended mis-configurations, or
possibly malicious attacks on the network, may lead to bogus RAs being sent,
which in turn can cause operational problems for hosts on the network.
◆ This command can be used to block RAs and Router Redirect (RR) messages on
the specified interface. Determine which interfaces are connected to known
routers, and enable RA Guard on all other untrusted interfaces.
Example
Console(config-if)#pv6 nd raguard
Console(config-if)#
– 879 –
IPv6 Interface
ipv6 nd This command configures the amount of time that a remote IPv6 node is
reachable-time considered reachable after some reachability confirmation event has occurred. Use
Syntax
ipv6 nd reachable-time milliseconds
no ipv6 nd reachable-time
milliseconds - The time that a node can be considered reachable after
receiving confirmation of reachability. (Range: 0-3600000)
Default Setting
30000 milliseconds is used for neighbor discovery operations
0 milliseconds is advertised in router advertisements
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The time limit configured by this command allows the router to detect
unavailable neighbors.
◆ This time limit is included in all router advertisements sent out through an
interface, ensuring that nodes on the same link use the same time value.
◆ Setting the time limit to 0 means that the configured time is unspecified by this
router.
Example
The following sets the reachable time for a remote node to 1000 milliseconds:
Console(config)#pv6 nd reachable-time 1000
Console(config)#
clear ipv6 neighbors This command deletes all dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following deletes all dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor cache:
Console#clear ipv6 neighbors

Console#
– 880 –
IPv6 Interface
show ipv6 nd raguard This command displays the configuration setting for RA Guard.
Syntax
show ipv6 nd raguard [interface]
interface
ethernet unit/port
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 nd raguard interface ethernet 1/1
Interface RA Guard
--------- --------
Eth 1/ 1 Yes
Console#
show ipv6 neighbors This command displays information in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache.
Syntax
show ipv6 neighbors [vlan vlan-id | ipv6-address]
Default Setting
All IPv6 neighbor discovery cache entries are displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows all known IPv6 neighbors for this switch:
Console#show ipv6 neighbors

State: I1 - Incomplete, I2 - Invalid, R - Reachable, S - Stale, D - Delay,
P1 - Probe, P2 - Permanent, U - Unknown
IPv6 Address Age Link-layer Addr State VLAN
– 881 –
ND Snooping
FE80::2E0:CFF:FE9C:CA10 4 00-E0-0C-9C-CA-10 R 1
Console#
Table 177: show ipv6 neighbors - display description

Field Description
IPv6 Address IPv6 address of neighbor
Age The time since the address was verified as reachable (in seconds). A static entry is
indicated by the value “Permanent.”
Link-layer Addr Physical layer MAC address.
State The following states are used for dynamic entries:

I1 (Incomplete) - Address resolution is being carried out on the entry. A neighbor
solicitation message has been sent to the multicast address of the target, but it
has not yet returned a neighbor advertisement message.
I2 (Invalid) - An invalidated mapping. Setting the state to invalid dis-associates the
interface identified with this entry from the indicated mapping (RFC 4293).
R (Reachable) - Positive confirmation was received within the last ReachableTime
interval that the forward path to the neighbor was functioning. While in REACH
state, the device takes no special action when sending packets.
S (Stale) - More than the ReachableTime interval has elapsed since the last
positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning. While
in STALE state, the device takes no action until a packet is sent.
D (Delay) - More than the ReachableTime interval has elapsed since the last
positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning. A
packet was sent within the last DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME interval. If no
reachability confirmation is received within this interval after entering the DELAY
state, the switch will send a neighbor solicitation message and change the state
to PROBE.
P1 (Probe) - A reachability confirmation is actively sought by resending neighbor
solicitation messages every RetransTimer interval until confirmation of
reachability is received.
U (Unknown) - Unknown state.
The following states are used for static entries:
I1 (Incomplete)-The interface for this entry is down.
R (Reachable) - The interface for this entry is up. Reachability detection is not
applied to static entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache.
P2 (Permanent) - Indicates a static entry.
VLAN VLAN interface from which the address was reached.
Related Commands
show mac-address-table (497)
ND Snooping
Neighbor Discover (ND) Snooping maintains an IPv6 prefix table and user address
binding table. These tables can be used for stateless address auto-configuration or
for address filtering by IPv6 Source Guard.
ND snooping maintains a binding table in the process of neighbor discovery. When

it receives an Neighbor Solicitation (NS) packet from a host, it creates a new
binding. If it subsequently receives a Neighbor Advertisement (NA) packet, this
– 882 –
ND Snooping
means that the address is already being used by another host, and the binding is
therefore deleted. If it does not receive an NA packet after a timeout period, the
binding will be bound to the original host. ND snooping can also maintain a prefix
table used for stateless address auto-configuration by monitoring Router
Advertisement (RA) packets sent from neighboring routers.
ND snooping can also detect if an IPv6 address binding is no longer valid. When a
binding has been timed out, it checks to see if the host still exists by sending an NS
packet to the target host. If it receives an NA packet in response, it knows that the
target still exists and updates the lifetime of the binding; otherwise, it deletes the
binding.
This section describes commands used to configure ND Snooping.
Table 178: ND Snooping Commands

ipv6 nd snooping Enables ND snooping globally or on a specified VLAN or GC

range of VLANs
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect Enables automatic validation of binding table entries by GC

periodically sending NS messages and awaiting NA
replies
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect Sets the number of times to send an NS message to GC

retransmit count determine if a binding is still valid
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect Sets the interval between sending NS messages to GC

retransmit interval determine if a binding is still valid
ipv6 nd snooping prefix Sets the time to wait for an RA message before deleting GC
timeout an entry in the prefix table
ipv6 nd snooping Sets the maximum number of address entries which can IC
max-binding be bound to a port
ipv6 nd snooping trust Configures a port as a trusted interface from which prefix IC
information in RA messages can be added to the prefix
table, or NS messages can be forwarded without
validation
clear ipv6 nd snooping Clears all entries in the address binding table PE
binding
clear ipv6 nd snooping prefix Clears all entries in the prefix table PE
show ipv6 nd snooping Shows configuration settings for ND snooping PE
show ipv6 nd snooping Shows entries in the binding table PE

binding
show ipv6 nd snooping prefix Show entries in the prefix table PE
– 883 –
ND Snooping
ipv6 nd snooping This command enables ND snooping globally or on a specified VLAN or range of
VLANs. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 nd snooping [vlan {vlan-id | vlan-range}]
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use this command without any keywords to enable ND snooping globally on
the switch. Use the VLAN keyword to enable ND snooping on a specific VLAN or
a range of VLANs.
◆ Once ND snooping is enabled both globally and on the required VLANs, the
switch will start monitoring RA messages to build an address prefix table as
described below:
■ If an RA message is received on an untrusted interface, it is dropped. If
received on a trusted interface, the switch adds an entry in the prefix table
according to the Prefix Information option in the RA message. The prefix
table records prefix, prefix length, valid lifetime, as well as the VLAN and
port interface which received the message.
■ If an RA message is not received updating a table entry with the same
prefix for a specified timeout period, the entry is deleted.
◆ Once ND snooping is enabled both globally and on the required VLANs, the
switch will start monitoring NS messages to build a dynamic user binding table
for use in Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) or for use by other security
filtering protocols (e.g., IPv6 Source Guard) as described below:
■ If an NS message is received on an trusted interface, it is forwarded without
further processing.
■ If an NS message is received on an untrusted interface, and the address
prefix does not match any entry in the prefix table, it drops the packet.
■ If the message does match an entry in the prefix table, it adds an entry to
the dynamic user binding table after a fixed delay, and forwards the packet.
Each entry in the dynamic binding table includes the link-layer address,
IPv6 address, lifetime, as well as the VLAN and port interface which received
the message.
– 884 –
ND Snooping
■ If an RA message is received in response to the original NS message

(indicating a duplicate address) before the dynamic binding timeout period
expires, the entry is deleted. Otherwise, when the timeout expires, the
entry is dropped if the auto-detection process is not enabled.
■ If the auto-detection process is enabled, the switch periodically sends an
NS message to determine is the client still exists. If it does not receive an RA
message in response after the configured timeout, the entry is dropped. If
the switch receives an RA message before the timeout expires, it resets the
lifetime for the dynamic binding, and the auto-detection process resumes.
Example
This example enables ND snooping globally and on VLAN 1.
Console(config)#ipv6 nd snooping
Console(config)#ipv6 nd snooping vlan 1
Console(config)#
ipv6 nd snooping This command enables automatic validation of dynamic user binding table entries
auto-detect by periodically sending NS messages and awaiting NA replies. Use the no form to
Syntax
[no] ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
If auto-detection is enabled, the switch periodically sends an NS message to
determine is a client listed in the dynamic binding table still exists. If it does not
receive an RA message in response after the configured timeout, the entry is
dropped. If the switch receives an RA message before the timeout expires, it resets
the lifetime for the dynamic binding, and the auto-detection process resumes.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect
Console(config)#
– 885 –
ND Snooping
ipv6 nd snooping This command sets the number of times the auto-detection process sends an NS
auto-detect message to determine if a dynamic user binding is still valid. Use the no form to
retransmit count restore the default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count retransmit-times
no ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count
retransmit-times – The number of times to send an NS message to
determine if a client still exists. (Range: 1-5)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Command Usage
The timeout after which the switch will delete a dynamic user binding if no RA
message is received is set to the retransmit count x the retransmit interval (see the
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit interval command). Based on the default
settings, this is 3 seconds.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count 5
Console(config)#
ipv6 nd snooping This command sets the interval between which the auto-detection process sends
auto-detect NS messages to determine if a dynamic user binding is still valid. Use the no form to
retransmit interval restore the default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit interval retransmit-interval
no ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit interval
retransmit-interval – The interval between which the switch sends an NS
message to determine if a client still exists. (Range: 1-10 seconds)
Default Setting
1 second
Command Mode
– 886 –
ND Snooping
Command Usage
The timeout after which the switch will delete a dynamic user binding if no RA
message is received is set to the retransmit count (see the ipv6 nd snooping auto-
detect retransmit count command) x the retransmit interval. Based on the default
settings, this is 3 seconds.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit interval 5
Console(config)#
ipv6 nd snooping This command sets the time to wait for an RA message before deleting an entry in
prefix timeout the prefix table. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ipv6 nd snooping prefix timeout timeout
no ipv6 nd snooping prefix timeout
timeout – The time to wait for an RA message to confirm that a prefix entry
is still valid. (Range: 3-1800 seconds)
Default Setting
Set to the valid lifetime field in received RA packet
Command Mode
Command Usage
If ND snooping is enabled and an RA message is received on a trusted interface, the
switch will add an entry in the prefix table based upon the Prefix Information
contained in the message. If an RA message is not received for a table entry with
the same prefix for the specified timeout period, the entry is deleted.
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 nd snooping prefix timeout 200
Console(config)#
– 887 –
ND Snooping
ipv6 nd snooping This command sets the maximum number of address entries in the dynamic user
max-binding binding table which can be bound to a port. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
ipv6 nd snooping max-binding max-bindings
no ipv6 nd snooping max-binding
max-bindings – The maximum number of address entries in the dynamic
user binding table which can be bound to a port. (Range: 1-5)
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Example
Console(config)#ipv6 nd snooping prefix timeout 200
Console(config)#
ipv6 nd snooping trust This command configures a port as a trusted interface from which prefix
information in RA messages can be added to the prefix table, or NS messages can
be forwarded without validation. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] ipv6 nd snooping trust
Default Setting
Not trusted
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ In general, interfaces facing toward to the network core, or toward routers
supporting the Network Discovery protocol, are configured as trusted
interfaces.
◆ RA messages received from a trusted interface are added to the prefix table and
forwarded toward their destination.
◆ NS messages received from a trusted interface are forwarded toward their

destination. Nothing is added to the dynamic user binding table.
– 888 –
ND Snooping
Example
Console(config-if)#ipv6 nd snooping trust
Console(config-if)#
clear ipv6 nd This command clears all entries in the dynamic user address binding table.
snooping binding
Syntax
clear ipv6 nd snooping binding
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear ipv6 nd snooping binding
Console#show ipv6 nd snooping binding
MAC Address IPv6 Address Lifetime VLAN Interface
-------------- -------------------------------------- ---------- ---- ---------
Console#
clear ipv6 nd This command clears all entries in the address prefix table.
snooping prefix
Syntax
clear ipv6 nd snooping prefix [interface vlan vlan-id]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear ipv6 nd snooping prefix
Console#show ipv6 nd snooping prefix
Prefix entry timeout: (seconds)
Prefix Len Valid-Time Expire VLAN Interface
-------------------------------------- --- ---------- ---------- ---- ---------
Console#
show ipv6 nd This command shows the configuration settings for ND snooping.
snooping
Syntax
show ipv6 nd snooping
– 889 –
ND Snooping
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 nd snooping
Global ND Snooping status: enabled
ND Snooping auto-detection: disabled
ND Snooping auto-detection retransmit count: 3
ND Snooping auto-detection retransmit interval: 1 (second)
ND Snooping is configured on the following VLANs:
VLAN 1,
Interface Trusted Max-binding
--------- --------- -----------
Eth 1/1 Yes 1
Eth 1/2 No 5
Eth 1/3 No 5
Eth 1/4 No 5
Eth 1/5
. No 5
.
.
show ipv6 nd This command shows all entries in the dynamic user binding table.
snooping binding
Syntax
show ipv6 nd snooping binding
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 nd snooping binding
MAC Address IPv6 Address Lifetime VLAN Interface
-------------- -------------------------------------- ---------- ---- ---------
0013-49aa-3926 2001:b001::211:95ff:fe84:cb9e 100 1 Eth 1/1
0012-cf01-0203 2001::1 3400 2 Eth 1/2
Console#
show ipv6 nd This command shows all entries in the address prefix table.
snooping prefix
Syntax
show ipv6 nd snooping prefix [interface vlan vlan-id]
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ipv6 nd snooping prefix
Prefix entry timeout: 100 (second)
– 890 –
ND Snooping
Prefix Len Valid-Time Expire VLAN Interface

-------------------------------------- --- ---------- ---------- ---- ---------
2001:b000:: 64 2592000 100 1 Eth 1/1
2001:: 64 600 34 2 Eth 1/2
Console#
– 891 –
ND Snooping
– 892 –
50 IP Routing Commands
After network interfaces are configured for the switch, the paths used to send
traffic between different interfaces must be set. If routing is enabled on the switch,
traffic will automatically be forwarded between all of the local subnetworks.
However, to forward traffic to devices on other subnetworks, either configure fixed
paths with static routing commands, or enable a dynamic routing protocol that
exchanges information with other routers on the network to automatically
determine the best path to any subnetwork.
This section includes commands for both static and dynamic routing. These
commands are used to connect between different local subnetworks or to connect
the router to the enterprise network.
Table 179: IP Routing Commands

Global Routing Configuration Configures global parameters for static and dynamic routing,
displays the routing table and statistics for protocols used to
exchange routing information
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Configures global and interface specific parameters for RIP
Global Routing Configuration

.
Table 180: Global Routing Configuration Commands

IPv4 Commands
ip route Configures static routes GC
show ip route Displays specified entries in the routing table PE
show ip route database Displays static or dynamically learned entries in the routing PE
table
show ip route summary Displays summary information for the routing table PE
show ip traffic Displays statistics for IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP protocols PE
– 893 –
Chapter 50 | IP Routing Commands
IPv4 Commands
ip route This command configures static routes. Use the no form to remove static routes.
Syntax
ip route destination-ip netmask next-hop [distance]
no ip route {destination-ip netmask next-hop | *}
destination-ip – IP address of the destination network, subnetwork, or host.
netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.
next-hop – IP address of the next hop router used for this route.
distance – An administrative distance indicating that this route can be
overridden by dynamic routing information if the distance of the dynamic
route is less than that configured for the static route. Note that the default
administrative distances used by the dynamic unicast routing protocols is
120 for RIP. (Range: 1-255, Default: 1)
* – Removes all static routing table entries.
Default Setting
No static routes are configured.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Up to 512 static routes can be configured.
◆ If an administrative distance is defined for a static route, and the same

destination can be reached through a dynamic route at a lower administration
distance, then the dynamic route will be used.
◆ If both static and dynamic paths have the same lowest cost, the first route
stored in the routing table, either statically configured or dynamically learned
via a routing protocol, will be used.
◆ Static routes are included in RIP updates periodically sent by the router if this
feature is enabled by the RIP redistribute command (see page 904).
Example
This example forwards all traffic for subnet 192.168.1.0 to the gateway router
192.168.5.254, using the default metric of 1.
Console(config)#ip route 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.5.254

Console(config)#
– 894 –
show ip route This command displays information in the Forwarding Information Base (FIB).
Syntax
show ip route [connected | database | rip | static | summary]
connected – Displays all currently connected entries.
database – All known routes, including inactive routes.
rip – Displays all entries learned through the Routing Information Protocol
(RIP).
static – Displays all static entries.
summary – Displays a brief list of summary information about entries in
the routing table, including the maximum number of entries supported,
the number of connected routes, the total number of routes currently
stored in the routing table, and the number of entries in the FIB.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
◆ The FIB contains information required to forward IP traffic. It contains the
interface identifier and next hop information for each reachable destination
network prefix based on the IP routing table. When routing or topology
changes occur in the network, the routing table is updated, and those changes
are immediately reflected in the FIB.
The FIB is distinct from the routing table (or, Routing Information Base), which
holds all routing information received from routing peers. The forwarding
information base contains unique paths only. It does not contain any secondary
paths. A FIB entry consists of the minimum amount of information necessary to
make a forwarding decision on a particular packet. The typical components
within a forwarding information base entry are a network prefix, a router port
identifier, and next hop information.
◆ This command only displays routes which are currently accessible for
forwarding. The router must be able to directly reach the next hop, so the VLAN
interface associated with any dynamic or static route entry must be up. Note
that routes currently not accessible for forwarding, may still be displayed by
using the show ip route database command.
Example
In the following example, note that the entry for RIP displays both the distance and
metric for this route.
Console#show ip route
– 895 –
* - candidate default
R 10.1.1.0/24 [120/2] via 192.168.1.10, VLAN1, 00:00:14

C 127.0.0.0/8 is directly connected, lo
C 192.168.1.0/24 is directly connected, VLAN1
Console#
show ip route This command displays entries in the Routing Information Base (RIB).
database
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The RIB contains all available routes learned through dynamic routing protocols,
directly attached networks, and any additionally configured routes such as static
routes. The RIB contains the set of all available routes from which optimal entries
are selected for use by the Forwarding Information Base (see Command Usage
under the show ip route command).
Example
Console#show ip route database
> - selected route, * - FIB route, p - stale info
C *> 127.0.0.0/8 is directly connected, lo0

C *> 192.168.1.0/24 is directly connected, VLAN1
Console#
show ip route This command displays summary information for the routing table.
summary
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
In the following example, the numeric identifier following the routing table name
(0) indicates the Forwarding Information Base identifier.
Console#show ip route summary

IP routing table name is Default-IP-Routing-Table(0)
IP routing table maximum-paths is 8
Connected 2
Total 2
Console#
– 896 –
show ip traffic This command displays statistics for IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP protocols.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip traffic
IP Statistics:
IP received
4877 total received
header errors
unknown protocols
address errors
discards
4763 delivers
reassembled succeeded
reassembled failed
IP sent
forwards datagrams
5927 requests
discards
no routes
generated fragments
fragment succeeded
fragment failed
ICMP Statistics:
ICMP received
input
errors
echo reply messages
redirect messages
ICMP sent
output
errors
echo reply messages
redirect messages
UDP Statistics:
2 input
no port errors
other errors
output
TCP Statistics:
4698 input
– 897 –
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
input errors
5867 output
Console#

.
Table 181: Routing Information Protocol Commands

router rip Enables the RIP routing protocol GC
default-information Generates a default external route into an autonomous RC

originate system
default-metric Sets the default metric assigned to external routes RC

imported from other protocols
distance Defines an administrative distance for external routes RC

learned from other routing protocols
maximum-prefix Sets the maximum number of RIP routes allowed RC
neighbor Defines a neighboring router with which to exchange RC

information
network Specifies the network interfaces that are to use RIP routing RC
passive-interface Stops RIP from sending routing updates on the specified RC

interface
redistribute Redistribute routes from one routing domain to another RC
timers basic Sets basic timers, including update, timeout, garbage RC

collection
version Specifies the RIP version to use on all network interfaces (if RC
not already specified with a receive version or send version
command)
ip rip authentication mode Specifies the type of authentication used for RIP2 packets IC
ip rip authentication string Enables authentication for RIP2 packets and specifies keys IC
ip rip receive version Sets the RIP receive version to use on a network interface IC
ip rip receive-packet Configures the interface to receive of RIP packets IC
ip rip send version Sets the RIP send version to use on a network interface IC
ip rip send-packet Configures the interface to send RIP packets IC
ip rip split-horizon Enables split-horizon or poison-reverse loop prevention IC
clear ip rip route Clears specified data from the RIP routing table PE
show ip protocols rip Displays RIP process parameters PE
show ip rip Displays information about RIP routes and configuration PE

settings
– 898 –
router rip This command enables Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routing for all IP
interfaces on the router. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] router rip
Command Mode
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Usage
◆ RIP is used to specify how routers exchange routing table information.
◆ This command is also used to enter router configuration mode.
Example
Console(config)#router rip
Console(config-router)#
Related Commands
network (903)
default-information This command generates a default external route into the local RIP autonomous
originate system. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] default-information originate
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Router Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets a default route for every Layer 3 interface where RIP is enabled.
The response packet to external queries marks each active RIP interface as a default
router with the IP address 0.0.0.0.
Example
Console(config-router)#default-information originate
– 899 –
Related Commands
ip route (894)
redistribute (904)
default-metric This command sets the default metric assigned to external routes imported from
other protocols. Use the no form to restore the default value.
Syntax
default-metric metric-value
no default-metric
metric-value – Metric assigned to external routes. (Range: 1-15)
Default Setting
1
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command does not override the metric value set by the redistribute
command. When a metric value has not been configured by the redistribute
command, the default-metric command sets the metric value to be used for
all imported external routes.
◆ The default metric must be used to resolve the problem of redistributing

external routes with incompatible metrics.
◆ It is advisable to use a low metric when redistributing routes from another

protocol into RIP. Using a high metric limits the usefulness of external routes
redistributed into RIP. For example, if a metric of 10 is defined for redistributed
routes, these routes can only be advertised to routers up to 5 hops away, at
which point the metric exceeds the maximum hop count of 15. By defining a
low metric of 1, traffic can follow a imported route the maximum number of
hops allowed within a RIP domain. However, note that using a low metric can
increase the possibility of routing loops For example, this can occur if there are
multiple redistribution points and the router learns about the same external
network with a better metric from a redistribution point other than that
derived from the original source.
Example
This example sets the default metric to 5.
Console(config-router)#default-metric 5
– 900 –
Related Commands
redistribute (904)
distance This command defines an administrative distance for external routes learned from
other routing protocols. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] distance distance network-address netmask
distance - Administrative distance for external routes. External routes are
routes for which the best path is learned from a neighbor external to the
local RIP autonomous system. Routes with a distance of 255 are not
installed in the routing table. (Range: 1-255)
network-address - IP address of a route entry.
netmask - Network mask for the route. This mask identifies the network
address bits used for the associated routing entries.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Administrative distance is used by the routers to select the preferred path when
there are two or more different routes to the same destination from two
different routing protocols. A smaller administrative distance indicates a more
reliable protocol.
◆ The administrative distance is applied to all routes learned for the specified
network.
Example
Console(config-router)#distance 2 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0
– 901 –
maximum-prefix This command sets the maximum number of RIP routes allowed by the system. Use
Syntax
maximum-prefix maximum-routes
no maximum-prefix
maximum-routes - The maximum number of RIP routes which can be
installed in the routing table. (Range: 1-11766)
Default Setting
11766
Command Mode
Command Usage
All the learned RIP routes may not be copied to the hardware tables in ASIC for fast
data forwarding because of hardware resource limitations.
Example
Console(config-router)#maximum-prefix 1024
neighbor This command defines a neighboring router with which this router will exchange
routing information. Use the no form to remove an entry.
Syntax
[no] neighbor ip-address
ip-address - IP address of a neighboring router.
Default Setting
No neighbors are defined.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command can be used to configure a static neighbor (specifically for point-
to-point links) with which this router will exchange routing information, rather
than relying on broadcast or multicast messages generated by the RIP protocol.
◆ Use this command in conjunction with the passive-interface command to

control the routing updates sent to specific neighbors.
– 902 –
Example
Console(config-router)#neighbor 10.2.0.254
Related Commands
passive-interface (904)
network This command specifies the network interfaces that will be included in the RIP
routing process. Use the no form to remove an entry.
Syntax
[no] network {ip-address netmask | vlan vlan-id}
ip-address – IP address of a network directly connected to this router.
Default Setting
No networks are specified.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ RIP only sends and receives updates on interfaces specified by this command. If
a network is not specified, the interfaces in that network will not be advertised
in any RIP updates.
◆ Subnet addresses are interpreted as class A, B or C, based on the first field in the
specified address. In other words, if a subnet address nnn.xxx.xxx.xxx is entered,
the first field (nnn) determines the class:
0 - 127 is class A, and only the first field in the network address is used.
128 - 191 is class B, and the first two fields in the network address are used.
192 - 223 is class C, and the first three fields in the network address are used.
Example
This example includes network interface 10.1.0.0 in the RIP routing process.
Console(config-router)#network 10.1.0.0
Related Commands
router rip (899)
– 903 –
passive-interface This command stops RIP from sending routing updates on the specified interface.
Syntax
[no] passive-interface vlan vlan-id
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ If this command is used to stop sending routing updates on an interface, the
attached subnet will still continue to be advertised to other interfaces, and
updates from other routers on that interface will continue to be received and
processed.
◆ Use this command in conjunction with the neighbor command to control the
routing updates sent to specific neighbors.
Example
Console(config-router)#passive-interface vlan1
Related Commands
neighbor (902)
redistribute This command imports external routing information from other routing domains
(that is, directly connected routes, protocols, or static routes) into the autonomous
system. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] redistribute (connected | static} [metric metric-value]
connected - Imports routes that are established automatically just by
enabling IP on an interface.
static - Static routes will be imported into this routing domain.
metric-value - Metric value assigned to all external routes for the specified
protocol. (Range: 1-16)
Default Setting
redistribution - none
metric-value - set by the default-metric command
– 904 –
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When a metric value has not been configured by the redistribute command,
the default-metric command sets the metric value to be used for all imported
external routes.
◆ A route metric must be used to resolve the problem of redistributing external

routes with incompatible metrics.
◆ It is advisable to use a low metric when redistributing routes from another

protocol into RIP. Using a high metric limits the usefulness of external routes
redistributed into RIP. For example, if a metric of 10 is defined for redistributed
routes, these routes can only be advertised to routers up to 5 hops away, at
which point the metric exceeds the maximum hop count of 15. By defining a
low metric of 1, traffic can follow a imported route the maximum number of
hops allowed within a RIP domain. However, using a low metric can increase
the possibility of routing loops For example, this can occur if there are multiple
redistribution points and the router learns about the same external network
with a better metric from a redistribution point other than that derived from
the original source.
Example
This example redistributes static routes and sets the metric for all of these routes to
a value of 3.
Console(config-router)#redistribute static metric 3

Related Commands
default-metric (900)
– 905 –
timers basic This command configures the RIP update timer, timeout timer, and garbage-
collection timer. Use the no form to restore the defaults.
Syntax
timers basic update timeout garbage
no timers basic
update – Sets the update timer to the specified value.
timeout – Sets the timeout timer to the specified value. (Range: 90-360
seconds)
garbage – Sets the garbage collection timer to the specified value.
Default Setting
Update: 30 seconds
Timeout: 180 seconds
Garbage collection: 120 seconds
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The update timer sets the rate at which updates are sent. This is the
fundamental timer used to control all basic RIP processes.
◆ The timeout timer is the time after which there have been no update messages
that a route is declared dead. The route is marked inaccessible (i.e., the metric
set to infinite) and advertised as unreachable. However, packets are still
forwarded on this route.
◆ After the timeout interval expires, the router waits for an interval specified by
the garbage-collection timer before removing this entry from the routing table.
This timer allows neighbors to become aware of an invalid route prior to it
being purged by this device.
◆ Setting the update timer to a short interval can cause the router to spend an
excessive amount of time processing updates.
◆ These timers must be set to the same values for all routers in the network.
Example
This example sets the update timer to 40 seconds. The timeout timer is
subsequently set to 240 seconds, and the garbage-collection timer to 160 seconds.
Console(config-router)#timers basic 15
– 906 –
version This command specifies a RIP version used globally by the router. Use the no form
to restore the default value.
Syntax
version {1 | 2}
no version
1 - RIP Version 1
2 - RIP Version 2
Default Setting
Receive: Accepts RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets
Send: Route information is broadcast to other routers with RIPv2.
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ When this command is used to specify a global RIP version, any VLAN interface
not previously set by the ip rip receive version or ip rip send version command
will use the global RIP version setting.
◆ When the no form of this command is used to restore the default value, any
VLAN interface not previously set by the ip rip receive version or ip rip send
version command will be set to the default send or receive version.
◆ Any configured interface settings take precedence over the global settings.
Example
This example sets the global version for RIP to send and receive version 2 packets.
Console(config-router)#version 2
Related Commands
ip rip receive version (909)
ip rip send version (911)
– 907 –
ip rip authentication This command specifies the type of authentication that can be used for RIPv2
mode packets. Use the no form to restore the default value.
Syntax
ip rip authentication mode {md5 | text}
no ip rip authentication mode
md5 - Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication
text - Indicates that a simple password will be used.
Default Setting
Text authentication
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ The password to be used for authentication is specified in the ip rip
authentication string command.
◆ This command requires the interface to exchange routing information with

other routers based on an authorized password. (Note that this command only
applies to RIPv2.)
◆ For authentication to function properly, both the sending and receiving

interface must be configured with the same password or authentication key.
◆ MD5 is a one-way hash algorithm is that takes the authentication key and
produces a 128 bit message digest or “fingerprint.” This makes it
computationally infeasible to produce two messages having the same message
digest, or to produce any message having a given pre-specified target message
digest.
Example
This example sets the authentication mode to plain text.
Console(config-if)#ip rip authentication mode text
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip rip authentication string (909)
– 908 –
ip rip authentication This command specifies an authentication key for RIPv2 packets. Use the no form to
string delete the authentication key.
Syntax
ip rip authentication string key-string
no ip rip authentication string
key-string - A password used for authentication.
(Range: 1-16 characters, case sensitive)
Default Setting
No authentication key
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ This command can be used to restrict the interfaces that can exchange RIPv2
routing information. (Note that this command does not apply to RIPv1.)
◆ For authentication to function properly, both the sending and receiving

interface must be configured with the same password, and authentication
enabled by the ip rip authentication mode command.
Example
This example sets an authentication password of “small” to verify incoming routing
messages and to tag outgoing routing messages.
Console(config-if)#ip rip authentication string small
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip rip authentication mode (908)
ip rip receive version This command specifies a RIP version to receive on an interface. Use the no form to
Syntax
ip rip receive version {1 | 2}
no ip rip receive version
1 - Accepts only RIPv1 packets.
2 - Accepts only RIPv2 packets.
– 909 –
Default Setting
RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to override the global setting specified by the RIP version
command.
◆ You can specify the receive version based on these options:
■ Use version 1 or version 2 if all routers in the local network are based on
RIPv1 or RIPv2, respectively.
■ Use the default of version 1 or 2 if some routers in the local network are
using RIPv2, but there are still some older routers using RIPv1.
Example
This example sets the interface version for VLAN 1 to receive RIPv1 packets.
Console(config-if)#ip rip receive version 1
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
version (907)
ip rip receive-packet This command configures the interface to receive RIP packets. Use the no form to
Syntax
[no] ip rip receive-packet
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Default Setting
Enabled
– 910 –
Command Usage
Use the no form of this command if it is not required to add any dynamic entries to
the routing table for an interface. For example, when only static routes are to be
allowed for a specific interface.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip rip receive-packet
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip rip send-packet (912)
ip rip send version This command specifies a RIP version to send on an interface. Use the no form to
Syntax
ip rip send version {1 | 2 | 1-compatible}
no ip rip send version
1 - Sends only RIPv1 packets.
2 - Sends only RIPv2 packets.
1-compatible - Route information is broadcast to other routers with RIPv2.
Default Setting
1-compatible (Route information is broadcast to other routers with RIPv2)
Command Mode
Command Usage
◆ Use this command to override the global setting specified by the RIP version
command.
◆ You can specify the send version based on these options:

■ Use version 1 or version 2 if all routers in the local network are based on
RIPv1 or RIPv2, respectively.
■ Use “1-compatible” to propagate route information by broadcasting to
other routers on the network using RIPv2, instead of multicasting as
normally required by RIPv2. (Using this mode allows older RIPv2 routers
which only receive RIP broadcast messages to receive all of the information
provided by RIPv2, including subnet mask, next hop and authentication
information.)
– 911 –
Example
This example sets the interface version for VLAN 1 to send RIPv1 packets.
Console(config-if)#ip rip send version 1
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
version (907)
ip rip send-packet This command configures the interface to send RIP packets. Use the no form to
[no] ip rip send-packet
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Usage
The no form of this command allows the router to passively monitor route
information advertised by other routers attached to the network, without
transmitting any RIP updates.
Example
Console(config-if)#ip rip send-packet
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip rip receive-packet (910)
ip rip split-horizon This command enables split-horizon or poison-reverse (a variation) on an interface.

Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
ip rip split-horizon [poisoned]
no rip ip split-horizon
poisoned - Enables poison-reverse on the current interface.
– 912 –
Command Mode
Default Setting
split-horizon poisoned
Command Usage
◆ Split horizon never propagates routes back to an interface from which they
have been acquired.
◆ Poison reverse propagates routes back to an interface port from which they
have been acquired, but sets the distance-vector metrics to infinity. (This
provides faster convergence.)
◆ If split-horizon is disabled with the no rip ip split-horizon command, and a

loop occurs, the hop count for a route may be gradually incremented to infinity
(that is, 16) before the route is deemed unreachable.
Example
This example propagates routes back to the source using poison-reverse.
Console(config-if)#ip split-horizon poison-reverse
Console(config-if)#
clear ip rip route This command clears specified data from the RIP routing table.
Syntax
clear ip rip route {ip-address netmask | all | connected | rip | static}
ip-address - IP address of a route entry.
all - Deletes all entries from the routing table.
connected - Deletes all currently connected entries.
rip - Deletes all entries learned through the Routing Information Protocol.
static - Deletes all static entries.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
– 913 –
Command Usage
Using this command with the “all” parameter clears the RIP table of all routes. To
avoid deleting the entire RIP network, use the redistribute connected command to
make the RIP network a connected route. To delete the RIP routes learned from
neighbors and also keep the RIP network intact, use the “rip” parameter with this
command (clear ip rip route rip).
Example
This example clears one specific route.
Console#clear ip rip route 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0

Console#
show ip protocols rip This command displays RIP process parameters.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip protocols rip
Routing Protocol is "rip"
Sending updates every 30 seconds with +/-5 seconds
Timeout after 180 seconds, garbage collect after 120 seconds
Outgoing update filter list for all interface is not set
Incoming update filter list for all interface is not set
Default redistribution metric is 1
Redistributing:
Default version control: send version by interface set,receive version by
interface set
Interface Send Recv
VLAN1 1-compatible 1 2
Routing for Networks:
10.0.0.0/24
Routing Information Sources:
Gateway Distance Last Update Bad Packets Bad Routes
10.0.0.2 120 00:00:13 0 0
The maximum number of RIP routes allowed: 11766
Distance: Default is 120
Console#
show ip rip This command displays information about RIP routes and configuration settings.
Use this command without any keywords to display all RIP routes.
Syntax
show ip rip [interface [vlan vlan-id]]
interface - Shows RIP configuration settings for all interfaces or for a
specified interface.
– 914 –
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip rip
Codes: R - RIP, Rc - RIP connected, Rs - RIP static,

C - Connected, S - Static, O - OSPF
Network Next Hop Metric From Interface Time

Rc 192.168.0.0/24 1 VLAN1 01:57
Console#show ip rip interface vlan 1
Interface: vlan1
Routing Protocol: RIP
Receive RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets
Send RIPv1 Compatible
Passive interface: Disabled
Authentication mode: (None)
Authentication string: (None)
Split horizon: Enabled with Poisoned Reverse
IP interface address: 192.168.0.2/24
Console#
– 915 –
– 916 –
Section III
Appendices
This section provides additional information and includes these items:
◆ “Troubleshooting” on page 919
◆ “License Information” on page 921
– 917 –
Section III | Appendices
– 918 –
A Troubleshooting
Problems Accessing the Management Interface

Table 182: Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom Action
Cannot connect using ◆ Be sure the switch is powered up.

Telnet, or SNMP software ◆ Check network cabling between the management station and the
switch. Make sure the ends are properly connected and there is no
damage to the cable. Test the cable if necessary.
◆ Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and
that the port you are using has not been disabled.
◆ Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the
management station is connected with a valid IP address, subnet
mask and default gateway.
◆ Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same
subnet as the switch’s IP interface to which it is connected.
◆ If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a
tagged VLAN group, your management station, and the ports
connecting intermediate switches in the network, must be
configured with the appropriate tag.
◆ If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the
maximum number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try
connecting again at a later time.
Cannot connect using ◆ If you cannot connect using SSH, you may have exceeded the
Secure Shell maximum number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try
connecting again at a later time.
◆ Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly
configured on the switch, and that the SSH client software is
properly configured on the management station.
◆ Be sure you have generated both an RSA and DSA public key on the
switch, exported this key to the SSH client, and enabled SSH service.
Try using another SSH client or check for updates to your SSH client
application.
◆ Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user,
including user name, authentication level, and password.
◆ Be sure you have imported the client’s public key to the switch (if
public key authentication is used).
Cannot access the on- ◆ Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100
board configuration compatible, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and the baud rate set to
program via a serial port 115200 bps.
connection ◆ Verify that you are using the RJ-45 to DB-9 null-modem serial cable
supplied with the switch. If you use any other cable, be sure that it
conforms to the pin-out connections provided in the Installation
Guide.
Forgot or lost the password ◆ Contact your local distributor.
– 919 –
Appendix A | Troubleshooting
Using System Logs
Using System Logs

If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you
encountered is actually caused by the switch. If the problem appears to be caused
by the switch, follow these steps:
1. Enable logging.
2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories.
3. Enable SNMP.
4. Enable SNMP traps.
5. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages.
6. Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error.
7. Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a
list of any error messages displayed.
8. Set up your terminal emulation software so that it can capture all console
output to a file. Then enter the “show tech-support” command to record all
system settings in this file.
9. Contact your distributor’s service engineer, and send a detailed description of

the problem, along with the file used to record your system settings.
For example:
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#logging history flash 7
Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.23
.
.
.
– 920 –
B License Information
This product includes copyrighted third-party software subject to the terms of the GNU General Public
License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), or other related free software licenses.
The GPL code used in this product is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY and is subject to the
copyrights of one or more authors. For details, refer to the section "The GNU General Public License"
below, or refer to the applicable license as included in the source-code archive.
The GNU General Public License

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it
is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors
commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library
General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses
are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you
can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do
these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that
there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on,
we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced
by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger
that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
– 921 –
Appendix B | License Information
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
"Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term
"modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of
having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program
does.
2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to
this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a
copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is
derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all
third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause
it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display
an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no
warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work
are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or
with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not
bring the other work under the scope of this License.
4. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code
or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of
the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
– 922 –
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it
contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
along with the object code.
5. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who
have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
6. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do
so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works
based on it.
7. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on
the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this License.
8. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-
free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in
other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and
a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the
rest of this License.
– 923 –
9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
10. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the
Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
11. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving
the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
1. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
2. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
– 924 –
Glossary
ACL Access Control List. ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or
devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information.
ARP Address Resolution Protocol converts between IP addresses and MAC (hardware) addresses.
ARP is used to locate the MAC address corresponding to a given IP address. This allows the
switch to use IP addresses for routing decisions and the corresponding MAC addresses to
forward packets from one hop to the next.
BOOTP Boot Protocol. BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including
IP address information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files,
and the name of the boot file.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol is a protocol used to make core routing decisions on the Internet.
It maintains a table of IP networks to register reachability among autonomous systems (AS).
BGP makes routing decisions based on path, network policies and/or rule-sets.
CoS Class of Service is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service,
and then placing them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the
queues using weighted round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent
blockage of lower-level queues. Priority may be set according to the port default, the
packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port number, IP Precedence bit, or DSCP
priority bit.
DHCP Dynamic Host Control Protocol. Provides a framework for passing configuration information
to hosts on a TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the
capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional
configuration options.
DHCP Option 82 A relay option for sending information about the requesting client (or an intermediate relay
agent) in the DHCP request packets forwarded by the switch and in reply packets sent back
from the DHCP server. This information can be used by DHCP servers to assign fixed IP
addresses, or set other services or policies for clients.
DHCP Snooping A technique used to enhance network security by snooping on DHCP server messages to
track the physical location of hosts, ensure that hosts only use the IP addresses assigned to
them, and ensure that only authorized DHCP servers are accessible.
– 925 –
Glossary
DiffServ Differentiated Services provides quality of service on large networks by employing a well-
defined set of building blocks from which a variety of aggregate forwarding behaviors may
be built. Each packet carries information (DS byte) used by each hop to give it a particular
forwarding treatment, or per-hop behavior, at each network node. DiffServ allocates
different levels of service to users on the network with mechanisms such as traffic meters,
shapers/droppers, packet markers at the boundaries of the network.
DNS Domain Name Service. A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP
addresses.
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point Service. DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64
different forwarding behaviors. Based on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service
categories, and then into the output queues.
EAPOL Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN. EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used
by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the
switch. A user name and password is requested by the switch, and then passed to an
authentication server (e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is implemented as part of the
IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication standard.
EUI Extended Universal Identifier is an address format used by IPv6 to identify the host portion
of the network address. The interface identifier in EUI compatible addresses is based on the
link-layer (MAC) address of an interface. Interface identifiers used in global unicast and
other IPv6 address types are 64 bits long and may be constructed in the EUI-64 format. The
modified EUI-64 format interface ID is derived from a 48-bit link-layer address by inserting
the hexadecimal number FFFE between the upper three bytes (OUI field) and the lower 3
bytes (serial number) of the link layer address. To ensure that the chosen address is from a
unique Ethernet MAC address, the 7th bit in the high-order byte is set to 1 (equivalent to
the IEEE Global/Local bit) to indicate the uniqueness of the 48-bit address.
GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol. GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations
and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a
switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a
switched LAN containing registered endstations. Formerly called Group Address
Registration Protocol.
GMRP Generic Multicast Registration Protocol. GMRP allows network devices to register end
stations with multicast groups. GMRP requires that any participating network devices or
end stations comply with the IEEE 802.1p standard.
GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol. Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN
information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree
so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network.
– 926 –
Glossary
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is a network layer protocol that reports errors in
processing IP packets. ICMP is also used by routers to feed back information about better
routing choices.
IEEE 802.1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the Spanning Tree
Protocol.
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It allows
switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a standard way for
VLANs to communicate across switched networks.
IEEE 802.1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The standard
uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit
packets based on the tagged priority value.
IEEE 802.1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) which provides
independent spanning trees for VLAN groups.
IEEE 802.1w An IEEE standard for the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) which reduces the
convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of that required by the older
IEEE 802.1D STP standard. (Now incorporated in IEEE 802.1D-2004)
IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a
user ID and password for authentication.
IEEE 802.3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.
IEEE 802.3x Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on full-duplex
links. (Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002)
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol. A protocol through which hosts can register with
their local router for multicast services. If there is more than one multicast switch/router on
a given subnetwork, one of the devices is made the “querier” and assumes responsibility for
keeping track of group membership.
IGMP Proxy Proxies multicast group membership information onto the upstream interface based on
IGMP messages monitored on downstream interfaces, and forwards multicast traffic based
on that information. There is no need for multicast routing protocols in an simple tree that
uses IGMP Proxy.
– 927 –
Glossary
IGMP Query On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the device
that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they
already belong. The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the
subnetwork.
IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers
and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.
In-Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network.
IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts.
IP Precedence The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining
eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to
lowest priority for routine traffic. The eight values are mapped one-to-one to the Class of
Service categories by default, but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for
specific network applications.
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol. Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link
with LACP-configured ports on another device.
Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related directly to
the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses.
Layer 3 Network layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This layer handles the
routing functions for data moving from one open system to another.
Link Aggregation See Port Trunk.
LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol is used to discover basic information about neighboring
devices in the local broadcast domain by using periodic broadcasts to advertise information
such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings.
MD5 MD5 Message-Digest is an algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended
for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken.
MD5 is a one-way hash function, meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a
fixed string of digits, also called a message digest.
– 928 –
Glossary
MIB Management Information Base. An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of
database objects that contains information about a specific device.
MRD Multicast Router Discovery is a A protocol used by IGMP snooping and multicast routing
devices to discover which interfaces are attached to multicast routers. This process allows
IGMP-enabled devices to determine where to send multicast source and group
membership messages.
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol can provide an independent spanning tree for different
VLANs. It simplifies network management, provides for even faster convergence than RSTP
by limiting the size of each region, and prevents VLAN members from being segmented
from the rest of the group.
Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no
attached host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated
multicast VLAN group.
MVR Multicast VLAN Registration is a method of using a single network-wide multicast VLAN to
transmit common services, such as such as television channels or video-on-demand, across
a service-provider’s network. MVR simplifies the configuration of multicast services by using
a common VLAN for distribution, while still preserving security and data isolation for
subscribers residing in both the MVR VLAN and other standard groups.
NTP Network Time Protocol provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network.
The time servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to
synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio.
OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link-state routing protocol that functions better over a larger
network such as the Internet, as opposed to distance-vector routing protocols such as RIP. It
includes features such as unlimited hop count, authentication of routing updates, and
Variable Length Subnet Masks (VLSM).
Out-of-Band Management of the network from a station not attached to the network.
Management
Port Authentication See IEEE 802.1X.
Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting
with a logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target port to be studied
unobstructively.
– 929 –
Glossary
Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a
single high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical links.
QinQ QinQ tunneling is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers
across their networks. It is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol
configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs.
QoS Quality of Service. QoS refers to the capability of a network to provide better service to
selected traffic flows using features such as data prioritization, queuing, congestion
avoidance and traffic shaping. These features effectively provide preferential treatment to
specific flows either by raising the priority of one flow or limiting the priority of another
flow.
RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service. RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that
uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on
the network.
RIP Routing Information Protocol seeks to find the shortest route to another device by
minimizing the distance-vector, or hop count, which serves as a rough estimate of
transmission cost. RIP-2 is a compatible upgrade to RIP. It adds useful capabilities for subnet
routing, authentication, and multicast transmissions.
RMON Remote Monitoring. RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It

eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic
conditions, including specific error types.
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology
changes to about 10% of that required by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a standard host-to-host mail transport protocol that
operates over TCP, port 25.
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. The application protocol in the Internet suite of
protocols which offers network management services.
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic
updates from a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a
specific NTP server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.
– 930 –
Glossary
SSH Secure Shell is a secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can
authenticate users with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between
management clients and the switch.
STA Spanning Tree Algorithm is a technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can
often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and
directs data along the shortest available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency
of the network.
TACACS+ Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus. TACACS+ is a logon authentication
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS-
compliant devices on the network.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Protocol suite that includes TCP as the
primary transport protocol, and IP as the network layer protocol.
Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP/IP.
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.
UDP User Datagram Protocol. UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched
communications. It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP-
like services. UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets – connection-less datagrams that
may be discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is useful when TCP would be too
complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.
UTC Universal Time Coordinate. UTC is a time scale that couples Greenwich Mean Time (based
solely on the Earth’s rotation rate) with highly accurate atomic time. The UTC does not have
daylight saving time.
VLAN Virtual LAN. A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision
domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN
serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers, and allows users to share
information and resources as though located on the same LAN.
VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol uses a virtual IP address to support a primary router
and multiple backup routers. The backups can be configured to take over the workload if
the master fails or to load share the traffic. The primary goal of VRRP is to allow a host device
which has been configured with a fixed gateway to maintain network connectivity in case
the primary gateway goes down.
– 931 –
Glossary
XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices. Data is grouped in 128-byte blocks and
error-corrected.
– 932 –
Index of CLI Commands
aaa accounting commands 238 clear access-list hardware counters 395

aaa accounting dot1x 239 clear arp-cache 854
aaa accounting exec 240 clear collision-mac-address-table 496
aaa accounting update 241 clear counters 409
aaa authorization exec 242 clear dns cache 826
aaa group server 243 clear efm oam counters 814
absolute 173 clear efm oam event-log 814
access-list arp 393 clear erps statistics 553
access-list ip 372 clear ethernet cfm ais mpid 779
access-list ipv6 379 clear ethernet cfm errors 791
access-list mac 386 clear ethernet cfm linktrace-cache 800
accounting commands 244 clear ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote 790
accounting dot1x 244 clear host 826
accounting exec 245 clear ip dhcp snooping binding 327
alias 401 clear ip dhcp snooping database flash 327
arp 851 clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic 660
arp timeout 852 clear ip igmp snooping statistics 661
authentication enable 228 clear ip rip route 913
authentication login 229 clear ip source-guard binding blocked 344
authorization exec 245 clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding 336
auto-traffic-control 469 clear ipv6 dhcp snooping statistics 337
auto-traffic-control action 469 clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic 686
auto-traffic-control alarm-clear-threshold 470 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics 687
auto-traffic-control alarm-fire-threshold 471 clear ipv6 nd snooping binding 889
auto-traffic-control apply-timer 467 clear ipv6 nd snooping prefix 889
auto-traffic-control auto-control-release 472 clear ipv6 neighbors 880
auto-traffic-control control-release 473 clear ipv6 traffic 873
auto-traffic-control release-timer 468 clear log 152
banner configure 103 clear mac-address-table dynamic 496
banner configure company 104 clear mrv groups dynamic 710
banner configure dc-power-info 105 clear mrv statistics 710
banner configure department 105 clear mvr6 groups dynamic 732
banner configure equipment-info 106 clear mvr6 statistics 733
banner configure equipment-location 107 clear network-access 307
banner configure ip-lan 107 clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics 285
banner configure lp-number 108 clock summer-time (date) 166
banner configure manager-info 109 clock summer-time (predefined) 167
banner configure mux 109 clock summer-time (recurring) 168
banner configure note 110 clock timezone 170
boot system 125 cluster 176
bridge-ext gvrp 564 cluster commander 177
calendar set 171 cluster ip-pool 178
capabilities 402 cluster member 178
channel-group 434 configure 97
class 628 control-vlan 534
class-map 624 copy 126
– 933 –
databits 138 erps 533

default-information originate 899 erps clear 553
default-metric 900 erps domain 534
delete 129 erps forced-switch 554
delete public-key 258 erps manual-switch 556
description 625 ethernet cfm ais level 770
description 403 ethernet cfm ais ma 771
dir 130 ethernet cfm ais period 772
disable 98 ethernet cfm ais suppress alarm 772
discard 403 ethernet cfm cc enable 788
disconnect 145 ethernet cfm cc ma interval 787
distance 901 ethernet cfm delay-measure two-way 806
dos-protection echo-chargen 361 ethernet cfm domain 773
dos-protection smurf 361 ethernet cfm enable 775
dos-protection tcp-flooding 362 ethernet cfm linktrace 798
dos-protection tcp-null-scan 362 ethernet cfm linktrace cache 796
dos-protection tcp-syn-fin-scan 363 ethernet cfm linktrace cache hold-time 797
dos-protection tcp-udp-port-zero 363 ethernet cfm linktrace cache size 798
dos-protection tcp-xmas-scan 364 ethernet cfm loopback 801
dos-protection udp-flooding 364 ethernet cfm mep 778
dos-protection win-nuke 365 ethernet cfm mep crosscheck 795
dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control 580 ethernet cfm mep crosscheck start-delay 793
dot1x default 263 ethernet cfm port-enable 779
dot1x eapol-pass-through 264 exec-timeout 139
dot1x identity profile 271 exit 99
dot1x intrusion-action 265 fan-speed force-full 122
dot1x max-reauth-req 265 flowcontrol 404
dot1x max-req 266 garp timer 565
dot1x max-start 272 guard-timer 536
dot1x operation-mode 266 history 405
dot1x pae supplicant 272 holdoff-timer 537
dot1x port-control 267 hostname 102
dot1x re-authenticate 270 interface 400
dot1x re-authentication 268 interface vlan 572
dot1x system-auth-control 264 ip access-group (Global Configuration) 373
dot1x timeout auth-period 273 ip access-group (Interface Configuration) 377
dot1x timeout held-period 273 ip address 844
dot1x timeout quiet-period 268 ip arp inspection 352
dot1x timeout re-authperiod 269 ip arp inspection filter 353
dot1x timeout start-period 274 ip arp inspection limit 357
dot1x timeout supp-timeout 269 ip arp inspection log-buffer logs 354
dot1x timeout tx-period 270 ip arp inspection trust 357
efm oam 810 ip arp inspection validate 355
efm oam critical-link-event 810 ip arp inspection vlan 356
efm oam link-monitor frame threshold 812 ip default-gateway 846
efm oam link-monitor frame window 812 ip dhcp client class-id 831
efm oam link-monitor frame 811 ip dhcp dynamic-provision 830
efm oam mode 813 ip dhcp relay server 837
efm oam remote-loopback 815 ip dhcp restart client 833
efm oam remote-loopback test 816 ip dhcp restart relay 838
enable 535 ip dhcp snooping 317
enable 95 ip dhcp snooping database flash 328
enable password 224 ip dhcp snooping information option 319
end 99 ip dhcp snooping information option circuit-id 325
– 934 –
ip dhcp snooping information option encode no-subtype ip rip send-packet 912

320 ip rip split-horizon 912
ip dhcp snooping information option remote-id 321 ip route 894
ip dhcp snooping information option tr101 board-id 322 ip source-guard 341
ip dhcp snooping information policy 322 ip source-guard binding 339
ip dhcp snooping limit rate 323 ip source-guard max-binding 343
ip dhcp snooping trust 326 ip source-guard mode 343
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address 323 ip ssh authentication-retries 256
ip dhcp snooping vlan 324 ip ssh crypto host-key generate 259
ip domain-list 821 ip ssh crypto zeroize 259
ip domain-lookup 822 ip ssh save host-key 260
ip domain-name 823 ip ssh server 256
ip host 824 ip ssh server-key size 257
ip http port 247 ip ssh timeout 257
ip http secure-port 248 ip telnet max-sessions 251
ip http secure-server 249 ip telnet port 251
ip http server 248 ip telnet server 252
ip igmp authentication 670 ip tftp retry 135
ip igmp filter (Global Configuration) 668 ip tftp timeout 136
ip igmp filter (Interface Configuration) 672 ipv6 access-group (Global Configuration) 380
ip igmp max-groups 673 ipv6 access-group (Interface Configuration) 384
ip igmp max-groups action 673 ipv6 address 857
ip igmp profile 669 ipv6 address autoconfig 858
ip igmp query-drop 674 ipv6 address eui-64 860
ip igmp snooping 645 ipv6 address link-local 862
ip igmp snooping priority 645 ipv6 default-gateway 856
ip igmp snooping proxy-reporting 646 ipv6 dhcp client rapid-commit vlan 834
ip igmp snooping querier 647 ipv6 dhcp relay destination 839
ip igmp snooping router-alert-option-check 647 ipv6 dhcp restart client vlan 834
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 648 ipv6 dhcp snooping 330
ip igmp snooping tcn-flood 648 ipv6 dhcp snooping max-binding 335
ip igmp snooping tcn-query-solicit 650 ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id 332
ip igmp snooping unregistered-data-flood 650 ipv6 dhcp snooping option remote-id policy 333
ip igmp snooping unsolicited-report-interval 651 ipv6 dhcp snooping trust 335
ip igmp snooping version 652 ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan 334
ip igmp snooping version-exclusive 652 ipv6 enable 863
ip igmp snooping vlan general-query-suppression 653 ipv6 hop-limit 876
ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave 654 ipv6 host 825
ip igmp snooping vlan last-memb-query-count 655 ipv6 mld filter (Global Configuration) 690
ip igmp snooping vlan last-memb-query-intvl 655 ipv6 mld filter (Interface Configuration) 693
ip igmp snooping vlan mrd 656 ipv6 mld max-groups 693
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 666 ipv6 mld max-groups action 694
ip igmp snooping vlan proxy-address 657 ipv6 mld profile 691
ip igmp snooping vlan query-interval 658 ipv6 mld query-drop 695
ip igmp snooping vlan query-resp-intvl 659 ipv6 mld snooping 680
ip igmp snooping vlan static 660 ipv6 mld snooping querier 680
ip multicast-data-drop 674 ipv6 mld snooping query-interval 681
ip name-server 824 ipv6 mld snooping query-max-response-time 681
ip proxy-arp 853 ipv6 mld snooping robustness 682
ip rip authentication mode 908 ipv6 mld snooping router-port-expire-time 683
ip rip authentication string 909 ipv6 mld snooping unknown-multicast mode 683
ip rip receive version 909 ipv6 mld snooping version 684
ip rip receive-packet 910 ipv6 mld snooping vlan immediate-leave 684
ip rip send version 911 ipv6 mld snooping vlan mrouter 685
– 935 –
ipv6 mld snooping vlan static 686 lldp tx-delay 746

ipv6 mtu 864 logging facility 148
ipv6 multicast-data-drop 695 logging history 149
ipv6 nd dad attempts 876 logging host 150
ipv6 nd ns-interval 878 logging on 150
ipv6 nd raguard 879 logging sendmail 155
ipv6 nd reachable-time 880 logging sendmail destination-email 157
ipv6 nd snooping 884 logging sendmail host 155
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect 885 logging sendmail level 156
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit count 886 logging sendmail source-email 157
ipv6 nd snooping auto-detect retransmit interval 886 logging trap 151
ipv6 nd snooping max-binding 888 login 140
ipv6 nd snooping prefix timeout 887 loopback detection trap 482
ipv6 nd snooping trust 888 loopback-detection 480
ipv6 source-guard 348 loopback-detection action 480
ipv6 source-guard binding 346 loopback-detection recover-time 481
ipv6 source-guard max-binding 349 loopback-detection release 483
jumbo frame 122 loopback-detection transmit-interval 482
l2protocol-tunnel tunnel-dmac 586 ma index name 776
lacp 435 ma index name-format 777
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface) 436 mac access-group (Global Configuration) 387
lacp admin-key (Port Channel) 438 mac access-group (Interface Configuration) 391
lacp port-priority 437 mac-address-table aging-time 493
lacp system-priority 438 mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth 494
lacp timeout 439 mac-address-table static 495
line 138 mac-authentication intrusion-action 306
lldp 743 mac-authentication max-mac-count 306
lldp admin-status 747 mac-authentication reauth-time 298
lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address 747 mac-learning 290
lldp basic-tlv port-description 748 mac-vlan 599
lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities 748 major-domain 537
lldp basic-tlv system-description 749 management 277
lldp basic-tlv system-name 749 match 626
lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident 750 max-hops 510
lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid 750 maximum-prefix 902
lldp dot1-tlv pvid 751 media-type 406
lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name 751 meg-level 538
lldp dot3-tlv link-agg 752 memory 206
lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy 752 mep archive-hold-time 790
lldp dot3-tlv max-frame 753 mep crosscheck mpid 794
lldp dot3-tlv poe 753 mep fault-notify alarm-time 802
lldp holdtime-multiplier 743 mep fault-notify lowest-priority 803
lldp med-fast-start-count 744 mep fault-notify reset-time 804
lldp med-location civic-addr 754 mep-monitor 539
lldp med-notification 756 mst priority 511
lldp med-tlv ext-poe 756 mst vlan 512
lldp med-tlv inventory 757 mvr 699
lldp med-tlv location 757 mvr associated-profile 700
lldp med-tlv med-cap 758 mvr domain 700
lldp med-tlv network-policy 758 mvr immediate-leave 707
lldp notification 759 mvr priority 701
lldp notification-interval 744 mvr profile 702
lldp refresh-interval 745 mvr proxy-query-interval 703
lldp reinit-delay 745 mvr proxy-switching 703
– 936 –
mvr robustness-value 704 permit, deny (MAC ACL) 387

mvr source-port-mode dynamic 705 permit, deny (Standard IP ACL) 374
mvr type 708 permit, deny (Standard Pv6 ACL) 381
mvr upstream-source-ip 706 ping 850
mvr vlan 706 ping6 873
mvr vlan group 709 police flow 630
mvr6 associated-profile 722 police srtcm-color 631
mvr6 domain 723 police trtcm-color 634
mvr6 immediate-leave 729 policy-map 628
mvr6 priority 723 port channel load-balance 432
mvr6 profile 724 port monitor 451
mvr6 proxy-query-interval 725 port security 291
mvr6 proxy-switching 725 port security mac-address-as-permanent 293
mvr6 robustness-value 727 power inline 445
mvr6 source-port-mode dynamic 727 power inline maximum allocation 446
mvr6 type 730 power inline priority 447
mvr6 upstream-source-ip 728 power-save 428
mvr6 vlan 729 pppoe intermediate-agent 280
mvr6 vlan group 731 pppoe intermediate-agent format-type 281
name 512 pppoe intermediate-agent port-enable 281
negotiation 407 pppoe intermediate-agent port-format-type 282
neighbor 902 pppoe intermediate-agent port-format-type remote-id-
network 903 delimiter 283
network-access aging 296 pppoe intermediate-agent trust 284
network-access dynamic-qos 298 pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip 284
network-access dynamic-vlan 299 privilege 227
network-access guest-vlan 300 process cpu 206
network-access link-detection 301 prompt 93
network-access link-detection link-down 301 propagate-tc 545
network-access link-detection link-up 302 protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Groups) 593
network-access link-detection link-up-down 303 protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Interfaces) 594
network-access mac-filter 297 qos map cos-dscp 614
network-access max-mac-count 303 qos map dscp-mutation 616
network-access mode mac-authentication 304 qos map phb-queue 617
network-access port-mac-filter 305 qos map trust-mode 618
nlm 203 queue mode 610
no rspan session 459 queue weight 611
node-id 540 quit 96
non-erps-dev-protect 540 radius-server acct-port 230
non-revertive 542 radius-server auth-port 231
ntp authenticate 162 radius-server host 231
ntp authentication-key 163 radius-server key 232
ntp client 164 radius-server retransmit 233
ntp server 164 radius-server timeout 233
parity 141 range 670
passive-interface 904 range 692
password 141 raps-def-mac 546
password-thresh 142 raps-without-vc 547
periodic 174 rate-limit 462
permit, deny 669 rcommand 179
permit, deny 691 redistribute 904
permit, deny (ARP ACL) 394 reload (Global Configuration) 94
permit, deny (Extended IPv4 ACL) 375 reload (Privileged Exec) 98
permit, deny (Extended IPv6 ACL) 382 rename 627
– 937 –
revision 513 show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local 783

ring-port 549 show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local detail mep
rmon alarm 210 784
rmon collection history 212 show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote crosscheck
rmon collection rmon1 213 796
rmon event 211 show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote detail 785
router rip 899 show ethernet cfm md 782
rpl neighbor 550 show garp timer 568
rpl owner 550 show gvrp configuration 569
rspan destination 457 show history 96
rspan remote vlan 458 show hosts 828
rspan source 456 show interfaces brief 410
server 243 show interfaces counters 411
service-policy 639 show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group 595
set cos 636 show interfaces status 415
set ip dscp 637 show interfaces switchport 416
set phb 638 show interfaces transceiver 424
sflow owner 217 show interfaces transceiver-threshold 425
sflow polling instance 219 show ip access-group 378
sflow sampling instance 220 show ip access-list 378
show access-group 396 show ip arp inspection configuration 358
show access-list 396 show ip arp inspection interface 358
show access-list arp 395 show ip arp inspection log 359
show access-list tcam-utilization 112 show ip arp inspection statistics 359
show accounting 246 show ip arp inspection vlan 360
show arp 854 show ip dhcp 840
show auto-traffic-control 477 show ip dhcp dynamic-provision 833
show auto-traffic-control interface 478 show ip dhcp snooping 328
show banner 111 show ip dhcp snooping binding 329
show bridge-ext 567 show ip igmp authentication 675
show cable-diagnostics 427 show ip igmp filter 676
show calendar 171 show ip igmp profile 676
show class-map 639 show ip igmp query-drop 677
show cluster 180 show ip igmp snooping 661
show cluster candidates 180 show ip igmp snooping group 662
show cluster members 180 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 663
show collision-mac-address-table 496 show ip igmp snooping statistics 664
show discard 410 show ip igmp throttle interface 677
show dns 827 show ip interface 847
show dns cache 827 show ip multicast-data-drop 678
show dos-protection 365 show ip protocols rip 914
show dot1q-tunnel 585 show ip rip 914
show dot1x 274 show ip route 895
show efm oam counters interface 817 show ip route database 896
show efm oam event-log interface 817 show ip route summary 896
show efm oam remote-loopback interface 819 show ip source-guard 345
show efm oam status remote interface 820 show ip source-guard binding 345
show efm oam status interface 819 show ip ssh 260
show erps 557 show ip telnet 252
show ethernet cfm configuration 780 show ip tftp 136
show ethernet cfm errors 792 show ip traffic 848
show ethernet cfm fault-notify-generator 805 show ip traffic 897
show ethernet cfm linktrace-cache 800 show ipv6 access-group 384
show ethernet cfm ma 782 show ipv6 access-list 385
– 938 –
show ipv6 default-gateway 865 show mvr6 members 736

show ipv6 dhcp duid 836 show mvr6 profile 737
show ipv6 dhcp relay destination 840 show mvr6 statistics 738
show ipv6 dhcp snooping 337 show network-access 307
show ipv6 dhcp snooping binding 338 show network-access mac-address-table 308
show ipv6 dhcp snooping statistics 338 show network-access mac-filter 309
show ipv6 dhcp vlan 836 show nlm oper-status 205
show ipv6 interface 866 show ntp 165
show ipv6 mld filter 696 show policy-map 640
show ipv6 mld profile 696 show policy-map interface 641
show ipv6 mld query-drop 697 show port monitor 453
show ipv6 mld snooping group 688 show port security 293
show ipv6 mld snooping group source-list 688 show port-channel load-balance 443
show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter 689 show power inline status 448
show ipv6 mld throttle interface 697 show power mainpower 449
show ipv6 mld snooping 687 show power-save 429
show ipv6 mtu 868 show pppoe intermediate-agent info 285
show ipv6 nd raguard 881 show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics 286
show ipv6 nd snooping 889 show privilege 227
show ipv6 nd snooping binding 890 show process cpu 113
show ipv6 nd snooping prefix 890 show process cpu task 114
show ipv6 neighbors 881 show protocol-vlan protocol-group 595
show ipv6 source-guard 350 show public-key 261
show ipv6 source-guard binding 351 show qos map cos-dscp 619
show ipv6 traffic 868 show qos map dscp-mutation 619
show l2protocol-tunnel 590 show qos map phb-queue 620
show lacp 440 show qos map trust-mode 621
show line 147 show queue mode 613
show lldp config 760 show queue weight 613
show lldp info local-device 761 show radius-server 234
show lldp info remote-device 762 show reload 99
show lldp info statistics 764 show rmon alarms 214
show log 152 show rmon events 214
show logging 153 show rmon history 214
show logging sendmail 158 show rmon statistics 215
show loopback-detection 483 show rspan 460
show mac access-group 392 show running-config 115
show mac access-list 392 show sflow 221
show mac-address-table 497 show snmp 189
show mac-address-table aging-time 498 show snmp engine-id 200
show mac-address-table count 498 show snmp group 200
show mac-address-table hash-lookup-depth 499 show snmp notify-filter 205
show mac-vlan 600 show snmp user 201
show management 278 show snmp view 202
show memory 112 show snmp-server enable port-traps 194
show mvr 711 show sntp 161
show mvr associated-profile 712 show spanning-tree 527
show mvr interface 713 show spanning-tree mst configuration 529
show mvr members 714 show spanning-tree tc-prop 529
show mvr profile 716 show ssh 262
show mvr statistics 716 show startup-config 117
show mvr6 733 show subnet-vlan 598
show mvr6 associated-profile 734 show switch master button 183
show mvr6 interface 735 show switch stacking button 184
– 939 –
show system 117 spanning-tree cisco-prestandard 503

show tacacs-server 237 spanning-tree cost 515
show tech-support 119 spanning-tree edge-port 517
show time-range 175 spanning-tree forward-time 503
show traffic-segmentation 370 spanning-tree hello-time 504
show udld 490 spanning-tree link-type 517
show upgrade 135 spanning-tree loopback-detection 518
show users 119 spanning-tree loopback-detection action 519
show version 120 spanning-tree loopback-detection release 526
show vlan 578 spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode 519
show vlan-translation 592 spanning-tree loopback-detection trap 520
show voice vlan 606 spanning-tree max-age 505
show watchdog 121 spanning-tree mode 505
show web-auth 314 spanning-tree mst configuration 508
show web-auth interface 315 spanning-tree mst cost 521
show web-auth summary 315 spanning-tree mst port-priority 522
shutdown 407 spanning-tree pathcost method 507
silent-time 143 spanning-tree port-bpdu-flooding 522
snmp-server 187 spanning-tree port-priority 523
snmp-server community 187 spanning-tree priority 507
snmp-server contact 188 spanning-tree protocol-migration 526
snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm cc 789 spanning-tree root-guard 524
snmp-server enable traps ethernet cfm crosscheck 793 spanning-tree spanning-disabled 525
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-clear spanning-tree system-bpdu-flooding 508
473 spanning-tree tc-prop 509
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-alarm-fire spanning-tree tc-prop-stop 525
474 spanning-tree transmission-limit 510
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control-apply speed 144
474 speed-duplex 408
snmp-server enable port-traps atc broadcast-control- stopbits 144
release 475 subnet-vlan 597
snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-clear switch all renumber 181
475 switch master button 182
snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-alarm-fire switch stacking button 183
476 switchport acceptable-frame-types 572
snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control-apply switchport allowed vlan 573
476 switchport dot1q-tunnel mode 581
snmp-server enable port-traps atc multicast-control- switchport dot1q-tunnel service match cvid 582
release 477 switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid 584
snmp-server enable port-traps mac-notification 194 switchport forbidden vlan 566
snmp-server enable traps 190 switchport gvrp 566
snmp-server engine-id 195 switchport ingress-filtering 574
snmp-server group 196 switchport l2protocol-tunnel 589
snmp-server host 192 switchport mode 575
snmp-server location 189 switchport native vlan 576
snmp-server notify-filter 204 switchport packet-rate 463
snmp-server user 197 switchport priority default 612
snmp-server view 199 switchport vlan-translation 590
sntp client 159 switchport voice vlan 603
sntp poll 160 switchport voice vlan priority 604
sntp server 161 switchport voice vlan rule 605
spanning-tree 502 switchport voice vlan security 605
spanning-tree bpdu-filter 514 tacacs-server host 235
spanning-tree bpdu-guard 514 tacacs-server key 235
– 940 –
tacacs-server port 236 udld recovery 487

tacacs-server retransmit 236 udld recovery-interval 487
tacacs-server timeout 237 upgrade opcode auto 132
terminal 146 upgrade opcode path 133
test cable-diagnostics 426 upgrade opcode reload 134
timeout login response 145 username 225
time-range 172 version 551
timers basic 906 version 907
traceroute 849 vlan 570
traceroute6 874 vlan database 569
traffic-segmentation 366 vlan-trunking 576
traffic-segmentation session 367 voice vlan 601
traffic-segmentation uplink/downlink 368 voice vlan aging 602
traffic-segmentation uplink-to-uplink 369 voice vlan mac-address 602
transceiver-monitor 418 watchdog software 121
transceiver-threshold current 419 web-auth 313
transceiver-threshold rx-power 420 web-auth login-attempts 311
transceiver-threshold temperature 421 web-auth quiet-period 311
transceiver-threshold tx-power 422 web-auth re-authenticate (IP) 314
transceiver-threshold voltage 423 web-auth re-authenticate (Port) 313
transceiver-threshold-auto 418 web-auth session-timeout 312
udld aggressive 488 web-auth system-auth-control 312
udld detection-interval 485 whichboot 131
udld message-interval 486 wtr-timer 552
udld port 489
– 941 –
– 942 –
Index
Numerics aging time, displaying 498

aging time, setting 493
802.1Q tunnel 579
administrative users, displaying 119
access 581
ARP
CVID to SVID map 582
proxy 853
ethernet type 584
statistics 897
interface configuration 581–584
ARP ACL 353
mode selection 581
ARP configuration 851
status, configuring 580
ARP inspection 351
TPID 584
ACL filter 353
uplink 581
additional validation criteria 355
802.1X
authenticator, configuring 265–270 ARP ACL 393
enabling globally 352
global settings 263–264
enabling per VLAN 356
port authentication 262, 264
trusted ports 357
port authentication accounting 244
ARP statistics 848
supplicant, configuring 271–274
ATC 166, 464, 882
control response 469
A functional limitations 467
AAA limiting traffic rates 466
accounting 802.1X port settings 244 shutting down a port 467
accounting exec command privileges 240, 244 thresholds 470, 471
accounting exec settings 245 timers 467, 468
accounting summary 246 usage 466
accounting update 241 authentication
accounting, configuring 238 MAC address authentication 295, 304
authorization & accounting 238 MAC, configuring ports 295
authorization exec settings 242 network access 295, 304
authorization method 242 public key 255
authorization settings 242 web 312
authorization summary 246 web authentication for ports, configuring 313
RADIUS group settings 243 web authentication port information, displaying 315
TACACS+ group settings 243 web authentication, re-authenticating address 314
acceptable frame type 572 web authentication, re-authenticating ports 313
Access Control List See ACL web, configuring 312
ACL 371 Automatic Traffic Control See ATC
ARP 393
binding to a port 373, 377 B
IPv4 Extended 371, 375
IPv4 Standard 371, 374 BOOTP 844
IPv6 Extended 379, 382 BPDU
filter 514
IPv6 Standard 379, 381
MAC 385 flooding when STA disabled on VLAN 522
time range 172 flooding when STA globally disabled 508
address table 493 ignoring superior BPDUs 524
aging time 493 selecting protocol based on message format 526
– 943 –
Index
shut down port on receipt 514 CoS 618

bridge extension capabilities, displaying 567 configuring 609
broadcast storm, threshold 463 default mapping to internal values 615
enabling 618
layer 3/4 priorities 614
C priorities, mapping to internal values 614
cable diagnostics 426 queue mapping 617
CDP queue mode 610
discard 403 queue weights, assigning 611
CFM CoS/CFI to PHB/drop precedence 614
continuity check errors 791, 792 CPU
continuity check messages 541, 767, 787, 788 status 113
cross-check errors 789, 793, 795 tasks, showing 114
cross-check message 767, 793, 795, 796 utilization, setting trap 206
cross-check start delay 793 utilization, showing 113
delay measure 806 cross-check errors, CFM 789, 793, 795
domain service access point 774 cross-check message, CFM 767, 793, 795, 796
fault isolation 767, 799 cross-check start delay, CFM 793
fault notification 767, 802, 803, 804 CVLAN to SPVLAN map 582
fault notification generator 803, 805
fault verification 767
link trace cache 797, 798, 800 D
link trace message 767, 796, 797, 798 Daylight Savings Time See summer time
loop back messages 767, 801 default IPv4 gateway, configuration 846
maintenance association 767, 776, 782 default IPv6 gateway, configuration 856
maintenance domain 767, 773, 782 default priority, ingress port 612
maintenance end point 774, 778, 783 delay measure, CFM 806
maintenance intermediate point 773, 774, 776, 783 DHCP 844
maintenance level 773 class identifier 831
maintenance point 767, 783 client 829, 844
MEP archive 790 client identifier 831
MEP direction 778 dynamic configuration 59
remote maintenance end point 784, 785, 790, 794 relay 837
service instance 776 relay service, enabling 838
SNMP traps 789, 793 DHCP client identifier, setting 70
class map DHCP snooping
description 625 subtype field 320
DiffServ 624 DHCPv4 snooping 316
CLI circuit ID, setting 325
command modes 84 enabling 317
showing commands 82 global configuration 317
clustering switches, management access 176 information option 319, 321
command line interface See CLI information option policy 322
committed burst size, QoS policy 630, 631, 634 information option, enabling 319, 321
committed information rate, QoS policy 630, 631, 634 information option, remote ID 319
community string 63, 187 policy selection 322
configuration file, DHCP download reference 71 remote ID 321
configuration files, restoring defaults 124 specifying trusted interfaces 326
configuration settings sub-length field 320
restoring 66, 124, 126 sub-option format 320
saving 66, 124, 126 sub-type and sub-length, disabling 320
configuration settings, automatic installation 71 subtype field 320
console port, required connections 50 verifying MAC addresses 323
continuity check errors, CFM 791, 792 VLAN configuration 324
continuity check messages, CFM 541, 767, 787, 788 DHCPv6
– 944 –
Index
relay service, address 839, 840 automatically 132

relay service, enabling 839 using FTP or TFTP 126
DHCPv6 snooping 329 drop precedence
enabling 330 CoS priority mapping 614
global configuration 330 DSCP ingress map 616
remote id policy, option 37 333 DSA encryption 259
remote ID, option 37 332 DSCP 618
specifying trusted interfaces 335 enabling 618
VLAN configuration 334 ingress map, drop precedence 616
DiffServ 623 mapping to internal values 616
binding policy to interface 639 DSCP to PHB/drop precedence 616
class map 624, 628 dynamic addresses
class map, description 625 clearing 496
classifying QoS traffic 626 displaying 497
color aware, srTCM 631 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP
color aware, trTCM 634 dynamic QoS assignment 298
color blind, srTCM 631 dynamic VLAN assignment 299
color blind, trTCM 634
committed burst size 630, 631, 634
committed information rate 630, 631, 634 E
configuring 623 edge port, STA 517
conforming traffic, configuring response 630, 631, encryption
634 DSA 259
description 625 RSA 259
excess burst size 631 engine ID 195
metering, configuring 630 ERPS
peak burst size 634 configuration guidelines 532
peak information rate 634 control VLAN 534
policy map 628 domain configuration 534
policy map, description 625 domain, enabling 535
QoS policy 628 global configuration 533
service policy 639 guard timer 536
setting CoS for matching packets 636 hold-off timer 537
setting IP DSCP for matching packets 637 major domain 537
setting PHB for matching packets 638 MEG level 538
single-rate, three-color meter 631 node identifier 540
srTCM metering 631 non-compliant device protection 540
traffic between CIR and BE, configuring response 631 non-ERPS device protection 540
traffic between CIR and PIR, configuring response 634 propagate topology change 545
trTCM metering 634 ring configuration 534
two-rate, three-color meter 634 ring port, east interface 549
violating traffic, configuring response 630, 631, 634 ring port, west interface 549
DNS ring, enabling 535
default domain name 823 RPL owner 550
displaying the cache 827 secondary ring 537
domain name list 824, 825 status, displaying 557
enabling lookup 822 wait-to-restore expire timer 560
name server list 824 wait-to-restore timer 552
static entries, IPv4 824 WTR expire 560
static entries, IPv6 825 WTR timer 552
Domain Name Service See DNS Ethernet Ring Protection Switching See ERPS
domain service access point, CFM 774 event logging 148
DoS protection 360 excess burst size, QoS policy 634
downloading software 126 exec command privileges, accounting 240, 244
exec settings
– 945 –
Index
accounting 245 filtering, configuring profile 669, 670

authorization 242 filtering, creating profile 669
filtering, group range 670
filtering, interface settings 672–673
F groups, displaying 662
fault isolation, CFM 767, 799 Layer 2 643
fault notification generator, CFM 803, 805 query 647
fault notification, CFM 767, 802, 803, 804 query, enabling 647
fault verification, CFM 767 RADIUS authentication 670
FIB, description 895 snooping 643
firmware snooping & query, parameters 643
displaying version 120 snooping, configuring 643
upgrading 126 snooping, enabling 645
upgrading automatically 132 snooping, immediate leave 654
upgrading with FTP or TFP 132 IGMP snooping
version, displaying 120 configuring 643
firmware upgrade, for stack 55 enabling per interface 645
forwarding information base See FIB forwarding entries 662
immediate leave, status 654
interface attached to multicast router 663, 666
G last member query count 655
gateway, IPv4 default 846 last member query interval 655
gateway, IPv6 default 856 proxy query address 657
general security measures 289 proxy query interval 658
GNU license 921 proxy query response interval 659
GVRP proxy reporting 646
enabling 564 querier timeout 648
global setting 564 querier, enabling 647
interface configuration 566 router port expire time 648
static host interface 660
H static multicast routing 666
static port assignment 660
hardware version, displaying 120
static router interface 666
HTTP, web server 248
static router port, configuring 666
HTTPS 249
statistics, displaying 664
configuring 248, 249
TCN flood 648
replacing SSL certificate 126
unregistered data flooding 650
secure-site certificate 126
version exclusive 652
HTTPS, secure server 249
version for interface, setting 652
version, setting 652
I with proxy reporting 646
IEEE 802.1D 505 immediate leave, IGMP snooping 654
IEEE 802.1s 505 immediate leave, MLD snooping 684
IEEE 802.1w 505 importing user public keys 126, 129
IEEE 802.1X 262, 264 ingress filtering 574
IGMP IP address, setting 843
filter profiles, binding to interface 672 IP filter, for management access 277
filter profiles, configuration 669 IP routing 893
filter, interface configuration 672–673 unicast protocols 893
filter, parameters 668–673 IP source guard
filtering & throttling 667 configuring static entries 339
filtering & throttling, enabling 668 setting filter criteria 341
filtering & throttling, interface configuration 670–672 setting maximum bindings 343
filtering & throttling, status 668 IP statistics 848, 897
– 946 –
Index
IPv4 address last member query interval, IGMP snooping 655

BOOTP/DHCP 833, 844 layer 2, protocol tunnel 589
dynamic configuration 59 license information, GNU 921
manual configuration 56 Link Layer Discovery Protocol See LLDP
setting 56, 844 link trace cache, CFM 797, 798, 800
IPv6 link trace message, CFM 767, 796, 797, 798
displaying neighbors 881 link type, STA 517
duplicate address detection 876 LLDP 741
enabling 863 device statistics details, displaying 764
hop-limit, advertisements 876 device statistics, displaying 764
MTU 864 display device information 762
neighbor reachable time 880 displaying remote information 762
neighbor solicitation interval 878 interface attributes, configuring 747–759
router advertisements, blocking 879 local device information, displaying 761
IPv6 address message attributes 741
dynamic configuration (global unicast) 858 message statistics 764
dynamic configuration (link-local) 60, 863 remote information, displaying 762
EUI format 860 remote port information, displaying 762
EUI-64 setting 860 timing attributes, configuring 743–746
explicit configuration 863 TLV, 802.1 750–751
global unicast 857 TLV, 802.3 752–753
link-local 859 TLV, basic 747–749
manual configuration (global unicast) 57, 857 TLV, management address 747
manual configuration (link-local) 57, 862 TLV, port description 748
setting 56, 857 TLV, system capabilities 748
IPv6 source guard TLV, system description 749
configuring static entries 346 TLV, system name 749
setting maximum bindings 349 LLDP-MED 741
notification, status 756
TLV 741
J TLV, extended PoE 756
jumbo frame 122 TLV, inventory 757
TLV, location 754, 757
TLV, MED capabilities 758
K TLV, network policy 758
key TLV, PoE 756
private 253 local engine ID 195
public 253 logging
user public, importing 126, 129 messages, displaying 152
key pair syslog traps 151
host 253 to syslog servers 150
host, generating 259 logon authentication 223
encryption keys 232, 235
L RADIUS client 230
RADIUS server 230
LACP
sequence 228, 229
configuration 431
settings 229
group attributes, configuring 438
TACACS+ client 234
group members, configuring 435
TACACS+ server 234
local parameters 440
logon banner, configuring 102
partner parameters 440
loop back messages, CFM 767, 801
protocol message statistics 440
loopback detection
protocol parameters 431
non-STA 479
timeout, for LACPDU 439
STA 518
last member query count, IGMP snooping 655
– 947 –
Index
M multicast filtering 643

enabling IGMP snooping 645
MAC address authentication 295
enabling IGMP snooping per interface 645
ports, configuring 295, 304
enabling MLD snooping 680
reauthentication 298
router configuration 666
MAC address, mirroring 451
multicast groups 662
maintenance association, CFM 767, 776, 782
static 660, 662
maintenance domain, CFM 767, 773, 782
Multicast Listener Discovery See MLD snooping
maintenance end point, CFM 774, 778, 783
multicast router discovery 656
maintenance intermediate point, CFM 773, 774, 776, 783
multicast router port, displaying 663
maintenance level, CFM 773
multicast services
maintenance point, CFM 767, 783
configuring 660
management access, filtering per address 277
displaying 662
management access, IP filter 277
multicast static router port 666
matching class settings, classifying QoS traffic 626
configuring 666
media-type 406
configuring for MLD snooping 685
memory
status 112 multicast storm, threshold 463
utilization, showing 112 multicast, filtering and throttling 668, 690
MVR
memory utilization, setting trap 206
assigning static multicast groups 702, 709
MEP archive, CFM 790
mirror port
configuring 451 interface status, configuring 707–709
interface status, displaying 711
configuring local traffic 451
IP for control packets sent upstream 706
configuring remote traffic 454
proxy query interval 703
MLD
filter profiles, configuration 691 proxy switching 703
receiver groups, displaying 714
filtering & throttling 689
robust value for proxy switching 704
filtering & throttling, configuring profile 691, 692
setting interface type 708
filtering & throttling, creating profile 691
setting multicast domain 700
filtering & throttling, enabling 690
setting multicast groups 699, 702
filtering & throttling, interface configuration 693–694
setting multicast priority 701, 723
filtering & throttling, status 690
source port mode 705
MLD snooping 679
specifying a domain 700
configuring 679
specifying a VLAN 699, 706
enabling 680
specifying priority 701, 723
immediate leave 684
static binding 702, 709
immediate leave, status 684
static binding, group to port 709
multicast static router port 685
statistics, displaying 716
querier 680
using immediate leave 707
querier, enabling 680
MVR6
query interval 681
assigning static multicast groups 724, 731
query, maximum response time 681
robustness value 682
interface status, configuring 729–731
static port assignment 686
interface status, displaying 735
static router port 685
IP for control packets sent upstream 728
unknown multicast, handling 683
proxy switching 725
version 684
receiver groups, displaying 736
MSTP 505
robust value for proxy switching 727
global settings, configuring 501
setting interface type 730
global settings, displaying 527
setting multicast domain 723
interface settings, configuring 502, 514–525
setting multicast groups 724
interface settings, displaying 527
specifying a domain 723
path cost 521
specifying a VLAN 729
MTU for IPv6 864
– 948 –
Index
static binding 724, 731 per-hop behavior, DSCP ingress map 616
static binding, group to port 731 policy map
statistics, displaying 738 description 625
using immediate leave 729 DiffServ 628
port authentication 262, 264
port power
N displaying status 448
ND snooping inline 445
automatic validation 885–886 inline status 448
enabling 884 maximum allocation 446
max bindings 888 priority 447
trusted interface 888 showing main power 449
Neighbor Discovery Snooping See ND snooping port priority
network access configuring 609
authentication 295 default ingress 612
dynamic QoS assignment 298 STA 523
dynamic VLAN assignment 299 port security, configuring 290
MAC address filter 297 port, statistics 411
port configuration 304 ports
reauthentication 298 autonegotiation 407
secure MAC information 308, 309 broadcast storm threshold 463
NTP capabilities 402
authentication keys, specifying 163 configuring 399
client, enabling 164 discard CDP/PVST 403
specifying servers 164 duplex mode 408
NTP, setting the system clock 162–165 flow control 404
forced selection of media type 406
forced selection on combo ports 406
O mirroring 451
OAM mirroring local traffic 451
active mode 813 mirroring remote traffic 454
displaying settings and status 817–820 multicast storm threshold 463
enabling on switch ports 810 speed 408
errored frame link events 811–812 statistics 411
event log, displaying 817 unknown unicast storm threshold 463
message statistics, displaying 817 power budgets
mode selection 813 port 446
passive mode 813 port priority 447
remote device information, displaying 820 power savings
remote loop back test 816 configuring 428
setting to active mode 813 enabling per port 428
setting to passive mode 813 PPPoE 279–286
operation cde, automatic installation 67 priority, default port ingress 612
Operations, Administration and Maintenance See OAM private key 253
privilege level, defining per command 227
P problems, troubleshooting 919
protocol migration 526
password, line 141
protocol tunnel, layer 2 589
passwords 51, 224
protocol VLANs 592
administrator setting 225
path cost 515
interface configuration 594
method 507
system configuration 593
STA 507, 515
proxy ARP 853
peak burst size, QoS policy 634
proxy query address, IGMP snooping 657
peak information rate, QoS policy 634
– 949 –
Index
proxy query interval, IGMP snooping 658 global settings 899–906

proxy query response interval, IGMP snooping 659 interface protocol settings 903–912
proxy reporting, IGMP snooping 646 interface, enabling 903
public key 253 neighbor router 902
PVID, port native VLAN 576 passively monitoring updates 904
PVST poison reverse 912
discard 403 process parameters, displaying 914
protocol packets, receiving 910
protocol packets, sending 912
Q receive version 909
QoS 623 redistributing external routing information 904
configuration guidelines 624 routes, clearing 913
configuring 623 routes, displaying 914
CoS/CFI to PHB/drop precedence 614 routing table, clearing 913
DSCP to PHB/drop precedence 616 send version 911
dynamic assignment 298 specifying interfaces 903
matching class settings 626 split horizon 912
PHB to queue 617 timers 906
selecting DSCP, CoS 618 version 907
QoS policy RMON 209
committed burst size 630, 631, 634 alarm, displaying settings 214
excess burst size 631 alarm, setting thresholds 210
peak burst size 634 commands 209
srTCM 631 event settings, displaying 214
srTCM police meter 631 response to alarm setting 211
trTCM 634 statistics history, collection 212
trTCM police meter 634 statistics history, displaying 214
QoS policy, committed information rate 630, 631, 634 statistics, collection 213
QoS policy, peak information rate 634 statistics, displaying 215
queue weight, assigning to CoS 611 Routing Information Protocol See RIP
routing nformation base, description 895
routing table, displaying 895
R RSA encryption 259
RADIUS RSTP 505
logon authentication 230 global settings, configuring 505
settings 230 global settings, displaying 527
rate limit interface settings, configuring 514–525
port 462 interface settings, displaying 527
setting 461 running configuration files, displaying 115
remote engine ID 195
remote logging 151
remote maintenance end point, CFM 784, 785, 790, 794 S
Remote Monitoring See RMON secure shell 253
rename, DiffServ 627 configuration 253
restarting the system 94, 98 security, general measures 289
at scheduled times 94 serial port, configuring 137
showing restart time 99 service instance, CFM 776
RIP 898 sFlow
authentication key 909 destination for traffic 217
authentication mode 908 destination, IPv6 218
clearing routes 913 destination, UDP port 218
configuration settings, displaying 914 flow configuration 217–221
configuring 899–914 initiating 220
default external route 899 maximum datagram size 218
default metric 900 owner 217
– 950 –
Index
polling period 219 loopback detection 518

samping period 220 MSTP interface settings, configuring 510–513
timeout 217 MSTP path cost 521
version 218 path cost 507, 515
SMTP path cost method 507
event handling 155 port priority 523
sending log events 155 port/trunk loopback detection 518
SNMP 185 protocol migration 526
community string 187 transmission limit 510
enabling traps 190 stack
enabling traps, mac-address changes 194 backup unit 54
filtering IP addresses 277 basic concepts 53
global settings, configuring 187–199 configuring 181
mac address traps 190, 194 firmware upgrade 55
trap manager 192 master unit 53
traps, CFM 789, 793 master unit, setting 182
SNMPv3 195–197 renumbering 181
engine ID 195 stacking ports, enabling 183
engine identifier, local 195 topology change 54
engine identifier, remote 195 unit failure 54
groups 196 startup files
local users, configuring 197 creating 126
remote users, configuring 197 displaying 117, 131
user configuration 197 setting 125
views 199 static addresses, setting 495
SNTP static routes, configuring 894
setting the system clock 159–161 statistics
specifying servers 161 ARP 848, 897
software ICMP 848, 897
displaying version 120 IP 848, 897
downloading 126 TCP 848, 897
version, displaying 120 UDP 848, 897
srTCM statistics, port 411
police meter 631 STP 505
QoS policy 631 Also see STA
SSH 253 summary, accounting 246
authentication retries 256 summer time, setting 166–168
configuring 253 switch clustering, for management 175
downloading public keys for clients 126, 129 switch settings
generating host key pair 259 restoring 124
server, configuring 256 saving 124
timeout 257 system clock
STA 501 setting 158
BPDU filter 514 setting manually 171
BPDU flooding 522 setting the time zone 170
BPDU shutdown 514 setting with NTP 162–165
cisco-prestandard, setting compatibility 503 setting with SNTP 159–161
detecting loopbacks 518 summer time 166–168
edge port 517 system clock, setting 73
global settings, configuring 502–510 system logs 150
global settings, displaying 527 system software, downloading from server 126
interface settings, configuring 514–525
interface settings, displaying 527
link type 517 T
TACACS+
– 951 –
Index
logon authentication 234 user password 224, 225

settings 234
TCN
flood 648 V
general query solicitation 650 VLAN trunking 576
Telnet VLANs 563–606
configuring 250 802.1Q tunnel mode 581
server, enabling 252 acceptable frame type 572
terminal, configuration settings 146 adding static members 573
TFTP basic information, displaying 567
retry count 135 creating 570
timeout 136 displaying port members 578
time range, ACL 172 dynamic assignment 299
time zone, setting 170 egress mode 575
time, setting 158 ingress filtering 574
TPID 584 interface configuration 572–576
traffic segmentation 366 IP subnet-based 596
assigning ports 368 MAC-based 598
enabling 366 mirroring 451
sessions, assigning ports 368 port members, displaying 578
sessions, creating 367 protocol 592
transceiver thresholds protocol, configuring 593, 594
displaying 425 protocol, configuring groups 593
trap manager 64, 192 protocol, interface configuration 594
troubleshooting 919 protocol, system configuration 593
trTCM PVID 576
police meter 634 tag swapping 590
QoS policy 634 tunneling unknown groups 576
trunk voice 600
configuration 431 voice VLANs 600
LACP 431, 435 detecting VoIP devices 601
load balancing 432 enabling for ports 603–604
static 434 identifying client devices 602
tunneling unknown VLANs, VLAN trunking 576 VoIP traffic 600
ports, configuring 603–604
telephony OUI, configuring 602
U voice VLAN, configuring 600
UDLD VoIP, detecting devices 605
configuration 485
interface settings 489
protocol intervals 485–487 W
unicast routing 893 web authentication 312
unidirectional link detection 485 address, re-authenticating 314
unknown unicast storm, threshold 463 configuring 312
unregistered data flooding, IGMP snooping 650 port information, displaying 315
upgrading software 126, 132 ports, configuring 313
user account 224, 225 ports, re-authenticating 313
– 952 –
E092020-CS-R03
150200000989A

ECS4510-Series CLI-R03 0904

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ECS4510-Series CLI-R03 0904

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ECS4510-Series CLI-R03 0904

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ECS4510-28T/P/F

ECS4510-28F-DC CLI Reference Guide

ECS4510-28T Stackable GE Switch

ECS4510-28F-DC Stackable GE Switch

ECS4510-28P Stackable GE PoE Switch

ECS4510-28F Stackable GE Fiber Switch

ECS4510-52T Stackable GE Switch

ECS4510-52P Stackable GE PoE Switch

The guide includes these sections:

◆ Section I “Getting Started” — Includes information on initial configuration.

◆ Section II “Command Line Interface” — Includes all management options

◆ Section III “Appendices” — Includes information on troubleshooting switch

Web Management Guide

Quick Start Guide

Note: Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features

September 2020 Revision

◆ Corrected software release version.

February 2019 Revision

◆ Added documentation notice.

October 2014 Revision

How to Use This Guide 3

Section I Getting Started 47

1 Initial Switch Configuration 49

Downloading Operation Code from a File Server 67

Section II Command Line Interface 77

2 Using the Command Line Interface 79

4 System Management Commands 101

show watchdog 121

calendar set 171

5 SNMP Commands 185

SNMPv3 Commands 195

6 Remote Monitoring Commands 209

7 Flow Sampling Commands 217

8 Authentication Commands 223

enable password 224

Web Server 247

dot1x timeout re-authperiod 269

9 General Security Measures 289

network-access aging 296

ip dhcp snooping information option tr101 board-id 322

ipv6 source-guard max-binding 349

10 Access Control Lists 371

IPv4 ACLs 371

11 Interface Commands 399

12 Link Aggregation Commands 431

Manual Configuration Commands 432

13 Power over Ethernet Commands 445

14 Port Mirroring Commands 451

15 Congestion Control Commands 461

switchport packet-rate 463

16 Loopback Detection Commands 479

17 UniDirectional Link Detection Commands 485

udld recovery 487

18 Address Table Commands 493

19 Spanning Tree Commands 501

spanning-tree bpdu-filter 514

20 ERPS Commands 531

21 VLAN Commands 563

show vlan 578